JP7737738B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines are known in which the winning probability and other settings can be set to one of several states by the gaming parlor manager through setting change operations (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 6-91049

However, there is a demand for improved gaming machines with setting information.

The present invention was made in light of these circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine with a new design.

Effective solutions for achieving the above-mentioned objectives are presented below. Where necessary, explanations of their operation will be provided. For ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations will also be shown in the embodiments of the invention, but are not intended to be limiting.

In the invention according to claim 1,
In a gaming machine in which a game is played by a lottery that can be executed by hitting a gaming ball,
a first game area into which game balls are shot; and a second game area into which game balls are shot, the second game area being provided on the opposite side of the first game area in the left-right direction when the game panel is viewed from the front;
a front component attached from the front to the front surface of the gaming panel on which the first gaming area and the second gaming area are formed; and a display device capable of displaying a display effect according to the result of the lottery;
Equipped with
The front component has a partition wall portion that prevents the entry of game balls and a warp inlet that can receive game balls that flow down on the left side when viewed from the front, and a distribution portion that can roll game balls in front of the display device and at a position behind the front surface of the game panel on the lower side when viewed from the front,
The distribution section can only receive game balls that have been shot into the second game area, and a fall prevention wall that prevents game balls from falling and a fall-allowing section that does not have the fall prevention wall and allows game balls to fall are provided on the front side of the distribution section so that the game balls received by the distribution section can be received in either a specific receiving port or a losing port provided on the player side,
When a game ball shot into the second game area is received by the distribution unit, the received game ball is made to pass through a special cylindrical passage provided upstream of the distribution unit, and the game ball passing through the special cylindrical passage is made visible from the front,
The reception of the game ball into the specific receiving port can give the player an advantageous state.
It is characterized by:

The invention of claim 1 makes it possible to provide a gaming machine with a new form.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a left side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. This is a front view of a pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine from the front right when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame open from the main frame and the main frame open from the outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from the front. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from behind. This is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2, viewed from above and front, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 1A, viewed from below and front. FIG. 2 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. 10 is a left side view of the door frame. FIG. 10 is a right side view of the door frame. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front left. This is a perspective view of the door frame from behind. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, broken down into its main components, viewed from the rear. FIG. 1A is a perspective view of a door frame base unit of a door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit from the back. (a) is an exploded oblique view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded oblique view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and anti-tamper member removed. (a) is a perspective view of the fall cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the fall cover unit as seen from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view of the fall cover unit with the lid member removed. 1A is an exploded perspective view of a handle unit in a door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. This is an oblique view of the tray unit of the door frame. This is a perspective view of the plate unit from behind. This is an exploded oblique view of the tray unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the tray unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. This is an oblique view of the plate base unit in the plate unit from the front. This is an oblique view of the plate base unit in the plate unit from behind. This is an exploded oblique view of the dish base unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the dish base unit, disassembled into its main components, viewed from the rear. This is an oblique view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit from the front. This is an oblique view of the plate decoration unit from behind. This is an exploded oblique view of the plate decoration unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the plate decoration unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. This is a plan view of the performance operation unit in the dish unit, viewed from the direction in which the performance operation button unit moves forward and backward. (a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from behind. 1A is a perspective view of the performance operation ring of the performance operation unit as seen from the top front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the performance operation ring as seen from the bottom front. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring when viewed from the top front, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring when viewed from the bottom front. (a) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the performance operation unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as seen from the back. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the front right. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the front left. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation button unit of the performance operation unit, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation button unit, viewed from the bottom front. 1A is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation button unit when the pressing operation portion is in the lowered position, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation button unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the performance operation ring and the rotation drive unit in a left side view of the performance operation unit. FIG. This is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the performance operation ring and the performance operation ring decorative board in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation section. (a) is a front view of the dish unit in its normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a front view of the dish unit when the central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part is pressed. 1A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit as seen from behind. 1A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit as seen from behind. (a) is an oblique view of the door frame top unit in the door frame seen from the front, (b) is an oblique view of the door frame top unit seen from the back, and (c) is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown with the bottom cover removed. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame top unit from above and front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame top unit from the front bottom. FIG. 1 is a front view of the door frame shown with each decorative substrate. FIG. 2 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view of the main body frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the main body frame from the front left. This is an oblique view of the main body frame as seen from behind. This is an exploded oblique view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. (a) is an enlarged oblique view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged oblique view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame when the door frame is opened relative to the main body frame. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed relative to the main body frame. 1A is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the ball launcher as seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit as seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as seen from the back. FIG. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, with the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the rear, with the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components. This is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-to-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-to-back direction when the ball removal movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line A-A in (a). An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the door frame fall cover unit and the lower full ball path unit. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. 1A is a perspective view of a board unit of a main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below and behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, seen from the front, disassembled into its main components. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. This is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut in the center in the left-right direction. 1A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. 1A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. This is an enlarged view showing the upper part of the main body frame in a perspective view seen from behind. 1A is a perspective view of the spherical tank with tank rails and the like assembled thereto, as seen from above the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of FIG. 1A from below the front. 101(a) is an exploded perspective view seen from the front. FIG. An explanatory diagram showing the area where game balls that overflow from the ball tank at the top of the main body frame circulate. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls that have overflowed from the ball tank at the top of the main body frame. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls into the bypass passage at the top of the main body frame. FIG. 10 is an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame as seen from behind the hinge side, showing the tank rail and its surroundings. This is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine, with the center gimmicks and other parts made opaque. This is an oblique view of the game board of Figure 107 as seen from the front right. FIG. 108 is an oblique view of the game board of FIG. 107 as seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of the game board from behind. FIG. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. This is a front view of the game board with the center gimmick and other features made transparent. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in Figure 107. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in Figure 107. This is a front view of the game board, showing the front unit cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle pins. FIG. 2A is a perspective view of the front components and game panel of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 2B is a perspective view of the front components and game panel as seen from the back. FIG. 1A is a perspective view of the front unit of the gaming board as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the front unit of the gaming board as seen from the back. An explanatory diagram showing the flow path of the game ball on the right side of the front unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls circulating through a first guide passage in a guide passage group, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls circulating through a second guide passage in a guide passage group. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls received in the special device winning port, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the third distribution device in (a) from above, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the second distribution device in (a). An explanatory diagram showing the timing of the operation of the special prize entry port and the first and second distribution devices according to the type of "small win". 1(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the attacker unit, and is a cross-sectional view taken along line E-E in FIG. 118(a) to 118(d) are explanatory diagrams showing an embodiment of a guide passage group different from that shown in FIG. 117. 10(e) and 10(f) are explanatory diagrams showing further different embodiments of the guide passage groups. (a) is a front view of the out ball detection unit in the rear unit, (b) is a right side view of the out ball detection unit, (c) is a rear view of the out ball detection unit, (d) is an oblique view of the out ball detection unit from the front, (e) is an oblique view of the out ball detection unit from the rear, (f) is an oblique view of the out ball detection unit from a position near the lower right front, and (g) is an oblique view of the out ball detection unit from the lower right rear. (a) is an exploded oblique view of the out ball detection unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded oblique view of the out ball detection unit as seen from the back. 1A is a perspective view showing the relationship between the game panel and the out ball detection unit, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view showing the out ball detection unit in contact with the game panel. This is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the right outlet sensor assembled to the game board, cut vertically at the center, and viewed from the right side. This is an oblique view showing the area around the outlet from the front when assembled to the game board. (a) is a perspective view of the light guide plate performance unit of the rear unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the light guide plate performance unit as seen from the back. This is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the picture substrate in the light guide plate performance unit from the front. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a first pattern on the light guide plate is illuminated, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a second pattern on the light guide plate is illuminated. This is a front view of the game board showing the second image illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the rear unit's light guide plate performance unit. This is a front view of the game board showing the first image illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate performance unit of the rear unit. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 1A is an enlarged view of a portion of the area where SMD-type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and FIG. 1B is a view of this enlarged view from the right side of the main control board. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram of the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate on which SMD-type electronic components that replace lead-type electronic components are aggregated in a predetermined area, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing the surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of a substrate that has been miniaturized by aggregating SMD-type electronic components that replace lead-type electronic components. An enlarged view of Figure 138(a) shows the back side (solder side) of the main control board. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the main control board box of the main control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process when the main control side power is turned on. This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing when the main control side power is turned on in Figure 142. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error display process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting value confirmation display process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the dispensing control unit is powered on. This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the dispensing control unit in Figure 148. Following Figure 149, this is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing when the dispensing control unit is powered on. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a dispensing control unit timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power-on process; 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric gimmick control process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a preliminary determination process executed by a main control MPU according to the embodiment; A flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process executed by the main control MPU in the same embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a hit determination process executed by a main control MPU in the embodiment. (A) is a hit determination table used in the lottery process for big hits, (B) is a big hit pattern determination table used in the lottery process for the type of big hit, and (C) is a small hit pattern determination table used in the lottery process for the type of small hit. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. A flowchart showing the steps of the first variation pattern setting process executed by the main control MPU in the same embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern variation processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stopping process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control processing executed by the main control MPU in the same embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit control processing executed by the main control MPU in the same embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol and normal electric device control processing executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small win start processing executed by the main control MPU in the same embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing during a small win executed by the main control MPU in the same embodiment. 10 is an example of an error notification mode. FIG. 4 is a timing diagram showing the timing of volume adjustment and sound output suppression in a predetermined frequency band. FIG. 4 is a timing diagram showing the timing of volume adjustment and sound output suppression in a predetermined frequency band. FIG. 4 is a timing diagram showing the timing of volume adjustment and sound output suppression in a predetermined frequency band. This is a table showing the winning probability etc. according to the setting values of the gaming machine. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a procedure for changing a setting value. This is a fluctuation pattern table used to determine a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a right detection sensor is provided in the first guide passage; This is a specific example of a warning effect using the right detection sensor. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which detection sensors are provided in a first guide passage and a second guide passage; FIG. This is a specific example of a warning effect using the right detection sensor and the left detection sensor. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which ball jamming relief holes are provided in the first guide passage and the second guide passage. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which ball jam relief holes are provided in the first guide passage and the second guide passage. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which second outlets are provided near the inlets of the first guide passage and the second guide passage; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second outlet is provided near the outlet inside the first guide passage. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution state of a calculation when an abnormality occurs. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution state of a calculation when an abnormality occurs. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second outlet and a third outlet are provided in addition to the outlet. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution state of calculations when a second outlet and a third outlet are provided in addition to the outlet. 10 is a luminous color pattern table in which luminous color patterns of a light guide plate are set. An explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which multiple decorative bodies are provided around the display area of the performance display device. This is a specific example of a lighting effect using a light guide plate and multiple decorative elements. This is an image displayed on the light guide plate and the performance display device when the imitation performance is being performed. This is a specific example of a performance using a light guide plate and a performance display device when performing an imitation performance. 10 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a peripheral control board. 10 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a peripheral control board. 10 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a peripheral control board. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a setting information determination process executed by the main control MPU. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a setting value hold indication effect. An explanatory diagram showing an example of image data that combines the display mode of a hold notice effect and the display mode of a setting value hold suggestion effect. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a setting value continuous suggestion effect. This is a table showing the winning probability etc. according to the setting values of the gaming machine. This is a table showing the winning probability etc. according to the setting values of the gaming machine. 10 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity during a change of a setting value. 10 is a time chart showing the fraudulent activity monitoring state when fraudulent activity is not monitored during the confirmation display of the setting value. 10 is a time chart showing a fraudulent activity monitoring state when fraudulent activity is partially monitored during a confirmation display of a setting value. 10 is a time chart showing a fraudulent activity monitoring state when fraudulent activities are partially monitored while a setting value is being changed. FIG. 10 is a front view of a modified game board. 10 is an example of a table used in the lottery process. This is a variation of the setting value suggestion effect. FIG. 1 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of a pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the right front when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. Furthermore, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. Figure 11 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame, as viewed from the front, and Figure 12 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main frame, and an outer frame, as viewed from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of an amusement hall; a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front of the outer frame 2; a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed; and a game board 5 that is detachably attached to the main frame 4 from the front and is visible to the player through the door frame 3, and has a game area 5a into which the player shoots a game ball B (see Figure 90). The combination of the door frame 3 and the main frame 4 is referred to as the front frame.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 comprises a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart laterally and extend vertically; an upper outer frame member 30 that connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; a lower outer frame assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; an upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and outer frame lower hinge member 60 coaxially support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4, allowing the main frame 4 to be mounted so that it can be opened and closed forward around the left side when viewed from the front.

In addition, when the door frame 3 and the main frame 4 are closed, the lower outer frame assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form part of the enclosure 624 for the main frame speaker 622, and by inverting the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 and radiating it forward, the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the play area 5a of the play board 5 into which the game balls B are shot so that it can be seen from the front, stores the game balls B to be shot into the play area 5a, and is equipped with a handle 182 that the player operates to shoot the stored game balls B into the play area 5a. The door frame 3 also decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 is equipped with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, separate from the handle 182. When a player-participation performance is executed, the player can participate in the performance by operating the performance operation unit 301, allowing the player to enjoy the game not only with the game ball B, but also by operating the performance operation unit 301.

The main frame 4 comprises a frame-shaped main frame base unit 500 whose rear can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5; an upper main frame hinge member 510 and a lower main frame hinge assembly 520 for opening and closing the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 and for opening and closing the door frame 3; a main frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main frame base unit 500; a ball launcher 540 for shooting game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5; and a game ball supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. It comprises a payout base unit 550 that receives game balls B, a payout unit 560 that pays out the game balls B received by the payout base unit 550 to the player, a board unit 620 that has a power supply board 630 equipped with a power switch 630a that can turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 as well as a payout control board 633, a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 that locks the outer frame 2 and main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and main frame 4.

The main frame 4 holds the game board 5, which has a play area 5a where play is carried out by hitting game balls B, and is used to pay out game balls B to the player and eject used game balls B to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment of the amusement hall). The main frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is removably stored inside from the front. The main frame 4 is openably attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2, which is attached to the island equipment of the amusement hall, at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and a door frame 3 is openably attached to close the open front side.

The game board 5 comprises a game area 5a where the game ball B is thrown by the player, a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and having a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311. The gaming panel 1100 is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1300, a functional display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310, a peripheral control unit 1500 (see Figure 12) located on the rear of the gaming panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 that is located in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying specified effect images, a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, and a rear unit 3000 attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1100. The rear unit 3000 is equipped with various effect units that are capable of performing movable effects and light-emitting effects depending on the game status.

The game area 5a of the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of obstacle pins that come into contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, as well as a general prize opening 2001, a first start opening 2002, a regular prize opening 2003, a second start opening 2004, and a special prize opening 2005 that grant a player a predetermined benefit (e.g., the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) when a game ball B is received or passes through them. The obstacle pins N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general prize opening 2001, the first start opening 2002, the regular prize opening 2003, the second start opening 2004, and the special prize opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

A player can shoot a game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. This allows the player to enjoy operating the handle 182 so that the game ball B is accepted by or passes through the general winning slot 2001, first starting slot 2002, normal winning slot 2003, second starting slot 2004, and big winning slot 2005, etc., within the game area 5a.

In addition, the game board 5 can entertain the player by displaying a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 or by using the light guide plate effect unit 3100, rear effect unit 3200, etc. to create light-emitting effects in response to the game state that changes when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a.

[2. Overall structure of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 13 to 18. Figure 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, Figure 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and Figure 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Figure 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and Figure 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the rear. Figure 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main components and seen from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in an amusement hall or the like on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. When viewed from the front, the outer frame 2 is formed into a rectangular frame that extends vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 comprises a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart laterally and extend vertically; an upper outer frame member 30 that connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; a lower outer frame assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; an upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When the main frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form part of the enclosure 624 for the main frame speaker 622, and is able to invert the phase of sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 and radiate it forward.

The outer frame 2 has an upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 that can detachably support the upper main frame hinge member 510 of the main frame 4. The outer frame 2 can coaxially rotatably support the upper main frame hinge member 510 and the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 using the upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 and the lower outer frame hinge member 60, allowing the main frame 4 to be attached so that it can be opened and closed forward around the left side when viewed from the front.

[2-1. Left outer frame assembly and right outer frame assembly]
The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 19. Figure 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, as seen from the front. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 coaxially support the upper main frame hinge member 510 and the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 so that they can rotate about the same axis, thereby attaching the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 comprises a left outer frame member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-to-rear direction, an upper-left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11, and a lower-left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11.

The left outer frame member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and is formed from an extruded aluminum alloy. The left outer frame member 11 has a recess 11a that is flat and recessed to the right in the rear section of the left side surface, which is one of the three equal sections in the front-to-rear direction; a bulge 11b that bulges to the right from the section on the right side surface opposite the recess 11a; and a hollow 11c that runs vertically through the bulge 11b. The recess 11a and bulge 11b increase the strength and rigidity of the left outer frame member 11, while the hollow 11c reduces its weight.

Furthermore, the left outer frame member 11 has multiple grooves extending vertically formed on both the left and right side surfaces. The multiple grooves on the left side surface are V-shaped, while the multiple grooves on the right side surface are semicircular. The left outer frame member 11 is formed in a symmetrical shape to the right outer frame member 21 of the right outer frame assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 connects the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 comprises a flat horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left edge of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the fore-and-aft direction, and a pair of flat lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both the front and rear of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left edge of the horizontal fixing portion 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 is attached to the left outer frame member 11 by inserting the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c into the hollow portion 11c of the left outer frame member 11, abutting the horizontal fixing portion 12a against the upper end of the left outer frame member 11, and abutting the front and rear lower horizontal fixing portions 12c against the right side of the left outer frame member 11, and then screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 is also attached to the upper outer frame member 30 by abutting the horizontal fixing portion 12a against the underside of the left end of the upper outer frame member 30, inserting the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the cutout portion 30a on the left side of the upper outer frame member 30, and then screwing a screw into the upper outer frame member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 connects the lower end of the left outer frame member 11 to the left end of the lower outer frame assembly 40 (lower outer frame member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 comprises a flat horizontal fixing portion 13a extending horizontally, a flat upper lateral fixing portion 13b extending upward from the left edge of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 13a, a flat lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from a position on the lower edge of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b rearward of the horizontal fixing portion, and a flat abutment portion 13d extending a short distance to the right from the rear edge of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 is attached to the left outer frame member 11 by abutting the rear surface of the abutment portion 13d against the front surface of the bulge portion 11b of the left outer frame member 11, abutting the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b against the right surface of the left outer frame member 11, and aligning the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a with the lower end of the left outer frame member 11, and then screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 is also attached to the lower outer frame member 41 by abutting the horizontal fixing portion 13a against the upper surface of the left end of the lower outer frame member 41, inserting the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c into the cutout portion 41a on the left side of the lower outer frame member 41, and then screwing a screw into the lower outer frame member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 comprises a right outer frame member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-to-rear direction, a right upper connecting member 22 attached to the upper end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, a right lower connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hook member 24 attached to the upper end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, and a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and is formed from an extruded aluminum alloy. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface, which is one of the three equal parts in the front-to-rear direction; a bulge 21b that bulges leftward from the portion of the left side surface opposite recess 21a; and a hollow portion 21c that runs vertically through bulge 21b. The recess 21a and bulge 21b increase the strength and rigidity of the right outer frame member 21, while the hollow portion 21c reduces its weight.

The right outer frame member 21 also has multiple grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The multiple grooves on the right side surface are V-shaped, while the multiple grooves on the left side surface are semicircular. The right outer frame member 21 is formed in a symmetrical shape to the left outer frame member 11 of the left outer frame assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 connects the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 comprises a flat horizontal fixing portion 22a extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle of the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a in the fore-and-aft direction, and a pair of flat lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both the front and rear of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 is attached to the right outer frame member 21 by inserting the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, abutting the horizontal fixing portion 22a against the upper end of the right outer frame member 21, and abutting the front and rear lower horizontal fixing portions 22c against the left side of the right outer frame member 21, and then screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side of the right outer frame member 21. The upper right connecting member 22 is also attached to the upper outer frame member 30 by abutting the horizontal fixing portion 22a against the underside of the right end of the upper outer frame member 30, inserting the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the notch 30a on the right side of the upper outer frame member 30, and then screwing a screw into the upper outer frame member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 connects the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 to the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (lower outer frame member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 comprises a flat horizontal fixing portion 23a extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 23b extending upward from the right edge of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 23a, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a position on the lower edge of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b rearward of the horizontal fixing portion, and a flat abutment portion 23d extending a short distance to the left from the rear edge of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 is attached to the right outer frame member 21 by screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side of the right outer frame member 21, with the rear surface of the abutment portion 23d abutting against the front surface of the bulge portion 21b of the right outer frame member 21, the right side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b abutting against the left side of the right outer frame member 21, and aligning the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 is also attached to the lower outer frame member 41 by screwing a screw into the lower outer frame member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c with the upper surface of the right end of the lower outer frame member 41 abutting against the upper surface of the right end of the lower outer frame member 41 and inserting the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the notch 41a on the right side of the lower outer frame member 41.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 hook onto the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main frame 4 (described below). The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction and includes a flat mounting portion 24a that is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and a flat hook piece 24b that extends leftward from the front edge of the mounting portion 24a and onto which the upper outer frame hook 653 hooks.

The lower hook member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21; a flat hooking piece 25b that extends leftward from the front edge of the mounting portion 25a and into which the lower outer frame hook 653 is attached; and an insertion opening 25c that passes through the hooking piece 25b in the front-to-rear direction and through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted.

[2-2. Upper outer frame member]
The upper outer frame member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 18. The upper outer frame member 30 connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are spaced apart laterally. The upper outer frame member 30 has a width in the front-to-rear direction that is approximately the same as the width of the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21 in the front-to-rear direction, a constant thickness in the up-down direction, extends in the left-to-right direction, and is made of wood. The upper outer frame member 30 is formed so that its length in the left-to-right direction is the same as the length in the left-to-right direction of the lower outer frame member 41 of the lower outer frame assembly 40, which will be described later.

The upper outer frame member 30 has cutouts 30a at the center of the front-to-rear direction on both the left and right sides, which penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-to-right direction. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted into these cutouts 30a on both ends.

The upper outer frame member 30 also has a mounting step 30b at its left end, with the top and front surfaces recessed from the general surface. The upper outer frame hinge assembly 50, described below, is attached to this mounting step 30b.

[2-3. Lower outer frame assembly]
The lower frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 20. Figure 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. The lower frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left and right frame assemblies 10 and 20, which are spaced apart on the left and right, and serves to close off and decorate the area below the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1.

The lower frame assembly 40 comprises a lower frame member 41 that extends laterally and connects the lower ends of the left and right outer frame assemblies 10 and 20, which are spaced apart laterally; a box-shaped front panel member 42 that is positioned in front of the lower frame member 41, extends laterally along the lower frame member 41, and is open at the rear; a box-shaped rear panel member 43 that is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42 and to the top surface of the lower frame member 41, extends laterally, and is open at the front; and a ball-jamming prevention mechanism 44 formed at the left end of the top surface of the rear panel member 43.

The lower outer frame member 41 has a width in the front-to-rear direction that is approximately the same as the width of the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21 in the front-to-rear direction, a constant thickness in the up-down direction, extends in the left-to-right direction, and is made of wood. The lower outer frame member 41 is formed so that its length in the left-to-right direction is the same as the length of the upper outer frame member 30 in the left-to-right direction.

The lower outer frame member 41 has cutouts 41a at the center of the front-to-rear direction on both the left and right sides, which penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-to-right direction. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into these cutouts 41a on both ends. This allows the lower ends of the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21 to be connected to each other.

The outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the top surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the back panel member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends left and right and extends from a position toward the rear of the center in the front-to-rear direction to the front end. This recess 41b maximizes the volume of the back panel internal space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the back panel member 43.

The front panel member 42 has the same left-right length as the outer frame lower member 41 and is formed like a horizontally long rectangular box with a short front-to-back depth relative to its height, with the entire rear side open. The open rear side of the front panel member 42 is closed by the rear panel member 43, which cooperates with the rear panel member 43 to form the front panel internal space 40a that forms part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The front panel member 42 has a long hole-shaped opening 42a on the front surface near the right end that penetrates from front to back and extends left to right.

The rear panel member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41 and is box-shaped with an open front. By attaching the front panel member 42 to its front surface, the rear panel member 43 cooperates with the front panel member 42 to form the panel internal space 40a, which is part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connecting tube portion 43a in the center of the left-right direction on its top surface, which extends left and right and protrudes upward, communicating with the panel internal space 40a. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined so that its upper end is positioned higher from the front end, which is coincident with the general top surface of the rear panel member 43, toward the rear. In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at a 45-degree angle.

The connecting tube portion 43a has a length in the left-right direction that is approximately one-third the length of the entire rear header panel member 43, and a depth in the front-to-rear direction that is slightly shorter than the depth of the entire rear header panel member 43. The connecting tube portion 43a is provided with multiple ribs 43b that connect the front and rear ends. When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is connected to the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4, thereby communicating with the internal space of the speaker unit 620a and forming an enclosure 624.

The ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 prevents the game ball B from becoming trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 by retaining the game ball B at the left end of the top surface of the rear panel member 43, in the area of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

The ball jam prevention mechanism 44 is formed on the left end of the top surface of the rear panel member 43 and includes a flat mounting portion 44a that is designed to accommodate the lower outer frame hinge member 60 (described below), a first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b on the mounting portion 44a, a standing wall portion 44d that extends upward from the rear and right sides of the mounting portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion 44e that protrudes forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and is sloped so that its upper surface is positioned upward as it extends rearward.

The first discharge opening 44b is formed in a position that coincides with the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c are formed to a size that allows game balls B to pass through. The first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c do not communicate with the panel internal space 40a, but open to the rear surface of the panel rear member 43. Therefore, game balls B that enter the first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c can be discharged to the rear of the panel rear member 43.

If an unauthorized tool such as piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 (described below), the ball-jamming prevention mechanism 44 can prevent the unauthorized tool from entering by using the upright wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the upright wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end protrusion 44e that protrudes forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, preventing further entry. This prevents unauthorized activity from being carried out through the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

However, if the rear end of the mounting portion 44a is provided with a standing wall portion 44d, when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, if a game ball B falls onto the mounting portion 44a for some reason, the standing wall portion 44d will prevent it from moving rearward from the outer frame 2, making it easier for the game ball B to remain on the mounting portion 44a. If a game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B will become trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, causing the main frame 4 to be unable to close.

In contrast, the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 of this embodiment allows game balls B that have fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a to be discharged to the rear of the curtain board rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first discharge outlet 44b, or through the second discharge outlet 44c, thereby preventing game balls B from becoming trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 comprises a pair of guide members 45 arranged spaced apart on the left and right sides of the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43; a flat grill member 46 that closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear; a port member 47 with two cylinders extending forward and backward and attached to the inside of the front panel member 42 so as to sandwich the grill member 46 and close the opening 42a; and a frame-shaped seal member 48 that is arranged at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 are against which the lower end of the door frame 3 abuts when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2. The guide members 45 are made of a low-friction material, which allows the lower end of the main frame 4 to slide easily, making opening and closing easier.

The grill member 46 is made of punched metal with numerous small holes. The port member 47, consisting of two cylinders, connects the interior space 40a of the curtain board (enclosure 624) to the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46. The port member 47 is made of two cylinders with a specified inner diameter and length, and uses the principle of Helmholtz resonance to resonate and amplify the bass sounds emitted rearward (inside the enclosure 624) from the main frame speaker 622, thereby radiating rich bass sounds forward (toward the player) of the outer frame 2. In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, allowing players to hear deep bass sounds.

When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the sealing member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 on the main frame 4, preventing sound from inside the speaker enclosure from leaking between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 21. Figure 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper outer frame hinge assembly of the outer frame 2, viewed from above and front, and Figure 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a), viewed from below and front. The upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper outer frame member 30, and is used to attach the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that it can rotate about a hinge. The upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 includes an upper outer frame hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the left outer frame member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the upper outer frame member 30, a locking member 52 attached to the upper outer frame hinge member 51, and a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the upper outer frame hinge member 51.

The upper outer frame hinge member 51 comprises a horizontally extending, flat upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the upper outer frame member 30; a flat forward extension portion 51b extending forward from the front edge of the upper fixing portion 51a; a bearing groove 51c extending forward from the middle of the right edge of the forward extension portion 51b to the center of the forward extension portion 51b and penetrating it vertically; a flat horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left edge of the upper fixing portion 51a; and a flat edge wall portion 51e extending downward from the edge of the forward extension portion 51b from the left edge around the front edge to the opening of the bearing groove 51c and continuing to the horizontal fixing portion 51d. The upper outer frame hinge member 51 is formed by stamping and bending a metal plate using a press molding process. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 (described below) of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 within the bearing groove 51c.

The locking member 52 comprises a strip-shaped locking body 52a extending forward and backward, an operating piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the locking body 52a, a resiliently deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending left from the rear end of the locking body 52a and then diagonally forward and left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the locking body 52a. The locking member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached by mounting screws 53 to the underside of the forward extension portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51, at a position rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

When the locking member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the locking body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and extends forward so that the right side surface near the front end can abut against the portion of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Furthermore, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the locking body 52a abuts against the inner circumferential surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The biasing force of the elastic portion 52c biases the locking member 52 in a direction that causes the front end to rotate leftward around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, under normal conditions, the right side surface near the front end of the locking body 52a of the locking member 52 abuts against the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the upper body frame hinge pin 512 of the upper body frame hinge member 510 is formed in the bearing groove 51c in a position forward of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operating piece 52b of this locking member 52, the locking body 52a can be rotated against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operating piece 52b, the locking body 52a can be rotated in a direction that moves its front end to the left, thereby retracting the locking body 52a from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, thereby fully opening the bearing groove 51c. This allows the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 to be inserted into or removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Lower outer frame hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 18. The lower outer frame hinge member 60 has a flat horizontal portion 60a extending horizontally, a flat raised portion 60b rising upward from a position on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a rearward of the center in the front-to-rear direction, a lower outer frame hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a from top to bottom and is large enough to allow the passage of only one game ball B. This lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate using press molding.

In plan view, the horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is trapezoidal, with the left edge as the base. The lower outer frame hinge pin 60c is cylindrical and has a truncated cone shape with a narrowed top above the vertical center. This lower outer frame hinge pin 60c is attached to the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so that it contacts the center of the rising portion 60b in the front-to-rear direction and extends in an inverted U shape from the left edge of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. This discharge hole 60d is formed to be approximately the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear of the horizontal section 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 rests on the mounting section 44a of the rear header panel member 43 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 and is fixed to the rear header panel member 43 with screws (not shown). The raised section 60b is also attached with screws (not shown) to a position forward of the bulge section 11b on the right side of the left outer frame member 11. By inserting the lower outer frame hinge pin 60c into the lower outer frame hinge hole 521a in the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4, the lower outer frame hinge member 60 can cooperate with the upper outer frame hinge member 51 to attach the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

Furthermore, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d is aligned with the first discharge opening 44b of the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. This allows the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a to fall (discharge) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge opening 44b. In more detail, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that falls between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 rolls toward the rear where the gap is wider, as the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 gradually narrows as the main frame 4 is closed, allowing it to be discharged through the discharge hole 60d. In this case, when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 while assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge hole 60d is formed in a position that is approximately flush with the rear end of the main frame 4. Therefore, game balls B that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling rearward beyond the main frame 4 by being discharged through the discharge hole 60d, making it less likely that game balls B will become trapped in the area of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 30. Figure 22 is a front view of the door frame of the pachinko machine, Figure 23 is a rear view of the door frame, Figure 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and Figure 25 is a right side view of the door frame. Figure 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front right, Figure 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front left, and Figure 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the rear. Figure 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear.

The door frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is roughly the same size as the interior of the outer frame 2. It is attached to the interior of the outer frame 2 via the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front. The door frame 3 closes the play area 5a of the play board 5 into which game balls B are inserted so that it is visible from the front, stores game balls B to be inserted into the play area 5a, and is equipped with a handle 182 that the player operates to insert the stored game balls B into the play area 5a. The door frame 3 also decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 comprises a door frame base unit 100, which has a rectangular, frame-like shape extending vertically when viewed from the front; a glass unit 160 that is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and closes the playing area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 so that it can be seen from the front; a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear; a handle unit 180 that is attached to the front right corner of the door frame base unit 100; The door frame base unit 100 includes a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front of the base unit 100, a left-side door frame unit 400 attached to the left front of the base unit 100 above the tray unit 200, a right-side door frame unit 410 attached to the right front of the base unit 100 above the tray unit, and a top door frame unit 450 attached to the upper front of the base unit 100 above the left-side door frame unit 400 and right-side door frame unit 410.

The door frame base unit 100 comprises a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which has a vertically extending quadrangle (rectangle) outer shape when viewed from the front and which has a door window 101a which penetrates from front to back, a handle mounting member 102 attached to the lower right front side of the door frame base 101, a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner when viewed from the rear, a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end when viewed from the rear, a door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left of the door frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear, a handle cover 107 which covers the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 from the rear, a handle cover 108 which covers the handle cover 106 from the rear, and a cable cover 109 which covers the wiring cable.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, an upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and a lower door frame hinge member 125 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 on the right side when viewed from behind.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce and rigidify the door frame base 101. The upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and lower door frame hinge member 125 are used to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The cylinder lock 130 works in conjunction with the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 to lock and open the door frame 3 and main frame 4, and to lock and open the outer frame 2 and main frame 4.

The ball feeding unit 140 is used to supply game balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball launcher 540 on the main frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 is used to guide game balls B (foul balls) that are launched by the ball launcher 540 but do not reach the play area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and to guide game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 has a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. Figure 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and Figure 31(b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Figure 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear.

The door frame base unit 100 is hingedly attached to the main frame 4 on its left side when viewed from the front, allowing it to open and close the front of the main frame 4 and making the playing area of the game board attached to the main frame 4 visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 comprises a flat, rectangular door frame base 101 with an elongated vertical outline, a handle mounting member 102 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner when viewed from behind.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right edge when viewed from behind; a door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left of the door frame main relay board 104 when viewed from behind at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101; a handle rear relay board 106 attached to the left of the handle rear relay board 105 when viewed from behind at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101; a handle rear relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the handle main relay board 104 and part of the handle rear relay board 105 from the rear; a handle rear relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear; and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable.

The door frame base unit 100 further comprises a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, an upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and a lower door frame hinge member 125 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 on the right side when viewed from behind.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 attached to the lower front corner, a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a left side unit 400 attached to the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, a right side unit 410 attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a top unit 450 attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

In addition, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 has a square (rectangle) outer shape extending vertically in a front view. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates from front to back and has an inner periphery that is approximately square and extends vertically in a front view. The upper and left and right sides of the door window 101a that form the inner periphery are respectively close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and the lower side that forms the inner periphery is located approximately one-third of the height in the vertical direction from the bottom end of the door frame base 101. In this way, the door frame base 101 is formed into a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101a that penetrates from front to back. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is equipped with a handle mounting surface 101b formed in the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and inclined so that the left end protrudes slightly forward more than the right end; an insertion recess 101c recessed from the rear toward the front near the right end when viewed from the front, between the handle mounting surface 101b and the door window 101a, into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted; a cylinder insertion hole 101d that penetrates from front to back in the insertion recess 101c and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted; and a ball feed opening 101e that penetrates from front to front on the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting surface 101b when viewed from the front, allowing the entrance opening 141a and ball extraction opening 141b of the ball feed unit 140 to be seen forward.

The door frame base 101 also has a lower tray ball passage port 101f that penetrates front to back, located to the left of the center in the left-right direction and at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and exposes the ball discharge port 150d of the fall cover unit 150 to the front; an upper tray ball passage port 101g that penetrates front to front adjacent to the lower edge of the door window 101a near the left end when viewed from the front, and exposes the through ball passage 150a of the fall cover unit 150 to the front; and a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear to the front along the inner periphery of the door window 101a, and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

The door frame base 101 also has multiple vertical slits 101i formed in the lower left corner when viewed from the front (below the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray) that run from front to back. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear of the multiple slits 101i. When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the multiple slits 101i have the speaker opening 211b of the tray unit base 211 of the tray unit 200 located in front of them, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 located behind them, allowing sound from the main body frame speaker 622 to be emitted forward.

Furthermore, the door frame base 101 has a through-hole 101j that penetrates from front to back below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting surface 101b. This through-hole 101j is for inserting a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side, and is formed to match the through-hole 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, which will be described later.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is used to mount a handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle attachment member 102 comprises a cylindrical tube portion 102a extending in the front-to-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tube portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 102a, multiple (three in this example) ridges 102c protruding into the tube portion 102a and extending the entire axial length of the tube portion 102a and arranged at uneven intervals around the circumference of the tube portion 102a, and multiple reinforcing ribs 102d arranged around the circumference of the tube portion 102a and connecting the outer surface of the tube portion 102a to the front surface of the flange portion 102b.

The handle mounting member 102 is attached to the handle mounting surface 101b with screws, with the rear surface of the flange portion 102b abutting against the front surface of the handle mounting surface 101b on the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper part of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided on the lower part of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three protrusions 102c are formed in positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c are aligned with the three grooves 181c in the handle base 181, restricting the rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) relative to the door frame base 101.

In addition, since the axis of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 extends perpendicular to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, by mounting it on the inclined handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101, the axis of the tubular portion 102a is tilted so that it extends forward and to the right, and the handle unit 180 can be mounted to the door frame base 101 in a similarly tilted state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101 where multiple slits 101i are formed. When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4. This allows sound radiated (output) from the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 to be guided forward without being diffused, and can be effectively guided to the front of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the player) through the multiple slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the speaker port 211b in the plate unit base 211 of the plate unit 200.

The speaker duct 103 also has a cable holder 103a on the rear surface below the cylindrical section that holds the connection cable 503. The cable holder 103a is located to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and holds the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub-relay board 105 so that it extends to the left end of the door frame 3.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, door frame sub-relay board 105, and handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular shape that extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 when viewed from behind. The door frame main relay board 104 relays the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and is connected to a portion of the connection cable 503 (see Figures 83 and 84) extending from the main body frame 4.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an inverted L-shape, with a vertically extending rectangle joined to the right of the upper part of the rectangle when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that, while it extends vertically, it is adjacent to the left of the door frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 relays the connections between the handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, the tray unit relay board 214 of the tray unit 200, the left-side decorative board 402 of the left-side unit 400, the side window interior decorative board 413 and right-side decorative board 418 of the right-side unit 410, and the door frame top relay board 467 of the top unit 450, among others, and the interface board 635 of the main frame 4. The remainder of the connection cable 503 extending from the main frame 4 is connected to this board.

The door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the rear sides of the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending up and down of the door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub-relay board 105 are covered by the door frame relay board cover 107, and the rear side of the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the fall cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape that extends left and right, and is attached to the rear of the handle mounting surface 101b below the ball feed opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear handle relay board 106 relays the connection between the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194 of the handle unit 180, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the rear side of the rear handle relay board 106 is covered by the rear handle relay board cover 108.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The frame relay board cover 107, the handle rear relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear of the frame base 101 to cover the rear sides of the frame main relay board 104 and part of the frame sub-relay board (the portion extending up and down in an inverted L-shape). The frame relay board cover 107 is box-shaped and open on the front and left sides when viewed from the front. When assembled to the frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the frame main relay board 104 and the frame sub-relay board 105, which cover the rear sides, are exposed inside the frame relay board cover 107, and a connection cable 503 can be inserted into the open left side and connected to these terminals.

The handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear of the handle rear relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and is intended to cover the wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball dispensing operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape that extends left and right, and has openings near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cable through.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and provide rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 comprises a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 which extend vertically and are arranged at a distance from each other on the left and right, an upper reinforcement frame 113 which extends horizontally and connects the upper ends of the left reinforcement frame 111 and the right reinforcement frame 112, an intermediate reinforcement frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position above the lower end of the left reinforcement frame 111 and extends to the right near the right reinforcement frame 112, a cylinder mounting frame 115 which connects the right end of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 to the right reinforcement frame 112, and multiple hook hook members 116 which are attached at a distance from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcement frame 112 on the left and right sides and on which door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 are hooked.

The left reinforcement frame 111 and right reinforcement frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically for a length approximately equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcement frame 112 has multiple insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-to-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4. The upper reinforcement frame 113 has a constant width in the up-down direction and extends horizontally for a length approximately equal to the left-to-right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcement frame 114 extends left and right with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcement frame 113. The intermediate reinforcement frame 114 has a square cutout 114a cut downward from the top near the left end, and a through-hole 114b that penetrates from front to back near the right end. The cutout 114a is formed in a position that coincides with the upper tray ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through-hole 114b is formed in a position that coincides with the through-hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 comprises a pair of rear pieces arranged laterally and spaced apart, each formed as a rectangular flat plate extending up and down in front view; a pair of side pieces extending forward in a flat plate shape from each of the opposing edges of the pair of rear pieces; and a flat front piece connecting the front end edges of the pair of forward extending pieces. This cylinder mounting frame 115 has a convex shape that protrudes forward in plan view. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of this cylinder mounting frame 115.

The hook members 116 are attached to the rear side of the right reinforcement frame 112 in the areas of the insertion holes that penetrate from front to back. These hook members 116 are hooked by the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650.

The left reinforcement frame 111, right reinforcement frame 112, upper reinforcement frame 113, middle reinforcement frame 114, cylinder mounting frame 115, and hook member 116 that make up the door frame reinforcement unit 110 are formed by stamping and bending metal plates using a press molding process. They are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is composed of a left reinforcement frame 111, a right reinforcement frame 112, and an upper reinforcement frame 113 assembled along the left, right, and upper edges of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcement frame 114 assembled so as to be positioned below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with multiple screws (not shown). When this door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout 114a and through-hole 114b of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and through-hole 101j of the door frame base 101, and the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1g. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 when viewed from the front. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 is used to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so that the door frame 3 can rotate about a hinge in cooperation with the lower door-frame hinge member 125. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a upper door-frame hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, a flange member 123 attached to the upper door-frame hinge pin 122, and a lock spring 124 that biases the upper door-frame hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 has a flat mounting piece 121a that is rectangular when viewed from the front, and flat protruding pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower edges of the mounting piece 121a. The mounting piece 121a of the hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The upper door frame hinge pin 122 is a cylindrical metal rod bent into an L-shape. When assembled into the upper door frame hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 penetrates from below near the front ends of a pair of protruding pieces 121b on the hinge bracket 121, with the upper end extending upward beyond the upper protruding piece 121b, and the horizontally extending portion abutting the underside of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the upper door frame hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the upper main frame hinge member 510 of the main frame 4.

The flange member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to the upper door frame hinge pin 122 at a location between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape and is placed around the portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 that extends vertically between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the upper door frame hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123.

In the upper door frame hinge assembly 120, the upper door frame hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 121b, restricting further upward movement. In this state, the upper end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 protrudes a predetermined amount above the top surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the upper door-frame hinge pin 122 of the upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the entire upper door-frame hinge pin 122 can be moved downward, and the upper end of the upper door-frame hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper protrusion 121b. Therefore, the upper end of the upper door-frame hinge pin 122 of the upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 can be inserted from below into the upper door-frame hinge hole 511a of the upper main-frame hinge member 510, and removed downward. By inserting the upper end of the upper door-frame hinge pin 122 into the upper door-frame hinge hole 511a of the upper main-frame hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view can be supported so as to be hinged and rotatable relative to the main frame 4.

In addition, the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 has a vertically extending portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 positioned coaxially with the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 (described below). This allows the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 to hinge rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in a favorable condition.

[3-1h. Door frame bottom hinge member]
The lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The lower door frame hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 when viewed from the front. The lower door frame hinge member 125 cooperates with the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so that the door frame 3 can rotate about the hinge.

The lower door frame hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110 and comprises a flat mounting piece 125a that is rectangular in front view, a flat protruding piece 125b that extends forward from the lower edge of the mounting piece 125a, and a lower door frame hinge pin 126 (see Figure 22, etc.) that protrudes downward from the underside near the front end of the protruding piece 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and protruding piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The lower door frame hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod with a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of its lower end. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, this lower door frame hinge pin 126 is attached to a portion of the protruding piece 125b that is coaxial with the portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 of the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 that extends vertically.

This lower door frame hinge member 125 can support the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 so that it can rotate along the hinge by inserting the lower door frame hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the lower hinge member on the main frame side.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 and is used in cooperation with a locking unit 650 (described later) to open and close the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, and to lock and open the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 that extends forward and backward, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a rotation transmission member 133 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131, which is inserted into the keyhole 132 and rotates together with the rotation of a regular key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, with its rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is cylindrical (more specifically, a conical cylinder with a diameter that increases toward the rear) with an open rear, and has a pair of notches cut from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. The rotation transmission member 133 is configured so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main frame 4 can be inserted from the rear; by inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654, causing it to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is approximately aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the dish unit body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see Figure 22, etc.).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 34 and 35. Figure 34(a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. Figure 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and anti-tamper member removed. The ball feeding unit 140 can feed game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball launcher 540 of the main frame 4, and can also eject game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 into the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 comprises a box-shaped front cover 141 that is open at the rear and has an entrance 141a that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction and through which game balls B are supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200, and a ball ejection port 141b that opens below the entrance 141a; a rear cover 142 that is box-shaped and has an open front and closes the rear end of the front cover 141, and has a ball supply port 142a that supplies game balls B that enter through the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction to the ball launching device 540; The ball removal member 143 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the front cover 141, and has a partition 143a that separates the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b on the rear side of the front cover 141; a ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the up-down direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and sends the game balls B on the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 one by one to the ball supply port 142a of the rear cover 142; and a ball feeding solenoid 145 that rotates the ball feeding member 144.

As shown in the figure, when viewed from the front, this ball feeding unit 140 has the ball feeding member 144 located to the right of the entrance 141a, the ball removal member 143 located to the left of the ball feeding member 144, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 located to the right of the ball feeding member 144.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the center of rotation of the ball removal member 143 to the left of the ball removal opening 141b when viewed from the front, and the operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143, described below, extends forward from this slit 141c. The upper side of the front cover 141 also extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and is formed so that when the door frame 3 is assembled, it closes from the rear the rear-open portions of the ball feeding guide path 241b and ball removal guide path 241c on the upstream end of the rear of the rear base 241 of the upper tray ball removal unit 240.

The ball removal member 143 comprises a partition section 143a that is located below the entrance 141a and acts as a partition between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, with the upper surface decreasing in size toward the ball feeding member 144; a pivoting rod section 143b that extends downward from the end of the partition section 143a opposite the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a V-shape from approximately the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball removal opening 141b, with the lower end supported for rotation around an axis extending in the front-to-back direction; a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod section 143b; and a weight section 143d that protrudes below the operating rod 143c from the side of the rotating rod section 143b on the side opposite the partition section 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see Figure 34 (a)). The operating rod 143c abuts against the upper end (top surface) of the operating transmission part 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, which moves downward when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed through the ball feed opening 101e of the door frame base 101.

The ball feeding member 144 includes a fan-shaped blocking portion 144a in a plan view, centered on the rotation axis and extending vertically toward the entrance 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball extracting member 143; a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc from the rear end of the blocking portion 144a toward the rotation axis; and a rod-shaped shaft portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are adjacently formed within an angular range of approximately 180° centered on the rotation axis. Furthermore, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 is sized to hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis when the shaft portion 144c, which is positioned eccentrically from the rotation axis, is moved left and right by the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145.

This ball feeding member 144 is designed to rotate between a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces toward the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces in a direction communicating with the ball supply port 142a, and a holding position in which the ball holding portion 144b faces toward the partition portion 143a. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the ball supply port 142a, and the game ball B that has entered the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a is prevented from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the shaft portion 144c side closes the ball supply port 142a, so that only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held within the ball holding portion 144b.

The ball feeding unit 140 also includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings up and down when driven (energized) by the ball feeding solenoid 145, and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-to-back direction due to the movement of the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 swinging up and down, and which rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the up and down direction.

The ball feed operating rod 146 is equipped with an iron plate 146a below the ball feed solenoid 145. The ball feed operating rod 146 extends left and right, and its end opposite the ball feed crank 147 (the right end) is attached to the front cover 141 and rear cover 142 so that it can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. When the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the generated magnetic force pulls the iron plate 146a toward the ball feed solenoid 145 (upward), causing the ball feed operating rod 146 to rotate around the right end so that the left end closest to the ball feed crank 147 moves upward. When the ball feed solenoid 145 is then deactivated, the magnetic force disappears, causing the weight of the iron plate 146a to rotate around the right end so that the left end closest to the ball feed crank 147 moves downward, returning the rod to its original position. As a result, the ball feeding operating rod 146's left end (tip) closest to the ball feeding crank 147 swings up and down due to the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 comprises an engagement portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and capable of engaging with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146, which moves up and down; a shaft portion 147b positioned on the opposite side of the engagement portion 147a from the side that engages with the ball feeding operating rod 146 and supported rotatably around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142; and a transmission portion 147c extending upward from the shaft portion 147b and engaging with a rod-shaped shaft portion 144c (see Figure 35 (b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the ball feeding member 144.

This ball feeding unit 140 can rotate the ball feeding crank 147 around an axis extending forward and backward via the ball feeding operating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward through the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145.

When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normally), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding actuating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and its tip is positioned downward, and in this state the ball feeding member 144 is positioned in the feeding position. Furthermore, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and its tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position. In other words, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is deactivated (OFF state), the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 540. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in this ball feed unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542 by the launch control unit 633b (see Figure 137) of the payout control board 633.

The ball feeding unit 140 is also rotatably supported by the ball removal member 143 or the weight portion 143d, which applies a moment that rotates it counterclockwise when viewed from the front. However, the rotation of the ball removal member 143 is restricted when the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removal member 143 abuts against the upper end of the operating transmission portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, which operates when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed. Therefore, under normal conditions, the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, separating them, and game balls B cannot enter the ball removal opening 141b side.

When the player presses the upper tray ball removal button on the tray unit downward, the upper tray ball removal slider slides downward along with the operation transmission unit, and as the operation transmission unit moves downward, the operation rod 143c also moves downward relatively. When the operation rod 143c moves downward along with the operation transmission unit, the ball removal member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition part 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, releasing the partition. As a result, the game ball B that entered through the entrance 141a falls toward the ball removal opening 141b, and is discharged from the ball removal opening 141b into the ball removal guide path 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the tray unit 200, and can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply opening 211c.

The upper tray ball removal slider 242, which is formed with the actuation transmission part 242b that contacts the actuation rod 143c of the ball removal member 143, is biased upward by the spring 243. Therefore, even if a game ball B is supplied forcefully onto the partition part 143a, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the actuation rod 143c, preventing damage to the ball removal member 143 and other components, and preventing the game ball B from bouncing off the partition part 143a.

The ball feeding unit 140 also has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see Figure 35(b), etc.) recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from behind the ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and an anti-tampering member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b. The anti-tampering member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed from a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tamper element 148 has a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. It comprises an upper piece 148a and a lower piece 148b that are separated vertically at approximately the center a predetermined distance to the left of the right edge, and inclined portions 148c that are C-chamfered at the tip ends (right ends when viewed from the front) of the opposing edges of the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. The upper piece 148a of the anti-tamper element 148 is bent relative to the general surface of the anti-tamper element 148 so that its right end when viewed from the front protrudes rearward. The lower piece 148b extends flush with the general surface of the anti-tamper element 148. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

When the anti-tampering member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b is in communication with the inside of the ball supply port 142a.

This anti-fraud device 148 prevents fraudulent acts using illegal game balls B with strings attached by using the ball launcher 540 to launch an illegal game ball B from the upper tray into the game area 5a via the ball feeding unit 140, and then manipulate the string attached to the illegal game ball B to insert or remove it from the first starting hole, etc. When such acts are committed, the momentum of the illegal game ball B launched (hit) by the ball launcher 540 causes the string attached to the illegal game ball B to be inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and the string is then cut by the narrow V-shaped portion formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, thereby preventing fraudulent acts using illegal game balls B with strings attached.

[3-1k. Foul Cover Unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 36 and 37. Figure 36(a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and Figure 36(b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. Figure 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower rear of the door frame base 101 on the right side as viewed from the rear. The foul cover unit 150 guides game balls B (foul balls) that are launched by the ball launcher 540 but do not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As shown in the figure, the fall cover unit 150 comprises a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and open at the front, and a flat lid member 152 attached to the front of the unit body 151.

The foul cover unit 150 is equipped with a through-ball passage 150a that penetrates from front to back at the upper left corner when viewed from the front and connects the normal guideway of the lower full ball path unit of the main frame 4 with the upper tray ball supply port of the tray unit, and a full ball receiving port 150b that opens toward the rear on the lower right side of the through-ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and can connect with the full guideway of the lower full ball path unit of the main frame 4.

The foul cover unit 150 also has a foul ball receiving port 150c, which opens upward on the right side of the full ball receiving port 150b when viewed from the front, and receives game balls B (foul balls) that have been launched by the ball launcher of the main frame 4 but have not reached the game area 5a; and a ball discharge port 150d, which opens forward near the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and discharges game balls B received in the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c forward, and which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port of the tray unit.

Furthermore, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with a storage passage 150e formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving port 150c, and the ball discharge port 150d, and which is large enough to store a predetermined amount of game balls B.

The through-ball passage 150a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152.

The fall cover unit 150 also includes a flat movable piece 153 that forms part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit body 151 and the cover member 152, a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects the rotation of the movable piece 153 away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is filled with game balls B and game balls B are no longer released toward the lower tray 202 from the ball release port 150d, this foul cover unit 150 can store a certain number of game balls B in the storage passage 150e. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the movable piece 153 to rotate so that the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155, and this rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. This allows it to be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower tray 202 is full, the payout of any more game balls B is stopped and a notification of this fact is sent to the player, amusement hall staff, or the like, urging them to unclog the lower tray 202.

The ball cover unit 150 is attached to the rear of the unit body 151, below the through-ball passage 150a, and is equipped with a door opening/closing abutment 150f against which the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 of the lower full ball passage unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 of the main body frame 4 (described later) can abut (see Figure 91). The door opening/closing abutment 150f is inclined so that it moves forward as its rear surface faces downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against this door opening/closing abutment 150f, the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 can be rotated to open the downstream ends (front openings) of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and removably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, this glass unit 160 makes the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 attached to the main frame 4 visible from the player's side (front) and also closes off the front of the playing area 5a.

The glass unit 160 comprises a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner periphery of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h; two transparent glass plates 162 that enclose the interior of the glass frame 161 and have their outer peripheries attached to the glass frame 161; and a pair of glass unit mounting members 163 that are rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and are used to mount the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101.

The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a that extend outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band-like locking piece 161b that protrudes downward from the bottom end and extends along the bottom edge. The mounting pieces 161a of the glass frame 161 can abut against the protrusions 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 (see Figure 97). Two glass plates 162 are attached to the front and rear ends of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other so that a space is formed between them (see Figure 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably attached around an axis extending forward and backward on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion 163b that protrudes from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of rotation. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of each of the two upper corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first rotate the glass unit mounting member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 so that the protrusion 163b is positioned above the base 163a. Then, from the rear of the door frame base 101, insert the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and abut the front end of the glass frame 161 against the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Then, rotate the glass unit mounting member 163 so that the protrusion 163b is positioned below the base 163a, and abut the protrusion 163b against the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. This attaches the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101.

To remove the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, follow the steps above in reverse. This makes the glass unit 160 detachable from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, when the protrusion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in a rotational position where it is positioned lower than the base 163a, the protrusion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protrusion 163b will not rotate to a position where it is higher than the base 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 will not be released naturally, and the glass unit 160 will not naturally come off the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 for the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat main body 171 having a predetermined outer periphery, a flat rear projection 172 that projects rearward along the outer periphery of the main body 171, and a pair of locking projections 173 that are spaced apart on the left and right, project forward beyond the main body 171, and are capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that its lower end protrudes downward below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Furthermore, the upper end of the main body 171 is shaped to fit the lower edge of the playing area 5a on the playing board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is shaped to fit a portion of the inner rail 1002, the out guide portion 1003, a portion of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the component 1000 described below, and is formed so as not to protrude into the playing area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protrusion 172 is formed around almost the entire outer periphery of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed by the main body 171 and the rear protrusion 172 into a shallow box shape that is open to the rear, giving it high strength and rigidity. The rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body 171 that is different from the outer periphery of the main body 171. This rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to align with a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

When assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the rear protrusion 172 is not formed in the area of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. As a result, game ball B (game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170, and does not hinder the game ball B from being shot into the game area 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). This allows the security cover 170 to be easily attached and detached to the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts against the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the rear projection 172, excluding the portion that protrudes rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 171, is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the component 1000. Furthermore, the security cover 170 is in a state where the rear projection 172 that protrudes rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 171 protrudes rearward beyond the front surface of the component 1000 so as to contact the underside of the component 1000. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to insert an illegal tool such as piano wire into the game area 5a between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, the attempt will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 38 etc. Figure 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by a player to shoot the game ball B in the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

The handle unit 180 comprises a handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100; a handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181; a disc-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the front end of the handle 182; a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface; and a handle cover 185 attached to the cover base 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration board 184.

The handle unit 180 also includes an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 behind the handle 182, a shaft member 187 having the handle 182 attached to its front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181, and having a drive gear portion 187a on its outer periphery, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 having a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188 and is sandwiched between the handle base 181 and the inner base 186.

Furthermore, the handle unit 180 is equipped with a handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end of which is attached to the handle 182, and which urges the handle 182 to return to its initial rotation position (the end of rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front), and an auxiliary spring 191, one end of which is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to the transmission gear 188, and which urges the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front via the transmission gear 188.

The handle unit 180 also includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, a single button 193 whose tip end protrudes outward from the left side of the outer periphery of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front and whose base end is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending forward and backward, and a single button operation sensor 194 attached to the handle base 181 and detects when the single button 193 is pressed.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 comprises a cylindrical base 181a extending forward and backward, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and three grooves 181c recessed from the outer surface of the cylindrical base 181a, extending axially, and formed at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102. The three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102. Therefore, with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, the base 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102, and by inserting the ridges 102c into the three grooves 181c, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle attachment member 102.

The handle 182 has four protrusions - a first protrusion 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d - that protrude outward from the outer circumferential surface in the circumferential direction; two slits 182e that extend in an arc around the rotation axis (shaft member 187) and penetrate in the front-to-rear direction; and a locking protrusion 182f that protrudes rearward from a position more inward than the slits 182e with respect to the center of rotation and to which the other end of the handle return spring 190 is locked.

The four protrusions, first protrusion 182a, second protrusion 182b, third protrusion 182c, and fourth protrusion 182d, are arranged in clockwise order in front view. Specifically, the side of first protrusion 182a facing the clockwise direction in front view at the portion that protrudes most from the general outer surface of handle 182 bulges outward, while the side facing the opposite direction is concave (gouged) and curved inward. The portion of second protrusion 182b that protrudes most from the general outer surface of handle 182 is approximately 85 degrees clockwise away from the most protruding portion of first protrusion 182a, and protrudes slightly lower than first protrusion 182a. The second protrusion 182b has a shape similar to that of the first protrusion 182a, with the side facing clockwise in a front view of the most protruding part bulging outward and the opposite side facing counterclockwise curving inward.

The third protrusion 182c has its most protruding portion from the general outer surface of the handle 182 approximately 70 degrees clockwise from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b, and protrudes to approximately half the height of the first protrusion 182a. Both side surfaces of this third protrusion 182c are inclined in a generally linear manner, with the clockwise side surface inclined more gently than the opposite counterclockwise side surface. The fourth protrusion 182d has its most protruding portion from the general outer surface of the handle 182 approximately 55 degrees clockwise from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c, and protrudes slightly higher than the first protrusion 182a. Both side surfaces of this fourth protrusion 182d are inclined in a generally linear manner, and it is formed in the shape of an approximately isosceles triangle.

The cover base 183 is disc-shaped and has three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from its rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a pass through the slits 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Because the mounting bosses 183a of the handle cover 185 pass through the slits 182e of the handle 182, the mounting bosses 183a abut against the circumferential ends of the slits 182e, restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of approximately 120 degrees.

The handle cover 185 has a rounded, bulging front and is translucent. Inside, the handle cover 185 is fitted with a lens element formed three-dimensionally from a transparent material. The handle cover 185 can be decorated with illuminated lights by appropriately illuminating the LEDs on the front of the handle decoration board 184.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end is located further back than the left end in a plan view, and faces outward (toward the open side). As a result, the handle unit 180 attached via the handle mounting member 102 is also inclined outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 relative to a line perpendicular to the front of the pachinko machine 1). This makes it easy for the player to grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, allowing for a comfortable rotation operation.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes depending on the rotation angle of this detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 (described below) changes depending on the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, causing the game ball B to be shot into the game area 5a with a strength depending on the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 detects the static electricity acting from the player and detects the player's contact with the handle 182. If the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's contact, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 receives detection, and the drive of the launch solenoid 542 is controlled with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182, allowing the game ball B to be shot. In other words, even if the player attempts to rotate the handle 182 in some way to shoot the game ball B into the play area 5a without touching it, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact, so the launch solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be shot. This prevents players from rotating the handle 182 in a way that is different from the intended way, reducing the burden on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, when a player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops the operation of the launch solenoid 542. This makes it possible to temporarily stop the launch of the game ball B without returning the rotation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing of the single-shot button 193, the game ball B can again be launched into the game area 5a with the same impact strength as before operating the single-shot button 193.

Furthermore, the handle unit 180 has four protrusions on the handle 182: a first protrusion 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d. When the handle 182 is rotated the farthest clockwise when viewed from the front, striking the game ball B most forcefully into the game area 5a (a so-called "right hit"), the fourth protrusion 182d is in approximately the same position as the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not being rotated. Therefore, by holding the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can comfortably maintain the handle 182 in the "right hit" position, reducing the player's sense of fatigue and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the plate unit]
The tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 39 to 42. Figure 39 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and Figure 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit from the rear. Figure 41 is an exploded perspective view of the tray unit disassembled into its main components as viewed from the front, and Figure 42 is an exploded perspective view of the tray unit disassembled into its main components as viewed from the rear. The tray unit 200 is attached to a portion below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 that stores game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and a lower tray 202 that is positioned below the upper tray 201 and can store game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 and the foul cover unit 150.

The dish unit 200 comprises a dish base unit 210 having an upper dish 201 and attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a dish decoration unit 250 having a lower dish 202 attached to the front of the dish base unit 210, and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250 and dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The tray base unit 210 comprises a flat tray unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper tray main body 212 attached to the upper front of the tray unit base 211 and holding the upper tray 201, a mounting base 213 attached to the right of the upper tray main body 212 and protruding forward, a tray unit relay board 214 attached to the right of the mounting base 213, a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the top surface of the mounting base 213, an upper tray pre-ball removal unit 230 attached below the mounting base 213, and an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear of the upper tray pre-ball removal unit 230.

The dish decoration unit 250 comprises a lower dish main body 251 attached to the lower front of the dish unit base 211 and holding a lower dish 202; a dish unit main body 252 attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251; a lower dish ball removal unit 260 attached to the underside of the lower dish main body 251; an upper left dish decoration unit 270 and an upper right dish decoration unit 275 attached to the upper front of the dish unit main body 252, spaced apart on the left and right, respectively; and a lower left dish decoration unit 280 and a lower right dish decoration unit 285 attached below the upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275, respectively.

The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player, which includes a rotation operation section 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressure operation section 303 that can be pressed by the player. The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with a performance operation section cover unit 310 that is attached to the front of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 that is housed within the performance operation section cover unit 310, a circular performance operation ring 330 that is attached to the top surface of the operation section base 320 and has the rotation operation section 302, a rotation drive unit 340 that rotates the rotation operation section 302, an operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation section 302, and a gear mounting member 351 to which the operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached.

The performance operation unit 300 also includes a performance operation ring decorative board 352 that illuminates and decorates the performance operation ring 330, a decorative board cover 353 that covers the upper side of the performance operation ring decorative board 352, a vibration speaker 354 attached to the underside of the operation unit base 320, a performance operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the performance operation ring 330, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320.

The tray unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, with the performance operation unit 300 positioned in the center left-right so that the top surface of the performance operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward. The upper tray 201 is positioned to the left of the performance operation unit 300 on the top surface, and the ball dispensing operation unit 220 is positioned to the right of the performance operation unit 300, while the lower tray 202 is positioned below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the performance operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail, primarily with reference to Figures 39 to 42. The upper tray 201 is formed by a tray unit base 211 and an upper tray body 212. The left side of the upper tray 201 bulges forward more than the center when viewed from the front, forming an upwardly open container shape. The upper tray 201 (upper tray body 212) bulges forward most from the left end to the right, approximately one-third of the width of the door frame 3. The front end of the upper tray 201 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right when viewed from the front, and includes a guide passage 201a (see Figure 46) whose depth in the front-to-back direction is slightly greater than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The entire bottom surface of the upper tray 201, including the guide passage 201a, is inclined so that the right end is lower, and the right end of the guide passage 201a when viewed from the front is recessed below the ball dispensing operation unit 220.

When assembled to the tray unit 200, the upper tray 201 has a bottom surface that slopes downward from a position below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 to a position slightly below the outer diameter of the game ball B relative to the upper end of the upper tray ball delivery port 211e. This allows game balls B released forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a to be received and stored within the upper tray 201, and also allows the received game balls B to be supplied from the right end of the guide passage portion 201a through the upper tray ball delivery port 211e to the ball delivery unit 140 side.

The guide passage section 201a is equipped with a metal earth fitting 201b that is electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls around) this fitting, the static electricity charged to the game ball B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 39 to 42, etc. The lower tray 202 is located below the upper tray 201, to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) when viewed from the front. The lower tray 202 is formed of a lower tray main body 251 and a tray unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container that can store game balls B, and is provided with a lower tray ball removal hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall vertically and allows game balls B to be discharged. The lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed by the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be able to open and close.

The lower tray 202 has a roughly rectangular shape extending left and right in plan view, with the front end on the left side protruding further forward than the right side from the center in the left-right direction. The lower tray 202 has a lower tray ball removal hole 202a that penetrates from top to bottom, located near the front end near the right edge. The bottom surface of the lower tray 202 is inclined so that it slopes lower toward the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. When assembled into the tray unit 200, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is located in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c and below the performance operation unit 300.

When the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed, the lower tray 202 can store game balls B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and by opening the lower tray ball removal hole 202a, the stored game balls B can be discharged below the tray unit 200 (e.g., to a cash box). Furthermore, when the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, since the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is located in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, game balls B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be quickly discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 43 to 46. Figure 43 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the front, and Figure 44 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the back. Also, Figure 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the back. The dish base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the performance operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The dish base unit 210 comprises a flat dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right; an upper tray body 212 attached to the upper front of the dish unit base 211 and holding an upper tray 201; a mounting base 213 attached to the right of the upper tray body 212 at the upper front of the dish unit base 211 and protruding forward; and a dish unit relay board 214 attached to the right of the mounting base 213 at the front of the dish unit base 211.

The tray base unit 210 also includes a ball dispensing operation unit 220 attached to the top surface of the mounting base 213, an upper tray pre-ball removal unit 230 attached to the front of the tray unit base 211 below the mounting base 213, and an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 211 behind the upper tray pre-ball removal unit 230.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed in the shape of a flat plate (a shallow box shape with an open rear) extending left and right across the entire width of the door frame base 101.

The tray unit base 211 is equipped with an upper tray ball supply port 211a that penetrates from front to back near the upper left corner when viewed from the front and extends cylindrically to the rear; a speaker port 211b that penetrates from front to back below the upper tray ball supply port 211a and has punched metal attached to the front; a lower tray ball supply port 211c that penetrates from front to front at the lower part to the left of the center when viewed from the front and extends cylindrically to the rear; a notch 211d that is cut out in the right wall of the part that extends cylindrically to the rear of the lower tray ball supply port 211c to a size that allows game ball B to pass through; and an upper tray ball delivery port 211e that penetrates from front to front on the upper right side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c when viewed from the front and extends vertically, with its upper part located at the right end of the upper tray main body 212.

The tray unit base 211 also has a mounting protrusion 211f that protrudes forward to the right of the upper tray ball supply port 211e and on which the mounting base is placed; a slider insertion port 211g that penetrates front to back below the upper tray body to the left of the upper tray ball supply port 211e and through which the operating transmission part 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240 is inserted; a handle insertion port 211h that penetrates front to back at the lower right corner when viewed from the front and through which the tubular part 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted; and a cylinder insertion port 211i that penetrates front to back near the right corner when viewed from the front and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has its front end opening into the rear wall of the upper tray 201, and its cylindrical rear end passes through the upper tray ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101 from the front and connects to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. This allows game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 to be supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the lower tray ball supply port 211c has its front end opening into the rear wall of the lower tray 202, and its cylindrical rear end passes through the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front and connects to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. This allows game balls B circulating through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to be supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. In addition, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. As a result, by operating the upper tray ball removal button 222, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202 via the upper tray ball supply port 211e, the entrance 141a and ball removal port 141b of the ball supply unit 140, the ball supply guide path 241b and ball removal guide path 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240, and the cutout portion 211d.

When assembled to the tray base unit 210, the upper tray ball supply port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 of the upper tray ball removal unit 240, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 to the ball supply guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper tray body]
The upper tray body 212 of the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 45 and 46. The upper tray body 212 is attached to the front of the tray unit base 211 and cooperates with the tray unit base 211 to form the upper tray 201. The upper tray body 212 is formed in a container-like (dish-shaped) shape with an open top and rear. The upper tray body 212 extends left and right, with the left side bulging forward more than the center when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper tray body 212 recedes rearward from the most forward-bulging part toward the right when viewed from the front, and the depth in the front-to-back direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the upper tray body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper part of the upper tray body 212 near the right end is closed.

When the upper tray body 212 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the section that is closed at the top near the right end is attached so that it fits under the ball dispensing operation unit 220. Furthermore, the upper tray body 212 has a performance operation unit attachment portion 212a formed in the middle of the upper part in the left-right direction, and part of the performance operation unit 300 is attached to this performance operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 while being placed on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball dispensing operation unit 220 is attached to the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open top. The mounting base 213 has an insertion hole 213a that penetrates vertically near the left end and a through hole 213b that penetrates vertically at the rear right corner.

The insertion hole 213a of the mounting base 213 is for inserting the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball extraction front unit 230. Furthermore, the through hole 213b is for inserting a wiring cable to connect the ball dispensing operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 is intended to relay the connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100 and the upper left dish decorative board 273, upper right dish decorative board 278, lower left dish decorative board 283, lower right dish decorative board 288, and operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface of this dish unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball lending operation unit]
The ball dispensing operation unit 220 of the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 39 to 46. The ball dispensing operation unit 220 is attached to the front of the tray unit base 211 via a mounting base 213. This ball dispensing operation unit 220 is used to discharge game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, to deposit cash or a prepaid card into a ball dispensing machine (not shown) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then dispense a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200, to display the remaining amount of cash or a prepaid card deposited into the ball dispensing machine, and to return the cash or a prepaid card deposited into the ball dispensing machine minus the amount of the dispensed game balls B.

The ball lending operation unit 220 comprises a base portion 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper tray ball removal button 222 located near the left end of the top surface of the base portion 221, a translucent, disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 located to the right of the upper tray ball removal button 222 on the top surface of the base portion 221, a ball lending button 224 located on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, a return button 225 located on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) located at the rear lower part of the ball lending operation base 223.

The upper tray ball removal button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the top surface of the base 221, and can be moved downward by the player pressing it. The ball lending button 224 is circular. The return button 225 is triangular. The ball lending display is made up of three 7-segment LEDs, which can be seen through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 when illuminated.

By pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222, the ball lending operation unit 220 can eject game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 into the lower tray. Furthermore, by inserting cash or a prepaid card with remaining balance into the ball lending machine and then pressing the ball lending button 224, a predetermined number of game balls B will be supplied to the upper tray 201. By pressing the return button 225, the amount of game balls B loaned will be deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit displays the remaining balance of the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. Furthermore, the ball lending display unit also displays an error code if the ball lending machine malfunctions.

[3-5c-6. Upper tray ball removal unit before and after]
The upper tray pre-ball removal unit 230 and upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 45 and 46. The upper tray pre-ball removal unit 230 and upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed.

The upper tray ball removal unit 230 is attached to the left of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front of the tray unit base 211, below the ball lending operation unit 220. The upper tray ball removal unit 240 is attached to the rear of the upper tray ball removal unit 230 on the rear of the tray unit base 211.

The upper tray ball removal front unit 230 comprises a cylindrical front base 231 that is attached to the front of the tray unit base 211 and extends vertically, and a front slider 232 that is inserted into the cylindrical front base 231 so that it can move vertically. The front base 231 is attached to the front of the tray unit base 211, near the front of the upper tray ball supply port 211e and slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, with its upper end abutting the lower end of the upper tray ball removal button 222 and its lower end abutting the upper surface of the operating receiving portion 242a of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 of the upper tray ball removal post unit 240.

The upper tray ball removal unit 240 comprises a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball supply port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, an upper tray ball removal slider 242 attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be able to slide up and down, a spring 243 that biases the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241.

The rear base 241 is equipped with a ball receiving opening 241a that protrudes upward from the portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and opens toward the front, allowing game ball B to pass through; a ball feed guideway 241b that guides the game ball B received in the ball receiving opening 241a downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then rearward; and a ball removal guideway 241c that guides the game ball B downward from a position lower than the ball feed guideway 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then to the right when viewed from behind.

When assembled to the tray base unit 210, the ball receiving opening 241a is formed at the downstream end (right end when viewed from the front) of the guide passage section 201a of the upper tray 201, in a position that opens forward through the upper tray ball supply opening 211e of the tray unit base 211. When assembled to the door frame 3, the ball supply guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball supply unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part. This allows game balls B supplied to the upper tray 201 to enter the entrance 141a of the ball supply unit 140 through the ball receiving opening 241a and ball supply guide path 241b.

The portion of the ball removal guideway 241c extending to the left and right protrudes further to the right as viewed from the rear than the portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably mounted, is inclined so that the right end is lower as viewed from the rear, and opens to the right side as viewed from the rear. The rear side of the portion of the ball removal guideway 241c extending to the left and right is closed by a rear cover 244. When assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guideway 241b is located in front of the ball removal opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, and the right end of the portion extending to the left and right as viewed from the rear is connected to the cutout 211d of the lower tray ball supply opening 211c in the tray unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is released into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball ejection guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball removal slider 242 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an actuation receiving portion 242a that protrudes forward from the upper left corner, and an actuation transmitting portion 242b that protrudes rearward from the rear surface behind the actuation receiving portion 242a. The actuation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. The actuation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that its upper surface is positioned downward as it extends rearward, and its lower surface extends horizontally to connect with the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the actuation receiving portion 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion port 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear, and the lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball removal front unit 230 abuts against the upper surface of the actuation receiving portion 242a. Furthermore, when the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the actuation transmission portion 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the actuation rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 abuts against its upper surface.

The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241, and the lower end is attached to the upper tray ball removal slider 242, biasing the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upper limit of its upward movement due to the biasing force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243.

The upper tray ball removal front unit 230 and the upper tray ball removal rear unit 240 position the upper tray ball removal slider 242 at the upper end of its upward movement due to the biasing force of the spring 243, and position the upper tray ball removal button 222 at the upper end of its upward movement via the front slider 232 abutting the upper surface of the actuation receiving portion 242a of the upper tray ball removal slider 242. Furthermore, because the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upper end of its upward movement due to the biasing force of the spring 243, the actuation rod 143c abutting the upper surface of the actuation transmission portion 242b is prevented from moving downward, and the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, separating the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b in the ball feeding unit 140 are partitioned, and the game ball B sent from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving port 241a can be sent from the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144 to the ball supply port 142a and to the ball launching device 540.

On the other hand, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the force of the spring 243, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, allowing the operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143, which abuts the upper surface of the operating transmission part 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, to move downward.The load of the weight part 143d of the ball removal member 143 causes the ball removal member 143 to rotate, and the partition part 143a moves back from between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b.As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper tray 201 through the ball receiving opening 241a and the ball feed guide path 241b is ejected forward from the ball removal opening 141b, which opens below the entrance 141a. The game ball B discharged forward from the ball discharge port 141b passes through the ball discharge guide path 241c and is guided through the cutout 211d into the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and is then released from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202, resulting in the game ball B in the upper tray 201 being discharged into the lower tray 202.

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the force of the spring 243, and the upper tray ball removal button 222 rises via the front slider 232 abutting the actuation receiving part 242a. At the same time, the actuation rod 143c abutting the actuation transmission part 242b rotates the ball removal member 143, positioning the partition part 143a between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b and returning to its original position.

In this way, the upper tray pre-ball removal unit 230 and the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 can feed the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launcher 540 via the ball feeding unit 140, or discharge it to the lower tray 202.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 47 to 50. Figure 47 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as seen from the front, and Figure 48 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as seen from the back. Figure 49 is an exploded perspective view of the plate decoration unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 50 is an exploded perspective view of the plate decoration unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the back. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front of the plate base unit 210, with the performance operation unit 300 attached from the front in the center in the left-right direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire plate unit 200.

The dish decoration unit 250 comprises a lower dish main body 251 attached to the lower front of the dish unit base 211 and working together with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202; a dish unit main body 252 attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251; a lower dish ball removal unit 260 attached to the underside of the lower dish main body 251; an upper left dish decoration unit 270 and an upper right dish decoration unit 275 attached to the upper front of the dish unit main body 252, spaced apart from each other on the left and right; and a lower left dish decoration unit 280 and a lower right dish decoration unit 285 attached below the upper left dish decoration unit 270 and upper right dish decoration unit 275, respectively, on the entire surface of the dish unit main body 252.

[3-5d-1. Lower tray body]
The lower tray body 251 in the tray display unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 47 to 50. The lower tray body 251 cooperates with the tray unit base 211 of the tray base unit 210 to form the lower tray 202. The lower tray body 251 extends left and right and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that is open at the top and rear. This lower tray body 251 is attached to the lower front of the tray unit base 211, to the left of the center in the left-right direction, so that the open rear is closed.

The lower tray body 251 has a generally rectangular shape extending left and right in plan view, with the front end on the left side protruding further forward than the right side from the center in the left-right direction. A lower tray ball removal hole 202a that penetrates vertically is formed near the front end of the right end of the lower tray body 251 in plan view. The bottom surface of the lower tray body 251 is inclined so that it slopes lower toward the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. The lower tray ball removal hole 202a is openably and closably closed by the lower tray ball removal cover 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260.

When the lower tray body 251 is assembled to the tray decoration unit 250, the outer periphery and part of the underside are covered by the tray unit body 252. Furthermore, when the lower tray body is assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface is located lower than the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is located in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. This allows game balls B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c to be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 47 to 50. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges out so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges out so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. In addition, the top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 comprises upper side bulges 252a at the top that bulge forward from both the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extend downward, spaced apart on the left and right; a lower front decorative portion 252b at the bottom that bulges forward on the left side of the center in the left-right direction to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251; and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends flatly rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

The left and right upper side bulges 252a are box-shaped with an open rear, and the upper left tray decorative unit 270, lower left tray decorative unit 280, upper right tray decorative unit 275, and lower right tray decorative unit 285 are attached to their respective front faces. The right end of the lower surface of the left upper side bulge 252a is connected to the lower front decorative part 252b. The lower end of the right upper side bulge 252a is connected to the lower front decorative part 252b.

The tray unit main body 252 has a lower tray opening 252d that penetrates from front to back between the upper side bulge 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower tray opening 252d is large enough to allow a player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that it becomes wider from top to bottom as it extends to the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed into a cylindrical shape that extends from front to back by the lower tray main body 251 and the underside of the upper side bulge 252a on the left side.

The dish unit main body 252 also has a front cutout 252e cut out upward from the lower front edge of the portion of the lower front decorative portion 252b that covers the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251, and a bottom cutout 252f cut out in the portion of the bottom plate portion 252c that is below the lower dish main body 251. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front cutout 252e and bottom cutout 252f.

Furthermore, the dish unit main body 252 is equipped with a handle insertion opening 252g that penetrates from front to back at the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b and through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates from front to back through the lower front decorative portion 252b above the handle insertion opening 252g and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a performance operation unit mounting portion 252i that is formed between a pair of upper side bulges 252a in the left-right center and to which the performance operation unit 300 is attached. The performance operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to a width that is approximately one-third the left-right width of the dish unit main body 252.

When assembled to the dish unit 200, the dish unit main body 252 is formed to completely cover the front of the dish base unit 210, with the speaker port 211b facing forward through the lower dish opening 252d. Furthermore, when assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal button 263 of the lower dish ball removal unit 260 faces forward through the front cutout 252e, and the lower dish ball removal base 261 of the lower dish ball removal unit 260 closes the bottom cutout 252f, so that the bottom surfaces are flush with each other.

[3-5d-3. Bottom tray ball removal unit]
The lower tray ball removal unit 260 in the tray decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 47 to 50. The lower tray ball removal unit 260 is attached to the underside of the lower tray body 251, and is used to store game balls B in the lower tray 202 or discharge game balls B from the lower tray 202 by opening and closing the lower tray ball removal hole 202a.

The lower tray ball removal unit 260 comprises a flat lower tray ball removal base 261 attached to the underside of the lower tray main body 251 and having a through hole that runs vertically in the front right corner when viewed from above, a slider 262 attached to the upper surface of the lower tray ball removal base 261 so that it can slide back and forth, a lower tray ball removal button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 that biases the slider 262 forward, a lower tray ball removal lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 back and forth, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower tray ball removal lid 265 in the open position via the slider 262.

The lower tray ball removal base 261 is formed to a size that closes the bottom cutout portion 252f of the tray unit main body 252, and has a through hole that runs vertically at a position that coincides with the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 (lower tray main body 251). The through hole in the lower tray ball removal base 261 is formed to be the same size as the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in the shape of a flat plate that extends forward and backward, and is attached to the lower tray ball removal base 261 at a position slightly to the left of the center in the left-right direction, so that it can slide forward and backward. The slider 262 has a protruding pin that protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape.

The left end of the lower tray ball removal cover 265 is attached to the lower tray ball removal base 261 at a position to the left of the slider 262 so that it can rotate around an axis extending vertically, and the right end extends to the right beyond the slider 262 so that the right end can close the through hole. The lower tray ball removal cover 265 has a slit extending left and right into which the protruding pin of the slider 262 can be slidably inserted.

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the tray decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal base 261 closes the bottom cutout 252f of the tray unit main body 252, and the underside of the lower tray ball removal base 261 is located flush with the underside of the bottom plate portion 252c. The lower tray ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front cutout 252e of the tray unit main body 252. In the normal state of the lower tray ball removal unit 260, the slider 262 is positioned at the forward end of its travel due to the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end of the lower tray ball removal cover 265 is located directly above the through hole (lower tray ball removal hole 202a), closing the through hole.

In this normal state, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball removal cover 265, allowing game balls B to be stored in the lower tray 202. Also, in the normal state, the front surface of the lower tray ball removal button 263 is approximately aligned with the front surface of the periphery of the front cutout 252e on the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

Under normal conditions, when the lower tray ball removal button 263 is pressed backward and moved backward against the force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward along with the lower tray ball removal button 263. As the slider 262 moves backward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower tray ball removal cover 265 backward through the slit, causing the lower tray ball removal cover 265 to rotate around the left end in a direction in which the right end moves backward. Then, when the right end of the lower tray ball removal cover 265, which was located directly above the through-hole, moves backward from the position of the through-hole, the through-hole is opened and the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is opened, allowing the game balls B in the lower tray 202 to be ejected below the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball removal hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower tray ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and even when the pressure on the lower tray ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264. This causes the right end of the lower tray ball removal cover 265 to remain rotated rearward, keeping the lower tray ball removal hole 202a open and allowing the game balls B in the lower tray 202 to be continuously ejected downward.

To close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is set back from the front of the lower front decorative part 252b, is pressed backward, which releases the slider 262 from its hold by the holding mechanism 266. When the pressure on the lower tray ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264, returning the front of the lower tray ball removal button 263 to a position aligned with the front of the lower front decorative part 252b, and the lower tray ball removal lid 265 rotates so that its right end is positioned directly above the through hole, closing the lower tray ball removal hole 202a with the lower tray ball removal lid 265. This allows game balls B to be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5d-4. Upper left decorative unit and upper right decorative unit]
The upper left dish decorative unit 270 and upper right dish decorative unit 275 of the dish decorative unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 47 to 50. The upper left dish decorative unit 270 and upper right dish decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper front of the upper side bulge 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The upper left dish decorative unit 270 and upper right dish decorative unit 275 are located at the top of the dish unit 200 and decorate both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 300.

The upper left dish decorative unit 270 comprises a semi-cylindrical upper left dish decorative body 271 that extends left and right and is translucent, an upper left dish reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left dish decorative body 271, and an upper left dish decorative board 273 attached to the rear side of the upper left dish reflector 272 and with multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The upper left decorative element 271 extends in a curved shape, moving forward and downward as it moves from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the top of the upper left side bulge 252a. The upper left decorative element 271 is formed as a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally upward and left at the left end and the central axis extending left and right at the right end, giving it the shape of a twisted semicylinder. This upper left decorative element 271 is milky white in color.

The upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and has through holes formed in the areas corresponding to the LEDs on the upper left decorative board 273. The multiple LEDs mounted on the upper left decorative board 273 are full-color LEDs, and when illuminated, they can illuminate and decorate the upper left decorative body 271.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the left end of the upper left dish decorative unit 270 is continuous with the bottom end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is continuous with the left end of the upper center dish decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 of the performance operation unit 300. Because the upper left dish decorative unit 270 does not have a rib along the length of the upper left dish decorative body 271, when the multiple LEDs on the upper left dish decorative board 273 are illuminated, the entire front of the upper left dish decorative body 271 can be illuminated and decorated in a generally uniform manner, giving the appearance of embedded fluorescent lights.

The upper right decorative unit 275 comprises a semi-cylindrical, translucent upper right decorative body 276, an upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear of the upper right decorative body 276, and an upper right decorative board 278 attached to the rear of the upper right reflector 277 and with multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape, moving forward and downward as it moves from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the top of the upper right side bulge 252a. The upper right decorative body 276 is formed as a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, giving it the shape of a twisted semicylinder. This upper right decorative body 276 is milky white in color.

The upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and has through holes formed in the areas corresponding to the LEDs on the upper right decorative board 278. The multiple LEDs mounted on the upper right decorative board 278 are full-color LEDs, and when illuminated, they can illuminate and decorate the upper right decorative body 276.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the right end of the upper right decorative unit 275 is continuous with the bottom end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is continuous with the right end of the upper center decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 of the performance operation unit 300. Because the upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib along the length of the upper right decorative body 276, when the multiple LEDs on the upper right decorative board 278 are illuminated, the entire front of the upper right decorative body 276 can be illuminated almost uniformly, giving the appearance of embedded fluorescent lights.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the upper left tray decorative unit 270 and the upper right tray decorative unit 275 partially protrude upward beyond the front end of the upper side bulge 252a of the tray unit main body 252 of the tray decorative unit 250, forming a step between the upper left tray decorative unit 270 and the upper right tray decorative unit 275, making them higher than the upper side bulge 252a. This allows players to use the step between the upper left tray decorative unit 270 and the upper right tray decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulge 252a to hook their fingers, providing a fingerhold when leveling the game balls B in the upper tray 201 or operating the performance control unit 301, described below. Furthermore, the step between the upper left tray decorative unit 270 and the upper right tray decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulge 252a prevents the game balls B on the upper side bulge 252a from spilling forward.

[3-5d-5. Bottom left decorative unit and bottom right decorative unit]
The left-bottom tray decorative unit 280 and the right-bottom tray decorative unit 285 in the tray decorative unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 47 to 50. The left-bottom tray decorative unit 280 and the right-bottom tray decorative unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the tray unit main body 252 so as to extend along the left-top tray decorative unit 270 and the right-top tray decorative unit 275, respectively. The left-bottom tray decorative unit 280 and the right-bottom tray decorative unit 285 work in cooperation with the left-top tray decorative unit 270 and the right-top tray decorative unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the tray unit 200 and both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 300.

The left-bottom decorative unit 280 comprises a translucent, semi-cylindrical left-bottom decorative body 281 that extends left and right, a left-bottom reflector 282 attached to the rear of the left-bottom decorative body 281, and a left-bottom decorative board 283 attached to the rear of the left-bottom reflector 282 and with multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The left-bottom decorative element 281 extends in a curved shape, moving both forward and downward as it moves from the left end to the right end, and in a plan view, it extends in the shape of an arc with its center at the rear, and is attached to the bottom of the upper left side bulge 252a. The left-bottom decorative element 281 is a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the left-top decorative element 271 and the right-top decorative element 276, and at the left end, the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper left and rear, while at the right end, the central axis extends to the left and right, forming a shape resembling a bent semicylinder. The left end of the left-bottom decorative element 281 is formed into a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the left-bottom decorative element 281 changes as it tapers toward the left end. This left-bottom decorative element 281 is formed in a milky white color.

The bottom-left reflector 282 is inserted into the bottom-left decorative body 281 from the rear, and has through holes formed in the areas corresponding to the LEDs on the bottom-left decorative board 283. The multiple LEDs mounted on the bottom-left decorative board 283 are full-color LEDs, and when illuminated, they can illuminate and decorate the bottom-left decorative body 281.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the left end of the lower-left dish decorative unit 280 is located below the left end of the upper-left dish decorative unit 270, and its right end is continuous with the left end of the lower-center dish decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the performance operation unit 300. The left end of the lower-left dish decorative body 281 of the lower-left dish decorative unit 280 is spherically shaped, so the left end appears to be recessed into the door frame 3. The lower-left dish decorative unit 280 does not have a rib along the length of the lower-left dish decorative body 281, so when the multiple LEDs on the lower-left dish decorative board 283 are illuminated, the entire front of the lower-left dish decorative body 281 can be illuminated and decorated in a generally uniform manner, giving the appearance of embedded fluorescent lights.

The right-bottom decorative unit 285 comprises a translucent, semi-cylindrical right-bottom decorative body 286 that extends left and right, a right-bottom reflector 287 attached to the rear of the right-bottom decorative body 286, and a right-bottom decorative board 288 attached to the rear of the right-bottom reflector 287 and with multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower right decorative element 286 extends in a curved shape, moving both forward and downward as it moves from the right end to the left end, and in a plan view, it extends in the shape of an arc with its center at the rear, and is attached to the bottom of the upper right side bulge 252a. The lower right decorative element 286 is a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left decorative element 271 and the upper right decorative element 276, and at the right end, the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right and rear, and at the left end, the central axis extends left and right, forming a shape resembling a bent semicylinder. The right end of the lower right decorative element 286 is formed into a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower right decorative element 286 changes as it tapers toward the right end. This lower right decorative element 286 is formed in a milky white color.

The reflector 287 is inserted into the decorative body 286 from the rear, and has through holes formed in the areas corresponding to the LEDs on the decorative board 288. The multiple LEDs mounted on the decorative board 288 are full-color LEDs, and when illuminated, they can illuminate the decorative body 286.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the right end of the lower right decorative unit 285 is located below the right end of the upper right decorative unit 275, and its left end is continuous with the right end of the lower center decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the performance operation unit 300. The right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the lower right decorative unit 285 is spherically shaped, so the right end appears to be recessed into the door frame 3. The lower right decorative body 286 of the lower right decorative unit 285 does not have a rib along its length, so when the multiple LEDs on the lower right decorative board 288 are illuminated, the entire front of the lower right decorative body 286 can be illuminated and decorated in a generally uniform manner, giving the appearance of embedded fluorescent lights.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 51 to 54. Figure 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit, viewed from the direction in which the effect operation button moves. Figure 52(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and Figure 52(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. Figure 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit, disassembled into its main components, viewed from the front, and Figure 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit, disassembled into its main components, viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is located in the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction. It decorates the dish unit 200 and allows players to operate it to participate in the effect when a player-participation effect is executed. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

The presentation operation unit 300 is equipped with a presentation operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The presentation operation section 301 is composed of a rotation operation section 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressure operation section 303 that can be pressed by the player. The section 301 can accept player input and move the rotation operation section 302, allowing the player to not only shoot game balls but also participate in presentations during play. The presentation operation section 301 has the rotation operation section 302 formed in a circular ring shape with an inner diameter that is approximately 3/5 the outer diameter, and the pressure operation section 303 is located within this ring. The pressure operation section 303 is located at the center of the rotation operation section 302 and is composed of a central pressure operation section 303a with a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation section 302, and a circular outer peripheral pressure operation section 303b located between the outer periphery of the central pressure operation section 303a and the inner periphery of the rotation operation section 302.

The performance operation unit 300 comprises a performance operation cover unit 310 attached to the front of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation unit base 320 housed within the performance operation cover unit 310, a circular performance operation ring 330 attached to the top surface of the operation unit base 320 and having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 that rotates the rotation operation unit 302 of the performance operation ring 330, an operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation between the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation operation unit 302 of the performance operation ring 330, and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably mounts the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation unit base 320.

The performance operation unit 300 also includes a performance operation ring decorative board 352 attached to the top surface of the operation unit base 320 below the performance operation ring 330 and having multiple LEDs mounted on its top surface; a decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the top side of the performance operation ring decorative board 352; a vibration speaker 354 attached to the underside of the operation unit base 320; a performance operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the performance operation ring 330; and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320.

[3-5e-1. Performance operation section cover unit]
The performance operation section cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 and 54. The performance operation section cover unit 310 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting section 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front of the performance operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200. The performance operation section cover unit 310 is formed in the shape of a container that is open at the top and rear.

The performance control unit cover unit 310 comprises a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 concave downwards, a semicircular unit front cover 312 attached to the upper front end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, an upper dish center reflector 313 attached from the rear within the upper dish center decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312, an upper dish center decorative board 314 attached to the upper dish center reflector 313 and equipped with multiple LEDs capable of emitting light forward, a lower dish center reflector 315 attached from the rear within the lower dish center decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and a lower dish center decorative board 316 attached to the lower dish center reflector 315 and equipped with multiple LEDs capable of emitting light forward.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape with the front side bulging downward from the rear center in the fore-and-aft direction, and the rear side is attached so that it is placed from above on the performance operation unit mounting portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis perpendicular to the imaginary plane formed on the semicircular arc-shaped upper edge of the front part is positioned further forward as it extends upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of approximately 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has multiple drainage holes 311a formed in the lowest part when assembled to the dish unit 200.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape in a plan view that bulges forward to fit along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and is attached to the upper front end of the unit lower cover 311. The unit front cover 312 is equipped with an upper central dish decorative body 312a, whose semicircular arc bulges forward and extends in a semicircular arc shape to fit along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a lower central dish decorative body 312b, whose semicircular arc bulges forward below the upper central dish decorative body 312a and extends in a semicircular arc shape to fit along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. The lower end of the lower central dish decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The upper and lower central decorative bodies 312a and 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by splitting a cylinder of approximately the same thickness (radius) in half and bending the split surface in a semicircular arc toward the center. Compared to the upper central decorative body 312a, the lower central decorative body 312b extends in a semicircular arc with a greater curvature, while the lower central decorative body 312b is formed in a semicylindrical shape with a slightly thinner thickness than the upper central decorative body 312a. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the upper central decorative body 312a protrudes further forward than the front end of the lower central decorative body 312b. Furthermore, when assembled into the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the upper center dish decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the upper left dish decorative unit 270 and the left end of the upper right dish decorative unit 275, respectively, and the left and right ends of the lower center dish decorative body 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left dish decorative unit 280 and the left end of the lower right dish decorative unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is translucent and is formed in a milky white color.

In addition, when the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end becomes the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is approximately half the overall width of the door frame base 101 in the left-right direction.

The plate center reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted from the rear into the plate center decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 and attached. The plate center reflector 313 blocks light from the LEDs mounted on the plate center decorative board 314 from leaking backward (inward). The plate center decorative board 314 is formed in a semicircular arc shape to fit the plate center decorative body 312a, and has multiple LEDs mounted on its top surface that can emit light forward (outward). The multiple LEDs on the plate center decorative board 314 are full-color LEDs that, when illuminated, can illuminate and decorate the plate center decorative body 312a.

The under-dish center reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted from the rear into the under-dish center decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 and attached. The under-dish center reflector 315 blocks light from the LEDs mounted on the under-dish center decorative board 316 from leaking backward (inward). The under-dish center decorative board 316 is formed in a semicircular arc shape to fit the under-dish center decorative body 312b, and has multiple LEDs mounted on its top surface that can emit light forward (outward). The multiple LEDs on the under-dish center decorative board 316 are full-color LEDs that, when illuminated, can illuminate and decorate the under-dish center decorative body 312b.

The performance control unit cover unit 310 does not have any reinforcing ribs along the semi-arc-shaped extension of the upper dish center decorative body 312a and lower dish center decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. Therefore, when the LEDs on the upper dish center decorative board 314 and the lower dish center decorative board 316 are illuminated, the entire surface of each can be illuminated almost uniformly, giving the appearance of embedded fluorescent lights.

When assembled to the tray unit 200, the front end of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 protrudes further forward than the upper tray 201 and lower tray 202. Furthermore, the performance operation unit cover unit 310 has the upper tray center decorative body 312a connected to the upper tray left decorative body 271 and upper tray right decorative body 276, and the lower tray center decorative body 312b connected to the lower tray left decorative body 281 and lower tray right decorative body 286. This not only makes the performance operation unit 300 stand out, but also improves its appearance with its integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the performance operation unit cover unit 310 from above, with its lower end attached to the performance operation unit cover unit 310 and its upper rear end attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 212a of the upper tray body 212 in the tray base unit 210. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container with an open top.

The operation unit base 320 comprises a main body 321 that is roughly cubic and box-shaped with an open top, a flange 322 that extends outward from the top end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery, multiple (four in this case) legs 323 that protrude downward from the bottom surface of the main body 321, an upper mounting portion 324 that is formed at the rear end of the flange 322 and is attached to the dish base unit 210, and a gear bearing 325 that penetrates the flange 322 on the left outside of the main body 321, opens upward, and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

The operation unit base 320 has a main body 321 formed to a size that can accommodate the performance operation button unit 360 inside. A vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 from below, and the portion of the underside where the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed as a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed to easily resonate with vibrations from the vibration speaker 354, amplifying the vibrations and converting them into sound such as voice or music for output.

The legs 361b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 are attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body 321. The main body 321 also has through-holes formed on the outer periphery of the bottom wall to drain any liquid that has entered the main body 321. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 has a diameter such that its outer circumference roughly matches the inner circumference of the central upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. The performance operation ring decorative board 352 and decorative board cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring mounting base 331 of the performance operation ring 330 is also attached. The lower ends of the multiple legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 of the performance operation unit cover unit 310.

The gear bearing portion 325 cooperates with the gear mounting member to mount the operation ring transmission gear so that it can rotate about an axis extending laterally. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is mounted on the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is exposed to the outside below the flange portion 322.

When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the performance operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is positioned slightly lower than the upper surface of the central upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Furthermore, when assembled to the performance operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the underside of the main body portion 321 in contact with it.

[3-5e-3. Performance Control Ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 55 and 56. Figure 55(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from the top front, and Figure 55(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from the bottom front. Figure 56(a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from the top front, and Figure 56(b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from the bottom front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320 and has a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) approximately twice the front-to-back dimension of the upper tray 201, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter approximately 3/5 the outer diameter. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is approximately 13 cm.

The performance operation ring 330 comprises a circular ring mounting base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, a circular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331, a plurality of bushings 333 that abut the outer surface of the rotation base 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring mounting base 331 around an axis extending vertically, and a ring removal member 334 attached to the ring mounting base 331 and restricts the upward movement of the rotation base 332.

The performance operation ring 330 also includes an outer ring upper cover 335 that is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and forms part of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer ring lower cover 336 that is attached to the underside of the outer ring upper cover 335 and forms part of the rotation operation unit 302, and an inner ring cover 337 that is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner periphery of the outer ring upper cover 335 and forms part of the rotation operation unit 302. The outer ring upper cover 335, outer ring lower cover 336, and inner ring cover 337 are each formed in a translucent circular ring shape.

The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than that of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, and an inner diameter approximately the same as that of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is equipped with a mounting portion 331a on the upper surface along the inner periphery, on which the rotation base 332 is slidably placed in the circumferential direction; boss portions 331b that protrude cylindrically upward from multiple (four in this case) positions on the upper surface, spaced apart in the circumferential direction, outside the mounting portion 331a, for rotatably mounting the bushing 333; and through-holes 331c that penetrate vertically at multiple positions spaced apart in the circumferential direction, outside the mounting portion 331a, on the upper surface. The multiple through-holes 331c are formed in positions corresponding to the LEDs on the performance operation ring decorative board 352.

The rotating base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331a of the ring mounting base 331, and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotating base 332 is equipped with a ring gear 332a that protrudes downward from its underside and extends circumferentially. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear that protrudes downward as it approaches the center of the rotating base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the performance operation ring 330, it faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. When assembled to the performance operation unit 300, this ring gear 332a meshes with the ring side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350.

The ring outer upper cover 335 comprises an outer upper surface portion 335a, which is an arc extending in an annular shape that forms the outer and upper part of the circle; decorative portions 335b, which are formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface portion 335a and arranged in multiple circumferential directions; and outer upper cover mounting portions 335c, which extend downward from the inner peripheral edge of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then toward the center and are arranged in multiple circumferential directions. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in an annular shape covers an area of 1/4 of a circle. The decorative portions 335b have a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portions 335c extend slightly downward from the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and are attached to the upper surface of the rotating base 332.

The ring outer lower cover 336 comprises an outer lower surface portion 336a, which is an arc extending in an annular shape that forms the outer and lower part of the circle, and multiple outer lower cover attachment portions 336b that protrude upward and toward the center from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a and are arranged circumferentially. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in the shape of an arc extending in an annular shape over an area of 1/8 of a circle. The outer lower cover attachment portions 336b are attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The inner-ring cover 337 comprises an inner surface portion 337a, which is an arc extending in an annular shape that forms the interior and upper portion of the circle; a cylindrical tubular surface portion 337b that extends downward parallel to the central axis from the inner end of the inner surface portion 337a; and multiple inner-cover attachment portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the tubular surface portion 337b and arranged circumferentially. The inner surface portion 337a of the inner-ring cover 337 is formed in an annular shape with an arc extending in an area of 1/8 of a circle. The cylindrical inner diameter of the tubular surface portion 337b is the same size as the inner diameter of the rotating base 332. The inner-cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the top surface of the rotating base 332.

When the outer upper ring cover 335, outer lower ring cover 336, and inner ring cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface 335a, outer lower surface 336a, and inner surface 337a are formed so that they are continuous. The outer upper surface 335a, outer lower surface 336a, and inner surface 337a together form an area that covers more than half of a circle, forming a donut shape as a whole. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with illumination using the effect operation ring decorative board 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 57 to 59. Figure 57(a) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the performance operation unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as seen from the back. Figure 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit as seen from the right front, and Figure 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit as seen from the left front. The rotation drive unit 340 is used to drive the rotation operation unit 302 of the performance operation ring 330 to rotate and detect the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

The rotary drive unit 340 includes a rotary drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side of the rotary drive base 341 with its rotation shaft protruding leftward, a drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a speed change gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, a transmission detection gear member 345 rotated by the speed change gear 344 and which rotates the operation ring transmission gear 350, and a gear cover 346 that rotatably mounts the speed change gear 344 and transmission detection gear member 345 to the rotary drive base in cooperation with each other and covers the drive gear 343, speed change gear 344, and transmission detection gear member 345 from the left.

The rotation drive unit 340 also includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 attached to the gear cover 346 to detect the rotational position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in the shape of a shallow box that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-to-back direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a first gear 344a in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the drive gear, and a second gear 344b in the form of a spur gear that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 includes a gear portion 345a with a larger diameter than the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b), and multiple detection pieces 345b that protrude leftward from the left side of the gear portion 345a and are arranged at regular intervals around the circumference. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operating ring transmission gear 350. The multiple detection pieces 345b have a circumferential length that is the same as the circumferential spacing. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged around the circumference at intervals of 45 degrees of rotation. These detection pieces 345b are detected by a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart circumferentially at intervals that are not an integer multiple of the intervals between the detection pieces 345b arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same time; rather, one detects the detection piece 345b first. This makes it possible to detect the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 on the performance operation ring 330 via the transmission detection gear member 345.

When the rotation drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper part of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a meshes with the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Furthermore, when assembled to the performance operation unit 300, the rotation drive unit 340 is entirely located within the performance operation unit cover unit 310.

By driving the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation drive unit 340 can rotate the rotation operation part 302 of the effect operation ring 330 in any direction via the drive gear 343, the speed change gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear. Furthermore, the rotation drive unit 340 can rotate the rotation operation part 302 back and forth and vibrate it by repeatedly rotating the drive gear 343 forward and backward within a predetermined rotation angle range using the operation ring drive motor 342.

In addition, when the player rotates the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the rotation drive unit 340 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, thereby detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation portion 302. Therefore, the content of the player participation effect can be changed depending on the rotation direction of the rotation operation portion 302.

In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 can detect the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 using the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and can assist the player's rotation operation by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the same direction as the rotation operation. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, it is possible to apply a load to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to impart an operation feel or a clicking sensation to the rotation operation unit 302 that corresponds to the content of the player-participation presentation.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 and 54. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation part 302 of the performance operation ring 330, and is rotatably attached to the gear bearing part 325 of the operation part base 320.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 comprises a bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a on the rotation base 332 of the performance operation ring 330, and a spur gear-shaped drive side gear portion 350b that rotates integrally with the ring side gear portion 350a and meshes with the gear portion 345a on the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340. The ring side gear portion 350a and the drive side gear portion 350b are formed with pitch circles having the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a narrows in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that its rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the performance operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is inserted from above into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320, and the gear mounting member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320, thereby rotatably attaching the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation unit base 320.

When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the performance operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the performance operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotational operation of the rotational operation portion 302 of the performance operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340, and can also transmit the rotational drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotational operation portion 302 of the performance operation ring 330 to rotate it.

[3-5e-6. Performance operation ring decorative board]
The performance operation ring decorative board 352 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 53 and 54. The performance operation ring decorative board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320, and has multiple LEDs mounted on the upper surface. The performance operation ring decorative board 352 is attached below the performance operation ring 330, and by appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs, the performance operation ring 330 (rotation operation portion 302) can be illuminated and decorated.

The performance operation ring decorative board 352 is shaped like a ring divided into front and rear halves, and is composed of a front decorative board 352a on the front side and a rear decorative board 352b on the rear side. Multiple LEDs are arranged in a row along the outer periphery on the top surface of each of the front decorative board 352a and rear decorative board 352b. The multiple LEDs on the performance operation ring decorative board 352 are full-color LEDs.

When assembled into the performance operation unit 300, the performance operation ring decorative board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the performance operation ring 330. The upper side of the performance operation ring decorative board 352 is covered by a transparent decorative board cover 353. Like the performance operation ring decorative board 352, the decorative board cover 353 is formed in a form divided into front and rear halves, and is composed of a front board cover 353a that covers the front decorative board 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, and a rear board cover 353b that covers the rear decorative board 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The ring decorative board 352 illuminates multiple LEDs mounted on its top surface, allowing the upper outer ring cover 335, lower outer ring cover 336, and inner ring cover 337 that make up the rotating operation unit 302 to be illuminated from the inside through the decorative board cover 353 and the through-holes 331c in the ring mounting base 331. This allows the player to see illuminated decorations that appear as if LEDs were installed inside the rotating operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 and 54. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the underside of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320 with its output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sounds such as voice and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. The vibration speaker 354 can also vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. Compared to vibration devices that use a motor to rotate an eccentric weight, the vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies, allowing for a wider variety of effects to be presented to the player.

[3-5e-8. Performance operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 60 to 62. Figure 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit, viewed from above and the front, and Figure 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit, viewed from below and the front. Figure 62(a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and Figure 62(b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by a player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed to cover the outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a.

The performance operation button unit 360 comprises a button unit base 361 with a roughly circular outer periphery that is attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320; a pair of guide shafts 362 that are arranged symmetrically about the central axis of the button unit base 361 and extend upward in a cylindrical shape; a disk-shaped upper base 363 that connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and has a circular outer periphery that is smaller than the button unit base 361; a disk-shaped lift base 364 that is attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 by the pair of guide shafts 362 so as to be movable in the vertical direction and has a circular outer periphery that is roughly the same size as the button unit base 361; and a pair of lift springs 365 through which the pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted, respectively, and which urge the lift base 364 upward.

The effect operation button unit 360 also includes a central shaft 366 that extends upward in a cylindrical shape from the center of the button unit base 361 and has its upper end attached to the upper base 363, an operation button lift drive motor 367 that is attached to the underside of the button unit base 361 so that its rotation axis protrudes upward, a spur gear-shaped lift drive gear 368 that is attached to the rotation axis of the operation button lift drive motor 367, and a spur gear-shaped driven gear 368 that is engaged with the lift drive gear 368 and rotatably attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361. 9, an elevation cam drive gear member 370 that is rotated by a driven gear 369 and has a central shaft 366 inserted therethrough and rotatably attached, an elevation cam member 371 that is connected at its lower end to the elevation cam drive gear member 370 and has a central shaft 366 inserted therethrough and is rotatably attached, and that raises and lowers the elevation base 364 when it rotates, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 that is attached to the top of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevation drive gear 368, driven gear 369, and elevation cam drive gear member 370 from above.

The performance operation button unit 360 further includes a central button body 373, which has an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and is formed as a bottomed cylinder extending vertically. The central button body 373 is attached above the lift base 364 via a pair of guide shafts 362 so as to be movable vertically; a pair of button springs 374 are positioned between the central button body 373 and the lift base 364 and bias the central button body 373 upward; a central button cover 375, which has approximately the same diameter as the central button body 373 and is formed as a bottomed cylinder with a closed upper end, attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363; and a central button decorative board 376, which is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363 and is equipped with multiple LEDs that can emit light upward. The performance operation button unit 360 includes the central button body 373 and central button cover 375 to form the central pressing operation unit 303a.

The performance operation button unit 360 also includes a circular outer button decorative board 377 with multiple LEDs mounted on its top surface, attached to the upper surface of the lift-up base 364 at a position outer than the central button body 373; a peripheral board cover 378 attached to the lift-up base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the outer button decorative board 377 and the outer periphery of the central button body 373; a translucent cylindrical outer button decorative lens 379 with a three-dimensional decoration, located above the outer button decorative board 377 on the outer periphery of the outer board cover 378, on the outer side of the portion of the outer board cover 378 that covers the outer periphery of the central button body 373; and a transparent outer button cover 380 attached to the lift-up base 364 so as to cover the outer periphery and top surface of the outer decorative lens 379, with the central button cover 375 facing upward at its center. The performance operation button unit 360 includes the outer board cover 378, the outer decorative lens 379, and the outer button cover 380, which together form the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b.

The performance operation button unit 360 also includes a pressure detection sensor 381 attached to the button unit base 361 that detects the pressure operation of the pressure operation unit 303, and a lift detection sensor 382 attached to the button unit base 361 that detects the lifting and lowering of the lifting base 364 by detecting the rotational position of the lifting cam drive gear member 370.

The button unit base 361 comprises a disk-shaped base body 361a and multiple legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320. A pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 are attached to the top surface of this base body 361a, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevation detection sensor 382 are attached to the bottom surface. The lower ends of the legs 361b of the button unit base 361 are attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the top surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, at positions forward and backward from the center, half the diameter of the base body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed from metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of lifting springs 365 are coil springs, with their lower ends abutting the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 and their upper ends abutting the lifting base 364. The lifting springs 365 have a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374.

The lift base 364 has an outer diameter approximately the same as that of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The lift base 364 is equipped with a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, a central hole 364b that extends vertically in the center and is large enough to allow the lift cam member 371 to pass through, a cylindrical vertical wall portion 364c that protrudes upward from the periphery of the central hole 364b, and a pair of guide pins 364d that protrude opposite each other into the central hole 364b near the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are mounted rotatably around that axis.

A pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted into a pair of guide holes 364a, and the lifting base 364 is guided so that it can move up and down. The upper ends of the upright wall portions 364c of the lifting base 364 abut against the upper base 363, restricting upward movement and forming a space between the lifting base 364 and the upper base 363 in which the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 can move. The lifting base 364 is also moved up and down as a pair of guide pins 364d are guided by the cam portions 371a of the lifting cam member 371.

The lifting cam drive gear member 370 comprises a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the lifting cam member 371, and a lifting detection piece 370c that protrudes downward from the gear portion 370a in a cylindrical shape, has two opposing notches cut out, and is detected by the lifting detection sensor 382. The lifting cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The lifting cam member 371 is rotatably mounted with the central shaft 366 inserted through its center. The lifting cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that protrude outward and are spaced 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on its cylindrical outer surface. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending perpendicular to the axis near its lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, a second cam 371d extending upward parallel to the axis from one end of the first cam 371b, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite the second cam 371d (see Figure 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and adjacent cam portions 371a are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364.

The lifting cam member 371 also has a connected portion 371f at its lower end that connects to the connecting portion 370b of the lifting cam drive gear member 370.

The lifting/lowering cam member 371 is formed so that the second cam 371d extends upward from the rear end of the first cam 371b when the lifting/lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the cam portion 371a. When the lifting/lowering cam member 371 rotates, the cam portion 371a guides the guide pin 364d of the lifting/lowering base 364, thereby raising and lowering the lifting/lowering base 364.

The central button body 373 comprises a cylindrical tube portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end of the tube portion 373a, a pair of guide holes 373c penetrating the bottom portion 373b and into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the upright wall portion 364c of the lifting base 364, a pressure detection piece 373e protruding downward from the bottom portion 373b and detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f protruding cylindrically rearward from the bottom portion 373b and through which the button spring 374 is inserted.

The central button body 373 is formed into a cylindrical shape with a bottom, consisting of a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed so that the bottom portion 373b is positioned between the upper base 363 and the lifting base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a protrudes upward beyond the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed into a cylindrical shape that extends slightly downward, and its lower end abuts against the upper surface of the lifting base 364, restricting downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the lifting base 364 abuts against the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button body 373.

The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374, through which a pair of guide bosses 373f pass. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that their lower ends extend downward, penetrating the lifting base 364, and screws with washers inserted therethrough are attached to their lower ends. The washers attached to the lower ends of the guide bosses 373f come into contact with the underside of the lifting base 364, restricting the upward movement of the central button body 373.

The pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is formed to protrude downward through the lift base 364 when the bottom 373b (the lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 abuts against the upper surface of the lift base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. This central button body 373 is formed opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs with a weaker biasing force than the lift springs 365.

The central button cover 375 has a disk-shaped top plate 375a with approximately the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate 375a, and is formed to be translucent. The central button cover 375 is formed into a cylindrical shape with a bottom by the top plate 375a and peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of this central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373.

The central button decorative board 376 has multiple full-color LEDs mounted on its upper surface. By appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs, the central button decorative board 376 can illuminate and decorate the central button cover 375. The peripheral button decorative board 377 has multiple full-color LEDs mounted on its upper surface. By appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs, the peripheral button decorative board 377 can illuminate and decorate the peripheral decorative lens 379 and peripheral button cover 380.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 comprises an annular board portion 378a that covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 and is attached to the lifting base 364, and a cylindrical portion 378b that extends upward in a cylindrical shape from the inner periphery of the board portion 378a and covers the outer periphery of the central button body 373. The outer peripheral board cover 378 is made of a transparent material.

The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 has twisted sections that extend upward and move circumferentially, arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the base portion 378a of the outer peripheral board cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 has a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The lower end of the tubular portion 380a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the lift base 364. The inner diameter of the annular portion 380b is formed to be approximately the same size as the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral board cover 378.

As shown in Figure 62(a), when the performance operation button unit 360 is assembled, the lifting base 364 is biased upward by a pair of lifting springs 365, and the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the lifting cam member 371. In this state, the lifting base 364 has moved downward to a lowered position, and the pair of lifting springs 365 are compressed. Also, in this state, the central button body 373 is at the upper end of its movement due to the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the top surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the top surface of the outer button cover 380.

Therefore, when assembled to the performance operation unit 300, the top surface of the outer button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the top surface of the performance operation ring 330, and the top surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the top surface of the outer button cover 380 (see Figure 63, etc.).

In this state (the state shown in Figure 62(a)), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is at approximately the same height as the upper surface of the outer button cover 380 (see Figure 65(c)).

Furthermore, even if the outer button cover 380 (outer pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward in this state, the outer button cover 380 will not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 will not be detected by the pressing detection sensor 381. In other words, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 will not be detected.

When the operation button lift drive motor 367 rotates the lift drive gear 368 counterclockwise in plan view using the operation button lift drive motor 367, the lift cam drive gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view via the driven gear 369 that meshes with the lift drive gear 368, and the lift cam member 371 connected to the lift cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the lift cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a, visible from the front in Figure 62, moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 rolls from the locking portion 371c to the portion of the first cam 371b to the left of the locking portion 371c. At the same time, the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

As the lifting cam member 371 rotates, the guide pin 364d, which rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b, moves from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d. Because the second cam 371d extends upward perpendicular to the first cam 371b, the force of the lifting spring 365 causes the guide pin 364d to move upward along the second cam 371d, and the lifting base 364 rises together with the guide pin 364d, reaching the raised position.

In the raised position, as shown in Figure 62 (b), the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the other cam portion 371a. In this state, the operation of the operation button lifting drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the upright wall portion 364c of the lifting base 364 abuts against the underside of the upper base 363, restricting further upward movement of the lifting base 364. Furthermore, in the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation unit 303a) and the peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) in the lowered position is maintained, and the entire pressing operation unit 303 including the central button cover 375 and peripheral button cover 380 moves upward, with the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protruding above the upper surface of the peripheral button cover 380.

When assembled to the performance operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the central button cover 375 and outer button cover 380 protrude significantly above the top surface of the performance operation ring 330 (see Figure 65(b), etc.).

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the central button cover 375 and central button body 373 move downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the central button body 373 comes into contact with the lift-up base 364. When the central button body 373 is in contact with the lift-up base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protrudes downward below the lift-up base 364, but because the lift-up base 364 is separated from the button unit base 361, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the lift-up spring 365, the central button cover 375 and central button body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the central button body 373 abuts against the lift-up base 364. The lift-up base 364 then moves downward against the biasing force of the lift-up spring 365, and the lower end of the lift-up base 364 abuts against the button unit base 361. When the lift-up base 364 abuts against the button unit base 361, the lift-up base 364 moves to its lowered position, and together with the lift-up base 364, the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) also moves to its lowered position.

In this way, when the central button body 373 is in contact with the lift base 364 and the lift base 364 then contacts the button unit base 361, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373, which protrudes downward from the lift base 364, is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and pressure on the central button cover 375 (central pressure operation unit 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer button cover 380 (outer pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward with a force greater than the biasing force of the lift spring 365 while in the raised position, the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the outer button cover 380, and the lower end of the lift base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer button cover 380 is in the lowered position along with the lift base 364, but because the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation unit 303a) protrudes upward due to the biasing force of the button spring 374, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 does not protrude downward from the lift base 364, and the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

To return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 rotates the lifting/lowering cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. As shown in Figure 62(b), the third cam 371e, which abuts the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lifting/lowering base 364, moves to the right (towards the guide pin 364d). As a result, the third cam 371e presses the guide pin 364d downward, and the lifting/lowering base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting/lowering spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the lifting cam member 371 rotates, the downward movement of the lifting base 364 stops and the guide pin 364d rolls along the first cam 371b. When the guide pin 364d subsequently reaches the locking portion 371c midway along the first cam 371b, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 inserts the guide pin 364d into the upwardly recessed locking portion 371c, and the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 is stopped, returning the lifting base 364d to its original lowered position.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 and 54. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 attached within the board box 391.

When assembled into the performance operation unit 300, the board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the rear side of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. The operation unit relay board 392 relays the connections between the upper dish center decorative board 314, lower dish center decorative board 316, operation ring drive motor 342, first rotation detection sensor 347, second rotation detection sensor 348, performance operation ring decorative board 352, vibration speaker 354, operation button lift drive motor 367, center button decorative board 376, outer button decorative board 377, pressure detection sensor 381, and lift detection sensor 382 and the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210.

[3-5e-10. Action of the Production Operation Unit]
Next, the operation of the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 63 to 65. Figure 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the performance operation ring and the rotation drive unit in a left side view of the performance operation unit. Figure 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the performance operation ring and the performance operation ring decorative board in a plan view of the performance operation unit seen from the pressing direction of the pressing operation part. Figure 65(a) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a front view of the dish unit when the central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part is pressed.

The presentation operation unit 300 has a presentation operation section 301 on its top surface that can be operated by the player. The presentation operation section 301 is composed of a large, annular rotation operation section 302 and a pressure operation section 303 located within the ring of the rotation operation section 302. The pressure operation section 303 is composed of a cylindrical central pressure operation section 303a located at the center of the rotation operation section 302, and a circular outer peripheral pressure operation section 303b located between the central pressure operation section 303a and the rotation operation section 302.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, ring outer lower cover 336, and ring inner cover 337 of the performance operation ring 330. The central pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and central button body 373 of the performance operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and outer peripheral board cover 378.

The performance operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a tilted state, with the front side of the imaginary plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotating operation part 302 (performance operation ring 330) lower. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation part 303, which is located within the ring of the rotating operation part 302, is tilted so that it moves backward as it moves downward (in other words, it moves forward as it moves upward).

In the normal state of the performance operation unit 300, the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes slightly upward from the top surface of the rotation operation unit 302. More specifically, the top surface of the outer button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the top surface of the performance operation ring 330, and the top surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the top surface of the outer button cover 380 (see Figure 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 clockwise in a left-side view, the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates clockwise in a plan view via the operation ring transmission gear 350. On the other hand, when the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 counterclockwise in a left-side view, the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates counterclockwise in a plan view.

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeatedly rotating forward and backward within a predetermined rotation angle range, it can rotate the rotary operation unit 302 back and forth and vibrate. This vibration differs from the vibration produced by the vibration speaker 354; only the rotary operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342, but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates clockwise in a left-side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in a left-side view. The rotation of this transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by two sensors: a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting multiple detection pieces 345b with a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348. Specifically, the spacing between the multiple detection pieces 345b, which are arranged at equal circumferential intervals, and the spacing between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart circumferentially, is not an integer multiple. This prevents the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 from detecting the detection pieces 345b at the same time.

In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. In contrast, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Furthermore, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection times of the detection piece 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

In this way, because the rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation presentation can be changed depending on the rotation direction of the rotary operation unit 302. Furthermore, when the rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate the rotary operation unit 302 in the same direction as the rotation operation, thereby making the rotation operation lighter and more assisted. Alternatively, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate the rotary operation unit 302 in the opposite direction to the rotation operation, making the rotation operation heavier or adding a clicking sensation.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by an outer ring upper cover 335, an outer ring lower cover 336, and an inner ring cover 337, and is shaped like an arc extending in a circular pattern that is more than half a circle. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the outer surface, upper surface, and part of the inner surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are attached with the outer surface, upper surface, and part of the inner surface exposed, making it easy for a player to grasp.

This allows the player to touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, allowing the player to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 in a way that is comfortable for the player, improving the operability of the rotation operation unit 302. Furthermore, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated whether the pressing operation unit 303 is in the lowered or raised position. However, because the underside of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be gripped like a car steering wheel.

As shown in Figure 64, the effect operation unit 300 is equipped with an effect operation ring decorative board 352 on which multiple LEDs are arranged in a circular ring below the effect operation ring 330. This allows the rotating operation part 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to be illuminated and decorated by illuminating the LEDs on the effect operation ring decorative board 352. Furthermore, because the effect operation ring decorative board 352 has multiple LEDs arranged in a circular row along the rotating operation part 302, by sequentially illuminating the multiple LEDs in line with the rotation of the rotating operation part 302, it is possible to illuminate and decorate only specific parts of the rotating rotation operation part 302. This gives the player the illusion that an LED (decorative board) is installed inside the rotating rotation operation part 302.

In the normal state of the performance operation unit 300, as shown in Figure 65(a), the pressing operation unit 303, which is located within the ring of the rotation operation unit 302, is in a lowered position with its upper surface protruding slightly above the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303a of the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a (central button cover 375) descends to approximately the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and the pressing is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer pressing operation portion 303b (outer button cover 380) will not move downward, and the pressing will not be detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

In the normal state, when the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise in a plan view, the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 disengages from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b), and the biasing force of the pair of lifting springs 365 causes the pressing operation unit 303 to vigorously protrude upward together with the lifting base 364, reaching the raised position (see Figure 65 (b)). In this raised position, the top surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is positioned significantly higher than the top surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude significantly higher than the top surface of the effect operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, so that the top surfaces of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are at approximately the same height. In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressing. Furthermore, the central pressing operation unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b against the biasing force of the lift spring 365, so that the top surfaces of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are at approximately the same height as the top surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (see Figure 65 (c)). In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 detects the pressing.

Furthermore, when the outer pressing operation unit 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the outer pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a move downward while the top surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a remains protruding above the top surface of the outer pressing operation unit 303b, and the top surface of the outer pressing operation unit 303b becomes approximately the same height as the top surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (see Figure 65 (a)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure.

In this way, regardless of whether the press operation unit 303 in this embodiment is in the lowered or raised position, the central press operation unit 303a will not be detected by the press detection sensor 381 unless it is pressed all the way down to the end of its downward movement. This makes it possible to encourage the player to firmly press the central press operation unit 303a, thereby drawing attention to the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in player participation effects and making the player participation effects more enjoyable.

The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the pressing operation unit 303 may make the rotation operation easier, or the pressing operation unit 303 may get in the way and make the rotation operation difficult. This allows the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 to be changed, allowing players to enjoy a wider variety of operations.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 66 to 68. Figure 66(a) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. Figure 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and Figure 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the play area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 400 comprises a door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100; a door frame left side decorative board 402 attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 and having multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface; a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402; and a door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

The left door frame base 401 is formed in the shape of a box that extends vertically and is open to the front. The left door frame decorative board 402 is formed in the shape of a strip that extends vertically and is composed of an upper left side decorative board 402a and a lower left side decorative board 402b. The left door frame decorative board 402 has multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the front surface. By appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs, the left door frame decorative board 402 can illuminate and decorate the left door frame decorative body 404.

The left side reflector 403 has a through-hole 403a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative board 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in the shape of a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that its lower end is continuous with the left end of the upper left dish decorative body 271 of the upper left dish decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and its upper end is formed so that it is continuous with the lower left end of the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that its width in the left-right direction and its depth in the front-to-back direction are approximately the same distance. When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, giving the appearance of an embedded cylindrical fluorescent lamp.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 69 to 71. Figure 69(a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. Figure 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and Figure 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right front part of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the play area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right edge of the door frame 3 to a position roughly coincident with the upper tray 201 and lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200, and is equipped with a side window 410a that penetrates in the left-right direction, and multiple illuminable side window interior decorative portions 410b arranged within the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 can make the playing area of a pachinko machine located on the right side in an amusement hall or the like where a pachinko machine 1 is installed difficult to see, and can also make the playing area 5a of this pachinko machine 1 difficult to see from a player playing on the pachinko machine on the right, creating a personal space for players that protects their privacy during play.

The door frame right side unit 410 comprises a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically; a side window interior decorative member 412 attached to the front surface of the door frame right side base 411, extending forward cylindrically and having multiple side window interior decorative portions 410b arranged in a vertical row; a side window interior decorative member board 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and having multiple LEDs mounted at positions corresponding to the multiple side window interior decorative portions 410b of the side window interior decorative member 412 on the front surface; and internal reflectors 414 inserted inside each of the multiple side window interior decorative portions 410b of the side window interior decorative member 412.

The right door frame unit 410 also includes a right side reflector 415 that is positioned forward of the front end of the side window interior decorative member 412 and extends vertically; a right side outer panel 416 that is attached to the right side base 411 of the door frame and extends flat in the vertical and front-to-rear directions to cover the right side of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and has a through hole 416a that penetrates in the left-to-right direction and forms the side window 410a; and a right side inner panel 417 that is attached to the right side base 411 of the door frame and the right side reflector 415 and extends flat in the vertical and front-to-rear directions to cover the left side of the right side base 411 of the door frame and the right side reflector 415, and has a through hole 417a that penetrates in the left-to-right direction and forms the side window 410a.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side decorative board 418 that is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and has multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface, and a door frame right side decorative body 419 that is attached to the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the front side of the right side reflector 415.

The door frame right side base 411 is box-shaped, extending vertically and opening to the rear. The side window interior decorative element 412 has a flat connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of multiple (three in this case) side window interior decorative elements 410b arranged in a vertical row. The side window interior decorative elements 410b of the side window interior decorative element 412 are formed as truncated cone-shaped cylinders with a slightly smaller outer diameter at the front end than at the rear end, and the front end of the cylinder is formed as a hemisphere. The front end of the side window interior decorative element 410b of the side window interior decorative element 412 is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decorative element 412 is attached to the front of the door frame right side base 411, from a position lower to an upper position relative to the vertical center. The side window interior decorative element 412 is formed in a translucent milky white color.

The side window interior decorative board 413 is attached to the front of the door frame right side base 411, in a position behind the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412. The multiple LEDs provided on the side window interior decorative board 413 are full-color LEDs. The side window interior decorative board 413 has four LEDs arranged in a cross shape, above, below, left, and right, centered on the axis of the side window interior decorative member 410b, in a position behind each of the multiple side window interior decorative members 410b.

The internal reflector 414 has an X-shaped shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-to-rear direction so as to fit along the inner surface of the side window interior decorative part 410b into which it is inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the interior of the side window interior decorative part 410b into four sections: top, bottom, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and its front-to-rear shape is wavy, moving forward and then backward as it moves from the top to the bottom. The right side reflector 415 is penetrated from front to back and has multiple through-holes 415a formed through which the LEDs on the door frame right side decorative board 418 face forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends vertically and front to back, with its rear edge extending vertically in a straight line and its front edge extending in a wavy pattern along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a that penetrates left to right and is formed in an irregular elliptical shape extending vertically, and is designed to cover the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the rear side of the door frame right side decorative base plate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side outer panel 416 is made opaque.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 is flat and extends vertically and front to back, with its rear edge extending vertically in a straight line and its front edge extending in a wavy pattern along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through-hole 417a that penetrates left to right and is formed in an irregular elliptical shape that extends vertically, and is designed to cover the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the rear side of the door frame right side decorative base plate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side inner panel 417 is made opaque.

The door frame right side decorative board 418 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of an upper right side decorative board 418a and a lower right side decorative board 418b. The door frame right side decorative board 418 has multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the front surface. By appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs, the door frame right side decorative board 418 can illuminate and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419.

The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically in a wavy pattern to fit along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tubular shape that opens to the rear.

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed so that its lower end is continuous with the right end of the upper right decorative body 276 of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish unit 200, and its upper end is continuous with the lower right end of the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the door frame right side decorative body 419 appears to have a cylindrical fluorescent light embedded in it. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front edge) that extends forward in a wavy pattern so that the top quarter of the unit protrudes furthest forward, forming a screen-like structure. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a that runs through in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be seen through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 is equipped with a cylindrical (columnar) side window interior decorative portion 410b that extends forward and backward within the side window 410a. The side window interior decorative portion 410b can be illuminated and decorated by illuminating the LEDs on the side window interior decorative portion decorative board 413. By illuminating the side window interior decorative portion 410b, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, making it difficult to see to the other side through the side window 410a.

In the door frame right side unit 410 of this embodiment, under normal conditions, the LEDs on the side window interior decorative board 413, which illuminates and decorates the multiple side window interior decorative parts 410b, are off, so the playing area 5a can be seen from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the edge of the island equipment) through the gaps between the three side window interior decorative parts 410b in the side window 410a. Therefore, a player looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) to play on can easily find the pachinko machine 1 without having to move along the island equipment to the front of the pachinko machine 1, increasing anticipation for playing with the pachinko machine 1 and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts, including the side window interior decorative part 410b, can block the view of nearby players, making it difficult for other players to see the entire gaming area 5a. This makes it less likely that players will feel like they are being watched by other players, allowing them to play without worrying about other players.

Furthermore, when the three side window interior decorative elements 410b are illuminated by the LEDs on the side window interior decorative element board 413, the light can dazzle the inside of the side window 410a, changing visibility through the side window 410a. Because the three side window interior decorative elements 410b are cylindrical, the light is emitted in a band-like, radial pattern, dazzling the side window interior decorative elements 410b and making it difficult to see through them to the other side, making it difficult for other players, such as neighboring players, to peek into the playing area 5a. By making it difficult for others to peek into the playing area 5a, other players can be prevented from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. This prevents players from feeling uncomfortable because they are distracted by other players' attention and are unable to concentrate on their game, or from making mistakes and feeling like they've lost out. By allowing players to concentrate on their game, the game becomes more enjoyable and prevents a decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 72 to 74. Figure 72(a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the rear, and (c) is a bottom view of the door frame top unit with the bottom top cover removed. Figure 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the top front, and Figure 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the bottom front. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the left and right side units 400 and 410.

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top base 451 that is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100; a top upper cover 452 that is attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both the left and right sides and the upper front surface of the door frame top base 451; a door frame top decorative body 453 that is attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452; and a door frame top bottom plate 454 that connects the bottom end of the door frame top decorative body 453 to the bottom end of the door frame top base 451.

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a door frame top central decorative board 455 that is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface; a door frame top left decorative board 456 that is attached to the left of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface; and a door frame top right decorative board 457 that is attached to the right of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface.

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a top center reflector 458 that is positioned between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative board 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, a top left reflector 459 that is positioned between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and a top right reflector 460 that is positioned between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached to the central speaker box 461 facing downward, a pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the left and right ends of the front of the door frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to each of the pair of speaker brackets 463, a top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to cover the door frame top bottom plate 454 from below, a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press against the outer edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, a door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the door frame top base 451, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the top of the door frame top base 451.

The door frame top base 451 comprises a flat main body 451a extending left and right with a length equal to the left-right width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and forward protrusions 451b protruding forward from near both left and right ends of the front surface of the main body 451a. The main body 451a is curved so that its lower edge is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101, with its left-right center positioned upward. The left and right forward protrusions 451b are inclined so that their front ends move rearward as they point downward, forming a box shape that is open to the rear. The forward protrusion 451b on the right side when viewed from the front is also open upward.

The top upper cover 452 is formed to have approximately the same shape as the door frame top base 451 when viewed from the front. The top upper cover 452 covers the outer sides of the left and right forward protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and is shaped to connect the upper front ends of the left and right forward protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes most forward at the left-right center and extends in a curved manner, moving downward and rearward from the left-right center toward both left and right ends. The top surface of the top upper cover 452 also has an opening 452a that is cut out significantly from the rear end toward the front. This opening 452a is closed by the door frame top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the curvature decreasing from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction, and extends in the left-right direction to fit along the front end of the top upper cover 452. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape that is open to the rear. Both left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 extend downward, and are formed to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-to-rear direction to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451, and also extends in the left-to-right direction so that the center in the left-to-right direction bulges upward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-to-rear direction bulges downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 has a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-to-right direction, connecting the front and rear ends, and extending upward in a flat plate-like manner, a pair of center speaker openings 454b that penetrate vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and face the top center speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c that penetrate vertically on the outside of each of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-to-right direction and face the top side speaker 464. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top central decorative board 455 has multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the front surface. By appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs, this door frame top central decorative board 455 can illuminate and decorate the center of the door frame top decorative body 453.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top left decorative board 456 has multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the front surface. By appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs, this door frame top left decorative board 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top right decorative board 457 has multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the front surface. By appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs, this door frame top right decorative board 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453.

The top center reflector 458, top left reflector 459, and top right reflector 460 each extend in the left-right direction, and have through holes that run from front to back at positions corresponding to the LEDs mounted on the door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457, respectively.

The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending laterally, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached to it so that they face downward and forward. This central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top central speakers 462 are full-range speakers that output sounds such as voice and music over a wide frequency range.

The speaker brackets 463 are attached to the underside of the left and right forward protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speakers 464 are tweeters that output high-frequency sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punched metal, a metal plate with numerous through-holes. Sound output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speakers 464 is emitted forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

The door frame top relay board 467 relays the connection between the door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, top center speaker 462, and top side speaker 464 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top upper cover 452, and its front end is engaged with the top upper cover 452 while its rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, forming an integrated decoration. In addition, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player through a pair of top center speakers 462 and a pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 75 etc. Figure 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown, the door frame 3 has a generally rectangular door window 101a extending vertically in the center when viewed from the front, which is closed by the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160. The door frame 3 has the door window 101a completely surrounded by the upper left dish decorative body 271 and upper right dish decorative body 276 of the dish unit 200, the upper center dish decorative body 312a of the performance operation unit 300, the left side door frame decorative body 404 of the left side door frame unit 400, the right side door frame decorative body 419 of the right side door frame unit 410, and the top door frame decorative body 453 of the top door frame unit 450.

The upper left decorative body 271, upper right decorative body 276, upper center decorative body 312a, left side decorative body 404, right side decorative body 419, and top decorative body 453 of the door frame, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, are formed in a semi-tubular shape, allowing the player to see the entire periphery of the door window 101a as if it were surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In door frame 3, behind the upper left tray decorative body 271, upper right tray decorative body 276, upper center tray decorative body 312a, left side door frame decorative body 404, right side door frame decorative body 419, and top door frame decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of door window 101a, there are the upper left tray decorative board 273, upper right tray decorative board 278, upper center tray decorative board 314, left side door frame decorative board 402, right side door frame decorative board 418, top center door frame decorative board 455, top left door frame decorative board 456, and top right door frame decorative board 457. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs on these decorative boards, the entire outer periphery of door window 101a can be illuminated, or players can be shown a lighting effect as light moves along the outer periphery of door window 101a.

The tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is fitted on its top surface with a circular, doughnut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 with a diameter larger than the front-to-back distance of the upper tray 201, and a pressing operation unit 303 consisting of a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a, which are coaxially arranged within the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. Also, below the rotation operation unit 302, there is a semicircular, doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tubular) upper tray with a larger diameter, similar to the rotation operation unit 302, at the center of the two trays. The decorative body 312a and the lower center dish decorative body 312b are attached spaced apart, one above the other, and the left side door frame decorative body 404 of the left side door frame unit 400, the right side door frame decorative body 419 of the right side door frame unit 410, and the top door frame decorative body 453 of the top door frame unit 450, which are similarly shaped to be continuous with both ends of the upper center dish decorative body 312a and the lower center dish decorative body 312b, are attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the perimeter of the play area 5a.

As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped components are arranged vertically: the rotation operation unit 302 and the two upper and lower central dish decorative bodies 312a and 312b. Furthermore, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, enhancing the visual impact and making the rotation operation unit 302 and pressing operation unit 303 stand out.

In addition, the lower left decorative element 281, lower right decorative element 286, and lower center decorative element 312b, which are located below the upper left decorative element 271, upper right decorative element 276, and upper center decorative element 312a, are made of semi-tubular tubes that are slightly thinner, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the lower center decorative element 312b. As a result, the performance operation unit 300 becomes larger from the bottom to the top, emphasizing the sense of perspective in the vertical direction and making the rotation operation unit 302 and pressure operation unit 303, which are located at the top and can be operated by the player, appear larger. This strongly draws the player's attention to the rotation operation unit 302 and pressure operation unit 303 on the performance operation unit 300 on the top surface of the unit 200, preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the doughnut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotatably attached to the top surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis that extends upward so that it is positioned forward. The top surface of the rotation operation unit 302 is tilted so that the front end is lower, so that the top surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face toward the head (face) of a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, making the entire rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 easier to see from the player, making them appear larger. Furthermore, as mentioned above, because the entire rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are easier to see, it is easier for players to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 is doughnut-shaped. Therefore, since the player can immediately recognize that the doughnut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, when a player participation type effect is executed, the player can immediately rotate the rotation operation unit 302, allowing the player to enjoy the player participation type effect by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is larger than the front-to-back distance of the upper tray 201, and the diameters of the upper tray center decorative body 312a and lower tray center decorative body 312b are larger than the rotation operation unit 302.In the tray unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front ends of the rotation operation unit 302, the upper tray center decorative body 312a, and the lower tray center decorative body 312b protrude significantly forward from the upper tray 201, and the upper tray center decorative body 312a and the lower tray center decorative body 312b decorate the outer circumference of the rotation operation unit 302.This makes the rotation operation unit 302, the upper tray center decorative body 312a, and the lower tray center decorative body 312b stand out, and at the same time, the upper tray center decorative body 312a and the lower tray center decorative body 312b improve the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, players can recognize at a glance that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines, which can strongly attract the player's attention and increase the player's appeal, making it easier for them to select the pachinko machine 1 as the machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 76 to 82. Figure 76 is a front view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine, and Figure 77 is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. Figure 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front right, Figure 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front left, and Figure 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. Figure 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear.

The main frame 4 holds the game board 5, which has a play area 5a where play is carried out by hitting game balls B, and is used to pay out game balls B to the player and eject used game balls B to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment in the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is removably stored inside from the front. The main frame 4 is openably attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2, which is attached to the island equipment in the game hall, at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and a door frame 3 is openably attached to close the open front side.

The main frame 4 comprises a frame-shaped main frame base unit 500 whose rear can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5; an upper main frame hinge member 510 attached to the upper left end of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, which is rotatably attached to the upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; and a lower main frame hinge assembly 520 attached to the lower left end of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, which is rotatably attached to the lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and to which the lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached.

The main frame 4 also includes a main frame reinforcement frame 530 attached to the left side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front; a ball launcher 540 attached to the lower front side of the main frame base unit 500 for shooting game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5; an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached to the rear side of the main frame base unit 500 along the upper and left sides when viewed from the front; a payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the payout base unit 550 for paying out game balls B to the player; a base unit 620 attached to the lower rear side of the main frame base unit 500; a back cover 640 attached to the rear side of the main frame base unit 500 in an openable and closable manner to cover the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501; and a locking unit 650 attached to the right side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, for locking the outer frame 2 and main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and main frame 4.

The main frame base unit 500 includes a main frame base 501, which is formed into a vertically extending rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, a connection cable guide member 502 that guides a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3, and a game board locking member 505 that detachably holds the game board 5.

The dispensing base unit 550 comprises a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500; a ball tank 552 attached to the dispensing base 551, shaped like a box extending left and right and open at the top; a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in the shape of a groove open at the top; a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left when viewed from the front; a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 comprises a ball guiding unit 570 that guides game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner, a payout device 580 that pays out game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides game balls B that have passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 or the board unit 620.

The board unit 620 comprises a speaker unit 620a attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 comprises a unit base 651 attached to the main frame base 501, multiple door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the door frame 3, multiple outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hooks 652 or outer frame hooks 653 up and down, a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hooks 652 downward and the outer frame hooks 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hooks 653 downward.

[4-1. Main frame base unit]
The main frame base unit 500 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 76 to 84. Figure 83(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main frame when the door frame is opened relative to the main frame. Figure 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main frame when the door frame is opened or closed relative to the main frame. The main frame base unit 500 has its rear inserted into the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main frame base unit 500 comprises a main frame base 501, which is formed into a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front; a connection cable guide member 502 attached to the lower left corner of the front of the main frame base 501 to guide the connection cable 503; and a game board locking member 505 rotatably attached to the lower front of the main frame base 501 around an axis extending forward and backward to detachably hold the game board 5.

The main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 comprises a base body 501a which has a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front; a game board insertion opening 501b which penetrates the base body 501a from a position slightly below the top end to a height of approximately 3/4 of the total height and through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front; a game board placement section 501c which forms the lower edge of the game board insertion opening 501b and on which the game board 5 is placed; and a game board restriction section 501d which protrudes upward from the center of the game board placement section 501c in the left-right direction and restricts left-right and rearward movement of the bottom end of the game board 5.

The main frame base 501 also has a launcher mounting section 501e, which is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board mounting section 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, for mounting the ball launcher 540; a cylinder insertion port 501f, which penetrates from front to back on the right side of the launcher mounting section 501e when viewed from the front, and through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted; a circular speaker opening 501g, which penetrates from front to back on the lower left side of the game board mounting section 501c when viewed from the front, and which allows the main frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the board unit 620 to face forward; a cable mounting recess 501h, which is recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extends left and right, and into which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached; and a cable insertion port 501i, which penetrates from front to back at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate-like shape from the right edge of the game board insertion slot 501b of the base main body 501a when viewed from the front. The locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and the rear extension portion 501j has a rear end to which the rear cover 640 is rotatably attached. Also, an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l are formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end of the rear surface of the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, and are used to mount the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520.

The main frame base 501 is also equipped with a door frame opening switch 4a for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, mounted on the front surface of the base body 501a below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. When the door frame 3 is opened (released) relative to the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch 4a is released, allowing the opening of the door frame 3 to be detected. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a is input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633. The main frame base 501 is also equipped with a main frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, mounted on the rear surface of the base body 501a below the position where the door frame opening switch 4a is mounted. When the main frame 4 is opened (released) relative to the outer frame 2, the door frame opening switch 4b is released, allowing the opening of the main frame 4 to be detected. The detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b is input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633.

A game board locking member 505 is rotatably attached to the main frame base 501 around an axis extending forward and backward, below the game board placement portion 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board locking member 505 restricts the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b, thereby allowing the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b to be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main frame base 501 extends laterally from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position below the portion where the game board locking member 505 is mounted, to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The cable mounting recess 501h is sized to accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached to it so that it can rotate around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame base unit 500 comprises a flat guide body 502a extending laterally, a pair of band-like frame pieces 502b that protrude forward from the upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a and extend further to the right than the right end of the guide body 502a, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a plurality of through-holes 502d that penetrate the guide body 502a from front to back at both the upper and lower ends and are arranged in a row in the left-right direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a left-right length that is slightly shorter than the left-right length of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main frame base 501, and is sized to fit within the cable mounting recess 501h. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached so that its mounting shaft 502c can rotate around an axis extending vertically near the right end within the cable mounting recess 501h. This allows the connection cable guide member 502 to rotate (hinge rotate) so that the left end protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is used to guide the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 consists of multiple wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the opposite end of which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3.

Next, we will explain the effects of the connection cable guide member 502. As shown in Figure 84, etc., the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the main frame base 501 so that its end (right end) opposite the side (left side) where the door frame 3 is hingedly rotatably attached in the left-right direction is rotatable around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the main frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is attached to the guide body 502a by fastening it together with the guide body 502a with a cable tie 504 inserted through a pair of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that are in the same position left and right, with the side connected to the interface board 635 abutting the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from right to left of the guide body 502a.

When the door frame 3 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and closed relative to the main frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame 4 is located behind the main relay board 104 and the auxiliary relay board 105 of the door frame 3 (see Figure 84 (a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, then bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and extends into the door frame relay board cover 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is positioned to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hingedly rotated so as to open relative to the main frame 4, the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, causing the connection cable guide member 502 to rotate around the attachment shaft 502c at the right end. In this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2 ≧ β (preferably α/3 ≧ β) (see Figure 84 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but once the opening angle α exceeds a certain value (for example, approximately 90 degrees), the increase stops. In this embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main frame base 501. The connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, preventing the connection cable 503 from dangling between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4.

When closing the open door frame 3, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively backward, causing the connection cable 503 to press the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 backward, causing the connection cable guide member 502 to rotate around the mounting axis 502c so that the left end moves backward. Because the connection cable guide member 502 opens at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not impede the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, allowing the door frame 3 to close smoothly. Furthermore, because the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 will not become pinched between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, preventing any malfunction of the connection cable 503.

In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees, creating a crease in the folded portion of the connection cable 503. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the 180-degree folded portion of the connection cable 503 changes to open, the crease acts on the connection cable 503 to close it. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease prevents the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction and also guides the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) in the closing direction, allowing the door frame 3 to close smoothly.

Furthermore, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axial core) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a can pull the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the central axis (axial core) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126.

In addition, in this embodiment, the angle between a tangent to a circle that passes through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axial core) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126, and passes through a portion (pressing portion) of the speaker duct 103 that protrudes rearward on the central axis (axial core) side of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 relative to the cable holder 103a, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees or less. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts against the connection cable 503, thereby pressing the tip of the open connection cable guide member 502 in the closing direction via the connection cable 503. This allows the connection cable guide member 502 to close smoothly as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, ensuring reliable closure of the door frame 3. Furthermore, the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502, which rotates (opens and closes) as the door frame 3 opens and closes, can be set to 45 degrees or less, so when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, achieving the same effects as described above.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 81 and 82. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k in the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and also rotatably attaches the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3.

The main frame upper hinge member 510 comprises an upper hinge body 511, which is a horizontally extending flat plate material with the rear portion bent downward in an L-shape, and a main frame upper hinge pin 512 that protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the upper hinge body 511 and is journaled on the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a that penetrates vertically on the left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 512 in a front view at the horizontally extending portion and journals the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

The upper hinge body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 is bent downward and attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 at its portion that extends vertically. The upper hinge body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 is supported by its upper hinge pin 512, which is inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the upper hinge member 51 of the upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge pin 122 of the upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the upper hinge body 511.

This upper main frame hinge member 510 cooperates with the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 to attach the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinged manner, and also to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 in a hinged manner.

[4-3. Main body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 81 and 82. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l in the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to it.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 comprises a lower hinge first body 521, which is a horizontally extending, flat plate-like material with its rear portion bent upward into an L-shape, and a lower hinge second body 522, which is arranged above the lower hinge first body 521 and is a horizontally extending, flat plate-like material with its rear portion bent upward into an L-shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 arranged at a distance above the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, and the vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521.

The lower hinge first body 521 has a lower hinge hole 521a for the outer frame that penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion and into which the lower hinge pin 60c of the lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. The lower hinge hole 521a for the outer frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge pin 512 of the upper hinge member 510 of the main frame.

The second lower hinge body 522 has a lower door frame hinge hole 522a that penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion and into which the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above, and a restriction piece 522b that extends upward from a position rearward of the lower door frame hinge hole 522a on the left edge of the horizontally extending portion and restricts the rotation range of the door frame 3. The lower door frame hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the upper door frame hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 at the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that it can rotate about a hinge, and to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so that it can rotate about a hinge.

[4-4. Main body reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 81 and 82. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 has a U-shaped cross section in plan view that is open on the right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross section. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is formed from an extruded metal profile.

Two left position restriction members 531 are attached to the main frame reinforcement frame 530, spaced apart vertically, at the rear of the section extending rightward from the front end. These members restrict the forward and vertical movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main frame base 501.

The main frame reinforcement frame 530 has a U-shaped front side that is open on the right side in plan view. It has a groove 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically. The rear left end of the left reinforcement frame 111 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into this groove 530a when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4. By inserting the left reinforcement frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main frame reinforcement frame 530 and the left reinforcement flail 111 becomes serpentine in plan view, preventing the insertion of illegal tools into the pachinko machine 1 from the left side. The main frame reinforcement frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 and prevents the insertion of illegal tools into the main frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side through the gap between the outer frame 2 and main frame 4.

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 85 and other figures. Figure 85(a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher as seen from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower front of the main body frame base unit 500 and is used to shoot game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. The ball launcher 540 can shoot game balls B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 comprises a flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher mounting portion 501e of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500; a launch solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid attached to the rear surface of the right part of the launch base 541 when viewed from the front, with the rotation axis passing through the launch base 541 and extending forward; a striking hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation axis of the launch solenoid 542; and a launch rail 544 attached to the front of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left from near the tip of the striking hammer 543, along which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is designed so that game ball B is supplied from the ball supply unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launching rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated while game ball B is supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launching rail 544, the launch solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the angle of rotation, and the game ball B is hit by the striking hammer 543. The game ball B hit by the striking hammer 543 then passes through the launching rail 544 and is guided to the outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and is then launched into the play area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the play area 5a due to factors such as the impact strength of the game ball B, it will fall from between the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) into the foul ball receiving port 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, pass through the foul cover unit 150, and be ejected into the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Dispense base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 86 etc. Figure 86(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit as seen from the rear. The dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L-shape and is attached to the rear side of the main frame base unit 500.

The dispensing base unit 550 is equipped with a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 comprises a top panel 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-to-back direction, a left panel 551b extending downward from the left edge of the top panel 551a when viewed from the front with a length that is substantially the same width as the top panel, a right panel 551c extending downward from the right edge of the top panel 551a when viewed from the front with a short length that is substantially the same width as the top panel 551a, an upper back panel 551d extending downward from the rear edge of the top panel 551a to the same position as the bottom edge of the right panel 551c, and a left panel 551b extending downward from the right edge of the top panel 551a when viewed from the front with a short length that is substantially the same width as the top panel 551a. The dispensing base 551 comprises a left back panel 551e extending to the right from a position forward of the rear edge of 551b at a substantially constant width to the bottom, an inner panel 551f extending rearward from the right edge of the left back panel 551e to the same position as the rear edge of the left side panel 551b, a bottom panel 551g extending rightward from the front of the lower edge of the left side panel 551b to a position substantially coincident with the right edge of the left back panel 551e, and a connecting panel 551h connecting the right edge of the bottom panel 551g to the lower edge of the inner panel 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed like a box that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate 551a that extends left and right with a length approximately equal to the left-right width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main frame base 501, and a left plate 551b that extends up and down with a length approximately equal to the up-down height of the game board insertion opening 501b. The front ends of the top plate 551a, left plate 551b, and right plate 551c of the payout base 551 are attached to the rear side of the main frame base 501.

The dispensing base 551 also has a shallow recessed area that is open to the rear and extends vertically, defined by the left side plate 551b, the left back plate 551e, and the inner plate 551f, to which the dispensing unit 560 is attached. The dispensing base 551 also has a rear cover attachment portion 551i that protrudes to the right at the top of the right side of the inner plate 551f when viewed from the front, and to which the rear cover 640 is attached.

The dispensing base unit 550 comprises a ball tank 552, which is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, is box-shaped and extends left and right, and is open at the top, and a tank rail 553, which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 above the part of the dispensing base 551 that extends leftward and is groove-shaped and open at the top.

The dispensing base unit 550 also includes a first rail cover 554 attached midway in the left-right direction at the top end of the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 attached to the top end of the tank rail 553, spaced to the left of the first rail cover 554 when viewed from the front, and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the top end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the bottom end of the tank rail 553 near the left end when viewed from the front.

The ball tank 552 is formed with a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the left-right width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-to-back direction that is shorter than the front-to-back depth of the top plate portion 551a. The ball tank 552 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a, at a position towards the right in the left-to-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end is lower. The left end of the ball tank 552 is connected to the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551, near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. In a plan view, the tank rail 553 extends diagonally left and rearward from the right end, which is connected to the ball tank 552, so that its front-to-rear depth changes from several times the outer diameter of the game ball B to approximately one time, and then extends straight to the left, with its front-to-rear depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom of the tank rail 553 is sloped so that the left end is lower, and the left end of the bottom opens downward and is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

The upper end of the tank rail 553, which extends straight to the left, is inclined at a steeper angle to the horizontal than the bottom, so that the left end is lower at a height slightly greater than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left roughly coincides with the rear edge of the top plate 551a. A first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are intended to prevent the front-to-rear depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B inside the tank rail 553.

The ball straightening member 556 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, so that its end on the first rail cover 554 side can rotate around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction. The ball straightening member 556 is equipped with a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-to-right direction (see Figure 92). This straightening piece 556a slows the flow of game balls B on the upper tier of game balls B circulating in two tiers, and straightens them so that they flow in a single tier on the downstream side, preventing ball clogging even when the height inside the tank rail 553 is low.

The ball stopping member 557 is attached to the underside of the tank rail 553 near the left end when viewed from the front, so that it can slide left and right. By sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, preventing game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit.

The payout base unit 550 also includes an external terminal board 558 attached to the left of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is used to make an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes an earth connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b of the main frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 is connected to the earth connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 87 and 88. Figure 87(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as seen from the rear. Figure 88(a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit as seen from the front, with its main components disassembled, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit as seen from the rear, with its main components disassembled. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left portion 551e of the back panel of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 comprises a ball guide unit 570 that guides game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner, a payout device 580 that is arranged below the ball guide unit 570 and pays out game balls B guided by the ball guide unit 570 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides game balls B that have passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 or the board unit 620.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies game balls B, aligned in a row by the tank rail 553, to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b that branches off from the payout passage 580a. Under normal conditions, game balls B are released from the payout passage 580a toward the upper full ball path unit 600 based on instructions from the payout control board 633, and are released from the ball removal passage 580b toward the upper full ball path unit 600 when the ball removal lever 593 is operated.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides downward game balls B released from the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 and game balls B released from the ball removal path 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides game balls B released from the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 toward the door frame 3 via the upper full ball path unit 600, and guides game balls B released from the ball removal path 580b toward the base unit 620.

[4-7a. Ball Guidance Unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 87 and 88. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left part 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is for receiving the game ball B from the tank rail 553 and guiding the game ball B toward the payout device 580.

The ball guide unit 570 comprises a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open to the front and has a meandering guide passage 570a through which game balls B can flow, a flat guide passage front cover 572 that closes the front side of the guide unit base 571, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by game balls B flowing through the guide passage 570a, and a ball out detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of game balls B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573 (see Figure 92).

The ball guide unit 570 has a guide unit base 571 and guide path front cover 572 that are shaped like a rectangle extending vertically when viewed from the front. The guide path 570a opens upward near the left edge of the top surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the top edge to near the center of the height of the guide unit base 571, then bends to the right and extends downward in a serpentine manner, repeatedly folding back across the width of the guide unit base 571, before opening downward near the left edge of the bottom surface of the guide unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed so that its depth in the front, back, right, and left directions and its width in the left and right directions are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game balls B, allowing the game balls B to be guided in a single file.

A movable piece member 573 is attached near the top of the ball guide unit 570 so that it can move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. More specifically, the upper part of the movable piece member 573 is attached to the outer right part of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front so that it can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward, and is formed so that a portion of its lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. When the game ball B abuts against the part of this movable piece member 573 that protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the guide passage 570a, so that it no longer protrudes.

The out-of-ball detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, but detects the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 has retracted from the guide passage 570a and is no longer protruding. Therefore, the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is in a detecting state when a game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detecting state when a game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

When the ball guide unit 570 is assembled to the main frame 4, the upstream end of the guide passage 570a is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guide passage 570a is connected to the upstream end of the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580. The ball guide unit 570 has a serpentine guide passage 570a that guides game balls B, so the guide passage 570a extends longer than the overall height of the ball guide unit 570, allowing many game balls B to be stored within the guide passage 570a. Furthermore, the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of game balls B in the guide passage 570a using the ball out detection sensor 574, and can therefore detect the presence or absence of game balls B in the ball tank 552 via the guide passage 570a.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 580 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 87 to 90. Figure 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the fore-and-aft direction. Figure 90(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the fore-and-aft direction when the ball removal movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line A-A in (a). The dispensing device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the underside of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear surface of the left part 551e of the back panel of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The payout device 580 comprises a payout device main body 581, which is box-shaped and open to the rear, and has a payout passage 580a through which game balls B can flow and a ball removal passage 580b that branches off midway from the payout passage 580a; a flat payout device rear cover 582 that closes the payout device main body 581 from the rear; and a shallow, box-shaped payout device front cover 583 that is attached to the front of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear.

The dispensing device 580 also includes a dispensing motor 584 attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581, with its rotation shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; a spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached to the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584; a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 meshing with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; The device comprises a dispensing gear member 588 which has a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a meshing with the transmission gear 587 and multiple detection pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a and is rotatably attached between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, a dispensing blade 589 which rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582 and has multiple blade pieces 589a which protrude into the dispensing passage 580a, and a blade rotation detection sensor 590 which is attached to the rear side of the dispensing device main body 581 and detects the detection pieces 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

Furthermore, the payout device 580 is equipped with a payout detection sensor 591 that detects game balls B and is attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, a ball removal movable piece 592 that is attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 at the point where it branches off from the payout passage 580a and can open and close the ball removal passage 580b, and a ball removal lever 593 that is attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so that it can slide up and down and can be held in a position where the ball removal movable piece 592 closes the ball removal passage 580b.

The dispensing device 580 has a rectangular shape that extends vertically in a plan view. The width of the dispensing device 580 in the left-right direction is greater to the right when viewed from the front than the width of the ball guiding unit 570 in the left-right direction.

As shown in Figure 89, when viewed from behind, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens downward at a position near the right edge in the left-right direction. The dispensing passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top for about one-third of its total height, gradually moving leftward as it moves downward from the upstream end, then bending slightly diagonally downward to the right, before bending at about one-third of its width and extending approximately vertically downward toward the center (axis of rotation) of the dispensing blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, it bends to the right when viewed from behind at a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, then extends downward in an arc concentric with the payout blade 589 so that a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is formed between it and the outer periphery of the payout blade 589, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the payout blade 589 when viewed from behind.

A dispensing detection sensor 591 is located within the dispensing passage 580a, below the dispensing blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball removal passage 580b extends diagonally downward from the upstream end of the dispensing passage 580a, branches off at a point where it bends to the right, extends vertically along the left edge as viewed from the rear, and opens downward near the left end of the bottom as viewed from the rear.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 face each other at the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the point where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b branch off, protruding rearward and forward from each other to form a gap narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. They are each equipped with a main body guide wall 581a and a rear cover guide wall 582a that are formed to connect with the left side walls of the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b in a rear view. The main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a are formed to the left, as viewed from the rear, of the point where the payout passage 580a branches off from the ball removal passage 580b and extends to the right as viewed from the rear at a position approximately one-third of the height from the top. The main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a are curved diagonally upward and left as viewed from the rear, and are formed to mainly constitute the side walls of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball removal movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a.

The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side of the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device main body 581 when viewed from behind, at the point where it extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, first transmission gear 586, second transmission gear 587, and dispensing gear member 588 are located in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered by the dispensing device front cover 583. The dispensing gear member 588 has three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward, spaced circumferentially at 120-degree intervals.

The payout blade 589 is positioned between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582. The payout blade 589 has three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape, spaced circumferentially at 120-degree intervals. The blade pieces 589a extend from above within the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis, and then extend to the right when viewed from behind, protruding into the payout passage 580a so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Between the three blade pieces 589a, the payout blade 589 has a ball containing portion 589b recessed toward the center in the shape of an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B. This ball containing portion 589b is designed to contain only one game ball B. As a result, the vane 589 can restrict the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream of the payout vane 589 by using the vane piece 589a, and can also move the game ball B contained in the ball container 589b downstream by rotating clockwise when viewed from the rear.

The dispensing gear member 588 and dispensing blade 589 are attached to the dispensing device rear cover 582 and the dispensing device front cover 583 so that they can rotate together on the same axis. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is located to the left of the rotation axis of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588, which rotates together with the dispensing blade 589, thereby detecting the rotation of the dispensing blade 589.

The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending forward and backward at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. The ball removal movable piece 592 is bent in an L-shape and is attached so that its recessed side faces into the dispensing passage 580a. The ball removal movable piece 592 is formed so that its depth in the forward and backward directions is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, and it can pass through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a and protrude into or retract out of the ball removal passage 580b.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582 so that it can slide up and down near the top end of the ball removal movable piece 592, to the left when viewed from behind. A portion of the ball removal lever 593 protrudes rearward, penetrating the dispensing device rear cover 582, and can be slid by operating this protruding portion. When the ball removal lever 593 is positioned at its lower end, its lower portion can abut against the ball removal movable piece 592, restricting the ball removal movable piece 592 from rotating clockwise when viewed from behind, allowing the ball removal movable piece 592 to close the ball removal passage 580b. When the ball removal lever 593 is positioned at its upper end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated outward from the ball removal passage 580b, opening the ball removal passage 580b (see Figure 90).

When the ball removal lever 593 is raised and the ball removal movable piece 592 is made rotatable, the game balls B that had been strung together upstream of the ball removal movable piece 592 pass over the ball removal movable piece 592 and flow down toward the ball removal passage 580b. At this time, because the ball removal passage 580b extends in a straight line from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game balls B that have flowed down from upstream of the payout passage 580a flow straight down toward the ball removal passage 580b. Furthermore, because the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b is connected to the island equipment, there is nothing to restrict the flow of the game balls B, such as the payout vane 589, so the game balls B flow down faster than toward the payout passage 580a.

In this way, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down the ball removal passage 580b at high speed, causing the game ball B to forcefully abut against the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. However, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can move outside the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582, the force of this abutment causes the ball removal movable piece 592 to move outside the ball removal passage 580b. Therefore, the ball removal movable piece 592 will not be pinched between the wall surface of the ball removal passage 580b and the game ball B. This prevents the game ball B from exerting a strong force on the ball removal movable piece 592, and suppresses a decrease in durability or damage to the ball removal movable piece 592 due to a collision with the game ball B.

As a result, the ball removal movable piece 592 is less likely to be damaged, allowing more game balls B to be discharged more quickly to the island equipment downstream of the ball removal passage 580b, thereby minimizing the increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 and reducing the burden on the gaming hall.

In addition, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, it moves out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, which is spaced closer than the game ball B. Therefore, when the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b and the ball removal movable piece 592 moves outward through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, even if the game ball B moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a along with the ball removal movable piece 592, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, which is spaced closer than the game ball B.

The game ball B is prevented from moving outward by the gap between the main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a, causing the game ball B to separate from the ball removal movable piece 592. The subsequent movement of the ball removal movable piece 592 is due to inertial force, so no strong force acts on the ball removal movable piece 592, making it less likely to be damaged. Furthermore, the game ball B will not fly out of the ball removal passage 580b from between the main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a, ensuring that the game ball B can flow reliably downstream of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 87 and 88. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the underside of the payout device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left part 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full ball path unit 600 is used to guide game balls B released downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610. The upper full ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full ball path unit 600 comprises a box-shaped upper full base 601 attached to the dispensing base 551 and open at the rear, a box-shaped upper full cover 602 attached to the rear of the upper full base 601 and open at the front, and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the top end of the upper full cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full base 601 protrudes to the right from the right edge when viewed from the front, and comprises a rear cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the rear cover.

The upper full-ball path unit 600 also has an upper payout ball receiving passage 600a that opens upward near the left end of the top surface when viewed from the front and extends downward along the left edge from the bottom to a height of approximately 2/3 of the total height, an upper ball storage passage 600b that is connected to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, extends to the right when viewed from the front to about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to a height of approximately 1/6 of the total height, and an upper ball storage passage 600b that is connected to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and extends to the right when viewed from the front to about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to a height of approximately 1/6 of the total height, and an upper ball storage passage 600b that is connected to the left side of the center of the left-right direction of the upper ball storage passage 600b when viewed from the front. It is equipped with an upper normal dispensing passage 600c that extends downward and opens downward at the underside, an upper full-tank dispensing passage 600d that is adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c and extends downward from the right side of the center of the upper ball storage passage 600b when viewed from the front and opens downward at the underside, and an upper ball removal passage 600e that opens upward near the right end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, extends downward approximately vertically, and then opens downward near the right end of the lower surface (see Figure 92).

On the underside of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side when viewed from the front, the upper normal payout path 600c, the upper full payout path 600d, and the upper ball removal path 600e are lined up in this order and open downward. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving path 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the payout path 580a in the payout device 580, and the upstream end of the upper ball removal path 600e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal path 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, game balls B released (paid out) from the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 pass through the upper payout ball receiving path 600a and the upper ball storage path 600b, and are released downward from either the upper normal payout path 600c or the upper full payout path 600d. In addition, game balls B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 are released downward through the upper ball removal passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 87 and 88. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 or toward the base unit 620. The lower full ball path unit 610 extends in the front-to-rear direction so that the front end is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 is equipped with a lower full base 611 that has a lower normal dispensing path 610a, a lower full dispensing path 610b, and a lower ball removal path 610c, extends in the front-to-back direction, and is open upward; a lower full cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full base 611; a dispensing path opening/closing door 613 that is rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full base 611 around an axis extending front-to-back and that can open and close the downstream end openings of the lower normal dispensing path 610a and the lower full dispensing path 610b; and a closing spring 614 that biases the dispensing path opening/closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal dispensing path 610a and the lower full dispensing path 610b.

The lower full ball path unit 610 has, on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end, the lower normal dispensing path 610a, the lower full dispensing path 610b, and the lower ball removal path 610c, lined up in order from left to right when viewed from the front, with their upstream ends opening upward. The lower normal dispensing path 610a and the lower full dispensing path 610b extend forward side by side and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full dispensing path 610b extends forward slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing path 610a. The lower ball removal path 610c extends forward along the right side of the lower full dispensing path 610b when viewed from the front, and opens to the right halfway in the fore-and-aft direction.

The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is pivotally mounted between the front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b. This dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614, and in its normal state closes the front end openings (downstream end openings) of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is equipped with an operating protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. When viewed from the front, the operating protrusion 613a is shaped like a short arc centered on the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613, and its front end surface is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the counterclockwise end. This operating protrusion 613a is formed to abut against the door opening/closing abutment 150f of the door cover unit 150 on the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout path 610a, lower full payout path 610b, and lower ball removal path 610c, which open upward at the upper rear end, are located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout path 600c, upper full payout path 600d, and upper ball removal path 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600, respectively. As a result, game balls B released downward from the upper normal payout path 600c flow through the lower normal payout path 610a, game balls B released downward from the upper full payout path 600d flow through the lower full payout path 610b, and game balls B released downward from the upper ball removal path 600e flow through the lower ball removal path 610c.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b open immediately after the through ball passage 150a and full ball receiving port 150b of the fall cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. The downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c opens to face the ball removal guide section 627, which opens to the left in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is in its normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing path opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment 150f of the fall cover unit 150, causing it to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing path 610a and the lower full dispensing path 610b are open, and they are connected to the through ball path 150a and full ball receiving port 150b of the fall cover unit 150.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 moves away from the door opening/closing abutment 150f of the fall cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front due to the biasing force of the closing spring 614, closing the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. In this state, game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b can no longer move forward from their respective front-end openings. As a result, even when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4, game balls B will not spill out of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of gaming balls in the payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 92. When the payout unit 560 is assembled to the main frame 4, it is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551. In the normal state, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is positioned at the lower end, closing the ball removal path 580b branching off from the payout path 580a at the branching point. In addition, in the lower full ball path unit 610, the payout path opening/closing door 613 is in the open state.

A predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the ball tank 552, which is open upward, from the gaming hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of a ball shortage by the ball exhaustion detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are aligned in a row by the tank rail 553 and sent through the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout blade 589, and multiple game balls B become trapped upstream of the payout blade 589.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 presses against the movable piece member 573, causing the ball cut detection sensor 574 to detect the movable piece member 573. This indicates that the game ball B is stored at least in the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the dispensing blade 589.

In this state, when the payout motor 584 rotates the payout blade 589 in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, the game ball B stored in the ball storage section 589b moves in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear and is released downstream of the payout blade 589 in the payout passage 580a. The game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball storage section 589b) is then detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball passage unit 600.

Under normal conditions, game balls B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 flow through the upper ball storage passage 600b and down to the upper normal payout passage 600c located directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a. Game balls B that flow down to the upper normal payout passage 600c then pass through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the fall cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, before being released into the upper tray 201 from the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 in the tray unit 200.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 becomes full of game balls B, it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, and the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 become stuck in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610.As more game balls B are paid out, they also become stuck in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600, which is connected upstream to the lower normal payout passage 610a. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with game balls B and more game balls B are paid out, the game balls B begin to accumulate in the upper ball storage passage 600b, which is connected to the upper normal payout passage 600c on the upstream side, and begin to flow down the upper full payout passage 600d, which is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

The game balls B that flow down the upper full payout passage 600d then pass through the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 and are received by the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. The game balls B received in the full ball receiving port 150b are then released into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, ball discharge port 150d, and lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. This means that if the upper tray 201 is full of game balls B and more game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower tray 202.

When the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B and further game balls B cannot be released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, if more game balls B are dispensed, the game balls B will become trapped and stored in the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 upstream of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B have accumulated in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. This notifies the player by voice (e.g., "Please remove the balls!") that the upper tray 201 and lower tray 202 are full of game balls B, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is no longer in detection mode.

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 need to be removed from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is slid upward from its lowest position to its highest position. The lower end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is then pushed by the game ball B, causing it to rotate clockwise when viewed from the rear, and the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a and is pushed out of the ball removal passage 580b. This allows the game ball B to enter the ball removal passage 580b, which branches off from the payout passage 580a, and the game balls B on the upstream side are released downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, the game ball B flowing down contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball removal movable piece 592 at the area of the ball removal movable piece 592, making the ball removal movable piece 592 less likely to be damaged.

The game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, and is released from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide section 627 of the base unit 620, and then passes through the discharged ball receiving section 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to be discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment of the gaming hall).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 93 to 97. Figure 93(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear. Figure 94 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below and behind. Figure 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the front, with each main component disassembled, and Figure 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear, with each main component disassembled. Figure 97 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 comprises a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, below the game board mounting portion 501c; a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker unit 620a from behind; a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b; a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c; and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d from behind.

The speaker unit 620a comprises a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, below the game board mounting section 501c; a main frame speaker 622 attached to the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 near the left edge when viewed from the front, facing forward; and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main frame speaker 622, and open to the front.

The speaker cover 621 extends left and right and is equipped with a circular speaker mounting portion 621a that penetrates from front to back near the left edge when viewed from the front and is composed of multiple slits that extend up and down; a front space recess 621b that is recessed so that it bulges forward from the rear on the right side of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front; and a connection portion 621c that protrudes downward from the underside of the front space recess 621b, extends left and right, and opens diagonally downward and rearward.

The main frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side, facing forward. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at a 45-degree angle so that its lower end coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. The main frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs low-frequency sounds.

The speaker box 623 is shaped like a container that is open to the front, with the part behind the main frame speaker 622 protruding rearward the most, and is formed so that the protrusion decreases in a stepped manner toward the right as viewed from the front. This ensures that there is sufficient space behind the speaker box 623 to the right of the center as viewed from the front, allowing the placement of the base unit 620b, power supply unit 620c, etc. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface except for the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621.

The speaker unit 620a, together with the speaker cover 621 and speaker box 623, forms part of an enclosure 624 that contains the sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622. This enclosure 624 has a front recessed space 621b formed in the speaker cover 621 that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front. Therefore, even though the speaker box 623 is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount of rearward protrusion decreases as it moves to the right, a sufficiently large space is secured to the right of the main frame speaker 622.

When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connecting tube portion 43a with the sealing member 48 sandwiched therebetween, thereby connecting the space behind the main frame speaker 622 with the interior space 40a of the outer frame 2's curtain board. Therefore, a spacious enclosure 624 can be formed behind the main frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, speaker box 623, front curtain board member 42, and rear curtain board member 43, allowing sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622 to be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a in the front curtain board member 42.

In more detail, as described above, in speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main frame speaker 622 (part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right when viewed from the front with a relatively wide depth and is connected to the lower frame assembly 40 via the connection portion 621c and the connecting tube portion 43a. This means that sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622 can be transmitted to the lower frame assembly 40 without attenuation, particularly in the low-frequency range. The transmitted low-frequency range can then be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a in the front panel member 42.

In this case, the sound emitted forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 is emitted in an inverted phase, so that it resonates to amplify the sound output from the front of the main frame speaker 622 and emitted from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200. This allows for the output of a loud sound with deep bass even though the diameter of the main frame speaker 622 is small.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, allowing the player to hear deep bass sounds. This allows the player to hear a rich bass sound from the sound output from the front of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the platter unit 200, and the sound output from the rear of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2.

The speaker unit 620a also has a through hole 621d formed in the speaker cover 621, penetrating in the front-to-rear direction at a position between the lower part of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recessed portion for space 621b, and a through tube 623a formed in the speaker box 623, which extends cylindrically and penetrates in the front-to-rear direction, communicating with the through hole 621d. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other, and the enclosure 624 is independent. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 comprises a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a rear base 626 attached to the rear side of the front base 625, with the power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface.

The base unit 620b is formed by the front base 625 and rear base 626 working together, and is equipped with a ball removal guide section 627 that receives game balls B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and guides them to the right when viewed from the front, a discharged ball receiving section 628 that opens upward to the right when viewed from the front, downstream of the ball removal guide section 627, and receives game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5, and a ball discharge outlet 629 that discharges game balls B downward after passing through the ball removal guide section 627 and the discharged ball receiving section 628.

The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens to the left at the top of the left side when viewed from the front, and the downstream end opens to the left end of the discharged ball receiving section 628. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the opening of the upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 faces and coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, and can receive game balls B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c and guide them to the discharged ball receiving section 628.

The ejected ball receiving section 628 is open upward and extends left and right. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving section 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball removal guide section 627 at the left end when viewed from the front, and is sloped downward toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides game balls B removed from the ball tank 552 and game balls B ejected from the game board 5 to the right when viewed from the front using the ball guide section 627 and ejected ball receiver 628, before ejecting them downward from the ball ejection port 629, making it easier to secure a larger space to the left of the center when viewed from the front. This allows for a larger space in the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a, allowing players to hear a sound with richer bass than conventional pachinko machines.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover 631 attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630.

The payout control unit 620d comprises a box-shaped transparent payout control board box 632 that is removably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see Figure 97) housed within the payout control board box 632. The payout control board box 632 is composed of a transparent cover body and a transparent base body. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5 or the pressing of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the tray unit 200, to pay out the specified number of game balls B to the player's side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board 633 is housed in the payout control board box 632 and is configured as a crimped case.

The payout control board 633 also includes an error LED indicator (not shown) that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, as well as an RWM clear button 633z with a push operation portion that serves multiple functions. In this embodiment, a lead type RWM clear button 633z is used, and each lead of the RWM clear button 633z is soldered to the back surface (solder side) of the payout control board 633. The push operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is exposed through an opening formed in the transparent cover body, so that the push operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z can be pushed when the payout control board 633 is housed in the payout control board box 632.

The RWM clear button 633z functions as a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built into the payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided on the payout control board 633, and the RAM built into the main control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided on the main control board 1310; it also functions as a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values; and it also functions as an error reset switch for resetting errors displayed on the error LED indicator. In other words, in this embodiment, the setting change function related to the game specifications (function as a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values) is mounted on the payout control board 633, which is a board separate from the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the separate board does not have to be the payout control board 633; it could be a board that is not housed in a board case, a board that is housed in a board case, or a board that is housed in a board case configured as a crimped case. However, since the setting change function (functioning as a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values) is an important function for a gaming machine, high security is desirable, and boards stored in a board case have higher security than boards not stored in a board case, and boards with even higher security are boards stored in a board case configured as a crimped case. The payout control board 633 is a board stored in a board case configured as a crimped case, so it can be said to have high security. Furthermore, the fact that the main control board 1310 is attached to the gaming panel 1100, while the payout control board 633 is attached to the main frame 4, also contributes to improved security.

The interface unit 620e comprises a board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 so as to cover the rear side of the interface board 635.

The board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at the portion that protrudes furthest to the rear, behind the main frame speaker 622. One end (on the main frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 is connected to the interface board 635. The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, main control board, peripheral control board, etc., and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the board base 634 (interface board 635) when viewed from the front, covering part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The rear cover 640 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 76 to 82. The rear cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5, which is inserted from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The right side of the rear cover 640 in a front view is rotatably attached around an axis extending vertically to the rear end of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501, and the left side is pivotally attached to the rear cover attachment portion 551i of the payout base 551 and the rear cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600 so as to be able to open and close freely. A locking screw 642 is provided on the left side of the rear cover 640, in a portion corresponding to the rear cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600. The left side of the back cover 640 is attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i of the payout base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full-ball path unit 600, and a locking screw 642 is threaded into the back cover attachment portion 601a to fix the back cover 640. The back cover 640 can be rotated approximately 180 degrees from a closed state that covers the rear side of the game board 5 to an open state that exposes the rear side of the game board 5.

The rear cover 640 is formed in the shape of a flat plate that extends vertically and horizontally, with the right edge bent forward when viewed from the front. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear surface is positioned approximately flush with the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d of the payout base 551. The rear cover 640 has multiple slits 641 that penetrate from front to back and extend vertically. In this embodiment, the rear cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, allowing the inside of the main body frame 4 to be seen from the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Note that no slits 641 are formed in the area corresponding to the main control board box 1320, which will be described later.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 98. Figure 98(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame 4 and locks the main frame 4 and the door frame 3, and the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 comprises a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side of the rear extension 501j of the main frame base 501 and extends vertically; multiple door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the door frame 3; multiple outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the outer frame 2; and a transmission cylinder 654 that protrudes forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 and moves the door frame hooks 652 or outer frame hooks 653 up and down depending on the direction of rotation.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from a position above the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651 and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main frame 4, the multiple (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 protrude forward from the front surface of the main frame base 501. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main frame base 501, and when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, its front end engages with the rotation transmission member 133 of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3, transmitting the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 and causing it to rotate.

The locking unit 650 has multiple (three) door frame hooks 652 that engage with the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and multiple (two) outer frame hooks 653 that engage with the upper hook member 24 and lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, inserting a key that corresponds to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 and rotating it counterclockwise as viewed from the front causes the multiple door frame hooks 652 to move upward via the transfer cylinder 654, unlocking the door frame 3 from the main frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the multiple outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transfer cylinder 654, unlocking the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2. With the door frame 3 open relative to the main frame 4, sliding the outer frame unlock lever 656 downward causes the multiple outer frame hooks 653 to move downward, unlocking the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2. In this way, the lock between the main frame 4 and door frame 3, or between the main frame 4 and outer frame 2, can be unlocked.

When locking the gap between the main frame 4 and the door frame 3, or between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are tapered at their tips. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, or the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 move downward or upward to overcome the hook member 116, upper hook member 24, and lower hook member 25, and then enter a locked state due to the biasing force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 99 to 106. Figure 99(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B in (a). Figure 100 is an enlarged view of the upper part of the main body frame in a perspective view from the rear. Figure 101(a) is a perspective view of the ball tank with the tank rail and other components assembled thereto, as seen from the front and bottom, and Figure 101(b) is an exploded perspective view of Figure 101(a) as seen from the front. Figure 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the area through which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame flow. Figure 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. Figure 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls into the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. Figure 106 is an enlarged view of the tank rail area in a perspective view of the main body frame from the rear of the hinge side.

As described above, the main frame 4 comprises a frame-shaped main frame base 501 whose rear portion can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and which is detachably and hinge-rotatably attached to the outer frame 2 by the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520, and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5; an inverted L-shaped payout base 551 attached along the upper and left edges of the rear side of the main frame base 501 when viewed from the front; a box-shaped (container-shaped) ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551, extending left and right, and open upward; and a groove-shaped tank 552 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552, extending leftward and open upward. It comprises a tank rail 553, a first rail cover 554 attached to part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 spaced to the left of the first rail cover 554 when viewed from the front, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 for paying out game balls B to the player.

The ball tank 552 has a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above, a bottom wall 552a that slopes so that the left side is lower when viewed from the front, a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c that extend upward from the front and rear edges of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e that extend upward from both the left and right edges of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed like a container with an open top. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from island facilities such as an amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

The spherical tank 552 also has an overflow section 552f that is cut out from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining upper outer edge. This overflow section 552f is formed over approximately three-quarters of the left-right length of the front wall 552b, from the end of the left side wall 552d to the end on the opposite side (the right side wall 552e).

When viewed from the front, the right end (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the interior of the ball tank 552, and the downstream side extends to one side (left) in the left-right direction, away from the ball tank 552. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide section 553a that extends from the upstream side to the downstream end at its bottom and is shaped so that only one game ball B can pass through in the width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball B. The main guide section 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left when viewed from the front. In plan view, the main guide section 553a extends parallel to an axis extending leftward from the right end to a position that is approximately 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction, then extends diagonally from the right end to a position that is approximately 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction, moving rearward as it moves leftward, and then extends from there in a crank shape that extends parallel to the axis extending left-right to the left end. In the main guide section 553a of the tank rail 553, a section extending parallel to the axis extending laterally from the left end to the right extends to the top end with the same width, and the upper side is closed off by attaching a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, and a ball rectifying member 556 to the upper end of this section. Furthermore, in the section where the upper side is closed off, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end (left end), and at the downstream end it is formed to a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of game ball B) that allows the flow of only one game ball B.

The tank rail 553 extends from its upstream end above the main guide section 553a to a location where the upper side is closed. It bulges out wider than the width of the main guide section 553a so that multiple game balls B are lined up in a width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game balls B, and has a bulging section 553b that narrows in width from the upstream end toward the downstream side to match the width of the main guide section 553a. This bulging section 553b allows multiple game balls B, which are spread out in width on the upstream side, to be aligned in width so that the width is the width of a single game ball B as they move downstream. The bulging section 553b is also formed so that its width narrows from the upper end toward the lower main guide section 553a. As a result, the tank rail 553 can align multiple game balls B flowing through the bulging section 553b in a single line in the width direction as they move downstream and downward.

The bulge portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a three-dimensionally curved shape with its center of curvature located on the inner side. Because the center of curvature of the bulge portion 553b is located higher than the main guide portion 553a, a slightly chamfered corner is formed at the boundary between the main guide portion 553a and the bulge portion 553b on the tank rail 553. Furthermore, the bulge portion 553b is curved with a greater curvature downstream than upstream. For this reason, when a game ball B flows through the three-dimensionally curved bulge portion 553b, the direction of the reaction force from the bulge portion 553b acting on it changes depending on the position of the bulge portion 553b it abuts, thereby suppressing ball jamming within the bulge portion 553b. In more detail, if bulge portion 553b were formed into a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force would always act in a constant direction from the inner surface of bulge portion 553b on game balls B circulating within bulge portion 553b, making it difficult for the reaction force to disperse. As a result, game balls B inside are always pushed in a constant direction, making it difficult for the game balls B to escape and making ball jamming more likely to occur. In contrast, because bulge portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of bulge portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. This distributes the pushing direction of multiple game balls B circulating inside, making it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape and making ball jamming less likely to occur.

The tank rail 553 is also made of a transparent material, allowing the interior to be viewed from the outside. This means that even if ball jamming occurs within the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B within the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, allowing the location of the jammed balls to be quickly identified. This allows ball jamming within the tank rail 553 to be quickly resolved, minimizing interruptions to gameplay due to ball jamming and preventing a loss of interest in the game due to interruptions. Furthermore, because the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 can be viewed from behind through the tank rail 553. Therefore, if a malfunction occurs in the movable presentation unit of the game board 5, the status of the transmission mechanism, such as the drive motor, gears, and belts, can be confirmed while the game board 5 is still attached to the main frame 4, achieving the same effects as those described above.

The main frame 4 is provided in front of the ball tank 552, extending in the front-to-rear direction, and extending outward (to the left) from the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-to-right direction (the left side when viewed from the front).It is equipped with an overflow surface portion 501m, whose rear end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and whose front end is higher in order to return game balls B that have overflowed forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, and a bypass passage 552g, which extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulge portion 553b on the tank rail 553, whose upper side is open, and which is sloped so that its rear end is lower and also sloped so that the side facing away from the ball tank 552 (the left side) is lower in the left-to-right direction, and which guides some of the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m.

The main body frame 4 also includes a discharge section 551j, which is located on either the left or right outer side of the bypass passage 552g, opposite the left wall 552d of the ball tank 552, and has a width greater than the outer diameter of the game balls and a bottom surface lower than the open upper portion of the tank rail 553; an external terminal board 558, which is located on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g across the discharge section 551j and lower than the overflow surface 501m, and has multiple wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear; and a terminal cover 551k which covers the upper sides of the multiple wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558) and has an upper surface which extends horizontally at a position higher than the overflow surface 501m.

The overflow surface 501m is formed on the main frame base 501. The overflow surface 501m extends rearward in a flat plate shape from a position two to four times the outer diameter of the game ball B below the upper edge of the rear surface of the base main body 501a, which has a vertically extending rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The overflow surface 501m is formed with a left-right length that is approximately one-third of the left-right length of the main frame base 501, and its left end when viewed from the front is located to the right of one-third of the total left-right length from the left end of the main frame base 501. The overflow surface 501m is formed so that its height from the front end to the rear end is approximately one-half the outer diameter of the game ball B. When the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, a gap approximately twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between this overflow surface 501m and the outer frame upper member 30.

The main frame base 501 is located on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m and has flat left and right step portions 501n and 501o that extend approximately horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface 501m, and a plurality of ribs 501p that extend in the front-to-rear direction on both the left and right outer sides of the left and right step portions 501n and 501o, with their upper ends higher than those of the left and right step portions 501n and 501o, and are arranged in a row in the left-to-right direction at intervals narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The left step portion 501n is shorter in the left-to-right direction than its length in the front-to-rear direction. Furthermore, the left step portion 501n is inclined so that the rear right corner is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front. The right step portion 501o is longer in the left-to-right direction than its length in the front-to-rear direction. Additionally, the right step 501o is inclined so that the rear left corner is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front.

The multiple ribs 501p on the main frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the gap between the outer frame 2 and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main frame base 501 is assembled to the main frame 4, in a front view, the right end of the overflow surface 501m is aligned left-right with the right end of the overflow section 552f of the spherical tank 552, the left end of the overflow surface 501m is aligned left-right with the left end of the bypass passage 552g, and the right end of the right step 501o is aligned left-right with the right side wall 552e of the spherical tank 552.

The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the spherical tank 552. Note that, below, the container-like area surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, front wall 552b, rear wall 552c, left side wall 552d, and right side wall 552e will be referred to simply as the spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g has a passage surface 552h that extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 in a flat plate-like shape. The passage surface 552h is sloped so that its front end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and its rear end is lower, and a weir portion that extends upward from the edge of the passage surface 552h opposite the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear edge of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g extends rearward at its left end (toward the weir portion 552i) in a front view to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the spherical tank 552, and extends obliquely forward from the left end to the right end. Note that the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may be horizontal rather than inclined left and right.

When assembled to the main frame 4, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends along the front end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends diagonally in the left-right direction, in a crank-like shape. In other words, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction. As a result, the flow direction of the game ball B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g changes from the diagonal rear end to a direction perpendicular to the diagonal rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends approximately parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B within the tank rail 553). Therefore, the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction approximately perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, allowing the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g to be received by a wider portion of the tank rail 553. Furthermore, because game balls B are supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction approximately perpendicular (perpendicular to) the direction in which the game balls B flow, it is less likely that game balls B from the bypass passage 552g will clog the tank rail 553.

The bypass passage 552g extends diagonally from left to right so that its rear end moves rearward as it approaches the downstream side of the tank rail 553. Therefore, when a game ball B is released from the bypass passage 552g toward the tank rail 553, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released toward the upstream side, where the tank rail 553 is wider, rather than the downstream side, where the tank rail 553 is narrower. By releasing the game ball B into the wider section, it is possible to prevent ball jamming within the tank rail 553.

In addition, the area on the tank rail 553 where the game balls B are guided by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the rear of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left part of the rear wall 552c when viewed from the front. Game balls B that pass under the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flow through this area. For this reason, in the area behind the bypass passage 552g on the tank rail 553, the height of multiple game balls B stacked vertically does not exceed the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). Therefore, space (empty space) can be secured downstream of the ball tank 552 on the tank rail 553, that is, at the rear end of the bypass passage 552g, allowing game balls B to be stacked upward. As a result, game balls B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and game balls B will not spill rearward from the tank rail 553.

The spherical tank 552 has a flat guide surface 552j that extends downward to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow section 552f on the left wall 552d within the area surrounded by the front wall 552b, rear wall 552c, and left side wall 552d. The guide surface 552j extends from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c in the front-to-rear direction. Additionally, the guide surface portion 552j is formed in such a way that, in a front view, its right edge extends diagonally rearward from a position approximately one-third of the total length of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b, to a position approximately one-ninth of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction, and to a position approximately one-half of the total length of the front wall 552b from the front wall 552b to the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, and from there extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position approximately one-third of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-to-right direction.

In plan view, the spherical tank 552 has an opening 552k formed vertically in an area enclosed by the right edge of the guide surface portion 552j, which is shaped as described above, and a straight line connecting the end of the right edge on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The spherical tank 552 also has flat flange portions 552l extending outward in the left-right and up-down directions on the same plane as the front wall 552b at the front end of the right wall 552e and at the front end of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. The upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edges of the two flange portions 552l are higher than the upper edges of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the upper surfaces of the left step 501n and right step 501o of the main frame base 501).

When the spherical tank 552 and tank rail 553 are assembled, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the spherical tank 552. Furthermore, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends left and right in a crank-like shape in a plan view, and the portion to its left that extends straight left and right, are located rearward (protruding) from the spherical tank 552. The rear end edge of the left-hand bypass passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends left and right in a crank-like shape.

The discharge section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge section 551j extends rearward from the rear side of the flange section 552l on the left side of the spherical tank 552 (as viewed from the front) to the tank rail 553, so that it descends in a stepped manner rearward from a height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the spherical tank 552. Then, it extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (a position near the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction), and then extends rearward.

The external terminal board 558 has multiple wire connection terminals 558a attached to its rear surface, lined up in the left-right direction. These wire connection terminals 558a are one-touch terminals whose gripping portion opens by operating a lever to grasp the tip of an electrical wire. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the external terminal board 558 is located in front of the area on the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed by the first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, and ball straightening member 556. A terminal cover 551k, which covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (multiple wire connection terminals 558a), is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at approximately the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the effects of the upper part of the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained. First, as shown by the white arrows in Figure 103, the overflow surface 501m, left step 501n, right step 501o, and bypass passage 552g are inclined so that the rear ends of the overflow surface 501m and bypass passage 552g are lower, with the rear right corner of the left step 501n and the rear left corner of the right step 501o being lower. Furthermore, the bottom wall 552a and tank rail 553 (main guide section 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end is lower when viewed from the front. Furthermore, the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end, opposite the bottom wall 552a, is lower.

As the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to supply from the island equipment, they first flow out over the overflow section 552f, which is the lowest part of the outer periphery's upper edge, and out the outside (front) of the ball tank 552. The game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552 can escape into the overflow surface section 501m, and the game balls B that flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface section 501m can be returned into the ball tank 552 due to the slope of the overflow surface section 501m (see Figure 104). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent any further increase in the number of game balls B within the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from pressing against each other strongly within the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure), and it is possible to prevent blockages (so-called ball jamming) caused by game balls B interlocking with each other within the ball tank 552.

In addition, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 onto the overflow surface 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. This prevents the game balls B accumulated on the overflow surface 501m from exerting a strong backward pressure on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, preventing the game balls B from clogging inside the ball tank 552. In addition, because the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to prevent game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m from spilling outside (to the rear) of the main body frame 4. This prevents game balls B that have spilled outside the main body frame 4 from becoming trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, preventing the main body frame 4 from opening or closing.

Furthermore, some of the game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552 onto the overflow surface 501m can be guided downstream of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position along the left side away from the ball tank 552.This means that the flow (pressure) of the game balls B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed downstream of the tank rail 553, preventing the game balls B from pressing against each other too strongly within the tank rail 553 and preventing the game balls B from clogging.

In addition, the height of the remaining upper edge of the outer periphery of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow section 552f is made higher than the overflow section 552f, so that the upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is higher than the overflow section 552f, i.e., the rear end of the overflow surface 501m. As a result, game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552, overflow into the overflow surface 501m, and then flow from the overflow surface 501m to the bypass passage 552g are blocked by the left side wall 552d on one side of the ball tank 552, preventing them from returning from the bypass passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side. This prevents the game balls B on the bypass passage 552g side from pressing against the game balls B inside the ball tank 552 and causing clogging of the game balls B inside the ball tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is higher than the rear end of the overflow surface 501m (the passage surface 552h along which the game balls B roll in the bypass passage 552g), preventing the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 into the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface 501m. This prevents the game balls B from flowing into the bypass passage 552g from the side (ball tank 552), allowing the flow of the game balls B in the bypass passage 552g to flow in a fixed direction from the overflow surface 501m at the front end toward the tank rail 553 at the rear end, thereby ensuring a fixed pressure on the game balls B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553. Therefore, the direction of pressure applied to the game balls B within the tank rail 553 is varied, preventing the game balls B from pushing against each other and becoming stuck, and preventing the game balls B from becoming jammed.

In addition, the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guide section 553a that extends to the downstream end. When the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide section 553a, they line up in a row in the left-right direction. This allows the game balls B in the tank rail 553 to be aligned, ensuring that the game balls B can be reliably guided to the downstream payout device 580. Furthermore, the open upper section of the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulge section 553b that can accommodate multiple game balls B. Therefore, game balls B released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received, ensuring the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the closed-top portion, and narrows in width from the upstream end toward the downstream side to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. This allows multiple game balls B to be aligned in a single line in the width direction as they move downstream within the bulging portion 553b. Furthermore, the closed-top portion of the tank rail 553 is configured so that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow decreases toward the downstream end. This allows multiple game balls B that are stacked in multiple layers in the height direction on the upstream side (toward the ball tank 552) to flow downstream through the closed-top portion of the tank rail 553, reducing the number of layers in the height direction and aligning them in a single line. Therefore, the tank rail 553 allows multiple game balls B to be guided downstream (toward the payout device 580) in a single line.

Furthermore, since it is equipped with an overflow surface portion 501m and a bypass passage 552g, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and since the tank rail 553 is equipped with a bulge portion 553b, the volume within the tank rail 553 can be increased, so that, together with the ball tank 552, a larger number of game balls B can be stored.

In addition, on the opposite side of the ball tank 552, with the bypass passage 552g and discharge section 551j in between, there is an external terminal board 558 equipped with multiple wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the multiple wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558). Therefore, the wire connection terminals 558a and terminal cover 551k can be positioned farther away from the ball tank 552 to which game balls B are supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game balls B supplied from the island equipment bounce or are supplied with force at the ball tank 552 or overflow surface section 501m, they are less likely to reach (contact) the wire connection terminals 558a, etc., and problems such as short circuits or loose electrical wiring due to the game balls B contacting them will not occur.

In addition, by directing the multiple wire connection terminals 558a toward the rear and making the top surface of the terminal cover 551k higher than the overflow surface 501m, even if game balls B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounce off the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, they are less likely to land on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k. Even if game balls B land on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k, they are less likely to fall off the rear side, making it easier to avoid the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Furthermore, game balls B returned from the overflow surface 501m to the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 are sent upstream of the ball tank 552 (to the right in Figure 104) due to the inclination of the guide surface 552j. This prevents the game balls B on the guide surface 552j from pressing downstream against the game balls B in the ball tank 552, preventing clogging of the game balls B within the ball tank 552.

In addition, even if game balls B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island equipment bounce off the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m and land on the left step 501n or right step 501o on both sides of the overflow surface 501m, as shown in Figure 104, the slope of these elements can guide the game balls B to the overflow surface 501m or the bypass passage 552g, preventing problems caused by game balls B spilling outside the main frame 4.

In addition, because the game balls B pass under the guide surface 552j when they flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553, the guide surface 552j can regulate the amount (height) of game balls B stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 so that it does not exceed the lower surface of the guide surface 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface 552j) on the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, space (empty space) can be secured in which game balls B can be stacked on the upper side, and game balls B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a and terminal cover 551k are positioned in front of the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, even if a game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B will not be received by the tank rail 553, preventing the game ball B from affecting the game ball B inside the tank rail 553 and causing malfunctions.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 107 to 117. Figure 107 is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine with the center gadgets and other components made opaque. Figure 108 is a perspective view of the game board in Figure 107 as seen from the front right, Figure 109 is a perspective view of the game board in Figure 107 as seen from the front left, and Figure 110 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. Figure 111 is a schematic explanatory diagram of the routing of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. Figure 112 is a front view of the game board with the center gadgets and other components made transparent. Figure 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board broken down into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 114 is an exploded perspective view of the game board broken down into its main components as seen from the rear. Figure 115 is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in Figure 107, and Figure 116 is a cross-sectional view taken along line D-D in Figure 107. Figure 117 is a front view of the game board with the front unit cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle pins.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is inserted by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. The game area 5a is provided with a general prize opening 2001, a first start opening 2002, a regular prize opening 2003, a second start opening 2004, a big prize opening 2005, and a special prize opening 2006, which grant a player a predetermined benefit (e.g., the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) when a game ball B is accepted or passes through. This game board 5 is designed for entertaining players to operate the handle 182 and circulate game balls B within the game area 5a so that game balls B are accepted by the general prize winning slot 2001, first start slot 2002, regular prize winning slot 2003, second start slot 2004, big prize winning slot 2005, and special prize winning slot 2006 within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 comprises a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the play area 5a and has a generally rectangular outline when viewed from the front, and a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the play area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see Figure 117, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front of the game panel 1100 in a location within the play area 5a. The game board 5 also comprises a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit 1300 attached to the rear of the board holder 1200 and having a main control board 1310 (see Figures 115 and 137, etc.) that controls the game content played by shooting the game ball B into the play area 5a.

The gaming board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player; a peripheral control unit 1500 that is located behind the gaming panel 1100; an effect display device 1600 that is located in the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying specified effect images; a panel relay board 1710 that is located behind the gaming panel 1100 and relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510; a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100; and a rear unit 3000 that is attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1100.

A performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the rear unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the performance display device 1600. A panel relay board 1710 is attached below the performance display device 1600 on the rear surface of the rear unit 3000. The panel relay board 1710 relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the general prize opening sensor 3001, first start opening sensor 3002, second start opening sensor 2402, regular prize opening sensor 2401, large prize opening sensor 2403, special prize opening sensor 2513, first V prize opening sensor 2514, first loss opening sensor 2515, second V prize opening sensor 3003, third loss opening sensor 3004, left outlet sensor 3032, right outlet sensor 3033, start opening solenoid 2412, attacca solenoid 2414, special prize opening solenoid 2512, first distribution solenoid 2532, second distribution solenoid 2545, and third distribution drive motor 2555.

The front unit 2000 comprises a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a, a first starting opening 2002 that is always open to receive game balls B at a different position in the game area 5a from the plurality of general winning openings 2001, a regular winning opening 2003 that is always open to receive game balls B at a different position in the game area 5a, a second starting opening 2004 that can receive game balls B depending on the result of a regular lottery that is drawn when game ball B is received by regular winning opening 2003, and a ball that can be received by the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. The machine is equipped with a large prize opening 2005 that can accept game ball B depending on the result of a first or second special lottery drawn by accepting game ball B, a bonus prize opening 2006 that can accept game ball B depending on the result of a first or second special lottery drawn by accepting game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, a first V prize opening 2007 and a second V prize opening 2008 that are given the opportunity to accept game ball B accepted into the bonus prize opening 2006, and multiple magnetic sensors 2010 that detect magnetic fields acting fraudulently within the game area 5a.

The front unit 2000 also includes a start opening unit 2100 that is attached to the center of the left-right direction within the play area 5a, directly above the bottom end of the play area 5a, and has a first start opening 2002; a side unit 2200 that is attached to the left of the start opening unit 2100 as viewed from the front, along the inner rail 1002, and has three general winning openings 2001; an upper left side unit 2300 that is attached slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 as viewed from the front; and a side unit 2300 within the play area 5a. It is equipped with an attacca unit 2400 which is attached to the right of the start opening unit 2100, which is in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and which has a normal winning opening 2003, a second start opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005, and a frame-shaped center device 2500 which is attached above the start opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and which has a device winning opening 2006, a first V winning opening 2007, and a second V winning opening 2008.

The attacker unit 2400 is equipped with a normal winning opening sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening sensor 2402 that detects a game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects a game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005. The center device 2500 is equipped with a device winning opening sensor 2513 that detects a game ball B received in the device winning opening 2006, a first V winning opening sensor 2514 that detects a game ball B received in the first V winning opening 2007, and a first losing opening sensor 2515 that detects a game ball B received in the first losing opening 2535.

The rear unit 3000 comprises a rear box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120, is box-shaped with an open front and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a locking mechanism 3020 which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 and allows the performance display device 1600 to be detachably attached. The rear unit 3000 also includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, a first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects a game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 provided in the starting opening unit 2100, a second V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects a game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 of the center device 2500, and a third losing opening sensor 3004 that detects a game ball B received in the third losing opening 2556 of the center device 2500 (see FIG. 137).

The rear unit 3000 also includes an out ball detection unit 3030 that detects game balls B (game balls B for which no special bonus has been awarded) that have been shot into the game area 5a and not accepted by the general prize winning slot 2001, first start slot 2002, regular prize winning slot 2003, second start slot 2004, large prize winning slot 2005, or special prize winning slot 2006, a light guide plate presentation unit 3100 attached to the front end of the rear box 3010, and a rear presentation unit 3200 attached inside the rear box 3010 behind the light guide plate presentation unit 3100.

The light guide plate presentation unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 is equipped with a rear bottom ball discharge unit 3120 that receives and discharges downward game balls B received in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200, and the second V winning port 2008 and third loss port 2556 of the third distribution device 2550 in the center device 2500, a rear right ball discharge unit 3130 that receives and discharges downward game balls B received in the first loss port 2535 and first V winning port 2007 in the center device 2500, and a magnetic sensor (not shown) that detects magnetic fields acting illegally on the warp entrance 2501 in the center device 2500.

[5-1. Pre-construction members]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 118. Figure 118(a) is a perspective view of the front component and game panel of the game board as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and game panel as seen from the back.

The front component 1000 is formed to be entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has an approximately square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an approximately circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction, with the inner periphery of the inner shape defining the outer periphery of the play area 5a. The front component 1000 is equipped with an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc from the lower end toward the left of the center in the left-to-right direction in a front view, passing the upper center in the left-to-right direction in a front view, in a clockwise circumferential direction, an inner rail 1002 that is positioned inside the front component 1000 approximately along the outer rail 1001, and extends in an arc from the lower center in the left-to-right direction in a front view to the upper left diagonal direction in a front view, and an out guide portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the play area 5a on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front, and is sloped downward toward the rear.

The component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that slopes linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 when viewed from the front to near the right edge of the component 1000, with the right end being slightly higher; a right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the lower right rail 1004 along the right edge of the component 1000 to below the upper end of the outer rail 1001, with the upper part curved inward of the component 1000; and a collision stop section 1006 that connects the upper end of the right rail 1005 to the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and against which a game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact.

The component 1000 also includes a backflow prevention member 1007 that is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and can rotate only between a closed position in which it extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 to close the gap between it and the outer rail 1001, and an open position in which it rotates clockwise when viewed from the front to open the gap between it and the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is provided with an outlet 1008 that penetrates from front to back at the rear end of the out guide section 1003, located at the bottom center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 passes through the outlet 1008 and the out ball detection unit 3030 of the rear unit 3000, which will be described later, and is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100).

The component 1000 also has security recesses 1009 recessed rearward from the front end at the outside of the areas extending approximately perpendicularly from the lower ends of the outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002, the underside of the out guide section 1003 and lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 on the door frame 3 is inserted into this security recess 1009. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to insert an illegal tool such as piano wire into the game area 5a between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, the attempt will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

The component 1000 also has a notch 1010 cut upward from the bottom end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1103 of the gaming panel 1100, so that when the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 pass through the notch 1010 and the notch and face forward.

Furthermore, the component 1000 is provided with a function display unit mounting portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a stamp attachment portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner.

In addition, the front component 1000 is almost entirely transparent, allowing the game panel 1100 located at the rear to be seen from the front.

[5-2. Game Panel]
The gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 118 etc. The gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and is fitted with a front unit 2000 and a rear unit 3000. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 (see Figure 117 etc.).

The gaming panel 1100 is formed from a wooden board such as plywood of a predetermined thickness (e.g., 18 mm to 21 mm), and its outer shape is formed to be approximately the same as that of the previous component 1000. The gaming panel 1100 is located at the lowest position within the gaming area 5a, and has an outlet recess 1101 recessed upward from the bottom end at a position corresponding to the outlet 1008 of the previous component 1000. The gaming panel 1100 also has multiple openings 1102 that penetrate from front to back and are used to attach the front unit 2000.

The gaming panel 1100 also has a notch 1103 cut out from the bottom upward in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1103 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the previous component 1000, so that when the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 pass through the notch 1010 and face forward. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, a decorative sheet with patterns and decorations in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the gaming board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 113 and 114. The board holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 has an ejection section 1201 that is cut out from the front end toward the rear in the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. When assembled to the gaming board 5, this board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1100 from the bottom and rear, and a main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge section 1201 is located directly above the discharged ball receiving section 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. This allows it to receive all game balls B discharged to the rear of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1008 and the discharged ball detection unit 3030 of the rear unit 3000, as well as game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and rear unit 3000, and discharge them from the discharge section 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharged ball receiving section 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 110, 111, and 113 to 115. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls the game content and the payout of game balls B, a setting change board 1311 that can set game performance, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 and is attached to the board holder 1200.

When the main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, when the game board 5 is viewed from behind, the main control board 1310, which is rectangular and elongated in the left-right direction, is positioned so as to occupy approximately four-fifths of the area surrounded by the left, top, right, and bottom edges of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, moving from the left edge to the right edge, and the square-shaped setting change board 1311 is positioned in the remaining one-fifth of the area, at the corner where the top and right edges of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected.

As described above, the outer frame 2 coaxially supports the upper body frame hinge member 510 and lower body frame hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 via the upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 and lower outer frame hinge member 60, allowing the main body frame 4 to be opened and closed forward around the left side as viewed from the front. Therefore, the left side of the main body frame 4 as viewed from the front, where the upper body frame hinge member 510 and lower body frame hinge assembly 52 of the main body frame 4 are located, is the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, and the opposite right side of the main body frame 4 as viewed from the front, is the open side of the main body frame 4. In other words, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame 4, the main control board 1310 is located on the open side of the main body frame 4, while the setting change board 1311 is located on the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4.

Furthermore, the rear cover 640, which is attached to the rear side of the main frame base unit 500 of the main frame 4 in an openable and closable manner, covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame 4, as described above. In other words, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame 4, the main control board box 1320 is covered by the rear cover 640. Furthermore, as described above, the right side of the rear cover 640 when viewed from the front is rotatably attached around an axis extending vertically to the rear end of the rear extension portion 501j of the main frame base 501, and the left side is attached to the rear cover attachment portion 551i of the payout base 551 and the rear cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600. Therefore, the right side when viewed from the front is the support side (closed side) of the rear cover 640, and the opposite left side when viewed from the front is the open side of the rear cover 640. In other words, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame 4, the main control board 1310 is located on the pivot side (closed side) of the rear cover 640, while the setting change board 1311 is located on the open side of the rear cover.

In this embodiment, green resist is used for the main control board 1310, and the entire front (mounting surface) and back (soldering surface) of the main control board 1310 are solidly painted with green resist, except for the various land patterns, whereas white, a different color from the resist for the main control board 1310, is used for the setting change board 1311, and the entire front (mounting surface) and back (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311 are solidly painted with white resist, except for the various land patterns.

Here, we will explain why a different color is used for the resist of the setting change board 1311 than for the main control board 1310. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are both housed in the main control board box 1320. The amusement hall manager, amusement hall staff, and other staff are highly aware that the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game (controlling the game content and the payout of game balls B, etc.) and is therefore highly important from a security perspective. Therefore, there is no need to distinguish this board from other boards and draw attention to the fact that it is the main control board 1310. In contrast, the setting change board 1311 has an entirely new function in the pachinko machine 1, namely, the ability to set game performance. Therefore, although the setting change board 1311 is housed in the main control board box 1320, there is very little awareness that it is a board with high security importance. Therefore, it is necessary to distinguish this board from other boards and draw attention to the fact that it is the setting change board 1311.

In this embodiment, therefore, the green color commonly used as a resist for circuit boards is used as the resist for the main control board 1310, and white, which is different from the color used as the resist for the main control board 1310, is used as the resist for the setting change board 1311. This makes the setting change board 1311 stand out more than the main control board 1310 among the boards housed in the main control board box 1320, and helps to raise awareness that, in addition to the main control board 1310, the setting change board 1311 is also a board of high importance from a security perspective.

In the above-described embodiment, the resist for the setting change board 1311 is white, which is different from the green used for the resist for the main control board 1310. However, as long as it is possible to distinguish between the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311, the resist may be yellow, red, blue, transparent, etc.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the resist for the setting change board 1311 is white, which is different from the green used for the resist for the main control board 1310. However, instead of the resist for the setting change board 1311, the setting change board 1311 may be silk-screened in white to cover almost the entire front surface (mounting surface) and/or back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, or may be silk-screened in any of black, blue, yellow, and red.

Next, we will explain the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311. The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparent. The internal space formed by the cover body and base body is capable of housing the main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311. Because the cover body and base body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, it is possible to check the condition of the front and back sides of the main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311 (whether or not tampering has occurred or whether or not an unauthorized IC is installed) from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Furthermore, the main control board box 1320 is equipped with multiple sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, that sealing mechanism must be destroyed to open the main control board box 1320, leaving traces of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by observing the opening and closing traces, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be detected, providing an enhanced deterrent against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311. The cover body is also formed with multiple heat dissipation vents that allow air inside the main control board box 1320 to be released to the outside air.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1311. The main control board 1310 is also connected to the function display unit 1400, general prize opening sensor 3001, first start opening sensor 3002, normal prize opening sensor 2401, second start opening sensor 2402, large prize opening sensor 2403, special prize opening sensor 2513, first V prize opening sensor 2514, first loss opening sensor 2515, second V prize opening sensor 3003, third loss opening sensor 3004, left outlet sensor 3032, right outlet sensor 3033, start opening solenoid 2412, attacca solenoid 2414, special prize opening solenoid 2512, first distribution solenoid 2532, second distribution solenoid 2545, third distribution drive motor 2555, magnetic sensor 2010, left outlet sensor 3032, right outlet sensor 3033, etc.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is equipped with a setting key switch 1311a that can change and confirm the settings of the pachinko machine 1. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected (inter-board connection) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310. (The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 may also be electrically connected via a harness (electrical wiring). The harness (electrical wiring) can absorb (soften) the force associated with operating the setting key switch 1311a, making it less likely to be transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310.) This connector connection (inter-board connection) electrically connects the signal from the setting key switch 1311a to the main control board 1310. Note that the connector connection between the boards can be either a normal connector without a floating mechanism or a special connector with a floating mechanism. A normal connector without a floating mechanism consists of a socket and a plug, and the two mate by inserting and pushing the plug into the socket. When the socket and the plug mate, there is absolutely no movement perpendicular to the direction in which the plug is inserted and pushed (e.g., up and down). In contrast, a special connector with a floating mechanism consists of a socket and a plug, and the two mate by inserting and pushing the socket into the plug. When the socket and the plug mate, there is movement perpendicular to the direction in which the socket is inserted and pushed (e.g., up and down) within a predetermined range, which allows for the absorption of errors (mating axis misalignment) that occur when the socket is pushed into the plug. In this embodiment, a normal connector without a floating mechanism is used for the board-to-board connection, but a special connector with a floating mechanism may also be used.

The setting change board 1311 is formed in a square shape, with the distance dimension of one side being approximately one-fifth the horizontal distance dimension of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. Its top edge is aligned on the same straight line as the top edge of the main control board 1310, and its bottom edge is positioned above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left edges of the main control board 1310.

Connector SMCN of setting change board 1311 is located along the left edge of setting change board 1311, at a position that is the center of the vertical distance dimension, while connector MSCN of main control board 1310 is located on the right edge of main control board 1310, at a position corresponding to connector SMCN of setting change board 1311. A setting key switch 1311a is located at the center point where the center lines of the square setting change board 1311 intersect, and has a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated. A setting change permission lamp 1310z that can emit light in a single color (e.g., red) is located on main control board 1310, above the horizontal center line of setting change board 1311 and near connector MSCN. A setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is located above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, and a base monitor 1310h consisting of a row of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) is located below the center line of the main control board 1310 from the center to the right side.

In this embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is in its OFF initial position when it is ready to insert a setting key into the socket formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, a position where the length of the rectangular socket is aligned vertically). When the setting key cylinder is in its initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the socket and removed from the socket. Note that in this embodiment, the depth dimension of the setting key switch 1311a is designed to prevent the setting key from interfering with or being damaged by components of other pachinko machines (or components of the island equipment) installed back-to-back on the island equipment of the amusement hall, even if the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 with the setting key still inserted in the socket.

The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON position, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to the determination key ON position, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can also be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the enter key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this embodiment, the two completely different functions of the setting key ON function and the decision key ON function can be achieved by the setting key switch 1311a alone, depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated, and the setting key ON operation and the decision key ON operation can be performed together using the setting key switch 1311a alone.

The front of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is exposed through an opening formed in the cover of the corresponding main control board box 1320, but a wire-proof section is molded into the cover to prevent wires or other objects from entering through the gap formed between the front of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the corresponding opening and tampering with the setting change board 1311 and main control board 1310. The setting display 1310g and base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover and base body and cannot be touched at all. However, because the cover is molded transparent as described above, the setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of bulbs displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be seen through the cover.

In order to prevent unauthorized alterations, the wiring pattern through which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern through which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted are routed so that they are not close to each other (are spaced apart from each other) on the setting change board 1311, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also spaced apart, and the setting The wiring patterns through which various signals from the key switch 1311a are transmitted (i.e., the wiring pattern through which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern through which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) are also formed so that they do not come close to each other (are spaced apart from each other), and the wiring patterns through which signals from the RWM clear button 633z on the dispensing control board 633 are transmitted are also formed so that they do not come close to each other (are spaced apart from each other).

Here, we will briefly explain the steps required to access (operate) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame 4, as described above, the main control board 1310 is located on the open side of the main frame 4, while the setting change board 1311 is located on the pivot side (closed side) of the main frame 4. Also, when the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame 4, as described above, the main control board box 1320 is covered by the rear cover 640. Also, when the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame 4, the main control board 1310 is located on the pivot side (closed side) of the rear cover 640, while the setting change board 1311 is located on the open side of the rear cover. In other words, when opening the rear cover 640, the rear cover opening side of the rear cover 640 is the pivot side (closed side) of the main frame 4. Therefore, unless the main frame 4 is opened widely (approximately 90 degrees) relative to the outer frame 2, the opening side of the rear cover 640 interferes with the outer frame 2, preventing the rear cover 640 from covering the rear side of the game board 5. In other words, a person accessing (operating) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 cannot open the back cover 640 even if they simply open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2 by enough space to insert their arm. In other words, a person accessing (operating) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 must first open the main frame 4 widely (approximately 90 degrees) relative to the outer frame 2 to ensure sufficient space to open the rear cover 640 so that it covers the rear side of the game board 5.

In this way, because the setting change board 1311 is located on the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, compared to when the setting change board 1311 is located on the open side of the main body frame 4, if a fraudster attempts to fraudulently access (operate) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 using a fraudulent tool such as piano wire or wire, even if the fraudulent tool is inserted and sent between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the open side of the main body frame 4, the path from the open side of the main body frame 4 to the setting key switch 1311a is long, so the fraudulent tool must be sent deep. This increases the operating time for sending the fraudulent tool into the setting key switch 1311a, making it easier for game hall staff and other attendants to detect such fraudulent activity.

In addition, because the main control board box 1320 is covered by the back cover 640, the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is also covered by the back cover 640. As a result, even if an unauthorized person attempting to illegally access (operate) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 uses an unauthorized tool such as piano wire or wire to insert the unauthorized tool between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the open side of the main body frame 4, the unauthorized tool will be blocked by the back cover 640 before it reaches the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, preventing the unauthorized tool from being inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a.

In addition, the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 has an insertion port for inserting a setting key, and because this insertion port of the setting key cylinder is covered by the rear cover 640, in order to access (operate) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, it is necessary to open the rear cover 640. In order to open this rear cover 640, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 significantly (approximately 90 degrees) relative to the outer frame 2. By involving these multiple steps, the security of access (operation) to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is improved, thereby increasing the deterrent against fraudulent acts using unauthorized tools.

As mentioned above, the rear cover 640 is pivotally attached to the rear cover mounting portion 551i of the dispensing base 551 and the rear cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-ball path unit 600 at its left edge when viewed from the front, allowing it to be opened and closed. The locking screw 642 is threaded into the rear cover mounting portion 601a to secure the rear cover 640. The locking screw 642 is also located on the open side of the rear cover 640, and is therefore located on the pivotal side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, opposite the open side of the main body frame 4. Therefore, even if a fraudster attempting to fraudulently access (operate) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 inserts and sends an illegal tool between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the open side of the main body frame 4, the path from the open side of the main body frame 4 to the locking screw 642 of the rear cover 640 is long, so the illegal tool must be sent deeper. In this respect, the operating time for feeding an unauthorized tool into the locking screw 642 is also longer, making it easier for game parlor staff and other attendants to detect such unauthorized activity, and by increasing the security of access (operation) to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, it is possible to increase the deterrent effect against unauthorized activity using unauthorized tools.

The setting change board 1311, on which the setting key switch 1311a is located, is housed together with the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320, which is attached to the rear of the board holder 1200 of the gaming board 5. In contrast, the payout control board 633, on which the RWM clear button 633z is located, is housed in the payout control board box 632, which is attached to the rear of the power supply board cover 631 in the board unit 620 of the main frame 4. In this way, by placing the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z on separate boards and by ensuring that the boards are attached to different targets, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z can be spaced apart. If the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are placed together on a single board, unauthorized tampering would only need to be performed on one board, which is undesirable from a security standpoint. Therefore, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are placed on separate boards, and the boards are configured to be attached to different objects, thereby improving the security of the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z.

The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) controls game preparation and game play (control of game play follows control of game preparation). Game preparation control consists of a first process (determination of step S14 and processing of step S16A in the main control side power-on processing described below) that enables setting values to be changed based on a signal from the setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311. Following this first process, a second process (determination of step S216 and processing of step S218 in the setting change processing described below) that selects and switches setting values based on a signal from the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633 (which functions as a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values) on the payout control board 633. Following game preparation control, game control consists of main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing described below and main control side timer interrupt processing described below.

While this improves security, by placing the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z on separate boards and adopting a configuration in which the boards are attached to different objects, the setting key switch 1311a is housed in the main control board box 1320, so there is no need to specifically communicate where the setting key switch 1311a is located. However, it may be difficult for game parlor managers, game parlor staff, and other attendants to know where the RWM clear button 633z, which also functions as a setting switching button, is located, as they may be unfamiliar with the location.

In this embodiment, therefore, the main control board box 1320 is provided with location information indicating the location of the RWM clear button 633z. Specifically, a sticker indicating the location of the RWM clear button 633z is affixed to the cover of the main control board box 1320. This sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet, and for example, the following text is printed on this rectangular sheet in translucent red letters (height: 7 mm): "The RWM clear button (setting switch button) is located on the payout control board." This allows the location of the RWM clear button 633z (setting switch button) to be communicated to the amusement hall manager, amusement hall staff, or other staff member. Therefore, the amusement hall manager, amusement hall staff, or other staff member can easily find the RWM clear button 633z when operating it, thereby avoiding dizziness. Therefore, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily determined.

This sticker does not impede the visibility of the main control board 1310 even when it is attached to the cover of the main control board box 1320. Also, instead of letters printed on the rectangular sheet of this sticker, symbols such as arrows may be used.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover of the main control board box 1320 as location information that could convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. However, instead of this, when molding the cover of the main control board box 1320, concave or convex letters could also be molded in (in other words, the cover and letters could be molded as a single unit). Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily determined.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover of the main control board box 1320 as location information that could convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. However, instead of this, the letters (height: 7 mm) "The RWM clear button (settings switch button) is located on the dispensing control board" could be silk-screened in white on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, or the letters (height: 7 mm) "RWM clear button (settings switch button)" could be silk-screened in white on the surface (mounting surface) of the dispensing control board 633. The silk-screen printing may be the same color or different colors. Furthermore, instead of silk-screened letters, a symbol such as an arrow could be used. This configuration also makes it easy to determine the location of the RWM clear button 633z.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover of the main control board box 1320 as location information that could communicate the location of the RWM clear button 633z. However, instead, the text may be masked on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 and cut-out letters (height: 7 mm) "The RWM clear button (setting switch button) is located on the dispensing control board" may be formed using resist, or the text may be masked on the surface (mounting surface) of the dispensing control board 633 and cut-out letters (height: 7 mm) "RWM clear button (setting switch button)" may be formed using resist. The resist may be the same color, but different colors are preferable to distinguish the boards. Furthermore, instead of cut-out letters, a cut-out symbol such as an arrow may be used. This configuration also makes it easy to determine the location of the RWM clear button 633z.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover of the main control board box 1320 as location information that could convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. However, instead, a similar sticker (this sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet on which, for example, the words "The RWM clear button (settings switch button) is located on the dispensing control board" are printed in red translucent letters (height: 7 mm)) can be affixed to the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 or the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, or a transparent rectangular sheet reading "RWM clear button (settings switch button)" in red translucent letters (height: 7 mm) can be affixed to the surface (mounting surface) of the dispensing control board 633. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily determined.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover of the main control board box 1320 as location information that could convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z, but instead, an announcement may be made from various speakers to inform the user of the location of the RWM clear button 633z, or an announcement image may be displayed on the performance display device 1600. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, an attendant such as the amusement hall manager or amusement hall staff member operates the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 to display various setting screens on the performance display device 1600 and select an item regarding the location of the RWM clear button 633z (setting switch button). As a result, an audio announcement is played from the various speakers, announcing where the RWM clear button 633z is located: "The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also serves as a setting change button.", and an announcement image (which may be a photograph) indicating the location of the RWM clear button 633z is displayed on the effect display device 1600. After determining the location of the RWM clear button 633z from this audio and image announcement, the amusement hall manager, amusement hall staff member, or other attendant can shut off the power to the pachinko machine 1 and smoothly change the setting value. This configuration also makes it easy to know the location of the RWM clear button 633z.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover of the main control board box 1320 as location information that could communicate the location of the RWM clear button 633z. However, instead, when changing the setting value, an announcement may be played from various speakers to inform users of the location of the RWM clear button 633z, which also functions as a setting switch button. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process that can change and determine the setting value, a predetermined command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 controls the device to repeatedly announce from various speakers where the RWM clear button 633z is located: "The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also functions as a setting switch button. Please operate the RWM clear button to change the setting value." When the main control MPU 1310a completes the setting change process, it sends a specified command to the peripheral control board 1510, causing the peripheral control board 1510 to stop the audio announcement and proceed with various processes based on the received command. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily determined. Following this audio announcement, an audio announcement explaining how to operate the setting key after the setting value has been determined may be played from the various speakers. Furthermore, while the audio announcement is being played, an image saying "Setting in progress" may be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In the above-described embodiment, a sticker was attached to the cover of the main control board box 1320 as location information indicating the location of the RWM clear button 633z. In addition, when changing the setting value, an audio announcement may be played from various speakers to indicate the location of the RWM clear button 633z, which also functions as a setting change button. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to change the setting value, a predetermined command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 then controls the device to repeatedly play an audio announcement from various speakers to indicate the location of the RWM clear button 633z: "The RWM clear button is located on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also functions as a setting change button. Please operate the RWM clear button to change the setting value." This eliminates the need to search for the sticker attached to the cover of the main control board box 1320. Although such audio announcements are repeatedly played from the various speakers, in case the content of the announcement is missed, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be determined by visually checking a sticker attached to the cover of the main control board box 1320 before the next audio announcement begins. In addition to the audio announcement saying, "The RWM clear button is located on the dispensing control board. The RWM clear button also doubles as a setting change button. Please operate the RWM clear button to change the setting value," the audio announcement may also include information indicating the location of the sticker indicating the location of the RWM clear button. When the RWM clear button is operated, the main control MPU 1310a sends a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, which causes the peripheral control board 1510 to stop the audio announcement. Even if the person changing the setting values becomes accustomed to changing the setting values and finds the changes annoying, they can quickly stop the audio announcement by pressing the RWM clear button immediately after starting the work. Furthermore, even if the work needs to be performed after the amusement hall has opened for business, the audio announcement can be quickly stopped by pressing the RWM clear button immediately after starting the work, so as not to inconvenience players. Following this audio announcement, an audio announcement explaining how to operate the setting keys after the setting values have been determined may be played from the various speakers. While the audio announcement is being played, an image that reads "Setting" may also be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z were placed on separate boards, and the boards were attached to different objects, thereby separating the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z.However, if security can be improved, the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button (in this case, the setting switching button function is removed from the RWM clear button 633z on the dispensing control board 633) can be placed together on a single board. For example, the setting change board 1311 has a shape in which the vertical distance between its right and left sides is approximately the same as the vertical distance between the right and left sides of the main control board 1310, its horizontal distance is shorter than the horizontal distance between the main control board 1310, and the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 coincides with the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311. In other words, the setting change board 1311 has a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is disposed along the left side of the setting change board 1311, with the center of its vertical distance on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is disposed along the right side of the main control board 1310, with the center of its vertical distance on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated is located below the center line of the setting change board 1311 and near the bottom edge of the board, and a setting switch button having a pressing operation portion is located above the center line of the setting change board 1311 and near the top edge of the board. In other words, the setting key switch 1311a is located near the bottom edge of the same board, the setting change board 1311, while the setting switch button is located near the top edge, and they are spaced apart from each other. When the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switch button are located separately and spaced apart from each other on the same board in this way, unauthorized tampering is more difficult than when the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switch button are located close to each other despite being consolidated on a single board. This may improve security even when the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switch button are consolidated on a single board and arranged separately.

Next, we will briefly explain the setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311, the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633, and the setting display 1310g on the main control board 1310. Here, we will first briefly explain how to change the setting value, and then how to display and confirm the current setting value. Note that the setting key is an important key that can be used to change the setting value as well as check the current setting value, so only a limited number of people, including the arcade manager, are permitted to possess it, and it is limited to two to three people.

When changing the setting values, the main frame 4 must be opened relative to the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), and the setting key must be inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, and the setting key cylinder must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON position, thereby fulfilling the "predetermined setting value change permission condition." In other words, the person actually changing the setting values must first ensure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON position, and then power on the pachinko machine 1. The above-mentioned "predetermined setting value change permission condition" may further include an operation signal being input by operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. In other words, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, a setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a into setting key ON, and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. This "predetermined setting value change permission condition" may be met to allow a change to the setting value.

The person changing the setting value must first ensure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate the setting key cylinder clockwise 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON. Next, the power switch 630a in Figure 7 is operated to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1. This causes a setting key ON signal to be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON for the first time) on the setting display 1310g, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1310z from an off state to an on state.

When a person changing the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z on the dispensing control board 633, a detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z is input from the dispensing control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310. Each time a person changing the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current setting value by one based on the detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z. When it reaches the maximum setting value of 6, it returns to the initial setting value of 1, and then increases by one again, displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g.

When a person changing a setting value decides on a setting value, they rotate the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (i.e., rotate the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to turn it OFF, and then rotate it another 60 degrees counterclockwise) to perform a second ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to the enter key ON. This enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the changed and decided setting value in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, when the setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (i.e., when the setting key cylinder is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key switch 1311a ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF)), a confirmation key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.In this case, after pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g, the setting value can be confirmed and the setting key can be removed from the setting key cylinder simply by turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF, improving operability.

The person changing the setting value turns off the setting key switch 1311a by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the Enter key was pressed back to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. This causes the main control MPU 1310a to switch the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting value to not displaying it, and switch the setting change permission lamp 1310z from lit to extinguished.

The person changing the setting value removes the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and closes the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2, completing the setting value change procedure.

To display the currently set values, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or after power is restored following a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 must be open from the outer frame 2, a setting key must be inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON position. This "predetermined setting value display permission condition" must be met. In other words, the person actually displaying the currently set values must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (a state in which power has been restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, and turn the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON position.

The person checking and displaying the currently set setting value must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (a state in which power has been restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), then release the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2. Next, they insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a setting key ON. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the setting change permission lamp 1310z remains off, and even if the person checking and displaying the currently set setting presses the pressing operation section of the RWM clear button 633z on the dispensing control board 633, the setting value will not change at all in response to this pressing operation, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g will not change either.

When the person checking and displaying the currently set values has finished checking the currently set values, they turn the setting key switch 1311a OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting value to not displaying it.

The person who wishes to confirm and display the currently set value removes the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and closes the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2, completing the process of confirming and displaying the currently set value.

As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions require that when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. Meanwhile, the predetermined setting value display permission conditions require that when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or after power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. Thus, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition share a common requirement in that the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key ON. However, they differ in that the predetermined setting value change permission condition requires "when power is restored," while the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires "after power is restored."

There are also two types of setting key switches: lead type and surface mount type (so-called SMD type). The setting key switch 1311a in this embodiment is basically a lead type. The setting key switch 1311a has an action where the setting key is inserted into and removed from a socket. Therefore, the force associated with this action acts on the board on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, causing the board to bend. In the lead type, each lead of the setting key switch is positioned inside the outer shape of the setting key switch and soldered to the back surface (solder side) of the board. In contrast, in the SMD type, each lead of the setting key switch is positioned to protrude outward from the outer shape of the setting key switch and soldered to the front surface (mounting side) of the board.

As a result, with lead-type switches, if the setting key gets caught inside the socket when being removed, the leads of the setting key switch are positioned inside the outer shape of the setting key switch and soldered to the back side (solder side) of the board.This means that compared to SMD types, where the leads of the setting key switch are positioned protruding toward the outer shape and soldered to the front side (mounting side) of the board, a greater load is placed on the parts where the leads of the setting key switch are soldered to the back side (solder side) of the board.This load acts strongly from the back side (solder side) of the board to the front side (mounting side), causing the board itself to bend significantly. In contrast, with SMD type switches, even if the setting key gets caught inside the socket when being removed, the leads of the setting key switch are positioned to protrude outward from the outer shape of the setting key switch and are soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the board. This means that compared to lead types in which the leads of the setting key switch are positioned inside the outer shape of the setting key switch and soldered to the back side (solder surface) of the board, the load on the parts where the leads of the setting key switch are soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the board is smaller, and even if this load acts from the back side (solder surface) of the board to the surface (mounting surface) of the board, the board itself is less likely to bend.

Furthermore, if an external force is applied to the board and the board itself bends significantly, there is a concern that the soldered areas where SMD-type electronic components are soldered may be subjected to a large peeling load on the land pattern, which could result in peeling. Therefore, when using a lead-type setting key switch, it is desirable to mount it on a board that does not have SMD-type electronic components mounted on it. Also, the peeling load on the wiring pattern and land pattern at the soldered areas where each lead part of the setting key switch is soldered to the back side (solder side) of the board is smaller than that of SMD types, making the setting key switch more resistant to peeling of the soldered areas. Therefore, considering the strength of the soldered areas, it is desirable to use a lead-type setting key switch.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a lead-type setting key switch 1311a is basically used. In this embodiment, the setting change board 1311 is not equipped with SMD-type electronic components but with lead-type electronic components. Therefore, even if a lead-type setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the setting change board 1311 and the setting key gets caught in the socket when being removed from the socket, causing the board itself to bend significantly as described above, there is no risk that other lead-type electronic components soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 will come off from the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. As mentioned above, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected (inter-board connection) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (the connectors SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and MSCN of the main control board 1310 may be electrically connected via a harness), so signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the like are electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

The rectangular main control board 1310, which is elongated in the left-right direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, is sized to occupy approximately four-fifths of the area enclosed by the left, top, right, and bottom edges of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, moving from the left edge to the right edge, and a square setting change board 1311 is placed in the remaining one-fifth of the area, at the corner where the top and right edges of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected. The setting change board 1311 is formed in a square shape with the distance dimension of one side being approximately one-fifth the horizontal distance dimension of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, making it smaller than the rectangular main control board 1310, which is elongated in the left-right direction. In this embodiment, a lead-type setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the square-shaped setting change board 1311 having such a small shape, and even if the board itself bends when the setting key is inserted and pushed into the socket of the setting key switch 1311a, or if the setting key gets caught inside the socket when the setting key is removed from the socket of the setting key switch 1311a and the board itself bends, because the setting change board 1311 is formed on a small board, the amount of bending can be kept small compared to the main control board 1310. This eliminates the need to provide ribs on the cover or base of the main control board box 1320 at positions corresponding to the setting change board 1311 that can abut against the front (mounting surface) or back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 to prevent bending. This means that screw holes can be provided on the setting change board 1311 around the position where the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, and contributes to the visibility of the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 housed in the transparent main control board box 1320.

In this way, in this embodiment, a lead-type setting key switch 1311a is used and is arranged on the setting change board 1311, which is separate from the main control board 1310. Therefore, even if bending occurs in the setting change board 1311 due to the action (operation) of inserting and removing a setting key, which can change setting values, into the socket of the setting key switch 1311a, bending does not occur in the main control board 1310. Therefore, bending of the main control board 1310 due to the operation of the lead-type setting key switch 1311a can be prevented.

In contrast, if the setting key switch 1311a is placed on one of the boards such as the main control board 1310, dispensing control board 633, or power supply board 630 instead of the setting change board 1311, and SMD-type electronic components are mounted on these boards, an SMD-type setting key switch 1311a can be used instead of a lead-type one and mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board. Even if the setting key gets caught inside the socket when being removed from the socket, the board itself is less likely to bend as described above, so there is no risk of other SMD-type electronic components soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the board coming off the surface (mounting surface) of the board.

To briefly explain the setting values, "setting values" can change the probability for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a small jackpot has been won by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won by lottery when transitioning from a special mode to a normal mode, the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., and are preset probabilities (degrees of advantage) that are advantageous to the player (i.e., that increase the number of game balls that the player can acquire). In this embodiment, setting values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the probabilities (degrees of advantage) that are advantageous to the player are preset from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values (for example, a jackpot determination table that specifies the percentage of jackpot determination values indicating a jackpot win, a jackpot pattern determination table that specifies the percentage of determination values for determining a jackpot pattern, a small win determination table that specifies the percentage of determination values for determining a small win pattern, a small win pattern determination table that specifies the percentage of determination values for determining a small win pattern, a normal mode transition determination table that specifies the percentage of determination values for transitioning from a special mode to a normal mode, etc.), or selects various tables used in various allocation rates associated with set values (for example, an allocation table that specifies the allocation time, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid, etc.). In the various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at a predetermined rate. The various tables used in the various lottery determinations are set so that at least some of the values differ from each other, and the various tables used in the various allocation rates are set so that at least some of the values differ from each other, or so that the values differ based on the relationship between a table corresponding to a block that manages the drive of one electric drive source and a table corresponding to a block that manages the drive of another electric drive source. Furthermore, while the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, the range may be smaller or larger. For example, there may be four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4, or eight setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8.

In addition to displaying the setting values as described above, the setting display 1310g also checks the contents of its own built-in RAM when the main control MPU 1310a restores power to determine whether there is an abnormality. If it determines that there is an abnormality, and if the main control side power-off processing did not end normally when the power was cut off, it displays an error message indicating that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in its own built-in RAM are unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

Next, to briefly explain the base monitor 1310h, the base monitor 1310h displays the number of game balls that have been fired into the game area 5a and then collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a, which is defined on the game board 5. Of the game balls that have been fired into the game area 5a, those that have been collected by the outlet 1008 are detected by either the left outlet sensor 3032 or the right outlet sensor 3033, and this detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 1710.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected through the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of its built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.However, the setting key switch 1311a may also be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON position. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and this decision key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (this aspect of the setting key switch 1311a' is sometimes referred to as "decision key variation (1)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, a decision key button with a press operation portion may be provided on the setting change board 1311. In this case, the pressing portion of the Enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover of the main control board box 1320 that corresponds to the Enter key button, and a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the gap formed between the pressing portion of the Enter key button and the corresponding opening and tampering with the setting change board 1311 and main control board 1310. When the pressing portion of the Enter key button is pressed, an operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Based on the detection signal from the Enter key button, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the pressing portion of the Enter key button is pressed, and can determine that the Enter key is not ON when the pressing portion of the Enter key button is not pressed.

The Enter key button on the setting change board 1311 may be located near the setting key switch 1311a. When other buttons besides the Enter key button are located on the main control board 1310, the cover of the main control board box 1320 has stickers with the names of the buttons printed on them affixed to the positions corresponding to the Enter key button and the other buttons to prevent confusion between them (instead of stickers, the names of the buttons may be molded into the cover). To prevent confusion between the Enter key button and the other buttons, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the Enter key button or the other buttons (the cover must be opened to press the pressing operation portion) may be used, the pressing operation portion may be a different color, the outer shape or the pressing operation portion may be different from that of the Enter key button and the other buttons, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be used as the Enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the enter key button include various switches such as a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a sliding portion, a rotary switch with a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. Furthermore, when the enter key button and other buttons are provided on the setting change board 1311, in order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring patterns for the enter key button and the wiring patterns for the other buttons are formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311, and the connections to the terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminals of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) are also formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other).In the main control board 1310, the wiring patterns for transmitting detection signals from the enter key button and the wiring patterns for transmitting detection signals from the other buttons are also formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other). Furthermore, if a confirmation key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced with a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (this form of the confirmation key button (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified form of the confirmation key (2)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON state by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON. Then, by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise, a second ON operation can be performed. This decision key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 13 on the main control board 1310. 10a, but instead, a detection signal from a handle touch sensor 192 in the handle unit 180, which detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182, and a detection signal from a single button operation sensor 194, which detects whether the player wants to forcibly stop the shooting of the game ball B, may be branched in the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and it may be determined whether the decision key is ON or not based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine, based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, that the Enter key is ON when the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182, but can determine that the Enter key is not ON when the palm or fingers are not touching the handle 182, and/or can determine, based on the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194, that the Enter key is ON when the launch of game ball B is forcibly stopped, but can determine that the Enter key is not ON when the launch of game ball B is not forcibly stopped (the aspect of the handle touch sensor (which may include the aspect of the single button operation sensor) may be described as "variant example of the Enter key (3)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.However, instead of this, a firing reference pulse from a firing timing control circuit provided in the firing control unit 633b of the dispensing control board 633 can be branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON can be determined based on these firing reference pulses. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be fired toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on a clock signal from the oscillator circuit. In this case, when the firing reference pulse is input from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON, but when the firing reference pulse is not input, it can determine that the decision key is not ON (the form of the firing reference pulse is sometimes referred to as "variant example of the decision key (4)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the determination key ON state by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON. Then, by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise, a second ON operation can be performed to turn the setting key switch 1311a to the determination key ON state. This determination key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to However, if a distance measuring sensor capable of detecting the movements of a player seated opposite the pachinko machine 1 is provided on the game board 5 and a detection signal from this distance measuring sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via a relay board, the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor may be branched at the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and the presence or absence of the enter key ON may be determined based on this detection signal. The distance measuring sensor detects the movements of a player by transmitting light from a light emitting unit that passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and reflects off the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance, and this reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving unit. In this case, when the main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from the distance sensor via the relay board, it determines whether or not there is movement based on this detection signal, and if it determines that there is movement, it can determine that the Enter key is ON, but if it determines that there is no movement, it can determine that the Enter key is not ON (this aspect of the distance sensor is sometimes referred to as "variant example of the Enter key (5)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the key cylinder counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and also by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise 60 degrees to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the Enter key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a serial output circuit that can serially output information indicating the setting key ON, Enter key ON, and OFF to the outside as serial information. This improves security against signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a equipped with this serial output circuit was previously provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the dispensing control board 633. When the serial information serially output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine from the received serial information whether the setting key is ON, the enter key is ON, or the enter key is OFF (the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit is sometimes referred to as "Enter key variant (6)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, and this determination ... initial position, which is the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON, to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and the setting key cylinder can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the Enter key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a pulse output circuit that can output information indicating the setting key ON, Enter key ON, and OFF as a pulse signal to the outside. This improves security against signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a equipped with this pulse output circuit was previously provided on the setting change board 1311, but it may instead be provided on the main control board 1310 or the dispensing control board 633. The pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit has a pulse width set to 1 ms if the information conveys setting key ON, 3 ms if the information conveys enter key ON, and 5 ms if the information conveys OFF. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine from the input pulse signal whether the information conveys setting key ON, enter key ON, or OFF (the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit is sometimes referred to as "Enter key variation (7)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON state. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON state. A setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return it from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the Enter key is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), thereby turning OFF the setting key switch 1311a. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the Enter key ON signal, The voltage levels of the ON signal and the OFF signal can be set at an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2V to 3V out of a range of 0V to 5V) between the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. A comparator circuit can be provided on the main control board 1310, and the comparison results from the comparator circuit can be input to the main control MPU 1310a, allowing the main control MPU 1310a to determine the ON/OFF status of the setting key ON signal, the enter key ON signal, and the OFF signal. This improves security for signals from the setting key switch 1311a (a setting key switch using an intermediate potential is sometimes referred to as "Enter key variant (8)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, a decision key button with a press operation portion may be provided on the dispensing control board 633. In this case, the pressing operation portion of the Enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the dispensing control board box 632 corresponding to the Enter key button, and a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body for the opening to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation portion of the Enter key button and the corresponding opening and tampering with the dispensing control board 633. When the pressing operation portion of the Enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the dispensing control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Based on the detection signal from the Enter key button, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the Enter key button is pressed, and can determine that the Enter key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the Enter key button is not pressed.

The position of the Enter key button on the dispensing control board 633 may be near the RWM clear button 633z, which has a pressing operation portion. Stickers with the names of each button printed on them are affixed to the cover of the dispensing control board 633 at positions corresponding to the Enter key button and the RWM clear button 633z to prevent confusion between the two buttons (instead of stickers, the names of each button may be molded into the cover). To prevent confusion between the Enter key button and the RWM clear button 633z, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the Enter key button or the RWM clear button 633z (the cover must be opened to press the pressing operation portion) may be used, the pressing operation portion may have a different color, the outer shape or the pressing operation portion of the Enter key button and the RWM clear button 633z may have a different shape, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be used as the Enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the decision key button include various switches such as a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide portion, a rotary switch with a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. In addition, when the decision key button and the RWM clear button 633z are provided on the dispensing control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring patterns to the decision key button and the RWM clear button 633z are routed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other) on the dispensing control board 633, and the connections to the connector terminals of the dispensing control board 633 (terminals of the connector of the main control board 1310) are also formed so that they are not close to each other, and in the main control board 1310, the wiring patterns to which the detection signals from the decision key button are transmitted and the wiring patterns to which the detection signals from the RWM clear button 633z are transmitted are also routed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other). Furthermore, if a confirmation key button is provided on the dispensing control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced with a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the form of the confirmation key button (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variant form of the confirmation key (9)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON state by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON. Then, by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise, a second ON operation can be performed. This decision key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 13 on the main control board 1310. 10a, but instead of this, of the functions that combine the three functions of the RWM clear button 633z (RAM clear switch, setting changeover button, and error clear switch), an error clear switch having a push operation part may be provided separately from the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633, and the signal from the error clear switch may be branched in the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and based on this signal, it may be determined whether or not the enter key is ON. As described above, the error clear switch is used to clear the error displayed on the error LED indicator on the payout control board 633, and after power is restored, if the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup (the power-on processing of various control boards has been completed and interrupt processing is being performed) and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is such that no error has occurred, the push operation part of the error clear switch does not need to be operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the pressing operation part of the error reset switch is operated based on the signal from the error reset switch, and can determine that the Enter key is not ON when the pressing operation part of the error reset switch is not operated based on the signal from the error reset switch. This improves security regardless of whether the Enter key is ON (this form of the error reset switch is sometimes referred to as "variant example of the Enter key (10)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON, and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, the three RWM clear buttons 633z Of the functions that combine the above functions (RAM clear switch, setting changeover button, and error reset switch), an error reset switch having a push operation part may be provided on the payout control board 633 separately from the RWM clear button 633z, and the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 may monitor the logic of the signal from the error reset switch in the port input processing of the payout control unit power-on processing described below, create a command, send the created command in the command sending processing of the payout control unit power-on processing described below to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command may determine whether the enter key is ON. As described above, the error reset switch is used to reset the error displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633, and when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup after power is restored (the power-on processing of various control boards has been completed and interrupt processing is being performed), and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the push operation part of the error reset switch does not need to be operated at all. Therefore, in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described below, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the dispensing control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation unit has been operated based on a signal from the error release switch and receives a command to that effect, while it can determine that the Enter key is not ON when the dispensing control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation unit has not been operated based on a signal from the error release switch and receives a command to that effect. This improves security regardless of whether the Enter key is ON or not (mode 2 of the error release switch is sometimes referred to as "variant example of the Enter key (11)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z is in a state in which it operates as a RAM clear switch) is provided on the dispensing control board 633, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise) to perform a second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON, and this determination key ON signal is sent to the setting change board 1311 Alternatively, the RAM clear switch function of the RWM clear button 633z may be provided as a separate RAM clear switch on the dispensing control board 633, and a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation part of this RAM clear switch has been operated is input to the dispensing control MPU 633aa on the dispensing control board 633, and is also branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on the operation signal input. As will be described later, if the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch is operated when power is restored (more precisely, if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch), or if a setting change is made that can change or determine the setting value (if the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a will always clear a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of its built-in RAM, so the RAM clear switch can be used as a confirmation key. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is pressed based on a signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633 has been operated, but can determine that the confirmation key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is not pressed based on the signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633 has been operated. This improves security regardless of whether the confirmation key is ON or not.

The pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch provided on the dispensing control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the dispensing control board box 632 that corresponds to the RAM clear switch, and a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body to prevent wires or other objects from entering through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch and the corresponding opening to tamper with the dispensing control board 633.

The RAM clear switch may be located on the dispensing control board 633 near the RWM clear button 633z. To prevent confusion between the RAM clear switch and the RWM clear button 633z, stickers with the names of each button printed on them are affixed to the cover of the dispensing control board 633 at positions corresponding to the RAM clear switch and the RWM clear button 633z (the names of each button may be molded into the cover instead of stickers). To prevent confusion between the RAM clear switch and the RWM clear button 633z, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the RAM clear switch or the RWM clear button 633z (the cover must be opened to press the pressing operation portion) may be used, the pressing operation portion may be a different color, the RAM clear switch and the RWM clear button 633z may have different external shapes or shapes, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be used as the RAM clear switch. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the RAM clear switch include various switches such as a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a sliding portion, a rotary switch with a rotating operation portion, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. Furthermore, when the RAM clear switch and the RWM clear button 633z are provided on the dispensing control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring patterns to the RAM clear switch and the RWM clear button 633z are routed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other) on the dispensing control board 633, and the connections to the connector terminals of the dispensing control board 633 (the connector terminals of the main control board 1310) are also formed so that they are not close to each other, and on the main control board 1310, the wiring patterns through which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch is transmitted and the wiring patterns through which the detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z is transmitted are also routed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other). Furthermore, if a RAM clear switch is provided on the dispensing control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced with a setting key switch 1311a' that can only be rotated within a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the form of the RAM clear switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variant example of the determination key (12)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, an RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z is in a state in which it operates as a RAM clear switch) is provided on the dispensing control board 633, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise) to perform a second ON operation, which sets the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON position, and this decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. 1310a, but instead, the function of the RAM clear switch, which is one of the functions of the RWM clear button 633z, can be provided on the dispensing control board 633 as a separate RAM clear switch, and the dispensing control MPU 633aa of the dispensing control board 633 can monitor the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the pressing operation part of this RAM clear switch has been operated in the port input processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, create a command, and send the created command to the main control board 1310 in the command sending processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command can determine whether the decision key is ON or not. As will be described later, if the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch is operated when power is restored (more precisely, if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch), or if a setting change is made that can change or determine the setting value (if the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a will always clear a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a will always clear a specified area of its built-in RAM, so the RAM clear switch can be used as a confirmation key, and in the frame command receiving process in the main control timer interrupt processing described below, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch has been operated based on a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch provided on the payout control board 633 has been operated and receives a command to that effect, while it can determine that the confirmation key is not ON when the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch has not been operated based on a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch provided on the payout control board 633 has been operated and receives a command to that effect. This improves security regardless of whether the Enter key is turned on or not (RAM clear switch mode 2 (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' mode) may be referred to as "Decision key variation (13)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the output left sensor 3032 and the output right sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then turned it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation. 311a can be used as the decision key ON, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead, the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033 may be input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via (through) the payout control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the decision key is ON based on the detection signals from the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033. As described above, a game ball launched into the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is collected by the outlet 1008 provided in this game area 5a. As described above, the game ball collected by the outlet 1008 is detected by either the left outlet sensor 3032 or the right outlet sensor 3033. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the door frame 3 is open relative to the main frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 4a, and when the outlet 1008 has collected a game ball based on the detection signal from either the left outlet sensor 3032 or the right outlet sensor 3033. On the other hand, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is not ON when the door frame 3 is not open relative to the main frame 4 (i.e., closed) and/or when the outlet 1008 has not collected a game ball based on the detection signals from the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key switch 1311a ON (this aspect of the outlet switch (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as a "variant of the determination key (14)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B into the outlet 1008 in order to turn on the decision key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then turned it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON position. In the past, the signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 may monitor the logic of the detection signals from the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described below, create a command, send the created command to the main control board 1310 in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described below, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, upon receiving this command, determine whether the enter key is ON. As described above, a game ball launched into the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is collected by the outlet 1008 provided in this game area 5a. As described above, a game ball collected by the outlet 1008 is detected by either the left outlet sensor 3032 or the right outlet sensor 3033. Therefore, in the frame command receiving process in the main control timer interrupt process described later, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the payout control MPU 633aa determines that game balls have been collected by the outlet 1008 based on the detection signals from the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033 and receives a command to that effect, while it can determine that the enter key is not ON when the payout control MPU 633aa determines that game balls have not been collected by the outlet 1008 and receives a command to that effect. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key switch 1311a ON (outlet switch aspect 2 (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "determined key variation (15)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B into the outlet 1008 in order to turn on the decision key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation.This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or dispensing detection sensor 591 is input to the dispensing control MPU 63 of the dispensing control board 633. 3aa, and is branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on these detection signals, or the dispensing control MPU 633aa of the dispensing control board 633 may monitor the logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or dispensing detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, create a command, send the created command to the main control board 1310 in the command sending processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command may determine whether the decision key is ON or not. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced with a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (this aspect of the dispensing unit (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variant example of the determination key (16)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the main frame 4 remains open relative to the outer frame 2. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced with a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the form of the main body frame opening switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified enter key (17)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must close the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 to turn ON the enter key, and after turning ON the enter key, must again open the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and again close the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a, but can determine that the decision key is not ON when the door frame 3 remains closed relative to the main frame 4. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced with a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the door frame opening switch configuration (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' configuration) may be referred to as "modified enter key (17)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in order to turn ON the enter key, and after turning ON the enter key, must close the door frame 3 again relative to the main frame 4, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the determination key ON.This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may also be provided on the main control board 1310 (this aspect of the setting key switch may be described as "variant example of the determination key (18)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, this setting key switch 1311a is provided on the main control board 1310, and can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key ON to the initial position, and turning it OFF. This OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the OFF signal is input, and can determine that the Enter key is not ON when the OFF signal is not input. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be changed to a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (setting key switch aspect 2 (which may include setting key switch aspect 1311a') may be referred to as "Decision key variation (19)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, a decision key button with a press operation portion may be provided on the main control board 1310. In this case, the pressing portion of the Enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover of the main control board box 1320 that corresponds to the Enter key button, and a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the gap formed between the pressing portion of the Enter key button and the corresponding opening and tampering with the main control board 1310. When the pressing portion of the Enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Based on the detection signal from the Enter key button, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the pressing portion of the Enter key button is pressed, and can determine that the Enter key is not ON when the pressing portion of the Enter key button is not pressed.

The position of the Enter key button on the main control board 1310 may be near other buttons when other buttons are arranged on the main control board 1310 in addition to the Enter key button. Stickers with the names of each button printed on them are affixed to the cover of the main control board box 1320 in positions corresponding to the Enter key button and the other buttons to prevent confusion between them (instead of stickers, the names of each button may be molded into the cover). To prevent confusion between the Enter key button and the other buttons, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the Enter key button or the other buttons (the cover must be opened to press the pressing operation portion) may be used, the pressing operation portion may be a different color, the outer shape or the shape of the pressing operation portion may be different from that of the Enter key button and the other buttons, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be used as the Enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the enter key button include various switches such as a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a sliding portion, a rotary switch with a rotating operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Furthermore, when the enter key button and other buttons are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring patterns for the enter key button and the other buttons are routed so that they do not come close to each other (are spaced apart) on the main control board 1310 to prevent unauthorized tampering. Furthermore, when the enter key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced by a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the enter key button variation 2 (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' variation) is sometimes referred to as "the enter key variation (20)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation.This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, the presence or absence of the decision key ON can be determined based on a signal (RAM clear signal) that is input to the main control MPU 1310a and indicates that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z is in a state where it operates as a RAM clear switch) has been operated. As will be described later, when the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated when power is restored (more precisely, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z), or when a setting change is made that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a will always clear a specified area of its own built-in RAM (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of its built-in RAM, so the RWM clear button 633z can be used as a confirmation key, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed based on a signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated, but can determine that the confirmation key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not pressed based on the signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated. This improves security regardless of whether the confirmation key is ON or not. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced with a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (RAM clear switch mode 3 (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' mode) may be referred to as "modified enter key (21)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON state by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON. Then, by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise, a second ON operation can be performed. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control M of the main control board 1310. Alternatively, the main control MPU 1310a may receive detection signals from the normal prize opening sensor 2401 of the normal prize opening 2003, various sensors of the various prize openings (e.g., second start opening sensor 2402, special prize opening sensor 2403, first receiving opening sensor 2406, normal prize opening sensor 3001, first start opening sensor 3002), and left outlet sensor 3032 and right outlet sensor 3033 of the outlet 1008, all of which are provided on the game board 5, and determine whether the Enter key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (the aspects of the various sensors (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "various embodiments of the Enter key (22)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 and send a game ball B to the normal winning opening 2003, to the various winning openings, or to the outlet 1008 in order to turn on the enter key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON state by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON, and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation. This determination key ON signal is then sent to the setting change board 1311. Alternatively, if the main control MPU 1310a controls the operation of the movable body (gimmick) by controlling the drive of an electric drive source such as a stepping motor, a DC motor, or a solenoid, and determines the original position or operating position of the movable body (gimmick) based on a detection signal from an optical sensor (photo sensor, distance sensor, etc.), the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the Enter key is ON or not based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (the aspect of the optical gamble sensor (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variant example of the Enter key (23)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 to turn on the enter key, and move the movable object (gimmick) so that the optical sensor can detect the original position, operating position, etc. of the movable object (gimmick).

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a, which receives a detection signal from a magnetic sensor 2010 that detects illegal magnetism within the game area 5a, may determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced with a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the magnetic sensor configuration (which may include the configuration of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified enter key (24)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must bring a magnet from the front of the pachinko machine 1 toward the front of the game board 5 in order to turn ON the enter key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON, and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation. This decision key ON signal is then sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MP of the main control board 1310. Alternatively, if a vibration sensor is provided on the gaming board 5 to detect fraudulent activity by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 to vibrate the pachinko machine 1 and change the course of game balls flowing down the game area 5a defined on the gaming board 5, causing the balls to enter various winning holes or gates (gates) provided on the gaming board 5, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not there is fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, and may also determine whether or not the Enter key is ON based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the aspect of the vibration sensor (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as the "variant embodiment of the Enter key (25)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 to turn on the confirmation key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned ON the setting key, and then by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by the determination key, and this determination key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1 However, instead of this, if a radio wave sensor that irradiates radio waves to the pachinko machine 1 to detect fraudulent behavior such as fraudulently acquiring game balls B by causing malfunctions of various sensors in various winning slots on the game board 5 or various sensors on the payout device 580 is provided on the game board 5 or the payout device 580, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not fraudulent behavior has occurred based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may also determine whether or not the Enter key has been turned on based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the form of the radio wave sensor (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variant embodiment of the Enter key (26)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the confirm key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON, and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Alternatively, a detection signal from a pressure detection sensor 381 that detects a pressure operation on the pressure operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360, and a detection signal from a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 that detect the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation button unit 360 may be input to the peripheral control board 1510, branched by the peripheral control board 1510, and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the Enter key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (this aspect of the effect operation button unit (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as a "variant of the Enter key (27)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311 were housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320, which was composed of a cover body and a base body. However, the setting change board 1311 may be housed in a separate setting change board box and placed around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 has a cover body and a base body crimped together with a one-way screw or the like at the crimping portion. This crimping portion is a sealing mechanism, and multiple crimping portions are provided. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and base body with a one-way screw or the like at the crimping portion using one sealing mechanism. Next, to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism must be destroyed. In other words, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. This structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of a setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320, respectively. However, a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the "gaps" formed between the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button and the corresponding openings to alter the setting change board 1311. Note that if the setting change board box is configured such that the cover can be opened or closed from the base body, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, a setting change board cover opening/closing switch that can detect the opening of the cover may be provided on the base body. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover opening/closing switch may be configured to be input directly to the main control board 1310, or may be input (indirectly) to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. The above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission conditions can include the cover being released from the base body based on a detection signal from the setting change board cover opening/closing switch (the setting change board box configuration may be referred to as "modified enter key (28)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is configured to be connected to the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310, and in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the setting change board 1311 is configured to have a wiring pattern that transmits the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern that transmits the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, and a wiring pattern that transmits the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a. The wiring patterns are formed so that they are not close to each other (are spaced apart from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be spaced apart. Also on the main control board 1310, the wiring patterns for transmitting various signals from the setting key switch 1311a (that is, the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a, the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the enter key ON of the setting key switch 1311a, and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a) are formed so as to be spaced apart from each other. The wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the dispensing control board 633 is transmitted were also formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), but for either the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the decision key ON of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, Connector SMCN may be connected (inter-board connection) to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately from connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 via another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately, or this other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 may be electrically connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 via a harness (the manner in which the wiring pattern is routed may be described as "variant example of the enter key (29)").

In addition, any of the above-mentioned Confirm key variations (1) to (29) may be appropriately selected and combined to adopt the above-mentioned configuration (this selected and combined configuration may be referred to as "Confirm key variation (30)").

The above-mentioned setting values can be used to change the probability for determining whether a jackpot or a small jackpot has been achieved, the probability for determining whether a jackpot or a small jackpot has been achieved, the probability for determining whether a jackpot or a small jackpot has been achieved, the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, and other settings, such as the probability for determining whether a jackpot or a small jackpot has been achieved, when transitioning from a special mode to a normal mode, and the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player. The setting values are preset to a certain degree (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player (i.e., that increases the number of game balls that the player can acquire). In this embodiment, setting values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are provided, and the probabilities (degrees of advantage) that are advantageous to the player are preset from setting value 1 to setting value 6. While the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has multiple setting values ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, other pachinko machines have a single setting value that is preset to a certain degree (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player. That is, there are gaming specifications, such as the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in which the probability (degree of advantage) that will be advantageous to the player is preset as multiple set values, requiring setting changes, and gaming specifications in which the probability (degree of advantage) that will be advantageous to the player is preset as a single set value, requiring no setting changes at all. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is redesigned to suit such gaming specifications, while the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is redesigned or not used, the main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311 will be dependent on the gaming specifications, resulting in main control boards 1310 and setting change boards 1311 with similar or different hardware configurations depending on the gaming specifications. Therefore, there is a need for a main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311 that can be used in common without being dependent on the gaming specifications, i.e., without requiring design changes to the hardware configuration.

For example, in game specifications where the probability (degree of advantage) that a player will have is preset to a single value and no setting changes are required, there is no need to use a setting value as the probability (degree of advantage) that a player will have an advantage, so this can be addressed by changing the software design to assign setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 as follows:

For example, the main control MPU 1310a can use these as setting values to set multiple actual machine confirmation operation patterns (allowing for variations in the way the pachinko machine 1 is started up after the RAM is cleared) after clearing a specified area of its own built-in RAM (the area of the entire RAM excluding specific areas). In this case, for the operation of the movable body (gimmick element) and the lighting of light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs that are the objects of control by the main control MPU 1310a, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 specifying "all operations (movement of movable body (gimmick element) and lighting of light-emitting elements)" is assigned as setting value 1, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 specifying "movement of movable body (gimmick element)" is assigned as setting value 2, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 specifying "light-on of light-emitting elements" is assigned as setting value 3, and actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 specifying "detailed operation of movable body (gimmick element) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, movement with other structures and other movable elements)" is assigned as setting value 4. An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 is assigned which specifies "operations such as checking for interference with moving bodies (gimmicks), and the order of operation with other moving bodies (gimmicks)"; an actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 is assigned which specifies "lighting of light-emitting bodies per port (lighting of light-emitting bodies per predetermined output port unit of the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., per output port))" as setting value 5; and an actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 is assigned which specifies "no operation" as setting value 6 (the manner of changing the setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing is sometimes referred to as "variant example (1) based on common hardware configuration"). Note that the main control MPU 1310a performs the actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing by repeatedly performing main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to operate moving bodies (gimmicks) and light-emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command (referred to as a setting change completion command in FIG. 145) from the main control MPU 1310a, can operate the movable body (gimmick) and light the light emitter that are the object of control by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the settings (actual machine confirmation operation pattern) included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner in which the actual machine confirmation operation is changed after this RAM clear, it is possible to provide a variety of methods for starting up the pachinko machine 1 after the RAM is cleared.

Also, for example, it can be used as a setting value that allows multiple settings for the time from when the symbol changes to when the demonstration (a demonstration effect performed while the player is waiting) begins. In this case, time setting pattern 1 specifying "10 seconds" is assigned as setting value 1, time setting pattern 2 specifying "15 seconds" is assigned as setting value 2, time setting pattern 3 specifying "20 seconds" is assigned as setting value 3, time setting pattern 4 specifying "25 seconds" is assigned as setting value 4, time setting pattern 5 specifying "30 seconds" is assigned as setting value 5, and time setting pattern 6 specifying "35 seconds" is assigned as setting value 6 (the manner in which the time from when the symbol changes to when the player is waiting is sometimes referred to as "variant example (2) based on the common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the setting for the time it takes for the player to enter a waiting state after the symbol changes, it is possible to vary the time between the symbol changes and the demonstration.

Also, for example, it can be used as a setting value that allows multiple settings to be made for the content of the demonstration (demo effect performed while waiting for the player) that is performed after the symbol changes have finished. In this case, demo effect setting pattern 1 specifying "comical effect" is assigned as setting value 1, demo effect setting pattern 2 specifying "comical effect, moving object (gimmick) movement effect" is assigned as setting value 2, demo effect setting pattern 3 specifying "serious effect" is assigned as setting value 4, demo effect setting pattern 4 specifying "serial effect, moving object (gimmick) movement effect" is assigned as setting value 5, demo effect setting pattern 5 specifying "period drama-style effect" is assigned as setting value 5, and demo effect setting pattern 6 specifying "period drama-style effect, moving object (gimmick)" is assigned as setting value 6 (the manner in which the content of the demo effect is changed is sometimes referred to as "variant example (3) based on the common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can perform a demonstration using a demo effect (demo effect setting pattern) that corresponds to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on how the content of this demo effect is changed, it is possible to vary the content of the demo effect that is performed after the pattern change has finished.

Also, for example, the volume control switch on the peripheral control board 1510 can be used as a setting value to set multiple default volumes to be adjusted using the switch. Rotating the switch allows the volume to be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1, which specifies "volume 1," is assigned as setting value 1; volume setting pattern 2, which specifies "volume 2," is assigned as setting value 2; volume setting pattern 3, which specifies "volume 3," is assigned as setting value 3; volume setting pattern 4, which specifies "volume 4," is assigned as setting value 4; volume setting pattern 5, which specifies "volume 5," is assigned as setting value 5; and volume setting pattern 6, which specifies "volume 6," is assigned as setting value 6 (this mode of changing the default volume may be referred to as "variant example (4) based on the common hardware configuration"). Note that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, sets the default volume to a volume (volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Furthermore, the default volume of "Volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 may be muted when the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction to decrease the volume (opposite the direction to increase the volume) and has been moved to the minimum volume end and adjusted to the minimum volume, or may be set to a volume that can be heard when standing in front of the pachinko machine. Furthermore, the default volume of "Volume 6" assigned to setting value 6 may be set to the maximum volume when the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction to increase the volume (opposite the direction to decrease the volume) and has been moved to the maximum volume end and adjusted to the maximum volume, or may be set to a volume that is a predetermined percentage of the maximum volume (e.g., 85%). This manner of changing the default volume allows for variation in the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

It can also be used, for example, as a setting value that allows multiple settings to be made for the volume of error alert sounds for various malfunctions, goto, errors, and other error alerts. The various error alert sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (i.e., they are not dependent on it), and while setting them to maximum volume makes it easier for game parlor staff and other attendants to notice pachinko machines that emit error alert sounds, they may be irritating to players playing other pachinko machines. Therefore, there is also a demand for something that allows the volume of the various error alert sounds to be adjusted. In this case, error alert volume setting pattern 1 specifying "error alert volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, error alert volume setting pattern 2 specifying "error alert volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2, error alert volume setting pattern 3 specifying "error alert volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3, error alert volume setting pattern 4 specifying "volume 4" is assigned as setting value 4, error alert volume setting pattern 5 specifying "error alert volume 5" is assigned as setting value 5, and error alert volume setting pattern 6 specifying "error alert volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as setting value 6 (the manner of changing the volume of the error alert sound may be described as "variant example (5) using a common hardware configuration"). The volume of the error alert sound is set to increase from setting value 1 (a volume that does not mute the sound and allows the error alert sound to be heard when standing in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error alert sound) to setting value 6 (maximum volume that allows the error alert sound to be fully heard even when several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error alert sound). The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, controls the error alert sound to be emitted at a volume (error alert volume setting pattern) that corresponds to the setting value included in the setting change command. This change setting for the volume of the error alert sound allows for variation in the volume of the error alert sound when an error is announced.

It can also be used as a setting value to set multiple default brightnesses for light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs. The brightness of the light-emitting elements controlled by the main control MPU 1310a can be increased or decreased from the default brightness. In this case, default brightness setting pattern 1 specifying "Brightness 1" is assigned as setting value 1, default brightness setting pattern 2 specifying "Brightness 2" is assigned as setting value 2, default brightness setting pattern 3 specifying "Brightness 3" is assigned as setting value 3, default brightness setting pattern 4 specifying "Brightness 4" is assigned as setting value 4, default brightness setting pattern 5 specifying "Brightness 5" is assigned as setting value 5, and default brightness setting pattern 6 specifying "Brightness 6" is assigned as setting value 6 (this mode of changing the default brightness may be referred to as "variant example (6) based on the common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light-emitting elements by repeatedly performing the main control timer interrupt process described below, thereby lighting, blinking, and controlling the gradation points of the light-emitting elements. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can adjust the brightness of the light-emitting element that is the target of control by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command, and can turn the light-emitting element on, blink, or set a gradation point. Depending on how the content of this default brightness is changed, it is possible to provide variation in the default brightness of light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs.

Furthermore, for example, they can be used as setting values to set multiple brightness levels for light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs for error notifications of various malfunctions, glitches, and errors. For the lamps controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, Error Alert Brightness Setting Pattern 1, which specifies "Error Alert Brightness 1," is assigned as setting value 1; Error Alert Brightness Setting Pattern 2, which specifies "Error Alert Brightness 2," is assigned as setting value 2; Error Alert Brightness Setting Pattern 3, which specifies "Error Alert Brightness 3," is assigned as setting value 3; Error Alert Brightness Setting Pattern 4, which specifies "Error Alert Brightness 4," is assigned as setting value 4; Error Alert Brightness Setting Pattern 5, which specifies "Error Alert Brightness 5," is assigned as setting value 5; and Error Alert Brightness Setting Pattern 6, which specifies "Error Alert Brightness 6 (maximum brightness)," is assigned as setting value 6. (The manner in which the brightness levels of light-emitting elements for error notifications are changed is sometimes referred to as "variant example (7) based on the common hardware configuration.") The lamp brightness is set to increase from setting value 1 (a lamp brightness that does not go out but is low enough that an error alert can be recognized by standing in front of the pachinko machine) to setting value 6 (maximum brightness). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitters for error alerts by repeatedly performing the main control timer interrupt process described below, thereby turning the light emitters on, blinking, or setting gradation points. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can adjust the brightness of the light emitters controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error alert brightness (error alert brightness setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command, thereby turning the light emitters on, blinking, or setting gradation points. Depending on the manner in which the brightness of the light emitters for error alerts is changed, it is possible to vary the brightness of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs for error alerts.

In addition, the various setting values assigned to the above-mentioned common hardware configuration variants (1) to (7) are displayed on the setting display 1310g when predetermined setting value display permission conditions are met in the setting value confirmation and display process performed by the main control MPU 1310a (described below). However, they may also be displayed on the setting display 1310g at all times from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on until it is powered off (this mode of setting value display may be referred to as "common hardware configuration variant (8)").

Furthermore, any one of the above-mentioned variations (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration may be appropriately selected and adopted as the above-mentioned determination key variation (30).

Furthermore, the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission conditions required that when the pachinko machine 1 was powered on or when power was restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 be opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key be inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. When the pachinko machine 1 was powered on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for specific areas in the main control power-on processing described below, and then proceeds with the game by performing interrupt permission settings, etc. Furthermore, when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1 and the above-mentioned predetermined condition for permission to change the setting value is met, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process described below, clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. In other words, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633, if the above-mentioned predetermined condition for permission to change the setting value is met when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1, in either case the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on process described below, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. Therefore, the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission conditions are that when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON, and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633 may also be pressed (sometimes referred to as a "variant example of the predetermined setting value change permission conditions").

Furthermore, the above-mentioned predetermined setting value display permission conditions required that when the pachinko machine 1 was powered on or after a power outage (a momentary power outage) and power was restored, the main frame 4 be opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key be inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. When these predetermined setting value display permission conditions were met, the main control MPU 1310a displayed the current setting value on the setting display 1310g in the setting value confirmation display process, which is performed as part of the main control timer interrupt process described below. Furthermore, as described above, the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633 required that the pressing operation section be pressed when the pachinko machine 1 was powered on, and the period during which it could be pressed was limited. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value display permission condition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage that causes a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning on the setting key, and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633 may not be pressed (sometimes referred to as a "variant of the predetermined setting value display permission condition"). In this case, when the predetermined variation of the setting value display permission condition is met, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the setting value confirmation display process as part of the main control side timer interrupt process described later, but performs it before performing the initial setting and startup setting of the built-in WDT in the main control side power-on process described later, and then performs the interrupt permission setting, etc., to proceed with the game. In addition, when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting value confirmation display process when a modified example of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met, the interrupt permission setting has not yet been made, so the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the main control side timer interrupt process, and does not read the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a) to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON, and does not store these in the input information memory area of the main control built-in RAM as input information described later. Therefore, when a modified version of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met and the setting value confirmation display process is performed, the main control MPU 1310a reads a detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b, which detects the opening of the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and a setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a.

By adopting both the above-mentioned modified pre-defined setting value change permission conditions and the above-mentioned modified pre-defined setting value display permission conditions, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage (a momentary power outage that causes a momentary power outage), the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. When the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control power-on process described below, clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. On the other hand, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633 is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting value confirmation display process in the main control power-on process described below, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. By adopting this mode, the main control MPU 1310a never performs the setting value confirmation display process once the game begins. In other words, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the game by setting interrupt permission, etc., it never displays the current setting value on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 in the ball counting process of the main control side power-on process described below, and outputs the count to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the main control side power-on process described below, thereby displaying the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008 on the base monitor 1310h. Therefore, the current setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h (sometimes referred to as a "variant example of the method of using the base monitor"). As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can use the base monitor 1310h to display the current setting values that have been set during the period from when power is restored until the game begins to progress by setting interrupt permission, etc., and once the game begins to progress after power is restored by setting interrupt permission, etc., the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008 can be displayed, eliminating the need to provide a setting display 1310g and contributing to cost reductions.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value change permission conditions, the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value display permission conditions, and the above-mentioned variations of the base monitor usage method may be appropriately selected and adopted as the above-mentioned variation of the enter key (30).

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value change permission conditions, the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value display permission conditions, and the above-mentioned variations of the base monitor usage method may be appropriately selected and adopted in variations (1) to (8) based on the above-mentioned common hardware configuration.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 107, 110, and 111. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the component 1000 outside the game area 5a. When assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the function display unit 1400 can be seen from the front (player's side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. This function display unit 1400 uses multiple LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game status (game situation), the results of the regular lottery, the results of the special lottery, etc.

The functional display unit 1400, although not shown in detail, is equipped with a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that displays the game status, a normal pattern indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the normal lottery result drawn when game ball B is received into the normal winning port 2003, and a normal hold indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holds related to the reception of game ball B into the normal winning port 2003.

The function display unit 1400 also includes a first special pattern display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the result of a first special lottery drawn upon the acceptance of game ball B into the first starting port 2002, a first special reserve number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reserves related to the acceptance of game ball B into the first starting port 2002, a second special pattern display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the result of a second special lottery drawn upon the acceptance of game ball B into the second starting port 2004, and a second special reserve number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reserves related to the acceptance of game ball B into the second starting port 2004.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is equipped with a round display consisting of five LEDs that displays the number of times (number of rounds) the opening and closing pattern of the large prize opening 2005 is repeated when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "win" or the like.

This functional display unit 1400 can display the number of reserved items, designs, etc. by turning on, off, blinking, etc. the LEDs provided as appropriate.

Here, as a noise countermeasure when the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the component 1000 outside the play area 5a, we will provide a detailed explanation of the multiple wiring (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "wiring") that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 and transmits control signals from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400.

As shown in Figures 110 and 111, the wiring FCBL, which is electrically connected via the connector 1400a provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400, is routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the upper edge of the rear surface of the rear box 3010, where it is bent downwards on the rear surface of the rear box 3010 and gathered together by multiple wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right edge of the rear surface of the rear box 3010, and is then bent before reaching the upper edge of the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear of the game panel 1100, or is routed downwards along the right edge of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200.

Then, once the wiring FCBL is routed to the bottom edge of the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left edge of the main control board box 1320, routed along the bottom edge of the main control board box 1320 to below the function display unit connector MFCN, and then electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

In this way, the wiring FCBL electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is long, and in particular, the wiring FCBL routed from the upper right corner of the gaming board 5 to the rear of the gaming panel 1100 and to the upper edge of the rear of the rear box 3010 is bent downward on the rear of the rear of the rear box 3010 and gathered together by multiple wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right edge of the rear of the rear box 3010, and routed along the right edge of the main control board box 1320 to the bottom edge of the main control board box 1320 on the rear of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear of the gaming panel 1100. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the area through which the wiring FCBL is routed is located in front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 on the main frame 4 shown in FIG. 81.

A decorative board 1131 mounted with multiple decorative LEDs is located behind the functional display unit 1400. The wiring UPCBL, a connection cable electrically connected via a connector 1131a provided on the back side of the decorative board 1131, is bent toward the upper rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, then bent toward the rear surface of the rear box 3010 at the upper edge of the front surface of the rear box 3010, and routed to the upper edge of the rear surface of the rear box 3010 in close proximity to (or in contact with) the above-mentioned wiring FCBL. Then, the wiring UPCBL is bent toward the lower rear surface of the rear box 3010, and is gathered together by multiple wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right edge of the rear surface of the rear box 3010, and routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 to the upper edge of the drive board unit 1700. The wiring UPCBL then separates from the path of the wiring FCBL described above, and is bent toward the left side at the top edge of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500, routed along the top edge of the drive board unit 1700, and routed up to above a specified connector on the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, before being electrically connected to that specified connector.

In this way, the wiring UPCBL electrically connecting the decorative board 1131 located behind the functional display unit 1400 and the panel drive board 1720 is long, and in particular, the wiring FCBL routed from the upper right corner of the gaming board 5 to the rear of the gaming panel 1100 and to the upper edge of the rear of the rear box 3010 is bent downward on the rear of the rear of the rear box 3010 and gathered together by multiple wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right edge of the rear of the rear of the rear box 3010, and routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 to the upper edge of the drive board unit 1700. Like the wiring FCBL described above, when the gaming board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the area through which the wiring UPCBL is routed is located in front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 on the main frame 4 shown in FIG. 97.

As described above, the payout unit 560 comprises a ball guide unit 570 having a single guide path that guides game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner; a payout device 580 that pays out game balls B guided by the single guide path of the ball guide unit 570 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633; an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward; and a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides game balls B that have passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 or the board unit 620.

As mentioned above, game balls B become charged and emit electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge caused by being polished in the island equipment of the gaming hall and rubbing against each other as they circulate between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, static electricity is likely to accumulate in and around the areas where the ball tank 552 and payout unit 560, which can store game balls B, are installed.

The main control board 1310, which will be described in detail later, includes a main control MPU 1310a, a microprocessor with built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and commands, and RAM for temporarily storing data. This main control MPU 1310a incorporates a circuit that forcibly resets itself via hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in reset circuit"). This forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be disabled by user program control. Therefore, when the built-in reset circuit forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a, it resets itself without executing the main control side power-off processing described below, and then executes the main control side power-on processing described below again. In this case, because the main control side power-off processing has not been executed, a checksum error will inevitably occur in the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, resulting in the contents of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a being completely erased (cleared). In other words, if a forced reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit, the RAM will be cleared when the main control MPU 1310a starts up again.

In addition, in this embodiment, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type package is used for the main control MPU 1310a, and when the main control MPU 1310a is mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310, the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protrude from the soldering surface of the main control board 1310 (the surface opposite the mounting surface). In other words, the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320.

As such, static electricity tends to accumulate in the areas where the ball tank 552 and dispensing unit 560 are mounted and their surrounding areas. When electromagnetic noise is released due to electrostatic discharge, it may enter the wiring FCBL, which is located in front of the dispensing unit 560 and electrically connects the function display unit 1400 to the main control board 1310, or it may enter the wiring UPCBL, which is located behind the function display unit 1400 and electrically connects the upper left panel decorative board 1131 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL may escape and enter the wiring UPCBL, or conversely, electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL may escape and enter the wiring FCBL.

For example, suppose the wiring FCBL electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is routed in a straight line within the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from a predetermined position on the right side of the main control board box 1320 to the left side of the main control board box 1320 (for example, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 at a point on the right side of the main control board box 1320 that is about a quarter of the length from the top side of the main control board box 1320 so as to be parallel to the top or bottom side of the main control board box 1320), and then it passes above the function display unit connector MFCN, which is located from the center of the bottom side of the main control board 1310 toward the left side, and then it is routed toward the bottom side of the main control board box 1320. When the wiring FCBL is bent and pulled out from the bottom edge of the main control board box 1320 and then electrically connected to the functional display unit connector MFCN, if electromagnetic noise enters this wiring FCBL, and the wiring FCBL is routed through the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, and passes through the area in front of the main control board 1310 (i.e., in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) that corresponds to the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a, electromagnetic noise can enter the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL. This intrusive electromagnetic noise could cause the main control MPU 1310a to be forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit.

In addition, if a wiring accommodating groove is formed on the rear surface of the board holder 1200 instead of in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, the wiring FCBL will be accommodated along the wiring accommodating groove rather than in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, and after being pulled out from the bottom edge of the main control board box 1320, will be electrically connected to the connector MFCN for the function display unit. In this case, if electromagnetic noise enters this wiring FCBL, as described above, and the wiring FCBL is housed and routed along the wiring housing groove formed on the rear surface of the board holder 1200, and passes through the area in front of the main control board 1310 (i.e., in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a, the electromagnetic noise will enter via the wiring FCBL into the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, and there is a risk that the main control MPU 1310a will be forced to reset by its own built-in reset circuit due to the influence of this intruding electromagnetic noise.

In this embodiment, the mounting position of the function display unit connector MFCN, to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, and the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a are such that the function display unit connector MFCN is positioned toward the left side from the center of the bottom edge of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a is positioned above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left edges of the main control board 1310. In other words, in this embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is positioned below the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left edges of the main control board 1310, while the main control MPU 1310a is positioned above this center line, so that the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are spaced apart on the main control board 1310.

This allows the main control MPU 1310a to be positioned away from the functional display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, preventing electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL from entering the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the space that separates the functional display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310. This means that the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL, which can allow electromagnetic noise to enter.

Furthermore, by positioning the main control MPU 1310a away from the functional display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, electromagnetic noise that enters via this wiring FCBL can be attenuated on the main control board 1310 or in the space separating the functional display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310, so that even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, it will not affect the main control MPU 1310a. In this respect, too, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL, which is a route through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is positioned so that the right edge of its package is spaced at least a predetermined distance (hereinafter referred to as the "first wiring separation distance") from the right edge of the main control board 1310. This is because the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is routed downward along the right edge of the main control board box 1320, and this prevents electromagnetic noise that has entered this wiring FCBL from entering the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrude from this wiring FCBL through the space having the first wiring separation distance from this wiring FCBL and toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320.

Furthermore, as described above, the wiring FCBL electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 cannot be routed within the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 (or accommodated along the wiring accommodation groove formed on the rear surface of the board holder 1200), and is instead routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, causing the wiring FCBL to The wiring FCBL is bent toward the left side and routed along the bottom edge of the main control board box 1320 to below the function display unit connector MFCN, and then electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN. This allows for a large distance (hereinafter referred to as the "second wiring separation distance") between the wiring FCBL routed along the bottom edge of the main control board box 1320 and the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. This second wiring separation distance is larger than the first wiring separation distance. This prevents electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL from penetrating the space defined by the second wiring separation distance from the wiring FCBL and reaching the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. This also protects the main control MPU 1310a from the wiring FCBL, which can allow electromagnetic noise to enter.

In this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected directly by the wiring FCBL, but the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 can also be electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710. In this case, it is preferable to provide the panel relay board 1710 with an element that can reduce or eliminate electromagnetic noise that has entered the above-mentioned wiring FCBL (in other words, it is preferable to provide an element that can reduce or eliminate electromagnetic noise for each of the multiple wiring FCBLs that transmit control signals from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400). This prevents electromagnetic noise that enters via the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL, which is a route through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

Such elements include resistors and filter circuits. Observation of electromagnetic noise waveforms has shown that the waveform width of electromagnetic noise is within approximately 2 microseconds (μs), and filter circuits are designed to pass signals with waveform widths larger than this.

In addition to resistors, filter circuits, etc., such elements can also include EMC countermeasure components (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.). When coils or beads are used, they are inserted so that they are electrically connected in series to the multiple wirings FCBL, and when capacitors are used, they are inserted so that they are electrically connected in parallel to the multiple wirings FCBL. Furthermore, if steeper attenuation characteristics are required, a circuit formed by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the multiple wirings FCBL, or a circuit formed by combining a bead and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the multiple wirings FCBL.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the gaming board 5 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 110 and 114. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600, which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see Figure 137) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light-emitting effects, sound effects, moving effects, etc., and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the performance operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the performance display device 1600, etc.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the gaming board 5 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 113 and 114. The effect display device 1600 is located in the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 via the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the rear box 3010, approximately in the center. When the gaming board 5 is assembled, the effect display device 1600 can be seen from the front (player's side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center role device 2500. The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and videos.

The performance display device 1600 has two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding leftward from the left side and one right fixing piece 1602 protruding rightward from the right side. With the LCD screen facing forward, the performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear box 3010 by inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 from diagonally behind the rear box 3010 into two fixing grooves 3010c opening into the left inner surface of the frame-shaped LCD mounting portion 3010b of the rear box 3010 (described below), then moving the right fixing piece 1602 forward to insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and sliding the locking mechanism 3020 upward in rear view.

[5-8. Overall structure of the table unit]
The front unit 2000 of the gaming board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 119 to 124. Figure 119(a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the gaming board as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the gaming board as seen from the back. Figure 120 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow path of gaming balls on the right side of the front unit. Figure 121(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of gaming balls circulating through a first guide passage in the guide passage group, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of gaming balls circulating through a second guide passage in the guide passage group. Figure 122(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of gaming balls received in the bonus winning opening, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a plan view of the third distribution device in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the second distribution device in (a).

Figure 123 is an explanatory diagram showing the timing of the operation of the bonus prize slots and the first and second distribution devices according to the type of "small win." Figure 124 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the attacca unit, and is a cross-sectional view taken along line E-E in (a). The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, with its front end protruding forward beyond the front surface of the game panel 1100 and its rear end partially protruding into the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100.

The front unit 2000 comprises a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can receive game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a; a first starting opening 2002 that is always open and can receive game balls B at a different position within the game area 5a than the plurality of general winning openings 2001; a regular winning opening 2003 that is attached at a further different position within the game area 5a and is always open and can receive game balls B; and a second starting opening 200 that can receive game balls B depending on the result of a regular lottery that is drawn when game balls B are received by the regular winning opening 2003. 4, a large prize opening 2005 that can accept game ball B depending on the first or second special lottery result drawn by receiving game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, a special prize opening 2006 that can accept game ball B depending on the first or second special lottery result drawn by receiving game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, and a first V prize opening 2007 and a second V prize opening 2008 that are given the opportunity to accept game ball B received into special prize opening 2006.

Multiple (here, three) general winning openings 2001 are located below the vertical center of the game area 5a and to the left of the horizontal center. The first starting opening 2002 is located directly above the lowest outlet opening 1008 in the horizontal center of the game area 5a. The regular winning opening 2003 is located near the right end of the game area 5a, lower than the vertical center. The second starting opening 2004 is located below and to the left of the regular winning opening 2003. The large winning opening 2005 is located between the second starting opening 2004 and the first starting opening 2002, at a height slightly lower than the first starting opening 2002. The special winning opening 2006 is located above the regular winning opening 2003. The first V winning opening 2007 is located at a height between the special winning opening 2006 and the regular winning opening 2003. The second V winning slot 2008 is located directly above the first starting slot 2002 in the left-right center of the gaming area 5a.

The front unit 2000 is comprised of a start opening unit 2100 which is attached to the center of the left-right direction within the play area 5a, directly above the bottom end of the play area 5a, and has a first start opening 2002; a side unit 2200 which is attached to the left of the start opening unit 2100 as viewed from the front, along the inner rail 1002, and has three general winning openings 2001; an upper left side unit 2300 which is attached slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 as viewed from the front; and a side unit 2300 which is attached to the front of the play area 5a. The attacca unit 2400 is attached to the right of the start opening unit 2100 (in the lower right corner as viewed from the front) and has a normal winning opening 2003, a second start opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005, and the frame-shaped center device 2500 is attached above the start opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, slightly above the center of the game area 5a as viewed from the front, and has a device winning opening 2006, a first V winning opening 2007, and a second V winning opening 2008.

[5-8a. Starting unit]
The start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is located within the game area 5a, near the lower end in the center in the left-right direction, directly above the outlet 1008, and is attached from the front to the game panel 1100. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002 that is always open upward and wide enough to receive only one game ball B.

By attaching the start port unit 2100 to the gaming panel 1100, the first start port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, opens upward, and is located directly below the center of the stage 2503 of the center device 2500. Therefore, when game ball B is released downward from the central release section 2503a of the stage 2503, there is an extremely high probability that it will be received by the first start port 2002.

When attached to the gaming panel 1100, the starting port unit 2100 can guide the gaming ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the gaming panel 1100 and deliver it to the rear bottom ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate presentation unit 3100 in the rear unit 3000.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 within the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 has three general winning ports 2001 that are open so that they can always receive game balls B. The three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are aligned in an arc along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning ports 2001 on the right side open upward, and the general winning port 2001 on the left side opens toward the upper left.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the gaming board 5, the three general winning openings 2001 protrude forward beyond the front surface of the gaming panel 1100. This side unit 2200 can guide gaming balls received in the general winning openings 2001 to the rear of the gaming panel 1100 and deliver them to the rear-bottom ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide panel presentation unit 3100 in the rear unit 3000.

[5-8c. Upper left side unit]
The upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the gaming panel 1100 from the front, within the gaming area 5a, so as to contact the inner rail 1002 to the left of the side unit 2200. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to be lower to the right.

When the upper left side unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the game panel 1100. The upper left side unit 2300 can use the shelf portion 2301 to guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center device 2500 to the right side, below the center device 2500.

[5-8d. Attacker Unit]
The attacca unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is located in the gaming area 5a, to the right of the starting hole unit 2100 as seen from the front, which is in the lower right corner as seen from the front, and is attached from the front to the front of the gaming panel 1100. This attacca unit 2400 has a normal winning hole 2003, a second starting hole 2004, and a big winning hole 2005 (see Figure 120, etc.).

When viewed from the front, the attacca unit 2400 has an external shape that is triangular, with the height from the bottom edge increasing toward the right. In this attacca unit 2400, the normal winning opening 2003 is always open toward the top in the upper right corner. The second starting opening 2004 is located at the bottom left, spaced more than the width of one game ball B from the normal winning opening 2003, and is always open toward the front. The special winning opening 2005 is located near the bottom end of the bottom left of the second starting opening 2004, and can be opened and closed toward the front.

The Attacka unit 2400 has a normal winning opening 2003 that is slightly larger than the game ball B. The Attacka unit 2400 also has a second starting opening 2004 that is slightly larger than the game ball, and a large winning opening 2005 that opens left and right with a width approximately 3 to 6 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

The attacker unit 2400 is equipped with a normal prize opening sensor 2401 that detects game ball B received in the normal prize opening 2003, a second start opening sensor 2402 that detects game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, a special prize opening sensor 2403 that detects game ball B received in the special prize opening 2005, and a magnetic sensor 2010 that detects unauthorized magnetism (see Figure 137, etc.).

The attacca unit 2400 is equipped with a second start opening door 2411 capable of guiding a game ball B to the second start opening 2004, a start opening solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the second start opening door 2411 in accordance with the result of a normal lottery drawn when a game ball B is received at the normal winning opening 2003, a large prize opening door 2413 that can open and close the large prize opening 2005, and an attacca solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the large prize opening door 2413 in accordance with the result of a first special lottery or a second special lottery drawn when a game ball B is received at the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004.

As shown in Figures 120, 121, and 124, the attacca unit 2400 is provided with a second starting opening guide shelf 2421 located below and to the left of the normal winning opening 2003 and above the second starting opening 2004, which slopes downward to the left; a second starting opening left standing wall 2422 located to the left of the second starting opening guide shelf 2421 and extending vertically; a second starting opening right standing wall 2423 extending downward from the right end of the second starting opening guide shelf 2421; and a special winning opening guide shelf 2424 located below the second starting opening above guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall 2422 and to the right of the special winning opening 2005, which slopes downward to the left.

The guide shelf 2421 above the second starting opening extends from a position to the right of the right end of the second starting opening 2004, past the left end of the second starting opening 2004, and to the left, near the center between the second starting opening 2004 and the big prize opening 2005 in the left-right direction. This guide shelf 2421 above the second starting opening prevents game ball B from being received into the second starting opening 2004 from above.

The second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 is provided to the left of the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421, with a distance allowing one game ball B to pass through. The second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 extends vertically from a position higher than the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 to a position lower than the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and higher than the bottom end of the second starting opening 2004. The upper end of the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 is bent to the right.

The second starting opening right standing wall portion 2423 extends vertically downward from the right end of the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 to approximately the same height as the bottom end of the second starting opening 2004. This second starting opening right standing wall portion 2423 prevents game ball B from being received into the second starting opening 2004 from the right.

The special prize opening guide shelf 2424 is slightly lower than the bottom end of the second starting opening 2004, and extends left and right from a point to the left of the left end of the second starting opening 2004, to a point one game ball B below the bottom end of the second starting opening 2004, to the left of the second starting opening left standing wall 2422, and roughly the same height as the right end of the special prize opening 2005, with the left end becoming lower. As shown in the figure, the right end of the special prize opening guide shelf 2424 is curved so that it rises upward, and the angle of inclination becomes steeper as it goes to the right.

The attacca unit 2400 also has an attacca right passage 2430 that opens to the left on the right side of the normal prize opening 2003 and guides the game ball B to a position below the special prize opening guide shelf 2424 and lower than the special prize opening 2005.

The Attacca right passage 2430 has a first opening 2431 that is long in the vertical direction and opens to the left above the right side of the normal prize opening 2003, a second opening 2432 that opens to the upper left between the normal prize opening 2003 and the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421, a third opening 2433 that opens upward below the second starting opening 2004, a fourth opening 2434 that is long in the vertical direction and opens to the left below the large prize opening 2005 below the large prize opening guide shelf 2424, and an outlet portion 2435 that is connected to the lower end of the fourth opening 2434 and opens to the left. The attacker right passage 2430 allows game balls B to enter through the first opening 2431, second opening 2432, third opening 2433, and fourth opening 2434, and game balls B can only be released to the outside through the release port 2435.

The attacca right passage 2430 is formed in the shape of multiple steps, with the left side sloping downward. Specifically, the attacca right passage 2430 extends downward from a position above the normal prize opening 2003 on the right side of the normal prize opening 2003, turns left at a position lower than the normal prize opening 2003, wraps around to the bottom of the normal prize opening 2003, bends downward below the normal prize opening 2003, and bends downward as part of the left-hand wall below the normal prize opening 2003, then bends left again at a position lower than the special prize opening guide shelf 2424, bends downward below a position to the right of the center of the special prize opening guide shelf 2424, and extends to the bottom end of the attacca unit 2400.

The Attacca right passage 2430 has multiple protrusions 2436 spaced apart in the vertical direction on the inner walls of the front and rear of the vertically extending section, which protrude into the passage and extend left and right. The multiple protrusions 2436 are arranged so that their heights are staggered on the front and rear sides. When the game ball B comes into contact with these multiple protrusions 2436, they can guide the game ball B downward in a zigzag pattern while suppressing an increase in its downward speed.

The Attacca right passage 2430 is located to the right of the large prize opening 2005, where the fourth opening 2434 opens. These protrusions 2436 are provided at the vertically long section, and have a protrusion 2437 that protrudes further into the passage from the end on the fourth opening 2434 side (see Figure 124, etc.). The presence of this protrusion 2437 prevents a game ball B in the Attacca right passage 2430 from being released to the outside (left) through the fourth opening 2434, while also allowing a game ball B to enter the Attacca right passage 2430 from the outside through the fourth opening 2434. Therefore, a game ball B that enters the Attacca right passage 2430 is released from the Attacca unit 2400 into the game area 5a without having the opportunity to be received by the normal prize opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, or the large prize opening 2005.

In addition, the Attacca right passage 2430 has a long fourth opening 2434 that opens vertically at the section that passes to the right of the large prize opening 2005. This allows a game ball B released to the left from the large prize opening guide shelf 2424 to come into contact with multiple obstacle nails N planted above the large prize opening 2005, and a game ball B that flows above the large prize opening 2005 and to the right of the large prize opening 2005 to be received by the fourth opening 2434 and allowed to enter the Attacca right passage 2430. As described above, a game ball B that enters the Attacca right passage 2430 can only be released to the outside from the release opening 2435 at the bottom. Therefore, a game ball B that is guided to the right by the obstacle nails N above the large prize opening 2005 will not bounce back toward the large prize opening 2005 due to the presence of the Attacca right passage 2430.

Therefore, when the large prize opening 2005 is in the open state, if a game ball B released from the large prize opening guide shelf 2424 is guided to the right of the large prize opening 2005 by the obstacle pin N, it will not enter the attacker right passage 2430 and be accepted by the large prize opening 2005. For this reason, even if a passage for game ball B (here, the attacker right passage 2430) is provided adjacent to the large prize opening 2005, the game ball will not bounce off the wall of the passage (fourth opening 2434) toward the large prize opening 2005 and be accepted by the large prize opening 2005. This makes it possible to provide a passage for game ball B adjacent to the large prize opening 2005 while suppressing the acceptance of excessive game balls B into the large prize opening 2005, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 with passages not previously seen in pachinko machines.

The second starting opening door 2411 is a plate-like structure extending from the underside of the second starting opening 2004 to the vicinity of the second starting opening left standing wall 2422, and is moved back and forth by the starting opening solenoid 2412. The second starting opening door 2411 is inclined so that it becomes lower from the left end toward the second starting opening 2004 on the right, and also inclined so that it becomes lower toward the rear at the second starting opening 2004 area. In the normal state (closed state), this second starting opening door 2411 is retracted. Therefore, a game ball B that enters between the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall 2422 falls onto the large prize opening guide shelf 2424 without coming into contact with the second starting opening door 2411, and therefore does not enter (be accepted by) the second starting opening 2004.

On the other hand, in the normal winning state (open state), the second starting opening door 2411 is advanced, so that a game ball B that has entered between the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 comes into contact with the second starting opening door 2411 and is guided by the second starting opening door 2411 toward the second starting opening 2004, entering (being received by) the second starting opening 2004. In this way, the second starting opening 2004 opens and closes as the second starting opening door 2411 advances and retreats. The second starting opening door 2411 closes the second starting opening 2004 when the starting opening solenoid 2412 is OFF (not energized), and opens the second starting opening 2004 when the starting opening solenoid is ON (energized).

The large prize opening door 2413 is a rectangle that is long from side to side, and is attached so that it can rotate around one long side as the axis in the left-right direction. The large prize opening door 2413 can close the large prize opening 2005, which opens forward, by holding the short side upright using the attacca solenoid 2414. By rotating the other long side forward, the large prize opening 2005 can be opened, allowing game ball B to be received. This large prize opening door 2413 closes the large prize opening 2005 when the attacca solenoid 2414 is OFF (not energized), and opens the large prize opening 2005 when the attacca solenoid 2414 is ON (energized).

In the attacker unit 2400, a game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2003 is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 2401 at the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged onto the lower board holder 1200. A game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004 is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2402 at the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged onto the lower board holder 1200. A game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 is detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403 at the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged onto the lower board holder 1200.

When this attacca unit 2400 is attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, the normal winning opening 2003 is located below the two exits of the guide passage group 2520 on the upper right side of the center role device 2500 (described below), and at a height higher than the stage 2503 of the center role device 2500; the second starting opening 2004 is located below and to the left of the normal winning opening 2003, at a height between it and the stage 2503 of the center role device 2500; and the special winning opening 2005 is located below the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. Furthermore, when attached to the gaming panel 1100, multiple obstacle nails N are planted above the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004 (guide shelf 2421 above the second starting opening), and the special winning opening 2005.

[5-8e. Center role]
The center role device 2500 of the front unit 2000 is located in the game area 5a above the starting unit 2100, and is positioned slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100. The center role device 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the performance display device 1600 located behind the game panel 1100 and the various performance units provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen from the front.

The entire periphery of the frame-shaped center device 2500, excluding the bottom edge, protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, preventing a gaming ball B shot into the gaming area 5a from entering the frame.

The center device 2500 is equipped with a warp entrance 2501 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front, which is open to allow game balls B in the game area 5a to enter, a warp exit 2502 which opens into the frame and is capable of releasing game balls B that have entered the warp entrance 2501, and a stage 2503 which can roll game balls B released from the warp exit 2502 in the left-right direction and then release them into the game area 5a (see Figure 117, etc.).

The stage 2503 of the center role device 2500 is curved and recessed in the left-right center, and is formed in a wavy (W-shape) such that the position corresponding to directly above the first starting hole 2002 of the starting hole unit 2100, that is, the approximate center position in the left-right direction when the center role device 2500 is attached to the gaming panel 1100, is slightly higher than either side. This stage 2503 has a section (center release section 2503a) that is slightly higher than either side in the left-right center, and the lowest section on either side (side release section 2503b) that are inclined so that they become lower toward the front, and game balls B can be released into the gaming area 5a from these sections.

When the center device 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the elevated portion in the center of the stage 2503 in the left-right direction (central release section 2503a) is located directly above the first starting hole 2002 of the starting hole unit 2100. As a result, when game ball B is released from the central release section 2503a in the center of the stage 2503, there is an extremely high probability that it will be received by the first starting hole 2002.

The center device 2500 also comprises an upper right peripheral wall 2510 that forms part of the upper outer periphery and slopes downward from a position to the left of the center toward the right, and a guide passage group 2520 located in the upper right corner and consisting of two passages through which game ball B can pass. When assembled to the game board 5, the upper right peripheral wall 2510 forms an upstream space 2505 of a predetermined size between it and the outer rail 1001 of the previous component 1000, through which game ball B can pass. The guide passage group 2520 guides game ball B above the attacca unit 2400.

The center device 2500 is located in one of the guide passages 2520, and includes a device winning port 2006 that can receive the game ball B depending on the results of a first and second special lottery drawn when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004; a first distribution device 2530 that distributes the game ball B received in the device winning port 2006 to either the V winning side or the losing side; a second distribution device 2540 that distributes the game ball B distributed to the V winning side by the first distribution device 2530 to either the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port; and a third distribution device 2550 that distributes the game ball B distributed to the second V winning port by the second distribution device 2540 to either the second V winning port 2008 or the losing side.

The center device 2500 also includes a device prize opening door 2511 that can open and close the device prize opening 2006, a device prize opening solenoid 2512 that opens and closes the device prize opening door 2511 in accordance with the first or second special lottery result determined by the acceptance of game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, a device prize opening sensor 2513 that detects game ball B accepted into the device prize opening 2006, a first losing opening sensor 2515 that detects game ball B accepted into the first losing opening 2535, and a first V winning opening sensor 2514 that detects game ball B sorted by the second sorting device 2540 and accepted into the first V winning opening 2007.

As shown in Figures 120 and 121, the guide passage group 2520 is located outside the frame of the center device 2500 and is composed of a first guide passage 2521, whose upper entrance is located at the impact stopper 1006, and a second guide passage 2522, whose upper entrance is located adjacent to the left side of the entrance to the first guide passage 2521. The guide passage group 2520 (first guide passage 2521 and second guide passage 2522) are both made of colorless and transparent materials, and the game ball B flowing through them can be seen from the front.

The first guide passage 2521 extends vertically downward from the impact stop 1006 of the previous component 1000, then bends at a right angle to the right. When it hits the right rail 1005, it bends downward and extends along the right rail 1005, bends left approximately three-quarters of the way down the height of the play area 5a, extends leftward at a gentle angle, bends downward one game ball B to the left of the entrance to the second guide passage 2522, extends to the center of the play area 5a, bends right and extends near the right rail 1005, then bends downward so that its exit opens downward. The first guide passage 2521 does not bend in the front-to-back direction, and guides the game ball B downward on approximately the same plane as the front of the game panel 1100.

The bonus prize opening 2006 is located in a section of the first guide passage 2521 that extends to the left, extends left and right over almost the entire length of that section in the left-right direction, and opens upward. The bonus prize opening door 2511 extends front to back and is formed like a plate that extends left and right with its left end lower, and can open and close the bonus prize opening 2006, which opens upward, by moving forward and backward. The bonus prize opening door 2511 can close the bonus prize opening 2006 by moving forward, and when the bonus prize opening 2006 is closed, it forms the bottom of the section of the first guide passage 2521 that extends to the left, and can guide game ball B circulating from upstream to the exit side of the first guide passage 2521.

The bonus prize opening door 2511 moves backward when driven by the bonus prize opening solenoid 2512, thereby opening the bonus prize opening 2006 and allowing the game ball B that has circulated through the first guide passage 2521 to be received by the bonus prize opening 2006. This bonus prize opening door 2511 closes the bonus prize opening 2006 when the bonus prize opening solenoid 2512 is OFF (not energized), and opens the bonus prize opening 2006 when the bonus prize opening solenoid 2512 is ON (energized).

The second guide passage 2522 has an entrance that opens upward at the right end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510, at a position spaced to the left from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. The second guide passage 2522 extends downward in a substantially straight line from the entrance at the upper end, bends backward at a height lower than the height of the position where the first guide passage 2521 first bends to the right, then bends downward behind the front of the gaming panel 1100 to line up with the first guide passage 2521 in the front-to-back direction, extends downward so that its left-to-right direction is substantially aligned with the portion of the first guide passage 2521 that extends downward to the left of the bonus prize winning opening 2006, and then reaches a position at the center height of the gaming area 5a. It bends to the right in a curved shape, then bends downward, then bends forward at a point below the portion of the first guide passage 2521 that extends to the right on the lower side, and then bends to the right so that it extends along the lower side of the portion of the first guide passage 2521 that extends to the right on the lower side, with the front-to-back plane being flush with the first guide passage 2521, and then bends downward so that it is adjacent to the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521, so that the outlet opens downward.

The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 have an overlapping portion 2520a that appears to overlap from the front as they are lined up in the front-to-back direction in the section of the first guide passage 2521 that extends vertically to the left of the bonus prize winning opening 2006. This overlapping portion 2520a allows both the game ball B circulating through the first guide passage 2521 and the game ball B circulating through the second guide passage 2522 to be clearly visible from the front, making it difficult for the player to determine which passage the game ball B circulating through the overlapping portion 2520a is circulating through.

In the guide passage group 2520, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are twisted 90 degrees around a vertical axis above the overlapping portion 2520a, and are twisted 90 degrees around a vertical axis below the overlapping portion 2520a in the opposite direction from the upper side. The outlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 open downward above the normal winning opening 2003 in the attacca unit 2400.

The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 each have multiple protrusions 2520b spaced apart in the direction of flow of the game ball B, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the protrusions 2520b, the increase in its flow speed can be suppressed (see Figure 112).

The first distribution device 2530 is located at a height between the reel winning opening 2006 and the portion of the first guide passage 2521 extending to the lower right, and is located behind the first guide passage 2521 (the front of the gaming panel 1100).

The first distribution device 2530 has a storage section 2531a on its outer surface that can store only one game ball B, and is composed of a distribution rotor 2531 that can rotate around an axis in the front-to-back direction, a first distribution solenoid 2532 (see Figure 137, etc.) for rotating the distribution rotor 2531 between a state in which the storage section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 faces right and a state in which it faces upward, a cylindrical peripheral wall section 2533 that covers the outer periphery of the distribution rotor 2531, and a distribution rotor 2532 that distributes the game ball B received in the bonus prize opening 2006 to the balls in the distribution rotor 2531. It is equipped with a first distribution guide path 2534 that penetrates the upper part of the rolling body 2531 and guides it to the upper outer peripheral surface of the distribution rotor 2531, a first loss opening 2535 that opens toward the rear at the bottom of the first distribution guide path 2534 and through which game balls B that are not contained in the storage section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 enter, and a first hit passage 2536 that penetrates the right part of the distribution rotor 2531 on the peripheral wall section 2533 and extends to the right, through which game balls B contained in the storage section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 circulate.

The distributing rotor 2531 has an outer circumferential surface formed in a truncated cone shape that narrows toward the rear. The right end of the first contact passage 2536 bends rearward and then downward to connect to the second distributing device 2540.

When the first distribution solenoid 2532 of the first distribution device 2530 is OFF (de-energized), the storage section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 faces to the right. In this state, when a game ball B received in the device winning opening 2006 passes through the first distribution guide path 2534 and comes into contact with the upper part of the outer circumferential surface of the distribution rotor 2531, the outer circumferential surface of the distribution rotor 2531 is formed in a truncated cone shape that narrows toward the rear. Therefore, the slope of the outer circumferential surface guides the game ball rearward, causing it to enter the first losing opening 2535.

On the other hand, when the first distribution solenoid 2532 is ON (energized), the distribution rotor 2531 rotates counterclockwise, and the storage section 2531a faces upward (see Figure 122 (a)). In this state, when a game ball B received in the special device winning opening 2006 passes through the first distribution guide path 2534, only one is stored in the storage section 2531a. When a game ball B is stored in the storage section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 and another game ball B is guided by the first distribution guide path 2534 from the special device winning opening 2006 side, the game ball B will come into contact with the game ball B stored in the storage section 2531a and then enter the first losing opening 2535 at the rear. Game ball B that enters the first loss opening 2535 is handed over to the rear right ball discharge unit 3130 of the light guide plate performance unit 3100 in the rear unit 3000, and after being detected by the first loss opening sensor 2515 provided in the rear right ball discharge unit 3130, is discharged onto the board holder 1200.

When a game ball B is stored in the storage section 2531a, the first distribution solenoid 2532 rotates the distribution rotor 2531 clockwise, causing the storage section 2531a to face to the right. The game ball B stored in the storage section 2531a rolls from the storage section 2531a to the right toward the first hit passage 2536, and flows through the first hit passage 2536. The game ball B that has flowed through the first hit passage 2536 is sent to the next second distribution device 2540.

In this way, the first distribution device 2530 can distribute the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2006 to either the second distribution device 2540 side or the first losing opening 2535 side.

As shown in Figures 117 and 120, the second sorting device 2540 is located below the first sorting device 2530 and behind the exit of the guide passage group 2520. The second sorting device 2540 is located behind the first sorting guide path 2534 and first hitch passage 2536 of the first sorting device 2530.

As shown in FIG. 122, the second sorting device 2540 is equipped with a second sorting guide path 2541 that extends vertically and through which game balls B that are stored in the storage section 2531a of the sorting rotor 2531 in the first sorting device 2530 and sorted to the first winning path 2536 circulate, a first V winning opening 2007 that opens on the right side of the lower part of the second sorting guide path 2541, a first V winning passage 2542 that extends rightward from the first V winning opening 2007 and then downward, and a first V winning opening sensor 2514 that is provided within the first V winning passage 2542 and detects game balls B received in the first V winning opening 2007.

The second sorting device 2540 also includes a second loss port 2543 that opens upward at the lower end of the second sorting guideway 2541, a sorting door 2544 that is located above the second loss port 2543 and can open and close the second loss port 2543, a second sorting solenoid 2545 that moves the sorting door 2544 back and forth to open and close the second loss port 2543, and a second loss passage 2546 that extends to the left from the second loss port 2543 and then bends downward. The sorting door 2544 is flat and moves back and forth, and is inclined so that the right side is lower.

When the second distribution solenoid 2545 of the second distribution device 2540 is OFF (de-energized), the distribution door 2544 is retracted and the second loss port 2543 is open upward. In this state, when a game ball B from the first distribution device 2530 flows down the second distribution guide path 2541, it enters the second loss port 2543 and is sent through the second loss passage 2546 to the third distribution device 2550.

On the other hand, when the second sorting solenoid 2545 is ON (energized), the sorting door 2544 advances above the second losing port 2543, and the second losing port 2543 is closed by the sorting door 2544, preventing the acceptance of game ball B. In this state, when game ball B from the first sorting device 2530 flows down the second sorting guide path 2541, it abuts the top surface of the sorting door 2544 and is guided to the right by the inclination of the sorting door 2544, entering (being accepted by) the first V winning port 2007. Then, game ball B that enters first V winning port 2007 flows through first V winning passage 2542, is detected by first V winning port sensor 2514, and is then discharged onto board holder 1200 via rear right ball discharge unit 3130 of light guide plate performance unit 3100 in rear unit 3000.

When a game ball B from the first distribution device 2530 is received by the first V winning opening 2007 and detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the big winning opening 2005 of the attacca unit 2400 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern, resulting in a "big win game." This second distribution device 2540 can be seen from the front through the transparent guide passage group 2520.

In this way, the second sorting device 2540 can sort the game balls B stored in the storage section 2531a of the sorting rotor 2531 in the first sorting device 2530 to either the first V winning port 2007 or the second losing port 2543 (third sorting device 2550) side.

As shown in Figures 120 and 122, the third sorting device 2550 is provided above the stage 2503 within the frame of the center device 2500. The third sorting device 2550 is connected to the lower end of the second loss passage 2546 of the second sorting device 2540 and is equipped with a crank-shaped third sorting guide path 2551 that guides game balls B to the left, a third sorting detection sensor 2552 that is provided midway along the third sorting guide path 2551 and detects game balls B circulating therethrough, and a downwardly recessed container-shaped crane 2553 that is provided above the stage 2503 within the frame of the center device 2500 and into which game balls B guided by the third sorting guide path 2551 are supplied.

The third sorting device 2550 also includes a sorting rotor 2554 rotatably mounted around a vertical axis in the center of the top surface of the crane in a plan view, a third sorting drive motor 2555 (see Figure 115) mounted below the crane 2553 and rotating the sorting rotor 2554, a second V winning port 2008 opening at the front end of the peripheral wall of the crane 2553, third losing ports 2556 opening on both the left and right sides of the second V winning port 2008 on the peripheral wall of the crane 2553, and a third sorted ball discharge passage 2557 which distinguishes between game balls B received in the second V winning port 2008 and the third losing port 2556 and guides them downward.

Furthermore, although not shown, the third sorting device 2550 is equipped with a spur gear-shaped rotating gear that rotates integrally with the sorting rotor 2554 below the crane 2553, a spur gear-shaped driven gear that meshes with the rotating gear, a flat plate-shaped detection piece that protrudes downward from near the periphery of the underside of the driven gear, and a third sorting rotation detection sensor that detects the detection piece.

The third distribution guideway 2551 extends downward a short distance from directly below the bottom end of the second loss path 2546, then bends to the left and extends to near the right end of the crane 2553, before bending downward into the crane 2553, forming a crank shape. This third distribution guideway 2551 is formed so as to release game ball B into the front right corner of the crane 2553 in a plan view. The third distribution detection sensor 2552 is located at the entrance to the third distribution guideway 2551.

The crane 2553 is shaped like a horizontally elongated oval dish, with the lowest point in the center. The distribution rotor 2554 has a pair of protrusions 2554a (see Figure 108, etc.) protruding perpendicular to the axis of rotation and a confetti-like decorative portion 2554b at the top, with multiple protrusions protruding from a sphere. The distribution rotor 2554 is constantly rotated in a fixed direction by the third distribution drive motor 2555, and a third distribution rotation detection sensor monitors whether the distribution rotor 2554 is rotating. When the distribution rotor 2554 is rotating and a game ball B in the crane 2553 contacts the protrusions 2554a, the game ball B is bounced toward the peripheral wall of the crane 2553. The third loss holes 2556, located on both the left and right sides of the second V winning opening 2008, are each the same size as the second V winning opening 2008.

In the third sorting device 2550, the sorting rotor 2554 in the center of the crane 2553 is constantly rotated by the third sorting drive motor 2555. When a game ball B is sorted to the second loss port 2543 by the second sorting device 2540, it is supplied to the crane 2553 from the second loss passage 2546 through the third sorting guide path 2551. At that time, the game ball B being supplied to the crane 2553 is detected by the third sorting detection sensor 2552. Based on the detection of the game ball B by this third sorting detection sensor 2552, an effect corresponding to the sorting of the game ball B by the crane 2553 is executed.

Game ball B supplied to the crane 2553 from the third distribution guideway 2551 circles (circulates) within the crane 2553 while narrowing its turning radius, and when it comes into contact with the protrusion 2554a of the distribution rotor 2554, it is bounced toward the peripheral wall of the crane 2553. When game ball B is bounced forward by the distribution rotor 2554, it will enter (be accepted by) either the second V winning port 2008 or one of the two third losing ports 2556. With this third distribution device 2550, game ball B is distributed to the second V winning port 2008 with a 1/3 probability.

A game ball B that enters the second V winning port 2008 is handed over to the bottom back ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate presentation unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 via the third ball distribution discharge passage 2557, and after being detected by the second V winning port sensor 3003 provided in the bottom back ball discharge unit 3120, is discharged onto the board holder 1200. On the other hand, a game ball B received in the third loss port 2556 is handed over to the bottom back ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate presentation unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 via the third ball distribution discharge passage 2557, and after being detected by the third loss port sensor 3004 provided in the bottom back ball discharge unit 3120, is discharged onto the board holder 1200.

In this way, the third distribution device 2550 can distribute the game ball B distributed to the second loss port 2543 by the second distribution device 2540 to either the second V winning port 2008 or the third loss port 2556.

[5-8f. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the game area 5a will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 117, 120 to 124, etc. When assembled on the game board 5, the center role device 2500 is located to the upper right of the center of the game area 5a. Within the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in areas to the left and below the center role device 2500, and in an area between the attacca unit 2400 and the center role device 2500. In addition, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided to the left of the center role device 2500 and above the upper left side unit 2300.

The multiple obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center device 2500 are adjusted so that a game ball B driven into the left side of the center device 2500 will mainly enter the warp entrance 2501 of the center device 2500, the area to the right of the center of the windmill W, and also have a lower probability of entering the area to the left of the center of the windmill W.

The multiple obstacle nails N planted between the lower end of the guide passage group 2520 in the center device 2500 and the normal winning opening 2003 of the attacca unit 2400 are adjusted so that a game ball B that has circulated through the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 has the same probability of entering the first opening 2431 of the attacca right passage 2430, the normal winning opening 2003, or the left side of the normal winning opening 2003, and so that a game ball B that has circulated through the second guide passage 2522 has a higher probability of entering the normal winning opening 2003 or the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 than the first opening 2431 of the attacca right passage 2430.

In the play area 5a, a game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002 and shot upward from the left side along the periphery of the play area 5a. When a game ball B is shot into the play area 5a so that it flows along the left side of the center device 2500, as shown in FIG. 117, the multiple obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center device 2500 will guide the game ball B to enter either the warp entrance 2501 of the center device 2500 or a section to the right of the center of the windmill W, and with a lower probability of being guided to enter a section to the left of the center of the windmill W.

A game ball B guided to the left of the center of the windmill W is guided to the right by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. It may then be received by one of the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. A game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then handed over to the rear bottom ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate presentation unit 3100 in the rear unit 3000, where it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and discharged onto the board holder 1200. When a game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a bonus of a predetermined number of game balls B is awarded. A game ball B guided to the left of the center of the windmill W is almost never received by the first starting opening 2002. Any game balls B that are not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 are discharged from the outlet 1008 outside the game area 5a.

A game ball B guided to the right of the center of the windmill W may be guided toward the center in the left-right direction (first starting hole 2002) by multiple obstacle nails N arranged diagonally along the bottom edge of the center device 2500, and may be received by the first starting hole 2002. Furthermore, a game ball B guided to the right of the center of the windmill W may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through the multiple obstacle nails N arranged diagonally, and may be received by the general winning hole 2001 of the side unit 2200.

Game ball B that enters (is accepted by) the warp entrance 2501 of the center device 2500 is supplied to the stage 2503 from the warp exit 2502. Game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls back and forth on the stage 2503 and is released forward from the center in the left-right direction. When game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central release section 2503a in the center of the stage 2503, there is a high probability that it will be accepted by the first starting opening 2002, as the central release section 2503a is located directly above the first starting opening 2002. When game ball B is released from the side release sections 2503b on either side of the central release section 2503a, there is a certain probability that it will be accepted by the first starting opening 2002.

A game ball B received by the first starting opening 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then handed over to the rear bottom ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate performance unit 3100 in the rear unit 3000, where it is detected by the first starting opening sensor 3002 and discharged onto the board holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first starting opening sensor 3002, a first special lottery result is drawn and a bonus is awarded, such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B. Game balls B released from the stage 2503 and not received by the first starting opening 2002 are discharged from the outlet 1008 outside the game area 5a.

In addition, game ball B to the left of the center device 2500 within the game area 5a has no chance of being received by the normal winning slot 2003 or the second starting slot 2004, and may, in rare cases, be received by the open big winning slot 2005.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the probability that a game ball B shot to the right side of the center device 2500 will be received by the second starting hole 2004 is set higher than the probability that a game ball B shot to the left side of the center device 2500 will be received by the first starting hole 2002.

In contrast to the above, with the gaming board 5 of this embodiment, when gaming ball B is hit with enough force to enter the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 (upstream space portion 2505) of the center role device 2500, gaming ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

Specifically, when game ball B is hit with enough force to strike the impact stop 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 that forms part of the periphery of the play area 5a (i.e., a right-handed hit), game ball B that strikes impact stop 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521 (see Figure 121 (a)). After entering this first guide passage 2521, game ball B rolls on the top surface of the special feature winning entrance door 2511 that closes the special feature winning entrance 2006 midway along the first guide passage 2521, and is then released from the right-hand exit at the bottom end of the guide passage group 2520 toward the attacker unit 2400 below.

The game ball B released downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is guided by multiple obstacle nails N planted between it and the attacker unit 2400 so that it will enter either the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430, the regular winning opening 2003, or the area to the left of the regular winning opening 2003 with equal probability.

On the other hand, when game ball B is hit into the upstream space portion 2505 and enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the second guide passage 2522, it is twisted backward and aligned in the front-to-back direction with the first guide passage 2521 at the overlapping portion 2520a, and then twisted forward and released from the left exit of the first guide passage 2521 toward the attacker unit 2400 below.

The game ball B released downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is guided by multiple obstacle nails N planted between it and the attacker unit 2400 to enter either the normal winning opening 2003 or the area to the left of the normal winning opening 2003, and in rare cases, is guided to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

Then, a game ball B that enters the attacker right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal prize opening 2003 is released onto the lower right rail 1004 from the release opening 2435, which is below the special prize opening 2005, and is discharged outside the game area 5a from the outlet 1008. Furthermore, a game ball B that enters the normal prize opening 2003 is detected by the normal prize opening sensor 2401 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by this normal prize opening sensor 2401, a normal lottery is held and a bonus such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is awarded.

Furthermore, a game ball B that enters the area to the left of the normal winning opening 2003 will then come into contact with several obstacle nails N and flow down onto the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421. Note that a game ball B that enters the area to the left of the normal winning opening 2003 may occasionally pass through the second opening 2432 between the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and enter the attacca right passage 2430. Then, a game ball B that flows down onto the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 will pass between the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 and flow down onto the special winning opening guide shelf 2424.

At this time, if game ball B is received by normal winning port 2003 and a "normal win" is drawn as the normal lottery result, second starting port 2004 will be open in a predetermined pattern, and game ball B that passes between second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 and second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 may be received by second starting port 2004. When game ball B is received by second starting port 2004, it is detected by second starting port sensor 2402 and then ejected onto board holder 1200, outside game area 5a. When game ball B is detected by second starting port sensor 2402, a second special lottery result is drawn and a bonus is awarded, such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out.

Game ball B that flows down onto the large prize opening guide shelf 2424 through the gap between the second start opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second start opening left standing wall portion 2422 is released from the left end of the large prize opening guide shelf 2424 to an area above the large prize opening 2005. When game ball B is released from the large prize opening guide shelf 2424, if game ball B is received by the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 and a "jackpot" is drawn as the first or second special lottery result, or if game ball B is received by the first V prize opening 2007 or the second V prize opening 2008, large prize opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so there is a high probability that game ball B released to the left from the large prize opening guide shelf 2424 will be received by the large prize opening 2005.

A game ball B received by the large prize opening 2005 is detected by the large prize opening sensor 2403 and then ejected onto the board holder 1200 outside the play area 5a. When the large prize opening sensor 2403 detects the game ball B, a bonus of a predetermined number of game balls B is awarded. Note that if a game ball B released toward the attacker unit 2400 through the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is not received by any of the normal prize opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, or the large prize opening 2005, it is ejected from the outlet 1008 at the bottom of the play area 5a, to the rear and below the game panel 1100, outside the play area 5a.

Note that while the above description is of a right-handed hit, game ball B that is hit with enough force to fly over the entrance to the second guide passage 2522, which opens near the right end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510, will also enter the first guide passage 2521, resulting in the same result as above.

As described above, due to the multiple obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the attacker unit 2400, a game ball B that has circulated through the second guide passage 2522 is more likely to be accepted by the normal winning port 2003 than through the first guide passage 2521.

When game ball B is received by first starting port 2002 or second starting port 2004 and a "small win" is drawn as the first special lottery result or second lottery result, device winning port 2006 located midway through first guide passage 2521 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and the distribution rotor 2531 of first distribution device 2530 and distribution door 2544 of second distribution device 2540 operate in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, when a "small win" is drawn, device winning port 2006 opens and closes, and the player can perform a "right hit" so that device winning port 2006 can receive game ball B and circulate game ball B through first guide passage 2521 in which device winning port 2006 is located.

In this embodiment, the probability of a "small win" being drawn is higher than that of a "big win," and three patterns are set for a "small win": "First Small Win," "Second Small Win," and "Third Small Win." In each pattern, the bonus prize opening 2006 opens and closes roughly twice.

First, the opening and closing of the bonus prize opening 2006 for each "small win" will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 123, the "first small win" begins after a certain time (3000 ms) has elapsed since the start of execution, with the bonus prize opening 2006 opening for a short time (80 ms), then closing, and after a short time (1252 ms), opening again for a short time (80 ms) before closing, completing the game. The "second small win" begins after a certain time (3000 ms) has elapsed since the start of execution, with the bonus prize opening 2006 opening for a short time (80 ms), then closing, and after a longer time (5420 ms) than the "first small win," opening for a longer time (9414 ms), before closing, completing the game. For the "third small win", after a certain amount of time (3000 ms) has elapsed since the start of execution, the prize winning port 2006 opens for a short time (80 ms), then closes, and after a longer time (19366 ms) than for the "second small win", it remains open for a longer time (9404 ms) before closing and completing the game.

The second opening of the bonus prize winning port 2006 in the "first small win" begins after the start of execution and the completion of the "first small win." Also, the second opening of the bonus prize winning port 2006 in the "third small win" begins after the start of execution and the completion of the "second small win."

In Figure 123, during the second long open state in the "second small win" and "third small win", the open state is repeated eight times (80 ms) at regular intervals (1252 ms). In other words, the bonus prize opening 2006 opens and closes (is in the open state) twice in the "first small win" and nine times in the "second small win" and "third small win".

Next, in the event of a "small win," the distributing rotor 2531 of the first distributing device 2530 rotates counterclockwise upon start of execution, entering the first storage state with the storage section 2531a facing upward for a predetermined time (3020 ms), then rotates clockwise with the storage section 2531a facing right and entering the unstorable state, after which it enters the second storage state for a longer time (13446 ms) than the first time, enters the unstorable state for a short time (500 ms), then enters the third storage state for the same time as the second (13446 ms), before entering the unstorable state.

The first accommodating state of this distribution rotor 2531 ends midway through the first open state of the special device winning port 2006 during a "small win", and the distribution rotor 2531 enters an unaccommodating state. Furthermore, the distribution rotor 2531 enters a second accommodating state after the time from the start of execution until the "first small win" is completed. Therefore, during a "first small win", control of the distribution rotor 2531 ends before the second accommodating state is entered, and the second and third accommodating states are not executed. The second accommodating state of this distribution rotor 2531 begins before the second open state of the special device winning port 2006 during a "second small win", and the distribution rotor 2531 enters an unaccommodating state after the second open state becomes a closed state.

In addition, the distribution rotor 2531 enters the third storage-ready state after the time from the start of execution until the completion of the "second small win." Therefore, in the event of a "second small win," control of the distribution rotor 2531 ends before the third storage-ready state is reached, and the third storage-ready state is not executed. In other words, the distribution rotor 2531 enters the storage-ready state once for the "first small win," twice for the "second small win," and three times for the "third small win." The third storage-ready state of this distribution rotor 2531 begins before the second opening of the bonus prize winning port 2006 in the "third small win," and it enters the storage-ready state after the second opening state ends and the opening state closes.

Next, in the event of a "small win", the operation of the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 is to protrude forward at the same time as execution begins, closing the second losing port 2535 for a predetermined time (3020 ms) and entering a first closed state (a state in which distribution to the first V winning port 2007 is possible), then retract and enter an open state in which the second losing port 2535 is open (a state in which distribution to the third distribution device 2550 is possible), and after the predetermined time (23006 ms) has passed, enter a second closed state for a longer time (13446 ms) than the first open state, before returning to the open state.

The first closing state of this distribution door 2544 ends partway through the first opening state of the special feature winning opening 2006 in the event of a "small win", and the distribution door 2544 then opens. Furthermore, the second closing state of the second distribution device 2540 begins partway through the second opening state of the special feature winning opening 2006 in the event of a "third small win", and the distribution door 2544 changes from a closed state to an open state after the second opening state of the special feature winning opening 2006 has become closed. Therefore, in the second distribution device 2540, the second closing state of the distribution door 2544 is executed only in the event of a "third small win", and the second closing state of the distribution door 2544 is not executed in the event of a "first small win" or "second small win".

For this reason, in the "first small win," the opening and closing of the device winning port 2006 is executed twice in a short period of time, so it is unlikely that game ball B circulating through the first guide passage 2521 due to a "right hit" will be accepted by the device winning port 2006. Furthermore, in the "second small win" and "third small win," the first opening state of the device winning port 2006 is also short, so it is unlikely that game ball B will be accepted by the device winning port 2006. Furthermore, the time during which the first storage-capable state of the distribution rotor 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 overlaps with the first open state of the bonus prize opening 2006 during a "small win" is shorter than the time during which the bonus prize opening 2006 is first open, so it is even less likely that game ball B received by the bonus prize opening 2006 when it is first open will be stored in the storage section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531. Furthermore, because the time at which the first storage-capable state of the distribution rotor 2531 ends and the first closed state of the distribution door 2544 in the second distribution device 2540 end are the same, game ball B stored in the storage section 2531a when the distribution rotor 2531 is first storage-capable will not be sorted toward the first V prize opening 2007.

On the other hand, the second opening of the device winning port 2006 in the "second small win" and "third small win" takes a long time, so there is a high possibility that game ball B will pass through the first guide passage 2521 and be received by the device winning port 2006. At this time, the distribution rotor 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 is in a state where it can be accommodated before the device winning port 2006 opens, and then becomes in a state where it cannot be accommodated after the device winning port 2006 changes from an open state to a closed state. Therefore, there is a high possibility that game ball B received by the device winning port 2006 in the second open state will be received in the storage section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531.

In this way, in this example, not only is it unlikely that game ball B will be accepted by the device winning port 2006 when it is in its first open state during the "second small win" and "third small win", but it is even less likely that game ball B accepted by the device winning port 2006 when it is in its first open state will be accommodated in the storage section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531. However, at the same time as the small win game state begins to be executed, the distribution rotor 2531 rotates counterclockwise to place the storage section 2531a in an upwardly facing, capable of being accommodated, and after having the storage section 2531a facing upward for a predetermined period (3020 ms), it rotates clockwise to place the storage section 2531a in an unacceptable, facing rightward, state. In other words, immediately after the start of the small hit game state, the distribution rotor 2531 is unlikely to distribute game ball B to the first hit passage 2536, but the distribution rotor 2531 performs an operation to distribute game ball B to the first hit passage 2536, thereby indicating the distribution operation by the distribution rotor 2531 in advance.

Similarly, immediately after the start of the small win game state, the distribution rotor 2531 is unlikely to distribute game ball B toward the first winning passage 2536, but as soon as the small win game state begins, the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 extends forward to close the second loss port 2535, enabling distribution to the first V winning port 2007, and after a predetermined time (3020 ms) has elapsed, it retreats and opens the second loss port 2535, enabling distribution to the third distribution device 2550. In other words, immediately after the start of the small win game state, the distribution door 2544 is unlikely to distribute game ball B toward the first V winning port 2007, but the distribution door 2544 performs the operation of distributing game ball B toward the first V winning port 2007, thereby indicating the distribution operation by the distribution door 2544 in advance.

In this example, the distribution rotor 2531 and distribution door 2544 operate simultaneously with the start of the small hit game state, i.e., during the performance of the presentation at the start of the small hit game state (the opening presentation of the small hit game state, in which an explanation of the game in the small hit game state, such as "Aim for the special prize opening 2006," is given), and special prize opening 2006 opens for the first time after the operation of the distribution rotor 2531 and distribution door 2544. This reduces the possibility of distribution of game ball B to the first hit passage 2536 side by the distribution rotor 2531 and distribution of game ball B to the first V prize opening 2007 side by the distribution door 2544. Furthermore, if there is no possibility, or an extremely low possibility, of the distribution rotor 2531 distributing game ball B to the first winning passage 2536 side and the distribution door 2544 distributing game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007 side, then the device winning opening 2006 may be opened for the first time simultaneously with the operation of the distribution rotor 2531 and the distribution door 2544.

Also, only one of the distribution rotor 2531 and the distribution door 2544 may be operated in advance, while the other is not. That is, some of the multiple movable parts (distribution rotor 2531, distribution door 2544) that distribute game balls that have entered the bonus prize opening 2006 may be operated in advance to perform the distribution operation, while the other movable parts may not be operated in advance. For example, the distribution door 2544, which has a high probability of causing game balls to enter the V prize opening (in this example, the first V prize opening 2007) when operated (high V prize expectation), may not be operated in advance, and only the distribution rotor 2531, which has a lower probability of causing game balls to enter the V prize opening (in this example, the second V prize opening 2008) than the distribution door 2544 (low V prize expectation), may be operated in advance. This allows players to know in advance which of the allocation destinations of a game ball that enters the variable winning slot 2006 will be, but the other allocation destinations remain unknown. When the other allocation destinations are revealed, the player is surprised by the increased number of allocation destinations, which increases their sense of anticipation. It also allows players to focus on the game balls that are allocated and enjoy their movement, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, by not operating the movable part (distribution door 2544) with a high probability of winning a V prize in advance, its existence is concealed, leading the player to believe that the game ball will enter the third distribution device 2550. When a third small win is executed, the movable part (distribution door 2544) with a high probability of winning a V prize is activated, causing the game ball to enter the V prize opening (first V prize opening 2007 in this example), adding an element of surprise and increasing the player's interest in the game by the game ball entering an unexpected allocation destination. Furthermore, by concealing the allocation to the first V prize opening 2007, the player can be led to believe that there are only two allocation destinations: the first loss opening 2535 and the third distribution device 2550. This prevents the player from being disappointed even if a second small win, which has a lower probability of winning a V prize than the third small win, is executed and the game ball is allocated to the third distribution device 2550.

In addition, in this example, the distribution rotor 2531 is positioned in a manner that allows it to be easily seen by the player, whereas the distribution door 2544 is flat and moves back and forth on the gaming board 5, with a small front surface area, making it difficult for the player to notice its operation even when it is in motion. Furthermore, the passage on the side of the first V winning opening 2007, which becomes accessible when the distribution door 2544 protrudes forward, is difficult for the player to notice. Therefore, when the third small win occurs and the distribution door 2544 operates to allow the gaming ball to enter the first V winning opening 2007, the behavior of the gaming ball is difficult to notice, giving the player the sensation that a V win has suddenly occurred and a 15R jackpot has been executed, without the player realizing that the gaming ball has entered the first V winning opening 2007.

In addition, by operating the distribution rotor 2531 in advance during the opening performance of the small win game state, in addition to the instructions in the opening performance, such as "aim for the special prize slot 2006," the operation of the distribution rotor 2531 also allows the player to easily recognize the destination of the shot, i.e., the position to aim for during the small win game state.

When a "small win" is drawn as described above and the device winning port 2006 opens, game ball B that has flowed down the first guide path 2521 is received by the device winning port 2006, detected by the device winning port sensor 2513, and then sent to the first distribution guide path 2534 of the first distribution device 2530. When game ball B is detected by the device winning port sensor 2513, a bonus such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is awarded.

Of the "small wins," in the case of a "second small win," when the device winning port 2006 is opened for the second time, the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 is also open. Therefore, when the distribution rotor 2531 rotates from a storage state to an unstorage state, the game ball B stored in the storage section 2531a flows through the first hit passage 2536, down the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540, and from the second loss port 2543 at the bottom, flows through the second loss passage 2546, and is sent to the third distribution device 2550.

The game ball B sent to the third distribution device 2550 is detected by the third distribution detection sensor 2552, then passed through the third distribution guide path 2551 and supplied onto the crane 2553, where it rotates. It is then bounced off the distribution rotor blades 2554, which are constantly rotating due to the third distribution drive motor 2555, and is received into either the second V winning port 2008 or one of the two third losing ports 2556. The game ball B received into the second V winning port 2008 is then passed through the third distribution ball discharge passage 2557 to the rear lower ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate performance unit 3100 in the rear unit 3000, where it is detected by the second V winning port sensor 3003 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. Meanwhile, game ball B received by third losing opening 2556 is passed through third ball discharge passage 2557 to rear lower ball discharge unit 3120 of light guide plate performance unit 3100 in rear unit 3000, where it is detected by third losing opening sensor 3004 and discharged onto board holder 1200. When game ball B is detected by second V winning opening sensor 3003, a special bonus is awarded in which large winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern.

In contrast, in the "third small win," when the device winning port 2006 is opened for the second time, the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 is closed. Therefore, when the distribution rotor 2531 rotates from the accommodating state to the unaccommodating state, game ball B stored in the storage section 2531a flows through the first hit passage 2536, down the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540, and comes into contact with the upper surface of the closed distribution door 2544, being guided to the right, and enters (is accepted by) the first V winning port 2007. After entering the first V winning port 2007, game ball B passes through the first V winning passage 2542 and is detected by the first V winning port sensor 2514, and is then discharged onto the board holder 1200 via the rear right ball discharge unit 3130 of the light guide plate performance unit 3100 in the rear unit 3000. When game ball B is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, a special bonus is awarded in which the large winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern.

For this reason, in order to open or close the large prize opening 2005 of the attacca unit 2400, it is necessary to receive game ball B into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 and draw a first or second special lottery result such as a "small win" or a "big win." When game ball B is shot so that it flows down the left side of the center device 2500, there is a chance that it will be received by the first start opening 2002, but there is no chance that it will be received by the second start opening 2004.

On the other hand, when game ball B is hit so that it flows down the right side of the center device 2500, there is a guide passage group 2520 consisting of two passages, a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522, on the right side of the center device 2500, and even if it passes through either passage, there is a chance that it will be accepted into the normal winning port 2003 which opens and closes the second starting port 2004.However, if a ``right hit'', which is easier to hit, is performed and the game ball flows through the first guide passage 2521, there is a possibility that it will enter the attacker right passage 2430, where it will be sent to the outlet 1008 without having a chance to be accepted into the normal winning port 2003, etc., and therefore, in order to allow game ball B to flow through the second guide passage 2522, the strength of the hit of game ball B must be adjusted. Furthermore, in order for the second starting port 2004 to accept game ball B, it is necessary to have the normal winning port 2003 accept game ball B and derive the normal lottery result of a "normal win," so the probability of accepting game ball B is lower at the second starting port 2004 than at the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, under normal conditions, the player can perform an operation to shoot game ball B so that game ball B flows down the left side of the center device 2500 so that game ball B is accepted by the first starting opening 2002. This allows the player to enjoy the original gameplay of the pachinko machine 1 by seeing the movement of game ball B being guided by multiple obstacle pins N, and also heightens the player's anticipation for game ball B to be accepted by the first starting opening 2002.

When game ball B is received into first starting opening 2002 and a "small win" is drawn as the first special lottery result, special prize opening 2006 opens and closes. Therefore, to allow game ball B to be received into special prize opening 2006, the operation for inserting game ball B can be changed to "right-hand hit" and game ball B can be inserted into first guide passage 2521 where special prize opening 2006 is located, thereby heightening anticipation for game ball B to be received into special prize opening 2006.

Even if game ball B shot into the right side of the center device 2500 is not accepted by the device winning opening 2006, it may still be accepted by the downstream normal winning opening 2003, and furthermore, it may be accepted by the second starting opening 2004, which is opened depending on the normal lottery result drawn when game ball B is accepted by the normal winning opening 2003, and there is also a possibility that a "small win" or "big win" may be drawn as the second special lottery result.

When a game ball B is shot into this first guide passage 2521 and received by the bonus prize opening 2006, it is sent to the first distribution device 2530, making the player's heart race as they wait for whether or not the game ball B will be received in the receiving section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531.

When a game ball B sent to the first sorting device 2530 is received in the storage section 2531a of the sorting rotor 2531, the game ball B is sent to the next second sorting device 2540, so the player can be excited and thrilled as to whether the game ball B will be sorted into the first V winning port 2007 or the second losing port 2543 by the second sorting device 2540. Even if the game ball B is sorted into the second losing port 2543 by this second sorting device 2540, the game ball B is sent through the second losing passage 2546 to the third sorting device 2550, which is equipped with the second V winning port 2008, so that anticipation for the second V winning port 2008 is built up and a decline in interest is prevented.

The game ball B sorted to the second losing port 2543 by the second sorting device 2540 is supplied to the crane 2553 of the third sorting device 2550, and rotates on the crane 2553. When the game ball B is bounced toward the peripheral wall by the central sorting rotor 2554 of the crane 2553, it creates suspense and excitement for the player depending on whether or not it will be accepted by the second V winning port 2008, providing a lot of fun for the player.

When game ball B is received by first V winning slot 2007 or second V winning slot 2008, or when a "jackpot" is drawn as the first or second special lottery result due to the reception of game ball B by first starting slot 2002 or second starting slot 2004, the large winning slot 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, providing an opportunity for many game balls B to be paid out. Therefore, game ball B can be shot at the right side of the center device 2500 so that game ball B is received by the large winning slot 2005 that is open or closed.

In this case, the probability of game ball B reaching the large prize opening 2005 is higher if it is circulated through the second guide passage 2522 than if it is circulated through the first guide passage 2521, so the player is encouraged to refrain from "hitting to the right" and can adjust the strength of their shot so that game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, allowing the player to enjoy the operation of shooting game ball B.

The guide passage group 2520 on the right side of the center device 2500 has an overlapping portion 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are aligned in the front-to-back direction. Looking at the overlapping portion 2520a, it is difficult to determine which passage game ball B is circulating through. This makes the player think that they should have hit the second guide passage 2522 but ended up entering the first guide passage 2521, drawing their attention to game ball B circulating through the guide passage group 2520. Furthermore, when game ball B is hit aiming for the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520, the player is excited to see whether game ball B will emerge from the exit of second guide passage 2522, heightening their anticipation for the game. Furthermore, if game ball B emerges from the unexpected exit of first guide passage 2521, it provides a sense of surprise and amusement for the player, preventing a decline in interest.

[5-8g. Another embodiment of the distribution passage group of the center accessory]
Next, a guide passage group 2520 of a center role device 2500 of an embodiment different from that described above will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 125 and 126. Figures 125(a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams showing an embodiment of a guide passage group different from that shown in Figure 117, and Figures 126(e) and (f) are explanatory diagrams showing an embodiment of a further different guide passage group. Note that in Figures 125 and 126, the same components as those described above are assigned the same reference numerals.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 125(a), compared to Figure 117, the upper end inlet of the second guide passage 2522 is spaced further to the left than the inlet of the first guide passage 2521. This guide passage group 2520 can also achieve the same effects as those described above.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 125 (b), the angle of the impact stopper 1006 in the component 1000 is changed so that a game ball B that comes into contact with it will easily bounce back toward the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, and the portion of the upper right peripheral wall 2510 between the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is inclined so that the second guide passage 2522 side (left side) is lower. This makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the second guide passage 2522 side, and therefore the range of adjustment for the impact strength of the game ball B entering the second guide passage 2522 is wider, making it easier to perform the operation of hitting the game ball B aimed at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 125(c), while the guide passage group 2520 in Figures 117, 125(a) and (b) has the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 opening upward, the upstream sides of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 extend to near the center in the left-right direction above the center role 2500, and the entrances open to the left, lined up one above the other.

In this embodiment, a portion of the outer rail 1001 (the periphery of the play area 5a) forms part of the first guide passage 2521, and a portion of the upper right peripheral wall 2510 forms part of the second guide passage 2522. Also, in this embodiment, the left-right length of the upstream space 2505 between the upper right peripheral wall 2510 and the outer rail 1001 (the periphery of the play area 5a) is the length from the left end of the upper right peripheral wall 2510 to the respective entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, which is narrower than the upstream space 2505 shown above in Figure 117, etc.

In this embodiment, in order for game ball B to enter the entrance of second guide passage 2522, it is necessary to hit game ball B with enough force to either hit the narrow portion of upper right peripheral wall 2510 to the left of the entrance of second guide passage 2522, or with enough force to enter directly into the entrance of second guide passage 2522 which opens to the left. Therefore, compared to embodiments such as FIG. 117, the adjustment range of the hitting force of game ball B is narrower. Also, if game ball B is hit into upstream space 2505 to the left of the entrances of first guide passage 2521 and second guide passage 2522 and hits the left end (the portion between the two entrances) of the wall separating first guide passage 2521 and second guide passage 2522, there is a possibility that game ball B may deviate from upstream space 2505 depending on the momentum and angle of the rebound to the left. In other words, even if game ball B is shot with enough force to enter the upstream space 2505, there is a possibility that it will deviate to the left from the upstream space 2505 and circulate to the left of the center device 2500 without entering either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522. Because of this, the difficulty of shooting game ball B increases, which increases the player's motivation to shoot game ball B and allows the player to enjoy shooting the game medium, preventing a decline in interest.

The embodiment shown in Figure 125(d) is the same as the embodiment in Figure 125(c), except that a branch section 2524 is provided midway along the first guide passage 2521, which is connected one-way to the second guide passage 2522. The branch section 2524 is provided directly above the section of the second guide passage 2522 that bends downward from the right end of the section (upper right peripheral wall section 2510) that extends left and right. In this embodiment, even if game ball B is hit with enough strength to enter the first guide passage 2521, depending on the hitting strength (if the hitting strength is weak), game ball B will branch off to the second guide passage 2522 at the branch section 2524, making it easier for game ball B to circulate through the second guide passage 2522 than in the embodiment in Figure 125(c).

In order to allow game ball B to enter the second guide passage 2522, it is necessary to hit the ball with a force weaker than that of game ball B entering the first guide passage 2521. Furthermore, because branch portion 2524, which is connected to the first guide passage 2521, is located above the portion of the second guide passage 2522 where it bends downward, game ball B that has entered the second guide passage 2522 will not bounce upward (toward branch portion 2524) at the portion where it bends downward, and will not enter the first guide passage 2521 through branch portion 2524. In other words, branch portion 2524 provides one-way communication from the first guide passage 2521 to the second guide passage 2522.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the entrance of the first guide passage 2521, which has a branching section 2524 along the way, and flows through the first guide passage 2521, it branches off at the branching section 2524 to either the first guide passage 2521 side or the second guide passage 2522 side. This keeps the player on the edge of their seats depending on which side the game ball B will branch off to at the branching section 2524, allowing them to enjoy the flow of the game ball B within the first guide passage 2521 and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the player shoots game ball B aiming for the second guide passage 2522, but game ball B enters the entrance to the first guide passage 2521, there is a possibility that it will branch off to the second guide passage 2522 at the branching point 2524 of the first guide passage 2521. Therefore, whether or not it will branch off to the second guide passage 2522 at the branching point 2524 can keep the player on edge and entertain them. In addition, if it branches off to the second guide passage 2522 at the branching point 2524, any mistake in the player's shooting operation is covered and game ball B will flow through the desired second guide passage 2522, making the player feel like they have made a profit and preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 126 (e), the second guide passage 2522 has a bypass section 2525 that crosses the frame of the center device 2500. In this embodiment, the entrance to the second guide passage 2522 opens upward at a position to the left of the left end of the upper right peripheral wall section 2510. Therefore, all game balls B that are hit into the upstream space section 2505 above the upper right peripheral wall section 2510 will flow through the first guide passage 2521. According to this embodiment, when game ball B enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the bypass section 2525, the game ball B crosses the frame of the center device 2500, making the flow of game ball B noticeable to the player. This makes it possible for the player to believe that something good will happen after game ball B flows through the bypass section 2525, and allows the player to perform an operation to shoot game ball B, aiming for the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 which has the bypass section 2525. This makes the operation of shooting game ball B enjoyable and prevents a decline in interest.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 126 (f), the entrance to the second guide passage 2522 is provided behind the first guide passage 2521, with the entrances aligned in the front-to-back direction. The entrance to the first guide passage 2521 is provided forward of the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, and the entrance to the second guide passage 2522 is provided rearward of the front surface of the gaming panel 1100. In this embodiment, the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 is inclined to the rear right near the impact stop portion 1006 of the front component 1000 in the upstream space portion 2505, so that a gaming ball B circulating along the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 is guided toward the second guide passage 2522. Furthermore, the impact stopper 1006 of the front component 1000 is inclined so that the portion near the entrance to the first guide passage 2521 moves to the right as it moves rearward, allowing a game ball B that is hit with force toward the entrance to the first guide passage 2521 to be reflected toward the entrance to the second guide passage 2522. In this embodiment, the entrances to the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 appear to be aligned and overlapping in the front-to-back direction, making it difficult to determine which passage a game ball B that is hit into the upstream space 2505 above the center role device 2500 has entered, attracting the player's attention.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the rear unit]
The overall configuration of the rear unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 113 to 116. The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and has a peripheral control unit 1500 and an effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side.

The rear unit 3000 is equipped with a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects game balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, a first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects game balls B received in the first starting opening 2002 provided in the starting opening unit 2100, a second V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects game balls B received in the second V winning opening 2008 of the center device 2500, and a third losing opening sensor 3004 that detects game balls B received in the third losing opening 2556 of the center device 2500 (see Figure 137).

The rear unit 3000 also includes a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a locking mechanism 3020 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 for detachably attaching the performance display device 1600.

The rear unit 3000 also includes an out ball detection unit 3030 that detects game balls B (game balls B for which no special bonus has been awarded) that have been inserted into the game area 5a and not accepted by the general winning slot 2001, first starting slot 2002, regular winning slot 2003, second starting slot 2004, large winning slot 2005, or special winning slot 2006, a light guide plate presentation unit 3100 provided at the front end of the rear box 3010, and a rear presentation unit 3200 provided within the rear box 3010 behind the light guide plate presentation unit 3100.

The rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 is box-shaped and open at the front, with a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall, a flat frame-like LCD mounting section 3010b that protrudes rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed leftward from the inside of the frame on the left side of the LCD mounting section 3010b into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the performance display device 1600 is inserted, and a notch 3010d cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 near the center of the right side of the LCD mounting section 3010b in the left-right direction, into which the locking mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a of the rear box 3010 is formed to be approximately the same size as the display screen of the performance display device 1600. The LCD mounting section 3010b is also formed to be large enough to fit the performance display device 1600 into the frame. A locking mechanism 3020 is attached to the rear box 3010, slidable up and down, to the left of the cutout section 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from behind.

The rear box 3010 also has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from its front end. This fixing piece 3010e is attached to the gaming panel 1100 with its front surface abutting the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100. The rear box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes formed in appropriate positions for attaching the light guide plate performance unit 3100, rear performance unit 3200, etc.

[5-9a. Out ball detection unit]
Next, the out ball detection unit 3030 in the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 127 to 131. Figure 127(a) is a front view of the out ball detection unit in the rear unit, (b) is a right side view of the out ball detection unit, (c) is a rear view of the out ball detection unit, (d) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit from the front, (e) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit from the rear, (f) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit from a position near the lower right front, and (g) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit from the lower right rear. Figure 128(a) is an exploded perspective view of the out ball detection unit from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the out ball detection unit from the rear.

Figure 129 (a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the game panel and the out ball detection unit, and (b) is a perspective view showing the out ball detection unit in contact with the game panel. Figure 130 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the device assembled to the game board, cut vertically at the center of the right out port sensor, and viewed from the right side. Figure 131 is a perspective view of the area around the out port from the front when assembled to the game board.

The out ball detection unit 3030 of the rear unit 3000 is intended to detect game balls B (game balls B for which no special prize has been awarded, also referred to as "out balls") that have been shot into the game area 5a and not accepted by the general prize opening 2001, first start opening 2002, regular prize opening 2003, second start opening 2004, large prize opening 2005, or special prize opening 2006. In this embodiment, it detects game balls B discharged from the out opening 1008. This out ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the front of the rear bottom ball discharge unit 3120 in the light guide plate performance unit 3100.

The out ball detection unit 3030 is inserted from the rear into the out recess 1101 of the gaming panel 1100 and comprises a unit body 3031 attached to the front of the light guide plate performance unit 3100, an out left sensor 3032 and an out right sensor 3033 attached to the unit body 3031, and a cover 3034 attached to the unit body 3031 so as to cover the rear sides of the out left sensor 3032 and the out right sensor 3033.

The unit main body 3031 is inserted into the outlet recess 1101 of the gaming panel 1100 and includes a cylindrical tube portion 3031a extending in the front-to-rear direction, a partition portion 3031b dividing the interior of the tube portion 3031a into left and right sections, a flange portion 3031c protruding in a flat plate shape in the left-to-right direction from the rear end of the tube portion 3031a, and an insertion recess 3031d recessed forward from the rear end of the tube portion into which the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033 are inserted. The front end of the tube portion 3031a is approximately the same size as the outlet 1008 in the previous component 1000, is long in the left-to-right direction, and the lower inner surface is inclined so that it slopes downward toward the rear.

The partition 3031b is located near the rear end of the tubular portion 3031a, and divides the area on both the left and right sides to a size that allows one game ball B to pass through. The front end of the partition 3031b is curved so that it protrudes forward as it extends downward, and protrudes forward by a distance shorter than the diameter of the game ball B. The insertion recess 3031d is inclined so that it moves rearward as it extends upward, so that the front side is perpendicular to the inclined inner surface on the lower side of the tubular portion 3031a.

The left outlet sensor 3032 detects game balls B that have flowed along the left side of the partition 3031b within the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit body 3031. The right outlet sensor 3033 detects game balls B that have flowed along the right side of the partition 3031b within the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit body 3031. The left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033 are non-contact electromagnetic proximity switches.

The cover 3034 is curved so as to guide the game ball B downward after passing through the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033, and has a partition plate 3034a in the center in the left-right direction.

The flange portion 3031c of the unit body 3031 of this out ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the front surface of the back-bottom ball discharge unit 3120 of the light guide plate presentation unit 3100 (see Figure 130). Furthermore, when the out ball detection unit 3030 is assembled to the gaming board 5, the tubular portion 3031a of the unit body 3031 is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the gaming panel 1100, and the front surface of the flange portion 3031c abuts against the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100 (see Figures 129 and 130).

When the out ball detection unit 3030 is assembled to the game board 5, the upper front end of the tubular portion 3031a of the unit body 3031 protrudes further forward than the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 of the previous component 1000 (see Figure 130). In other words, the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 is inserted into the tubular portion 3031a of the unit body 3031. In addition, the lower end of the cover 3034 passes through the discharge portion 1201 of the board holder 1200 and protrudes downward below the underside of the board holder 1200 (see Figure 130).

This out ball detection unit 3030 detects game ball B within the game area 5a, after it flows down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the previous component 1000 and is guided rearward by the out guidance section 1003. The game ball B is then supplied into the tubular section 3031a, detected by either the left outlet sensor 3032 or the right outlet sensor 3033, and discharged downward by the cover 3034. The out ball detection unit 3030 discharges game ball B toward the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, without allowing it to come into contact with the board holder 1200.

The out ball detection unit 3030 of this embodiment can detect game balls B ("out balls") that are shot into the game area 5a and are not accepted by any of the general winning slot 2001, first starting slot 2002, regular winning slot 2003, second starting slot 2004, large winning slot 2005, and special winning slot 2006. Therefore, for example, if game balls B are continuously detected being accepted by a specific winning slot but no "out balls" are detected, this means that fraudulent activity is being committed at that specific winning slot, and it is possible to notify the user that fraudulent activity is occurring.

In addition, since the number of "out balls" can be counted by detecting them, the ratio of "safe balls" in the pachinko machine 1 can be determined from the number of "safe balls" and the number of "out balls" counted by detecting game balls B accepted by the general winning slot 2001, first starting slot 2002, regular winning slot 2003, second starting slot 2004, large winning slot 2005, and special winning slot 2006.

Furthermore, in the out ball detection unit 3030, the left out sensor 3032 and the right out sensor 3033 provided on the left and right sides are separated by a partition section 3031b, so that game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center device 2500 can be guided toward the left out sensor 3032, and game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center device 2500 can be guided toward the right out sensor 3033.This allows the left out sensor 3032 to mainly detect game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center device 2500, and the right out sensor 3033 to mainly detect game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center device 2500. Therefore, based on the number of game balls B detected per unit time by the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033, it is possible to determine whether the player tends to "hit left" or "hit right." Based on this determination, the player is prompted to perform the optimal hitting operation for the game situation, allowing the player to enjoy the game as intended.

In addition, the forward protrusion of the partition 3031b is shortened to make it easier for game balls B to climb over. Therefore, when a large number of game balls B enter the outlet 1008 per unit of time, the game balls B can escape to the left or right side of the partition 3031b, where there is a relatively small amount of game balls B circulating, and the game balls B can be discharged without stagnation at the outlet 1008.

In addition, because the lower end of the cover 3034 protrudes downward below the discharge section 1201 of the board holder 1200, game ball B ("safe ball") received by the general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, normal winning opening 2003, second starting opening 2004, large winning opening 2005, and special winning opening 2006 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 is prevented from flowing back through the out ball detection unit 3030 and being detected by the out opening left sensor 3032 or the out opening right sensor 3033, allowing only the "out balls" to be accurately detected.

In this embodiment, the out ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the back unit 3000, but this is not limited to this, and the out ball detection unit 3030 may also be attached to the gaming panel 1100. In this case, if the gaming panel 1100 has an out recess 1101, the out ball detection unit 3030 can be attached. Therefore, it is compatible with existing gaming panels 1100 that have an out recess 1101, and can be retrofitted to existing gaming boards 5.

Furthermore, if the game board 5 is configured to detect all game balls B ("all balls") that are shot into the game area 5a, or all game balls B ("all balls") that are ejected from the game area 5a, the out ball detection unit 3030 only detects "out balls," so by comparing the respective numbers of "out balls," "safe balls," and "all balls," it is possible to detect the occurrence of ball jams within the game board 5.

[5-9b. Light guide panel production unit]
Next, the light guide plate performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 132 to 134. Figure 132(a) is a perspective view of the light guide plate performance unit of the rear unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the light guide plate performance unit as seen from the back. Figure 133 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the pattern substrate in the light guide plate performance unit from the front. Figure 134(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the first pattern on the light guide plate is illuminated, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the second pattern on the light guide plate is illuminated.

The light guide plate performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 is attached to the front end of the rear box 3010. The light guide plate performance unit 3100 comprises a square frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the rear box 3010, a transparent flat light guide plate 3102 attached to the unit base 3101, a first pattern board 3103 attached to the unit base 3101 above the light guide plate 3102 and equipped with multiple LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the top surface of the light guide plate 3102, and a second pattern board 3104 attached to the unit base 3101 to the left of the light guide plate 3102 and equipped with multiple LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the left side of the light guide plate 3102.

The light guide plate performance unit 3100 also includes a transparent plate-shaped diffusion lens 3105 located between the first pattern substrate 3103 and the light guide plate 3102, a back decorative body 3106 with a relief-like decoration on the front surface that is attached to the upper edge of the unit base 3101 so as to cover the front of the first pattern substrate 3103 and the diffusion lens 3105, and a strip-shaped left substrate cover 3107 attached to the left edge of the unit base 3101 so as to cover the front of the second pattern substrate 3104.

The light guide plate performance unit 3100 is attached to the lower front part of the unit base 3101, and is connected to the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200, and the second V winning port 2008 and third losing port 2556 of the third distribution device 2550 in the center role 2500. The light guide plate performance unit 3100 is attached to the lower front part of the unit base 3101, and is connected to the lower right side of the unit base 3101. It is equipped with a back right ball discharge unit 3130 that receives game balls B received in the first losing port 2535 and the first V winning port 2007 in 2500 and discharges them downward, a cooling fan 3140 that is attached to the back bottom ball discharge unit 3120 and that cools the third distribution drive motor 2555 of the center device 2500, and a magnetic sensor (not shown) that is provided behind the warp entrance 2501 in the center device 2500 and that detects magnetic fields that may act fraudulently.

The light guide plate 3102 has a first pattern 3102a (see Figure 134(a)) formed by countless uneven first reflective portions that reflect only light from above forward, and a second pattern 3102b (see Figure 134(b)) formed by countless uneven second reflective portions that reflect only light from the left forward. In other words, the light guide plate performance unit 3100 can illuminate the first pattern 3102a when the LED on the first pattern substrate 3103 is illuminated, and can illuminate the second pattern 3102b when the LED on the second pattern substrate 3104 is illuminated.

The light guide plate 3102 has numerous first reflective portions that form the first pattern 3102a and numerous second reflective portions that form the second pattern 3102b, each with finely formed irregularities. When the LEDs on the first pattern substrate 3103 and the second pattern substrate 3104 are not illuminated, the light guide plate 3102 appears transparent, allowing the display images displayed on the rear display unit 3200 and display display device 1600 of the rear unit 3000 located at the rear to be clearly visible.

As shown in Figure 134(a), the first image 3102a is a design that resembles the area around one eye of a specific character, in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. Also, as shown in Figure 134(b), the second image 3102b is a design consisting of the words "CHANCE!"

The light guide plate 3102 also has a lower notch 3102c cut out from the bottom edge upward, and a right notch 3102d cut out from the right edge to the left. The lower notch 3102c is designed to prevent contact with the crown 2553 of the third distribution device 2550 in the center role device 2500, and the right notch 3102d is designed to prevent contact with the second guide passage 2522 twisted backward in the guide passage group 2520 of the center role device 2500.

The first pattern substrate 3103 is divided into three sections in the left-right direction. The second pattern substrate 3104 is divided into two sections in the top-bottom direction. The multiple LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 and the second pattern substrate 3104 are full-color LEDs.

The back-bottom ball discharge unit 3120 is provided with a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects game balls B received in the general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects game balls B received in the first starting opening 2002, a second V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects game balls B received in the second V winning opening 2008, and a third losing opening sensor 3004 that detects game balls B received in the third losing opening 2556.

The bottom-bottom ball discharge unit 3120 can discharge game balls B received in the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second V winning port 2008, and the third losing port 2556 onto the board holder 1200. An out ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the front of this bottom-bottom ball discharge unit 3120.

[5-9c. Backstage Production Unit]
Next, the rear performance unit 3200 in the rear unit 3000 will be described, mainly with reference to Figure 113 etc. The rear performance unit 3200 is attached inside the rear box 3010, behind the light guide plate performance unit 3100. When viewed from the front, the rear performance unit 3200 has multiple hemispherical decorative bodies surrounding the opening 3010a of the rear box 3010. Behind these decorative bodies, a decorative board is provided on which multiple LEDs capable of emitting light forward are mounted. Therefore, by appropriately illuminating the LEDs on the decorative board, the multiple decorative bodies can be illuminated, allowing the player to see the illuminated effects created by the decorative bodies.

[5-10. Effects on the game board]
Next, the main effects on the gaming board 5 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 135 and 136. Figure 135 is a front view of the gaming board showing a state in which the second pattern is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate effect unit of the rear unit. Figure 136 is a front view of the gaming board showing a state in which the first pattern is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate effect unit of the rear unit. In the gaming board 5, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 and the rear effect unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 perform predetermined light-emitting effects in accordance with the results of the first and second special lotteries that are drawn when gaming ball B is received in the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004.

Specifically, as an illumination effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, multiple LEDs mounted on the second image substrate 3104 located on the left side of the light guide plate 3102 when viewed from the front are illuminated to illuminate and decorate the second image 3102b. As a result, the word "CHAHCE!" is illuminated and decorated in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, suggesting to the player that a chance is coming, making them think that something good might happen, increasing their anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, as an illumination effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. 136, multiple LEDs mounted on a first pattern substrate 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102 are illuminated to illuminate and decorate the first pattern 3102a. This causes the eyes of a specified character, in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, to be illuminated in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, surprising the player and making a strong impact on the player, as well as making them believe that a favorable gaming state such as a "jackpot game" is about to occur, thereby increasing anticipation for the game.

In addition, with the gaming board 5 of this embodiment, the light-emitting effects of the light guide plate 3102 as described above can be combined as appropriate with the light-emitting effects of the decorative body, and can also be combined with the effect images (display effects) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. As a result, by appropriately combining light-emitting effects, display effects, etc., a variety of different patterns of effects can be presented to the player, preventing the player from getting bored and allowing the player to be entertained by various effects, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

6. Control Configuration
Next, the control configuration for various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 137 . FIG. 137 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main frame 4, with each board performing its own control. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during game play based on commands from the main control board 1310, and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the display of effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633 a that controls the payout of game balls B, and a launch control unit 633 b that controls the launch of game balls B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but is equipped with a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that has built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and RAM for temporarily storing data, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit for driving various solenoids, a setting display 1310g for displaying setting values and errors, and a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of game balls collected through the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. In addition to its built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a also has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and functions for preventing fraud.

In addition to its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), the main control MPU 1310a also has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The main control MPU 1310a also has built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code (a code that exists only once in the world) assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual unit. Once assigned, this ID code cannot be rewritten, even using an external device, because it is stored in non-volatile RAM. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve and reference the ID code from the non-volatile RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a also incorporates a circuit that forcibly resets itself via hardware when it is affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of certain registers in the main control MPU 1310a, and if the register contents change to inconsistent values, it forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a, indicating that it has been affected by electrical noise. This forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be disabled by user program control. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power-off processing described below, and it will again execute the main control side power-on processing described below. In this case, because the main control side power-off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error will inevitably occur in the main control built-in RAM, as described below, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased (cleared). Furthermore, even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by its built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a does not output a reset signal to the dispensing control board 633, so only the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) restarts, and the dispensing control board 633 remains activated.

The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in hardware random number circuit") that uses hardware to update the jackpot determination random numbers used to determine whether or not a jackpot game state will occur, among the various random numbers related to the game. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value to 65,535 as the maximum value is pre-set), and is configured so that the pre-set value is not fixed as the initial value (i.e., the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as its initial value and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping, based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the main control MPU 1310a). Once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping, based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs this rapid lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit at the time it obtains a value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as the random number for determining a jackpot.

The main control input circuit does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals, which are detection signals from various sensors, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown). In other words, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit in which information based on detection signals from various sensors input to its various input terminals is not reset by a main control system reset, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects a game ball B received in the first start opening 2002, a second start opening sensor 2402 that detects a game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a regular winning opening sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B received in the regular winning opening 2003, a large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects a game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005, a special winning opening sensor 2513 that detects a game ball B received in the special winning opening 2006, a first V winning opening sensor 2514 that detects a game ball B received in the first V winning opening 2007, and a game ball B received in the first losing opening 2535. Detection signals from the first loss port sensor 2515, the second V entry port sensor 3003 that detects game ball B received by the second V entry port 2008, the third loss port sensor 3004 that detects game ball B received by the third loss port 2556, the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033 that detect game ball B received by the outlet 1008, the magnetic sensor 2010 that detects illegal magnetism within the game area 5a, the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033 that detect either game ball B collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5, etc. are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

In addition, a detection signal from the setting key 1311a on the setting change board 1311 is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. In addition, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z on the dispensing control board 633 is also input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The RWM clear button 633z functions as a RAM clear switch to completely erase information stored in designated areas of the RAM built into the dispensing control MPU, which is a microprocessor equipped on the dispensing control board 633, and the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a equipped on the main control board 1310; an error reset switch to reset an error displayed on the error LED indicator; and a setting switch button to select and switch a setting value. Therefore, the signals input from the RWM clear button 633z to the main control board 1310 include a signal (RAM clear signal) that indicates RAM clear as a RAM clear switch, a signal (error reset signal) that indicates that an error has been reset as an error reset switch, and a signal (setting value selection switch signal) that indicates setting value selection and switching as a setting switch. However, while the main control board 1310 monitors the input of the RAM clear signal and the setting value setting change signal, which are important signals related to itself, it does not monitor the input of the error reset signal, which is the subject of control handled by the dispensing control board 633, which is not related to itself.

In addition, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a and the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b are input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633 (i.e., directly, without passing through the dispensing control input circuit 633ab and the dispensing control output circuit 633ac, described below), and then input to the input terminals of the specified input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the first start opening sensor 3002 and the second start opening sensor 2402 are input directly to the main control board 1310, without passing through any other boards, and are then input to the input terminals of designated input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. In contrast, the detection signals from the general prize opening sensor 3001, regular prize opening sensor 2401, first receiving opening sensor 2406, special prize opening sensor 2403, magnetic sensor 2010, left outlet sensor 3032, and right outlet sensor 3033 are input indirectly to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and are then input to the input terminals of designated input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of its specified output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby outputting respective drive signals from the main control solenoid drive circuit to the start port solenoid 2412, attacca solenoid 2414, special prize port solenoid 2512, first distribution solenoid 2532, and second distribution solenoid 2545 via the panel relay board 1710, i.e. indirectly, and outputting respective drive signals from the output terminal of its specified output port to the status indicator, normal pattern indicator, normal hold indicator, first special pattern indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special pattern indicator, second special hold number indicator, and round indicator of the function display unit 1400 directly, i.e. without going through other boards. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a also outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of a specified output port, thereby outputting the drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z on the setting change board 1311.

The main control MPU 1310a also outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information related to the game (game information) from the output terminal of its specified output port, outputs a signal (power outage clear signal) to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e by outputting a signal (power outage clear signal) from the output terminal of its specified output port, and outputs a launch permission signal indicating that the launch of game ball B is permitted to be performed to the payout control board 633 by outputting a launch permission signal from the output terminal of its specified output port. The logic of this launch permission signal indicating that the launch is permitted is set to launch permission logic when the launch is permitted, and is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the launch permission logic when the launch is not permitted. The logic of the firing permission signal is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the initial value (default) is set to firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the firing permission logic from the time the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (or restored) until the firing permission signal setting process in the main control timer interrupt process described below begins.

In this embodiment, the first start gate sensor 3002, second start gate sensor 2402, regular prize gate sensor 2401, special prize gate sensor 2403, special prize gate sensor 2513, first V prize gate sensor 2514, first loss gate sensor 2515, second V prize gate sensor 3003, third loss gate sensor 3004, left outlet sensor 3032, and right outlet sensor 3033 use non-contact electromagnetic proximity switches, whereas the regular prize gate sensor 3001 uses a contact ON/OFF mechanical switch. This is because game ball B frequently enters the first start gate 2002, second start gate 2004, and regular prize gate 2003, and therefore game ball B is frequently detected by the first start gate sensor 3002, second start gate sensor 2402, and regular prize gate sensor 2401. For this reason, the first start opening sensor 3002, second start opening sensor 2402, and regular winning opening sensor 2401 use highly durable, long-life proximity switches.

Furthermore, when a favorable game state (such as a "jackpot" game) occurs that is advantageous to the player, the large prize opening 2005 opens and game ball B frequently enters, so game ball B is also frequently detected by the large prize opening sensor 2403. For this reason, a highly durable, long-life proximity switch is used for the large prize opening sensor 2403. Furthermore, game balls B launched into the game area 5a are collected in large quantities by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a, which is partitioned off on the game board 5, so game ball B is frequently detected by the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033. For this reason, highly durable, long-life proximity switches are used for the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033. In contrast, the general prize opening 2001, where game ball B does not frequently enter, is not frequently detected by the general prize opening sensor 3001. For this reason, a mechanical switch, which has a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch, is used for the general winning opening sensor 3001. However, regardless of whether game balls B frequently enter the general winning opening 2001, a highly durable, long-life proximity switch may also be used.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various information related to games (game information) and various commands related to payouts to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of game presentations and various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. When the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, it formats these commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511, as will be explained in detail later.

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630, which supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310, is equipped with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as the "main control side capacitor") as a backup power source to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. This main control side capacitor allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control's built-in RAM during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The various information stored in a specified area of the main control's built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) from the main control's built-in RAM when a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation section of the RWM clear button 633z on the dispensing control board 633 has been operated is input to the main control MPU 1310a when the power is turned on.

The main control board 1310 is also equipped with a power outage monitoring circuit. This power outage monitoring circuit monitors drops in the various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and when these voltages fall below the power outage warning voltage, it outputs a power outage warning signal to warn of a power outage. This power outage warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the dispensing control board 633, etc.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of game balls B, etc., is equipped with a payout control unit 633a which performs various controls related to payout, a launch control unit 633b which controls launch using the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed using the ball feed solenoid 145, an error LED indicator which displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, and an RWM clear button 633z which has a push operation unit which serves multiple functions. The RWM clear button 633z has the function of a RAM clear switch which completely erases the information stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built into the payout control MPU which is a microprocessor provided on the payout control board 633 and the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a which is a microprocessor provided on the main control board 1310, the function of an error reset switch which resets the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and the function of a setting switch which selects and switches the setting value.

The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch is limited to the RAM clear determination period from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the period from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on until the main control MPU 1310a starts the main control side power-on processing described below and makes the determination in step S14 of that processing).

The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button is limited to the period from when the RAM clear determination period has elapsed to when the setting switching is valid (the period from when the RAM clear determination period has elapsed until the main control MPU 1310a determines, during the setting change process in step S37 of the main control side power-on process described below, that the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 has rotated the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, returning the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the decision key ON to its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF)).

The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as an error reset switch becomes valid after the RAM clear determination period and the setting change valid period have elapsed. Note that during the RAM clear determination period and the setting change valid period, even if a signal indicating that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is input to the dispensing control unit 633a (dispensing control MPU, described below), it is disabled.

As mentioned above, the period during which the RWM clear button 633z functions as a setting switching button is limited to the valid setting switching period after the RAM clear determination period has elapsed. However, during this valid setting switching period, the main control MPU 1310a continues to monitor the rotational position of the setting key cylinder inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311 during the setting change processing in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing described below after the RAM clear determination period has elapsed. As a result, the interrupt permission setting (step S52 of the main control side power-on processing) to allow the start of the main control side timer interrupt processing described below cannot be performed, and the fraud detection processing in step S112 of the main control side timer interrupt processing described below cannot be performed. In other words, the valid setting switching period is a period during which fraud detection is disabled.

During this setting change valid period, i.e., the period during which fraud cannot be detected, there is a risk that a fraudster may make some kind of fraudulent change to the setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311.

In this embodiment, as described above, to access (operate) the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the main frame 4 must first be opened widely (nearly 90 degrees) relative to the outer frame 2 to ensure sufficient space for the rear cover 640 to be opened so that it can cover the rear side of the gaming board 5. As a result, during the setting change valid period, i.e., the period during which fraudulent activity cannot be detected, the main frame 4 is opened widely (nearly 90 degrees) relative to the outer frame 2. Therefore, if any fraudulent tampering is attempted with the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the fraudulent activity will be extremely noticeable in the gaming hall, and therefore such fraudulent activity countermeasures can be implemented. This can therefore contribute to preventing fraudulent activity.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The dispensing control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to dispensing on the dispensing control board 633, is equipped with a dispensing control MPU, which is a microprocessor that has built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, RAM for temporarily storing data, etc. (detailed illustrations are omitted), a dispensing control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the dispensing control MPU is operating normally, a dispensing motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 584 of the dispensing device 580, and a dispensing control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches related to dispensing are input.

In addition to its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in payout control RAM") and built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in payout control ROM"), the payout control MPU also has built-in watchdog timers (hereinafter referred to as "built-in payout control WDT") that monitor its operation (system), as well as functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various game-related information (game information) and various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 via a payout control I/O port serially, and receives a signal via the payout control I/O port indicating that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated. In addition, it also receives detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, and detection signals from the ball out detection sensor 574, payout detection sensor 591, and blade rotation detection sensor 590. The signal indicating that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is also output to the main control board 1310.

Detection signals from the ball out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the dispensing control input circuit and input to the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control I/O port.

In addition, detection signals from the door frame opening switch, which detects the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, and the main frame opening switch, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, are input to the dispensing control input circuit and input to the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control I/O port.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the fall cover unit 150, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, and the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 are input to a designated input port of the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal to drive the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O to the payout motor 584, outputs a signal to display the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator via the payout control I/O port to the error LED indicator, serially transmits commands indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port, and outputs the number of game balls B actually paid out to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's play by keeping track of the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information for the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display that displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The error LED display may display and notify the following: For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633), when the number "1" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "ball out" (specifically, that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580 based on the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574), when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "ball stuck" (specifically, that there is a game ball B stuck between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589 based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, making it difficult for the payout blade 589 to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it indicates that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that there is a game ball B stuck between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589 based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590). When the number "5" is displayed, it indicates a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit); when the number "6" is displayed, it indicates a "full" state (specifically, that the tank is full with game balls B stored in the fault cover unit 150 based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154); when the number "7" is displayed, it indicates a "CR not connected" state (that an electrical connection has been cut somewhere between the payout control board 633 and the CR unit); and when the number "9" is displayed, it indicates a "stocking" state (specifically, that the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a preset number).

The ball loan request signal for game balls B from the ball loan button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be loaned in accordance with the ball loan request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and input to the payout control MPU. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance on the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls B loaned, and outputs a signal displaying the remaining balance to the ball loan operation unit 220. This signal is input to and displayed on the ball loan display unit of the ball loan operation unit 220.

Various voltages are supplied to the dispensing control board 633 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630, which supplies various voltages to the dispensing control board 633, is equipped with an electric double-layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as the "dispensing control capacitor") as a backup power source to supply power to the dispensing control board 633 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. This dispensing control capacitor allows the dispensing control MPU to store various information in the dispensing control's built-in RAM during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The various information stored in a specified area of the dispensing control's built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) from the dispensing control's built-in RAM when a signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is input to the dispensing control MPU when the power is turned on. This signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is also output to the main control board 1310.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The launch control unit 633b controls launch by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various launch-related detection switches are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching game balls B toward the play area 5a based on this clock signal, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and a ball delivery solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball delivery solenoid 145 based on the launch reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the play area 5a per minute and outputs it to the launch solenoid drive circuit, and also generates a ball delivery reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the launch reference pulse and outputs it to the ball delivery solenoid drive circuit.

With regard to the handle unit 180, the detection signals from the handle touch sensor 192, which detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182, and the single button operation sensor 194, which detects whether the player intends to forcibly stop the launch of game ball B, are input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. Furthermore, when the CR unit and CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the detection signals are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then to the launch timing control circuit. A launch permission signal from the main control board 1310, which indicates permission to launch game ball B, is input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the strength with which game ball B is launched toward the play area 5a depending on the rotation position of the handle 182, is input to the launch solenoid drive circuit.

The launch timing control circuit will not output a launch reference pulse to launch game ball B toward the play area 5a unless launch condition 1 is met, that is, the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192; launch condition 2 is met, that the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected based on the CR connection signal; and launch condition 3 is met, that the launch of game ball B is permitted based on a launch permission signal from the main control board 1310.As a result, for example, the launch solenoid drive circuit will not output a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 and game ball B will not be able to be launched.

Based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this launch solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive current to the launch solenoid 542 when a launch reference pulse is input, to launch the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength that corresponds to the rotational position of the handle 182. Meanwhile, when a ball delivery reference pulse is input, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145, thereby accepting one game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 into the ball feed unit 140, and when the input of the ball delivery reference pulse ends, the constant current output is stopped, thereby sending the accepted game ball B to the ball launching device 540. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is controlled to a constant value.

In this embodiment, the launch control unit 633b, which controls launch using the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery using the ball delivery solenoid 145, is provided on the payout control board 633, but it may also be configured to be provided on the power supply board 630. In this case, the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be input directly to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board (not shown).

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 137, the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a performance display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control unit 1511.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but is equipped with a peripheral control IC in which a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces are integrated on a single semiconductor chip, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC that produces high-quality sound, and a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referenced by this sound source IC.

The peripheral control IC has multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on a single semiconductor chip. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, based on these various commands, transmits game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board via the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700 to each decorative board of the game board 5, or transmits game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to the drive motors that operate the various performance units provided on the game board 5 from the serial I/O port for the game board decoration drive board via the panel drive board 1720. and transmits it to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5; door-side drive light-emitting data composed of door-side drive data for outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 and operation button lift drive motor 367 etc. provided on the door frame 3, and door-side light-emitting data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs etc. provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3; control data (display commands) indicating the screen to be displayed on the performance display device 1600 is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the display control unit to the performance display control unit 1512; and control signals (sound commands) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM are output to the sound source IC.

The detection signal from the third distribution detection sensor 2552 of the center role device 2500 provided on the game board 5 is input to the peripheral control IC via the panel drive board 1720. In addition, the detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, first rotation detection sensor 347, and second rotation detection sensor 348 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 indicating that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and monitors the operation of the performance display control unit 1512 based on this operation signal.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and controls the playback of music, sound effects, and other sounds associated with various performances from the vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, and main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4, which are mounted on the door frame 3 and main frame 4, respectively. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume control switch that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box housing the peripheral control board 1510. In this embodiment, sound signals (e.g., 2-channel stereo signals, 4-channel stereo signals, 2.1-channel surround signals, or 4.1-channel surround signals) are sent as sound information to the top center speaker 462 and top side speakers 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for bass sounds on the main frame 4, thereby providing more realistic sound effects (sound performances) than ever before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the peripheral control unit 1511 also has an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses both the built-in WDT and the external WDT to diagnose whether its own system is running out of control.

Display commands output from the CPU of this peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 are sent via a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (the amount of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is set to 19.2 kilobits per second (kbps). On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side light flashing commands, game board side light flashing commands, movable body drive commands, etc. output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 are sent via multiple serial input/output ports different from the display commands, and in this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

[6-3b. Production display control section]
The performance display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the performance display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (short for Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the performance display device 1600, an image ROM that stores various data for the screen displayed on the performance display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in this image ROM is transferred and copied.

This display control MPU has built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the drawing of the performance display device 1600. When the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to inform the same. The display control MPU also receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of this execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

In addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the performance display device 1600, the display control ROM also stores multiple items such as control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and corresponding schedule data, as well as non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to that control data (display commands). The schedule data consists of screen data that defines the screen configuration arranged in chronological order, and defines the order in which screens are drawn on the performance display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data consists of non-resident area transfer data arranged in chronological order that defines the order in which various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. This non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which various data is transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance, so that the screen data to be drawn on the performance display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is drawn.

The display control MPU extracts from the display control ROM the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts from the display control ROM the screen data following the first screen data and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the display control ROM, starting with the first screen data, and outputs it to the VDP.

When the VDP receives screen data output from the display control MPU, it extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the performance display device 1600, and outputs this generated drawing data to the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, when the performance display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to inform the latter. The VDP uses a line buffer system. This "line buffer system" is a system in which one line's worth of drawing data for drawing the left and right directions of the performance display device 1600 is stored in a line buffer, and the one line's worth of drawing data stored in this line buffer is output to the performance display device 1600.

Image ROM stores a large amount of sprite data, resulting in a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the performance display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM becomes significant and affects the speed at which data is drawn on the performance display device 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a fast access speed, and the sprite data is then extracted from this image RAM. Note that sprite data is the original data, which is the data before the sprite is expanded into bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

To explain what a "sprite" is, a "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the performance display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the performance display device 1600, the data used to draw each person is called a "sprite." As a result, when displaying multiple people on the performance display device 1600, multiple sprites are used. In addition to people, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be treated as a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the performance display device 1600 after their placement on the screen and their hierarchical relationship when sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as the "sprite overlapping order") are set.

A sprite is made up of multiple rectangular areas, each 64 pixels wide and 64 pixels long, glued together. The data used to draw these rectangular areas is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be represented using a single sprite character, while relatively large sprites such as people can be represented using a total of six sprite characters, arranged, for example, 2 wide and 3 high. Even larger sprites, such as backgrounds, can be represented using even more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be specified freely for each sprite.

The performance display device 1600 is driven by a main scan that sets the display state of each pixel sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front, and a sub-scan that repeatedly performs main scans in a direction that intersects with the one direction. When one line of drawing data output from the performance display control unit 1512 is input to the performance display device 1600, it outputs the data to each of the pixels in one line sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front of the performance display device 1600 as a main scan. Once the output of one line is complete, the performance display device 1600 moves on to the line directly below as a sub-scan, and when the drawing data for the next line is input in the same way, it outputs the data to each of the pixels in one line sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front of the performance display device 1600 as a main scan based on the drawing data for the next line.

[6-4. Mounting of SMD-type electronic components]
Here, we will explain measures to deal with discontinued electronic components. First, due to various circumstances surrounding pachinko machine 1, boards used as main boards, such as power supply boards, main control boards, and payout control boards, require lead-type electronic components to be mounted on the mounting surface on the front side and soldered on the solder surface on the back side. However, as mentioned above, lead-type electronic components are important for manufacturers of gaming machines such as pachinko machines, slot machines, and hybrid gaming machines, but other general electronics manufacturers use surface-mounted (so-called SMD) components that can be miniaturized. For this reason, a decrease in the production of lead-type electronic components may lead to discontinuation of production. Therefore, lead-type electronic components that can configure SMD-type electronic components as lead-type electronic components can be mounted on the mounting surface of boards used as main boards.

However, when configured as such a lead-type electronic component, the external shape (configuration) of the lead-type electronic component becomes larger than the external shape (configuration) of a lead-type electronic component, and protrusions may be formed on one or more of the components, resulting in a distorted external shape (configuration). When a lead-type electronic component with such an external shape (configuration) is mounted on the mounting surface of a board used as a main board, its relative position relative to other electronic components may be difficult to arrange on the board, making it difficult to configure some SMD-type electronic components as the above-mentioned lead-type electronic components. Therefore, in addition to such lead-type electronic components, it may be permitted to mount a limited number of SMD-type electronic components, such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs, on the mounting surface of a board used as a main board.

Here, the SMD-type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to Figures 138 to 141. Figure 138 (a) is an enlarged view of a portion of the area where SMD-type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and (b) is a view of this enlarged view from the right side of the main control board. Figure 139 (a) is a schematic diagram of the surface (mounting surface) of a board on which SMD-type electronic components that replace lead-type electronic components are aggregated in a predetermined area, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the surface (mounting surface) and back (soldering surface) of a board that has been miniaturized by aggregating SMD-type electronic components that replace lead-type electronic components. Figure 140 is an enlarged view of Figure 138 (a) showing the back (soldering surface) of the main control board. Figure 141 is a perspective view of the main control board box of the main control unit. Note that for clarity, various electronic components other than those necessary for explanation have been omitted from Figures 138 and 140.

The SMD-type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on main control board 1310 is a substitute with the same functionality as a lead-type Schmitt trigger inverter (DIP (Dual Inline Package) type), and is located on the surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310, in the area where this lead-type Schmitt trigger inverter is mounted. The SMD-type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on main control board 1310 is one of the main circuits that make up the main control input circuit, to which detection signals from the various sensors mentioned above are input. If the SMD-type Schmitt trigger inverter is removed from main control board 1310 by any fraudulent means, main control MPU 1310a of main control board 1310 will always determine that a ball has not been hit for sensors that indicate a ball has entered the game, and will always determine that fraud is occurring for sensors that indicate fraudulent activity such as the approach of a magnet or fraudulent vibration. The main control board 1310 is also equipped with multiple types of lead-type electronic components, such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs.

In this embodiment, green is used as the resist for the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are solidly coated with green resist, except for the various land patterns.

As shown in Figure 138(b), the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is equipped with an SMD-type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (hereinafter simply referred to as the "Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30") and a lead-type high-frequency bypass capacitor MC30 (hereinafter simply referred to as the "capacitor MC30") mounted near the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which can remove noise voltage generated by the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 itself. Note that the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 and capacitor MC30 have been omitted from Figure 138(a) for clarity.

The Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is a single SMD package in which six Schmitt trigger inverter circuits are integrated. In this embodiment, the SMD package of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is a SOP (Small On Package) with 14 pins.
The Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 employs an SMD package (hereinafter, the SMD package of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 may be referred to as "SOP14"). The Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 has seven leads that bend and protrude outward from two opposing sides of the SMD package body, with a lead-to-lead distance (so-called "lead pitch," 1.27 mm in this embodiment). After each lead is placed on a rectangular land pattern formed only on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, each lead is soldered to the rectangular land pattern formed only on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The width of each lead is 0.43 mm, and the width of the rectangular land pattern is 0.76 mm, which is larger than the width of each lead (the length of the rectangular land pattern is 1.27 mm). In this embodiment, the size of the SMD package body is 5.3 mm in width, 10.8 mm in length, and 1.5 mm in height, and including the length of the leads protruding from the two sides of the SMD package body, the width of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is 7.8 mm.

Although the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is soldered to the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, in order to mount lead-type electronic components on the main control board 1310, the back surface of the main control board 1310 is referred to as the solder surface and is referred to as the "back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310" (the same applies below).

Capacitor MC30 has two leads protruding from a rectangular body in a parallel, linear fashion toward the outside, with a lead-to-lead distance dimension (known as the "lead pitch", 5 mm in this embodiment). Ring-shaped land patterns (also called through holes; the same applies below) are formed on both surfaces (the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310, penetrating the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the two leads. The two leads are inserted from the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y. Then, the two leads protruding from the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are soldered to the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. The diameter of the two leads is 0.5 mm, and the inner diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is 0.7 mm, which is larger than the diameter of the two leads (the outer diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is 1.3 mm).

Face (mounting surface) 1310x of main control board 1310 is formed as a so-called solid earth, with the rest of the area being ground (GND) except for the areas where the wiring patterns for transmitting control signals, the wiring patterns for supplying power, and various land patterns are formed. Similarly, back surface (solder surface) 1310y of main control board 1310 is also formed as a so-called solid earth, with the rest of the area being ground (GND) except for the areas where the wiring patterns for transmitting control signals, the wiring patterns for supplying power, and various land patterns are formed. The solid earth formed on face (mounting surface) 1310x of main control board 1310 and the solid earth formed on back surface (solder surface) 1310y of main control board 1310 are electrically connected to each other via multiple through-holes (copper-plated holes that penetrate both surfaces (face (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface))) of main control board 1310) formed on both surfaces (face (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of main control board 1310) of main control board 1310, forming the same ground (GND). The diameter of the through-hole is 0.3 mm, which is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern. In addition to through-holes that connect the solid earth formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid earth formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to the same ground (GND), there are also several through-holes that are used to route various wiring patterns to both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310.

As shown in Figure 138(a), on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, an area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including orientation) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-screened in white (or black) solid lines. The part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is also silk-screened in white (or black) near and to the lower left of this area MSLKMIC30. Specifically, the area MSLKMIC30 indicates that the lead serving as terminal 1 of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 should be placed on the lower left, the lead serving as terminal 7 (ground (GND) terminal) on the lower right, the lead serving as terminal 8 on the upper right, and the lead serving as terminal 14 (power terminal) on the upper left, with the longitudinal direction of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 aligned horizontally in Figure 138(a).

The rectangular land patterns corresponding to the leads that form terminals 1 to 6 and terminals 8 to 13 of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are electrically connected to the wiring patterns that transmit the corresponding control signals, the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead that forms terminal 7 (ground (GND) terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is electrically connected to a solid earth formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead that forms terminal 14 (power terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is electrically connected to the wiring pattern that supplies power.

The surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30's package body is engraved with the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols, for example, "ABC") and product number (a catalog number, for example, "74XXYYZZ") or printed in a specific color (which varies by manufacturer). However, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is a small SMD package called SOP14, and because it is small, the surface area of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30's package body is small.

Furthermore, as will be described in detail below, the main control board 1310 is an important control board that controls the progress of the game. Therefore, it is necessary to protect the main control board 1310 from those who would tamper with it to obtain illegal game balls. For this reason, it is housed and sealed in a main control board box 1320, which is made up of a transparent cover body and a transparent base body and has multiple heat dissipation vents. These heat dissipation vents allow the air inside the main control board box 1320 to be released into the outside air.

As a result, when checking the product numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) of the various electronic components on the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and the front (mounting surface) side of the main control board 1310 is visually inspected through the transparent cover, the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) and product numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) engraved or printed on the surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 package body are small and difficult to see.

In this embodiment, an information area is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, near and to the right of the area MSLKMIC30 in Figure 138(a), and the part number (catalog number) MSLKMIC30p of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-screened in white (or black) within this information area so that it is easily visible compared to the part number (catalog number) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. Therefore, the part number (catalog number) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably seen.

The manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be silk-screened in white (or black) along with the product number (the number listed in the catalog). In this case, it is preferable that the silk-screened name be printed in white (or black) at a size that is easily visible compared to the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. This ensures that the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be clearly seen.

Furthermore, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, an area MSLKMC30 is silk-screened in white (or black) solid lines to indicate the position of capacitor MC30 (the orientation is not specified because capacitor MC30 has no polarity) so that it is located near the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead that will be terminal 14 (power terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. Additionally, near and to the upper right of this area MSLKMC30, a part number corresponding to capacitor MC30 is silk-screened in white (or black). Specifically, area MSLKMC30 indicates that one lead should be inserted into the upper ring-shaped land pattern electrically connected to the wiring pattern that supplies power, and the other lead should be inserted into the lower ring-shaped land pattern that forms a pair with the upper ring-shaped land pattern, so that the two leads of capacitor MC30 are oriented vertically in FIG. 138(a).

The wiring pattern to which the upper ring-shaped land pattern is electrically connected is also electrically connected to a rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead that serves as terminal 14 (power terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. In addition, the lower ring-shaped land pattern is electrically connected to a ground formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

Here, we briefly explain the advantages of mounting SMD-type electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of a board used as a main board. As mentioned above, SMD-type electronic components can be made smaller than lead-type electronic components. Therefore, the component mounting density when SMD-type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of a board can be significantly reduced compared to the component mounting density when lead-type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of a board. Therefore, when replacing SMD-type electronic components with the same functionality as the lead-type electronic components in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of a board on which the lead-type electronic components are mounted, the small size of the SMD-type electronic components allows for a larger perimeter area on the surface (mounting surface) of the board on which the SMD-type electronic components are mounted, as well as a larger area between the replaced lead-type electronic components (i.e., a mounting configuration of electronic components with large gaps between the replaced components on the surface (mounting surface) of the board). This allows SMD-type electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board to be visually inspected from multiple directions, making it possible to check for tampering with the SMD-type electronic components, the mounting state (soldering state) of the SMD-type electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of the board, and the state of various wiring patterns and land patterns on the SMD-type electronic components. Therefore, using SMD-type electronic components can contribute to making tampering more easily detectable.

In addition, since the area around the surface (mounting surface) of the board on which SMD-type electronic components are mounted can be increased, and the area between components where lead-type electronic components have been replaced with SMD-type electronic components can also be increased, the product number (catalog number) of the SMD-type electronic component can be silk-screened in white (or black) in these areas (board surface (mounting surface)) so that it is easily visible compared to the product number (catalog number) engraved or printed on the surface of the SMD-type electronic component's package body. The manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) can also be silk-screened in white (or black) along with this product number (catalog number). This contributes to easier recognition of SMD-type electronic components.

Furthermore, when an SMD-type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of a board, the distance between the back surface of the SMD-type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the board is extremely short (for example, in the case of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, the distance between the back surface of the component and the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is 0.1 mm to 0.2 mm). This creates the problem that even if someone attempts to create an unauthorized circuit in the gap between the back surface of the SMD-type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the board, it can be difficult to detect such an unauthorized circuit.

In this embodiment, the following configuration is adopted as a method for preventing any unauthorized circuitry from being formed in the gap between the back surface of the SMD-type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the board.

A configuration has been adopted in which no wiring patterns for transmitting control signals are placed on the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the SMD-type electronic component body. Specifically, as shown in Figure 138(a), a configuration has been adopted in which no wiring patterns for transmitting control signals are placed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 body (in other words, the area that passes under the body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30).

A configuration has been adopted in which the area on the surface (mounting surface) of the board that corresponds to the back surface of the SMD-type electronic component body does not have any wiring patterns that electrically connect to ground (GND) or that supply power. Specifically, as shown in Figure 138(a), the area on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 that corresponds to the back surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 body (in other words, the area that passes under the body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30) does not have any wiring patterns that electrically connect to ground (GND) or that supply power.

A configuration was adopted in which no through holes were placed on the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the SMD-type electronic components. Specifically, as shown in Figure 138(a), through holes MTH were placed at the top right and top left of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, and no through holes MTH were placed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the area passing through the lower part of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30). As described above, these through holes MTH are electrically connected via holes (copper-plated holes) that penetrate both sides of the main control board 1310 (the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface)), allowing them to share the same ground (GND). In addition to these through holes MTH, the main control board 1310 also has a number of through holes MTH' (not shown) for routing various wiring patterns on both sides (front side (mounting side) and back side (solder side)) of the main control board 1310; however, a configuration has been adopted in which none of these through holes MTH' are located in the area of the front side (mounting side) of the main control board 1310 that corresponds to the back side of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the area that passes under the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30).

A wiring pattern electrically connecting to one of the leads of an SMD-type electronic component is formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the SMD-type electronic component, and is not extended to the outside of the SMD-type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in Figure 138(a), the various wiring patterns for each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are not located at all in the surface (mounting surface) area of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, in the area that passes under the body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30), but are instead located from above or below the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

In order to shorten the wiring patterns electrically connecting one lead to another of the leads of the SMD-type electronic component, a configuration has been adopted in which no wiring patterns for transmitting control signals are placed on the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the SMD-type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in Figure 138(a), the various wiring patterns for each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are not placed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the area that passes under the body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30), but are instead placed from above or below the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

By soldering the leads of the SMD-type electronic components to rectangular land patterns formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, a configuration is adopted in which control signals cannot be extracted without passing through the wiring patterns electrically connected to the land patterns. Specifically, as shown in Figure 138(a), by soldering the leads of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 to rectangular land patterns formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, a configuration is adopted in which control signals cannot be extracted without passing through the wiring patterns electrically connected to the land patterns. In other words, a configuration is adopted in which control signals cannot be extracted from any location other than the leads of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

By adopting this configuration, it becomes difficult to fraudulently create new circuits, such as short-circuit circuits or open circuits, in the gap between the back surface of an SMD-type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the board. Furthermore, because various wiring patterns on SMD-type electronic components can be visually inspected, fraudsters who attempt to create fraudulent circuits in SMD-type electronic components can be discouraged. Therefore, fraudulent activities against SMD-type electronic components can be prevented.

Furthermore, by not placing any wiring patterns for transmitting control signals in the area on the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized IC (SMD type electronic component) from being mounted between the back surface of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component, and it is also possible to prevent control signals for SMD type electronic components and control signals for unauthorized other ICs from being combined and used in the area on the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component.

Furthermore, by not placing any wiring patterns that transmit control signals in the area on the surface (mounting surface) of the board that corresponds to the back surface of the SMD-type electronic component, it is possible to prevent the selection of an unauthorized other IC (SMD-type electronic component) that is easy to place between the back surface of the SMD-type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the board that corresponds to the back surface of the SMD-type electronic component and that allows for easy routing of control signals.

Furthermore, by forming the wiring pattern that electrically connects to one of the leads of an SMD-type electronic component in an area on the surface (mounting surface) of the board that corresponds to the back surface of the SMD-type electronic component body and not extending it to the outside of the SMD-type electronic component, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized use of control signals transmitted through this wiring pattern that is extended to the outside.

Furthermore, by soldering each lead of an SMD-type electronic component to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, control signals can be extracted without going through the wiring patterns electrically connected to the land pattern. This means that control signals cannot be extracted from any location other than the leads of the SMD-type electronic component, preventing unauthorized use of control signals transmitted through the wiring patterns.

Furthermore, in order to shorten the wiring patterns electrically connecting one lead to another among the leads of an SMD-type electronic component, no wiring patterns for transmitting control signals are placed on the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the SMD-type electronic component. By placing the wiring patterns electrically connected to the leads of the SMD-type electronic component from above or below the SMD-type electronic component, it is possible to prevent the formation of unauthorized circuits around the leads. Furthermore, for unused leads of an SMD-type electronic component (also called "empty terminals"), when they are electrically connected to a wiring pattern electrically connected to ground (GND) or to a wiring pattern that supplies power, they can be placed from above or below the SMD-type electronic component, thereby preventing the formation of unauthorized circuits around the empty terminals.

Furthermore, by not locating any through-holes in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board that corresponds to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component, it is possible to prevent unauthorized ICs (SMD type electronic components) from being mounted between the back surface of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the board that corresponds to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component, making it impossible to extract control signals via the through-holes, preventing unauthorized ICs from being fixed (soldered) to the through-holes, and preventing the through-holes from being used as passage holes to extract control signals from the back surface (solder surface) of the board to the surface (mounting surface).

In addition, by not placing any wiring patterns that electrically connect to ground (GND) or that supply power in the area on the surface (mounting surface) of the board that corresponds to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component, it is possible to prevent unauthorized ICs (SMD type electronic components) from being mounted between the back surface of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the board that corresponds to the back surface of the SMD type electronic component, and to prevent the SMD type electronic component from becoming a power source for unauthorized ICs.

Next, we will explain a configuration in which SMD-type electronic components are mounted in a concentrated manner on the surface (mounting surface) of a board treated as a main board. As mentioned above, SMD-type electronic components can be miniaturized, and by mounting them in a concentrated manner, the size of the board itself can also be reduced. Here, we will explain the main control board 1310 as the main board, and another configuration of the present invention in which measures are taken to improve the visibility of part numbers using SMD packages when the main control board 1310 is visually inspected while housed in the main control board box 1320 (hereinafter referred to as the "configuration for improving the visibility of part numbers using SMD packages according to the second and third embodiments"). Note that in Figures 139(a) and (b), components that perform the same functions as those in the embodiment shown in Figures 138(a) and (b) (hereinafter referred to as the "configuration for improving the visibility of part numbers using SMD packages according to the first embodiment") are designated by the same reference numerals, and the setting display 1310g, base monitor 1310h, etc., mentioned above, have been omitted for clarity of illustration.

[Comparison of the part number visibility measures for the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the part number visibility measures for the SMD package according to the second embodiment]

In the configuration for improving the visibility of the part number using an SMD package according to the first embodiment, an area MSLKMIC30 is silk-screened in a white solid line (or a black solid line) on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 where a Schmitt trigger inverter, a lead-type electronic component, is mounted. The area indicates the position (including the orientation) for placing the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, an alternative SMD-type electronic component with the same function as the lead-type electronic component. Additionally, the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-screened in white (or black) near and to the lower left of this area MSLKMIC30.

Furthermore, in the configuration for improving the visibility of the part number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, an information area is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 near and to the right of the area MSLKMIC30, and within this information area the part number (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-screened in white (or black) at a size that is easier to see compared to the part number (number listed in the catalog) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

In contrast, in the configuration of the second embodiment using SMD packages to improve part number visibility, as shown in FIG. 139(a), with the exception of the main control MPU 1310a, which is a lead-type electronic component, and various lead-type connectors, alternative SMD-type electronic components with the same functions as various lead-type electronic components such as ICs, resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs are aggregated and mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'. The external dimensions (length, width, and thickness) of this main control board 1310' are the same as the external dimensions of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the first embodiment using SMD packages to improve part number visibility.

The main control board 1310' has a center line that is a straight line passing through the midpoints of its top and bottom sides. The area on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310' to the left of this center line is formed as a component placement area 1310xa' for placing various electronic components and connectors, and the area on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310' to the right of this center line is formed as a parts list area 1310xb', an information area presented like a parts list of electronic components, with part numbers and product numbers (numbers listed in a catalog) aligned.

Specifically, component placement area 1310xa' contains main control MPU 1310a, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type, which is a lead type; various lead-type connectors MCN1-MCN4 (and other multiple connectors not shown); resistors MR0-MR4 (and other multiple resistors not shown); capacitors MC0-MC5 and MC30 (and other multiple capacitors not shown); diode D0 (and other multiple diodes not shown); and Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (and other various ICs not shown). Component placement area 1310xa' contains unillustrated areas indicating the placement positions (and may also specify the orientation) of these various electronic components and connectors, which are silk-screened in white (or black) solid lines. Additionally, corresponding component numbers are silk-screened in white (or black) near these various electronic components and connectors. Additionally, various connectors are lead-type, which prevents the wiring from peeling off from the board when it is connected to the connector due to stress from the wiring (this stress is caused by the reactive force of the wiring acting on the connector as it is routed through the wiring path until it is connected to the connector).

In parts list area 1310xb', a parts list of electronic parts, consisting of part numbers and product numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) arranged in an aligned format, is silk-screened in white (or black). The part numbers and product numbers are silk-screened in white (or black) larger (for example, approximately three to five times larger) than the part numbers silk-screened in white (or black) in component placement area 1310xa'. A separator ":" is provided between the part number and product number (number listed in the catalog) to prevent the part number and product number (number listed in the catalog) from being identified as consecutive numbers. This separator allows the part number and product number (number listed in the catalog) to be distinguished and identified.

The manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be silk-screened in white (or black) along with the product number (the number listed in the catalog). In addition to listing such information about the parts, cautions regarding the gaming machine may also be listed. For example, a warning such as "The main control board is an important board from a security standpoint, so please handle it with care" may be included.

In this way, the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310' can be divided into a component placement area 1310xa' and a component list area 1310xb', making it easier to identify the various electronic components and connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310'.

In addition, instead of silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310', foil cut-out areas and foil cut-out letters in the configuration of part number visibility measures using an SMD package according to the fifth embodiment described below may be used, or resist cut-out areas using two coats of resist and white resist cut-out letters using two coats of resist may be used in the configuration of part number visibility measures using an SMD package according to the sixth embodiment.

[Comparison of the part number visibility measures for the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the part number visibility measures for the SMD package according to the third embodiment]

In the configuration for improving the visibility of the part number using an SMD package according to the first embodiment, an area MSLKMIC30 is silk-screened in a white solid line (or a black solid line) on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 where a Schmitt trigger inverter, a lead-type electronic component, is mounted. The area indicates the position (including the orientation) for placing the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, an alternative SMD-type electronic component with the same function as the lead-type electronic component. Additionally, the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-screened in white (or black) near and to the lower left of this area MSLKMIC30.

Furthermore, in the configuration for improving the visibility of the part number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, an information area is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 near and to the right of the area MSLKMIC30, and within this information area the part number (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-screened in white (or black) at a size that is easier to see compared to the part number (number listed in the catalog) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

In contrast, in the configuration of the third embodiment using SMD packages to improve part number visibility, as shown in FIG. 139(b), with the exception of the main control MPU 1310a, which is a lead-type electronic component, and various lead-type connectors, alternative SMD-type electronic components with the same functions as various lead-type electronic components such as ICs, resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs are aggregated and mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'. By aggregating SMD-type electronic components and mounting them on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310', the size of the main control board 1310' can be reduced. The external dimensions (length, width, and thickness) of this main control board 1310' are half the width of the external dimensions of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the first embodiment using SMD packages to improve part number visibility, with the length and thickness remaining the same.

Various electronic components and connectors are arranged on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'. The arrangement of these various electronic components and connectors is identical to that of the component placement area 1310xa' formed on the main control board 1310' in the configuration of the part number visibility measure using SMD packages according to the second embodiment described above (i.e., the areas (not shown) indicating the placement positions (which may also include orientation) of these various electronic components and connectors are identically arranged and silk-screened in white (or black)). Corresponding component numbers are also identically arranged and silk-screened in white (or black) near these various electronic components and connectors. Furthermore, the various connectors are lead-type connectors. This is to prevent the connectors from peeling off from the board due to stress from the wiring when they are connected to the connectors (this stress is caused by the reaction force of the wiring acting on the connector as it is routed through the wiring path leading to the connector).

On the back surface (solder side) 1310y' of the main control board 1310', a parts list of electronic components is silk-screened in white (or black) in the parts list area 1310xb', which is an information area formed on the main control board 1310' in the configuration of the part number visibility measure using SMD packages according to the second embodiment described above. The part numbers and part numbers (catalog numbers) are silk-screened in white (or black) and are aligned in an aligned manner. The part numbers and part numbers (catalog numbers) are silk-screened in white (or black) larger (e.g., approximately three to five times larger) than the part numbers silk-screened in white (or black) on the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310'. A separator ":" is provided between the part number and part number (catalog number) to prevent them from being identified as consecutive. This separator allows the part number and part number (catalog number) to be distinguished from each other. The manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be silk-screened in white (or black) along with the product number (the number listed in the catalog). In addition to listing such component information, cautions regarding the gaming machine may also be listed. For example, a warning such as "The main control board is an important board from a security standpoint, so please handle it with care" may be included.

In addition, the back surface (solder side) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' has portions (shown as black circles (●) in the figure) where the leads of the above-mentioned ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a (shown as part number "MIC1" in the figure) and the leads of the lead-type electronic components capacitors MC0 to MC5, MC30, and resistors MR0 to MR4 protrude from the back surface (solder side) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' and are soldered to the back surface (solder side) 1310y' of the main control board 1310'. However, the part number and product number (the number listed in the catalog) are silk-screened in white (or black) in the parts list area 1310xb' formed on the main control board 1310' so as not to overlap (avoid) these portions.

In this way, by using the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310' as an area for component placement, and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' as an area for use as a parts list of electronic components arranged in an aligned format with part numbers and product numbers (numbers listed in a catalog), the roles of the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310' and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' can be distinguished, making it easier to identify the various electronic components and connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'.

Furthermore, by consolidating SMD-type electronic components and mounting them on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310', the size of the main control board 1310' can be reduced, and the number of ring-shaped land patterns required when mounting lead-type electronic components can be determined and reduced. As a result, the number of portions on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' where the various leads of the lead-type electronic components protrude and are soldered is reduced, allowing the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' to be formed as a flat surface.

Furthermore, because the various leads of the lead-type electronic components protruding from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' are soldered, when light from a fluorescent lamp or the like is shone on them, the reflected light can be dazzling and can make the soldered portions difficult to see. However, as described above, the number of protruding and soldered portions of the various leads of the lead-type electronic components on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' is reduced, allowing the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' to be formed as a flat surface. Therefore, even when light from a fluorescent lamp or the like is shone on this flat surface, the parts list of electronic components, which is composed of aligned silk-screened part numbers and product numbers (numbers listed in the catalog), does not become difficult to see.

Instead of the silk screen printing on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x' and back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310', it is also possible to use the foil cut-out areas and foil cut-out letters in the configuration of part number visibility measures using an SMD package according to the fifth embodiment described below, or the resist cut-out areas using two coats of resist and white resist cut-out letters using two coats of resist in the configuration of part number visibility measures using an SMD package according to the sixth embodiment.

General electronics manufacturers use multi-layer boards on which various wiring patterns can be formed on each layer. However, for the main control boards and payout control boards used in gaming machines, two-layer boards (also called "double-sided boards") are used, with various wiring patterns formed on both the front (mounting side) and back (solder side) of the board to enhance security. Various electronic components must be mounted only on the front (mounting side) of the board, regardless of whether they are lead-type or SMD-type electronic components. For example, to enhance security, the front (mounting side) of the main control board must be equipped with a ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a, which is a lead-type component. Furthermore, for components where it would be beneficial to install lead-type electronic components, these lead-type electronic components are installed instead of SMD-type electronic components.

When SMD-type electronic components and lead-type electronic components are mounted together on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board or dispensing control board, the number of leads of the lead-type electronic components protruding from the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board or dispensing control board is reduced compared to when only lead-type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board or dispensing control board. This increases the area on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board or dispensing control board that can be used to form various wiring patterns, and also provides area that can be used for other functions.

For example, in the increased area on the back surface (solder side) of the main control board, a mounting land pattern etc. formation area 1310ya' (see Figure 139 (b)) can be provided. This area will not be mounted on a mass-produced main control board, but can be used to form various land patterns for mounting various SMD-type ICs and various SMD-type connectors, or to form pad patterns for extracting signals. In a mass-produced main control board, SMD-type electronic components will not be mounted on the various land patterns and pad patterns in mounting land pattern etc. formation area 1310ya', so the various land patterns and pad patterns in mounting land pattern etc. formation area 1310ya' become unmounted patterns, and mounting land pattern etc. formation area 1310ya' becomes empty space.

When such unmounted patterns are formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, the area in which the unmounted patterns are formed restricts the placement of various electronic components and connectors and the routing of various wiring patterns on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board. However, when such unmounted patterns are formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board, there are no restrictions on the placement of various electronic components and connectors and the routing of various wiring patterns on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and the entire area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board can be effectively used.

Furthermore, by forming such unmounted patterns on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board, they cannot be seen from the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and the presence of the unmounted patterns can be hidden, which is preferable from a security standpoint.

Note that, for convenience, some of these unmounted patterns may be formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board. For example, it may be easier to connect a connector (SMD type connector) to wiring if it is located on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board.

Furthermore, some of these unmounted patterns may be formed as lead-type electronic components or lead-type connectors depending on the circumstances. For example, this may be the case when soldering strength is required, such as in connectors that are inserted and removed frequently.

Next, we will explain other configurations of the present invention (hereinafter referred to as "configurations for improving part number visibility using SMD packages according to the fourth to sixth embodiments") that provide measures to improve part number visibility when visually inspecting the main control board 1310 housed in the main control board box 1320. This configuration addresses the problem of the small surface area of the package body of the compact Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an SMD package, making the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) and product number (number listed in a catalog) small and difficult to see. Note that in Figures 140(a)-(c), components that perform the same functions as those in the embodiment shown in Figures 138(a) and (b) (hereinafter referred to as "configurations for improving part number visibility using SMD packages according to the first embodiment") are designated by the same reference numerals.

[Comparison of the configuration of the part number visibility measures in the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the part number visibility measures in the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration for improving the visibility of the part number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, an area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including the orientation) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-screened in a white solid line (or a black solid line) on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-screened in white (or black) near and to the lower left of this area MSLKMIC30.

Furthermore, in the configuration for improving the visibility of the part number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, an information area is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 near and to the right of the area MSLKMIC30, and within this information area the part number (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-screened in white (or black) at a size that is easier to see compared to the part number (number listed in the catalog) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

Furthermore, in the configuration for improving the visibility of the part number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, an area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 will be placed (the orientation is not specified as the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is silk-screened in white (or black) solid lines, so that it is positioned near the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead that will be the 14th terminal (power terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. Furthermore, the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is silk-screened in white (or black) near and to the upper right of this area MSLKMC30.

In contrast, in the configuration for improving the visibility of part numbers using SMD packages according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 140(a), the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 further includes a region MSLKMIC30' silkscreened in white dashed lines (or black dashed lines) indicating the position (including orientation) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMIC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Additionally, a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silkscreened in white (or black) near and to the upper left of this region MSLKMIC30'. This part number is printed larger than the size printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because multiple electronic components of various types are mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so the component numbers need to be printed small and placed near the corresponding electronic components, whereas the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 does not have any electronic components mounted thereon, so the component numbers can be printed larger.

Furthermore, in the configuration for improving part number visibility using an SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, instead of the part number MSLKMIC30p printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for improving part number visibility using an SMD package according to the first embodiment, this part number MSLKMIC30p is printed in an information area on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, near and below the area MSLKMIC30', and in this information area it is silk-screened in white (or black) at a size that is easier to see than the part number (number listed in the catalog) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. Therefore, the part number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably seen.

The part number MSLKMIC30p may be the same size as or larger than the part number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for improving part number visibility using an SMD package according to the first embodiment. This is because the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is mounted with multiple electronic components, so the part number MSLKMIC30p needs to be small and printed near the corresponding electronic components, whereas the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 does not have any electronic components mounted on it, so the part number MSLKMIC30p can be printed larger.

The manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be silk-screened in white (or black) along with the product number (the number listed in the catalog). In this case, it is preferable that the silk-screened name be printed in white (or black) at a size that is easily visible compared to the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. This ensures that the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be clearly seen.

Furthermore, in the configuration for improving the visibility of the part number using the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 further includes a silkscreen printed area MSLKMC30' indicating the position of the capacitor MC30 (the orientation is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) in a position corresponding to the area MSLKMC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, printed in white (or black) as a solid line. Furthermore, near this area MSLKMC30', in the upper left corner, a part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is silkscreen printed in white (or black). This part number is printed larger than the size printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because, since multiple electronic components of various types are mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the part number visibility measure configuration using SMD packages in the first embodiment requires the part numbers to be printed small and placed near the corresponding electronic components, whereas, since no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the part numbers can be printed large.

[Comparison of the configuration of the part number visibility measures in the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the part number visibility measures in the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration for improving the visibility of the part number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, an area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including the orientation) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-screened in a white solid line (or a black solid line) on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-screened in white (or black) near and to the lower left of this area MSLKMIC30.

Furthermore, in the configuration for improving the visibility of the part number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, an information area is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 near and to the right of the area MSLKMIC30, and within this information area the part number (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-screened in white (or black) at a size that is easier to see compared to the part number (number listed in the catalog) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

Furthermore, in the configuration for improving the visibility of the part number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, an area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 will be placed (the orientation is not specified as the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is silk-screened in white (or black) solid lines, so that it is positioned near the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead that will be the 14th terminal (power terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. Furthermore, the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is silk-screened in white (or black) near and to the upper right of this area MSLKMC30.

In contrast, in the configuration for improving the visibility of the part number using an SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 140(b), the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further provided with an area MSLKMIC30', indicated by a dotted line as a foil cutout area, at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This area indicates the position (including the orientation) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as foil cutout letters in the upper left vicinity of this area MSLKMIC30'.

The foil punched area is an area formed by drawing a dashed line in a copper foil wiring pattern and punching out the surrounding copper foil on the layer (copper plane) on which various wiring patterns are formed, excluding the wiring patterns that transmit control signals, the wiring patterns that supply power, and various land patterns. The foil punched area, area MSLKMIC30', has a cutout portion 1310yMIC30 in part of the left side in Figure 140(b). This gives area MSLKMIC30' a U-shape, allowing the ground ground formed on the back surface (solder side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to be electrically connected to the inner area of the U-shaped area MSLKMIC30' via cutout portion 1310yMIC30. This is because the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and by ensuring as much ground (GND) area as possible on the back surface (solder surface) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 that corresponds to this mounting area, it is possible to prevent the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 from malfunctioning due to noise (making it more resistant to noise).

The punched characters are formed by creating characters from a copper foil wiring pattern on the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and then punching out the copper foil around them. The punched part numbers are larger than the size printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is equipped with multiple electronic components, so the part numbers need to be small and printed near the corresponding electronic components. However, since no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the part numbers can be larger and formed as punched characters.

In addition, in the configuration for improving the visibility of part numbers using an SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, instead of the part number MSLKMIC30p printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for improving the visibility of part numbers using an SMD package according to the first embodiment, this part number MSLKMIC30p is formed as foil-punched characters in an information area provided on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, near and below the area MSLKMIC30', so that the part number MSLKMIC30p is sized to be easily visible compared to the part number (number listed in the catalog) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. The foil-punched characters are formed by creating characters using a copper foil wiring pattern on the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and then punching out the surrounding copper foil. This allows the part number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 to be reliably seen.

The part number MSLKMIC30p formed as foil-punched letters may be the same size as or larger than the part number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the part number visibility measure configuration using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. This is because, because multiple electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the part number MSLKMIC30p must be small and printed near the corresponding electronic components in the part number visibility measure configuration using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. However, because no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the part number MSLKMIC30p can be large and formed as foil-punched letters.

The manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be formed as foil cutout letters along with the product number (the number listed in the catalog). In this case, it is preferable that the foil cutout letters be formed in a size that is easily visible compared to the size of the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. This ensures that the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably seen.

Furthermore, in the configuration for improving the visibility of product numbers using SMD packages according to the fifth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 further includes a foil-punched area MSLKMC30', which indicates the placement position of capacitor MC30 (the orientation is not specified because capacitor MC30 has no polarity), in a position corresponding to the area MSLKMC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The area MSLKMC30' is formed as a foil-punched area using a dashed line, and the part number corresponding to capacitor MC30 is formed as foil-punched characters near and to the upper left of this area MSLKMC30'. The foil-punched area is an area formed by drawing a dashed line of copper foil wiring patterns on the layer (copper plane) on which various wiring patterns are formed, and punching out the copper foil around the lines, excluding wiring patterns that transmit control signals, wiring patterns that supply power, and various land patterns. The foil-punched characters are formed as punched characters by drawing characters using copper foil wiring patterns on the layer (copper plane) on which wiring patterns are formed, and punching out the copper foil around the lines. The part number formed as foil-punched characters is larger than the size printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is mounted with multiple electronic components, so the part number needs to be small and printed near the corresponding electronic component, whereas the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 does not have any electronic components mounted on it, so the part number can be large and formed as foil-punched characters.

The wiring patterns that form the foil-punched areas and foil-punched characters are formed to be electrically insulated from the various electronic components, as well as from the wiring patterns that transmit control signals, the wiring patterns that supply power, the various land patterns, and the solid earth formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

[Comparison of the configuration of the part number visibility measures in the SMD package according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the part number visibility measures in the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment]
In the configuration for improving the visibility of the part number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, an area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including the orientation) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-screened in a white solid line (or a black solid line) on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-screened in white (or black) near and to the lower left of this area MSLKMIC30.

Furthermore, in the configuration for improving the visibility of the part number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, an information area is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 near and to the right of the area MSLKMIC30, and within this information area the part number (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-screened in white (or black) at a size that is easier to see compared to the part number (number listed in the catalog) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

Furthermore, in the configuration for improving the visibility of the part number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, as described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, an area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 will be placed (the orientation is not specified as the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is silk-screened in white (or black) solid lines, so that it is positioned near the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead that will be the 14th terminal (power terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. Furthermore, the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is silk-screened in white (or black) near and to the upper right of this area MSLKMC30.

In addition, in the configuration for improving the visibility of the part number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment, green resist is used for the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are solidly coated with green resist, except for the various land patterns.

In contrast, in the configuration for improving the visibility of the part number using an SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, as shown in Figure 140(c), on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, an area MSLKMIC30' indicating the position (including the orientation) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as a dotted line cut-out area using two coats of white resist, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as white resist cut-out letters using two coats of white resist near and to the upper left of this area MSLKMIC30'.

Furthermore, in the configuration for improving the visibility of the part number using an SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, instead of the part number MSLKMIC30p printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for improving the visibility of the part number using an SMD package according to the first embodiment, this part number MSLKMIC30p is formed as white resist cut-out letters using two coats of white resist on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, near and below the area MSLKMIC30', so that the size is easier to see compared to the size of the part number (number listed in the catalog) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

Furthermore, in the configuration for improving the visibility of the part number using the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is further provided with an area MSLKMC30' indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is to be placed (the orientation is not specified as the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and this area is formed by a dotted line as a white resist cut-out area using two coats of white resist, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as white resist cut-out letters using two coats of white resist near this area MSLKMC30' in the upper left corner.

Specifically, the back surface (solder side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is entirely covered with white resist as the first of two coats of white resist (in other words, as the first of two coats of white resist, the back surface (solder side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is entirely covered with a solid coat of white resist except for the various land patterns). The back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is then masked with a dashed line white resist cut-out area, an area MSLKMIC30' indicating the position (including the orientation) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as the second of two coats of white resist. Near this area MSLKMIC30', in the upper left, a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is masked as white resist cut-out characters. An information area is provided below, and within this information area, the part number MSLKMIC30p of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is masked in white resist-cut letters. At a position corresponding to the area MSLKMC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, an area MSLKMC30' indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 will be placed (as capacitor MC30 has no polarity, no orientation is specified) is masked in a dashed line as a white resist-cut area, and near this area MSLKMC30', in the upper left, the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is masked in white resist-cut letters.

With the main control board 1310 masked in this manner, the entire back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is covered with a solid white resist except for the various land patterns. In other words, in the configuration for improving the visibility of product numbers using SMD packages according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is covered with a solid white resist except for the various land patterns, while the entire front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is covered with a solid green resist except for the various land patterns.

As a result, two layers of white resist are formed on the back surface (solder side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, but the entire surface is covered by the first layer of white resist, and the entire surface except for the masked area is covered by the second layer of white resist, so that the masked area is recessed, and the area MSLKMIC30' indicating the position (including orientation) for placing the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as a dotted line cut-out area in the white resist, the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as letters cut out in the white resist, the product number (number listed in the catalog) MSLKMIC30p engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as letters cut out in the white resist, and the area MSLKMC30' indicating the position (orientation is not specified as capacitor MC30 has no polarity) for placing the capacitor MC30 is formed as dotted line cut-out area in the white resist, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as letters cut out in the white resist. Therefore, the product number (the number listed in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be clearly seen.

When the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as white resist-cut letters, it is formed larger than the size printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is mounted with multiple electronic components, so the part number needs to be small and printed near the corresponding electronic components, whereas the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 does not have any electronic components mounted on it, so the part number can be large and formed as white resist-cut letters.

When the part number MSLKMIC30p is formed as white resist-cut letters, it may be the same size as or larger than the part number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the part number visibility measure configuration using the SMD package in the first embodiment. This is because, because multiple electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the part number MSLKMIC30p must be small and printed near the corresponding electronic components in the part number visibility measure configuration using the SMD package in the first embodiment. However, because no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the part number MSLKMIC30p can be large and formed as white resist-cut letters.

The manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be formed as white resist cut-out letters along with the product number (the number listed in the catalog). In this case, it is preferable that the white resist cut-out letters be formed in a size that is easily visible compared to the size of the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. This ensures that the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be reliably seen.

When the part number corresponding to capacitor MC30 is formed as white resist-cut letters, it is printed larger than the size printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This is because the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is mounted with multiple electronic components, so the part number needs to be small and printed near the corresponding electronic components, whereas the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 does not have any electronic components mounted on it, so the part number can be large and formed as white resist-cut letters.

In the configuration for improving the visibility of product numbers using SMD packages according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly painted with white resist except for the various land patterns, while the entire front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly painted with green resist except for the various land patterns. However, the entire front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 may also be solidly painted with white resist except for the various land patterns. In this case, areas indicating the positions (and may also specify the orientation) of the various electronic components to be mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 are silk-screened on the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 using solid lines in a dark color such as dark green, black, or gray, and part numbers corresponding to the various electronic components are silk-screened on the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 using dark characters in a dark color such as dark green, black, or gray. This configuration allows the main control board 1310 to stand out from other boards by having the front (mounting surface) and back (soldering surface) of the boards solidly painted with green resist, excluding the various land patterns. Furthermore, the product numbers of SMD-type electronic components (when the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) is also printed in addition to the product number) may be silk-screened on the front (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

In addition to configuring the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 so that it is solidly painted with white resist except for the various land patterns, the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 may be configured so that it is silk-screened using two coats of different colored resist, with the first (base) and second coats being different colors. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, excluding the various land patterns, may be silk-screened in white as the first coat (base), and then the areas indicating the positions (which may also include specifying the orientation) of the various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 and the component numbers corresponding to the various electronic components may be masked, and the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, excluding the various land patterns, may be silk-screened in one of black, blue, yellow, or red as the second coat. Even with this configuration, the main control board 1310 can be made to stand out from the other boards by having the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the boards painted solid green with a green resist, excluding the various land patterns. Additionally, the areas indicating the placement positions (which may also include the orientation) of the various electronic components, and the component numbers corresponding to the various electronic components, can be visually identified.

Furthermore, in the configuration for improving the visibility of product numbers using SMD packages according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder side) of the main control board 1310 is solidly painted with white resist except for the various land patterns, while the entire front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly painted with green resist except for the various land patterns. However, the entire front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 may also be solidly painted with white resist except for the various land patterns. In this case, areas indicating the positions (which may also include specifying the orientation) of the various electronic components to be mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 are formed as solid white resist areas on the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and part numbers corresponding to the various electronic components are formed as white resist-cut letters on the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, among the various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the product numbers of SMD-type electronic components (and the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) in addition to these product numbers) may also be printed as white resist-cut letters on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

[Measures to prevent tampering with SMD-type electronic components]
Next, we will explain how miniaturized electronic components called SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as replacing electronic components with illegal ones to obtain illegal game balls.

The Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is an SMD-type electronic component mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. As mentioned above, the dimensions of the SMD package body are 5.3 mm wide, 10.8 mm long, and 1.5 mm high. When the length of the leads protruding from the two sides of the SMD package body is included, the width of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is 7.8 mm.

Because the main control board 1310 is an important control board that controls the progress of the game, it must be protected from unauthorized access by those who may tamper with it to obtain illegal game balls. Therefore, it is housed and sealed in a main control board box 1320, which consists of a transparent cover body with multiple ventilation holes for heat dissipation and a transparent base body. As shown in Figure 141, the main control board box 1320 is constructed by crimping the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 with one-way screws or the like at the crimping portion 1303. This crimping portion 1303 is a sealing mechanism, and multiple crimping portions are provided. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 with one-way screws or the like at the crimping portion 1303 using one sealing mechanism; to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism must be destroyed. In other words, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed.

However, if the SMD-type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is removed from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by some fraudulent means, such as using a thin wire to attach it to the main control board box 1320, and this SMD-type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is then replaced with an illegal electronic component, there is a risk that the person making such fraudulent modifications could obtain illegal game balls.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 141, a configuration is adopted in which multiple ventilation holes 1301z with an inner diameter (2 mm in this embodiment) smaller than the size of the SMD-type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are formed in the transparent cover body 1301. As a result, even if the SMD-type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is peeled off the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by some unauthorized means, such as using a thin wire, on the main control board box 1320, the SMD-type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 cannot be removed from the main control board box 1320 through the ventilation holes 1301z. This makes it possible to prevent the SMD-type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 from being replaced with an unauthorized electronic component.

As mentioned above, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is one of the key circuits that make up the main control input circuit, which receives detection signals from various sensors. If it is removed from the main control board 1310 by any illicit means, the main control MPU 1310a will always determine that sensors that indicate a ball has entered the game as no ball has entered the game, and will always determine that sensors that indicate illicit activity such as the approach of a magnet or illicit vibrations are illicit activity. As a result, if the SMD-type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is removed from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the no-ball state will be maintained against anyone attempting tampering, preventing them from obtaining illicit balls. Furthermore, a notification of illicit activity will be issued, which will notify the hall computer in the game room (hall) and also inform hall staff and other attendants. Furthermore, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that any of the various sensors that detect fraudulent activity, such as the approach of a magnet or fraudulent vibrations, is performing fraudulent activity, it sets the logic of the launch permission signal to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) as described above, preventing game balls from being shot toward the game area 5a. Therefore, any fraudulent tampering will result in the game being completely unable to be played.

In the above-described embodiment, an SMD-type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 as an SMD-type electronic component. However, if another SMD-type electronic component, such as a resistor, is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the inner diameter of the ventilation hole 1301z must be smaller than the size of the SMD-type resistor to prevent the SMD-type resistor from peeling off the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 and protruding from the inside to the outside of the main control board box 1320 through the ventilation hole 1301z.

Because such SMD type resistors are small, even if they peel off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it can be difficult to visually determine whether they are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, if an SMD type resistor that has peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 protrudes from the inside of the main control board box 1320 to the outside through the ventilation hole 1301z, there will be no trace of the peeled SMD type resistor on the lower inside of the main control board box 1320, making it even more difficult to visually determine whether they are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

For example, if a JIS standard 1/8 watt 2012 type SMD resistor is used, the length and width of this 2012 type resistor will be 2.0 mm and 1.2 mm, respectively. With such a small SMD resistor, even if bending of the main control board 1310 causes the resistor to peel off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the inner diameter of the ventilation hole 1301z is set to be smaller (here, 1.0 mm, for example) than the smaller of the length and width dimensions of the small SMD resistor (here, the width of 1.2 mm), so that the resistor will not protrude from the inside of the main control board box 1320 to the outside.

This ensures that even if a small SMD resistor peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it can be reliably prevented from flying out from the inside of the main control board box 1320 to the outside through the ventilation hole 1301z. This provides an opportunity to visually identify the fallen small SMD resistor from inside the main control board box 1320. Furthermore, by shaking the main control board box 1320 vertically or horizontally, the fallen small SMD resistor will collide with the inner wall of the main control board box 1320 or the main control board 1310, generating a sound. This sound provides an opportunity to identify the fallen small SMD resistor. Note that if SMD-type capacitors, diodes, coils, LEDs, or other electronic components are used in place of lead-type capacitors, diodes, coils, LEDs, or other electronic components in addition to the small SMD-type resistor, the inner diameter of the ventilation hole 1301z should be smaller than the smallest dimension of these components.

In this way, even if a small SMD-type electronic component peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is possible to reliably prevent it from flying out from the inside of the main control board box 1320 to the outside through the ventilation hole 1301z. This increases the likelihood of discovering a defect in which an SMD-type electronic component peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 due to bending of the main control board 1310.

In the above-described embodiments (including the configurations for improving the visibility of part numbers using SMD packages in the first to sixth embodiments), we have described mounting SMD-type electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. However, SMD-type electronic components can also be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of boards that are treated as main boards, such as the power supply board 630 and the dispensing control board 633.

[Test connector]
The pachinko machine 1 is tested by a specific testing organization and cannot be shipped to an amusement hall unless it is approved by this specific testing organization. The main control board 1310 is provided with a test connector 1310k for extracting various signals related to the game. This test connector 1310k is an SMD type electronic component. The test connector 1310k is a straight SMD-type connector (a type in which the pins of the connector are arranged parallel and perpendicular to the front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of the main control board), and when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific testing institution, it is normally mounted on the front (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and a test harness cover body side opening 1301k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k is formed in the transparent cover body 1301 facing the test connector 1310k, but when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass-produced machine to be shipped to amusement halls, it is not mounted on the main control board 1310, and the test harness cover body side opening 1301k is not formed in the transparent cover body 1301. Therefore, in the main control board 1310 produced as a mass-produced machine, the area for mounting the test connector 1310k is formed as an empty area on the front (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific testing institution, the test connector 1310k is mounted in the mounting land pattern formation area 1310ya' (see Figure 139(b)) on the back surface (solder side) of the main control board 1310, and a test harness base body side opening 1302k is formed in the transparent base body 1302 facing the test connector 1310k to attach the test harness to the test connector 1310k. This eliminates the need for a vacant area on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 for mounting the test connector 1310k, both when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific testing institution and when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass-produced machine to be shipped to amusement halls. This allows other SMD-type electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. This allows for greater freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, with this configuration, in preparation for commencing testing of the pachinko machine 1 at a specific testing facility, the testing technician first removes the main control board box 1320 from the board holder 1200 of the game board 5 shown in FIG. 145, and then electrically connects the test harness electrically connected to the testing equipment installed at the specific testing facility to the test connector 1310k mounted in the mounting land pattern formation area 1310ya' on the back surface (solder side) of the main control board 1310 via the test harness base body side opening 1302k formed in the transparent base body 1302. Next, the testing technician attaches the main control board box 1320 to the board holder 1200. In this state, the test harness is clamped and held between the transparent base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320 and the board holder 1200, so by applying a load in the direction that the test harness is pushed towards the test connector 1310k, it is possible to prevent the electrical connection between the test connector 1310k and the test harness from becoming unstable due to vibrations caused by movable bodies operated by the various electrical drive sources provided in the pachinko machine 1, and it is also possible to prevent the test harness, which extracts various important signals related to gameplay when testing the pachinko machine 1, from twisting and breaking.

In this embodiment, a straight SMD type connector (a type in which each pin of the connector is arranged parallel to the surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board) is used as the test connector 1310k. However, a right-angle SMD type connector (a type in which each pin of the connector is arranged parallel to the surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board) may be mounted on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board near one of the left, bottom, right, or top edges, and a test harness cover body side opening 1301k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k may be formed in the side wall of the transparent cover body 1301 facing the test connector 1310k (the side wall facing the test connector 1310k among the left side wall, bottom wall, right side wall, and top wall of the transparent cover body 1301). Even with this configuration, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific testing institution, or when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass-produced machine to be shipped to an amusement hall, the area on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 where the test connector 1310k is mounted will not be left as an empty area, so other SMD-type electronic components can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 can be increased. Furthermore, in preparation for commencing testing of the pachinko machine 1 at a specific testing facility, the testing operator can first electrically connect the test harness electrically connected to the testing equipment installed at the specific testing facility to the test connector 1310k mounted on the back surface (solder side) of the main control board through the test harness cover side opening 1301k formed in the transparent cover 1301, without first removing the main control board box 1320 from the board holder 1200 of the game board 5 shown in FIG. 114.

Incidentally, gaming machines have been proposed in the past in which a test firing terminal (test connector) is provided on the gaming control device (gaming control board) to which a cable for transmitting gaming information to testing equipment at a specific testing institution is connected (for example, JP 2013-128621 A (paragraph [0054] and Figure 6)). However, in the gaming machine described in this document, when tested at a specific testing institution, the test connector is mounted on the surface of the gaming control board, but when used in an amusement hall, the test connector is not mounted on the surface of the gaming control board, leaving an empty space. This empty space poses a problem in that it is not possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface of the gaming control board.

Furthermore, gaming machines that mount surface-mounted electronic components on a circuit board have been proposed (for example, JP 2014-144218 A (paragraph [0042] and Figure 4)). While the surface-mounted electronic components in the gaming machines described in this document may be affixed with identifiers such as product numbers that correspond to the surface-mounted electronic components, there is a problem in that the surface-mounted electronic components are small in size, making the identifiers difficult to visually recognize.

Furthermore, gaming machines have been proposed in the past that mount surface-mounted electronic components on a circuit board (for example, JP 2014-144218 A (paragraph [0042] and Figure 4)). However, when the surface-mounted electronic components in the gaming machines described in this document are mounted on a game control board that can control the progress of the game, there is a risk that the surface-mounted electronic components could be removed from the game control board by some fraudulent means and replaced with fraudulent electronic components, resulting in the acquisition of fraudulent gaming balls.

In addition, gaming machines have been proposed in the past that include a circuit board equipped with a tactile switch or the like, which allows the user to feel the click of a button pressed to turn the switch on or off (for example, JP 2017-023427 A (paragraph [0071] and Figure 20)). The tactile switch and other electronic components described in this document are lead-type electronic components, whose leads are inserted from the front to the back of the board into through-holes and soldered to the back of the board. When such lead-type electronic components are mounted on a board, such as a game control board that controls the progress of a game, and the board bends as the lead-type electronic component is operated, this bending could cause the soldered portions of other electronic components mounted on the board to peel off, resulting in electrical malfunctions.

Furthermore, gaming machines have been proposed in which various control boards are arranged in predetermined positions on the back of the gaming board (for example, JP 2013-128621 A (paragraphs [0032] to [0034], and Figure 3)). However, the game control board, which controls the progress of the game, is an important board that determines whether or not to award a benefit to the player, and therefore is housed in a board case with a sealed structure, and measures are required to prevent fraudulent activities such as tampering.

Furthermore, gaming machines in which surface-mounted components are mounted on a circuit board have been proposed (for example, JP 2014-144218 A (paragraph [0042] and Figure 4)). However, when the surface-mounted components in the gaming machines described in this document are mounted on a game control board that controls the progress of the game, if a wiring pattern is routed within the area on the surface of the game control board on which the surface-mounted components are mounted, the distance between the back surface of the surface-mounted components and the surface of the game control board is small, making it difficult to see even if the wiring pattern is tampered with by some fraudulent means, resulting in the problem that it is impossible to prevent fraudulent acts against surface-mounted electronic components.

[7. Game Contents]
The game content of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 117, 120 to 124, etc. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 located in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3, a game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and is shot into the upper part of the play area 5a, thereby starting a game with the game ball B. The game ball B shot into the upper part of the play area 5a flows down either the left or right side of the center device 2500 depending on the force of the shot. The force of the shot of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182. The more clockwise the rotation, the stronger the shot. Up to 100 game balls B can be shot continuously per minute, that is, at 0.6-second intervals.

In addition, within the game area 5a, multiple obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front of the game panel 1100. When the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N, the speed at which the game ball B flows down is suppressed and various movements are imparted to the game ball B, allowing players to enjoy watching its movements. In addition to the obstacle nails N, within the game area 5a, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is located above the upper left side unit 2300 and to the left of the center device 2500.

When game ball B is shot into the top of center device 2500 and enters the left side of the highest part of the outer periphery of center device 2500 when viewed from the front (left side of upper right peripheral wall 2510), it will come into contact with multiple obstacle nails N and flow down the area to the left of center device 2500. Then, when game ball B flowing down the area to the left of center device 2500 enters warp entrance 2501 opening on the outer periphery of center device 2500, it is supplied to stage 2503 from warp exit 2502.

Game balls B supplied to stage 2503 roll back and forth on stage 2503 and are released forward from the center in the left-right direction. When game balls B are released into the game area 5a from the central release section 2503a in the center of stage 2503, there is a high probability that they will be received by the first starting hole 2002, as this central release section 2503a is located directly above the first starting hole 2002. When game balls B are received by this first starting hole 2002, a predetermined number (e.g., three) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

Game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2503 of the center device 2500 may be received by the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, or the large winning opening 2005 in an open state.

If a game ball B that flows down to the left side of the center device 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it may be pushed toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 or the obstacle nails N, and may be received by the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. When a game ball B is received by the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (e.g., 10) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, when a game ball B is hit into the upper part of the center device 2500 within the game area 5a and enters the right side of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center device 2500 (the upstream space 2505 above the upper right peripheral wall 2510), it passes through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 of the center device 2500, and is released above the normal winning opening 2003 of the center device 2500, where it comes into contact with multiple obstacle nails N planted above the normal winning opening 2003, and is then accepted into the normal winning opening 2003 with a certain probability.

The guide passage group 2520 of the center device 2500 is composed of a first guide passage 2521, the entrance of which opens near the impact stop 1006, and a second guide passage 2522, the entrance of which opens at a distance to the left of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. As a result, if game ball B is hit with enough force to strike the impact stop 1006 (i.e., a right-handed hit), it will enter the first guide passage 2521. If game ball B is hit with enough force to strike the upstream space 2505 but not strike the impact stop 1006 (slightly weaker than a right-handed hit), it will most likely enter the second guide passage 2522. In other words, game ball B hit into the upstream space 2505 will flow through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, depending on the strength of the hit.

In this embodiment, the system is configured so that there is a higher probability that a ball will be accepted by the normal winning slot 2003 if it is circulated through the second guide passage 2522 rather than the first guide passage 2521.

When a game ball B is received in this normal winning port 2003 and detected by the normal winning port sensor 2401, a predetermined number (e.g., 1) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and a normal lottery is conducted on the main control board 1310. If the result of the normal lottery is a "normal win," the closed second starting port 2004 in the attacker unit 2400 opens for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 to 10 seconds), allowing game balls B to be received into the second starting port 2004.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery, which is held when game ball B is received by the normal winning port 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is indicated (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as the normal variable time). This indication of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the gaming board 5. The second starting port 2004 opens after the normal variable time has elapsed.

If game ball B is received by normal winning port 2003 between the time game ball B is received by normal winning port 2003 and the time the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot begin, so the start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is postponed until the previous suggestion of the normal lottery result has finished. Also, the number of reserved normal lottery results is limited to four, and any more than this are discarded rather than reserved, even if game ball B is received by normal winning port 2003. This prevents the burden on the gaming hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

A game ball B that enters the attacker right passage 2430 to the right of the normal winning opening 2003 has no chance of being received by the second starting opening 2004 or the large winning opening 2005, and is released onto the lower right rail 1004 of the previous component 1000 and discharged out of the game area 5a through the outlet 1008. On the other hand, a game ball B that passes through the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 passes between the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422, then passes through the large winning opening guide shelf 2424, passes in front of the closed large winning opening 2005, and is released onto the lower right rail 1004.

When game ball B passes between the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall 2422, if the result of the normal lottery drawn in response to the reception of game ball B at the normal winning opening 2003 is a "normal win" and the second starting opening door 2411 is moving forward, the game ball B is guided by the second starting opening door 2411 and received by the second starting opening 2004. When game ball B is received by this second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

Game ball B that is not guided by the second starting gate door 2411 falls onto the large prize entrance guide shelf 2424, passes from the left end of the large prize entrance guide shelf 2424 in front of the closed large prize entrance door 2413, is released onto the lower right rail 1004, and is then discharged outside the game area 5a through the outlet 1008.

On the other hand, game ball B that was guided toward the second starting gate 2004 by the second starting gate door 2411 but was not accepted by the second starting gate 2004 because the second starting gate door 2411 retreated midway enters the attacker right passage 2430 through the third opening 2433 below the second starting gate 2004, is released onto the lower right rail 1004 without passing in front of the closed large prize gate door 2413, and is then discharged outside the game area 5a through the outlet 1008.

In addition, multiple obstacle nails N are planted between the normal winning opening 2003 and the guide shelf above the second starting opening 2421, and the second opening 2432 of the attacka right passage 2430 is also open. Therefore, there is a low probability that a game ball B that passes through the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 will enter the attacka right passage 2430 through the second opening 2432. This game ball B that enters the attacka right passage 2430 is discharged from the outlet 1008 outside the game area 5a without entering the special winning opening 2005.

For the reasons described above, game ball B that circulates through the first guide passage 2521 is rarely accepted by the normal winning port 2003, so the acceptance of game ball B by normal winning port 2003 rarely leads to a normal lottery result in which second starting port 2004 opens, and game ball B is rarely accepted by second starting port 2004. On the other hand, game ball B that circulates through the second guide passage 2522 is accepted by normal winning port 2003 with a higher probability than the first guide passage 2521, so there is a high probability that a normal lottery result ("normal win") in which second starting port 2004 opens when game ball B passes through normal winning port 2003 is drawn, and there is a high probability that game ball B is accepted by second starting port 2004.

As a result, the player will attempt to hit game ball B with the aim of hitting the entrance to the second guide passage 2522, and so the strength with which game ball B is hit must be adjusted so that game ball B is hit into the game area 5a with a strength that will cause game ball B to enter the upstream space 2505 and also with a strength that will cause game ball B to enter the second guide passage 2522. This adds variety to the operation of hitting game ball B, making it less likely for the player to get bored, and allowing the player to enjoy the operation of hitting game ball B and preventing a decline in interest.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 draws a special lottery result that will result in a favorable game state (e.g., a "jackpot," "small jackpot," or "time-saving (time-saving) jackpot") favorable to the player. The drawn special lottery result is then indicated to the player over a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as the special variable time). Special lottery results that are drawn when a game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 include a "miss," a "first small jackpot," a "second small jackpot," a "third small jackpot," a "2R jackpot," a "15R jackpot," and so on. In this embodiment, the probability of a "small jackpot" ("first small jackpot," "second small jackpot," or "third small jackpot") is set higher for the second special lottery result than for the first special lottery result.

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving game ball B into first starting opening 2002 and second starting opening 2004 is a "small win," the device winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern depending on the type of "small win" (see Figure 123). Since the device winning opening 2006 is located midway through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the center device 2500, if a "small win" is drawn, game ball B is shot into the first guide passage 2521 by "hitting to the right."

If the "small hit" is a "first small hit," the opening and closing time of the device winning opening 2006 is short, making it almost impossible for game ball B to be accepted. If the "second small hit" or "third small hit" is a "second small hit" or "third small hit," the device winning opening 2006 remains open for a long time, and there is a high possibility that game ball B will be accepted into the device winning opening 2006 by "hitting to the right." When game ball B is accepted into this device winning opening 2006, a predetermined number (e.g., four) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

When a game ball B is received into the device winning port 2006 when the "small hit" is a "second small hit" or a "third small hit," one of the received game balls B is received in the storage section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 in the first distribution device 2530. If the "small hit" is a "second small hit," the game ball B received in the storage section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 is supplied to the crane 2553 of the third distribution device 2550 through the second distribution device 2540. It is then bounced off the distribution rotor blades 2554 and distributed to either the second V winning port 2008 or the third loss port 2556. When a game ball B is received (distributed) into the second V winning port 2008, a "15R jackpot" is executed. On the other hand, if game ball B is received in the third losing hole 2556, the "15R jackpot" etc. will not be executed and the previous state will be restored.

On the other hand, if the "small hit" is a "third small hit," the game ball B contained in the storage section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 is distributed to the first V winning port 2007 side by the second distribution device 2540, and a "15R big hit" is executed.

If the first special lottery result and second special lottery result drawn by receiving game ball B into first V winning port 2007 or second V winning port 2008, or receiving game ball B into first starting port 2002 or second starting port 2004, are a "2R jackpot" or a "15R jackpot," a "jackpot" game is executed in which an opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is referred to as one round) that closes the game so that game ball B cannot be received is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds, for example, two rounds or 15 rounds) once one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed after large winning port 2005 becomes open and able to receive game ball B, or a predetermined number of game balls B (e.g., 10) have been received into large winning port 2005.

This large prize opening 2005 is located on the flow path of game balls B that mainly flow down the right side of the center device 2500, allowing the player to shoot game balls B aimed at the right side of the center device 2500. When the large prize opening 2005 is in the open state and a game ball B is received by the large prize opening 2005, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 cause a predetermined number (e.g., 10 or 13) of game balls B to be paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201. Therefore, by having the large prize opening 2005 receive game balls B when it is able to receive game balls B, a large number of game balls B can be paid out, providing enjoyment to the player.

In addition, the guide passage group 2520 located on the right side of the center device 2500 makes it easier to perform a hitting operation on the first guide passage 2521 side than on the second guide passage 2522 side, but it is less likely to be accepted by the large prize opening 2005 than on the second guide passage 2522 side. Therefore, the player can choose which passage to aim for when making a hitting operation, and the variety of games makes it less likely for the player to get bored and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, in the event of a "15R jackpot" or a "2R jackpot" during the time-saving mode, after the "jackpot" play ends, the time for the special symbols to fluctuate, which indicates to the player the first and second special lottery results drawn by the reception of game ball B into first starting port 2002 and second starting port 2004, is made shorter than usual until a predetermined number of fluctuations (e.g., 100 times) is reached, thereby speeding up the time until the next "win" is drawn.

Furthermore, in a "jackpot" game in which game ball B aims for the large prize opening 2005, there are the normal prize opening 2003 and the second start opening 2004 on the way to the large prize opening 2005, so there is a high possibility that game ball B aimed for the large prize opening 2005 will be received by the second start opening 2004. If the next "jackpot" or "small prize" is drawn during a "jackpot" game, the advantageous game state in which the player is favored will continue for a longer period of time, allowing the player to enjoy the game even more.

In this embodiment, if a game ball B is received by the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 between the start of the special lottery and the indication of the special lottery result due to the reception of a game ball B by the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the indication of the special lottery result cannot begin, and therefore the start of the indication of the special lottery result is suspended until the indication of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for any more than this, the special lottery result is not reserved but discarded even if a game ball B is received by the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. This prevents the burden on the amusement hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

The special lottery result drawn by receiving game ball B into first starting port 2002 and second starting port 2004 is indicated by function display unit 1400 and performance display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by main control board 1310 to indicate the special lottery result. The function display unit 1400 indicates the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off multiple LEDs and flashing them for a predetermined period of time, after which the combination of lit LEDs indicates the special lottery result.

Meanwhile, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and suggests the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 displays three picture rows consisting of multiple pictures lined up horizontally, and changes each picture row, sequentially stopping and displaying the changing picture rows. The three stopped and displayed picture rows are displayed so that the pictures in the three stopped and displayed picture rows form a combination that corresponds to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than a "lose," after the three picture rows have stopped and each picture has been stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an advantageous game state (for example, a "small win" game, a "big win" game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

The time for which the special lottery result is indicated on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) is different from the time for which the special lottery result is indicated on the performance display device 1600 (the time from when the pattern row changes until the final image is displayed), with the time for which it is indicated on the function display unit 1400 being set to be longer.

In addition to displaying effect images suggesting the results of the special lottery using the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 can also perform player participation effects in which the rotation operation unit 302 and pressure operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 on the door frame 3 are operated according to the results of the special lottery. In player participation effects, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate, vibrate, assist rotation operation, or inhibit rotation operation, and the operation button lift drive motor 367 can raise the pressure operation unit 303 to make it more noticeable, allowing players to enjoy the player participation effects by operating the effect operation unit 301.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 can appropriately use the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, the performance display device 1600, and the light guide plate performance unit 3100 and rear performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 to perform light-emitting effects, display effects, etc., allowing players to be entertained by various effects and preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in a player-participation presentation in which the player operates the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressure operation unit 303, if the player makes a mistake or fails to perform the required operation, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player so that the correct operation can be performed. Specifically, for example, if the player presses the outer pressure operation unit 303b or rotates the rotation operation unit 302 when a pressure operation on the central pressure operation unit 303a is required, the vibration speaker 354 will vibrate and the presentation display device 1600 will display a message to that effect.

[8. Relationship between this embodiment and the present invention]
The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 in the center role device 2500 of the front unit 2000 in this embodiment correspond to the guide passages of the present invention, and the normal winning port 2003, the second starting port 2004, and the large winning port 2005 of the attacca unit 2400 in this embodiment correspond to the bonus awarding section of the present invention.

[9. Characteristic Effects of the Present Embodiment]
In this way, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball B is shot from the left side along the periphery into the upper part of the game area 5a, it passes through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 in the guide passage group 2520 on the right side of the center device 2500 and is accepted by the normal winning port 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 located downstream, a predetermined benefit (a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out, as well as a normal lottery to determine whether or not to open or close the second starting port 2004) is granted, and the player can play a game in which he or she operates to shoot game ball B aimed at the right side of the center device 2500 where the normal winning port 2003 is located.

The first guide passage 2521 and second guide passage 2522 on the right side of the center device 2500 are aligned left to right, but their relative positions are twisted at the overlapping section 2520a so that they are aligned front to back. As a result, the first guide passage 2521 and second guide passage 2522 are aligned left to right at the upper entrance, and each of the first guide passage 2521 and second guide passage 2522 can be clearly distinguished, making it easy to select which one to hit by shooting the game ball B, and allowing the player to enjoy shooting the game ball B into the desired first guide passage 2521 or second guide passage 2522.

Meanwhile, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are twisted at the overlapping portion 2520a so that they are aligned in the front-to-back direction, making it difficult for a player to determine which guide passage a game ball B flowing through this area is flowing through, and drawing the player's attention to the game ball B flowing through the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522. These first guide passage 2521 and second guide passage 2522 allow the game ball B being guided (flowing) to be visible from the front, and because the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are formed from a transparent material, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 appear to overlap at the overlapping portion 2520a where they are aligned front-to-back, making it difficult to recognize the path of each guide passage at a glance. Furthermore, at the outlet side of the lower part of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are twisted so that they are lined up in the left-right direction, making it possible to clearly distinguish the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the outlet side, but because they are twisted twice upstream of this, the relationship between the arrangement of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the entrance side and the arrangement of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the outlet side can be difficult to distinguish and can be unclear.

Therefore, on the right side of the center device 2500, when game ball B is shot (entered) into one of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, it is difficult to tell where it will come out, making it difficult to recognize what the game result will be after it has circulated through the guide passage group 2520.It is difficult to tell which guide passage, the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, game ball B should be shot into to have a high probability of being accepted by the normal winning port 2003, so when game ball B is shot, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which guide passage game ball B is circulating through, and to attract the player's attention to the circulating game ball B.

In addition, by having the player pay attention to the game ball B circulating through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, the player can be excited to see whether the game ball B will come out from the exit of the guide passage (second guide passage 2522) that is most likely to be accepted by the normal winning port 2003, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for the game. Also, if the game ball B comes out from an unexpected exit (the exit of the first guide passage 2521), the player can be surprised and given the sense of surprise, which will entertain the player and prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, in order to allow game ball B to enter the second guide passage 2522, which has an exit that is likely to be accepted by the normal winning port 2003, it is necessary to adjust the strength with which game ball B is hit, so the player can adjust the strength with which game ball B is hit. This makes it possible to add a level of difficulty to the operation of hitting game ball B, making it less likely for the player to become bored by changing the operation of hitting game ball B, and allowing the player to enjoy the operation of hitting game ball B, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, because the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 have overlapping sections 2520a aligned in the front-to-rear direction, the left-to-right width of the guide passage group 2520 can be made as narrow as possible in these sections, making it relatively easier to secure space to the right of the center role device 2500. This secured space can then be used to place the role device winning slot 2006, the first distribution device 2530, etc., or to place performance devices, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that can provide even more enjoyment to players.

[10. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 137 in accordance with the progress of play on the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 147. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of main control power-on processing, FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control power-on processing of FIG. 142, FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing an example of main control timer interrupt processing, FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing, FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing, and FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing. First, various random numbers used in game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control power-on processing, main control timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, error display processing, and setting value confirmation display processing. Note that in the following description, the main control MPU 1310a may be simply referred to as the "main control MPU."

[10-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control include special random numbers used to determine whether or not a jackpot game state or a small jackpot game state will occur, initial value determination random numbers for hit determination used to determine the initial value of these special random numbers, reach determination random numbers used to determine whether or not a reach (missed reach) will occur when a jackpot game state is not generated, variable display pattern random numbers used to determine the variable display pattern of the special patterns that are variably displayed on the first special pattern display device and second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400, pattern random numbers used to determine the jackpot pattern or small jackpot pattern (determine the type of win) that is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device and second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 when a jackpot game state is generated, and initial value determination random numbers for jackpot pattern used to determine the initial value of these pattern random numbers. In addition to these random numbers, there are also prepared random numbers for determining whether or not to open or close the movable piece that allows the second starting port 2004 to accept game balls, random numbers for determining the initial value of the random number for determining whether or not to win a normal pattern, and random numbers for determining the normal pattern variable display pattern that are used to determine the variable display pattern of the normal pattern that is displayed on the normal pattern display of the function display unit 1400.

Of the various random numbers used in this type of game control, special random numbers are updated by hardware, while other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the special random number is updated directly by hardware using a main control built-in hardware random number circuit built into the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, this main control built-in hardware random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as its initial value, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range, and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs this rapid lottery, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit at the time it obtains a value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as the special random number.

In contrast, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range spanning from a minimum value to a maximum value, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control timer interrupt process described below is performed. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won. Once the counter has finished counting up the range spanning from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won, the initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won is updated. This type of counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter." The initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won.

In this embodiment, when the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the checksum value (sum value) obtained by treating various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU as numerical values and calculating their sum during the main control side power-on processing described below does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored during the main control side power-off processing (when power is turned off), and all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for specific areas, the main control MPU retrieves an ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and executes an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal pattern win determination random number based on this retrieved ID code, and this derived fixed value is set. In other words, the normal pattern win determination random number is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code when the initial value derivation process is executed. In this way, the value set in the initial value determination random number for determining normal symbol wins is derived using the ID code, and analysis is prevented by taking two security measures: the first is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even using an external device when it is stored in non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU by the manufacturer that produced it; and the second is that when all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area are cleared, an initial value derivation process is executed to derive the same fixed value based on the ID code.

Here, we explain the advantages of extracting an ID code from the nonvolatile RAM built into the main control MPU and using this extracted ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol. For example, even if someone attempting to illegally acquire a prize ball were to somehow obtain and disassemble a gaming board 5, illegally obtain an ID code pre-stored in the nonvolatile RAM built into the main control MPU, and determine the timing at which the counter value updating the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol matches the normal symbol winning symbol determination value, this ID code would be uniquely coded for individual identification and would be completely different from the ID codes pre-stored in the nonvolatile RAM built into the main control MPU' of another gaming board 5'. In other words, the timing at which the counter value updating the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol matches the normal symbol winning symbol determination value on another gaming board 5' would also be completely different from that on the obtained gaming board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the acquired game board 5 is completely useless on other game boards 5', i.e., other pachinko machines 1', and therefore even if momentary power outages are caused at the predetermined intervals obtained by disassembly and analysis, and game balls are allowed to pass through the normal winning opening 2003 at those predetermined intervals, it is not possible to open and close the movable piece and create a game state in which game balls can be received by the second starting opening 2004.

[10-2. Processing when power is turned on on the main control side]
First, the main control MPU is configured so that a stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default when power is applied to the pachinko machine 1. This stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) in use, or an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when a subroutine is terminated and the routine is returned to, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is filled.

Under the control of the main control MPU, the main control side power-on processing is performed as shown in Figures 142 and 143. When this main control side power-on processing begins, the main control MPU sets RAM access permissions (step S10). This RAM access permission setting allows updates to be made to the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU performs a power outage clearing process (step S12). This power outage clearing process involves a wait timer process to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. The voltage does not rise immediately between power-on and reaching the specified voltage. On the other hand, during a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and if it falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. Similarly, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage between power-on and reaching the specified voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process waits until the voltage exceeds the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes after power-on. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z on the dispensing control board 633 has been operated (step S14). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has three combined functions (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error reset switch), and in this case, it operates as a RAM clear switch to completely erase information stored in a specified area of the main control's built-in RAM. In this determination, when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633 has been operated is HIGH, the main control MPU determines that RAM clearing will not be performed and determines that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated. Conversely, when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is LOW, the main control MPU determines that RAM clearing will be performed and determines that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated. Note that because the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing routine to the determination of step S14 is extremely short, in reality, the person pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z will actually be pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z when powering on the pachinko machine 1.

If the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S16A). On the other hand, if the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S16B). In other words, the main control MPU is in a state in which it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU (i.e., the main control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time after power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG mentioned above is a flag that indicates whether or not to erase various information stored in the main control MPU's built-in RAM, including game information related to the game such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls, as well as other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter used to determine the output of main prize ball count information). It is set to a value of 1 when erasing various information and a value of 0 when not erasing various information. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in the main control MPU's general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register).

Following step S16A or step S16B, the main control MPU determines whether the main frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON (step S18). This determination is based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, which occurs when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a), thereby performing the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a ON. The main control MPU determines that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b, and that the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON based on a setting key ON signal, thereby determining that a predetermined condition for allowing a change to a setting value is met. On the other hand, the main control MPU determines that the main frame 4 is not open relative to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b, and/or that the setting key switch 1311a is not set to ON based on a setting key ON signal, thereby determining that a predetermined condition for allowing a change to a setting value is not met.

If the main control MPU determines in step S18 that the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are met, it sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to a value of 1 (step S20A). On the other hand, if the main control MPU determines in step S18 that the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are not met, it sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to a value of 0 (step S20B). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to permit a change to the current setting value (the value among setting values 1 through 6 set at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned ON) stored in a predetermined area (a setting value-dedicated area in a specific area, described below) of the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU. It is set to a value of 1 when a setting value change is permitted, and to a value of 0 when a setting value change is not permitted. The value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs a wait time standby process (step S22). This wait time standby process waits until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots). In this embodiment, the standby time until booting (boot timer) is set to 2.5 seconds (s). When the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, the peripheral control board 1510 is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). Note that, when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, the dispensing control board 633 completes booting in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510, so the dispensing control board 633 is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU).

Following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. If, in the determination in step S24, the main control MPU determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it returns to the determination in step S24 and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. Note that a detailed explanation of the fact that the determination in step S24 is made following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be provided later.

If the main control MPU determines in step S24 that no power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to 0 (step S25). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to 1 when setting value changes are permitted, and to 0 when setting value changes are not permitted.

In the determination of step S25, if the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to 0, i.e., if changing the setting value is not permitted, the main control MPU determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 1 when various information is to be erased and to 0 when various information is not to be erased. In the determination of step S26, if the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 0, i.e., if it has determined that various information is not to be erased, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S28). This checksum is calculated by treating the various information stored in the main control's built-in RAM as numerical values.

Following step S28, the main control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored during the main control side power-off processing (power-off processing) described below (step S30). If the main control MPU determines that the calculated checksum value matches, it then determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is set to 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG indicates whether game backup information, such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, was stored in the main control's internal RAM during the main control side power-off processing described below. It is set to 1 when the main control side power-off processing is completed successfully, and to 0 when the main control side power-off processing is not completed successfully. The calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30, which occur when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after production for inspection during the inspection process on the main control board 1310 production line, will be described in detail below.

If the main control MPU determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or if the main control MPU determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), i.e., that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, it performs error display processing (step S33) and enters an infinite loop. This infinite loop causes the state in which the error display processing has ended to remain, making it impossible to continue playing the game. Consequently, the pachinko machine 1 must be powered off and then powered on again. This error display processing, which will be described in detail later, determines that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control's internal RAM, or that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally at the time of power-off, and displays an error message to that effect, indicating that the contents stored in the main control's internal RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

Furthermore, after the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) to perform the first ON operation, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and this routine, the main control side power-on processing, is started again. In step S18, the main control MPU determines that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b, and that the setting key switch 1311a is set to setting key ON based on the setting key ON signal. This determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met, and in step S20A, the main control MPU sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to a value of 1. Therefore, in step S25, the main control MPU determines that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1, i.e., that setting value changes are permitted. Following the setting change process in step S37, which will be described later, in step S38, the main control MPU clears all areas of the internal RAM of the main control except for a specific area, thereby canceling the RAM error and allowing gameplay to continue (hereinafter referred to as the "first RAM error cancellation method").

As an alternative to this first RAM error clearing method, the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and then powered on while pressing the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633. This restarts the main control power-on processing routine. In step S14, the main control MPU determines that the RWM clear button 633z has been pressed, and in step S16A, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1. In step S26, it determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1, meaning that various information should be erased. In step S38, described below, all areas of the main control's internal RAM are cleared except for specific areas, thereby clearing the RAM error and allowing gameplay to continue (hereinafter referred to as the "second RAM error clearing method").

In this embodiment, if the main control MPU determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or if the main control MPU determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), meaning that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed successfully, it displays an error message in step S33 to inform the user that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are unreliable), and this can be done using two methods: the first RAM error reset method and the second RAM error reset method. As a result, if there is no need to change the setting values at all, the RAM error can be reset by using the second RAM error reset method using the RWM clear button 633z.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG is equal to 1, i.e., that the main control side power outage processing has been completed normally, it sets the working area of the main control's internal RAM as the time of power restoration (step S34). This setting is performed by reading the power restoration information from the ROM (i.e., the main control's internal ROM) built into the main control MPU and setting this power restoration information in the working area of the main control's internal RAM. This allows various information to be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this information to be stored in a specified memory area of the main control's internal RAM. Furthermore, the main control MPU will proceed with the game based on the setting values stored in the dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control's internal RAM. Note that "power restoration" refers not only to the state in which power is turned on after being cut off, but also to the state in which power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and the state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with high frequency waves from fraudulent means (for example, a high frequency output device hidden in the hem of an individual's arm) and the main control MPU itself is reset, and then restored.

Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). This causes various information, checksum values (sum values), etc. to change as various processes are performed thereafter. Therefore, unless the main control power-off process described below is successfully completed and the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 1, all areas of the main control's internal RAM will be cleared except for specific areas, as described below.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S25, if the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not set to a value of 0 (is set to a value of 1), i.e., if a change to the setting value is permitted, the main control MPU performs the setting change process (step S37). This setting change process, the details of which will be explained later, is performed based on a signal from the RWM clear button 633z on the dispensing control board 633. As mentioned above, the RWM clear button 633z has three combined functions (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error release switch), and here it functions as a setting switch button for selecting and switching the setting value. Each time the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, a signal indicating this (setting value selection switching signal) is input, the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the first ON operation to the second ON operation, the changed setting value is confirmed based on the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a and stored in a specified area of RAM built into the main control MPU.

In the processing of step S37 or the judgment of step S26, if the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), i.e., if it is determined that various information will be erased, the main control MPU clears all areas of the main control's internal RAM except for a specific area (step S38). Here, the main control MPU does this by writing the value 0 to a specified area of the main control's internal RAM (the area of the main control's internal RAM excluding the specific area). In this embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), i.e., if it is determined that various information will be erased, and also when the setting change processing is completed, the main control MPU always clears all areas of the main control's internal RAM except for the specific area (the specified area of the main control's internal RAM (the area of the main control's internal RAM excluding the specific area)). Here, the "specific area" is composed of a dedicated setting value area in which setting values are stored, and a dedicated out ball count area in which the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 is stored. The dedicated setting value area stores setting values that are changed in the setting change process described below, and the dedicated out ball count area stores the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008 that is counted in the ball counting process described below.

The main control MPU may read and set a predetermined value from the main control's built-in ROM as the initial value. Furthermore, when the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch and the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the RWM clear button 633z pressing operation unit has been operated indicates RAM clearing and various information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, the main control MPU retrieves a unique ID code pre-stored in the main control MPU's non-volatile RAM, and performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining a normal symbol win based on this retrieved ID code, and sets this fixed value as the normal symbol win determination initial value determination random number used to determine the initial value of the random number for determining a normal symbol win described above.

Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the work area of the main control's built-in RAM as the initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control's built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control's built-in RAM. This initializes the game backup information, and for example, the value of the counter used to determine the output of main prize ball count information is set to the initial value of 0. Furthermore, the main control MPU will proceed with the game based on the setting values stored in the dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU sets the initial value and startup settings for the main control's built-in WDT (step S41). Here, a timer setting value is set in the watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT control register") built into the main control MPU to set an initial value for the main control's built-in WDT, which monitors whether the main control MPU's operation (system) is normal, and the main control's built-in WDT is started, starting the timer count until the main control MPU is reset. When the main control's built-in WDT is started, the main control's built-in WDT begins counting time. If the timer clear setting value is not set in the watchdog timer clear register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT clear register") built into the main control MPU before the counted time reaches the timer setting value, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT. In contrast, when the main control's built-in WDT is activated and begins timing, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time reached by the timer setting value, the timekeeping by the main control's built-in WDT is cleared and timing begins again. In this way, by repeatedly clearing the timekeeping by the main control's built-in WDT before the time reached by the timer setting value and then starting timing again, it is possible to monitor whether the main control MPU (system) is operating normally.

Following step S41, the main control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting determines the interrupt period when the main control timer interrupt process described below is performed. In this embodiment, this is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, the transmission serial port prescaler corresponding to the various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU (for example, the serial input/output ports (receive channels and transmit channels) for the dispensing control board 633 and the serial input/output ports (receive channels and transmit channels) for the peripheral control board 1510) is set to the communication speed and whether or not parity is enabled, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and enable transmission.

Following step S44, the main control MPU initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, the gaming machine testing laboratory initializes the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information when the power is turned on (setting it to output OFF data).

Following step S46, the main control MPU performs startup settings for the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit (step S48). Here, settings are made to latch and acquire special random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, among various random numbers related to the game, in a hardware random number control register built into the main control MPU in order to update them by hardware, and startup settings for the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit are set in the hardware random number setting register. When these settings are performed, the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit is started, and based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU, it rapidly extracts other values within a predetermined numerical range without overlapping, one after another. Once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range, and based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU, it rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping, one after another. When the main control MPU obtains a random number (random value) from the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit, and obtains the random number (random value) extracted by the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit when this latch signal is input from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets this obtained random number as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU reserves the commands to be sent when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery information set in the main control's internal RAM's work area during the setting of the main control's internal RAM's work area in step S34, a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command, all of which are classified as power-on, are created to notify the user that power has been turned on (restored). These commands are then stored in the main control's internal RAM's transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main control's internal RAM's transmission information storage area may also contain various commands corresponding to various information read from the game backup information during the setting of the main control's internal RAM's work area during step S34. In such cases, after the various commands corresponding to the game information are first sent, the power-on status command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball information output determination counter notification command are sent. These commands are sent during the main control's timer interrupt process, which will be described later. A detailed explanation of how step S50 schedules the commands to be sent when the power is turned on will be provided later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). This setting causes the main control side timer interrupt processing, described below, to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S42, i.e., every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, as described above, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e to the main control MPU as a power outage warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

If, in step S54, the main control MPU determines that no power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a non-win/lose random number update process (step S56). This non-win/lose random number update process updates the random numbers for reach determination, variable display pattern, jackpot symbol initial value determination random numbers, and small win symbol initial value determination random numbers, as described above. In this way, the non-win/lose random number update process updates random numbers that are not related to win/lose determination (jackpot determination) by software. Note that the random numbers for normal symbol win determination, normal symbol win determination initial value determination random numbers, and normal symbol variable display pattern random numbers, as described above, are also updated by this non-win/lose random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54, where the main control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input, the process performs a non-win/lose random number update process in step S56, and then repeats steps S54 to S56. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as the "main process on the main control side."

On the other hand, if the main control MPU determines in step S54 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). This setting prevents the main control timer interrupt process, described below, from being performed, prevents writing to the main control's built-in RAM, and protects against overwriting of various information, including the game information and other information mentioned above.

Following step S58, the main control MPU begins outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same processing is performed as in step S12, when the power outage clear signal was started to be output.

Following step S60, the main control MPU stops the drive signals being output to, for example, the various displays of the function display unit 1400, the starter solenoid 2404, the attacca solenoid 2405, the base monitor 1310h, etc. (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control's internal RAM, thereby preventing updates to the contents of the main control's internal RAM.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU for the main control's built-in WDT that was started in step S41, clearing the timekeeping by the main control's built-in WDT and preventing it from restarting, forcing the main control MPU to be reset by the main control's built-in WDT. The main control MPU then performs this main control side power-on processing again. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as the "main control side power-off processing."

As described above, if the main control MPU is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU cannot make the determination in step S54 and is unable to perform the main control side power-off processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without performing the main control side power-off processing and will again perform the main control side power-on processing. In other words, because the main control side power-off processing is not performed, the checksum value (sum value) from the main control side power-off processing based on the time immediately before the forcible reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored. Therefore, the checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power-off processing was performed the previous time power was cut off and the checksum value (sum value) calculated in step S28 when the system is restarted after the forcible reset by the built-in reset circuit will not match. This will inevitably result in a checksum (sum value) error in the main control's built-in RAM, and in the processing of step S38, all areas of the main control's built-in RAM will be completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area.

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, and then performs the main control side power-on processing when power is restored.

In step S30, the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is checked to see if it is correct, and then in step S32, it is checked to see if the main control's power-off processing was completed normally. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM, it is checked to see if the game backup information was stored as a result of fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, in the judgment of step S25, if the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, if it is permitted to change the setting value, the setting change processing of step S37 is performed, and in the processing of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for specific areas; and in the judgment of step S26, if the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, if it is determined that various information will be erased, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for specific areas in the processing of step S38. In this way, if the pressing operation unit is operated when power is restored (more precisely, when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z), when a setting change is made that can change or determine the setting value (when the main control MPU performs a setting change process), the main control MPU will always clear a specified area of the main control built-in RAM. This is because when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch and the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed, for example, when the business of the gaming hall has ended and the pachinko machine 1 is in a state advantageous to the player (for example, a state in which it has won with a variable probability (probability change)), it is necessary to erase (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information before the next business day begins, so a staff member or other attendant at the gaming hall needs to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch. Furthermore, when a setting value is changed, once the setting change process is performed (even if the current setting value is ultimately maintained), it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information, including various information such as game information obtained using the setting value before the setting change process, from the main control's built-in RAM. As mentioned above, the setting key is an important key that can be used to change the setting value as well as check the current setting value. Therefore, only a limited number of people, including the amusement hall manager, are permitted to possess it, and it is limited to two or three people. In this embodiment, even if the setting value is not changed, that is, even if there is no setting key that is possessed only by a limited number of specific people, an attendant such as an amusement hall employee can erase (clear) the game backup information from the main control's built-in RAM by turning on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch.

Here, we will explain the fact that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, we will explain the problem that occurs when the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal is not determined in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 after the wait time standby process in step S22 and subsequent processing is carried out.

As mentioned above, if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and power is cut off from the island equipment in the amusement hall, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V DC to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption. In other words, even if power from the island equipment in the amusement hall is cut off due to a momentary or sudden power outage, the charge stored in the hardware electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V DC, allowing the main control side power-off processing to be completed within approximately 7 ms after power from the island equipment in the amusement hall is cut off. This ensures that the main control side power-off processing can be completed reliably even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and power from the island equipment in the amusement hall is cut off while a player is playing, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing described below is being performed.

However, in extremely rare cases, when power is restored, the wait time standby process in step S22 begins timing the wait time (boot timer: set to 2.5 seconds in this embodiment) until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). If a momentary or power outage occurs just before this wait time is reached, the charge stored in the hardware electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V DC to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU. However, within a period of approximately 7 ms, the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. This causes the main control timer interrupt process described below to be performed, and even if the contents of the main control's internal RAM are updated, the main control's power-on process during power-off may not be able to be completed. As a result, the checksum calculated based on the contents of the main control's internal RAM is not stored, and the main control's power-on process will begin again when power is restored.

As a result, when power is restored, the main control side power-on processing begins, and the wait time standby processing in step S22 is completed without any momentary or power outage. Then, in step S30, a checksum calculated based on the contents of the main control's built-in RAM in step S28 is compared with the value stored in the main control's built-in RAM immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred. The checksum values will not match, and in step S38, all but a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared. In other words, when power is restored and the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633 functions as a RAM clear switch, even if the RWM clear button 633z is pressed by a game hall staff member or other attendant and the game hall staff member does not express an intention to clear the RAM, the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM will be forcibly erased (cleared).

In this embodiment, therefore, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided in step S24 to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. This prevents game progress. Although a value is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, as described above, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU, and therefore the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided in step S24 to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input (i.e., if it is determined in step S24 that power to the pachinko machine 1 has been cut off after the wait time standby process of step S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24. As long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, preventing game play from progressing. This prevents various information, including game information and other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the counter used to determine the output of main prize ball information), from being updated, and prevents fluctuations in the checksum calculation results. As a result, when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the checksum value calculated and stored in step S64, and therefore does not initialize the game information stored in the main control's built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage. This prevents game information from being initialized immediately before a momentary or power outage occurs when power is restored.

In addition, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided in step S24 to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. When a power outage warning signal has not been input (i.e., when it is determined in step S24 that power to the pachinko machine 1 has not been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), even if power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is progressing a game, power is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU, by electrolytic capacitor MC2, and game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output) relating to the progress of the game are output. Because the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is able to complete the main control side power outage processing, which consists of steps S58 to S68, a backup process for storing various information including information indicating the value of the force determination counter, and an infinite loop, when restarted, the main control MPU determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the checksum calculation result of the backup process (i.e., the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64), and therefore does not initialize the game information stored in the main control's internal RAM immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurred. In other words, the game information immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurred can be restored, allowing the main control board 1310 to start up.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the main control's built-in WDT will force the main control MPU to reset, allowing the main control side power outage processing to be started again without any updating of the contents of the main control's built-in RAM.On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the main control side power outage processing can be reliably completed within the ``power supply assurance period during momentary power outage or power outage'' of approximately 7 ms, as before, determined by the hardware. In other words, in this embodiment, if a momentary or power outage occurs during the main control power-on process upon power restoration and the power from the island equipment in the gaming hall is cut off, and the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V DC to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary power outage. Therefore, if the main control power-off process cannot be completed within the "momentary or power supply assurance period" of approximately 7 ms set by the hardware electrolytic capacitor MC2, then immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, step S24 determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, preventing game play from continuing.

This software prevents the game from progressing, preventing progression to steps after step S24 (specifically, the control flow in which interrupt initial settings are made in step S42, and then interrupt permission is set in step S52 to start the main control timer interrupt processing described below), thereby preventing the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the main prize ball number information output) from being updated). In this way, when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and the power is cut off from the island equipment in the gaming hall, the system is divided into two parts: one part is handled by software to prevent any changes to the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter used to determine the output of main prize ball information)) and the other part is handled by hardware to ensure that the main control side power outage processing is completed and any changes to the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter used to determine the output of main prize ball information)) are prevented reliably.

Next, we will explain how the reservation setting for the command to be sent when power is turned on is performed in step S50. As described above, in step S50, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command are created to notify that power has been turned on (restored), and these are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. This power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2404 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2405. Here, we will first explain the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not include information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2404 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2405; in other words, the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command in step S50 does not schedule the command to be sent when power is turned on.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a jackpot game status screen (e.g., a jackpot game display screen) in the display area of the display device 1600, and the main control board 1310 is driving the attacca solenoid 2405 and the large prize opening 2005 is open by the opening/closing member, if a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 will be restored to the game status immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred based on the power restoration information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and will begin driving the attacca solenoid 2405, causing the large prize opening 2005 to transition from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member to a state in which it is open.

However, when a momentary or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Therefore, when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored while the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot gaming state as the gaming state, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover by displaying a screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, but it cannot at all indicate which round in the jackpot gaming state it is. In other words, even if, for example, a gaming ball enters the large prize opening 2005 and is detected by the large prize opening sensor 2403, and the main control board 1310 sends a large prize opening 1 count display command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the number of gaming balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the number of gaming balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005 on the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving status, but it cannot at all display which round in the jackpot gaming state (i.e. which round) it is.

In such a situation, for example, when the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state ends, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacca solenoid 2405 and sends a large prize opening 1 closed display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, instructing the large prize opening 2005 to transition from an open state to a closed state by the opening/closing member (i.e., the start of closing the large prize opening 2005 of the attacca unit 2100 between rounds), and when the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, it starts driving the attacca solenoid 2405 and sends a large prize opening 5th open display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, instructing the large prize opening 2005 to transition from an open state to an open state by the opening/closing member (i.e., the start of opening the large prize opening 2005 for the fifth round). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the screen corresponding to the probability and time-saving state described above to a screen indicating the start of five rounds of the jackpot game state in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen on the display area of the effect display device 1600 that informs the player that the game state has become favorable to the player, allowing a game ball to be received into the second starting port 2004 (for example, a screen informing the player that the movable piece is open), and the main control board 1310 is driving the starting port solenoid 2404 to open the movable piece and open the second starting port 2004, if a momentary or power outage occurs and power is then restored, the main control board 1310 will be restored to the game state it was in immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and will begin driving the starting port solenoid 2404, causing the movable piece to close and transitioning to a state in which the second starting port 2004 is closed.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 and recover when power is restored.Therefore, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state where a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004, creating a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, if a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be able to return to normal by displaying a screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, but the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to display at all in the display area of the performance display device 1600 a screen informing the player that the gaming state has become such that a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004, creating a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. For this reason, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine may be surprised by the occurrence of a momentary or power outage and forget that when power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred was one in which game balls could be received into second starting port 2004. In such cases, even though the game state at the time of power restoration is restored to one in which game balls can be received into second starting port 2004, the screen instructing the game (i.e., the screen instructing the game to place a game ball into second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600 when power is restored, which causes the player to become confused about what game to play.

As such, in the two examples mentioned above, there was a problem in that the gaming state immediately before the momentary or blackout could not be quickly restored after power was restored. In other words, when a momentary or blackout occurs and power is subsequently restored, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine may mistakenly believe that the pachinko machine's system has frozen, or in other words, that it has malfunctioned.

In this embodiment, in order for the main control board 1310 to transmit a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and power is restored), in step S50, the power-on status command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control's timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 can, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, inform the peripheral control board 1510 that, for example, in the above example, if an instantaneous power outage or a power outage occurs during the fourth round of a jackpot game and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 will return to the destination where the main control board 1310 should return to, by starting to drive the attacca solenoid 2405 and transitioning the large prize opening 2005 from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member to a state in which it is opened. Therefore, although the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of a jackpot game (that is, a screen indicating which round it is), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it can display a screen indicating that it is a jackpot game and that it is in a state in which it has started to drive the attacca solenoid 2405 and the large prize opening 2005 has been opened by the opening/closing member (for example, a screen displaying "It's a jackpot. The large prize opening is open. Play to get the game ball to enter the large prize opening." In the above example, for example, in a state where a game ball can be received by the second starting port 2004 and the game is in an advantageous state for the player, if a momentary power outage or a blackout occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 will return to the starting port socket 2005 as the destination for the return of the main control board 1310. The peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 informing the player that the resonator 2404 has been driven, causing the movable piece to open and the second starting hole 2004 to be opened (for example, a screen that tells the player the message "The movable piece is open. Please play so that the game ball enters the second starting hole."), and can instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play by placing the game ball in the second starting hole 2004 after power is restored.

This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions on where the peripheral control board 1510 should return to when power is restored after a momentary or power outage. Therefore, once power is restored, the game can be quickly restored to the state it was in immediately before the momentary or power outage. In other words, when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is restored, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine will see that the pachinko machine's system has frozen, preventing them from mistaking it for a malfunction.

Next, we will explain the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since its manufacture for inspection in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the main control board 1310 production line. When the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since its manufacture for inspection in the main control board inspection process, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power-off processing consisting of an infinite loop. Therefore, even if a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control internal RAM in step S28, the checksum values will never match in the comparison judgment in step S30, and all areas of the main control internal RAM will be cleared in step S38 except for a specific area.

As a result, when the reservation setting for the commands to be sent when the power is turned on is made in step S50, the power-on status command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. This results in only three commands being stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM: the power-on status command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command. These commands are then transmitted first in the main control timer interrupt processing described below: the power-on status command, followed by the power-on main control return destination command, followed by the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command. Using this, during the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since being manufactured for inspection, the power-on status command is transmitted as the first command from the main control board 1310 to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

The power-on state command is composed of information that indicates when the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch and the pressing section of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), information that indicates which state (probability and time-saving state) to return to when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), from the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, we will explain the problem that occurs when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

The model code of a pachinko machine can be used to identify which copyright of a work it refers to and what game specifications it has when creating the so-called max type, mid type, or sweet type of pachinko machine 1 (or more accurately, the main control board 1310) (for example, a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, or a game specification in which the number of times the special pattern changes is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) and a probability change occurs (a so-called ST machine)).

On the production line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, main control boards 1310 for multiple copyrights may be mixed when they are produced. This can lead to workers on the production line not knowing which of the multiple copyrights (for example, the copyrights for Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) the main control board 1310 is being sent down the line to manufacture for which of the multiple copyrights. Furthermore, even if the main control board 1310 is being sent down the line to manufacture a main control board 1310 for one of the multiple copyrights (for example, the copyright for Movie D), they may mistakenly believe that the main control board 1310 is being sent down the line to manufacture a main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright for Manga F).

For this reason, when main control boards 1310 for multiple different work copyrights are manufactured on the production line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, if main control boards 1310 for multiple work copyrights are mixed together, workers on the production line will not be able to confirm which work copyright the main control board 1310 manufactured on the production line belongs to, and even for the same work copyright, they will not be able to confirm which model type (max type, mid type, sweet type) or what game specifications it has (a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, or an ST machine).

As a result, if main control boards 1310 for multiple different work copyrights are mixed when manufacturing main control boards 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, the main control boards 1310 for multiple different work copyrights will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control boards 1310 to the game boards 5. As a result, workers on the game board assembly line may attach a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the work copyright. This results in a problem of reduced production efficiency of the game boards 5.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (this includes not only power-on but also power recovery after a power outage or momentary power outage), it sends a power-on status command containing information indicating the pachinko machine model code to the peripheral control board 1510. In order to do this, in step S50, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then sent during the main control's timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, during the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the production line, a worker on the production line of the manufacturer that produces pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310, and based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received by the inspection device from the main control board 1310, the inspection device derives the following information that constitutes the model code of the pachinko machine: a series code that identifies the model type (max type, middle type, or sweet type) as described above; a copyright code that identifies the copyright of the work; and game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs). By visually inspecting the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on a game specification code that identifies the game specification whereby a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of special symbol changes (such as an ST machine) in addition to the game specification whereby a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of special symbol changes, it is possible to determine which copyright of the work the main control board 1310 corresponds to, and even for the same copyright of the work, it is possible to determine which model type (max type, mid type, or sweet type) and what game specification (such as an ST machine or a game specification where when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs).

As a result, even if main control boards 1310 for multiple different game copyrights are mixed together when manufacturing main control boards 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, workers in the main control board inspection process on the production line can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type, game copyright, and game specifications of the main control board 1310, allowing them to be separated into game copyright-specific main control boards 1310 and sent to the subsequent game board assembly line. Workers on the game board assembly line can then reliably attach main control boards 1310 that correspond to game boards 5 for the game copyrights to the game boards 5, preventing a decline in game board 5 production efficiency caused by attaching main control boards 1310 that do not correspond to game boards 5 for the game copyrights to game boards 5. This can therefore contribute to improving game board 5 production efficiency.

[10-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in Figures 142 and 143.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing begins, the main control MPU switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 144 (step S100). The main control MPU's general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) has two register banks: a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in this routine, the main control side timer interrupt processing. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in this routine, the main control side timer interrupt processing, the register bank is switched from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second register bank. Note that in this embodiment, when this routine, the main control side timer interrupt processing, begins, there is no need to save each register to a stack.

Following step S100, the main control MPU performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). This timer subtraction processing, for example, manages the time for which the first special symbol display device and second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric device control processing described below, the time for which the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol variable display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric device control processing described below, as well as the ACK signal input determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether a payer ACK signal has been input, which indicates that the payout control board 633 has successfully received various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). Specifically, when the change time of the variable display pattern or normal symbol change display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the change time is subtracted by 4 ms, and when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the change time of the variable display pattern or normal symbol change display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU receives, for example, a detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, a detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, a detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2403, a detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2513, a detection signal from the first V winning opening sensor 2514, a detection signal from the first losing opening sensor 2515, a detection signal from the second V winning opening sensor 3003, a detection signal from the third losing opening sensor 3004, a detection signal from the left out opening sensor 3032 and the right out opening sensor 3033, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, a detection signal from the RWM clear box of the payout control board 63 ... special winning opening sensor 2513, a detection signal from the first V winning opening sensor The controller 1311a reads the signal from the RWM clear button 633z (this signal from the RWM clear button 633z is not an important signal in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, so it may be masked and not read), the detection signal from the door frame open switch 4a, the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b, the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, the detection signal from the left outlet sensor 3032, the detection signal from the right outlet sensor 3033, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633, which notifies the payout control board 633 that the prize ball command sent in the prize ball control processing described below has been successfully received by the payout control board 633, and stores these as input information in the input information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.In addition, when the controller 1311a reads the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402, the corresponding start port winning command classified as other is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. In other words, when a detection signal is received from the first start gate sensor 3002, the corresponding start gate winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM, and when a detection signal is received from the second start gate sensor 2402, the corresponding start gate winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process begins, the input states of all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including those for which vacant terminal processing has been performed) are first read a first time, and then, after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 μs) has elapsed, they are read a second time. The result of this second read is then compared with the result of the first read. A determination is made as to whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, then the result is read a third time, and the result of this third read is compared with the result of the second read. A determination is again made as to whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, then the result is read a fourth time, and the result of this fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. A determination is again made as to whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, then it is treated as if no game ball has entered the game, or the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the status input to all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including those for which empty terminal processing has been performed) is compared over the first to third readings, and then over the second to fourth readings, for a total of two double readings. This makes it possible to avoid false detections due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc., and therefore, the detection signal from the normal prize opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general prize opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second start opening sensor 2402, the detection signal from the special prize opening sensor 2403, the detection signal from the special prize opening sensor 2513, the detection signal from the first V prize opening sensor 2514, the detection signal from the first loss opening sensor 2515, the detection signal from the second V prize opening sensor 3003, the detection signal from the third losing port sensor 3004, the detection signal from the outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, the signal from the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633 (for example, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switch button, it becomes a setting value selection switch signal for selecting and switching the setting value), the detection signal from the door frame open switch 4a, the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b, the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, the detection signal from the outlet left sensor 3032, the detection signal from the outlet right sensor 3033, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that indicates that the payout control board 633 successfully received the prize ball command sent in the prize ball control process described below.

Following step S104, the main control MPU performs input terminal malfunction monitoring (step S105). This input terminal malfunction monitoring process checks the status of any input terminals of the main control MPU's various input ports that have been treated as vacant terminals based on the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104. Specifically, for example, input terminal PA7 of input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded (GND) as a vacant terminal, so its logic state is always LOW. Therefore, the input terminal malfunction monitoring process checks whether the logic state of any input terminals of the various input ports that have been treated as vacant terminals is LOW based on the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104. If the main control MPU determines that the logic state of an input terminal that has been treated as vacant terminal is not LOW, it stores a malfunction command classified as a notification display, indicating that a malfunction has occurred in the main control MPU's peripheral circuitry, as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's internal RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU performs a win/loss random number update process (step S106). This win/loss random number update process updates the pattern random numbers described above. In addition to these random numbers, the MPU also updates the random numbers for determining the initial values for the jackpot pattern and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small win pattern, which are updated in the non-win/loss random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 143. These random numbers for determining the initial values for the jackpot pattern and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small win pattern are updated in the main control side main process and this main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby further increasing randomness. In contrast, since the pattern random numbers are random numbers related to win/loss determination (win determination), the respective counters count up only each time this win/loss random number update process is performed. In addition, the random numbers used to determine whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol and the random numbers used to determine the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol, as described above, are also updated by this winning/losing random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol is an initial value update type counter that is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from a minimum value to a maximum value, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. It counts up from the initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol. Once the counter has finished counting up the range of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol from its minimum value to its maximum value, the initial value determination random number for determining whether a win is a winning symbol is updated by this win/loss random number update process. The initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol.

In this embodiment, the random numbers used to determine the initial values for the jackpot symbol and the random numbers used to determine the initial values for the small win symbol are updated by the non-win/lose random number update process in step S56 of the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing) shown in FIG. 143, and the win/lose random number update process in step S106 of the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine. However, if the processing time for this routine fluctuates each time the interrupt timer is generated and the main control side main processing is repeatedly executed within the time remaining until the next interrupt timer is generated, causing the number of times the non-win/lose random number update process in step S56 is executed to become random, the random numbers used to determine the initial values for the jackpot symbol and the random numbers used to determine the initial values for the small win symbol can be updated only in the non-win/lose random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU performs a ball counting process (step S107). In this ball counting process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, when a detection signal is input from the left outlet sensor 3032 and the left outlet sensor 3032 detects a game ball collected by the outlet 1008 located in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5, a calculation is performed to add (increment) a value of 1 to the value of the collected ball counter, which counts the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008; and when a detection signal is input from the right outlet sensor 3033 and the right outlet sensor 3033 detects a game ball collected by the outlet 1008 located in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5, a calculation is performed to add (increment) a value of 1 to the value of the collected ball counter, which counts the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008. In other words, in the ball counting process, when the left outlet sensor 3032 detects a game ball collected by the outlet 1008 and the right outlet sensor 3033 detects a game ball collected by the outlet 1008, a calculation is performed to add a value of 2 to the value of the collected ball counter. The main control MPU stores the value of the collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the count result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008 in a dedicated out ball count area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and also sets the output of a lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor 1310h and stores it in the output information storage area as output information. Furthermore, when the value of the collected ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, each time the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008 reaches 10, the main control MPU creates a ball collection command to notify this fact and stores it in the output information storage area as transmission information. Furthermore, when the value of the recovered ball counter, which is the result of the calculation, reaches its maximum value (65,535 in this embodiment) and the main control MPU adds (increments) a value of 1 to the recovered ball counter value, the recovered ball counter value overflows and becomes 0, and the main control MPU performs a calculation to add from this value 0.

Following step S107, the main control MPU performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above and a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information, and a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The created prize ball command and self-check command are then sent to the payout control board 633 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 prize balls; and since the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify this, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 633. If a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has successfully received this prize ball command is not input within a specified time, a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and sent to the payout control board 633.

In addition, in the prize ball control process of step S108, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, if the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, a main prize ball number information output command classified as "other" is created to communicate this fact, and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of this counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information is calculated by reading input information from the input information storage area described above, and counting the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on this input information, that is, based on the game balls that have entered the various prize openings such as the general prize opening 2001, the normal prize opening 2003, the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, and the large prize opening 2005 (hereinafter referred to as the "various prize openings provided on the game board 5") provided on the game board 5, and is stored and updated in the prize ball planned information storage area of the main control built-in RAM during the prize ball control process in step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM is read, and input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and added to this read value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter by the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on this input information. If the value indicating this added number of balls exceeds 10 (in other words, if the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to notify this fact and stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. The value indicating the exceeded number of balls is then stored and updated as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S108, the main control MPU performs a frame command reception process (step S110). The dispensing control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified as status indications (e.g., frame status 1 command, error clearance navigation command, and frame status 2 command). During the frame command reception process, when various commands are successfully received as payer serial data, information informing the payer control board 633 of this fact is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. The main control MPU also formats the command successfully received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified as status indications (frame status 1 command, error clearance navigation command, and frame status 2 command)) and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S110, the main control MPU performs a fraud detection process (step S112). During this fraud detection process, it checks for any abnormalities related to the winning balls. If it determines that fraud involving radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation cheating") is occurring, it increments the value of the radio wave irradiation cheating counter by one. The value of this radio wave cheating counter is incremented each time the fraud detection process determines that a radio wave irradiation cheating has occurred. When the RAM is cleared, the value of the radio wave cheating counter is set to 0 (zero) as its initial value. When the value of the radio wave cheating counter reaches its upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 250 based on the 4 ms interrupt period during which the fraud detection process performs the main control timer interrupt process), it creates a radio wave irradiation cheating notification command classified as a notification display indicating that a radio wave irradiation cheating has occurred, and stores this command as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, input information is read from the input information storage area described above. If a detection signal is input from the magnetic sensor 2010, it is determined that fraud using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnet goto") is occurring, and the value of the magnet goto counter is incremented by one. This magnet goto counter value is incremented each time a radio wave irradiation goto is determined to have occurred in the fraud detection process. It is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the value is set to 0 (zero) as its initial value. When the magnet goto counter value reaches its upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 250 based on the 4 ms interrupt period during which the fraud detection process performs the main control timer interrupt process), a magnet goto notification command is created that is classified as a notification display indicating that radio wave irradiation goto is occurring, and this command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In this embodiment, this mechanism reliably detects and notifies the user of magnet gouges, helping game parlor staff and other attendants to discover magnet gouges at an early stage.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when an abnormal winning occurs at the large prize opening, such as when a detection signal is input from the large prize opening sensor 2403 when the game is not in a jackpot game state (when a game ball enters the large prize opening 2005), an abnormal winning display command classified as an abnormal condition and a notification display is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In the fraud detection process of step S112, if radio wave irradiation and/or magnet strikes are detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 1 to indicate that fraud has been detected. However, if radio wave irradiation and magnet strikes are not detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 0 to indicate that no fraud has been detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when RAM is cleared, the initial value is set to 0 (zero). Furthermore, if an abnormal win at the large prize slot is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG may also be set to a value of 1 to indicate that fraud has been detected.

Following step S112, the main control MPU performs a launch permission signal setting process (step S113). In this launch permission signal setting process, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to inform the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of game ball B is permitted. Specifically, based on the value of the aforementioned fraudulent activity detection flag FD-FLG, when the main control MPU determines that the fraudulent activity detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 0, i.e., that no fraudulent activity has been detected, the main control MPU sets the logic of the launch permission signal to the launch permission logic and stores this as output information in the aforementioned output information storage area. On the other hand, when the fraudulent activity detection flag FD-FLG is not set to a value of 0 (i.e., is set to a value of 1), i.e., that fraudulent activity has been detected, the main control MPU sets the logic of the launch permission signal to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the launch permission logic, and stores this as output information in the aforementioned output information storage area. The main control MPU reads input information from the input information storage area and, based on this input information, if a detection signal is input from door frame opening switch 4a and door frame opening switch 4a detects that door frame 3 is open relative to main frame 4, or if a detection signal is input from main frame opening switch 4b and main frame opening switch 4b detects that main frame 4 is open relative to outer frame 2, sets the logic of the fire permission signal to a fire stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the fire permission logic, and stores this as output information in the output information storage area. The logic of the fire permission signal is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that it is set to the fire stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the fire permission logic as the initial value (default) from the time the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (or restored) until the fire permission signal setting process of step S113 in the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started.

Following step S113, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric feature control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric feature control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit. The random number (random number value) extracted by the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit when the latch signal is input is obtained from the main control's built-in hardware random number latch register, and this obtained random number value is set as the special random number. It then determines whether the special random number (i.e., the random number value obtained from the main control's built-in hardware random number latch register) matches a jackpot determination value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM (determines whether a jackpot game state should be generated (referred to as a "special lottery")), or it retrieves the value of the counter that updates the symbol random number and determines whether it matches one of the win type determination values pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM according to the jackpot type or small win type (determines the win type).

If these judgment results (lottery results) are determined by the first start opening sensor 3002, various commands related to the special symbol 1 synchronization effect are created, while if the judgment result (lottery results) are determined by the second start opening sensor 2402, various commands related to the special symbol 2 synchronization effect are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area. In addition, the special symbol variable display pattern is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above, and the output of a lighting signal to the first special symbol display device or second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the first special symbol display device or second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 in accordance with the determined special symbol variable display pattern, and this is stored as output information in the output information memory area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a jackpot game state is reached, various commands classified as jackpot-related (jackpot opening command, command to display Nth time that large prize entrance 1 is opened, command to display closure of large prize entrance 1, command to display count of large prize entrance 1, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, the output of a drive signal to the attacca solenoid 2414 to open and close the opening and closing member is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or, when the number of times (rounds) that the large prize entrance 2005 changes from a closed state to an open state is two, At one time, the function display unit 1400 sets the output of a lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp to light up the 2-round indicator lamp, and stores this as output information in the output information storage area; when there are 15 rounds, the function display unit 1400 sets the output of a lighting signal to the 15-round indicator lamp to light up the 15-round indicator lamp, and stores this as output information in the output information storage area; or the function display unit 1400 sets the output of a lighting signal to the status indicator to light up a specified color to indicate whether or not a time reduction has occurred, and stores this as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control MPU performs normal symbol and normal electric device control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric device control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and normal prize slot winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this normal prize slot winning processing, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the normal prize slot sensor 2401 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on the result of this determination, if a detection signal has been input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the random number used to determine whether the normal symbol has been won described above is extracted and stored as normal prize slot winning information in the normal prize slot winning information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

This regular prize slot winning information storage area has four sections, Section 0 through Section 3, with regular prize slot winning information stored in Section 0, Section 1, Section 2, and Section 3 in that order. For example, if regular prize slot winning information is stored in Sections 0 through 2 of the regular prize slot winning information storage, when a detection signal from regular prize slot sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the regular prize slot winning information is stored in Section 3 of the regular prize slot winning information storage.

Regular prize slot winning information stored in Section 0 of the regular prize slot winning information memory is set in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM. When this regular prize slot winning information is set, the regular prize slot winning information in Section 1 of the regular prize slot winning information memory is shifted to Section 0 of the regular prize slot winning information memory, the regular prize slot winning information in Section 2 of the regular prize slot winning information memory is shifted to Section 1 of the regular prize slot winning information memory, and the regular prize slot winning information in Section 3 of the regular prize slot winning information memory is shifted to Section 2 of the regular prize slot winning information memory, and Section 3 of the regular prize slot winning information memory becomes empty. For example, if regular prize winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the regular prize winning information storage, the regular prize winning information in the first section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the zeroth section of the regular prize winning information storage, and the regular prize winning information in the second section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the first section of the regular prize winning information storage, leaving the second section of the regular prize winning information storage and the third section of the regular prize winning information storage empty. If regular prize winning information is stored in the first, second, and third sections of the regular prize winning information storage, the output of the lighting signal for the regular reserve indicator of the functional display unit 1400 is set based on the regular prize winning information described above, so that the total number of stored regular prize winning information is treated as reserved balls and the regular reserve indicator of the functional display unit 1400 is illuminated, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Following the normal prize slot winning process, the normal prize slot winning information set in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has been won is extracted from this read normal prize slot winning information and a determination is made as to whether it matches the normal symbol winning determination value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM (referred to as the "normal lottery"). The result of this determination (the result of the normal lottery) determines whether or not to open or close the movable piece. If this decision is made to open or close the movable piece, the movable piece will be in an open state, creating a game state in which a game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004, providing an advantageous game state for the player. The normal symbol variable display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the normal symbol variable display pattern random number described above, and various commands related to normal symbol synchronization performance are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In addition, a lighting signal is output to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 lights up according to the determined normal symbol variable display pattern, and this is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

Furthermore, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol has been hit matches the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the ROM built into the main control, various commands related to the normal electric role presentation are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area, and a drive signal is set to be output to the start port solenoid 2412 to open and close the movable piece, and this is stored as output information in the output information memory area mentioned above. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol has been hit does not match the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the ROM built into the main control, a normal symbol change display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol change display pattern mentioned above, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization presentation are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area mentioned above. In addition, a lighting signal is set to be output to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on in accordance with the determined normal symbol change display pattern, and this is stored as output information in the output information memory area mentioned above. In this example, the probability of winning the regular lottery (the probability of winning normally) is 1 in 50.

Following step S116, the main control MPU performs a setting value confirmation display process (step S117). This setting value confirmation display process, which will be described in detail later, reads input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it receives a detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a ON, and The system determines that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on a setting key ON signal from the switch 1311a, and that the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON based on the setting key ON signal, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met. On the other hand, the system determines that the main frame 4 is not open relative to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b, and/or that the setting key switch 1311a is not set to ON based on the setting key ON signal, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not met. In the setting value confirmation display process, if the setting value display permission condition is met, the system sets the output of a lighting signal to display the setting value stored in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM on the setting display 1310g, and stores the setting value in the output information storage area. On the other hand, if the setting value display permission condition is met, the system terminates and returns to the main routine.

Following step S117, the main control MPU performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above through the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, the main control MPU outputs a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 633 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU when various commands from the payout control board 633 have been successfully received based on the output information; when a jackpot game is in progress, it outputs a drive signal to the attacca solenoid 2414, which opens and closes the opening and closing member of the large prize opening 2005; and when a jackpot game is in progress, it outputs a drive signal to the start opening solenoid 2412, which opens and closes the movable piece. In addition, it also outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a small jackpot information output signal, a special pattern display information output signal, and so on. It outputs various information (game information) related to the game, such as a force signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time-saving information output signal, and a start port winning information output signal, to the payout control board 633, outputs a launch permission signal set to launch permission logic or launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to the payout control board 633, outputs a display signal to the base monitor 1310h which displays the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008, and outputs a lighting signal to display the setting value stored in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S118, the main control MPU performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified as related to special prize 1 synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to special prize 2 synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to big wins (for example, a large prize entrance 1 count display command equivalent to a large prize entrance count command based on a detection signal from the large prize entrance sensor 2403 when a game ball entering the large prize entrance 2005 is detected), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal prize synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to normal electric role effects, various commands classified as notification displays, various commands classified as status displays, various commands classified as test-related commands, and various other commands (for example, when the main control board 1310 detects that a ball has entered various prize entrances provided on the game board 5, The main control internal RAM 550 stores various commands classified as specific histories (e.g., a main prize ball number information output command that instructs the hall computer to transmit a main prize ball number information output signal as main prize ball number information to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls collected reaches 10), and various commands classified as specific histories (e.g., a ball collection command that notifies the hall computer each time the number of game balls collected at the outlet 1008 reaches 10, a setting change command that notifies the hall computer that a setting value has been changed, an error display command that notifies the hall computer that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control internal RAM are unreliable), and a setting key ON command that notifies the hall computer that a setting value stored in a setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM, which will be described later, should be checked). Each packet of main serial data consists of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main serial data consists of a status indicating the type of command with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating the variation of the effect with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values; this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the following order: status, mode, and sum value. As mentioned above, in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V DC to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. Therefore, the main serial transmission port built into the main control MPU is capable of at least transferring the command set in its transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register via the serial management unit and completing transmission from the transmission shift register as main serial data. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption occurs after power is turned on, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when power is turned on in step S50 of the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 143, in order to inform that power has been restored, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area of the main control built-in RAM, and as main serial data, the power-on status command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which then constitute the power-on main control return destination command, which then constitute the power-on main prize ball number information output determination command, which then constitute the status, mode, and sum value, which then constitute the power-on counter notification command, which then constitute the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, which then constitute the power-on main control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In addition, when setting the working area of the main control's built-in RAM in step S34 of the main control's power-on processing, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this information may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. In such cases, after various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information have been sent, a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command are sent.

Whenever the number of game balls collected at the outlet 1008 reaches 10, a ball collection command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the same. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of game balls collected at the outlet 1008 for each ball collection command received, and updates the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) (information correlating the counted value (i.e., the total number of game balls collected at the outlet 1008) with the updated date and time). If the ball collection command cannot be received and the pachinko machine 1 is powered off when the gaming hall closes, the ball collection information correlating the last counted value (i.e., the total number of game balls collected at the outlet 1008) with the updated date and time will be stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on when the gaming hall begins business, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 recreates the ball collection information stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) from the day business begins, and the ball collection information is stored and stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) as ball collection history information. The counted value stored and stored as ball collection information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be the value counted from 0 (zero) on that day, or it may be both the value counted from 0 (zero) on that day and the sum of the values counted up to that point.

Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control's built-in WDT (step S122) and ends this routine. The main control's built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU. This clears the timekeeping by the main control's built-in WDT. Then, by restarting the timekeeping by the main control's built-in WDT, the main control MPU is not forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT.

As described above, the main control board 1310 can execute and complete the above-mentioned backup process for storing game information as the game progresses while the game is in progress, before power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and when power is restored, based on the game information for which the backup process was executed, the main control board 1310 can output a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the drive state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and the attacca solenoid 2414, which are the electrical drive sources, via the port output process of step S118 in this routine when power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, as the destination to which the game progress will be returned by the main control board 1310. In other words, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 143, the main control board 1310 creates a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same processing shown in FIG. 142, and stores these as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. This is stored in the transmission information storage area, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the main serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, followed by the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command, which are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in that order, and then the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in that order.

For this reason, based on the main control return destination command from the main control board 1310 at power-on, the peripheral control board 1510 can display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return game progress when power is restored. As a result, when a momentary or power outage occurs while a player is playing and power is subsequently restored, the game can be quickly restored to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage, and the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return game progress can be notified by displaying in the display area of the effect display device 1600, thereby preventing the pachinko machine 1 system from appearing frozen to the player and being mistaken for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly restoring the game to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage after power is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a malfunction.

Furthermore, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after production for inspection, as described above, step S38 in the main control side power-on processing shown in Fig. 142 always clears all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for specific areas. As a result, when the reservation setting for commands to be sent at power-on is made in step S50 of the same processing shown in Fig. 143, a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. By doing so, only the power-on status command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are sent as transmission information to the main control's built-in RAM. The data is stored in the transmission information memory area of M, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the main serial data is transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, followed by the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command, followed by the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process is configured to display detailed model information on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the information indicating the pachinko machine's model code contained in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310. This information includes the series code that identifies the model type (max type, mid type, or sweet type) described above, the copyright code that identifies the copyright of the work, and the game specification code that identifies the game specifications (for example, a game specification in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, and in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times for special symbols to fluctuate (ST machine)).

[16-4. Setting change processing]
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is performed in step S37 of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

When the setting change process begins, the main control MPU acquires the current setting values, as shown in Figure 145 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU acquires the setting values stored in a dedicated area for setting values in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM. When acquiring these setting values, they can be read or extracted; however, when extracting the setting values, the extracted setting values are set in a specified area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by treating the various information stored in the main control's built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating their sum. This is the same process as the checksum calculation performed in step S28 of the main control's power-on processing shown in Figure 142.

Following step S202, the main control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored during the main control side power-off processing (when power is off) in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 143 (step S204). If the main control MPU determines in step S204 that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determinations in steps S204 and S206 are the same as the determinations in steps S30 and S32, respectively, in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 142. As mentioned above, the backup flag BK-FLG is a flag that indicates whether game backup information such as various information, checksum values (sum values), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG has been stored in the main control's built-in RAM during the main control's power-off processing described below. It is set to a value of 1 when the main control's power-off processing has been completed successfully, and to a value of 0 when the main control's power-off processing has not been completed successfully.

If the main control MPU determines in step S204 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or if the main control MPU determines in step S206 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), i.e., that the main control side power-off processing did not end normally, it determines whether the setting value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). Here, the "normal range" refers to the value to which the setting value can be changed, and in this embodiment, it is pre-set to values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. If the flowchart proceeds to the determination in step S208, it means that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control's internal RAM, or that the main control side power-off processing did not end normally at the time of power interruption. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control's internal RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). Therefore, in step S208, the main control MPU determines whether the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM acquired in step S200 is within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6, and if it determines that the setting value is within the normal range, it uses that setting value as is.

On the other hand, if the main control MPU determines in step S208 that the value is not within the normal range, it sets the setting value acquired in step S200 to the default setting value of 1 (step S210). Note that step S208 determines whether the setting value acquired in step S200 and stored in the setting value-dedicated area in a specific area of the main control's internal RAM is within the normal range of settings values 1 through 6. However, instead of performing step S208, if the main control MPU determines in step S204 that the checksum values do not match, or if the main control MPU determines in step S206 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), i.e., that the main control side power-off processing has not ended normally, it may proceed to step S210 and set the setting value acquired in step S200 to the default setting value of 1.

In step S206, if the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is equal to 1, i.e., that the main control side power-off processing has been completed normally, or in step S208, if the main control MPU determines that the value is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to light up the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g, thereby displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214).

Following step S214, the main control MPU determines whether the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z on the dispensing control board 633 has been operated (step S216). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has three combined functions (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error reset switch), and in this case, it functions as a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values. This determination is made by reading a signal (setting value selection switch signal) indicating that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z on the dispensing control board 633 has been operated, and determining whether a setting value setting change signal has been input from the RWM clear button 633z. The main control MPU determines that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated when a setting value selection switching signal is input from the RWM clear button 633z, and determines that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not being operated when a setting value selection switching signal is not input from the RWM clear button 633z.

If the main control MPU determines in step S216 that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated, it performs a calculation to add (increment) the set value by 1, updating it (step S218). At this time, if the set value stored in a dedicated area for set values in a specific area of the main control internal RAM was retrieved and set in a predetermined area when the set value was obtained in step S200, the set value set in this predetermined area will be added (incremented) by 1.

Following step S218, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g, thereby displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S220).

Following step S220, or in the determination of step S216, if the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, the main control MPU determines whether the Enter key has been operated (step S222). In this determination, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key has been inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder has been rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key switch 1311a ON (i.e., the setting key cylinder has been rotated counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key switch 1311a ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF)). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it off, and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it on a second time, which turns the setting key switch 1311a on as the enter key. This is done based on the enter key on signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the enter key on signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the enter key has been operated, but when the enter key on signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the enter key has not been operated.

If the main control MPU determines in step S222 that the Enter key has not been operated, it returns to the determination in step S216 and determines whether the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated. If the main control MPU determines in step S216 that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated, it performs the processing of steps S218 and S220 again and makes the determination in step S222. If it determines that the Enter key has not been operated, it returns to the determination in step S216. Each time the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated until the Enter key is operated, the setting value is incremented by one and updated and displayed on the setting display 1310g. If the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the setting value updated when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z was operated immediately before is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Furthermore, even if a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and is then restored before step S222 determines that the Enter key has been operated, the setting value updated immediately before the power outage or momentary power outage is not stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and is therefore discarded, and the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM remains unchanged.

On the other hand, if the main control MPU determines in step S222 that the Enter key has been operated, it stores the updated setting value in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM (step S224). At this time, if the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM was retrieved and set in a specified area when the setting value was acquired in step S200, the setting value set in this specified area will be updated, and this updated setting value will be returned to the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM. Even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and power is restored after the processing of step S224 is completed, the updated setting value when the Enter key was operated before the power outage or momentary interruption occurred will be stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM.

Following step S224, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key has been turned off (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key has been turned off when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the enter key on to its initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a off). This OFF operation turns off the setting key switch 1311a. The main control MPU determines that the setting key has been turned off when an OFF signal is received from the setting key switch 1311a, but determines that the setting key has not been turned off when an OFF signal is not received from the setting key switch 1311a.

If, in the judgment of step S226, the main control MPU determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, it returns to the judgment of step S226 and repeats the judgment of step S226 until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, if the main control MPU determines in step S226 that the setting key has been turned OFF, it stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g, thereby preventing the updated setting value from being displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to 0 (step S232). As described above, this setting change permission flag CS-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to permit changes to the current setting value (the value among setting values 1 to 6 set at the time the setting key cylinder of setting key switch 1311a is first turned ON) stored in the setting value-dedicated area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM. It is set to 1 when allowing changes to the setting value, and to 0 when not allowing changes to the setting value. In step S232, setting the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to 0 prohibits future changes to the setting value.

Following step S232, the main control MPU determines whether the setting value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The "normal range" is the same as that determined in step S208, and as described above, in this embodiment, it is pre-set to values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU determines whether the setting value stored in the setting value-dedicated area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM in step S224 is within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6, in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is an abnormal value. If it is determined to be within the normal range, that setting value is used as is.

If the main control MPU determines in step S233 that the value is within the normal range, it performs serial communication initialization (step S234), then creates a setting change command and sets the transmission information (step S236), and then performs peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in which the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as main-circuit serial data (step S238), and then terminates this routine. The serial communication initialization in step S234 is the same processing as the serial communication initialization in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 143, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 144. Here, the serial communication initialization in step S234 precedes the serial communication initialization in step S44. In the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510. This is because the setting change command notifies the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed, taking priority over the reservation of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 143. The setting change command is a command that notifies the peripheral control board 1510 of the changed setting value and completion of setting value storage. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information associating setting values with date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

On the other hand, if the main control MPU determines in step S233 that the value is outside the normal range, it performs error display processing (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. This infinite loop causes the state after the error display processing has ended to be maintained, making it impossible to continue playing the game, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be turned off and then on again. This error display processing, which will be explained in detail later, determines that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control's internal RAM, or that the main control's power-off processing did not end normally when the power was turned off, and displays an error message to that effect, stating that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control's internal RAM (or that they are unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

[16-5. Setting value confirmation display process]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be described. This setting value confirmation display process is performed in step S117 of the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

When the setting value confirmation display process begins, the main control MPU determines whether the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 0 (step S350), as shown in Figure 146. This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag used to confirm the setting value stored in a dedicated area for setting values in a specific area of the main control's internal RAM, and is set to 1 when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, and 0 when the setting value is not being displayed for confirmation.

In the judgment of step S350, if the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to a value of 0, i.e., if the setting value is not being displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU judges whether the main frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON (step S352). In this judgment, the main control MPU reads input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it checks whether the main frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON by detecting a detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and whether the setting key has been inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder has been rotated 60 degrees clockwise from its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a) to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a ON, and the setting key switch 1311 Based on the setting key ON signal from switch 4b, it is determined that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, and based on the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned ON, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are met. However, based on the detection signal from switch 4b, it is determined that the main frame 4 is not open relative to the outer frame 2, and/or based on the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a has not been turned ON, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are not met.

If the main control MPU determines in step S352 that the predetermined conditions for permitting display of set values are not met, it simply terminates this routine. However, if it determines that the predetermined conditions for permitting display of set values are met, it sets the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG to a value of 1 to display the set values for confirmation (step S354), and then acquires the current setting values (step S356). Here, the main control MPU acquires the set values stored in a dedicated area for set values in a specific area of the main control's internal RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU determines whether the setting value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The "normal range" is the same as the determination in step S208 and step S233 in the setting change processing of FIG. 182, and as described above, in this embodiment, it is pre-set to values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. In the determination in step S357, the main control MPU determines whether the setting value acquired in step S356 (i.e., the setting value stored in the setting value-dedicated area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM) is within the normal range of values 1 through 6, in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is an abnormal value. If it is determined to be within the normal range, that setting value is used as is.

If the main control MPU determines in step S357 that the setting value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range, it outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU creates a setting key ON command and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM, sets the setting key ON command (step S360), and terminates this routine. This setting key ON command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 144. The setting key ON command is a command that indicates that this routine, the setting value confirmation display process, has begun (i.e., that the setting values stored in the setting value-dedicated area in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM should be confirmed).

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting key ON operation command, it updates the setting key ON operation history information (information associating the fact that the setting value was confirmed with the date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

Furthermore, when the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a on peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting key ON operation command, a predetermined specific history information display permission condition is met, which allows the display of specific history information such as the ball collection history information, setting value history information, error display history information, and setting key ON operation history information, as described above. When this predetermined specific history information display permission condition is met, the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a on peripheral control board 1510 controls the display area of performance display device 1600 to switch from the image currently being displayed to a specific history information display image that selectively displays the specific history information, by rotating rotation operation unit 302 and pressing operation unit 303 by a person checking the specific history information.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not 0 (has the value 1), that is, when the set value is being displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key has been turned OFF (step S362). To make this determination, the main control MPU reads input information from the input information storage area described above and, based on this input information, determines that the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the enter key ON to its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF. This is done based on an OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and if an OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it determines that the setting key has been turned OFF, but if an OFF signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

If the main control MPU determines in step S362 that the setting key has not been pressed OFF, it terminates the routine. However, if it determines that the setting key has been pressed OFF, it sets the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG to 0 (step S364), indicating that the setting value will not be displayed for confirmation (step S366). It then stops outputting the illumination signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g, thereby hiding the acquired setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S366). It then creates a setting key OFF command and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's internal RAM. It then sets the setting key OFF command (step S368), and terminates the routine. This setting key OFF command is transmitted during the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 of the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 144. The setting key OFF command is a command that indicates that this routine, the setting value confirmation and display process, has ended (i.e., that the setting values stored in the dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM have been confirmed).

When the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a in peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the aforementioned predetermined specific history information display permission condition is no longer met. At this time, if the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a in peripheral control board 1510 was controlling the display of the aforementioned specific history information display image in the display area of performance display device 1600, it will control the display to switch back to the image that was displayed in the display area of performance display device 1600 immediately before switching to the specific history information display image, thereby returning to the original image.

On the other hand, if the main control MPU determines in step S357 that the value is not within the normal range, it disables the interrupt (step S370). This setting stops the main control timer interrupt process shown in Figure 144, which is repeated every 4 ms.

Following step S370, the main control MPU performs error display processing (step S372) and then enters an infinite loop in which it continues clearing the main control's built-in WDT (step S374). This infinite loop causes the main control's built-in WDT to be continuously cleared. Because the main control's built-in WDT cannot be stopped once activated, continuing to clear the main control's built-in WDT clears the timer count by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU, and restarts the timer count by the main control's built-in WDT. This prevents the main control MPU from being forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT. Furthermore, this infinite loop maintains the state in which the error display processing has ended, making it impossible to play the game at all. Consequently, the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned back on. This error display process, which will be explained in detail later, determines that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control's internal RAM, or that the main control's power-off processing did not end normally when the power was shut off, and displays an error message indicating that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control's internal RAM are unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

[16-6. Error display processing]
Next, the error display process will be described. This error display process is performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in Fig. 142, in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in Fig. 142 (in step S240 in the setting change process shown in Fig. 145), and in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in Fig. 146.

When the error display process is initiated, the main control MPU stops the launch permission signal (step S400), as shown in Figure 147. As described above, the launch permission signal conveys permission to launch game ball B to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. When this logic is set to launch permission logic, it can convey that launch is permitted, while when this logic is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the inverse of the launch permission logic, it can convey that launch is stopped (not permitted).

When this error display processing routine is initiated as one of the processes performed in step S33 of the main control power-on processing shown in FIG. 142 or step S37 of the main control power-on processing shown in FIG. 142 (specifically, step S240 of the setting change processing shown in FIG. 145), the main control MPU is unable to perform the interrupt permission setting in step S52 of the main control power-on processing shown in FIG. 143, and therefore is unable to perform the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 144, and is unable to perform the launch permission signal setting processing in step S113 of the same processing. The launch permission signal is output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU via the main control output circuit with reset function to the launch control unit 633b of the dispensing control board 633. Therefore, when power is restored, the main control output circuit with reset function is reset, and its logic becomes launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the inverse of the launch permission logic.

Therefore, when this routine, the error display processing, is started as one of the processes performed in step S33 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 142 or as one of the processes performed in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 142 (specifically, the process performed in step S240 of the setting change processing shown in FIG. 145), the main control MPU sets the logic of the launch permission signal to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in step S400 to reliably prevent game ball B from being launched even after power is restored and this routine, the error display processing, is started, and outputs it from the output terminal of its specified output port to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with reset function.

When this routine, the error display processing, is started as the processing performed in step S372 of the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 146, the main control MPU determines in step S357 of the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 146 that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control's internal RAM. Although the main control MPU has already performed the interrupt permission setting in step S52 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 143, the interrupt non-permission setting was already performed in step S370 of the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 146 before this routine, the error display processing, is started. Therefore, when this routine, the error display processing, is terminated, as described above, an infinite loop is entered, and the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 144 cannot be performed, and the launch permission signal setting processing in step S113 of the same processing cannot be performed.

Therefore, when this routine, the error display processing, is started as processing performed in step S372 of the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 146, the main control MPU, in step S400, sets the logic of the launch permission signal to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to reliably prevent game ball B from being launched when there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, and outputs it from the output terminal of the specified output port to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with reset function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal is output to the setting display 1310g to display the letter E as an error message on the setting display 1310g, thereby displaying an error message on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In step S404, a lighting signal is output to the function display unit 1400 to light up all of the various indicators on the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial settings (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets the transmission information (step S408), and then performs peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing to transmit the transmission information (error display command) set in step S406 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data (step S410), and then ends this routine.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change processing shown in Figure 145 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 143, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410 is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 in the setting change processing shown in Figure 145 and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 144. This routine, the error display processing, starts and ends as the processing performed in step S33 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 142, the processing performed in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 142 (the processing performed in step S240 of the setting change processing shown in FIG. 145), and the processing performed in step S372 of the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 146, and as described above, it enters an infinite loop, and this infinite loop causes the state after the error display processing has ended to be maintained, making it impossible to progress in the game.

Therefore, in this embodiment, serial communication initialization is performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410.

The error display command is a command that notifies the user that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are unreliable). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, it updates the error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the date and time it was received) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

Furthermore, when the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a on peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command, it controls the display of a message image in white text on a blue background in the display area of performance display device 1600, reading "A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant.", and controls the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant" to be forcibly set to maximum volume and played from various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, main frame speaker 622, etc.) regardless of the volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch on peripheral control board 1510. The process of issuing a RAM error notification via an error display command has the highest priority, and if the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a on peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command after receiving a command indicating another error, it will issue a RAM error notification as the highest priority.

[11. Various control processes of the dispensing control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the dispensing control board 633 shown in Fig. 137 will be described with reference to Figs. 148 to 151. Fig. 148 is a flowchart showing an example of the dispensing control unit power-on process, Fig. 149 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the dispensing control unit power-on process in Fig. 148, Fig. 150 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the dispensing control unit power-on process following Fig. 149, and Fig. 151 is a flowchart showing an example of the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process. First, the dispensing control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process.

[11-1. Processing when power is turned on for the dispensing control unit]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, as shown in Figures 148 to 150. When this payout control unit power-on processing starts, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of the payout control MPU's interrupts. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt processing occurs, it is processed with priority.

Following step S500, the dispensing control MPU performs input/output settings (I/O input/output settings) (step S502). This I/O input/output setting involves setting various input ports and output ports of the dispensing control MPU.

Following step S502, the dispensing control MPU performs wait timer process 1 (step S506) and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately between power-on and reaching the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, during a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops. If the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. Similarly, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage between power-on and reaching the predetermined voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process that waits until the voltage exceeds the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes after power-on. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). The determination in step S508 is based on the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the dispensing control MPU determines whether the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated (step S512). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error reset switch). In this case, it functions as a RAM clear switch to completely erase information stored in a specified area of the dispensing control built-in RAM. This determination is made when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is HI, in which case it is determined that RAM clearing will not be performed and that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is LOW, it is determined that RAM clearing will be performed and that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated.

If, in step S512, the dispensing control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated, it sets the value of the dispensing RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to 1 (step S514). In other words, the dispensing control MPU is in a state where it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the dispensing control MPU (i.e., the dispensing control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time from when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, if the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to erase payout information related to payouts stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, such as various flags and various information stored in various information storage areas (e.g., the prize ball stock count PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command count DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY signal output setting information, which sets the logic state of the PRDY signal, stored in the CR communication information storage area). It is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased, and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the payout control MPU's general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register).

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs a setting to allow access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). This setting allows access to the payout control built-in RAM, allowing, for example, writing (storing) or reading payout information.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer, for example, indicates the address pushed onto the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) currently in use, or the address pushed onto the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when terminating a subroutine and returning to this routine. The stack pointer advances each time a stack is pushed onto the stack. In step S520, the stack pointer is set to the initial address, and the register contents, return address, etc. are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. The stack pointer then returns to the initial address by reading the stack items in order from the last to the first pushed.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is to be erased, and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not to be erased.

In step S522, if the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 0, meaning that the payout information is not to be erased, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum calculates the sum of the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, treating it as a numerical value.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored during the payout control unit power-off processing (when power is turned off), described below (step S526). In step S526, if the payout control MPU determines that the values match, it determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is set to 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag that indicates whether payout backup information such as payout information and checksum values was stored and retained in the payout control internal RAM during the payout control unit power-off processing, described below, and is set to 1 when the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed successfully, and to 0 when the payout control unit power-off processing has not been completed successfully.

In the judgment of step S528, when the dispensing backup flag HBK-FLG is set to a value of 1, i.e., when the dispensing control unit power outage processing is determined to have been completed normally, the dispensing control MPU sets the working area of the dispensing control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the dispensing backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 0, power recovery information is read from the ROM built into the dispensing control MPU (i.e., the dispensing control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the working area of the dispensing control built-in RAM. This sets information to be used for various processes based on payout information related to payouts, such as the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas (for example, the prize ball stock count PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command count DRV, and mismatch counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY signal output setting information that sets the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, and the mismatch counter reset determination time stored in the time management information storage area). Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state when power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage.

On the other hand, if the dispensing control MPU determines in step S522 that the dispensing RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), i.e., that the dispensing information should be erased, or if the dispensing control MPU determines in step S526 that the checksum values do not match, or if the dispensing control MPU determines in step S528 that the dispensing backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), i.e., that the dispensing control unit power-off processing has not been completed successfully, it clears the entire area of the dispensing control internal RAM (step S532). This clears the dispensing backup information stored in the dispensing control internal RAM.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the working area of the payout control built-in RAM as the initial setting (step S534). This setting is done by reading the initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the working area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the dispensing control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt period when the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process described below is performed. In this embodiment, this is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the dispensing control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). This setting causes the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S536, i.e., every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the dispensing control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by sequentially setting values A, B, and C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or momentary power outage, as described above, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

In step S540, if the dispensing control MPU determines that no power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process, which is processed every 2 ms, as described below, and is set to a value of 1 when 2 ms have elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms have not yet elapsed.

In the judgment of step S542, if the dispensing control MPU determines that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is equal to 0, that is, that 2 ms have not elapsed, it returns to step S540, and the dispensing control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input.

On the other hand, if the dispensing control MPU determines in step S542 that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is equal to 1, i.e., that 2 ms have elapsed, it sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to 0 (step S544).

Following step S544, the dispensing control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the dispensing control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM, and various signals based on this information are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the dispensing control MPU. The output information storage area stores various information such as payout master ACK information indicating that various payout-related commands (prize ball commands and self-check commands) from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received, drive information for controlling the drive of the payout motor 584, prize ball number information indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information to be displayed on the error LED indicator. Based on this output information, when various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received, the payout control MPU outputs a payout master ACK signal to the main control board 1310 from the output terminal of a specified output port, outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584, or outputs the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the payout motor 584 outputs a prize ball number information output signal to the external terminal board 558 every time it actually pays out 10 game balls).

Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter is provided to determine whether or not to output prize ball number information. This prize ball number information output determination counter counts the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of step S550, which will be described later. This number is then stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) not shown in the figures for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584.

In a process (program) not shown for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by this payout motor 584, the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is updated by adding the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described below.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information is read from this prize ball information storage area, and if the value of this read counter for determining the output of prize ball number information exceeds the value of 10 (in other words, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10), a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated as the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM mentioned above), and an indication signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the dispensing control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the dispensing control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the dispensing control MPU's built-in RAM. For example, signals such as the signal from the RWM clear button 633z (for example, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as an error reset switch, it becomes an error reset signal indicating that the error displayed on the error LED indicator has been cleared), the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal from the CR unit, and the main pay ACK signal from the main control board 1310 indicating that the main control board 1310 has successfully received the various commands sent in the command sending processing described below are each read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, the following conditions are set: ball jamming determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether a ball jam state has occurred by the payout blades 589 to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted; skip determination time, which is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blades 589 is not performed; full determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls; and ball jamming time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether the game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574. In addition to managing time such as the ball run-out determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether the number of game balls received and dispensed in the ball container 589b of the dispenser blade 589 exceeds a predetermined number, the inconsistency counter reset determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether to reset the inconsistency counter INCC, which monitors whether inconsistent balls are being repeatedly dispensed due to a discrepancy between the number of game balls received and dispensed in the ball container 589b of the dispenser blade 589 and the number of balls actually detected by the dispenser detection sensor 591, is also managed. For example, when the ball jamming determination time is set to 5005 ms and the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, the ball jamming determination time is subtracted by 2 ms each time the timer is updated. The ball jamming determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it determines whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) have been input from the CR unit. Based on the various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the working area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530, as described above, information used for various processing is set based on payout information related to payout, such as various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage area (e.g., the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY signal output setting information, which sets the logic state of the PRDY signal, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area).

With this processing, even if there is a momentary or power outage, for example, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored as payout backup information immediately before the momentary or power outage. As a result, even if there is a momentary or power outage while the payout device 580 is performing a payout operation of game balls and the payout operation cannot be continued, the payout operation can be continued when power is restored, so that game balls can be paid out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 without any surplus or shortage. In other words, during the CR communication process, while the payout control MPU is exchanging various signals with the CR unit and paying out game balls to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202, if there is an instantaneous or power outage that interrupts the exchange of various signals with the CR unit and makes it impossible to continue paying out game balls, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored as payout backup information immediately before the instantaneous or power outage, so that the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before the instantaneous or power outage can be continued after power is restored, and payout of game balls can continue.

In this way, even if the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is interrupted or stopped, when power is restored it is restored to the state it was in immediately before the interruption or stoppage, and the effects of the interruption or stoppage do not affect the various signals exchanged between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit. This increases the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit.

In addition, the various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication processing, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which was set in the process of setting the working area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, and if this read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of a PRDY signal that indicates, for example, that a payout operation to pay out loaned balls is impossible, the PRDY signal is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU. Then, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process, which is performed as part of the main operation setting process, a determination is made as to whether the value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, is less than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH. If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not less than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, it is determined that the retry operation is operating abnormally, that is, that the payout operation of the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, and the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1. In the payout ball operation determination setting process, the error status output to the CR unit is set, for example, by setting the logic state (LOW) of the PRDY signal, which indicates that the payout operation to pay out loaned balls is impossible when there is no communication with the CR unit, as PRDY signal output setting information and storing this in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, at the next timer interrupt after power is restored, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the payout device 580 to dispense game balls was in an abnormal state immediately before a momentary power outage, that state is restored when power is restored, so that a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation to dispense loan balls is impossible can be output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU very quickly after power is restored, and the CR unit can be informed that the payout operation of the payout device 580 to dispense game balls is in an abnormal state. This makes it possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting an unnecessary loan ball request signal, BRDY, very quickly after power is restored.

In addition, in the CR communication processing, in the port input processing of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this CR connection signal, when its logic is HI, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, the logic state of the PRDY signal is output as HI from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit to indicate that the payout operation to pay out loaned balls is possible, while when its logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the logic state of the PRDY signal is output as LOW from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit to indicate that the payout operation to pay out loaned balls is not possible. The logic state of the EXS signal, which indicates that a single dispensing operation has started or ended, is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and the CR connection signal, which indicates whether the dispensing control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, is stored in the status information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and ball exhaustion check process (step S556). In this full tank and ball exhaustion check process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it determines whether the lower tray 202 described above is full of stored game balls based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, and determines whether the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 described above is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball exhaustion detection sensor 574. For example, to determine whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls, a timer interrupt period of 2 ms is used. When the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the current full tank/out-of-ball check process and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous full tank/out-of-ball check process (2 ms ago), that is, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process of step S552 starts timing the above-mentioned full tank determination time. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time has arrived, it is determined whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in this full tank/out-of-ball check process. In this determination, if the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls, and full tank information indicating this is stored in the above-mentioned status information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is not full of stored game balls, and full tank information indicating this is stored in the status information storage area.

The 2 ms timer interrupt period is also used to determine whether the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. When the detection signal from the bulb out switch is ON during the current full tank and bulb out check process and the detection signal from the bulb out switch is OFF during the previous full tank and bulb out check process (2 ms ago), that is, when the detection signal from the bulb out detection sensor 574 transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process in step S552 begins timing the above-mentioned bulb out determination time. Then, when the bulb out determination time becomes 0 during the timer update process, that is, when the bulb out determination time has arrived, the full tank and bulb out check process determines whether the detection signal from the bulb out detection sensor 574 is ON. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is ON, the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and ball out information indicating this is stored in the status information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is OFF, the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is less than the predetermined number, and ball out information indicating this is stored in the status information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payouts (prize ball commands and self-check commands) are received from the main control board 1310. When these various commands are received successfully, payer ACK information informing this fact is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the various commands are not received successfully, connection abnormality information informing that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in the various command signals) is stored in the status information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the dispensing control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the dispensing control's built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs a main operation setting process (step S562). This main operation setting process sets up operations such as prize balls, loan balls, ball removal, and ball jamming, determines whether to perform a retry, and monitors the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls in stock).

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the status information storage area described above, and display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created and stored in the output information storage area described above as LED display information. For example, the above-mentioned out-of-ball information is read from the status information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is less than a predetermined number, corresponding display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (the number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the status information storage area described above, and based on this information, various commands classified as status displays (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command) are created and sent to the main control board 1310. For example, when out-of-ball information is read from the status information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is less than a predetermined number, a frame status 1 command is created and sent to the main control board 1310 based on this out-of-ball information.

Following step S566, the dispensing control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is set to the values A, B, and C in that order, clearing the watchdog timer.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539, where the dispensing control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and determines in step S540 whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If this power outage warning signal has not been input, it determines in step S542 whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if 2 ms have elapsed, it sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 0 in step S544, sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, and then returns to step S548. Port output processing is performed in step S550, port input processing is performed in step S552, timer update processing is performed in step S554, CR communication processing is performed in step S556, full tank and bulb out check processing is performed in step S558, command reception processing is performed in step S560, command analysis processing is performed in step S562, main operation setting processing is performed in step S564, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S566, command transmission processing is performed in step S568, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The processing of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as the "dispensing control unit main processing."

The processing content of the payout control unit main processing changes depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. As a result, the time required for processing by the payout control MPU will vary. Therefore, in the port output processing of step S548, the payout control MPU prioritizes outputting a payout master ACK signal to the main control board 1310, indicating that various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received. This ensures that the payout control MPU has enough processing time to perform other processing that may vary.

On the other hand, if the dispensing control MPU determines in step S540 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). This setting prevents the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing described below from being performed, prevents writing to the dispensing control internal RAM, and protects the dispensing information described above from being overwritten.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). This stops the payout of game balls.

Following step S574, the dispensing control MPU clears the watchdog timer (step S576). As described above, this clearing is performed by sequentially setting values A, B, and C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by treating the payout information in the working area of the payout control internal RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, and calculating its sum.

Following step S578, the dispensing control MPU sets the dispensing backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of dispensing backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU prohibits access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). This prohibits access to the payout control built-in RAM, making writing and reading impossible, and protects the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S582, the dispensing control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not sequentially set to values A, B, and C. This resets the dispensing control MPU, and then the dispensing control unit power-on processing is performed again. The processing from step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as the "dispensing control unit power-off processing."

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, and when power is subsequently restored, the payout control unit performs power-on processing.

In step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is correct, and then in step S528 it is checked whether the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is checked whether the payout backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

[11-2. Dispense control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This dispensing control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the dispensing control unit power-on process shown in Figures 148 to 150.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt processing begins, the payout control MPU disables timer interrupts and switches (saves) the register (step S590), as shown in Figure 151. Here, the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above is switched to an auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the values in the general-purpose register are no longer overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main processing from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the dispensing control MPU sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms each time the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process is performed, i.e., every 2 ms. It is set to a value of 1 when 2 ms have elapsed and to a value of 0 when 2 ms have not yet elapsed.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (restores) the register (step S594). This restoration switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the values in the auxiliary register are no longer overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the dispensing control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596) and terminates this routine.

[12. Various control processes of peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 137, which receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU), will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 to 156. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. Note that in this embodiment, the priority of interrupt processing is set highest for the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing.

As mentioned above, the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 integrates a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces onto a single semiconductor chip.

[12-1. Processing when peripheral control unit power is turned on]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. 152 . When power is applied to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control unit power-on process is performed under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. 152 . When this peripheral control unit power-on process begins, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an initialization process (step S1000). This initialization process includes initializing the peripheral control IC itself, determining whether it is a hot start or a cold start, setting a wait timer after reset, and transferring various control information (peripheral data). The CPU of the peripheral control IC first initializes the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required for this process is on the order of microseconds (μs), making it possible to initialize the peripheral control IC in an extremely short time. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is enabled for interrupts, enabling it to receive various commands, such as commands related to game presentation control and commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1, output from the main control board 1310 during the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described below.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the year, month, and day and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current calendar information and current time information are set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once, when the power is turned on. After performing this current time information acquisition process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT (not shown) to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag used to determine whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit routine processing described below. It is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit routine processing is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 during the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described below, which is executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC, indicating that the peripheral control IC's CPU is ready to accept screen data (information defining the screen configuration). In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting it to a value of 0. In addition, after the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, it outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1 (step S1006). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not equal to 1 (it is equal to 0), it returns to step S1006 and repeatedly determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1. By repeating this determination, the CPU enters a standby state until the peripheral control unit's regular processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

In step S1006, if the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1, i.e., if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that peripheral control unit steady-state processing is to be executed, it first sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 1 (step S1008). This steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to 0 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs 1 ms interrupt timer start processing (step S1010). This 1 ms interrupt timer start processing starts the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described below, and also initializes the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN by setting the value 1 to count the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer has started and executed the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs performance operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this presentation operation unit monitoring process, in the presentation operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, various information (for example, rotation (direction of rotation) history information of rotation operation unit 302 and operation history information of press operation unit 303 created based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as first rotation detection sensor 347, second rotation detection sensor 348, press detection sensor 381, and lift detection sensor 382 (hereinafter referred to as "various sensors provided in presentation operation unit 300") provided in presentation operation unit 300 is set based on detection signals from various sensors provided in presentation operation unit 300. The rotation direction of rotation operation unit 302 and whether or not press operation unit 303 has been operated are monitored based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and it is appropriately determined whether or not to reflect the rotation direction of rotation operation unit 302 and the operation state of press operation unit 303 in the game presentation. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the performance operation unit information acquisition process, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted brightness. This allows volume and brightness adjustments to be reflected in real time, and the performance will proceed with the adjusted volume and brightness.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs lamp palette setting processing as part of the performance operation unit monitoring processing. In the lamp palette setting processing, the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light are set based on a lamp palette setting table consisting of brightness specification values, normal palette values, and special palette values. During the performance, if the lamp palette setting processing is executed and a player (or an attendant such as a game hall staff member) operates the performance operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a brightness specification value ranging from the first brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value, which is the maximum brightness, the above-mentioned gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC can be updated to match the set brightness specification value.

Here, we will briefly explain the brightness designation values, normal palette values, and special palette values that make up the lamp palette setting table. The brightness designation values are values that can be set to one of 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value, which is the minimum brightness (off), to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the maximum brightness. The normal palette values and special palette values, described below, are pre-set corresponding to the 0th (zero) brightness designation value through the 31st brightness designation value. A player (or an attendant such as a game hall staff member) can operate the operable effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set one of the brightness designation values ranging from the 1st brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the maximum brightness.

For example, when a player (or an attendant such as a game parlor staff member) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 clockwise and the current brightness is set to the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the minimum brightness (off), the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light will increase in accordance with a predetermined mathematical formula (e.g., a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) from the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness. On the other hand, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 counterclockwise and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light will decrease in accordance with a predetermined mathematical formula (e.g., a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) from the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness, to the first brightness specified value. When a player (or a game hall staff member, etc.) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 to select the desired brightness and then presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is confirmed. In this embodiment, a case is provided in which the player (or a game hall staff member, etc.) can set the brightness while a performance is in progress. In this case, the player (or a game hall staff member, etc.) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. When a player (or a game hall staff member, etc.) operates the rotary operation unit 302 while a performance is in progress, a bar-shaped indicator indicating the positions of the first brightness designation value through the thirty-first brightness designation value is displayed at a predetermined position in the display area of the performance display device 1600, thereby visually indicating the player's (or a game hall staff member, etc.) desired brightness level. In this embodiment, the fourteenth brightness designation value is set as the initial (default) value.

Normal palette values are set as the above-mentioned gradation information, representing the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side and the various decorative boards on the door frame side that are illuminated as direct light. Normal palette values are selected from 17 levels in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the smallest value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the largest value. Within the 32-level range of brightness designations from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which are the brightness designations mentioned above, the palette value corresponding to each brightness designation is set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is 20% of the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one brightness specification within the 32-step range of brightness specification values from 0 (zero) to 31 (the above-mentioned brightness specification values). Similarly, for other palette values, the values (%) written in parentheses are the values relative to the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one brightness specification within the 32-step range of brightness specification values from 0 (zero) to 31 (the above-mentioned brightness specification values).

In this embodiment, the normal palette value is the maximum palette value (100%), which is pre-selected and set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are illuminated as direct light, and the palette value (50%) is pre-selected and set as the above-mentioned gradation information for a specific decorative board (not shown) (LEDs that are dazzling to players) among the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board side that are illuminated as direct light.

Special palette values are used to set the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used in light guide plates that emit indirect light as the gradation information described above. Unlike normal palette values, special palette values have only one level, and within the 32-level range of brightness designation values, from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value described above, the palette value corresponding to one brightness designation is set as the gradation information described above according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve).

As mentioned above, if the brightness of the LEDs used for indirect light were the same as the brightness of the LEDs used for direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate would be dimmer than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LEDs used for indirect light is set using special palette values rather than the normal palette values set for the brightness of the LEDs used for direct light. The first brightness designation value, which is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) brightness designation value, which represents the minimum brightness (off), is set as the lowest brightness at which the light guide plate can be visually recognized as emitting light from indirect light, and is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness designation value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). Within the range from the first brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, the palette value corresponding to each designated brightness value is set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve).

In this way, in the lamp palette setting process, when setting the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light based on a lamp palette setting table consisting of a brightness specification value, a normal palette value, and a special palette value, the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is set by the player (or an attendant such as a game hall clerk) according to the normal palette value corresponding to the brightness specification value operated by the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, while the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is set by the player (or an attendant such as a game hall clerk) according to the special palette value corresponding to the brightness specification value operated by the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. As a result, if the player finds the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light too dazzling and operates the rotary operation unit 302 and pressing operation unit 303 to reduce the brightness, even if the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is set to the lowest brightness (i.e., the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the minimum brightness (off)), and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (i.e., the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the minimum brightness (off)), the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), so the lowest brightness at which the light guide plate can be seen emitting indirect light is set.

In addition, programmers who design the light-emitting patterns do not have to individually set the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards mounted on the game board and the door frame for the LEDs used as direct light.They can simply set the light-emitting patterns in accordance with the flow of the presentation, watch the flow of the presentation based on the light-emitting patterns of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards mounted on the game board and the door frame, and then set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for specific decorative boards that are too dazzling (or that a slightly darker brightness would produce a better presentation effect), and set the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for other decorative boards, thereby extremely easily changing the balance of the overall light-emitting patterns. In other words, even if a player (or an attendant such as a game hall staff member) operates the operable effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a single brightness specification value ranging from the first brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value, which is the maximum brightness, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the single brightness specification value will be set for a specific decorative board, while the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to the single brightness specification value will be set for other decorative boards, making it possible to adjust brightness extremely easily without disrupting the relationship between the set light emission modes (bright or dark).

Furthermore, although it is more difficult to adjust the brightness of indirect light from a light guide plate than direct light, it is possible to set the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light using special palette values that are different from the normal palette values (i.e., independent of the normal palette values). As a result, the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is managed by the special palette values, while the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is managed by the normal palette values, making it easy to adjust the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, in the display data creation processing described below, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC to the liquid crystal output board 1530. This allows various screens (images) to be drawn (displayed) on the performance display device 1600. Note that in the display data output processing, if drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data is canceled. This prevents delays in processing time, but may result in dropped frames. However, it is a system that allows priority to be given to performances using music, sound effects, and other sound effects that are tailored to various performances from various speakers (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers"), such as the vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, and main frame speaker 622, through the sound data output process described below.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the sound data creation processing described below, and outputs the data to various speakers from the set output channels. As a result, music, sound effects, and other sounds that match various performances are played from the various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). This scheduler update process updates various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. For example, the scheduler update process updates a pointer to indicate which screen data, from the first screen data, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that make up the schedule data for screen generation, is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

In addition, the scheduler update process updates a pointer to indicate which light emission data, from the first light emission data, is to be output among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that make up the schedule data for generating light emission modes.

In addition, the scheduler update process updates a pointer to indicate which sound command data, starting from the first sound command data, should be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC among the sound command data that indicates sound data for musical effects, sound effects, and other dramatic sounds, as well as sound data for alarms and announcements, arranged in chronological order to make up the sound generation schedule data.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which drive data, starting from the first drive data, of the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data is to be output. The drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is executed repeatedly every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, as described below. This motor and solenoid drive process, which is executed repeatedly every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, drives the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and updates the pointer each time its own process is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Therefore, even if for some reason the pointer in the motor and solenoid drive process changes from the drive data it was originally supposed to point to to other drive data, the scheduler update process will forcibly update it to point to the drive data it was originally supposed to point to.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands sent from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described below, and the received commands are analyzed, while also updating the random numbers used for various performance settings (for example, random numbers used for performances related to hold pre-reading). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In this received command analysis processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC reads (extracts) the screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed commands, and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs lamp palette setting processing as part of the received command analysis processing. In the lamp palette setting processing, the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light are set based on a lamp palette setting table consisting of the brightness specification values, normal palette values, and special palette values described above. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, and based on the analyzed commands, reads (extracts) schedule data for generating light emission patterns from the peripheral control ROM and executes the lamp palette setting processing. When a player (or a game hall staff member or other attendant) operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a brightness specification value ranging from the first brightness specification value to the thirty-first brightness specification value, which is the maximum brightness, the gradation information described above can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC to match the set brightness specification value.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also analyzes whether the command received from the main control board 1310 during this peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command to instruct the start of a start port winning effect, a normal pattern memory command to identify the number of reserved normal patterns (0 to 4), a variable pattern command to instruct the start of a variable effect such as the variable display of decorative patterns on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of special patterns, a pattern memory command output when the start port pending number changes, or a large prize port 1 count display command output each time a game ball is received by the large prize port 2005, and recognizes the current game state.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The received command analysis process analyzes the various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. These commands include commands related to special 1 synchronization effects, special 2 synchronization effects, jackpot-related commands, power-on commands, regular synchronization effects, regular electric effects, notification displays, status displays, test-related commands, and other commands. Based on the received commands, the peripheral control board 1510 executes lottery processing related to announcements, etc., and, based on the results of the lottery, reads (extracts) screen generation schedule data, light-emitting mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. This will allow the peripheral control board 1510 to execute a performance based on the lottery results.

The peripheral control ROM pre-stores various control programs, data, control data, and schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, performance display control unit 1511, etc. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be displayed on the performance display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating the light emission modes of various LEDs, sound generation schedule data for generating performance sounds such as music and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating the drive modes of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is composed of screen data that specifies the screen configuration arranged in chronological order, and specifies the order in which the screens are displayed on the performance display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is composed of light emission mode data that specifies the light emission modes of various LEDs arranged in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and specifies the order in which the music and sound effects are played. This sound command data specifies an output channel number that indicates which of the multiple output channels in the peripheral control IC's built-in sound source to use, and a track number that indicates which of the multiple tracks in the peripheral control IC's built-in sound source to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into.The electric drive source schedule data is composed of drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order, and specifies the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). During this warning processing, if the commands analyzed in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 include various commands classified as notification displays, the screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data, which are set as abnormality display modes for executing various abnormality notifications, are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Note that during the warning processing, if multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, abnormality notifications are first issued in order of highest pre-registered priority, and once that abnormality is resolved, the system automatically transitions to the remaining abnormality notifications. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another abnormality occurred after one abnormality occurred but before the first abnormality was resolved.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an RTC acquisition information update process (step S1026). This RTC acquisition information update process updates the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. This RTC acquisition information update process updates the hour, minute, and second information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and updates the year, month, and date calendar information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on this updated time information.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer from the chronologically arranged screen data that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on this input screen data and generates one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data in the built-in VRAM to be drawn (displayed) on the performance display device 1600.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing of step S1020, and the sound command data indicated by the pointer, among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data, is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and sets the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

Note that during the sound data creation process, the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is identified based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch each time this sound data creation process is performed (i.e., each time the peripheral control unit performs steady-state processing). The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC to achieve a volume that corresponds to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and during the sound data output process of step S1018, the sound data is output to the various speakers from the output channel set during this sound data creation process. This allows sounds such as music and sound effects that match the various performances to be played from the various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value varies when the volume adjustment switch is rotated, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, which is then converted into 1024 levels ranging from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024 levels are divided into seven levels and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume, with the volume increasing from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled to achieve the volume set for board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 and the bass main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4. In this way, volume adjustment based on the rotation of the volume adjustment switch allows music and sound effects to be played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 and the bass main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data. In addition to sound data for music, sound effects, and other sound effects and sub-volume values for adjusting their volume, the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC also incorporate sound data for alarm sounds that alert parlor staff and others of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 and sub-volume values for adjusting their volume.

Specifically, for the sound effects, the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume control switch as described above is set as the sub-volume value, while for the notification sounds, the maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value, completely independent of volume adjustment based on the volume control switch. The sub-volume value for the sound effects can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressure operation unit 303 of the sound effects operation unit 300, except for a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a certain period when the special symbol display (first special symbol display unit, second special symbol display unit) starts or stops displaying the changing special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the changing pattern command until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the changing decorative symbol display, and from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the final display of the decorative symbol).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, except for a predetermined period after power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), and a certain period when the special symbol display (first special symbol display unit, second special symbol display unit) starts or stops the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the variable pattern command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the final display of the decorative symbol), By operating the rotary operation unit 302 and pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch during the sound data creation process is converted into one of seven board volume values, 0 to 6.Furthermore, by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch depending on the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 and pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the board volume value can be increased or decreased to set the board volume, thereby adjusting the sub-volume value of the performance sound.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC combine the sound data of the effect sound incorporated into the track to be used out of the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC with a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the track to be used. The volume of this combined effect sound is amplified to the master volume value that actually becomes the volume played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for low frequencies on the main frame 4, and this amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized sound effect is at its maximum, it is amplified up to the master volume value so that the volume played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4 is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound effect, the sound data for the sound effect incorporated into the track to be used out of multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC is synthesized with the board volume adjusted by rotating a volume adjustment switch set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the sound effect incorporated into the track to be used, and the volume of this synthesized sound effect is amplified up to the master volume value that actually corresponds to the volume played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4, and this amplified sound effect is serialized and played. For the alarm sound, the sound data for the alarm sound incorporated into the track being used is combined with the maximum volume that is not dependent on volume adjustment based on the rotation of the volume adjustment switch, which is set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the alarm sound incorporated into the track being used, and the volume of this combined alarm sound is amplified to a master volume value that will actually be the volume played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for low frequencies on the main frame 4, and this amplified alarm sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, briefly explaining the control of playing an alarm sound to alert parlor staff and the like of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 when the sound effect is being played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4, first, the sub-volume value of the track into which the sound effect is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and then the sound data of the track into which the sound effect is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track into which the alarm sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value for which the volume of the alarm sound is set to maximum volume are combined, and the volume of this combined sound effect and alarm sound are amplified to the master volume value that will actually be the volume played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4, and these amplified sound effect and alarm sounds are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, the only sound that actually comes out of the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4 is the maximum volume notification sound. At this time, the sound effects are muted, so no sound comes out of the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4, but the sound effects are still proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data described above.

In this embodiment, the alarm sound is played for a predetermined period (e.g., 90 seconds) from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4. After this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the sound effect, which has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that was previously forcibly muted, is reset to the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch as a sub-volume value (if the volume of the sound effect has been adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or pressing operation unit 303 of the sound effect operation unit 300, the volume is set to the adjusted sub-volume value), and the sound is played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4.

In this way, when sound effects are being played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4, and an alarm sound is played to alert parlor staff or others to a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, the volume of the sound effects is muted and the alarm sound is played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4. However, since this muted sound effects progress according to the sound generation schedule data, when the alarm sound stops being played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the sound effects do not resume from the point at which the alarm sound began, but rather from the point at which the alarm sound began playing and progressed according to the sound generation schedule data up until the predetermined period of time had elapsed.

Alert sounds and notification sounds are played completely independently of volume adjustments based on the rotation of the volume adjustment switch. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC through a program to adjust the volume from mute to maximum volume. The volume adjusted by this program is designed to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an amusement hall staff member or other attendant turns the volume adjustment switch to set the volume low, the music, sound effects, and other sound effects played from the various speakers will be reduced in volume. However, if a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is engaging in fraudulent activity, the alert sounds set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the sound effects is reduced, it is possible to prevent the alert sounds from making it difficult for the amusement hall staff member or other attendant to notice a malfunction or a player's fraudulent activity.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM for backup.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 0 (step S1038), indicating that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. Then, the CPU returns to step S1004, initializes the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG by setting it to 0, and repeats the determination of step S1006 until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described below. In other words, step S1006 waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1. If step S1006 determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, steps S1008 to S1038 are performed, and the process returns to step S1004. In this way, if step S1006 determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady-state processing."

This peripheral control unit routine processing begins in step S1008 by setting the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 1, indicating that the peripheral control unit routine processing is currently being executed. Then, in step S1010, a 1 ms interrupt timer is started. Then, in step S1014, ..., step S1036 are executed, and finally, in step S1038, the routine is completed by setting the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 0, indicating that the peripheral control unit routine processing has been completed. The peripheral control unit routine processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1006. As mentioned above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 during the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described below, which is executed when a V blank signal, indicating that the peripheral control IC's CPU is ready to accept screen data, is input from the peripheral control IC's VDP to the peripheral control IC's CPU. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the performance display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit's regular processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[12-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, we will explain the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC, indicating that the peripheral control IC's CPU is ready to accept screen data. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 (step S1045), as shown in FIG. 153. As described above, this steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit is executing the steady-state processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 152, and to 0 when the peripheral control unit has completed executing the steady-state processing.

In step S1045, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1), i.e., that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, it simply ends this routine. On the other hand, in step S1045, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, i.e., that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed, it sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 1 (step S1050) and ends this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag used to determine whether or not to execute peripheral control unit steady-state processing, and is set to 1 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed and to 0 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is not being executed.

In this embodiment, step S1045 determines whether the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0, i.e., whether the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. When the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, step S1050 sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 1. This is because, when a V blank signal is input and the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 while the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 152 determines that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing will be executed, and the currently executing peripheral control unit steady-state processing is forcibly canceled midway and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is started from the beginning. In order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 152 is set to a value of 1. In step S1008 of the power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 1, thereby informing this routine, the peripheral control unit V blanking signal interrupt processing, that peripheral control unit steady-state processing is currently being executed. Furthermore, in step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing) in FIG. 152, the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0, thereby informing this routine, the peripheral control unit V blanking signal interrupt processing, that peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. Step S1045 of this routine, the peripheral control unit V blanking signal interrupt processing, determines whether the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is 0, i.e., whether peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. In other words, this is the procedure to be taken when peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed between the input of a V blanking signal and the input of the next V blanking signal, resulting in a so-called processing delay.

As a result, if the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing fails to complete within approximately 33.3 ms and stalls, step S1006 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 152 will determine that the system will wait until the next V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing that stalled will be approximately 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described below, which is executed repeatedly each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing) in Figure 152, is executed 32 times for each peripheral control unit steady-state processing. However, if the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing stalled as described above exists, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times, not 64 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady-state processing stalls, consistency between the performance progress achieved by the peripheral control unit steady-state processing and the performance progress achieved by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing slows down, the progress of the presentation can be reliably maintained.

[12-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing will be described, which is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 152. When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33, as shown in Fig. 154 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is a counter that counts the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 152 and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the performance display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed 32 times before the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, followed by the second, ..., and 32nd 1 ms timer interrupts.

In step S1100, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33, i.e., that the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has begun, it simply terminates this routine. In this embodiment, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, even though the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has a higher interrupt processing priority than the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. In other words, in this embodiment, because the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the V blank signal is generated, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started again when a new 1 ms timer interrupt is generated for the first time.

On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33, it adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increments it, step S1102). By adding 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 152, and the number of times this routine, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, has been executed increases by 1.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the motors, solenoids, and other electric drive sources are driven in accordance with the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for the motors, solenoids, and other electric drive sources arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The pointer is also updated to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed. As a result, electric drive sources such as motors, solenoids, and other electric drive sources managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, electric drive sources provided in the door frame 3 and electric drive sources provided in various performance units provided on the game board 5) are driven in accordance with the electric drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (e.g., original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created by determining whether detection signals have been input from the various sensors provided in the various presentation units provided on the gaming board 5, and this information is set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the movable positions by setting the original positions (standby positions) of the various movable bodies provided in the various presentation units provided on the gaming board 5 and acquiring their movable positions.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a presentation operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). This presentation operation unit information acquisition process determines whether or not detection signals are being input from the various sensors provided in the presentation operation unit 300, and creates historical information on the detection signals from the various sensors (e.g., rotation (direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) and sets this information in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated can be obtained from the historical information on the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by operating the presentation operation unit 301, it is possible to adjust the volume of the presentation sounds output from the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, and to adjust the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110) and terminates this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up to a backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied and backed up to a backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM. Note that in this embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set to different areas, and the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM and the backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM are set to different areas.

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, various processes related to the performance in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed within a period of 1 ms to progress the performance. In contrast, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 152, various processes related to the performance in steps S1014 to S1032 are executed within a period of approximately 33.3 ms to progress the performance. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, i.e., if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is initiated, the routine is terminated. Therefore, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled, and the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is initiated due to the first new 1 ms timer interrupt. In other words, consistency is maintained between the performance progress due to the peripheral control unit regular processing and the performance progress due to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control. This ensures reliable consistency of performance progress.

As mentioned above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the LCD size of the performance display device 1600, and the interval at which the V blank signal is output may also vary slightly depending on the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly, the time lag caused by the slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt.

[12-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, we will explain the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process that receives various commands from the main control board 1310. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC starts transmitting various commands as serial data from the main control board 1310, it uses this as a trigger to import one byte (8 bits) of main serial data into a receive buffer at the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC, and when this import is complete, an interrupt occurs and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is performed. One packet of main serial data is composed of three bytes, with the first byte assigned to the status, the second byte assigned to the mode, and the third byte assigned to a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process begins, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200), as shown in Figure 155. This 1-byte reception period timer sets the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

In step S1200, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, that it is within the period in which it can receive 1 byte (8 bits) of main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, it retrieves the received 1 byte of information from the receive buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC (step S1202) and increments the receive counter SRXC by 1 (step S1204). This receive counter SRXC indicates the number of times data has been retrieved from the receive buffer. The value is 1 when the status, the first byte of the main serial data, is retrieved from the receive buffer; 2 when the mode, the second byte of the main serial data, is retrieved from the receive buffer; and 3 when the sum, the third byte of the main serial data, is retrieved from the receive buffer. The receive counter SRXC is initially set to 0 when the power is turned on, etc.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the receive counter SRXC is at a value of 3, i.e., whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been retrieved from the receive buffer (step S1206). This determines whether the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order.

If, in step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the receive counter SRXC is not equal to 3, that is, that the status (the first byte of the main serial data), the mode (the second byte of the main serial data), and the sum value (the third byte of the main serial data) have not yet been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order, it sets a 1-byte receive period timer (step S1208) and ends this routine. Setting the 1-byte receive period timer in step S1208 sets the period during which the mode (the second byte of the main serial data) or the sum value (the third byte of the main serial data) can be received.

On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1206 that the receive counter SRXC is equal to 3, that is, that it has retrieved from the receive buffer the status (the first byte of the main serial data), the mode (the second byte of the main serial data), and the sum value (the third byte of the main serial data) in that order, it sets the receive counter SRXC to an initial value of 0 (step S1210) and calculates the sum value (step S1212). This calculation regards the status (the first byte of the main serial data) and the mode (the second byte of the main serial data) already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 as numerical values, and calculates their sum (sum value).

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data from the main control board 1310, and therefore should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, pachinko machine 1 receives game balls from the island equipment in the gaming hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge occurs, generating noise, so pachinko machine 1 is in an environment where it is subject to noise.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 treats the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data as numerical values, calculates their sum (sum value), and determines whether this calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data from the main control board 1310. This allows the CPU of the peripheral control IC to determine whether the main serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to incorrect main serial data.

If, in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, it stores the status assigned to the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned to the second byte of the main serial data in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216), and terminates this routine.

On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1200 that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, that the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received has been exceeded, or if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, it immediately terminates this routine.

[12-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, we will explain the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process that is executed when a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), as shown in Figure 156, and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S1302). In the determination of step S1302, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that a power outage warning signal has not been input, it simply ends this routine.

On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this determination, the timer started in step S1300 determines whether 2 microseconds have passed. In step S1304, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that 2 microseconds have not passed, it returns to step S1302 and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If it determines that a power outage warning signal has not been input, it simply ends this routine. However, if it determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it again determines in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have passed. In other words, in step S1304, it determines whether a power outage warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, was started.

In step S1304, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal has been input continuously for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, began, it performs power-saving processing (step S1306). This power-saving processing reduces power consumption throughout the pachinko machine 1 system by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off excitation to the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs, thereby ensuring stable operation for the 20 millisecond period during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a command reception standby process (step S1308). This command reception standby process assumes that the main control board 1310 is currently sending various commands, and waits for at least 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control IC can receive the command being sent. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is initiated, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup processing, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied and backed up to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S1312). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a WDT clear process (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has not been input, or following step S1314, it returns to step S1312 and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. In other words, it continues to determine indefinitely whether a power outage warning signal has been input. By continuing to determine indefinitely in this way, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has not been input, it is no longer able to output a clear signal to the external WDT, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset. On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing in step S1314, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 152 is restarted.

In this way, if step S1312 determines that the power outage warning signal continues to be input in the infinite loop, step S1314 executes the WDT clear process, preventing the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset immediately before a power outage occurs. In contrast, if step S1312 determines that the power outage warning signal is not continuing to be input in the infinite loop but is released, the WDT clear process is not executed, and the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously initiated due to noise or other reasons, and the noise occurs for more than 2 microseconds, causing the determination in step S1302 to be passed, if step S1312 determines that the power outage warning signal is not continuing to be input in the infinite loop but is released, the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed, causing the CPU of the peripheral control IC to be reset. Therefore, such noise can be dealt with by automatically returning to reset.

[13. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. Fig. 157 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric role control processing (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used in the various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 157, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first executes a first start gate passage process (step S232), such as obtaining a first special random number for the first special symbol from the random number counter and storing it in a first special symbol reserve memory area of RAM, on the condition that the detection signal from the first start gate sensor 3002 is on (a ball has entered the first start gate 2002) (step S231). Also, on the condition that the detection signal from the second start gate sensor 2402 is on (a ball has entered the second start gate 2004) (step S233), it executes a second start gate passage process (step S234), such as obtaining a second special random number for the second special symbol from the random number counter and storing it in a second special symbol reserve memory area of RAM.

Next, it is determined whether a jackpot in progress flag, indicating that control is being exercised in the jackpot gaming state, is set (step S235). If the jackpot in progress flag is set, a jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed to control the jackpot gaming state. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) stops indicates a mode suggesting a "15R jackpot," a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the jackpot winning opening 2005 in accordance with the 15R jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, when the result indicates a "2R jackpot," a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the jackpot winning opening 2005 in accordance with the 2R jackpot gaming state.

Furthermore, in the jackpot control process (step S235A), after controlling the opening of the large prize slot 2005, the time-saving flag and the time-saving count counter are set. The time-saving flag is a flag indicating the time-saving state, and is set when the 2R jackpot gaming state ends based on the result of the lottery process when the first special symbol stops varying during the time-saving state suggesting a "2R jackpot," or when the 15R jackpot gaming state ends during the time-saving state or non-time-saving state. The time-saving flag is then reset when the next jackpot occurs or when the counter value of the time-saving count counter reaches "0" by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 168 (described below) or the second special symbol stop process (not shown).

The time-saving counter indicates the remaining number of times the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) will continue in the time-saving state. If the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot gaming state, the number of times the time-saving state will continue is set when the jackpot gaming state ends. The time-saving counter counts down each time the variable display of the special symbols is executed until the counter value reaches "0." However, if the next jackpot occurs before the counter value reaches "0," it is reset (the counter value is returned to "0") by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 168 (described later) or the second special symbol stop process (not shown).

Furthermore, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, then, on condition that the value of the second special reserve number counter, which indicates the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special pattern reserve memory area, is "0" (step S237), a first special pattern process is executed (step S238), including a lottery process for determining the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops, and, on condition that the value of the second special reserve number counter, which indicates the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special pattern reserve memory area, is not "0" (step S237), a second special pattern process is executed (step S239), including a lottery process for determining the display mode when the variable display of the second special pattern stops. In this way, in this example, the system is configured so that when the value of the second special reserve number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special pattern is executed with priority.

Figure 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passage process (step S232).

Now, assuming that in the processing of step S231, the first start hole sensor 3002 is in the ON state and it is determined that a gaming ball has entered the first start hole 2002, as shown in FIG. 158, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first pattern random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as processing of step S241.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then obtains from the main control's built-in RAM the counter value of the first special reserved number counter, which indicates the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area, and determines based on this counter value whether the first reserved memory number is at its maximum value (upper limit) of "4" (step S242). If it is determined in step S242 that the first reserved memory number is not at its maximum value, the following steps S243 to S245 are performed to place the first special symbol variable display control in a new reserved state. That is, first, in step S243, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in step S244, each random number obtained in step S241 is stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the main control's built-in RAM that corresponds to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter.

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs a performance pre-determination process to determine, based on the first special random number, reach random number, first pattern random number, and variable random number obtained in step S241, whether the display result of the first special pattern variable display will be a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether to execute a reach effect as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, and the type of mode (type of variable pattern) of the game effect to be executed, before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S245), and then terminates processing.

However, if it is determined in step S242 that the first reserved memory count is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the process without executing steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved.

In addition, when the first reserved memory number changes based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved memory number display in the function display unit 1400 is updated to correspond to the first reserved memory number, and a command indicating the first reserved memory number (first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0-4)) is set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command sending process (step S120). Furthermore, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the performance display device 1600 based on receiving the first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0-4).

Figure 159 is a flowchart showing the steps for the above-mentioned effect pre-determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, it compares the random numbers obtained in step S241 above, specifically the first special random number, first pattern random number, reach random number, and variable random number, with a pre-determination table (not shown) to determine whether a jackpot will occur, and if so, the type of jackpot. If not, it determines whether a reach effect will be executed as a game effect to be executed by the effect display device 1600, and the type of game effect to be executed (step S261).

A pre-determination command is then set according to the identified pre-determination information (whether a jackpot will occur, the type of jackpot if a jackpot will occur, whether a reach effect will be executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 if a jackpot will not occur, the type of game effect to be executed, etc.), the type of special random number obtained (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the obtained special random number (value of the reserved number counter). For example, in the effect pre-determination process for the first special pattern executed in step S245 of the first start port passing process, a first special pattern pre-determination command is set according to the identified pre-determination information, the fact that the first special random number has been obtained, and the first reserved memory number (value of the first special reserved number counter) (step S262).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a pre-determination command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, allowing the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 to grasp pre-determination information such as the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the first start slot 2002 where the start winning occurred, as well as whether the display result of the special pattern variable display based on the start winning that occurred will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, whether a reach effect will be executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not a jackpot, and the type of game effect to be executed, before the variable display corresponding to the start winning begins.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reserved memory area that stores pre-determination information regarding the variable display of the first special pattern.

The first reserved memory area has memory areas 1 to 4, corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control IC stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command in order, starting with the first (earliest) memory area. Then, when a preliminary judgment command is received while preliminary judgment information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) memory area, the notified preliminary judgment information is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 to 3) memory area. When a first variation pattern command notifying the start of the first special symbol variable display is received, the preliminary judgment information stored in the first memory area of the first reserved memory area is discarded in accordance with the received first variation pattern command, and the preliminary judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) memory area is moved to the N-1th (N = 2 to 4) memory area (shifting the preliminary judgment information stored in the reserved memory areas). This allows the preliminary judgment information for the first special symbol to be stored in a manner that allows the order in which the variable display start suspension occurred to be identified, and the preliminary judgment information is discarded in order, starting with the earliest one.

In this way, when variable display control is placed on hold, even though the variable display control remains in an unexecuted state (on hold), the expected jackpot probability (pseudo-winning probability) of that variable display control can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, such as when the reserved display is newly output or when the reserved display is shifted in response to the consumption of the reserved display.

Figure 160 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passage process (step S234).

Now, assuming that in the processing of step S233, the second start hole sensor 2402 is in the ON state and it is determined that a gaming ball has entered the second start hole 2004, as shown in FIG. 160, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second pattern random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as processing of step S251.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control's built-in RAM and, based on this counter value, determines whether the second reserved memory number is its maximum value (upper limit value), "1" (step S252). If it is determined in step S252 that the second reserved memory number is not its maximum value, the following steps S253 to S254 are performed to set the variable display control of the second special symbol to a new reserved state. That is, first, in step S253, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in step S254, the random numbers obtained in step S251 are stored in the second special symbol reserved memory area of the main control's built-in RAM that corresponds to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter.

However, if it is determined in step S252 that the second reserved memory count is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the process without executing steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved.

In addition, when the second reserved memory number changes based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 2004, the lighting status of the two LEDs of the second special reserved memory number display in the function display unit 1400 is updated to correspond to the second reserved memory number, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number (second reserved number designation command 0-1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0-1)) is set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command sending process (step S120). Furthermore, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on receiving the second reserved number designation command 0-1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0-1).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory number based on game balls entering the first start port 2002 is set to "4," while the upper limit of the second reserved memory number based on game balls entering the second start port 2004 is set to "1." Furthermore, since the second start port 2002 is capable of accepting a large number of game balls during the time-saving mode and the time it takes for the second special symbol to change is shorter than in the normal mode, it is possible to prevent situations that would be disadvantageous to the player, such as a long period of time when the second special symbol is not displayed even if the upper limit of the second reserved memory number is set to "1," or a long period of time when the second reserved memory number is at its upper limit, resulting in a player not getting a chance to win a jackpot even if a game ball enters the second start port 2002.

Figure 161 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first special symbol process (step S238). Note that the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process are similar program modules, and only differ in the random numbers and tables used for judgment. Therefore, only the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes will be selectively executed depending on the first special symbol process flag described above.

1. First special symbol normal processing (step S280) in which the first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and a lottery process is performed based on the read first special random number to determine the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped.
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which a process for determining the display mode when the first special symbol variable control is stopped is performed based on the result of a lottery process regarding the display mode when the first special symbol variable control is stopped.
3. A first variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which a lottery process is performed on the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the variation random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed in response to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600.
4. First special symbol variation process (step S283) in which the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 waits until the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped.
5. A first special symbol stop process (step S284) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol so that the display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol, determined based on the result of the lottery process for stopping the variable control of the first special symbol, is displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400.

The first special symbol process flag is set to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S280) should be performed during the main control side power-on processing (see FIG. 142).

Figure 162 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that normal processing of the first special symbol should be performed, as shown in FIG. 162, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first determines, in step S301, based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter, whether there is variable display control of the reserved first special symbol. If it is determined that there is variable display control of the reserved first special symbol, then, in step S302, the random number stored in the earliest memory area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (e.g., first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU is read from the RAM. Next, in steps S303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the random numbers (first special random number, first pattern random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops, which are stored in each memory area of the first special pattern reserved memory area in the RAM of the main control MPU, are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserve memory area has four memory areas, 1 through 4, and stores random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a starting winning combination in order, starting with the first (earliest) area. When a starting winning combination occurs while a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 through 3) memory area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 through 3) memory area. When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out, and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N = 2 through 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N = 2 through 4) memory area. This allows the order in which the reserves for the variable display control of the first special symbol occurred to be stored in a specific order, and the reserves for the variable display control are released in order, starting with the earliest reserve (the reserve that occurred earliest).

Then, in step S305, a win determination process is performed, which is a lottery process for determining whether or not the jackpot will be won, based on the first special random number of the first special symbol that was read out. This process then ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) to transition to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

Figure 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the winning determination table shown in Figure 189 (A) with the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 if the first special symbol normal processing is being performed, or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing if the second special symbol normal processing is being performed) (step S311).

The hit determination table shown in Figure 164 (A) is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). In the hit determination table referenced for comparison with the first special random number, the first special random numbers are associated with one type of first special random number so that it matches the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot win, three types of first special random numbers different from the jackpot determination value match the jackpot determination value indicating a small win, and 315 types of first special random numbers match the loss determination value indicating a loss (jackpot probability: 1 in 319, small win probability: 3 in 319). In this example, in the second special symbol process, the hit determination table referenced for comparison with the second special random number associates one type of second special random number with a hit determination value indicating a hit, 144 types of second special random numbers different from the hit determination value with a small hit determination value indicating a small hit, and 174 types of second special random numbers with the miss determination values indicating a miss (jackpot probability: 1 in 319, small hit probability: 144 in 319). In other words, the determination table referenced for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of determining a small hit than the hit determination table referenced for comparison with the first special random number, so that a player is more favored when a variable display of the second special symbol based on a start winning entry in the second start opening 2004 is executed than when a variable display of the first special symbol based on a start winning entry in the first start opening 2002 is executed.

If the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that a jackpot has occurred as a result of comparing the hit determination table with the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing) (step S312), it sets a jackpot flag indicating that the variation has resulted in a jackpot (step S313) and ends the hit determination process.

Furthermore, if the result of comparing the selected win determination table with the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing) is that a small win has occurred (step S314), a small win flag is set indicating that the variation has resulted in a small win (step S315), and the win determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if neither a big win nor a small win has been won, i.e., if it is determined to be a miss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM and includes a time-saving reach determination table for use when the game state is in a time-saving state, and a non-time-saving reach determination table for use when the game state is not in a time-saving state. In the time-saving reach determination table, the reach random numbers are associated with one type of reach random number so that it matches a reach determination value indicating a reach has occurred, and 71 types of reach random numbers so that it matches a reach determination value indicating a non-reach has occurred.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table for the non-time-shortened state, five types of reach random numbers, including the same reach random numbers as those set in the reach determination table for the time-shortened state, are associated with the reach determination values indicating a reach will occur, and 67 types of reach random numbers are associated with reach determination values indicating a non-reach will occur. Thus, in this embodiment, the reach determination values indicating a reach will occur are higher in the non-time-shortened state than in the time-shortened state.

If the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316) and determines that the reach has been missed (step S317), it sets a reach flag indicating that the change is a reach and terminates processing (step S318).

Figure 165 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 165, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first determines the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stops, i.e., the result of the win determination process (step S305). The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether the big win flag is set (step S321) or whether the small win flag is set (step S324).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU determines the type of jackpot by comparing the first pattern random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern with the jackpot pattern determination table shown in Figure 164 (B), and determines the mode of the first special pattern when the variable control of the first special pattern stops (the stopping pattern of the first special pattern) corresponding to the determined type of jackpot (step S322).

in particular,
1. A 15R jackpot in which the opening and closing pattern is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) to close the large prize opening 2005 after it has been left open for a long period of time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, thereby controlling the game to a 15R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for game balls to enter the large prize opening 2005, and controlling the game to a time-saving state in which the game is ended if a jackpot is not achieved within 77 times of the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the jackpot game state has ended. 2. The jackpot is determined to be one of two types of jackpots: a 2R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005 by repeating an opening/closing pattern twice (two rounds) after the large prize opening 2005 has been left open for a long period of time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005; a 2R jackpot in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005; a 2R jackpot in which the game state is controlled to a time-shortening state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state and is ended if a jackpot is not achieved within 77 executions of the variable display of special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) after the jackpot game state ends if the game state is controlled to a non-time-shortening state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state and is controlled to a normal state after the jackpot game state ends;

The jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number allocates 8 judgment values for a 15R jackpot and 192 judgment values for a 2R jackpot. In other words, if a lottery result indicating a jackpot is obtained by drawing based on the first special random number, there is a 4% chance of a 15R jackpot and a 96% chance of a 2R jackpot. Similarly, the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number allocates 196 judgment values for a 15R jackpot and 4 judgment values for a 2R jackpot. In other words, if a lottery result indicating a jackpot is obtained by drawing based on the second special random number, there is a 98% chance of a 15R jackpot and a 2% chance of a 2R jackpot. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is configured so that the probability of determining a 15R jackpot is higher in the jackpot symbol determination table which is compared with the second symbol random number than in the jackpot symbol determination table which is compared with the first symbol random number, and the player is in an advantageous position when the variable display of the second special symbol based on a start winning entry into the second start opening 2004 is executed rather than the variable display of the first special symbol based on a start winning entry into the first start opening 2002.

In addition, once the type of jackpot is determined, the stopping pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the manner in which the first special pattern will stop. Specifically, if a 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern. Note that in the second special pattern stopping pattern setting process (not shown), if a 15R jackpot is determined, the 15R jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern, and if a 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern.

In addition, if the big win flag is not set in step S131 but the small win flag is set (step S324), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of small win by comparing the first pattern random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern with the small win pattern determination table shown in Figure 164 (C), and determines the mode of the first special pattern when the variable control of the first special pattern corresponding to the determined type of big win stops (the stopping pattern of the first special pattern) (step S325).

in particular,
1. An opening and closing pattern in which the device winning port 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control the game into a small win game state in which a game ball can (easily) enter the device winning port 2006, and by guiding all game balls that enter the device winning port 2006 during the small win game state to the first loss port 2535, a first small win in which it is difficult for game balls to be accepted into the first V winning port 2007 and the second V winning port 2008 is achieved. 2. An opening and closing pattern in which the device winning port 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed nine times to control the game state to a small win game state in which a game ball can (easily) enter the device winning port 2006, and one of the game balls that has entered the device winning port 2006 during the small win game state is guided to the third distribution device 2550 after the device winning port 2006 is closed, thereby making it possible for the game ball to be accepted by the second V winning port 2008, and when the game ball is accepted by the second V winning port 2008, the game state is controlled to a small win game state in which a game ball can (easily) enter the device winning port 2006. 2. A second small win in which the opening and closing pattern is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) to close the large prize opening 2005 after it has been left open for a long period of time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, thereby controlling the game to a 15R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) for game balls to enter the large prize opening 2005, and if a big win does not occur within 77 times of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) after the end of the big win game state, the game is controlled to a time-saving state which ends. By executing an opening/closing pattern nine times in which the device winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed, the game is controlled to a small win game state in which a game ball can (easily) enter the device winning opening 2006, and one of the game balls that has entered the device winning opening 2006 during the small win game state is guided to the first V winning opening 2007 after the device winning opening 2006 is closed, and based on the game ball being accepted by the first V winning opening 2007, the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time after the small win game state. The opening and closing pattern is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) to control the game state to a 15R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for the game balls to enter the large prize opening 2005 after the opening and closing pattern is released (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, and if a jackpot is not achieved within 77 times of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state and the game state is terminated.

The small win symbol determination table, which is compared with the first symbol random number, allocates 199 judgment values for the second small win and 1 judgment value for the third small win. In other words, if a drawing based on the first special random number results in a small win, there is a 99.5% chance of a second small win, a 0.5% chance of a third small win, and no first small win. On the other hand, the small win symbol determination table, which is compared with the second symbol random number, allocates 20 judgment values for the first small win, 130 judgment values for the second small win, and 50 judgment values for the third small win. In other words, if a drawing based on the second special random number results in a small win, there is a 10% chance of a first small win, a 65% chance of a second small win, and a 25% chance of a third small win. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the small win pattern determination table which is compared with the second pattern random number is configured so that, compared with the small win pattern determination table which is compared with the first pattern random number, one of the game balls which have entered the device winning port 2006 is guided to the first V winning port 2007, thereby increasing the probability of determining a third small win which will always result in a 15R big win game state after the small win game state ends, and the player is in a more advantageous state when the variable display of the second special pattern based on a start winning entry into the second starting port 2004 is executed rather than the variable display of the first special pattern based on a start winning entry into the first starting port 2002.

In addition, once the type of small win is determined, the stopping pattern corresponding to the type of small win is determined as the appearance of the first special pattern when it stops. Specifically, if a second small win is determined, the second small win pattern is determined as the small win pattern, and if a third small win is determined, the third small win pattern is determined as the small win pattern. Note that in the second special pattern stopping pattern setting process (not shown), if a first small win is determined, the first small win pattern is determined as the small win pattern, if a second small win is determined, the second small win pattern is determined as the small win pattern, and if a third small win is determined, the third small win pattern is determined as the small win pattern.

If neither the big win flag nor the small win flag is set, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the symbol to be a losing symbol (step S327). After this determination process for the stopped symbol has been completed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result so that the lottery result (indicating the type of big win, small win, reach miss, or miss (which may also indicate the type of stopped symbol of the first special symbol)) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S328). Then, in step S329, the first special symbol process flag is updated to transition to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282), at which point the process ends.

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the performance display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and variation pattern command (variably displaying the left, center, and right decorative patterns and displaying them in a static manner in the order of left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → center decorative pattern (note that the left, center, and right decorative patterns may also be displayed in a synchronized dynamic manner as the same pattern and displayed in a static manner at the same time)). Specifically, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines the mode (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern displayed on the performance display device 1600 when it stops changing to be a small win pattern ("final battle") if a small win is identified from the received judgment result notification command, a 2R jackpot pattern (a combination in which the left, center, and right decorative patterns are the same even number pattern from "0" to "9") if a 2R jackpot is identified, and a 15R jackpot pattern (a combination in which the left, center, and right decorative patterns are the same odd number pattern from "0" to "9") if a 15R jackpot is identified. Furthermore, if a reach miss is identified, a miss pattern accompanied by a reach (a combination of the same left and right decorative patterns between "0" and "9" but with a different center decorative pattern; a reach miss pattern) is determined, and if a miss is identified, a miss pattern not accompanied by a reach (a combination of the left, center, and right decorative patterns in which at least the left and right decorative patterns are different) is determined, and when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (when the game presentation ends), the determined stopped pattern is controlled and displayed on the presentation display device 1600.

In this example, the pachinko machine 1 can be controlled to the time-shortened state after a jackpot gaming state until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a maximum of 77 times, but the time-shortened state may also be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of jackpots after being controlled to transition to the time-shortened state. Specifically, if the time-shortened state is controlled after a jackpot gaming state and a predetermined number of jackpots (for example, two) occur thereafter, the machine may be controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the time-shortened state after the end of the predetermined number of jackpot gaming states. Furthermore, even if the number of jackpots that occur is less than the predetermined number, the machine may be controlled to the non-time-shortened state during the jackpot gaming state, and then controlled to the time-shortened state again after the jackpot gaming state.

Figure 166 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 166, if the jackpot flag is set (step S341), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 selects a variation pattern table (not shown) for a jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S342); if the small jackpot flag is set (step S343), it selects a variation pattern table (not shown) for a small jackpot corresponding to the type of small jackpot determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S344); if the reach flag is set (step S345), it selects a variation pattern table for a reach (not shown) (step S346); and if neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, i.e., if it is a normal miss (a miss where the reach effect is not executed), it selects a variation pattern table for a miss (not shown) (step S347).

Then, the selected variation pattern table is compared with the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing to determine the variation pattern to be executed (step S348), and a variation pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the determined variation pattern will be started, thereby starting the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 (step S349). The main control MPU also sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S350). As a result, performance control is performed by the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 for the variation time thus determined.

In this example, multiple types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the pattern random number (first pattern random number, second pattern random number). Furthermore, the variation patterns set in each variation pattern table are stored in a manner associated with each of the variation random numbers, with multiple pieces of variation time information indicating the predetermined time (variation time) required to control the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern). The main control MPU compares the selected variation pattern table from multiple types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination results based on the special random number and the pattern random number with the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special pattern normal processing, and obtains the variation time information associated with the read variation random number from this table to determine the variation pattern of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern). This allows a lottery process to be performed for the variation pattern of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern). The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

In addition, the variable pattern table for reach in this example is set up to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing a judgment value indicating which reach effect to execute with a variable random number. For example, among reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher chance of winning a jackpot than the normal reach effect, and when a super reach effect is executed, the player's chances of winning a jackpot game state increase.

Furthermore, once the variable display control of the first special symbol is initiated, the next step in step S351 is to determine whether the counter value of the time-saving count counter, which sets the number of times the time-saving state continues, is "0." If this counter value is not "0," the time-saving count counter is counted down (step S352), and then it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous time-saving count counter is "0" (step S353). If the counter value is "0," a time-saving end flag is set (step S354), indicating that the time-saving control is to be ended.

If the processing in step S351 determines that the counter value of the time-saving count counter is "0," or if the processing in step S353 determines that the time-saving count counter is not "0," the processing proceeds to step S355. Then, this processing ends when the first special pattern process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special pattern change processing (step S283).

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table for when a loss occurs, the fluctuation time information for the special symbols, which is set to about 1 second when in the time-saving state, is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol), while the fluctuation time information for the special symbols, which is set to about 12 seconds when in the non-time-saving state, is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). In other words, the fluctuation time information for the special symbols is set so that the time required to control the fluctuation display of the special symbols is extremely short for the fluctuation pattern selected for when a loss occurs when the time-saving state is selected, compared to the fluctuation pattern selected for when a loss occurs when the time-saving state is not selected.

Figure 167 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol change process (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol fluctuation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 167, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, in step S371, subtracts 1 from the fluctuation timer, which is set with the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process for the fluctuation pattern (step S282). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, i.e., the lottery-selected fluctuation time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in step S373, the process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated to transition to the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

Figure 168 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stopping process (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 168, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs display control in step S381 to cause the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process to be displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and sets a stop display command to the peripheral control board 1510 instructing the performance display device 1600 to display the derived display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol (step S382).

Next, if the time-saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time-saving end flag (step S384) and also resets the time-saving flag (step S385). As a result, when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) have been displayed in varying states a predetermined number of times (77 times in this example), the time-saving control (control in the time-saving state) is terminated and non-time-saving control (control in the normal state) is initiated.

Furthermore, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating the start of jackpot play (step S387) and sets the waiting time until the start of jackpot play (the time during which a message indicating the start of jackpot play is displayed) in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, step S388 also executes a process to set the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot in a jackpot counter, which indicates the remaining number of rounds. The jackpot counter is decremented by one each time a round is played in the jackpot control process described below. When the jackpot counter reaches "0," the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the specified number of rounds has been played and controls the jackpot play to end. Specifically, in the jackpot control process described below, the pre-opening process for the large prize opening (step S401) and the process during the opening of the large prize opening (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the jackpot counter reaches "0", and when the round ends in the process during the opening of the large prize opening (step S402), the jackpot counter is decremented by 1 and, based on the fact that it reaches "0", the process proceeds to the post-opening process for the large prize opening (step S403) and the jackpot game is ended.

Then, a jackpot execution flag is set to indicate that a jackpot game is in progress (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually for each type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. This causes the jackpot game presentation corresponding to the type of jackpot indicated by the jackpot start command to be executed by the presentation display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speaker, etc. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set.

In addition, the jackpot in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, is reset when the jackpot game ends, specifically when the post-opening large prize opening process (step S403) of the jackpot control process (step S235A) has completed the opening and closing control of the first large prize opening 2005 according to the type of jackpot (for example, opening and closing control that repeats an opening and closing pattern two or fifteen times to close the first large prize opening 2005 after it has been opened for a long period of time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2403 detects that ten game balls have entered the first large prize opening 2005) (all rounds that can be executed during the jackpot game). By resetting the jackpot execution flag, the jackpot control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special pattern and special electric device control process (step S114), but the function display unit 1400 is able to display the first special pattern change on the first special pattern display and the second special pattern change on the second special pattern display of the function display unit 1400.

Also, if the big hit flag is not set (step S386), but the small hit flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a small hit start command indicating the start of small hit gameplay (step S391) and sets the interval timer for the waiting time until the start of small hit gameplay (the time during which a message indicating the start of small hit gameplay is displayed, etc.) (step S392). Then, a small hit execution flag indicating that small hit gameplay is in progress is set (step S393). The small hit start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 and is prepared individually for each type of small hit. In step S391, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command, third small hit start command) corresponding to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) is set. As a result, the small win game presentation corresponding to the type of small win indicated by the small win start command is executed by the presentation display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc. Similarly, the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing also sets small win start commands (first small win start command, second small win start command, third small win start command) corresponding to the type of small win (first small win, second small win, third small win).

The small win in progress flag, which indicates that a small win game is in progress, is reset when the small win game ends, specifically when the opening and closing control of the bonus prize opening 2006 according to the type of small win is completed during the small win in-progress process (step S411) of the small win control process (step S236A) described below (for example, opening the bonus prize opening 2006 for a short time (e.g., 80 ms) and then closing it, repeating this pattern two or nine times) . Resetting the small win in progress flag prevents the small win control process (step S236A) from being executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric bonus device control process (step S114), while enabling the display of a changing first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the display of a changing second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

Also, if the small win flag is not set, i.e., if a miss occurs, the interval timer is set to the waiting time until the next variable display of the special symbol begins (the time during which the static special symbol is displayed) (step S394), and the process proceeds to step S395.

After executing the processing of steps S386 to S394, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 ends this processing when it updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process transitions to the initial value of first special symbol normal processing (step S395).

Figure 169 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A). During the jackpot control process, one of the following three processes is selectively executed depending on the jackpot process flag.

1. A pre-opening process for a big prize opening (step S401) in which the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the game will transition to the big prize game state based on the fact that the state of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) when the variable display stops becomes a big prize symbol, or the next round starts.
2. A process during which the first major prize opening 2005 is controlled to an open state based on the fact that the mode of the special symbol when the variable display stops becomes a jackpot symbol, or the first major prize opening 2005 is controlled to an open state based on the fact that the next round is about to start, and the first major prize opening 2005 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls have entered the first major prize opening 2005 (step S402).
3. A post-opening process of the big prize opening (step S403) that waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the big prize game state has ended when all rounds have ended.

The jackpot process flag is set in step S42 to indicate that the pre-opening process for the large prize opening (step S401) should be performed. Furthermore, in the open-opening process for the large prize opening (step S402), a jackpot round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set at the start of the round in which the first large prize opening 2005 is controlled to be open, and a jackpot round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set at the end of the round in which the first large prize opening 2005 is controlled to be closed. The jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game effects corresponding to the number of rounds specified by the jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command are executed by the effect display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speaker, etc.

Figure 170 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small win control process (step S236A). During small win processing, one of the following two processes is selectively executed depending on the small win process flag.

1. Small win start process (step S410) that executes a setting process to start a small win game state
2. Small win processing (step S411) for monitoring the entry of game balls and the opening time during the small win game state

The small win process flag is set in step S42 to indicate that the small win start process (step S410) should be performed. Furthermore, when the small win process detects that a game ball has entered a specific area, the jackpot in progress flag is set, and the number of rounds that can be played in the jackpot game state (15 rounds in this example) is set in the jackpot counter, and the process ends. This allows the jackpot game state to begin immediately after the small win game state.

Figure 171 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol and normal electric device control process (step S116).

Now, in the processing of step S801, if the detection signal from the normal winning port sensor 2401 is in the ON state and it is determined that a gaming ball has passed through the normal winning port 2003, as shown in FIG. 171, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs normal winning port winning processing in step S802, such as first obtaining the normal random number for the normal pattern from the random number counter and storing it in the normal pattern reserve memory area of RAM.

Next, in the normal symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed depending on the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and a lottery process for determining the display mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number (step S803).
2. A normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process is performed on the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. Ordinary symbol variation processing (step S805) that waits until the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 stops.
4. A normal pattern stop process (step S806) for stopping the variable display of the normal pattern so that the display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the normal pattern determined based on the result of the lottery process for stopping the variable control of the normal pattern is displayed on the normal pattern display device of the function display unit 1400.
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the state when the normal symbol fluctuation control is stopped indicates a state suggesting a "normal symbol win," a normal electric device opening process (step S807) is executed to control the second starting gate door 2411 to move backward to allow the second starting gate 2004 to receive game balls.

The normal symbol process flag is set to indicate that the normal symbol normal processing (step S803) should be performed during the main control side power-on processing (see Figure 142).

[14. Playing in small win game state]
Next, a description will be given of the game in the small win game state. As described above, in this example, when the result of the variable display of the special symbol is a small win, the game is controlled to a small win game state in which the opening and closing pattern in which the special prize winning port 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed a predetermined number of times, and the small win game state is ended when all of the game balls that entered the special prize winning port 2006 during the small win game state and were detected by the special prize winning port sensor 2513 are detected by any of the first loss port sensor 2515, the third loss port sensor 3004, the first V prize winning port sensor 2514, and the second V prize winning port sensor 3003, that is, when they are discharged from the special prize winning port 2006 to the rear of the game board 5. In addition, if a game ball that enters the device winning port 2006 during a small win game state is accepted by the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port 2008 and detected by the first V winning port sensor 2514 or the second V winning port sensor 3003, the game state is controlled to a big win game state after the small win game state, and if a game ball that enters the device winning port 2006 during a small win game state is accepted by the first loss port 2535 or the third loss port 2556 and detected by the first loss port sensor 2515 or the third loss port sensor 3004, the game state is controlled to a normal state or a time-saving state depending on the control state before the small win after the small win game state.

In addition, as described above, in this example, the game is controlled to one of the following small win game states: a first small win in which all game balls that have entered the special feature winning port 2006 are controlled to be guided to the first losing port 2535; a second small win in which one of the game balls that have entered the special feature winning port 2006 is controlled to be guided to the third sorting device 2550, and after rotating inside the crane 2553, is received in either the second V winning port 2008 or one of the two third losing ports 2556; and a third small win in which one of the game balls that have entered the special feature winning port 2006 is controlled to be guided to the first V winning port 2007.

In addition, in the case of a first small win, the number of times the device winning port 2006 opens and closes is less than in the case of a second small win and a third small win. In addition, all game balls that have entered the device winning port 2006 are guided to the first loss port 2535, which is the closest from the device winning port 2006, and detected by the first loss port sensor 2515, so the execution period of the small win game state (the period from when the small win game state starts to when it ends) is short. In the case of a third small win, one of the game balls that have entered the device winning port 2006 is guided to the first V entry port 2007, which is the next closest from the device winning port 2006 after the first loss port 2535, and detected by the first V entry port sensor 2514, so the execution period of the small win game state is the second shortest after the first small win. On the other hand, in the second small win, one of the game balls that has entered the special device winning port 2006 is guided to the third sorting device 2550, which is the farthest from the special device winning port 2006, and the game ball guided to the third sorting device 2550 is then rotated within the crane 2553, after which the game ball received by the second V winning port 2008 is detected by the second V winning port sensor 3003, and the game ball received by the third loss port 2556 is detected by the third loss port sensor 3004, and therefore the execution period of the small win game state is the longest of the three types of small wins.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state is determined to be a small hit based on the first special random number, the rate at which a second small hit will occur is set high, and in the normal state, a second small hit is executed in most cases, whereas when the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time-saving state is determined to be a small hit based on the second special random number, the rate at which a third small hit will occur is higher than in the normal state, and in the time-saving state, a third small hit is executed at a rate of one in every four small hits.

That is, in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, if a game ball is received by the second V winning port 2008 during the small win game state, the game is controlled to transition to a time-shortened state after the 15R big win game state, which is advantageous to the player, and therefore, one of the game balls that has entered the device winning port 2006 during the small win game state is made to rotate inside the crane 2553, thereby attracting the player's attention for a certain period of time while creating a sense of suspense as to whether it will be received by the second V winning port 2008 or the third losing port 2556, whereas in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time-shortened state, even if a game ball is received by the second V winning port 2008 during the small win game state, the game is simply controlled to the time-shortened state again after the 15R big win game state, so that if one of the game balls that has entered the device winning port 2006 rotates inside the crane 2553, it may actually result in a decrease in interest in the game. Therefore, in this example, by increasing the proportion of third small wins, which have a short execution period during the small win game state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time-saving state, the small win game state is ended in a short time during the time-saving state.

Furthermore, as described above, when the distribution rotor 2531 rotates from a storable state to an unstorable state upon a third small win, the game balls stored in the storage section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 flow through the first hit passage 2536, down the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540, and come into contact with the top surface of the closed distribution door 2544, being guided to the right, and entering the first V winning opening 2007. Therefore, when the distribution rotor 2531 rotates from a storable state to an unstorable state upon a third small win, the game balls that have been sorted to the first hit passage 2536 are ejected to the rear of the game board 5 in a short time, becoming invisible to the player. Furthermore, the first V winning port 2007 can be entered when the sorting door 2544 is moving forward above the second losing port 2543, but because the sorting door 2544 moves back and forth, it is difficult to visually confirm its operating state. In other words, the existence of the sorting door 2544 is difficult for a player to recognize (hard to see), and coupled with the fact that the game balls sorted by the sorting door 2544 to the first V winning port 2007 are discharged to the rear of the game board 5 in a short period of time, the existence of the first V winning port 2007 is also difficult to recognize, so it is difficult for a player to notice that the game ball has been guided to the first V winning port 2007, in other words, that the game ball is passing through the first V winning port 2007. In this way, when a third small win occurs during the time-saving state, it is difficult for the player to notice that the game ball has been guided to the first V winning port 2007. Therefore, the small win game state can be executed without the player being aware of the lottery in the small win game state (whether the game ball will be accepted by the V winning port (first V winning port 2007, second V winning port 2008)), and the 15R big win game state can be executed after the small win game state ends. This allows the small win game state and the 15R big win game state to occur consecutively in a short period of time, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the presentation of the small win game state executed by the presentation display device 1600 is different when a second small win occurs and the game ball is distributed to the third distribution device 2550, and when a third small win occurs and the game ball is distributed to the first V winning port 2007. Specifically, when a second small win occurs, a presentation is executed to create excitement as to whether the game ball distributed to the third distribution device 2550 will enter the second V winning port 2008 or the third loss port 2556, whereas when a third small win occurs, a presentation is executed that does not draw attention to the rotation of the distribution rotor 2531 (for example, when a third small win occurs, the same notification as when a big win occurs (such as when a third small win occurs and the player is notified that it is a big win rather than a small win)), so that the player does not realize that they have won a small win. It may be possible to make it difficult for players to realize that a 15R game state is being played, and to present an opportunity to win prize balls similar to those in the small jackpot game state as a special bonus chance for winning prize balls different from those that can be won in the jackpot game state before the start of the jackpot game state. This increases a player's interest in the game because a special bonus chance is played before the start of the 15R jackpot game state and the player can win prize balls different from those that can be won in the 15R jackpot game state.

In addition, if the arrival time to the V prize opening is shorter for a third small win than for a second small win, the lengths of the path (first path) that the game ball guided by the second small win takes to be accepted by the V prize opening and the path (second path) that the game ball guided by the third small win takes to be accepted by the V prize opening do not necessarily have to be longer in proportion to the arrival time to the V prize opening. If the arrival time to the V prize opening is longer than for a third small win, the path (first path) that the game ball guided by the second small win takes to be accepted by the V prize opening may be shorter than the path (second path) that the game ball guided by the third small win takes to be accepted by the V prize opening. For example, by providing a deceleration means in the first path that slows the rolling speed of the game ball, it may be possible to make it take longer to reach the V prize opening than a game ball passing through the second path.

In addition, in the above example, multiple V winning ports, namely the first V winning port 2007 and the second V winning port 2008, are provided, and in the variable display of the first special pattern executed in the normal state, one of the game balls that has entered the device winning port 2006 is distributed to the third distribution device 2550 having the second V winning port 2008, and in the variable display of the second special pattern executed in the time-saving state, one of the game balls that has entered the device winning port 2006 is guided to the first V winning port 2007, which is the second closest in distance from the device winning port 2006 after the first losing port 2535, thereby varying the execution period of the small win game state. However, the distance to the V winning port and the number of V winning ports are not limited to those described above, and the technical concept of the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine, for example, that has only one V winning port. Specifically, for example, a second small win will take longer to reach the V prize opening if a means (obstacle, etc.) is provided to hinder or delay the acceptance of the game ball into the V prize opening, such as making the game ball available to be accepted into the V prize opening after rotating inside the crane 2553, and a third small win will take less time to reach the V prize opening if no means is provided to hinder or delay the acceptance of the game ball into the V prize opening (as long as there are at least fewer of them than the second small win), and the execution rate between the normal state (display of a changing first special symbol) and the time-saving state (display of a changing second special symbol) may be changed depending on the common time to reach the V prize opening.

[14-1. Error notification during small win game state]
Next, an error notification in a small win game state will be explained. In this example, in a small win game state, the time until the game ball that entered the prize winning opening 2006 is discharged is monitored, and if the game ball is not discharged within a predetermined period of time, an error notification is made.

Figure 172 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small win start process (step S411). The small win start process executes a setting process to start the small win game state.

When the small win start process begins, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the interval timer set in step S392 of the first special symbol stop process or the second special symbol stop process (step S421). When the interval timer times out (step S422), that is, when the waiting time from the stop display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) to the start of the small win game state has elapsed, the elapsed timer that measures the elapsed time since the start of the small win game state is set to the initial value "0" (step S423).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then selects opening/closing pattern data according to the type of small win currently being executed (first small win, second small win, third small win) (step S424), and begins control of the special device winning opening 2006, the distribution rotor 2531, and the distribution door 2544 based on the selected opening/closing pattern data (step S425). Once the small win process flag is updated (step S426) to transition to the small win process (step S411), this process ends. On the other hand, if the interval timer has not timed out in step S421, the process ends without executing any further processing.

The opening/closing pattern data is provided for each type of small win, and indicates the operating state of each of the special feature winning opening 2006, the distribution rotor 2531, and the distribution door 2544 according to the elapsed time from the start of the small win game state. In this example, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls the special feature winning opening 2006, the distribution rotor 2531, and the distribution door 2544 based on the opening/closing pattern data according to the type of small win selected in step S424, causing the special feature winning opening 2006, the distribution rotor 2531, and the distribution door 2544 to operate in the manner shown in FIG. 123.

Figure 173 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small win processing (step S412).

When small win processing begins, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first increments the elapsed timer, which measures the elapsed time since the start of the small win game state, by 1, and, if the discharge monitoring timer described below is set, decrements the timer value of this discharge monitoring timer by 1 (step S431). After incrementing the elapsed timer by 1, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 reads the opening/closing pattern data corresponding to the elapsed timer (the time elapsed since the start of the small win game state) from the opening/closing pattern data selected in step S424 of the small win start processing, and controls the opening and closing of the bonus prize opening 2006, the distribution rotor 2531, and the distribution door 2544 based on this read opening/closing pattern data (step S432).

Furthermore, if the device winning opening sensor 2513, which detects a game ball received by the device winning opening 2006, is turned on (step S433), that is, if a game ball is received by the device winning opening 2006, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 increments by 1 the remaining ball counter, which counts the remaining balls that have entered the device winning opening 2006 but have not yet been ejected from the device winning opening 2006 (step S434).

Furthermore, when the first game ball is received into the special device winning opening 2006 after the small win game state has started (when the first game ball enters) (step S435), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the expected longest period, which is set corresponding to each small win type, in the discharge monitoring timer as the longest expected period until all game balls that have entered the special device winning opening 2006, including this game ball, are discharged (step S436).

In this example, in the case of a first small win, all game balls received by the special feature winning port 2006 are allowed to enter the second losing port 2535 without being sorted by the sorting rotor 2531 to the first winning passage 2536, so the shortest expected longest period is set to the three types of small wins (e.g., 10,000 ms). In the case of a second small win, one of the game balls received by the special feature winning port 2006 is sorted by the sorting rotor 2531 to the first winning passage 2536, and the game ball that enters the third sorting device 2550 through the first winning passage 2536 rotates inside the crane 2553 before entering either the second V winning port 2008 or one of the two third losing ports 2556, so the longest expected longest period is set to the three types of small wins (e.g., 180,000 ms). In the case of a third small win, one of the game balls received by the special device winning port 2006 is distributed to the first winning passage 2536 by the distribution rotor 2531, but the game ball that passes through the first winning passage 2536 is received by the second V winning port 2008 without entering the third distribution device 2550, so the expected longest period is set to be the second shortest period after the first small win (for example, 60,000 seconds).

The discharge monitoring timer is decremented in step S431, and if the discrepancy between the number of game balls entering the special prize winning opening 2006 and the number of game balls discharged from the special prize winning opening 2006 continues even after the discharge monitoring timer times out, it is determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent activity is occurring.

In addition, the time elapsed from the start of the small win game state may be monitored, and if this elapsed time reaches the longest expected period for the type of small win currently being played, it may be determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent activity is occurring. Alternatively, the time elapsed from the first opening of the bonus prize winning port 2006 in the small win game state may be monitored, and if this elapsed time reaches the longest expected period for the type of small win currently being played, it may be determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent activity is occurring. The timing at which the distribution of game balls by the distribution rotor 2531 is actually performed (at the start of the first small win game state, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned ON (energized) with the state in which the storage portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 faces upward, and the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned OFF (non-energized) with the state in which the storage portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 faces rightward (the timing of the first distribution operation of the distribution rotor 2531); at the second small win, the timing at which the first distribution of game balls by the distribution rotor 2531 is performed After the distribution operation timing of the first, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned ON (energized) again, and the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 faces upward, and the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned OFF (non-energized) and the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 faces rightward (second distribution operation timing of the distribution rotor 2531). The time elapsed from the timing when the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned OFF (non-energized) from a state in which the storage section 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 is facing upwards (the timing of the third distribution operation of the distribution rotor 2531) can be monitored, and if this elapsed time reaches the longest expected period depending on the type of small win currently being executed, it can be determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent activity is occurring.

Furthermore, when the discharge of a game ball received in the special device winning opening 2006 is detected, that is, when a game ball is detected by any of the first losing opening sensor 2515, first V winning opening sensor 2514, second V winning opening sensor 3003, and third losing opening sensor 3004, which detect when a game ball received in the special device winning opening 2006 is discharged (step S437), the remaining ball counter is decremented by 1 (step S438).

Then, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is "0" or not, i.e., whether the number of game balls received by the special device winning opening 2006 matches the number of game balls discharged from the special device winning opening 2006 (step S439). If the remaining number counter is "0", it is determined that no abnormality or fraud has occurred and the process proceeds to step S442.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S439 that the remaining ball counter is not "0," it is then determined whether the discharge monitoring timer has timed out (step S440) to determine whether any abnormalities or fraud have occurred. As described above, the discharge monitoring timer indicates the remaining period of the estimated maximum period set for each small win type as the longest period estimated from the start of the small win game state until all game balls are discharged from the special device winning port 2006. If the discharge monitoring timer has not timed out in step S440, processing ends without executing any further steps. As a result, when the special symbol and special electric device control processing (step S114) of the main control side timer interrupt processing is executed again, the small win processing is executed and the remaining ball counter is monitored until the discharge monitoring timer times out.

Furthermore, if the remaining ball counter is not "0" and the ejection monitoring timer times out in step S440, it is determined that an abnormality or fraud has occurred, an ejection error notification is issued (step S441), and the small win processing is terminated. The ejection error notification may include an error display on the effect display device 1600, an alarm sound output from speakers 622, 354, 462, 464, or the like, or a predetermined lighting or flashing of lamps or LEDs mounted on the game board 5 or door frame 3. In this example, a message such as "Ejection error" is displayed in a portion of the effect display device 1600, and output from speakers 622, 354, 462, 464 is not generated. In other words, since the majority of cases where the remaining ball counter is not "0" indicate a minor abnormality, such as a game ball that entered the bonus prize slot 2006 not being ejected, a display intended to notify the player of an abnormality in the gaming machine is not displayed, which may cause discomfort or anxiety to the player. After issuing the dispense error notification in step S441, the small win processing ends without updating the small win process flag. This causes the small win processing to be executed again the next time the main control timer interrupt processing's special symbol and special electric device control processing (step S114) is executed. In other words, the dispense error notification will be executed without ending the small win game state until all game balls received in the device winning slot 2006 are dispensed, or until the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch, causing the gaming center staff to operate the RWM clear button 633z pressing operation section and completely erasing (resetting) the information stored in a specified area of the RAM built into the main control MPU.

If it is determined in step S439 that the remaining ball counter is "0," it is determined whether a game ball has entered the first V winning slot 2007 or the second V winning slot 2008 (step S442). If in step S442 a game ball has not entered the first V winning slot 2007 or the second V winning slot 2008, that is, if a game ball has entered the first loss slot 2535 or the third loss slot 2556 and is detected by the first loss slot sensor 2515 or the third loss slot sensor 3004, a small win end command is set to instruct the execution of a presentation at the end of the small win game state (step S443), and this process ends when the small win process flag is updated (step S447) to transition to the small win start process (step S411).

If, in step S442, a gaming ball enters the first V winning slot 2007 or the second V winning slot 2008 and is detected by the first V winning slot sensor 2514 or the second V winning slot sensor 3003, the interval timer is set to the waiting time until the start of the jackpot game (step S444), and then the small jackpot in progress flag is reset and the jackpot in progress flag is set (step S445). In addition, a V winning jackpot start command is set (step S446), which instructs the execution of a presentation at the start of the jackpot game state based on the reception of a gaming ball into the first V winning slot 2007 or the second V winning slot 2008. This process ends when the small jackpot process flag is updated (step S447) to transition to the small jackpot start process (step S411).

In this way, in this example, when a game ball is received into the device winning opening 2006, the value of the remaining ball counter is incremented by 1, and each time a game ball is discharged from the device winning opening 2006, the value of the remaining ball counter is decremented by 1, making it possible to determine the number of game balls remaining without being discharged from the device winning device 2006. Furthermore, the period (expected longest period) until a discharge error notification is issued varies depending on the type of small win, in other words, the allocation destination of the game ball. For a third small win in which a game ball that has passed through the first hit passage 2536 is received by the second V winning opening 2008 without entering the third distribution device 2550, the period (expected longest period) until a discharge error notification is issued is shorter than for a second small win in which the game ball enters the third distribution device 2550 and rotates inside the crane 2553. In other words, the period until a discharge error notification is issued is shorter for a small win that takes a shorter time (distance) to reach the V winning opening.

Normally, no game balls remain in the device winning opening 2006, so if game balls remain in the device winning opening 2006 for a long period of time, it can be determined that some kind of abnormality (error) has occurred. Furthermore, if it is detected that more game balls have been discharged than the number of game balls that have entered the device winning opening 2006, it can be determined that there is a possibility of fraudulent activity being carried out to illegally place game balls in the device winning opening 2006. The pachinko machine 1 in this example monitors for the occurrence of such abnormalities or fraudulent activity, and issues a discharge error alert if any of these are suspected.

In addition, in this example, even after an ejection error is reported based on the ejection monitoring timer timing out when the remaining ball counter is not "0" due to the detection that game balls remain in the special device winning opening 2006 or that more game balls have been ejected than entered the special device winning opening 2006, the small win processing is executed each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is executed to monitor the value of the remaining ball counter without stopping play, and if the value of the remaining ball counter becomes "0", that is, if the state has returned to normal, the system automatically returns to a state in which it determines whether game balls have entered the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008, thereby ending the small win game state.

In this example, even if the value of the remaining ball counter has not reached "0" after an ejection error notification is issued in step S441 of the small win processing, if a more serious abnormality occurs, an error notification regarding this serious abnormality will be issued as a priority. Serious abnormalities include, for example, when any of the multiple magnetic sensors 2010 detects a magnetic field acting fraudulently within the game area 5a (magnetic detection error notification), when radio wave irradiation is detected (radio wave detection error notification), when it is detected that the door frame 3 has been opened (door open error notification), and other conditions that indicate a high possibility of fraudulent activity. When such a serious abnormality occurs, the discharge error notification of step S441 in the small win gaming state is terminated and an error notification (magnetic detection error notification, radio wave detection error notification, magnetic detection error notification, etc.) relating to the serious abnormality is executed, and after the error notification relating to the serious abnormality is terminated, the discharge error notification of step S441 in the small win gaming state may be resumed again, or by overwriting the error notification relating to the serious abnormality with the discharge error notification of step S441 in the small win gaming state and executing it, the discharge error notification of step S441 in the small win gaming state is reflected in the display on the effect display device 1600, the output of speakers 622, 354, 462, 464, etc., the lighting and blinking of lamps, LEDs, etc. provided on the gaming board 5 and door frame 3 (executed in a manner that can be seen and heard). However, the content of the discharge error notification may progress over time while the error notification related to a serious abnormality is being made (it may be executed in the background), and when the error notification related to a serious abnormality has ended, the discharge error notification may be made visible or audible with the progressed content reflected in the display on the effect display device 1600, the output of speakers 622, 354, 462, 464, etc., and the lighting or blinking of lamps, LEDs, etc. provided on the game board 5 or door frame 3 (for example, if the error notification related to a serious abnormality is started 5 seconds after the discharge error notification of step S441 in a small win game state is started and this error notification is executed for 30 seconds, after the error notification related to a serious abnormality has ended, the content will resume from 35 seconds after the discharge error notification of step S441 in a small win game state is started).

In addition, in step S439 of the small win processing, the manner of the discharge error notification may be different depending on whether the remaining ball counter is "1" or greater or less than "0." If the remaining ball counter is "1" or greater, this indicates only a minor abnormality in which game balls that entered the special feature winning opening 2006 have not been discharged, whereas if the remaining ball counter is less than "0," this indicates a serious abnormality in which more game balls have been discharged than the number that entered the special feature winning opening 2006, and there is a possibility that game balls have been fraudulently entered into the special feature winning opening 2006. Therefore, when a minor abnormality occurs, such as a game ball that has entered the bonus prize opening 2006 not being ejected, an ejection error notification 1 may be issued, for example, as shown in FIG. 174, by displaying "Ejection abnormality" or the like in a portion of the effect display device 1600 and continuing to output sound effects from the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464 so that no error sound is output, and some of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are partially illuminated; when a serious abnormality occurs, such as more game balls being ejected than the number that entered, an ejection error notification 2 may be issued, for example, by displaying "Fraud has occurred!" or the like in the entire effect display device 1600, and the volume of the sound effects may be reduced and a loud error sound such as "Fraud has occurred" may be output from the speakers 622, 354, 462, and 464; and further, all of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 may be illuminated to light up the entire door frame 3, thereby notifying the occurrence of fraudulent activity.

In this example, the detection signal of the third distribution detection sensor 2552 provided midway along the third distribution guide path 2551 is input to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the gaming ball guided to the third distribution guide path 2551 by the second distribution device 2540 during the second small win game state is detected by the third distribution detection sensor 2552 provided midway along the third distribution guide path 2551, the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the effect display device 1610, speakers 622, 354, 462, 464, and lamps and LEDs provided on the gaming board 5 and door frame 3 to execute an exciting effect in which the gaming ball circling the wheel 2553 inside the third distribution device 2550 will be received by the second V winning port 2008 or the third losing port 2556.

In addition, the detection signal of the third distribution detection sensor 2552 installed midway along the third distribution guideway 2551 may be input to the main control board 1310. In this case, the presence or absence of an abnormality may be determined based on the detection of the gaming ball by the third distribution detection sensor 2552. For example, if a gaming ball is detected in a V entry port or loss port different from the V entry port or loss port scheduled for the small win type during the above-mentioned small win processing, or if there is a possibility that a gaming ball will be detected in a V entry port or loss port different from the V entry port or loss port scheduled for the small win type (if the gaming ball heads toward a path or entry port different from the path or entry port scheduled for the small win type), it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred and a distribution error notification may be issued in step S441 of the small win processing.

Specifically, the V entry slots and loss slots scheduled for the type of small win are as follows: for the first small win, the first loss slot 2535 is scheduled; for the second small win, the second V entry slot 2008 or the third loss slot 2556 is scheduled; and for the third small win, the first V entry slot 2007 is scheduled. In the case of the first small win, if the small win processing detects that a game ball has been received into either the first V entry slot 2007, the second V entry slot 2008, or the third loss slot 2556; in the case of the second small win, if the small win processing detects that a game ball has been received into either the first loss slot 2535 or the first V entry slot 2007; and in the case of the third small win, if the small win processing detects that a game ball has been received into either the first loss slot 2535, the second V entry slot 2008, or the third loss slot 2556. If this is detected, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and as shown in FIG. 174, for example, a message such as "Fraud has occurred!" is displayed across the entire area of the effect display device 1600, and the volume of the effect sound is suppressed from speakers 622, 354, 462, 464, and an error sound saying "Fraud has occurred" is output at a loud volume. Furthermore, all of the LEDs on the door frame 3 may be illuminated to illuminate the entire door frame 3, thereby issuing a sorting error alert to notify the occurrence of fraud. In this case, the occurrence of fraud can be immediately reported, allowing for early detection of fraud.

In addition, a second distribution detection sensor that detects game balls circulating inside the second distribution guideway 2541 may be provided in the middle of the second distribution guideway 2541, and the detection signal of the second distribution detection sensor may be input to the main control board 1310.In the case of a first small win, if there is a possibility that the game ball will be accepted into either the first V winning port 2007, the second V winning port 2008, or the third losing port 2556 during the small win processing, that is, if the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball and determines that the game ball has entered the second distribution guideway 2541, or if there is a second small win, if the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball during the small win processing but determines that the game ball has entered the third losing port 2556, If the distribution detection sensor 2552 is unable to detect a game ball and it is determined that a game ball passing through the second distribution guide path 2541 is heading toward the first V winning slot 2007, or if the second distribution detection sensor detects a game ball during small win processing in the case of a third small win and then the third distribution detection sensor 2552 detects a game ball and it is determined that a game ball passing through the second distribution guide path 2541 is heading toward the third distribution device 2550, or if there is a possibility that a game ball will be detected in a V winning slot or losing slot other than the intended V winning slot or losing slot, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred and an distribution error alert may be issued. In this case, an alert can be issued when a situation arises in which fraudulent activity may occur, allowing for early detection of fraudulent activity.

The manner of the distribution error notification may be varied depending on the degree of abnormality (level of fraud). For example, in the case of a first small win, if the second distribution detection sensor detects a game ball and determines that the game ball has entered the second distribution guideway 2541, or in the case of a second small win, if the second distribution detection sensor detects a game ball during the small win processing but the third distribution detection sensor 2552 cannot detect the game ball and determines that the game ball passing through the second distribution guideway 2541 is heading towards the first V winning opening 2007, the degree of abnormality may be determined to be high, and, for example, a message such as "Fraud has occurred!" may be displayed across the entire area of the performance display device 1600, and a sound may be output from speakers 622, 35. The occurrence of fraudulent activity is notified by outputting "Fraud is occurring" at a loud volume from speakers 622, 354, 462, 464, and if the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball during the small hit processing in the case of a second small hit, or the third distribution detection sensor 2552 detects the game ball during the small hit processing in the case of a third small hit, and it is determined that the game ball passing through the second distribution guide path 2541 is heading towards the third distribution device 2550, it may be determined that the degree of abnormality is low, and for example, a message such as "Discharge abnormality" may be displayed in a part of the performance display device 1600, and no output may be given from speakers 622, 354, 462, 464, thereby notifying the occurrence of an abnormality other than fraudulent activity. That is, if a game ball is passing through a path that allows the game ball to enter the V entry port at a rate higher than the rate preset for the type of small win (if the V entry expectation rate is higher than the V entry expectation rate preset for the type of small win being executed), the degree of abnormality is determined to be high and a notification of fraudulent activity is issued. Alternatively, if a game ball is passing through a path that allows the game ball to enter the V entry port at a rate lower than the rate preset for the type of small win (if the V entry expectation rate is lower than the V entry expectation rate preset for the type of small win being executed), the degree of abnormality is determined to be low and a notification of an abnormality other than fraudulent activity may be issued. Furthermore, if the V entry expectation rate drops below the V entry expectation rate preset for the type of small win being executed, the player will suffer a disadvantage, but the gaming facility will not suffer any damage. Therefore, if the degree of abnormality is low, a distribution error notification may not be issued.

In addition, during a period in which an allocation error alert is being issued based on the detection of a game ball in a V entry port or a loss port other than the V entry port or loss port scheduled for the small win type, or the possibility of detecting a game ball in a V entry port or a loss port other than the V entry port or loss port scheduled for the small win type, even if the above-mentioned small win processing determines that a minor abnormality has occurred in which a game ball that entered the device entry port 2006 has not been discharged, the allocation error alert that is being issued based on the detection of a game ball in a V entry port or a loss port other than the V entry port or loss port scheduled for the small win type, or the possibility of detecting a game ball in a V entry port or a loss port other than the V entry port or loss port scheduled for the small win type, will continue to be executed without being terminated. However, discharge error notification 1, which is based on the determination that a minor abnormality has occurred in the processing during the small win, that is, that a gaming ball that entered the device winning opening 2006 has not been discharged, is not made visible or audible, but is executed in the background, and the content of discharge error notification 1 progresses over time. In this case, when the gaming ball that entered the device winning opening 2006 is discharged and the value of the remaining ball counter becomes "0," discharge error notification 1, which is based on the determination that a minor abnormality has occurred, that a gaming ball that entered the device winning opening 2006 has not been discharged, ends. In this way, even if a minor abnormality occurs during the period when an error notification (in this example, a distribution error notification) is being issued based on the occurrence of a serious abnormality, the error notification (in this example, discharge error notification 1) based on the occurrence of the minor abnormality is not executed in a visible or audible state. However, this is carried out silently in the background of the error notification based on the occurrence of a serious abnormality (in this example, a sorting error notification), and when the minor abnormality is resolved, the error notification based on the occurrence of the minor abnormality (in this example, discharge error notification 1) is terminated.

In this example, even when a small win or big win game state is not occurring, the detection of game balls by the bonus prize opening sensor 2513, first V prize opening sensor 2514, first loss opening sensor 2515, second V prize opening sensor 3003, and third loss opening sensor 3004 is monitored, and if a game ball is detected by any of these, it is determined that fraudulent activity is occurring and an alert is issued. It is also possible to monitor the detection of game balls by the second distribution detection sensor and third distribution detection sensor 2552 when a small win or big win game state is not occurring, and if a game ball is detected by either the second distribution detection sensor or the third distribution detection sensor 2552, it is determined that a high degree of abnormality, i.e., fraudulent activity is occurring, and an alert is issued. In other words, when neither a small win nor a big win game state has occurred, it may be determined that fraud is occurring and a notification of fraudulent activity is issued regardless of the rate (high or low) of game balls entering the V winning port, regardless of which path the game ball passes through within the bonus winning port 2006.

In the above example, when an ejection error notification is issued in step S441, when a game ball is detected in a V entry port or a loss port other than the V entry port or loss port scheduled for the small win type, or when an allocation error notification is issued based on the possibility of detecting a game ball in a V entry port or a loss port other than the V entry port or loss port scheduled for the small win type, the small win processing is repeatedly executed to monitor the value of the remaining ball counter, but game progress may also be stopped without monitoring the value of the remaining ball counter. Furthermore, even if game progress is not stopped, the value of the remaining ball counter may be monitored, and if the value of the remaining ball counter becomes normal ("0"), the system may automatically return from the abnormal state and not end the small win game state. This makes it possible to reliably identify the occurrence of an abnormality.

Furthermore, after a distribution error notification has been issued, if a game ball is detected in the V entry port or loss port (regular receiving port) scheduled for the type of small win, or if a game ball rolling along the route scheduled for the type of small win (regular route) is detected (for example, if the third distribution detection sensor 2552 detects this in the case of a second small win), the distribution error notification may be terminated.Furthermore, after a discharge error notification has been issued, if a game ball is detected in the V entry port or loss port (regular receiving port) scheduled for the type of small win, or if a game ball rolling along the route scheduled for the type of small win (regular route) is detected (for example, if the third distribution detection sensor 2552 detects this in the case of a second small win), the discharge error notification may be terminated. Additionally, the measurement value of the discharge monitoring timer that triggers the discharge error notification may be reset each time a game ball is detected rolling along the route (regular route) planned for the type of small win (for example, in the case of a second small win, the third distribution detection sensor 2552 detects this); in this case, the discharge monitoring timer is measured again after the reset, and if the measurement value of the discharge monitoring timer reaches the longest expected period for the type of small win currently being executed, the discharge error notification can be executed.

[15-1. Volume adjustment]
The volume adjustment switch can be turned to adjust the volume of music, sound effects, and other sound effects played from the top central speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-frequency main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4, except for a predetermined period after power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a certain period when the special pattern display (first special pattern display unit, second special pattern display unit) starts or stops the changing display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the changing pattern command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the changing display of the decorative pattern, or from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the final display of the decorative pattern). As described above, the volume adjustment switch has a variable resistance value when rotated, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch from an analog value to a digital value, and converts it into 1024 levels of values from 0 to 1023.

In this embodiment, as described above, the 1024-level value is divided into seven levels and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume, with the volume increasing from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source IC is controlled to achieve the volume set for board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the bass main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4. In this way, by adjusting the volume based on the rotation of the volume adjustment switch, music, sound effects, and other special effects are played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the bass main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music, sound effects, and other sound effects, notification sounds are also emitted from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the low-frequency main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4, to alert parlor staff and others to malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, as well as notification sounds to announce game effects (for example, to make the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 appear more impressive, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a game state that is advantageous to the player). However, these notification sounds and notification sounds are completely independent of volume adjustment based on the rotation of the volume adjustment switch, and the volume can be adjusted from mute to maximum volume by controlling the peripheral control IC via a program.

Unlike the board volume, which is divided into seven levels as described above, the volume adjusted by this program can be adjusted in five levels from mute to maximum volume. This means that, for example, even if a hall staff member or the like turns the volume adjustment switch to set the volume low, the music, sound effects, and other sound effects played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-frequency main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4 will be reduced in volume. However, if a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is engaging in fraudulent activity, a warning sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the sound effects is reduced, it is possible to prevent hall staff and the like from having difficulty noticing a malfunction or a player's fraudulent activity due to the warning sound.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the volume of the music and sound effects can be adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch, except for a predetermined period after power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a certain period when the special pattern display (first special pattern display unit, second special pattern display unit) starts or stops the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the variable pattern command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the final display of the decorative pattern). 1002) is completed), a certain period when the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) on the special pattern display devices (first special pattern display device, second special pattern display device) is started or stopped (in this example, from the time the variable pattern command is received by the peripheral control device until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the variable display of the decorative pattern begins, or from the time the stop display command is received by the peripheral control device until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the final display of the decorative pattern), and further, the operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 set in the variable performance (the effective period during which operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is accepted in the so-called button performance), etc. can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300. Specifically, the predetermined period after power-on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), the certain period when the special pattern display (first special pattern display unit, second special pattern display unit) starts or stops the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the variable pattern command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, or from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the final display of the decorative pattern), and further, during the variable performance. When the rotation operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is rotated, an indicator made up of multiple scales is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300, the volume of the music or sound effects can be changed and adjusted to the desired volume (anywhere from 1 for the minimum volume to 5 for the maximum volume), except for the operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 or press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 set in the performance operation unit 300 (the effective period during which operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is accepted in the so-called button performance).

Specifically, when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, and the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined amount, the volume of the performance sound is increased by one level; when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, and the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined amount, the volume of the performance sound is decreased by one level.

Figure 175 is a timing diagram showing an example of when a variable effect display in which decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner is started on the effect display device 1600 while the volume of the effect sound output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-frequency main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4 is set to volume 5 in response to the rotation of the volume adjustment switch and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, and when the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during this variable effect, and when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is then rotated.

As shown in Figure 175, in order to change the volume of the performance sound from volume 5 to volume 4 during a variable performance executed by the performance display device 1600, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated left without operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, and when the rotation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the volume of the performance sound is changed from volume 5 down one level to volume 4, and this change in response to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is immediately reflected in the performance sound output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for low frequencies on the main frame 4. That is, at timing t1 when the rotation operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is rotated to change the volume of the performance sounds output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4, this changed volume is reflected in the output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4.

The indicator displayed on the performance display device 1600 changes its scale in response to the rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300. This allows the current set volume to be visually determined. In this example, the indicator displayed in response to the rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is displayed on the performance display device 1600, where performances using decorative patterns, etc. are executed. This indicator is also displayed on the front of the images displayed on the performance display device 1600. In this example, the indicator displayed on the performance display device 1600 is displayed semi-transparently, allowing images of variable performances, etc. being executed behind it to be recognized. A sub-display device different from the performance display device 1600 where variable performances using decorative patterns, etc. are executed may be provided, in which case the indicator may be displayed on the sub-display device in response to the rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300. In this example, the indicator displayed on the performance display device 1600 disappears after a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 was completed. It is also possible to display an indicator on the effect display device 1600 based on the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302, and then to make the indicator disappear based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. The indicator may be displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, or a lower right display area or the like may be partitioned from the display area of the effect display device 1600 so that it does not overlap with the effect image or the like, and the indicator may be displayed in this lower right display area. Furthermore, a display device that displays various settings for the pachinko machine 1 may be provided separately from the effect display device 1600, and the indicator may be displayed on this display device.

Furthermore, when the indicator scale and the volume of the music and sound effects change by rotating the rotary operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300, a specific sound (such as a "beep") corresponding to the changed volume is output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-frequency main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4. As a result, even if the music and sound effects are not output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-frequency main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4 when the rotary operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is rotated, the actual volume can be checked and adjusted by the specific sound output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-frequency main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4. Note that the specific sound may not be output during the variable performance. In other words, during the execution of a variable effect, a sound effect corresponding to the content of the variable effect is output, and it is possible to check the actual volume without outputting a specific sound. This prevents the variable effect being interrupted and the player's interest in the game from decreasing due to the output of a specific sound unrelated to the content of the variable effect during the variable effect.

This adjusted volume is set as a sub-volume value for tracks in the peripheral control IC's built-in sound source that incorporate sound data for music, sound effects, and other sound effects, and is reflected in adjusting the volume of the sound effects. However, it is not reflected in adjusting the volume of the notification sounds and announcement sounds mentioned above.

As such, in this embodiment, there are two ways to adjust the volume of music and sound effects: by directly rotating the volume adjustment switch; or by increasing or decreasing the board volume value by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch in response to operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. Because the volume adjustment switch is implemented on the peripheral control board 1510, the main frame 4 must be kept open from the outer frame 2. In this case, only the hall staff can rotate the volume adjustment switch. However, the volume adjusted by the hall staff may sound too low for the player, making it difficult for the player to hear the music and sound effects, or it may sound too high for the player, making the music and sound effects too noisy. Therefore, after powering on the pachinko machine 1, by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the volume of the music and sound effects can be adjusted to the desired volume. This allows the player to adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to the desired volume, so if the volume adjusted by the hall staff feels too low and the music and sound effects are difficult to hear, the player can operate the rotation operation unit 302 or press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 to increase the volume to the desired level, or if the volume adjusted by the hall staff feels too high and the music and sound effects are too loud, the player can operate the rotation operation unit 302 or press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 to decrease the volume to the desired level.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the pachinko machine 1 is not being played for a predetermined period of time, enters a waiting state for customers, and the demonstration by the performance display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times), the volume adjusted by the player who was previously seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing is canceled and the volume is initialized. This volume initialization is set to the volume adjusted by the hall staff, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall staff by directly rotating the volume adjustment switch. As a result, if the previous player who was seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 felt that the adjusted volume was too low and the music and sound effects were difficult to hear, the current player who is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can increase the volume to the desired level by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300. Conversely, if the previous player who was seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 felt that the adjusted volume was too high and the music and sound effects were too loud, the current player who is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can decrease the volume to the desired level by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300.

[15-2. Adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the rotation operation part 302 or the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated, a predetermined value is added or subtracted from the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch, thereby increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume to adjust the volume of the effect sounds of music and sound effects, and also to adjust the volume of a specific frequency band. Specifically, it is possible to suppress (or mute) the sound output in the high frequency range (above a predetermined frequency band).

That is, during a predetermined period after power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), or during a certain period when the special pattern display (first special pattern display unit, second special pattern display unit) starts or stops the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the variable pattern command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, or from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the final display of the decorative pattern). . 5 seconds have passed), and further, excluding the operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 set in the variable performance (the effective period for accepting the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 in the so-called button performance), when the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed, a screen for performing an environment change mode for setting various environments of the pachinko machine 1 (whether or not high-pitched sounds are output, whether or not the LED of the door frame 3 is illuminated, etc.) is displayed on the performance display device 1600. The screen for performing the environment change mode displays a list of changeable environments (whether or not high-pitched sounds are output, whether or not the LED of the door frame 3 is illuminated, etc.), and by operating the press operation unit 303 with one of the environment settings selected with the rotation operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300, it is possible to execute the process of changing the environment setting. In this way, by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 in accordance with the environment change mode screen, it is possible to suppress sound output in a specific frequency band, or to output sound at a volume that is set in response to the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch or the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300. Furthermore, although the environment change mode screen is displayed on the front side of the images displayed on the performance display device 1600, it is displayed semi-transparently so that the image behind it can be recognized.

Specifically, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300, a screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the performance display device 1600. Then, by operating the rotation operation unit 302 to select volume adjustment for a specific frequency band and then pressing the pressing operation unit 303, a selection screen is displayed between a state in which sound output for the specific frequency band is suppressed and a state in which sound output for the specific frequency band is not suppressed (for example, a miniature character for volume setting is displayed, and "treble cut on" or "treble cut off" is displayed in the speech bubble of the miniature character, and the display is switched each time the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated a predetermined amount), and by operating the rotation operation unit 302 again to select either a state in which sound output for the specific frequency band is suppressed or a state in which sound output for the specific frequency band is not suppressed, and then pressing the pressing operation unit 303, the change to the selected state is confirmed and a decision screen is displayed (either "treble cut" or "no treble cut" is displayed in the speech bubble of the miniature character for volume setting). After that, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the decision screen displayed on the performance display device 1600 is made to disappear, thereby ending the environment change mode. After the decision screen is displayed, the decision screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be made to disappear based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. The screen for performing the environment change mode, the selection screen, and the decision screen may be displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, or a lower left display area or the like may be partitioned from the display area of the effect display device 1600 so as not to overlap with the display of the effect image or the indicator when adjusting the volume of the effect sound, and the screen for performing the environment change mode, the selection screen, and the decision screen may be displayed in this lower left display area. Furthermore, a display device that displays various settings for the pachinko machine 1 may be provided separately from the effect display device 1600, and the screen for performing the environment change mode, the selection screen, and the decision screen may be displayed on this display device.

Note that by pressing the pressing operation unit 303 without rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300, a screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and then rotating the rotation operation unit 302 disables the volume adjustment of the performance sounds, and no indicator is displayed on the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated without pressing the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 after the environment change mode has ended, the volume adjustment of the performance sounds is enabled, and an indicator is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 175, if the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated to reduce the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band to a level lower than the volume set in response to the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch or the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 during the variable performance executed by the performance display device 1600, at the time t2 when these operations are completed, the changes made in response to the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 are not reflected in the performance sound output from the top central speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for low frequencies on the main frame 4. Then, at the timing t3 when the variable performance executed by the performance display device 1600 ends (the timing when the decorative pattern is confirmed and stopped based on the reception of a stop display command from the main control MPU instructing the derived display of the decorative pattern display result), the changes made in response to the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 made during the variable performance are reflected; in other words, the volume of the performance sound in a specific frequency band is suppressed below the volume set in response to the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch or the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300.

Note that, after the time t2 when the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 is completed to adjust the volume of the sound effect in a specific frequency band during the variable performance, the volume adjustment of the sound effect in the specific frequency band is disabled. Then, at the time t3 when the variable performance ends, when the change in the volume adjustment of the sound effect in the specific frequency band in response to the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is reflected, the volume adjustment of the sound effect in the specific frequency band becomes effective. Also, in this example, even when the volume adjustment of the sound effect in the specific frequency band is disabled, if the press operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300, the screen for entering the environment change mode is displayed on the performance display device 1600, but it is not possible to select the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band. Furthermore, during the period when volume adjustment of the effect sound in a specific frequency band is disabled, the screen for entering the environment change mode may be prevented from being displayed on the effect display device 1600 even if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed without rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the effect sound of a specific frequency band during a variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600, the changes corresponding to these operations are not reflected immediately, but are reflected after the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600 has ended. Normally, from the start to the end of a variable effect, effect sounds corresponding to the content of the variable effect are output continuously from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the low-frequency main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4. Therefore, adjusting the volume of the effect sound of a specific frequency band during a variable effect may cause the player to feel uncomfortable (for example, because the continuously output effect sound is interrupted for a moment, and then the output of effect sound with the volume of the specific frequency band suppressed or the output of effect sound with the volume of the specific frequency band not suppressed is resumed).

In this example, when the rotation operation unit 302 or press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of a specific frequency band of effect sounds during a variable effect, the change in response to this operation is not reflected until the variable effect ends, but is reflected after the variable effect ends.This means that the effect sounds that are played continuously during the variable effect are output with the pre-set content, and after the variable effect ends and the output of the effect sounds that were played continuously according to the content of the variable effect stops, effect sounds that reflect the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band made by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 can be output, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.In other words, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is not reflected during the variable effect when effect sounds are being output continuously, but is reflected at the timing when the continuously output effect sounds stop and the next effect sound is output, so the effect sounds can be changed according to the adjustment without feeling uncomfortable.

On the other hand, if the rotation operation unit 302 or pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the performance sound in a specific frequency band during a period when no variable performance is being performed, the change in response to this operation is immediately reflected, and the performance sound with the adjusted volume in the specific frequency band is output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the low-frequency main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4.

In this way, while volume adjustments to effect sounds during variable effects are reflected immediately, volume adjustments to effect sounds in specific frequency bands are not reflected immediately. In other words, changes to sound-related information that could have a negative impact on the planned effect of the variable effects currently being performed, such as making the player feel uncomfortable due to changes to the effect sounds, are prohibited during the variable effects, preventing a decrease in the effect of the effects.

In addition, if the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is not reflected immediately, the player may be notified of this by displaying a message on the effect display device 1600. For example, if the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the effect sound of a specific frequency band during a variable effect, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band may not be reflected immediately, but a mini character for setting the volume may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 and a standby message such as "Please wait a moment" may be displayed in a speech bubble of this mini character to notify the player that the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 to adjust the volume of the effect sound of the specific frequency band has been successfully accepted. In addition, the standby display that notifies the player that the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 for adjusting the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band is being accepted normally may be changed according to the time remaining until the timing for reflecting the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band. For example, a mini character for setting the volume may be displayed on the performance display device 1600, and a standby display 1 such as "Please wait a moment" may be displayed in a speech bubble of this mini character to notify the player that the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 for adjusting the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band is being accepted normally. After that, when the time remaining until the timing for reflecting the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band reaches a predetermined time, a standby display 2 may be displayed on the performance display device 1600, and a countdown such as "3," "2," or "1" may be displayed in a speech bubble of this mini character. Furthermore, when it is time to adjust the volume of the sound effects in a specific frequency band, a notification to that effect may be sent; for example, a miniature character for setting the volume may be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a message such as "Selection reflection has begun!" may be displayed in a speech bubble of this miniature character.

In addition, in the above example, for adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band, equalizer setting A, in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed, and equalizer setting B, in which the volume of the specific frequency band is suppressed, are stored in advance as equalizer setting patterns, and by switching between equalizer setting A and equalizer setting B to adjust the volume of the sound effects in the specific frequency band, two levels (on and off) are switched between a state in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed and a state in which the volume of the specific frequency band is suppressed. It is also possible to store in advance multiple equalizer settings with different degrees of suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band as equalizer setting patterns, and switch between these multiple equalizer settings to switch between multiple states with different degrees of suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band. For example, equalizer setting patterns may be stored in advance: equalizer setting A, which does not suppress the volume of specific frequency bands; equalizer setting B, which mutes the volume of specific frequency bands; and equalizer setting C, which mutes the volume of specific frequency bands to half the volume set in response to the rotation of a volume adjustment switch or the rotation of rotary operation unit 302 of effect operation unit 300 (e.g., if the set volume is volume 6, change it to volume 3). By switching between equalizer setting A, equalizer setting B, and equalizer setting C by adjusting the volume of the effect sounds of the specific frequency bands, it is possible to switch between three levels: a state in which the volume of specific frequency bands is not suppressed, a state in which the volume of specific frequency bands is muted, and a state in which the volume of specific frequency bands is muted to half the volume set in response to the rotation of a volume adjustment switch or the rotation of rotary operation unit 302 of effect operation unit 300. This allows settings to be tailored to various player preferences.

Furthermore, the sound effects of a specific frequency band are not limited to those described above, but also include audio frequency bands and bass frequencies. For example, the volume of dialogue spoken by characters during variable effects may be adjustable (if there are multiple characters, they may be adjusted collectively or individually), or the volume of the bass frequency may be adjustable. Sound effects (confirmation sounds) used to notify a confirmed jackpot and sounds used when prize balls are paid out may also be adjustable. Furthermore, the volume of multiple frequency bands may be adjustable as a specific frequency band; for example, the volume of both the treble and bass frequencies may be adjusted. In this case, the treble and bass frequencies may be adjusted together (for example, the operation to switch between a non-suppressed and suppressed treble frequency state and the operation to switch between a non-suppressed and suppressed bass frequency state are performed together in a single operation), or they may be adjusted individually (for example, the operation to switch between a non-suppressed and suppressed treble frequency state and the operation to switch between a non-suppressed and suppressed bass frequency state are performed separately). That is, players may be able to select one of several setting modes (high-pitched sounds cut, payout sounds cut, big win confirmation sounds cut, etc.). This allows settings to be made to suit the preferences of various players.

Furthermore, when continuous sound effects are output during a jackpot game state or a small jackpot game state, adjustments to the volume of the sound effects can be immediately reflected in the output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4, while volume adjustments for specific frequency bands can be reflected after the jackpot game state or small jackpot game state ends. This allows the output of continuous sound effects to stop, and the volume adjustments for specific frequency bands to be reflected in the output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4 at the timing of the switchover until the next sound effect is output, thereby allowing the sound effects to be changed seamlessly in accordance with the adjustments. Furthermore, during a big win or small win game state, players pay less attention to the presentation content than to variable presentations, so volume adjustments for specific frequency bands may be immediately reflected in the output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the low-frequency main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4, in the same way as volume adjustments for the presentation sounds described above.

In addition, when continuous sound effects are output in a game state that is different from the normal state, such as during a time-saving state, adjustments to the volume of the sound effects can be immediately reflected in the output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4. As for volume adjustments of specific frequency bands, when the rotation operation unit 302 or pressure operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of sound effects of a specific frequency band during a variable presentation, the changes corresponding to this operation are not reflected until the variable presentation ends, but are reflected after the variable presentation ends. In addition, when the rotation operation unit 302 or pressure operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of sound effects of a specific frequency band when no variable presentation is being performed, the changes can be immediately reflected in the output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4. In other words, volume adjustments for specific frequency bands may not be reflected during the variable effect, which is the effect that players pay the most attention to, but may be reflected after the variable effect has ended, allowing volume adjustments for specific frequency bands to be reflected when the player is not paying much attention, so that the effect sound can be changed in accordance with the adjustments without creating a sense of incongruity.

Even if volume adjustment for a specific frequency band is reflected, the changed sound effect will not be output until the sound effect is actually output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4. Therefore, if the rotation operation unit 302 or pressure operation unit 303 of the operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the sound effect for a specific frequency band during a variable performance, even if volume adjustment for a specific frequency band is reflected after the variable performance ends, the changed sound effect will be output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4 after the start of the next variable performance. In other words, the actual output will occur after the lottery process (win determination lottery, etc.) to start the next variable performance is performed. Similarly, if the rotation operation unit 302 or pressure operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band while a demonstration is being performed on the performance display device 1600, the adjustment in the volume of the performance sound of the specific frequency band is immediately reflected, but if the performance sound is not being output as part of the demonstration, the changed performance sound will not be output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, or the low-frequency main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4, until the next variable performance starts, but will be output after the variable performance starts.

In addition, the volume adjustment for a specific frequency band is initialized at the same time as the volume of the effect sounds is initialized. In other words, if no play is being performed on the pachinko machine 1 for a predetermined period of time, the machine enters a customer waiting state and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is repeated (for example, 10 times), the volume adjusted by the player who was previously seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing is canceled, and at the same time that the volume is initialized, the volume adjustment for the specific frequency band is also initialized (to a state where the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed).

Furthermore, if the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the performance sound in a specific frequency band while an error notification is being issued in which the notification sound is output at a high volume (which may be maximum volume), it may be possible to appropriately set whether or not to reflect the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band in the notification sound depending on the degree of abnormality (level of irregularity) that caused the error notification.

For example, as shown in FIG. 176, when a minor abnormality (full tank error) occurs, such as when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of game balls, and the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of a specific frequency band during a full tank error notification, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is immediately reflected in the notification sound, and when a minor abnormality (full tank error) occurs after the volume of the specific frequency band has been adjusted, the state in which the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound is continued, and the changed notification sound is output from the top central speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-frequency main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4. In this example, the voice output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side as a full tank error notification (for example, "Please remove the ball!") is changed to reflect the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band (for example, if the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, a female voice is output, and if the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed, a male voice is output).

On the other hand, when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of a specific frequency band during a door open error alert, which is executed when a serious abnormality (door open error) occurs, such as when the door frame 3 is detected to be open, as shown in FIG. 177, or when a serious abnormality (door open error) occurs after adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band may not be reflected in the alert sound. In this example, although it is possible to adjust the volume of a specific frequency band of the sound (e.g., "The door is open!") output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side as a door open error alert (e.g., a female voice is output when the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed, and a male voice is output when the volume of the specific frequency band is suppressed), when a serious abnormality occurs, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is disabled and an alert sound with the volume of the specific frequency band not suppressed is output.

In other words, as shown in Figure 176, when a minor abnormality (full tank error) occurs, such as when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of game balls, and a full tank error is being notified, if the rotation operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is rotated to adjust the volume, the operation is accepted as valid but this volume adjustment is not reflected in the alarm sound. On the other hand, volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected in the alarm sound, and the changed alarm sound is output from the top central speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the low-frequency main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 177, when a serious abnormality (door open error) occurs, such as when the door frame 3 is detected as being open, and a door open error is being notified, if the rotation operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is rotated to adjust the volume, the operation is accepted as valid, but not only is this volume adjustment not reflected in the alarm sound, but volume adjustments for specific frequency bands are also not reflected in the alarm sound. In this way, by appropriately setting whether or not to reflect volume adjustments for specific frequency bands in the alarm sound depending on the degree of the abnormality that caused the error notification (illegible level), serious abnormalities can be reliably detected.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 177, when the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 are operated to suppress the volume of a specific frequency band, and the changed performance sound is output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for low frequencies on the main frame 4, if a serious abnormality occurs, the suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band is forcibly released (turned off) without adjusting the volume of the specific frequency band in accordance with the environment change mode or the operation of the performance operation unit 300, and an alarm sound in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed is output. As described above, the alarm sound is output for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when the output of the sound effect is resumed after the alarm sound has stopped, the volume suppression of the specific frequency band that was forcibly released is set (on) again without adjusting the volume of the specific frequency band in response to the environment change mode or operation of the sound effect operation unit 300, and the sound effect with the volume of the specific frequency band suppressed is output from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the low-pitched main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example allows for volume adjustment of specific frequency bands, and is appropriately set depending on the state of the pachinko machine 1 (game status, error status, etc.) to either immediately output effect sounds or notification sounds that reflect volume adjustment of specific frequency bands made by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, or to output changed effect sounds or notification sounds with a delayed timing without immediately reflecting volume adjustment of specific frequency bands made by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in the effect sound output. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the effect effect and reliably detect serious abnormalities.

[16. Changing Settings for Winning Probability, etc.]
An example will be described in which the probability of winning a big win or a small win, etc., is changed according to a setting value in the pachinko machine 1. Here, operation signals are output from the setting key, setting change switch, and setting confirmation switch on the setting board to the payout control board 633. The payout control board 633 does not have a multi-function RWM clear button 633z, but instead has a RAM clear switch, error reset switch, etc., separately provided. While the setting board is connected to the payout control board 633 in this example, it may be connected to the power supply board 630 inside the power supply board cover 631, or the setting board may be connected to the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the setting board may not be an independent board, but may be part of the payout control board 633, power supply board 630, or main control board 1310. That is, the setting key, setting change switch, setting confirmation switch, and setting display may be mounted on either the payout control board 633, power supply board 630, or main control board 1310.

In this example, the pachinko machine 1 has a setting board for setting the game performance of the pachinko machine on the board unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The setting board is connected to the payout control board 633 of the board unit 620, and the payout control unit 633a obtains the operating status of each switch on the setting board and controls the setting display, which displays the set or selected setting value.

The setting board is equipped with a setting key for changing the operating mode of the pachinko machine 1 to setting change mode, a setting change switch for changing the setting value, a setting confirmation switch for confirming the changed setting value, and a setting display that displays the set or selected setting value, and functions as a setting change operation unit that accepts setting change operations. As described above, the setting board is mounted on the board unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and when multiple pachinko machines 1 are lined up on a gaming island in an amusement parlor, setting changes can be performed by opening the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2.

In this embodiment, operation signals from the setting keys, setting change switch, and setting confirmation switch on the setting board are input to the payout control unit 633a. The setting display is also controlled by the payout control unit 633a. The confirmed setting is sent from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU selects a table corresponding to the setting as a table to be used in special lotteries, etc. (win determination table, big win symbol determination table, small win symbol determination table, etc.). Note that tables used in special lotteries, etc. are provided for each setting, and each table is set so that at least some of the values are different.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 178, in this example, the "big hit probability," "small hit probability," "small hit type," "normal symbol hit probability," and "opening and closing pattern of the second starting port according to the normal symbol hit type" are set corresponding to setting values 1 to 6, respectively.

In addition, the jackpot probability (the proportion of jackpot determination values in the hit determination table that indicate a jackpot) is set to a different value for each setting value: 1 in 319 for setting value 1, 1 in 309 for setting value 2, 1 in 299 for setting value 3, 1 in 279 for setting values 4 and 6, and 1 in 289 for setting value 5. In this example, the jackpot probability increases as the setting value increases from setting value 1 to setting value 5, but the jackpot probability at the highest setting value, setting value 6, is lower than setting value 5. Note that the jackpot probability may also be increased in proportion to the setting value, in which case it may be set so that the jackpot probability increases as the setting value increases from setting value 1 to setting value 6.

In addition, the probability of a small win (the proportion of small win determination values in the hit determination table that indicate a small win) is set to a different value for each setting value, with the table used for the special lottery for the first special symbol being set at 1 in 100 for settings 1 to 4 and 1 in 90 for settings 5 and 6, and the table used for the special lottery for the second special symbol being set at 50 in 100 for settings 1 to 5 and 66 in 100 for setting 6. In this example, the high setting values (setting values 5 and 6) have a higher small win probability than other setting values (low setting values), thereby indirectly increasing the frequency of big win game states. In this way, the table used for the special lottery for the first special symbol varies the small win probability according to the set value, allowing players to guess the set value based on the frequency of small wins during normal play, while the table used for the special lottery for the second special symbol keeps the small win probability roughly the same for all set values, allowing players to enjoy the continuation of the time-saving state (consecutive wins) during time-saving play.

In addition, the table used for the special lottery for the first special symbol, which is mainly executed in the normal mode, sets the small win probability for setting values 5 and 6 higher than for setting values 1 to 4, while the table used for the special lottery for the second special symbol, which is mainly executed in the time-saving mode, sets only the small win probability for setting value 6 higher than for setting values 1 to 5. Therefore, while setting values 4 and 5 result in different small win probabilities in the special lottery for the first special symbol, which is executed in the normal mode, the small win probability is the same in the special lottery for the second special symbol, which is executed in the time-saving mode. However, the jackpot probability and the determination ratio for the small win types described below are set higher for setting value 5 than for setting value 4, making setting value 5 more advantageous overall than setting value 4.

In addition, because the probability of a big hit in the normal state is high but the probability of a small hit is low, changing the setting value allows for a game where the hit that triggers the transition to the time-shortened state is likely to be a "big hit" but is unlikely to become a "small hit", as in setting value 4, and a game where the hit that triggers the transition to the time-shortened state is unlikely to be a "big hit" but is likely to become a "small hit", as in setting value 5, providing new gameplay that allows players to guess the setting value depending on the type of hit that triggers the transition to the time-shortened state.

The small win probability may be increased in proportion to the setting value. In this case, the higher the setting value from setting value 1 to setting value 6, the higher the small win probability. The small win probability corresponding to some setting values from setting value 1 to setting value 6 may also be set lower than the small win probability corresponding to any setting value lower than these settings. For example, the small win probability for setting value 4 may be 1 in 100, and the small win probability for setting value 3, which is lower than setting value 4, may be 1 in 90. In this case, the ratio for determining the advantageous small win type (the third small win in this example) in the event of a small win may be set higher for setting value 4 than for setting value 3, making setting value 4 more advantageous than setting value 3.

In addition, the determination ratio (selection ratio set in the small win symbol determination table) for determining the type of small win based on the result of the special lottery (win determination process (step S305)) above is set to a different value for each setting value. In this example, if a small win is determined as the result of the special lottery for the first special symbol, for settings 1 to 3, there is a 9 in 10 chance that it will be a second small win and a 1 in 10 chance that it will be a third small win; for settings 4 and 5, there is an 8 in 10 chance that it will be a second small win and a 2 in 10 chance that it will be a third small win; and for setting value 6, there is a 1 in 10 chance that it will be a first small win, a 6 in 10 chance that it will be a second small win, and a 3 in 10 chance that it will be a third small win.

Furthermore, if the special lottery result for the second special pattern is determined to be a small win, with setting values 1 and 2, there is a 3 in 10 chance of it being determined to be the first small win, a 6 in 10 chance of it being determined to be the second small win, and a 1 in 10 chance of it being determined to be the third small win; with setting values 3 and 4, there is a 2 in 10 chance of it being determined to be the first small win, a 6 in 10 chance of it being determined to be the second small win, and a 2 in 10 chance of it being determined to be the third small win; with setting values 5 and 6, there is a 1 in 10 chance of it being determined to be the first small win, a 6 in 10 chance of it being determined to be the second small win, and a 3 in 10 chance of it being determined to be the third small win.

As mentioned above, the first small win guides a game ball received by the bonus prize winning slot 2006 to the first loss slot 2535, and there is no possibility of a big win game state occurring, or the possibility of a big win game state occurring is extremely low. In this example, if a small win is determined to be the result of the special lottery for the first special symbol, the first small win is selected only when the setting value is 6, and is not selected for other setting values (setting values 1 to 5). Therefore, if a small win occurs in a state that is unfavorable to the player compared to the normal time-saving state, setting values 1 to 5 will always generate a second or third small win, which has the potential to cause a big win game state, thereby creating anticipation for a big win game state and allowing the small win game state to be executed. In other words, when a small hit occurs in a state less favorable to the player than the normal time-saving state when set to settings 1 through 5, the player will focus on the small hit state with hopes of a big hit game state, but will become increasingly disappointed when they realize that all game balls received by the device winning port 2006 have been directed to the first loss port 2535 and there is absolutely no possibility of a big hit game state occurring. However, by generating at least a second or third small hit, which has the potential to generate a big hit game state, the player can be made to focus on the big hit game state and hopes of a big hit game state during the small hit game state, preventing a decline in interest in the game. On the other hand, when set to setting 6, although the first small hit may be selected, the execution of the first small hit in the normal state makes it possible to determine that this is setting 6, the highest setting value, and therefore provides the player with joy greater than the disappointment of winning the first small hit, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, if a small win is determined as the result of the special drawing for the second special symbol, the first small win is selected. In the time-saving mode, the probability of a small win is higher than in the normal mode, resulting in a high frequency of small win gameplay. Therefore, even if the first small win is executed and all game balls received by the special device winning port 2006 are guided to the first loss port 2535, and the player realizes that there is absolutely no possibility of a big win gameplay state occurring, the player will not be discouraged. In addition, if a small win is determined as the result of the special drawing for the second special symbol, low settings (settings 1 and 2) increase the probability of a first small win being determined, while high settings decrease the probability of a first small win being determined. In other words, high settings reduce the probability of a small win type being determined that is disadvantageous to the player when a small win is determined as the result of the special drawing for the second special symbol compared to low settings, making high settings more advantageous to the player than low settings.

As mentioned above, the third small win guides the game ball received by the special device winning port 2006 to the first V winning port 2007, and determining a third small win is roughly the same as winning a big win. In other words, a higher rate of determining a third small win is synonymous with a higher probability of winning a big win, and in this example, at high settings (setting value 5 or setting value 6), the rate of determining a third small win is increased, thereby indirectly improving the probability of a big win game state occurring.

In addition, the probability of winning the regular lottery (the proportion of the regular symbol winning judgment value indicating a regular win among the random numbers used to judge a regular symbol winning) is set to a different value for each setting value, and is set to "1 in 2" for setting values 1 to 5, and "1 in 1" for setting value 6. Therefore, at setting value 6, when a gaming ball is received in regular winning slot 2003 and a regular lottery is held, second starting slot door 2411 will always move forward, making it possible for second starting slot 2004 to receive a gaming ball, which is more advantageous to the player than the other setting values.

Furthermore, in this example, if the result of the normal lottery is determined to be a normal win, the normal winning pattern will be determined from among several normal winning pattern types: normal winning pattern A (normal winning pattern A), normal winning pattern B (normal winning pattern B (normal winning pattern B1 to normal winning pattern B5)), and normal winning pattern C (normal winning pattern C), and the mode corresponding to the determined normal winning pattern type (normal winning pattern A, normal winning pattern B, normal winning pattern C) will be displayed on the normal pattern display. In addition, the opening and closing mode of the second starting gate 2411 is varied for each setting value. Specifically, if a normal symbol A is hit during normal operation, an opening/closing mode of "executing a 0.1 s opening once" is executed for all setting values (setting values 1 to 6); if a normal symbol A is hit during time-saving operation, an opening/closing mode of "executing a 6 s opening once" is executed for all setting values (setting values 1 to 6); if a normal symbol B is hit during normal operation, an opening/closing mode of "executing a 0.1 s opening twice" is executed for odd setting values (setting values 1, 3, and 5), and an opening/closing mode of "executing a 0.1 s opening once" is executed for even setting values (setting values 2, 4, and 6); if a normal symbol B is hit during time-saving operation, an opening/closing mode of "executing a 6 s opening once" is executed for setting values 1 to 3; an opening/closing mode of "executing a 3 s opening twice" is executed for setting values 4 and 5; and an opening/closing mode of "executing a 3 s opening once" is executed for setting value 6.

In addition, when the setting values are 1 to 5, the normal symbol hit type is determined to be one of two normal symbol hit types, normal symbol hit A and normal symbol hit B, whereas when the setting value is 6, the normal symbol hit type is determined to be one of three normal symbol hit types, normal symbol hit A, normal symbol hit B, and normal symbol hit C. When a normal symbol hit C occurs during normal operation, the setting value is 6, which executes an opening and closing mode of "executing 0.1 second opening six times," and when a normal symbol hit C occurs during time-saving operation, the setting value is 6, which executes an opening and closing mode of "executing 1 second opening six times."

In this way, the operating mode (opening/closing mode of second start opening 2004) of second start opening door 2411, which opens second start opening 2004 based on the result of the normal lottery being a normal win, differs for each setting value, so the current setting value of the pachinko machine 1 can be suggested by the operating mode of second start opening door 2411.

The setting key is a switch that maintains a shorted or open state of the contacts by inserting a specific key into the keyhole (key insertion section) and turning the key to the setting position, outputting a signal that triggers a change to setting change mode. It is also possible to use another switch instead of a setting key. In this case, the setting change mode can be started by operating (pressing and holding) the setting change switch for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) or more, and can be ended by pressing and holding the setting change switch during setting change mode.

The setting change mode may also be started and ended by operating the RAM clear switch. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch, and continuing to operate the RAM clear switch for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) or more (long press). Also, if the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch is less than the predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Furthermore, the setting change mode may also be ended by long pressing the RAM clear switch during the setting change mode.

This allows employees who do not have the key for the setting key to change the settings, making it easier to operate the pachinko machine 1 in the parlor. Furthermore, since the operation time of the setting change switch is detected, it is advisable to detect the operation by detecting the falling edge of the setting change switch.

The setting change switch is, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to cycle through the setting values (1 to 6). In other words, when the setting change switch is pressed once, the setting value increases by 1, and when the setting change switch is operated when the setting value is 6, the setting value becomes 1. It is also possible to select the setting value by operating a RAM clear switch without providing a setting change switch. It is also possible to have fewer (for example, two) or more (for example, eight) setting values than six.

The setting value changes the activation rate of the condition device (i.e., the probability of winning with a special symbol), with a setting value of 1 indicating a low probability of winning and a setting value of 6 indicating a high probability of winning. The setting value can also change various game-related parameters, such as the probability of a special jackpot, the rate of time-saving (ST) after a jackpot, the number of time-saving rounds, the number of jackpot rounds and counts, the probability of winning with a normal symbol, and the number of prize balls for the general prize slot, start slot, and special prize slot, thereby changing the number of prize balls that the player can win.

The setting confirmation switch is, for example, a momentary switch, and is used to confirm the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch and input it into the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch, as long as it is a momentary switch. It is recommended that the setting change switch and the setting confirmation switch be configured with different operating methods (operation direction) and shapes to prevent the two switches from being operated by mistake. For example, it is recommended that the setting change switch be configured with a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch be configured with a momentary toggle switch.

In addition, the selected setting may be confirmed by returning the setting key to its normal position without providing a setting confirmation switch. The selected setting value may also be confirmed by the operation of another switch or sensor provided on the pachinko machine 1. For example, the selected setting may be confirmed by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, detecting contact with the handle 182 by the handle touch sensor 192, operating the single-shot button operation sensor 194, operating the ball loan button, operating the return button, or detecting the entry of a game ball into the start slots 2002, 2004. The operation unit used in place of the setting confirmation switch may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for playing) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

In other words, although three switches (including a setting key) are provided on the setting board to set the game performance of the pachinko machine 1 in this example, it is sufficient to provide one or two switches on the setting board.

Furthermore, without providing a setting key, setting change switch, or setting confirmation switch, setting changes may be made possible using only the RAM clear switch. For example, the setting change mode can be initiated by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch, and continuing to operate the RAM clear switch (press and hold) for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) or more. Also, if the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and the RAM clear switch is continuously operated for less than the predetermined time, a RAM clear process is executed. Furthermore, instead of the setting change switch, a setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch for less than a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) during setting change mode, and instead of the setting confirmation switch, a setting value can be confirmed by operating the RAM clear switch for more than the predetermined time (press and hold). Furthermore, the setting change mode can be terminated by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch after the setting has been confirmed.

The setting display is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and displays the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch, and the current setting value by a specified operation (for example, operating the setting key). Note that instead of a 7-segment LED, the setting display may be composed of LEDs equal to the number of settable values. In this case, the LED corresponding to the setting value will light up to display the setting value.

In addition, in this example of the pachinko machine 1, the payout control board 633 is provided with an error type indicator using a 7-segment LED that displays the type of payout error, but this error type indicator can also serve as a setting indicator, displaying the selected setting value or current setting value on the error type indicator. In this case, it is advisable to change the display mode so that the error type indication and the setting value indication can be distinguished. For example, the dot can be turned off when displaying the error type, and lit when displaying the setting value. Alternatively, the error type indication can be displayed as a lit (non-blinking) indicator, and the setting value indication can be displayed as a blinking indicator.

[16-1. Setting change processing]
Next, the process for changing the settings will be described. Figure 179 is an explanatory diagram showing the procedure for changing the setting values.

In this example, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control side power-on processing is executed, and if the conditions for starting the setting change mode are met during the main control side power-on processing, the above setting value is changed.

Specifically, the main control MPU performs the initial setting and startup setting of the main control's built-in WDT (step S12) during the main control power-on process, then determines the state of the setting key. If the setting key is turned on, the setting change mode is executed to change the setting values of the pachinko machine 1. When the setting key is operated, a setting key operation signal is output from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU determines that the setting key is turned on when it receives the setting key operation signal. Note that the setting change mode may not be initiated if the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 is operated, if the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the handle 182 has been touched, if a prepaid card is inserted in the CR unit (there is a balance on the prepaid card), or if there is a balance inserted in the cash sandwich. The setting change mode may also not be initiated if there is a possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity is occurring in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, if a magnetic error is detected).

When the setting change mode is initiated, the main control MPU executes a first RAM clear process that clears data in the game control area (also called the specific area) of the built-in RAM other than data related to the game state (for example, information related to the probability bonus state, time-saving state, and prize balls) that indicates setting value information for the pachinko machine 1.

Next, by performing a setting change operation, the setting value is switched between setting values 1 to 6. That is, when the main control MPU completes the first RAM clearing process, it sends a first RAM clearing process end command to the dispensing control unit 633a. Upon receiving this first RAM clearing process end command, the dispensing control unit 633a flashes the initial value (e.g., setting value 0) as the setting value on the setting display, and switches the setting value displayed on the setting display each time the setting change switch is operated (looping between setting values 1 to 6).

When the main control MPU executes the first RAM clear process, the setting value is cleared and the device enters an unset state. Furthermore, the setting change mode cannot be terminated if the setting value has not been set. If a power outage occurs during setting change mode when the setting value has not been set, the setting change mode will resume when the power is restored. At this time, if the setting key is off, a loop process is executed that monitors the setting key's state until the setting key is turned on, and the setting change mode will begin once the setting key is turned on.

The payout control unit 633a also checks whether the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, i.e., whether the main frame release switch is off. If the main frame release switch is on (the main frame 4 is not released from the outer frame 2), it loops until the main frame release switch is turned off and does not accept operation of the setting confirmation switch. In other words, the setting change operation is not completed until the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2.

If the main frame open switch is off, or if the main frame open switch becomes off, and the setting confirmation switch is operated, the dispensing control unit 633a will confirm the setting value displayed on the setting display (stop flashing and display a lit light), and send a setting change completion command to the main control MPU indicating the confirmed setting value.

When the main control MPU receives the setting change end command, it stores the setting value indicated by the received setting change end command in the game control area of the built-in RAM. This allows lottery processing and other processes to be carried out according to the confirmed setting value.

Then, when the conditions for terminating the setting change mode are met, i.e., when the setting key is turned off, the main control MPU performs the power outage clear process (step S14).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the setting values are changed through the above-mentioned processing.

When the setting change mode is ended, i.e., when the setting key is turned off, the payout control unit 633a may end the display of the setting value on the setting display (do not display the setting value). Also, when the setting key is turned on after the setting change mode is ended, the setting change mode will not be executed, but the current setting value will be displayed on the setting display. This allows the gaming store staff to change the setting value after understanding the current setting value.

In addition, when the setting change mode is being executed, a notification to that effect may be provided. For example, if it is determined that the setting key has been turned on, a setting change mode start command may be sent to the peripheral control unit 1511 notifying it that the setting change mode is being started, and upon receiving the setting change mode start command, the peripheral control unit 1511 may display a predetermined display (such as "settings being changed") on the performance display device 1600. In this case, when the setting change mode is to be ended, that is, if the setting key is turned off, a setting change mode end command may be sent to the peripheral control unit 1511 notifying it that the setting change mode is being ended, and upon receiving the setting change mode end command, the peripheral control unit 1511 may end the predetermined display being performed on the performance display device 1600. Note that the setting value confirmed as the predetermined display or the setting value displayed on the setting display may be displayed on the performance display device 1600, and in this case, may be made to disappear when the setting change mode is ended.

In addition, the main control MPU may also notify the setting change mode in conjunction with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display on the function display unit 1400 may be a special display that does not appear during normal play (for example, all special symbol displays may be turned off or on).

On the other hand, after the initial value setting and startup setting of the main control's built-in WDT (step S12) are performed during the main control side power-on process, the state of the setting key is determined, and if the setting key is not turned on, processing from step S14 onwards is executed.

Then, during the main control side power-on processing, if the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), meaning that various information should be erased, or if the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30, or if the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), meaning that the main control side power-off processing did not end normally, the main control MPU executes a second RAM clear process in step S38 to clear data from the game control area other than the setting value information for the pachinko machine 1 that indicates the game state (e.g., information about the probability bonus state, time-saving state, and prize balls), and then sets the working area of the main control's internal RAM (step S40). Thus, unlike the first RAM clear process, the second RAM clear process does not initialize the setting value information. That is, by turning on the setting key when the power is turned on, the first RAM clearing process can be executed to clear the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1, and by operating the RAM clear switch when the power is turned on, the second RAM clearing process can be executed to clear information about the game state (e.g., information about the special probability state, time-saving state, and prize balls). Furthermore, by turning on the setting key when the power is turned on, the first RAM clearing process can be executed to clear the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1, and then the RAM clearing switch can be operated to execute the second RAM clearing process to clear information about the game state (e.g., information about the special probability state, time-saving state, and prize balls). In other words, it is possible to clear both the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 and information about the game state (e.g., information about the special probability state, time-saving state, and prize balls). In this way, one or both of the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process can be selectively executed depending on the information to be cleared.

In this example, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key has been operated, but the dispensing control unit 633a may also make the determination. Furthermore, the setting key operation signal sent from the dispensing control unit 633a to the main control board 1310 may be sent via serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (a predetermined number of pulses at a predetermined frequency), or an intermediate potential signal that is neither the power supply voltage nor the ground voltage. This is because, in order to prevent fraudulent activity such as shorting the terminals of the setting key to activate the setting change mode, it is preferable to send the signal regarding the setting key operation from the dispensing control unit 633a to the main control board 1310 using a signal that cannot be generated by shorting the terminals.

[16-2. Variable effects according to setting values]
Next, we will explain the variation effects according to each setting value. Figure 180 is a variation pattern table referenced in the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process, second variation pattern setting process).

In this example, a fluctuation pattern table is provided for each setting value, and the type of fluctuation pattern selected varies depending on the setting value of the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, in the special symbol 1 miss variation pattern table (Fig. 180 (A)) which is referred to when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first variation pattern setting process when the result of the first special lottery is a miss in the normal state, for example, a mini character for setting suggestion is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and a miss variation pattern 25 which executes a "low setting suggestion effect" which suggests that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is 1, 2 or 3 by displaying "Maybe low?" or "Maybe one of 1, 2 or 3?" in the speech bubble of the mini character is selectable from setting value 1 to setting value 3, and a miss variation pattern 26 which executes a "high setting suggestion effect" which suggests that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is 4, 5 or 6 by displaying "Maybe high?" or "Maybe one of 4, 5 or 6?" in the speech bubble of the mini character is selectable from setting value 4 to setting value 6. Therefore, when the "high setting suggestion effect" is executed during the variable effect, the player will know that the setting is at least 4 or higher, which can increase their interest in the game.

Furthermore, for example, by displaying a miniature character for setting suggestion on the effect display device 1600 and displaying "Maybe even?" or "Maybe 2, 4, or 6?" in the miniature character's speech bubble, a failure variation pattern 27 is executed that suggests that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is 2, 4, or 6, and is selectable from setting values 2, 4, and 6. Furthermore, by displaying a miniature character for setting suggestion on the effect display device 1600 and displaying "Maybe odd?" or "Maybe 1, 3, or 5?" in the miniature character's speech bubble, a failure variation pattern 28 is executed that suggests that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is 1, 3, or 5, and is selectable from setting values 1, 3, and 5. Therefore, the player can recognize that when an "even setting suggestion effect" is executed in the variable effect, the setting value is 2, 4, or 6, and when an "odd setting suggestion effect" is executed, the setting value is 1, 3, or 5. Furthermore, by combining this with the execution history of "low setting suggestion effects" and "high setting suggestion effects," it is possible to infer the setting value. In other words, if an "odd setting suggestion effect" and a "low setting suggestion effect" are executed, the setting value is 1 or 3; if an "odd setting suggestion effect" and a "high setting suggestion effect" are executed, the setting value is 5; if an "even setting suggestion effect" and a "low setting suggestion effect" are executed, the setting value is 2; and if an "even setting suggestion effect" and a "high setting suggestion effect" are executed, the setting value is 4 or 6. In this way, this example provides new gameplay that allows players to infer the setting value based on the combination of executed setting suggestion effects from multiple types of setting suggestion effects.

In addition, in this example, for example, a miniature character for suggesting a setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a miss variation pattern 29 that executes a "highest setting suggestion effect" suggesting that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is 6 by displaying "Maybe the highest?" or "Maybe 6?" in the miniature character's speech bubble is set to be selectable only for a setting value of 6. Therefore, when the "highest setting suggestion effect" is executed in the variation effect, the player can recognize that the setting value is the highest setting, setting value 6, and their interest in the game is increased. Furthermore, in the case of a setting value of 6, a miss variation pattern 31 that executes a "highest setting confirmation effect" can be selected in the case of a miss that does not result in a reach or a reach miss, and this notifies the player that the setting value has been confirmed as the highest setting, setting value 6, and by making the player aware that the highest setting has been confirmed, their interest in the game is increased.

Furthermore, in the special symbol 1 small win variation pattern table (Fig. 180 (B)), which is referenced when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first variation pattern setting process when the result of the first special lottery is a small win under normal conditions, small win variation pattern 33 and small win variation pattern 34 can only be selected with a setting value of 6. For example, a mini character for setting suggestion is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and small win variation pattern 33 and small win variation pattern 34 execute a "highest setting confirmed effect" that notifies the player that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is 6 by displaying "Highest setting confirmed!" or "6 confirmed!" in the speech bubble of the mini character. Therefore, when the "highest setting confirmed effect" is executed in the variation effect when a small win is obtained, the player can recognize that the setting value is the highest setting, setting value 6, and their interest in the game is increased.

Furthermore, in the special symbol 1 jackpot variation pattern table (Fig. 180 (C)), which is referenced when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first variation pattern setting process when the first special lottery result is a jackpot during normal play, jackpot variation pattern 34, which executes the "highest setting confirmation effect," can only be selected with a setting value of 6. Therefore, when the "highest setting confirmation effect" is executed in the variation effect upon a jackpot, the player can recognize that the setting value is the highest setting, setting value 6, and the player can be given double joy by the execution of the jackpot game state, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

In addition, in the special symbol 2 small win variation pattern table (Fig. 180 (D)), which is referenced when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the second variation pattern setting process if the second special lottery result is a small win during the time-saving state, small win variation pattern 34, which executes the "highest setting confirmation effect," can only be selected with a setting value of 6. Therefore, when the "highest setting confirmation effect" is executed in the variation effect in the event of a small win, the player can recognize that the setting value is the highest setting, setting value 6, and further, by winning the third small win, which guides the game ball that entered the device winning port 2006 to the first V winning port 2007 and triggers a jackpot game state, the player can be given double the joy and increase their interest in the game.

As mentioned above, in this example, the probability of a small win varies depending on the setting value of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in the normal state, setting values 1 to 4 have a small win probability of 1 in 100, while setting values 5 and 6 have a higher probability of 1 in 90 than setting values 1 to 4. Similarly, in the time-saving state, setting values 1 to 5 have a small win probability of 1 in 10, while setting value 6 has a higher probability of 1 in 9 than setting values 1 to 5.

Furthermore, small win fluctuation pattern 34, which executes the "highest setting confirmation effect" selectable in the second fluctuation pattern setting process when the second special lottery result is a small win during the time-saving state, is executed over a long period (155 seconds), which is longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation patterns selectable at setting values 1 to 5, which are lower than setting value 6. Furthermore, at setting value 6, the selection rate of small win fluctuation pattern 20, which has a longer fluctuation time than small win fluctuation patterns 1 to 3, is higher than at setting values 1 to 5, which are lower than setting value 6. In other words, at setting value 6, where the probability of a small win is higher than the other setting values, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect executed during the time-saving state is longer. As mentioned above, setting value 6 has a higher probability of a small win than setting values 1 to 5, and in the event of a small win, the rate at which a game ball that enters device winning port 2006 is guided to first V winning port 2007 and a big win game state is determined to be a third small win is also set higher than setting values 1 to 5, making it possible to win a large number of prize balls in a short period of time. Therefore, by increasing the selection rate of small win fluctuation pattern 20 and small win fluctuation pattern 34, which have longer fluctuation times than other small win fluctuation patterns, when setting value 6 is set higher than setting values 1 to 5, the number of times the fluctuation effects are executed per unit time is reduced, thereby suppressing an increase in gambling potential.

In addition, although the random numbers for determining fluctuation patterns are distributed in approximately the same way for all setting values in this example, the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to setting value 6 has fluctuation patterns specific to setting value 6 (miss fluctuation pattern 29 to miss fluctuation pattern 31, small hit fluctuation pattern 33, small hit fluctuation pattern 34, and big hit fluctuation pattern 34), so the distribution of the random numbers for determining fluctuation patterns is different. Therefore, in this example, only the random numbers for determining fluctuation patterns distributed to specific fluctuation patterns (adjustment fluctuation patterns) in the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to setting value 6 are adjusted to distribute the random numbers for determining fluctuation patterns. In this way, only the random numbers for determining fluctuation patterns distributed to specific fluctuation patterns are adjusted without changing the distribution of the random numbers for determining fluctuation patterns for all fluctuation patterns in the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to setting value 6, which reduces the burden of adding or deleting fluctuation patterns and makes gaming machine design easier. Furthermore, a specific fluctuation pattern will maintain a certain level of frequency of occurrence even if the number of allocations of random numbers for determining fluctuation patterns is reduced, and will be adjusted to have at least 60% or more of the number of allocations of random numbers for determining fluctuation patterns set in at least other setting values, so that the occurrence rate does not decrease excessively compared to other setting values.

In this way, in this example, the probability of a small win and the variable duration of the variable presentation that is executed when the special lottery result is a small win are varied according to the settings of the pachinko machine 1, thereby achieving a balance with the gambling element.

In addition, the above-mentioned setting suggestion effects (low setting suggestion effect, high setting suggestion effect, even setting suggestion effect, odd setting suggestion effect, highest setting suggestion effect, highest setting confirmation effect) are most likely to be executed when the result of the first special lottery in normal mode is a miss or a close miss, and there are many types of setting suggestion effects that can be executed. On the other hand, when the result of the second special lottery in time-saving mode is a miss or a close miss, or when the result of the special lottery in normal mode and time-saving mode (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) is a small hit or a big hit, they are less likely to be executed than when the result of the first special lottery in normal mode is a miss or a close miss, and there are fewer types of setting suggestion effects that can be executed. In other words, by reducing the frequency of setting suggestion effects during time-saving mode or a small hit compared to when the result is a miss or a close miss in normal mode, attention is drawn to the reception of game balls into the V winning slot.

[17. Guide passage group consisting of first guide passage and second guide passage]
[17-1. Case where the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the first guide passage]
As an embodiment different from the above, a case where a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting a game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 of the center role device 2500 is provided will be described with reference to Fig. 181 and Fig. 182. Fig. 181 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the first guide passage 2521, and Fig. 182 is a specific example of a warning effect using the right detection sensor 2404.

As shown in Figure 181, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the passage of game ball B is provided slightly below (near) the entrance at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521. This right detection sensor 2404 is provided in a position where game ball B that enters the first guide passage 2521 will always pass through it. In other words, when game ball B is hit with enough strength to enter the upstream space portion 2505 and hit the impact stop portion 1006 (so-called right hit), it will enter the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, and when game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B will be detected by the right detection sensor 2404. On the other hand, if game ball B is hit with enough strength to enter the upstream space 2505 and not come into contact with the impact stopper 1006 (somewhat weaker than a right hit), there is a high probability that it will enter the second guide passage 2522. However, if game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, the right detection sensor 2404 is installed inside the first guide passage 2521, so game ball B will not be detected by the right detection sensor 2404.

The right detection sensor 2404 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404 is input to the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU then monitors whether or not game ball B has been shot into the first guide passage 2521 based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that game ball B has been shot into the first guide passage 2521; and when the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that game ball B has not been shot into the first guide passage 2521.

In this embodiment, the way game ball B is hit (launch strength) needs to be changed depending on the game status, and the area and passage into which game ball B is hit need to be changed. First, during a small win game, the special feature winning opening 2006 located inside the first guide passage 2521 is opened, and game ball B needs to enter this opened special feature winning opening 2006. For this reason, during a small win game, game ball B needs to be hit with enough strength to enter the upstream space 2505 and hit the impact stopper 1006 (so-called right hit) so that game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520.

In addition, during a jackpot game, the large prize opening 2005 located at the bottom right of the center device 2500 opens, and the player is required to make game ball B enter the open large prize opening 2005. However, the game ball B is configured so that it has a higher probability of entering the large prize opening 2005 if it is discharged from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 than from the exit of the first guide passage 2521. Furthermore, during the time-saving mode, when a ball enters normal entry port 2003 located at the lower right of center device 2500, second start port 2004 located at the lower right of center device 2500 opens, and game ball B is required to enter second start port 2005 in the opened state. However, game ball B is more likely to enter normal entry port 2003 and second start port 2005 when it is discharged from the exit of second guide passage 2522 of guide passage group 2520 than from the exit of first guide passage 2521. For this reason, during a jackpot game or the time-saving mode, it is preferable to hit game ball B with a force (slightly weaker than a right hit) that will not allow game ball B to enter upstream space 2505 and hit impact stopper 1006, so that game ball B enters second guide passage 2522 of guide passage group 2520.

Furthermore, during the normal state, game ball B is required to enter the first starting hole 2002 located below the center device 2500. For this reason, during the normal state, game ball B must be hit (i.e., hit from the left) with enough force to enter the left side of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center device 2500 when viewed from the front (to the left of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510), so that it flows down the area on the left side of the center device 2500 where game ball B can enter the first starting hole 2002.

In this embodiment, the way game ball B is hit (launch strength) needs to be changed depending on the game status, and the area or path into which game ball B is hit needs to be changed. However, if game ball B is not hit into the recommended area or path, the player is warned to hit game ball B into the recommended area or path. Specifically, when the game status is not such that game ball B should be hit into the first guide path 2521 of the guide path group 2520, if the right detection sensor 2404 provided on the first guide path 2521 detects the passage of game ball B and this state continues for a predetermined period of time, the player is warned.

First, during a jackpot game or in the time-saving mode, it is recommended that game ball B be shot into the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520. However, when the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 detects the passage of game ball B, it determines that game ball B has been shot into the first guide passage 2521, and if this state continues for a predetermined time (for example, five or more game balls B are detected within five seconds), it warns the player that game ball B should be shot into the second guide passage 2522. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 182(A), the effect display device 1600 executes a first warning effect that displays the message "Please shoot into the second guide passage." This allows the player to understand that during a jackpot game or in the time-saving mode, they should change the hitting method to a strength (slightly weaker than a right hit) that will prevent the ball from entering the upstream space 2505 and hitting the impact stopper 1006, and hit game ball B into the second guide passage 2522. After the first warning effect is executed, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of game ball B for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), it is determined that the state in which game ball B has been hit into the first guide passage 2521 has been resolved, and the first warning effect is terminated.

More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of game ball B during a jackpot game or during the time-saving mode, it determines that game ball B has been inserted into the first guide passage 2521, starts a monitoring timer, and increments the count value each time game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 during monitoring by the monitoring timer. If game ball B remains inserted into the first guide passage 2521 for a predetermined period of time after the monitoring timer starts (e.g., if five or more game balls B are detected within five seconds), the first warning effect is executed. However, if this state does not continue for the predetermined period of time (e.g., if fewer than five game balls B are detected within five seconds), it is determined that the state in which game ball B has been inserted into the first guide passage 2521 has been resolved, so the first warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer and count value is cleared. Furthermore, if the game state changes from a jackpot game or time-saving mode after the monitoring timer has started and the state in which game ball B should no longer be shot into second guide passage 2522 is no longer present, information such as the monitoring timer and count value is cleared. Then, after the first warning effect is executed, the monitoring timer is started, and if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of game ball B for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds), the state in which game ball B has been shot into first guide passage 2521 is resolved and the first warning effect is terminated. In addition, if the game state changes from a jackpot game or time-saving mode, the state in which game ball B should no longer be shot into second guide passage 2522 is no longer present and the first warning effect is terminated.

In addition, during the normal state, it is recommended that game ball B be shot into the area to the left of the center device 2500. However, when the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 detects the passage of game ball B, it determines that game ball B has been shot into the first guide passage 2521, and if this state continues for a predetermined time (e.g., five or more game balls B are detected within five seconds), it warns the player that game ball B should be shot into the area to the left of the center device 2500. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 182(B), the effect display device 1600 executes a second warning effect that displays the message "Hit to the left." This allows the player to understand that during the normal state, the player should change the way of hitting the ball to a strength that propels the ball further to the left of the highest point on the outer periphery of the center device 2500 (to the left of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) as viewed from the front, thereby hitting game ball B into the area to the left of the center device 2500. If the right detection sensor 2404 continues not to detect the passage of game ball B for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), it is determined that the state in which game ball B has been shot into the first guide passage 2521 has been resolved, and the second warning effect is terminated.

More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of game ball B during normal operation, it determines that game ball B has been inserted into the first guide passage 2521, starts a monitoring timer, and increments the count value each time game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 during monitoring by the monitoring timer. If game ball B remains inserted into the first guide passage 2521 for a predetermined period of time after the monitoring timer starts (for example, if five or more game balls B are detected within five seconds), a second warning effect is executed. However, if this state does not continue for the predetermined period of time (for example, if fewer than five game balls B are detected within five seconds), it is determined that the state in which game ball B has been inserted into the first guide passage 2521 has been resolved, so the second warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer and count value is cleared. Furthermore, if the game state changes from the normal state after the monitoring timer has started and it is no longer the state where game ball B should be shot into the area to the left of the center role device 2500, information such as the monitoring timer and count value is cleared. Then, after the second warning effect is executed, the monitoring timer is started, and if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of game ball B for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), the state where game ball B has been shot into the first guide passage 2521 is resolved and the second warning effect is terminated. In addition, if the game state changes from the normal state, it is no longer the state where game ball B should be shot into the area to the left of the center role device 2500 and the second warning effect is terminated.

As described above, when the game state is not such that game ball B should be shot into the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, and the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 detects the passage of game ball B and this state continues for a predetermined time, a warning screen (first or second warning effect) is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the content of the warning changes depending on the game state. This allows the player to accurately understand which area or passage is recommended, even if game ball B is shot into the first guide passage 2521 when the game state is not such that game ball B should be shot into the first guide passage 2521.

Meanwhile, during a small win game, it is recommended that game ball B be shot into the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. However, if the right detection sensor 2404 installed in the first guide passage 2521 does not detect the passage of game ball B, it is determined that game ball B has not been shot into the first guide passage 2521, and if this state continues for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds), a warning is issued to the player that game ball B should be shot into the first guide passage 2521. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 182(C), the display device 1600 executes a third warning effect that displays the message "Please shot into the first guide passage." This allows the player to understand that during a small win game, they should change the way they hit the ball so that it enters the upstream space 2505 and hits the impact stop 1006, and shoot game ball B into the first guide passage 2521. When the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of game ball B, it is determined that the state in which game ball B has not been shot into the first guide passage 2521 has been resolved, and the third warning effect is terminated.

More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of game ball B during a small win game, it is determined that game ball B has not been thrown into the first guide passage 2521, and the monitoring timer is started. If, after the monitoring timer is started, the state in which game ball B has not been thrown into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds), the third warning effect is executed. However, if the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of game ball B within the predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds), it is determined that the state in which game ball B has not been thrown into the first guide passage 2521 has been resolved, so the third warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Furthermore, if, after the monitoring timer is started, the game state switches from a small win game and the state in which game ball B should be thrown into the first guide passage 2521 is no longer present, information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. After the third warning effect is executed, a monitoring timer is started, and if the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of game ball B, the state in which game ball B has not been shot into the first guide passage 2521 is resolved and the fourth warning effect is terminated. In addition, if the game state switches from a small win game, the state in which game ball B should be shot into the first guide passage 2521 is no longer resolved and the third warning effect is terminated.

In this embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is located slightly below (near) the entrance at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, but it may be located in any position that ensures that the game ball B that enters the first guide passage 2521 passes through it. For example, it may be located at the entrance at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, at the exit at the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, or inside the first guide passage 2521.

In addition, in this embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is located upstream of the special feature winning opening 2006 located inside the first guide passage 2521, but it may also be located downstream of the special feature winning opening 2006. In such a case, when game ball B is shot into the first guide passage 2521 during a small win game, there is a high possibility that game ball B will enter the open special feature winning opening 2006. Therefore, game ball B will pass by the right detection sensor 2404 located downstream less frequently, preventing game ball B from passing by excessively and causing malfunction of the right detection sensor 2404.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first to third warning effects are exemplified by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, if a separate hitting area instruction display (for example, a right-hit display consisting of a right arrow image or a left-hit display consisting of a left arrow image) is used to keep the player aware of how game ball B should be hit in each game state, it is desirable to execute the first to third warning effects so as not to obstruct this hitting area instruction display. For example, it is desirable to partition off a "display area for displaying the hitting area instruction display" in the upper right portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and then partition off a "display area for displaying the first to third warning effects" in the upper left portion of a separate display area of the effect display device 1600 so that the respective instructions are not obstructed by overlapping each other.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first to third warning effects are exemplified by displaying a specified warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but these warnings may also be realized as audio effects rather than displays. In that case, it is desirable to set the priority of allocation to the limited number of channels provided for outputting audio to be higher than the various audio effects set during normal play, jackpot play, or time-saving play, so that the audio is output as much as possible even when there are no free (unused) channels in the limited number of channels. This makes it possible to effectively prevent players who are unfamiliar with the gameplay that involves hitting a variety of different game balls B from being disadvantaged.

[17-2. Case where detection sensors are provided in the first guide passage and the second guide passage]
As an embodiment different from the above, a case in which a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting a game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520 of the center role device 2500 and a left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting a game ball B that has entered the second guide passage 2522 are provided will be described with reference to Fig. 183 and Fig. 184. Fig. 183 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which detection sensors are provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and Fig. 184 is a specific example of a warning effect using the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405.

As shown in FIG. 183, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting the passage of game ball B is provided slightly below (near) the entrance at the top of the first guide passage 2521, and a left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting the passage of game ball B is provided slightly below (near) the entrance at the top of the second guide passage 2522. This right detection sensor 2404 is located so that game ball B that enters the first guide passage 2521 will always pass through it. In other words, when game ball B is hit with enough force to enter the upstream space 2505 and hit the impact stop portion 1006 (so-called right hit), it will enter the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520, and when game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B will be detected by the right detection sensor 2404.

On the other hand, the left detection sensor 2405 is positioned so that game ball B that enters the second guide passage 2522 will always pass through it. In other words, if game ball B is hit with enough strength to enter the upstream space 2505 and not come into contact with the impact stopper 1006 (somewhat weaker than a right hit), there is a high probability that it will enter the second guide passage 2522, but if game ball B does enter the second guide passage 2522, it will be detected by the left detection sensor 2405.

The right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 are connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and detection signals from the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 are input to the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU monitors whether or not game ball B has been shot into the first guide passage 2521 based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404, and monitors whether or not game ball B has been shot into the second guide passage 2522 based on the detection signal from the left detection sensor 2405. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that game ball B has been shot into the first guide passage 2521; when the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that game ball B has been shot into the second guide passage 2522; and when neither the right detection sensor 2404 nor the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that game ball B has not been shot into either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522.

In this embodiment, as described in detail above, the method of hitting game ball B (launch strength) is changed depending on the game state, and the area and path into which game ball B is hit must be changed. However, if game ball B is not hit into the recommended area or path, the player is alerted to hit game ball B into the recommended area or path. Specifically, since right detection sensors 2404 are provided on both the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522, when game ball B is normally hit into the area to the left of the center device 2500, if either the right detection sensor 2404 provided on the first guide path 2521 or the left detection sensor 2405 provided on the second guide path 2522 detects the passage of game ball B and this state continues for a predetermined period of time, a warning can be issued to the player.

More specifically, during normal play, it is recommended that game ball B be shot into the area to the left of the center device 2500. However, when the right detection sensor 2404 located in the first guide passage 2521 detects the passage of game ball B, it determines that game ball B has been shot into the first guide passage 2521. When the left detection sensor 2405 located in the second guide passage 2522 detects the passage of game ball B, it determines that game ball B has been shot into the second guide passage 2522. If these conditions continue for a predetermined period of time (e.g., five or more game balls B are detected within five seconds by one or both of the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405), a warning is issued to the player that game ball B should be shot into the area to the left of the center device 2500. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 184(A), the display device 1600 executes a fourth warning effect that displays the message "Please shoot left." As a result, during normal operation, the player can understand that they should change the way they hit the ball so that it enters the area to the left of the highest part of the outer periphery of the center device 2500 when viewed from the front (to the left of the upper right peripheral wall 2510) and hit game ball B into the area to the left of the center device 2500. If the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 do not detect the passage of game ball B for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), it is determined that the state in which game ball B has been hit into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 has been resolved, and the fourth warning effect is terminated.

More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of game ball B during normal operation, it determines that game ball B has been thrown into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, starts a monitoring timer, and increments the count value each time game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 during monitoring by the monitoring timer. If, after the monitoring timer starts, game ball B continues to be thrown into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., if five or more game balls B are detected within five seconds), a fourth warning effect is executed. However, if this condition does not continue for the predetermined period of time (e.g., if fewer than five game balls B are detected within five seconds), it is determined that the condition of game ball B being thrown into the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 has been resolved, so the fourth warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer and count value is cleared. Furthermore, if the game state changes from the normal state after the monitoring timer has started and it is no longer the state where game ball B should be shot into the area to the left of center device 2500, information such as the monitoring timer and count value is cleared. Then, after the fourth warning effect is executed, the monitoring timer is started, and if the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 does not detect the passage of game ball B for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds), the state where game ball B has been shot into first guide passage 2521 or second guide passage 2522 is resolved, and the fourth warning effect is terminated. In addition, if the game state changes from the normal state, it is no longer the state where game ball B should be shot into the area to the left of center device 2500, and the fourth warning effect is terminated.

During a small win game, it is recommended that game ball B be shot into the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. However, if the right detection sensor 2404 installed in the first guide passage 2521 does not detect the passage of game ball B, it is determined that game ball B has not been shot into the first guide passage 2521, and if this state continues for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds), a warning is issued to the player that game ball B should be shot into the first guide passage 2521. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 184(B), the display device 1600 executes a fifth warning effect that displays the message "Please shot into the first guide passage." This allows the player to understand that during a small win game, they should change the way they hit the ball so that it enters the upstream space 2505 and hits the impact stopper 1006, and shoot game ball B into the first guide passage 2521. When the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of game ball B, it is determined that the state in which game ball B has not been shot into the first guide passage 2521 has been resolved, and the fifth warning effect is terminated.

More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of game ball B during a small win game, it is determined that game ball B has not been shot into the first guide passage 2521, and the monitoring timer is started. If, after the monitoring timer is started, the state in which game ball B has not been shot into the first guide passage 2521 continues for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds), the fifth warning effect is executed. However, if the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of game ball B within the predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds), it is determined that the state in which game ball B has not been shot into the first guide passage 2521 has been resolved, the fifth warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Furthermore, if, after the monitoring timer is started, the game state switches from a small win game and the state in which game ball B should be shot into the first guide passage 2521 is no longer present, information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. After the fifth warning effect is executed, a monitoring timer is started, and if the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of game ball B, the state in which game ball B has not been shot into the first guide passage 2521 is resolved and the fifth warning effect is terminated. In addition, if the game state switches from a small win game, the state in which game ball B should be shot into the first guide passage 2521 is no longer resolved and the fifth warning effect is terminated.

During a jackpot game or in the time-saving mode, it is recommended that game ball B be shot into the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520. However, if the left detection sensor 2405 installed in the second guide passage 2522 does not detect the passage of game ball B, it is determined that game ball B has not been shot into the second guide passage 2522, and if this state continues for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds), a warning is issued to the player that game ball B should be shot into the second guide passage 2522. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 184(C), the display device 1600 executes a sixth warning effect that displays the message "Please shot into the second guide passage." This allows the player to understand that during a jackpot game or in the time-saving mode, they should change the way they hit the ball to a strength (somewhat weaker than a right shot) that will prevent the ball from entering the upstream space 2505 and hitting the impact stop 1006, and to shot game ball B into the second guide passage 2522. When the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of game ball B, it is determined that the state in which game ball B has not been shot into the second guide passage 2522 has been resolved, and the warning effect is terminated.

More specifically, if the left detection sensor 2405 does not detect the passage of game ball B during a jackpot game or the time-saving mode, it is determined that game ball B has not been thrown into the second guide passage 2522, and the monitoring timer is started. If, after the monitoring timer is started, the state in which game ball B has not been thrown into the second guide passage 2522 continues for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds), the sixth warning effect is executed. However, if the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of game ball B within the predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds), it is determined that the state in which game ball B has not been thrown into the second guide passage 2522 has been resolved, so the sixth warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Furthermore, if, after the monitoring timer is started, the game state switches from a jackpot game or the time-saving mode and the state in which game ball B should be thrown into the second guide passage 2522 is no longer present, information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. After the sixth warning effect is executed, a monitoring timer is started, and if the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of game ball B, the state in which game ball B has not been shot into the second guide passage 2522 is resolved and the sixth warning effect is terminated. In addition, if the game state switches from a jackpot game or a time-saving state, the sixth warning effect is terminated as the state in which game ball B should not be shot into the second guide passage 2522 is no longer in place.

In this embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is located slightly below (near the entrance) the entrance at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, but it may be located anywhere so long as a game ball B that enters the first guide passage 2521 always passes through it. For example, it may be located at the entrance at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, at the exit at the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, or inside the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, the left detection sensor 2405 is located slightly below (near the entrance) the entrance at the upper end of the second guide passage 2522, but it may be located anywhere so long as a game ball B that enters the second guide passage 2522 always passes through it. For example, it may be located at the entrance at the upper end of the second guide passage 2522, at the exit at the lower end of the second guide passage 2522, or inside the second guide passage 2522.

In addition, in this embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is located upstream of the special feature winning opening 2006 located inside the first guide passage 2521, but it may also be located downstream of the special feature winning opening 2006. In such a case, when game ball B is shot into the first guide passage 2521 during a small win game, there is a high possibility that game ball B will enter the open special feature winning opening 2006. Therefore, game ball B will pass by the right detection sensor 2404 located downstream less frequently, and it is possible to prevent malfunction of the right detection sensor 2404 due to game ball B passing by too many times.

In addition, in this embodiment, detection sensors (right detection sensor 2404, left detection sensor 2405) are provided in both the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520. However, a single detection sensor may be provided at a position where a game ball B entering the guide passage group 2520 must pass through. For example, by providing a single detection sensor in a passage before the path where game ball B entering the upstream space portion 2505 branches into either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, it becomes possible to detect whether game ball B is entering the guide passage group 2520 with a single detection sensor. In other words, when a single detection sensor detects the passage of game ball B, it is determined that game ball B has been shot into the guide passage group 2520. However, when a single detection sensor does not detect the passage of game ball B, it is possible to determine that game ball B has not been shot into the guide passage group 2520. Even in such a case, when the normal state is such that game ball B should be shot into the area to the left of the center device 2500, if one detection sensor detects the passage of game ball B and this state continues for a predetermined period of time, a warning is issued to the player, so that the player can at least know whether game ball B should be shot into the area to the left of the center device 2500.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects are exemplified by displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, if a separate hitting area instruction display (for example, a right-hit display consisting of a right arrow image or a left-hit display consisting of a left arrow image) is used to keep the player aware of how game ball B should be hit in each game state, it is desirable to execute the fourth to sixth warning effects so as not to obstruct this hitting area instruction display. For example, it is desirable to partition off a "display area for displaying the hitting area instruction display" in the upper right portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and then partition off a "display area for displaying the fourth to sixth warning effects" in the upper left portion of a separate display area of the effect display device 1600 so that the respective instructions are not obstructed by overlapping each other.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects are exemplified by displaying a specified warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but these warnings may also be realized as audio effects rather than displays. In that case, it is desirable to set the priority of allocation to the limited number of channels provided for outputting audio to be higher than the various audio effects set during normal play, jackpot play, or time-saving play, so that the audio is output as much as possible even when there are no free (unused) channels in the limited number of channels. This makes it possible to effectively prevent players who are unfamiliar with the gameplay that involves hitting a variety of different game balls B from being disadvantaged.

[17-3. Regarding the case where a ball jam relief hole is provided in the overlapping portion where the first guide passage and the second guide passage are aligned in the front-rear direction]
As an embodiment different from the above, a case where a ball jam relief hole 2523 capable of removing ball jamming in the rear second guide passage 2522 is provided in the overlapping portion 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are aligned in the front-to-rear direction will be described with reference to Figures 185 and 186. Figures 185 and 186 are explanatory diagrams showing an embodiment in which the ball jam relief hole 2523 is provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

As described above in detail, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 have an overlapping section 2520a that appears to overlap from the front because they are lined up in the front-to-back direction in the section of the first guide passage 2521 that extends vertically to the left of the bonus prize winning opening 2006. At this overlapping section 2520a, the second guide passage 2522 is located behind the first guide passage 2521.

As shown in Figures 185 and 186(A), the overlapping portion 2520a, where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are aligned in the front-to-rear direction, is provided with a ball jam relief hole 2523 into which a predetermined rod-shaped member can be inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521, and which can remove a ball jam in the rear second guide passage 2522 by inserting the rod-shaped member. Specifically, the ball jam relief hole 2523 is provided on the front side of the first guide passage 2521 and in the area where the rear side of the first guide passage 2521 and the front side of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other. Furthermore, the ball jam release hole 2523 provided at the portion where the rear side of the first guide passage 2521 and the front side of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent is positioned to coincide with the ball jam release hole 2523 provided on the front side of the first guide passage 2521 when viewed from the front, and is provided to penetrate in the front-to-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 to the second guide passage 2522. This allows a rod-shaped member to be smoothly inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. In other words, if a ball jam occurs in the second guide passage 2522, by inserting a rod-shaped member from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can come into contact with the game ball B that has jammed in the rear second guide passage 2522, and by moving the rod-shaped member in the front-to-rear direction, the ball jam in the second guide passage 2522 can be cleared.

If a cover member is provided on the front side of the guide passage group 2520 consisting of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the cover member should also have a ball jam relief hole 2523 provided in a position that, when viewed from the front, coincides with the ball jam relief hole 2523 provided on the front side of the first guide passage 2521. This allows a rod-shaped member to be inserted from the front side of the cover member toward the second guide passage 2522 when a ball jam occurs in the second guide passage 2522 without having to remove the cover member.

Furthermore, the ball jam release hole 2523 is formed in a circular shape with a diameter slightly larger than that of the rod-shaped member. This allows the rod-shaped member to be freely moved not only in the front-to-back direction but also in the up-down and left-to-right directions when inserted from the front of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. In other words, when a ball jam occurs in the second guide passage 2522, the ball jam in the second guide passage 2522 can be easily removed by moving the rod-shaped member not only in the front-to-back direction but also in the up-down and left-to-right directions.

In addition, multiple ball jam relief holes 2523 are provided at predetermined intervals in the area extending up and down of the overlapping portion 2520, where the first guide passage 2521 and second guide passage 2522 are aligned in the front-to-rear direction. As a result, no matter where a ball jam occurs in the second guide passage 2522 of the overlapping portion 2520, a rod-shaped member can be inserted through the ball jam relief hole 2523 provided in a location close to that location, making it easy to remove the ball jam in the second guide passage 2522.

Of the guide passages 2520, the first guide passage 2521 only curves left-right, while the second guide passage 2522 has a complex shape that curves not only left-right but also front-to-rear. This makes the second guide passage 2522 more susceptible to ball jamming than the first guide passage 2521. Furthermore, the overlapping portion 2520, where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are aligned in the front-to-rear direction, is separated from both the inlet (the upper end) and the outlet (the lower end) of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. Furthermore, since the overlapping portion 2520 is located after the bend from the inlet or outlet, even if a rod-shaped object is inserted through the inlet or outlet, it will not reach that portion. In this regard, the overlapping portion 2520a, where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are aligned in the front-to-rear direction, is provided with a ball jam relief hole 2523 that allows a rod-shaped object to be inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. This allows balls to be easily removed by inserting a rod-shaped member not only when balls become clogged in the first guide passage 2521 at the front of the overlapping portion 2520a, but also when balls become clogged in the second guide passage 2522 at the rear.

In the above description, a ball jam relief hole 2523 is provided in the overlapping portion 2520a, where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are aligned in the front-to-back direction, penetrating from the front of the first guide passage 2521 to the second guide passage 2522 in the front-to-back direction. However, below is shown another example of a ball jam relief hole 2523 that can remove ball jams in the rear second guide passage 2522.

As a first alternative example, as shown in FIG. 186 (B), a ball jam relief hole 2523 may be provided on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 at the overlapping portion 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are aligned in the front-to-back direction, into which a predetermined rod-shaped member can be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, and by inserting the rod-shaped member, a ball jam can be removed from the second guide passage 2522. In such a case, when a ball jam occurs in the second guide passage 2522, inserting the rod-shaped member from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 allows the rod-shaped member to come into contact with the game ball B that has jammed in the second guide passage 2522, and by moving the rod-shaped member left and right, the ball jam in the second guide passage 2522 can be removed. In this embodiment, a transparent light guide plate 3102 is provided to the left of the guide passage group 2520 consisting of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. The light guide plate 3102 is located behind the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, making it possible to insert a rod-shaped member from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 without being obstructed by the light guide plate 3102.

As a second alternative example, as shown in Figure 186 (C), the overlapping portion 2520a, where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are aligned in the front-to-back direction, is provided with a ball jam relief hole 2523 that penetrates in the front-to-back direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. However, the shape of the ball jam relief hole 2523 does not have to be circular, but may be formed as a slit extending in the vertical direction. In such a case, when a rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be moved significantly in the vertical direction, making it easy to remove any ball jams in the second guide passage 2522.

Furthermore, near the entrances at the upper ends of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. As a third alternative example, as shown in FIG. 186(D), at the location where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged side by side in the front-to-rear direction, a ball jam relief hole 2523 may be provided into which a predetermined rod-shaped member can be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, and which can remove a ball jam in the first guide passage 2521 on the right side (rear side) by inserting the rod-shaped member. In other words, the ball jam relief hole 2523 may be provided so as to penetrate from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 toward the first guide passage 2521 in the left-right direction. In such a case, if a ball becomes stuck in the first guide passage 2521, a rod-shaped member can be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, allowing the rod-shaped member to come into contact with the game ball B that has become stuck in the first guide passage 2521 on the right side (rear side), and the ball that has become stuck in the first guide passage 2521 can be removed by moving the rod-shaped member left and right.

Furthermore, when the ball jam relief hole 2523 is provided on the left side of the second guide passage 2522, as in the first and third alternative examples, it is possible to remove a ball jam in the second guide passage 2522 by inserting a rod-shaped member through the ball jam relief hole 2523 from the left side of the second guide passage 2522. However, because the light guide plate 3102 is provided behind but adjacent to the second guide passage 2522, there is a possibility that the rod-shaped member may come into contact with the light guide plate 3102 when inserting the rod-shaped member through the ball jam relief hole 2523. Furthermore, if the rod-shaped member scratches the light guide plate 3102, when a pattern (first pattern 3102a, second pattern 3102b) is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102, the scratched area unrelated to the pattern will also guide light (reflect light). However, if the scratched area overlaps the pattern, the pattern will be difficult to see. For this reason, it is desirable not to provide a light-guiding decorative area where a pattern is displayed in the right region of light guide plate 3102, which is adjacent to second guide passage 2522. Furthermore, light guide plate 3102 is attached to square frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of rear box 3010, but light guide plate 3102 may be configured to be manually movable to the left so as to move away from second guide passage 2522, and to be movable to a position where the rod-shaped member does not come into contact with light guide plate 3102 as a preliminary step when inserting the rod-shaped member through ball jamming release hole 2523. Furthermore, a movable member may be provided on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 that can move between a position that conceals the ball release hole 2523 provided on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 and a position that does not conceal it, so that when a rod-shaped member is inserted through the ball release hole 2523, the movable member can be moved to a position that does not conceal the ball release hole 2523 as a preliminary step. With this configuration, when there is no need to remove a jammed ball in the second guide passage 2522, the movable member is positioned to conceal the ball release hole 2523, making it difficult for the player to see the ball release hole 2523, which has the advantage of not compromising the decorativeness of the entire system, including the second guide passage 2522.

[17-4. Structure to prevent ball clogging near the exits of the parallel first and second guide passages]
121(a), when game ball B is hit with enough force to strike the impact stopper 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 that forms part of the periphery of the play area 5a (so-called right strike), game ball B that strikes the impact stopper 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. Game ball B that has entered this first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the role winning opening door 2511 that closes the role winning opening 2006 midway along the first guide passage 2521, and is then released from the right exit at the bottom end of the guide passage group 2520 toward the attacker unit 2400 below. Then, the game ball B released downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between it and the attacca unit 2400 so that it enters either the first opening 2431 of the attacca right passage 2430, the normal winning port 2003, or the area to the left of the normal winning port 2003 with equal probability.

On the other hand, as explained in Figure 121 (b), when game ball B is shot into the upstream space portion 2505, enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, and flows through the second guide passage 2522, it is twisted backward and aligned in the longitudinal direction with the first guide passage 2521 at the overlapping portion 2520a, and then twisted forward and released from the exit to the left of the exit of the first guide passage 2521 downward toward the attacca unit 2400. Game ball B released downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is then guided by multiple obstacle nails N planted between it and the attacca unit 2400 to enter either the normal winning opening 2003 or the area to the left of the normal winning opening 2003, and in rare cases is guided to enter the first opening 2431 of the attacca right passage 2430.

In addition, game ball B that enters the attacker right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is released onto the lower right rail 1004 from the release opening 2435, which is below the big winning opening 2005, and is then discharged outside the game area 5a from the outlet 1008.

At the bottom of the guide passage group 2520, the outlets of the first guide passage 2521 are located on the right side and the outlet of the second guide passage 2522 is located on the left side, so that a large number of game balls B discharged from the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 flow into the vicinity of their outlets in a short period of time, making it easy for balls to become clogged below the outlets. In this regard, below the outlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a first opening 2431 of the attacca right passage 2430 is provided to the right of the normal winning opening 2003. When a game ball B enters this first opening 2431, it is guided through the attacca right passage 2430 to the outlet 1008. As a result, near the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, some of the game balls B discharged from those exits are guided from the first opening 2431 to the outlet 1008, making it less likely that game balls B will remain near those exits and preventing ball jams from occurring. Furthermore, even if ball jams occur below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the game balls B discharged from those exits will be guided from the first opening 2431 to the outlet 1008, preventing game balls B from piling up inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

As such, the first opening 2431 of the attacca right passage 2430 is provided below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, but is positioned so that the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is closer to the exit of the second guide passage 2522. Inside the first guide passage 2521, there is a bonus prize opening 2006 that opens during a small win game. However, if game balls B pile up up to the position of the bonus prize opening 2006 inside the first guide passage 2521 due to ball clogging below the exit of the first guide passage 2521, more game balls B than expected will flow into the now-open bonus prize opening 2006, allowing the player to gain an unfair advantage. In this regard, the first opening 2431 of the attacca right passage 2430 is positioned so that the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is closer than the exit of the second guide passage 2522. Therefore, even if ball jamming occurs below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and second guide passage 2522, game balls B near the exit of the first guide passage 2521 can be efficiently guided from the first opening 2431 to the outlet 1008, preventing game balls B from piling up up to the position of the bonus prize opening 2006 positioned inside the first guide passage 2521.

In this embodiment, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, to the right of the normal winning opening 2003, a first opening 2431 of the attacca right passage 2430 is provided, which is capable of guiding game balls B to the outlet 1008. However, it is also possible to provide an outlet separate from the outlet 1008 in the attacca right passage 2430, so that game balls B entering through the first opening 2431 are discharged from the game area 5a through this other outlet. Even in such a case, some of the game balls B discharged from the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be efficiently guided out of the game area 5a through an outlet separate from the outlet 1008, making it less likely that game balls B will remain near these exits and preventing ball jams from occurring.

Furthermore, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a first opening 2431 of the attacca right passage 2430 is provided close to the exit of the first guide passage 2521, and is capable of guiding game ball B to the outlet 1008. However, a passage capable of guiding game ball B to the outlet 1008, or an outlet separate from the outlet 1008 that can discharge game ball B outside the game area 5a, may also be provided close to the exit of the second guide passage 2522. Even in such cases, some of the game balls B discharged from the outlets of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be efficiently guided outside the game area 5a, making it less likely that game balls B will remain near these exits and preventing ball jams from occurring.

In the above description, a first opening 2431 of the attacca right passage 2430 capable of guiding game ball B to the outlet 1008 is provided near the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. However, a passage capable of guiding game ball B to the outlet 1008, or an outlet separate from the outlet 1008 capable of discharging game ball B outside the play area 5a, may also be provided near the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. Below is another example in which a second outlet 1013 capable of discharging game ball B outside the play area 5a is provided near the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. Figure 187 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second outlet 1013 is provided near the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

As shown in Figure 187, a second outlet 1013 capable of discharging game ball B outside the game area 5a is provided between the entrance at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance at the upper end of the second guide passage 2522. In this configuration, when game ball B is hit with enough strength to enter the upstream space portion 2505 and hit the impact stop portion 1006 (so-called right-handed hit), there is a high probability that it will enter the first guide passage 2521, but a portion of the hit game ball B will enter the second outlet 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, if game ball B is hit with enough strength to enter the upstream space 2505 and not hit the impact stopper 1006 (slightly weaker than a right-handed hit), there is a high probability that it will enter the second guide passage 2522, but some of the ball B will enter the second outlet 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. In other words, some of the ball B hit to enter the upstream space 2505 will enter the second outlet 1013. As a result, whether the player aims for the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 or the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, some of the ball B hit to enter the upstream space 2505 will be guided out of the game area 5a from the second outlet 1013. This reduces the number of balls B entering the interior through these entrances, preventing ball jams inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

In addition to the above, an outlet other than the outlet 1008 may be provided that can discharge game ball B outside the play area 5a only when a ball jam occurs inside the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522. Below is shown another example in which a second outlet 1013 that can discharge game ball B outside the play area 5a is provided near the exit inside the first guide passage 2521. Figure 188 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the second outlet 1013 is provided near the exit inside the first guide passage 2521.

As shown in Figure 188 (A), slightly above the exit at the bottom of the first guide passage 2521 is a second outlet 1013 that opens to the front of the game area 5a (game board 5), which is flush with the rear surface of the first guide passage 2521, and is capable of discharging game ball B outside the game area 5a. Also, inside the first guide passage 2521 is a bonus prize opening 2006 that opens during small win play, and the second outlet 1013 is located downstream of the bonus prize opening 2006. In this configuration, if there is no ball jam below the second outlet 1013, such as below the exit of the first guide passage 2522, when game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, it will pass directly in front of the second outlet 1013 without entering the second outlet 1013.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 188 (B), if ball jamming occurs below the second outlet 1013, such as below the exit of the first guide passage 2521, once game balls B have piled up to the position of the second outlet 1013, game balls B that have circulated through the first guide passage 2521 will enter the second outlet 1013. In other words, game balls B are prevented from piling up to a position above the second outlet 1013 inside the first guide passage 2521. As described above, the first guide passage 2521 is provided with a bonus prize opening 2006 that opens during a small win game. However, if game balls B pile up to the position of the bonus prize opening 2006 inside the first guide passage 2521 due to ball jamming near the exit of the first guide passage 2521, more game balls B than expected will flow into the now-open bonus prize opening 2006, allowing the player to gain an unfair advantage. In this regard, a second outlet 1013 is provided downstream of the device winning opening 2006 inside the first guide passage 2521, which can discharge game ball B outside the play area 5a only if a ball jam occurs inside the first guide passage 2521. Therefore, even if a ball jam occurs near the exit of the first guide passage 2521, game ball B can be discharged from the second outlet 1013 outside the play area 5a before it reaches the position of the device winning opening 2006 inside the first guide passage 2521, preventing a situation in which a player gains an unfair advantage.

[18. Outlet detection when an abnormality occurs]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, after power-on, when game balls B enter the ball entry holes (first start hole 2002, second start hole 2004, big prize hole 2005, accessory prize hole 2006, etc.) on the game board 5 and when game balls B enter the outlet hole 1008, the number of balls entering each hole is counted and a predetermined calculation is performed, and the calculation results are displayed on a predetermined display device (e.g., the base monitor 1310h) as information related to the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, if an abnormality occurs, the calculation is continued or suspended (stopped) depending on whether the abnormality is minor or major. If a major abnormality occurs, the calculation is suspended (stopped). The execution state of calculations when such an abnormality occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 189. FIG. 189 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution state of calculations when an abnormality occurs.

First, on the main control board 1310, when a game ball B enters one of the ball entry ports on the game board 5, namely, general entry port 2001, normal entry port 2003, first start port 2002, second start port 2004, big entry port 2005, or special entry port 2006, the general entry port sensor 3001, normal entry port sensor 2401, first start port sensor 3002, second start port sensor 2402, big entry port sensor 2403, and special entry port sensor 2513 detect the game ball B, and add the value to the corresponding ball entry counter. These ball entry counters make it possible to determine the number of game balls B that entered each entry port out of the game balls B that were shot into the game area 5a.

In addition, on the main control board 1310, when a game ball B is ejected to the outside from the outlet 1008 provided on the game board 5, either the left outlet sensor 3032 or the right outlet sensor 3033 detects the game ball B, and both add it to the out number counter. This out number counter makes it possible to know the number of game balls B that have entered the outlet 1008 out of the game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a.

The main control board 1310 then performs a predetermined calculation using the incoming ball counter and the out counter. As a specific example, by adding up all the incoming ball counter values, it is possible to calculate the total number of game balls B that have entered the game area 5a and entered the ball entry holes provided on the game board 5. Furthermore, by adding up all the incoming ball counter values and the out counter, it is possible to calculate the total number of game balls B that have entered the game area 5a.

The above calculation results are displayed on a specified display device as information related to the pachinko machine 1. However, the information displayed on the specified display device can also directly output the number of game balls B that have entered each entry port and exit port 1008 based on the respective entry ball counters and out counters. Examples of specified display devices include the effect display device 1600 mounted on the game board 5 and a hall computer managed externally by the hall. Alternatively, a monitor (base monitor 1310h) can be mounted on the main control board 1310 mounted on the back of the pachinko machine 1, and the information can be displayed on that monitor (base monitor 1310h). When information is displayed on the effect display device 1600, it can be seen by both the player and the hall staff, whereas when information is displayed on the hall computer or the monitor (base monitor 1310h) of the main control board 1310, it can be seen by only the hall staff.

Furthermore, if the total number of game balls B that have entered the entry holes provided on the game board 5 and the total number of game balls B that have entered the outlet 1008 are displayed as information on a predetermined display device, it is possible to determine from the ratio of these whether the rate at which game balls B enter the entry holes or the outlet 1008 is within a normal numerical range. When game play is being performed normally, game balls B shot into the play area 5a enter the entry holes at a predetermined rate. However, if, for example, the ratio of the total number of game balls B that enter the entry holes relative to the outlet 1008 is too high, it can be suspected that balls are being entered into the entry holes through fraudulent practices, and if the ratio of the total number of game balls B that enter the outlet 1008 relative to the entry holes is too high, it can be suspected that balls are being entered into the outlet 1008 through fraudulent practices.

In addition, on the main control board 1310, when a game ball B is paid out from the payout device 850, the payout detection sensor 950 detects the game ball B and adds it to the payout number counter. This payout number counter makes it possible to know the number of game balls B paid out to the player. The total number of game balls B shot into the game area 5a, calculated by all of the ball entry counters and the out counter, is the total number of game balls B used by the player. Therefore, by calculating the difference between this and the number of game balls B paid out to the player, the net increase in game balls B can be calculated, and this net increase in game balls B can be displayed on a specified display device.

In addition, in this embodiment, a game ball B that enters the ball inlet or outlet 1008 on the game board 5 is discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment of the game hall) through the ball outlet 629 provided in the main frame 4 (see Figure 94), and a frame-side outlet sensor 3037 is provided that can detect game balls B passing through the ball outlet 629. When this frame-side outlet sensor 3037 detects a game ball B that has passed through the ball outlet 629, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. Then, in the main control board 1310, after a game ball B enters the ball inlet or outlet 1008 on the game board 5, when the combined game balls B are discharged outside the pachinko machine 1, the frame-side outlet sensor 3037 detects the game ball B and adds it to the frame-side out counter. This frame-side out counter allows you to keep track of the number of game balls B that have entered the game area 5a.

In this embodiment, as described above, game balls B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 also pass through the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, and are released from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide section 627 of the base unit 620, and then are discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (the island equipment side of the gaming hall) through the discharged ball receiving section 628 and the ball discharge outlet 629, so that the frame side outlet sensor 3037 is configured to be able to detect not only game balls B shot into the gaming area 5a, but also game balls B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580. Here, considering the purpose of grasping the number of game balls B that have entered the game area 5a, it is desirable to exclude (invalidate) the number of game balls B that have been released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 and perform various calculations accordingly. Accordingly, in a configuration in which the frame-side outlet sensor 3037 detects game balls B that have been released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580, it is desirable to provide a separate ball removal detection sensor (not shown) upstream of the frame-side outlet sensor 3037, so that this ball removal detection sensor detects game balls B that have been released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580, and further to configure the system so that the number of game balls detected by the ball removal detection sensor is subtracted from the out counter. As a result, game balls B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 are detected by the ball removal detection sensor and first subtracted from the out number counter, and then detected by the frame side outlet sensor 3037 and added to the out number counter, so that the number of game balls B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is not reflected in the out number counter. In addition, this configuration does not cause any problems when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on and a game ball B is released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 (when the payout device 580 performs the ball removal action), as neither the ball removal detection sensor nor the frame side outlet sensor 3037 can perform detection itself.However, this configuration eliminates problems when the gaming machine 1 is powered on and a game ball B is released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 (when the payout device 580 performs the ball removal action), or when the gaming machine 1 is not powered on and a game ball B is released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 (when the payout device 580 performs the ball removal action), but the gaming machine 1 becomes powered on in the middle of the ball removal action. Furthermore, game balls B shot into the game area 5a and game balls B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 may be configured to be discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment of the game hall) through separate passages without merging, so that the frame side outlet sensor 3037 can detect only game balls B shot into the game area 5a. In such a configuration, there is no need for a configuration such as subtracting the number of game balls detected by the ball removal detection sensor from the out number counter.

As described above, the number of game balls B that have entered the game area 5a can be determined by the frame-side out counter. However, the total number of game balls B that have entered the game area 5a can also be calculated by adding up all of the in-ball counters and the out counter. In other words, when no game is being played and no game balls B have been entered into the game area 5a, the frame-side out counter will match the value obtained by adding up all of the in-ball counters and the out counter. On the other hand, when a game ball B has been entered into the game area 5a, after passing through the detection sensors installed in the inlet and outlet 1008, it passes through the frame-side out sensor 3037, which is a predetermined distance away. As a result, the value obtained by adding up all of the in-ball counters and the out counter will tend to be slightly higher than the frame-side out counter.

In this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs, whether the counter count and calculation are continued or stopped (halted) depends on whether the abnormality is minor or major. As shown in Figure 189 (A), when a minor abnormality occurs, the counter count and calculation are continued without being stopped (halted). Examples of such minor abnormalities include a state in which the upper tray 201 is full of game balls B and game ball B cannot be paid out from the payout device 580, or a state in which game ball B should be shot into the right area of the center device 2500 but is not shot to the right. In these states, a warning effect is executed to guide game ball B in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 or a warning effect to shoot to the right. Furthermore, in these states, when the door frame 3 and main frame 4 are not opened from the outer frame 2, game ball B cannot be manually inserted into the ball inlet or outlet 1008 on the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4. For this reason, if a minor abnormality occurs, the balls scored counter and outs counter will not be incremented by any illegal activity, and the counting and calculations on the counters will continue without interruption (stopping).

On the other hand, if a serious abnormality occurs, the counter additions and calculations are halted (stopped). An example of a serious abnormality is when the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. In these states, the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, making it possible to artificially insert game ball B into the ball inlet or ball outlet 1008 on the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. For this reason, if a serious abnormality occurs, the counter additions and calculations are halted (stopped) to prevent the ball in counter or ball out counter from increasing due to fraudulent activity.

In addition, if a serious abnormality occurs, the additions to the counters and calculations are halted (stopped), but the detection sensors installed at the ball inlet and outlet 1008 themselves detect the passage of game ball B. In addition, if a serious abnormality occurs, the values of counters such as the ball inlet counter and ball outlet counter before the occurrence, as well as the calculation results, are retained, and the additions to the counters and calculations are resumed after the serious abnormality is resolved, such as when the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2. In addition, if a serious abnormality occurs and the additions to the counters and calculations are halted (stopped), a halt effect is executed by displaying an image on a specified display device or outputting audio from a speaker to notify the user that the additions to the counters and calculations have been halted.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 189 (B), the additions to the out counter and calculations related to that out counter corresponding to detections by the left out sensor 3032 and the right out sensor 3033 continue without interruption (stopping) until a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the occurrence of a severe abnormality, and once the predetermined time has elapsed, the additions to the out counter and calculations related to that out counter are interrupted (stopped). As a result, when a severe abnormality occurs, such as the door frame 3 being released from the outer frame 2, the number of game balls B entering the outlet 1008 can be determined until the predetermined time has elapsed.

For example, if game balls B become grape-shaped and become jammed in game area 5a, normal game play will be impossible, and a hall staff member will open door frame 3 to remove the grape-shaped game balls B. However, there is a high possibility that the removed game balls B will flow directly into outlet 1008 at the bottom. Such grape-shaped game balls B would likely have been ejected from outlet 1008 if they had not become grape-shaped. In this regard, when door frame 3 is opened from outer frame 2 to remove grape-shaped game balls B, the addition to the out counter and calculations related to the out counter continue without interruption (stop) until a predetermined time has elapsed. Therefore, the number of grape-shaped game balls B that have flowed into outlet 1008 can be determined, and the reliability of information related to outlet 1008 can be improved. Furthermore, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the grape-shaped game ball B is unlikely to flow into the outlet 1008, and since it is suspected that the ball is being thrown into the outlet 1008 through fraudulent activity, the addition to the out counter and calculations related to the out counter are halted (stopped).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 189 (C), the increments to the out counter and calculations related to the out counter corresponding to detections by the left out sensor 3032 and the right out sensor 3033 continue without interruption (stopping) until a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the occurrence of a severe abnormality. However, if the left out sensor 3032 or the right out sensor 3033 detects a large number of game balls B consecutively in a short period of time, even before the predetermined time has elapsed, the increments to the out counter and calculations related to the out counter are interrupted (stopped) at that point. In such a case, it is highly likely that the grape-shaped game balls B were removed when the door frame 3 was opened, and more balls than the number expected to flow into the out port 1008 flowed into the out port 1008. This raises the suspicion that balls are being inserted into the out port 1008 through fraudulent activity, so the increments to the out counter and calculations related to the out counter are interrupted (stopped).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 189 (D), when a severe abnormality occurs and the door frame 3 is opened, the increments to the out counter corresponding to the detection by the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033 and the calculations related to that out counter continue without interruption (stopping) for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) from the time the door frame 3 is opened. However, when the main body frame 4 is opened, the increments to the out counter and the calculations related to that out counter are interrupted (stopped). This is because, while the door frame 3 is opened for the purpose of removing grape-shaped game balls B from the play area 5a, the main body frame 4 is opened, and does not need to be opened for the purpose of removing grape-shaped game balls B from the play area 5a. In other words, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is opened for a different purpose, such as removing a ball jam behind the pachinko machine 1, and therefore the increments to the out counter and the calculations related to that out counter are interrupted (stopped).

As described above, in this embodiment, after game ball B enters the ball inlet or outlet 1008 provided on the game board 5, the frame side outlet sensor 3037 detects game ball B when the combined game ball B is discharged outside the pachinko machine 1. However, as shown in Figure 189 (E), with regard to the addition to the frame side out number counter corresponding to detection by the frame side outlet sensor 3037 and the calculation related to that frame side out number counter, when a serious abnormality occurs, the addition to the frame side out number counter and the calculation related to that frame side out number counter are discontinued (stopped). For this reason, when a hall staff member opens the door frame 3 and removes grape-shaped game balls B, the out counters corresponding to the detections by the left out sensor 3032 and right out sensor 3033 are incremented for a predetermined period of time, while the frame-side out counter corresponding to the detection by the frame-side out sensor 3037 is not incremented. Therefore, the number of grape-shaped game balls B that entered when the door frame 3 was opened can be determined from the difference between the value obtained by adding up all of the in-ball counters and the out counter and the value of the frame-side out counter. The number of grape-shaped game balls B that entered can be displayed on a predetermined display device as information about the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, as described above, when no game is being played and no game ball B has been shot into the game area 5a, the frame-side out counter will match the value obtained by adding together all of the in-ball counters and the out counter. On the other hand, when game ball B has been shot into the game area 5a, after game ball B passes through the detection sensors installed at the inlet and outlet 1008, it passes through the frame-side out sensor 3037, which is a predetermined distance away. As a result, the value obtained by adding together all of the in-ball counters and the out counter will be slightly higher than the frame-side out counter. In this way, as long as game play is being played normally, the value obtained by adding together all of the in-ball counters and the out counter will not differ by more than a predetermined number from the frame-side out counter. Therefore, by monitoring whether a difference of more than this predetermined number has occurred, it is possible to determine whether game play is being played normally.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 190, if the sum of all the in-ball counters and the out-counter differs by a predetermined number or more from the frame-side out-counter, it is determined that a special abnormality has occurred, and the counter additions and calculations are halted (stopped). Furthermore, when a special abnormality has occurred and the counter additions and calculations have been halted, a halt effect is executed to notify the player that the counter additions and calculations have been halted by displaying an image on a specified display device or outputting audio from a speaker. Furthermore, if the sum of all the in-ball counters and the out-counter differs by a predetermined number or more from the frame-side out-counter, it is possible that, for example, an object other than game ball B has been passed through the in-ball or out-ball 1008 on the game board 5 through fraudulent means, or that a ball jam has occurred between the time game ball B passes through the detection sensor at the in-ball or out-ball 1008 and the time it passes through the frame-side out-ball sensor 3037. As a result, any irregularities or problems such as ball jamming can be detected early on, improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, a state in which the door frame 3 or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 is given as an example of a severe abnormality, but this is not limited to this. Even if the door frame 3 or the main frame 4 is not open from the outer frame 2, if a situation is detected in which it is assumed that play is proceeding through fraudulent activity, the additions to the various counters and calculations may be suspended (stopped). For example, if a level of magnetism that attracts the game ball B is detected near the play area 5a, or if a predetermined vibration (impact) is detected on the play area 5a, it may be determined that normal play is not being performed, and the additions to the various counters and calculations may be suspended (stopped). Furthermore, although the additions and calculations to the various counters are halted (stopped) in both cases where unauthorized magnetism or vibrations are detected when the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, and when the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is not open from the outer frame 2, it may be determined that unauthorized magnetism or vibrations are detected when the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is not open from the outer frame 2, and the progress of the game, including the release of game ball B, may be immediately stopped.

[18-1. Outlet detection when multiple outlets are provided]
As an embodiment different from the above, a second outlet 1013 is provided on the upstream side and a third outlet 1014 is provided on the midstream side in addition to the outlet 1008 provided on the downstream side of the game area 5a, and a detection sensor capable of detecting the game ball B discharged from each outlet is provided. This will be described with reference to Figures 191 and 192. Figure 191 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the second outlet 1013 and the third outlet 1014 are provided in addition to the outlet 1008. Figure 192 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution state of calculations when the second outlet 1013 and the third outlet 1014 are provided in addition to the outlet 1008.

As shown in Figure 191, a second outlet 1013 capable of discharging game ball B outside the game area 5a is provided between the entrance at the top end of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance at the top end of the second guide passage 2522. In this configuration, when game ball B is hit with enough strength to enter the upstream space portion 2505 and hit the impact stop portion 1006 (so-called right-handed hit), there is a high probability that it will enter the first guide passage 2521, but a portion of the hit game ball B will enter the second outlet 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, if game ball B is hit with enough strength to enter the upstream space 2505 and not hit the impact stopper 1006 (slightly weaker than a right-handed hit), there is a high probability that it will enter the second guide passage 2522, but part of the game ball B that is hit will enter the second outlet 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. In other words, part of game ball B that is hit to enter the upstream space 2505 will enter the second outlet 1013.

Furthermore, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, to the right of the normal winning opening 2003, there is a first opening 2431 of the attacka right passage 2430. A third outlet 1014 separate from the outlet 1008 is provided in the attacka right passage 2430, and game ball B entering through the first opening 2431 is discharged from the third outlet 1014 outside the game area 5a.

The effect of providing the second outlet 1013 around the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 in the guide passage group 2520, and the effect of providing the third outlet 1014 around the exits thereof, have been described in detail above. However, by providing such second outlet 1013 and third outlet 1014, it is possible to prevent balls from clogging inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

In this embodiment, a second outlet sensor 3035 is provided that can detect a game ball B being discharged to the outside from the second outlet 1013, and a third outlet sensor 3036 that can detect a game ball B being discharged to the outside from the third outlet 1014. When the second outlet sensor 3035 detects a game ball B that has entered the second outlet 1013, its detection signal is input to the main control board 1310, while when the third outlet sensor 3036 detects a game ball B that has entered the third outlet 1014, its detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. On the main control board 1310, when game ball B is discharged to the outside from the second outlet 1013, the second outlet sensor 3035 detects game ball B and adds it to the second number of outs counter, while when game ball B is discharged to the outside from the third outlet 1014, the third outlet sensor 3036 detects game ball B and adds it to the third number of outs counter. This second number of outs counter is used to determine the number of game balls B that have entered the second outlet 1013, while the third number of outs counter is used to determine the number of game balls B that have entered the third outlet 1014.

The main control board 1310 performs predetermined calculations using not only the incoming ball counter and out counter, but also the second out counter and third out counter. As a specific example, by adding up the out counter, second out counter, and third out counter, it is possible to calculate the number of game balls B that were shot into the game area 5a and were ejected to the outside without entering an entry hole such as the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 on the game board 5. Furthermore, by adding up the incoming ball counter, out counter, second out counter, and third out counter, it is possible to calculate the total number of game balls B that were shot into the game area 5a.

In this embodiment, when game balls B are shot into the right area of the game area 5a, the system is designed so that more than a predetermined number of balls per unit time (for example, more than 30 balls out of 100 balls that can be shot per minute) do not enter the second outlet 1013. For this reason, in the time-saving mode or jackpot game mode, the second out number counter is used to monitor whether the number of game balls B that enter the second outlet 1013 per unit time is more than a predetermined number, and if the number is more than the predetermined number per unit time, it is determined that normal right-hand play will be difficult.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 192 (A), when the number of game balls B entering the second outlet 1013 per unit time exceeds a predetermined number, a warning effect is executed by displaying an image on a predetermined display device or outputting audio from a speaker to warn that it will be difficult to play normally with the right hand. This warning effect is then terminated when the number of game balls B entering the second outlet 1013 per unit time falls below a predetermined number.

For example, if the number of game balls B entering the second outlet 1013 per unit time is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, there will be fewer opportunities for game balls B to enter the ball entry ports downstream of the second outlet 1013 in the right-hand area of the game area 5a (normal entry port 2003, first start port 2002, second start port 2004, big entry port 2005, special entry port 2006), creating an unfavorable situation for the player. In this regard, if the number of game balls B entering the second outlet 1013 per unit time is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, it is possible to suspect that the game board 5 has been tampered with to make it easier for game balls B to enter the second outlet 1013. As a result, conditions that make it difficult to play right-handed can be detected early on, improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In the above, during the time-saving mode or jackpot mode, the number of game balls B that enter the second outlet 1013 per unit time is monitored to see if it is equal to or exceeds a predetermined number. However, it is also possible to calculate the ratio between the number of game balls B that enter the second outlet 1013 per unit time and the number of game balls B that enter the inlets and outlets downstream of the second outlet 1013 (outlet 1008, third outlet 1014), and monitor whether this ratio is equal to or exceeds a predetermined rate. Even in such cases, if the rate at which game balls B enter the second outlet 1013 per unit time is too high, it can be determined that normal right-hand play is difficult to perform.

Similarly, when game balls B are shot into the right area of the game area 5a, the system is designed so that more than a predetermined number of balls per unit time (for example, more than 30 balls out of 100 balls that can be shot per minute) do not enter the third outlet 1014. For this reason, in the time-saving mode or jackpot game mode, the third out number counter is used to monitor whether the number of game balls B that enter the third outlet 1014 per unit time is more than a predetermined number, and if the number is more than the predetermined number per unit time, it is determined that normal right-hand play will be difficult.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 192 (B), when the number of game balls B entering the third outlet 1014 per unit time exceeds a predetermined number, a warning effect is executed by displaying an image on a predetermined display device or outputting audio from a speaker to warn that it will be difficult to play normally with the right hand. This warning effect is then terminated when the number of game balls B entering the third outlet 1014 per unit time falls below a predetermined number.

For example, if the number of game balls B entering the third outlet 1014 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time, there will be fewer opportunities for game balls B to enter the ball entry ports (normal entry port 2003, first start port 2002, second start port 2004, and large entry port 2005) downstream of the third outlet 1014 in the right-hand area of the game area 5a, creating a disadvantageous situation for the player. In this regard, if the number of game balls B entering the third outlet 1014 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time, it is possible to suspect that the game board 5 has been tampered with to make it easier for game balls B to enter the third outlet 1014. As a result, it is possible to detect early on when conditions make it difficult to play normally from the right, thereby improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In the above, in the time-saving mode or jackpot mode, the number of game balls B that enter the third outlet 1014 per unit time is monitored to see if it is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. However, it is also possible to calculate the ratio between the number of game balls B that enter the third outlet 1014 per unit time and the number of game balls B that enter the inlets downstream of the third outlet 1014 or the outlet 1008, and monitor whether this ratio is equal to or greater than a predetermined rate. Even in such cases, if the rate at which game balls B enter the third outlet 1014 per unit time is too high, it can be determined that normal right-hand play is difficult to perform.

In this embodiment, when the number of game balls B entering the second outlet 1013 or the third outlet 1014 per unit time in the time-saving mode or jackpot mode exceeds a predetermined number, the increments to the second and third out counters and the calculations related to these counters are continued. However, as in the above embodiment, when the number of game balls B entering the second and third outlets 1013 or 1014 exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred and the increments to the second and third out counters and the calculations related to these counters may be stopped. With this configuration, even if game balls B are entered into the second and third outlets 1013 or 1014 through fraudulent activity, the second and third out counters will not be incremented, and the reliability of information related to the second and third outlets 1013 or 1014 can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, under normal conditions, game ball B should be shot into the left area of the game area 5a. However, if game ball B is shot into the right area of the game area 5a, game ball B may enter the second outlet 1013 or third outlet 1014 in that right area. For this reason, under normal conditions, when game ball B is detected by the second outlet sensor 3035 or the third outlet sensor 3036, an instruction to change from right-handed to left-handed is displayed by an image on a specified display device or audio output from a speaker.

[19. Light emission history after light emission using light guide plate]
In this embodiment, the display device 1600 displays a varying decorative pattern based on a varying pattern transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. During this varying display, the light guide plate 3102 provided in front of the display area of the display device 1600 is illuminated multiple times, and the light color of the light guide plate 3102 is gradually changed over the multiple times, thereby enabling the execution of a light-emitting effect that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot for the varying display. Furthermore, when the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated, the multiple decorative bodies 3210 provided around the display area of the display device 1600 (around the opening 3010a of the back box 3100) are illuminated in the same light color as the light guide plate 3102. Even after the illumination of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, a history effect can be executed in which the multiple decorative bodies 3210 continue to emit light in the previous light color of the light guide plate 3102 as a history of the light color of the light guide plate 3102.

Specifically, when game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 (the starting condition is met), a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command during the command analysis process of step S601, it determines whether or not to execute a light-emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 based on the variation pattern identified from the variation pattern command. Furthermore, if it is decided to execute a light-emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, it references the light-emitting color pattern table based on the variation pattern identified from the variation pattern command and determines one of multiple light-emitting color patterns in which the light-emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 in the light-emitting effect is set multiple times.

The light guide plate 3102 can illuminate the first pattern 3102a (see Figure 136) in white, green, blue, or red by changing the light color of the multiple LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 located above it. In a lighting effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated three times at predetermined timings in the light color set in the light color pattern. The time the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated at each timing is very short (e.g., less than one second), and the time the light guide plate 3102 is off between illumination and the next illumination is longer. The light guide plate 3102 is illuminated only once at each timing, but it may also be illuminated multiple times at each timing.

In addition, the light-emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is performed during the normal fluctuation of the decorative pattern while it is being displayed, before a reach is formed, but it may also be performed during the reach effect after the reach is formed.For example, one to three of the three times the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated for decoration may be performed during the reach effect after the reach is formed.

In addition, the light guide plate 3102 can illuminate the first pattern 3102a by illuminating multiple LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 located above it, while it can illuminate the second pattern 3102b by illuminating multiple LEDs mounted on the second pattern substrate 3104 located on the left side when viewed from the front. However, in the illumination effect using the light guide plate 3102, the first pattern 3102a is illuminated. This allows the viewer to clearly understand that the three illuminations of the first pattern 3102a in the illumination effect are a continuous effect.

Next, the luminous color pattern table in which the luminous color pattern of the light guide plate 3102 is set will be described with reference to Figure 193. The luminous color pattern table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. Figure 193 shows the luminous color pattern table in which the luminous color pattern of the light guide plate 3102 is set.

As described above, the luminous color pattern table has multiple types of luminous color patterns set, and these luminous color patterns set how the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 changes the number of times the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated. Specifically, as shown in Figure 193, the luminous color pattern table has luminous patterns set so that the light guide plate 3102 can be changed twice after being illuminated and decorated with a specified luminous color.

The light guide plate 3102, which is set to the light-emitting color pattern, is set to illuminate in one of four colors: white, green, blue, or red. When determining the light-emitting color pattern from the light-emitting color pattern table, the light guide plate 3102's light-emitting color is set to change to the final color in the order of white → green → blue → red, resulting in an increased likelihood of winning a jackpot. In other words, when the lottery result identified from the variation pattern is a jackpot, a light-emitting color pattern with a high likelihood of winning a jackpot (e.g., red) is determined as the final light-emitting color of the light guide plate 3102. When the lottery result identified from the variation pattern is a miss (miss, close miss), a light-emitting color pattern with a low likelihood of winning a jackpot (e.g., white) is determined as the final light-emitting color of the light guide plate 3102. This increases the player's anticipation of a jackpot when the final light-emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated in a color with a high likelihood of winning a jackpot.

The light emitting color pattern does not change the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 in the reverse order of white → green → blue → red, and is set so that the next time the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated after being illuminated, the illuminated color will be maintained or will become an illuminated color with a high probability of a jackpot. This means that even if the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated with an illuminated color with a low probability of a jackpot, there is still a possibility that it will change to an illuminated color with a high probability of a jackpot as long as the three illumination effects have not ended, and the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 can be focused on with anticipation until the illumination effect ends.

Furthermore, the light emitting color pattern does not necessarily have to change in the order of green → blue → red after the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with white light; it can also be set to start with a light emitting color other than white, or to skip one or more light emitting colors and change to the next light emitting color (for example, white → red). This makes it impossible to predict which light emitting color the next light emitting color will be, even if the light emitting plate 3102 is decorated with a light emitting color that has a low expectation of a jackpot, and allows the viewer to focus their attention on the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 with anticipation until the light emitting effect ends.

Next, the multiple decorative bodies 3210 arranged around the display area of the performance display device 1600 will be described with reference to Figure 194. As described above, the rear performance unit 3200 has multiple hemispherical decorative bodies 3210 that surround the opening 3010a of the rear box 3010, i.e., surround the display area of the performance display area 1600, when viewed from the front. Specifically, as shown in Figure 194, four decorative bodies 3210 are arranged vertically on each side of the display area of the performance display area 1600. In addition, behind these decorative bodies 3210 is provided a decorative substrate on which multiple LEDs capable of emitting light forward are mounted. Furthermore, the multiple decorative bodies 3210 can be illuminated in white, green, blue, or red, similar to the illuminated decoration of the light guide plate 3102.

When the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated in a light-emitting effect, the multiple decorative bodies 3210 arranged around the display area of the effect display device 1600 are made to emit light in the same luminous color as the light guide plate 3102. Furthermore, in a light-emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated three times at predetermined timings, and the illumination of the multiple decorative bodies 3210 is maintained even after the illumination of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off at each timing. In this way, when a light-emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is performed, a history effect is executed in which the multiple decorative bodies 3210 continue to emit light in the previous luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 as a history of the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102.

Specifically, the first or second time the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated in a light-emitting performance, the multiple decorative bodies 3210 are illuminated in the same luminous color as the light guide plate 3102, and the illumination of the multiple decorative bodies 3210 is maintained until the next time the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated. The third time the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated in a light-emitting performance, the multiple decorative bodies 3210 are illuminated in the same luminous color as the light guide plate 3102, and the illumination of the multiple decorative bodies 3210 is maintained until the changing display of the decorative pattern ends after the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated. As a result, the time that the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated at one time is short (for example, less than one second), but by maintaining the illumination of the multiple decorative bodies 3210 in the same luminous color as the light guide plate 3102, even if the luminous color is overlooked when illuminating and decorating the light guide plate 3102, the luminous color can be ascertained after the light guide plate 3102 has been illuminated and decorated.

The number of decorative bodies 3210 corresponds to the number of luminous colors that can illuminate the light guide plate 3102 for the light-emitting effect. The number of luminous bodies 3210 varies depending on the luminous colors of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative bodies 3210, and the higher the luminous colors of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative bodies 3210 that are expected to result in a jackpot, the greater the number of luminous bodies 3210 that illuminate, starting from the bottom of the multiple decorative bodies 3210. Specifically, when the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 that is used for the light-emitting effect is white, which is the luminous color with the lowest jackpot expectation, one lower decorative body 3210a of the four decorative bodies 3210 on each side of the display area of the effect display region 1600 is set to illuminate in white. Furthermore, when the light guide plate 3102 emits light in green, the two lower decorative bodies 3210a and 3210b are set to emit light in green. When the light guide plate 3102 emits light in blue, the three lower decorative bodies 3210a to 3210c are set to emit light in blue. When the light guide plate 3102 emits light in red, which is the color associated with the highest likelihood of a jackpot, all four decorative bodies 3210a to 3210d are set to emit light in red. This means that even when the likelihood of a jackpot cannot be determined from the light colors of the light guide plate 3102 and decorative bodies 3210, the likelihood of a jackpot can be easily determined from the number of illuminating decorative bodies 3210.

The multiple decorative bodies 3210 are positioned behind the light guide plate 3102, allowing them to emit light forward. When the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated in a light-emitting effect, the multiple decorative bodies 3210 emit light in the same color as the light guide plate 3102. However, because the multiple decorative bodies 3210 are positioned behind the light guide plate 3102, light is irradiated onto the light guide plate 3102 not only by the multiple LEDs that illuminate and decorate the first pattern 3102a on the light guide plate 3102, but also by the emitting multiple decorative bodies 3210. This further emphasizes the first pattern 3102a illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102, making the effect using the light guide plate 3102 stand out even more.

In addition, the light-emitting effects using the light guide plate 3102 are executed during the normal fluctuations of the decorative symbols while they are being displayed, before a reach is formed. However, other preview effects using the effect display device 1600 are not started while the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is in progress. In other words, other preview effects using the effect display device 1600 are started when the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is not in progress. As a result, although the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is located in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the visibility of the other preview effects is not obstructed by the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102, and even if other preview effects start, they will not be missed. In other words, the player can clearly distinguish between the light-emitting effects that illuminate the light guide plate 3102 and the other preview effects.

Next, a specific example of a lighting effect using the light guide plate 3102 and multiple decorative bodies 3210 will be described with reference to Figure 195. Figure 195 shows a specific example of a lighting effect using the light guide plate 3102 and multiple decorative bodies 3210.

Figure 195 illustrates a case where a light color pattern has been determined in which the light color used to illuminate and decorate the light guide plate 3102 in a light-emitting effect changes from white to green to red. First, as shown in Figure 195 (A), the display area of the effect display device 1600 begins to display a changing decorative pattern. Then, as shown in Figure 195 (B), when the first time comes to illuminate and decorate the light guide plate 3102 in a light-emitting effect, the second pattern 3102b is illuminated in white on the light guide plate 3102, and of the four decorative bodies 3210 on each side of the display area of the effect display area 1600, the lower decorative body 3210a is illuminated, and the illuminated color is white, the same as the light guide plate 3102. As shown in Figure 195 (C), the luminous decoration of the light guide plate 3102 turns off after a short time (for example, less than one second), but the decorative body 3210a, which is already emitting white light, continues to emit that white light until the second timing comes.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 195(D), when the second timing arrives for the light guide plate 3102 to be illuminated and decorated in the light-emitting effect, the second pattern 3102b is illuminated in green on the light guide plate 3102, and of the four decorative bodies 3210 on each side of the display area of the effect display area 1600, the lower two decorative bodies 3210a, 3210b are increased to emit light, but the emitted light color is green, the same as the light guide plate 3102. Then, as shown in Figure 195(E), the illuminated decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off after a short time (for example, less than one second), but the decorative bodies 3210, 3210b, which are already emitting green light, continue to emit that green light until the third timing arrives.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 195(F), when the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated for the third time in the illumination effect, the second pattern 3102b is illuminated in red on the light guide plate 3102, and of the four decorative bodies 3210 on each side of the display area of the effect display area 1600, all four decorative bodies 3210a to 3210d are illuminated, but the illumination color is increased to red, the same as that of the light guide plate 3102. Then, as shown in Figure 195(G), the illumination of the light guide plate 3102 goes out after a short time (for example, less than one second), but the decorative bodies 3210 to 3210d that are already illuminating in red continue to emit red light until the display of the changing decorative patterns is completed, as shown in Figure 195(H).

In this embodiment, when the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated for the lighting effect, the multiple decorative bodies 3210 emit light in the same luminous color as the light guide plate 3102. However, instead of emitting light at that point, the multiple light emitters may emit light in the luminous color just before the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated from the point at which the light guide plate 3102's illumination is turned off. Even in such a case, the luminous color can be determined after the light guide plate 3102's illumination is turned off.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of illuminated decorative bodies 3210 varies depending on the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210, and the more illuminated decorative bodies 3210, the higher the expected jackpot. However, it may also be possible to indicate the number of times the light guide plate 3102 has already been illuminated out of the three times it is illuminated. For example, in a light-emitting effect, the first time the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated, the lower decorative body 3210a of the four decorative bodies 3210 on each side of the display area of the effect display region 1600 is illuminated; the second time, the lower two decorative bodies 3210a and 3210b are illuminated; and the third time, the lower three decorative bodies 3210a to 3210c are illuminated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated three times at predetermined times during the light-emitting effect, but it is also possible to provide a pattern in which the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated the first time but not the second and third times, or a pattern in which the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated and decorated the first and second times but not the third time. In such cases, it is not known how many times the light guide plate 3102 will be illuminated during the light-emitting effect, and attention can be drawn to how many opportunities there are for the light-emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 to change.

In addition, in this embodiment, while the decorative pattern is being displayed, a light-emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot for the decorative pattern's changing display. However, the light-emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 may be executed across multiple changes from the time when game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 (the starting condition is met) until the decorative pattern is displayed changing due to the ball entering. For example, when game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 (the starting condition is met), a pre-determination command is sent from the main control board 1310. Upon receiving the pre-determination command, the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not to execute a light-emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, and if a light-emitting effect is to be executed, determines the light color of the light guide plate 3102, based on the change pattern identified from the pre-determination command. Furthermore, in a light-emitting effect using such a light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 can be configured to emit light multiple times at predetermined times during each of the multiple variations, and the multiple light emitters can continue to emit light in the previous emission color of the light guide plate 3102 even after the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off. In such a case, it is possible to draw attention with anticipation to how the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 changes over the multiple variations until the light-emitting effect ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the light-emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, multiple LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 located above it are illuminated to illuminate and decorate the first pattern 3102a. However, if a malfunction or other problem occurs and the multiple LEDs stop emitting light, the light guide plate 3102 will not be illuminated at the timing it should be, and the expected jackpot indicated by the luminous color cannot be determined. In this regard, after the timing for illuminating the light guide plate 3102, the multiple decorative bodies 3210 emit light in the same luminous color as the light guide plate 3102. Therefore, even if the light guide plate 3210 cannot be illuminated, the expected jackpot can be determined from the luminous color of the multiple decorative bodies 3210.

In addition, in this embodiment, if an abnormality (error) occurs, a warning effect is executed over other effects to notify the player of the abnormality. For example, if a magnetic field strong enough to attract the game ball B is detected near the play area 5a, or if a predetermined vibration (impact) is detected in the play area 5a, it is determined that normal play is not being performed, and a warning effect is executed. In this regard, if an abnormality (error) occurs when the light-emitting effect is executed and the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated, the warning effect is prioritized, and the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 and the illumination of the multiple decorative bodies 3210 are not performed. However, once the abnormality is resolved after the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated (before the display of the decorative pattern changes ends), the illumination of the multiple decorative bodies 3210 begins. In this way, even when the warning effect is executed over the light-emitting effect, the expected probability of a jackpot can be determined from the illuminated color of the multiple decorative bodies 3210 after the abnormality is resolved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the expected probability of a jackpot is indicated by the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 and the luminous color of the multiple decorative bodies 3210 in the light-emitting and history effects. However, the light-emitting and history effects may be executed as the setting suggestion effects described above, and the setting value may be suggested by the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 and the luminous color of the multiple decorative bodies 3210. In such a configuration, for example, when determining the luminous color pattern from the luminous color pattern table, the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 may be set to indicate a high setting value in the order of white → green → blue → red as the final change in color. In other words, as a high setting suggestion effect among the setting suggestion effects, a light-emitting pattern in which the final luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 is red may be executed, and as a low setting suggestion effect, a light-emitting pattern in which the final luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 is white may be executed. In this way, when the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 and the luminous color of the multiple decorative bodies 3210 are illuminated with a color suggesting a high setting value, the player's expectations for a high setting value (setting value 6) may be heightened.

[20. Image presentation similar to the luminous decoration of light guide plates]
In this embodiment, a light guide plate 3102 is provided in front of the display area of the performance display device 1600, and not only is a predetermined pattern illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102, but a pattern that is visually similar to the pattern illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, making it possible to execute an imitation performance that is visually perceived as if there were multiple light guide plates. In this imitation performance, the pattern illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the pattern displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 are displayed alternately, and by finally displaying one of the patterns, the reach performance that is executed thereafter will be different.

Specifically, when game ball B enters first start hole 2002 or second start hole 2004 (start conditions are met), a variation pattern command is transmitted from main control board 1310. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, upon receiving the variation pattern command in the command analysis process of step S601, a variation pattern is identified from the variation pattern command. If a variation pattern for executing the first reach effect is identified, the image illuminated and decorated on light guide plate 3102 and the image displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally, an imitation effect is executed in which the image illuminates and decorates on light guide plate 3102, thereby proceeding to the first reach effect. On the other hand, when a variation pattern for executing a second reach effect is identified, the image illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are displayed alternately, and finally an imitation effect is executed in which an image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, after which the game progresses to the second reach effect.

The above-mentioned imitation effects are executed during the normal fluctuations of the decorative pattern while it is being displayed, before a reach is formed. Furthermore, among the reach effects, the first reach effect is set to have a higher probability of winning than the second reach effect. As a result, in the imitation effects during normal fluctuations, if the light guide plate 3102 is finally illuminated with decorative patterns, the effect will progress to the first reach effect, which has a higher probability of winning, and this draws attention to whether or not the light guide plate 3102 will ultimately be illuminated with decorative patterns.

Next, the images displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the performance display device 1600 when the imitation performance is being performed will be described with reference to Figure 196. Figure 196 shows the images displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the performance display device 1600 when the imitation performance is being performed.

As shown in Figure 196 (A), when the imitation effect is being performed, the light guide plate 3102 displays the word "CHANCE!" in the center as the second pattern 3102b, with an effect pattern illuminated around it. The light guide plate 3102 can illuminate the first pattern 3102a by illuminating multiple LEDs mounted on the first pattern board 3103 located above it, while the light guide plate 3102 can illuminate the second pattern 3102b by illuminating multiple LEDs mounted on the second pattern board 3104 located on the left side when viewed from the front. However, in the imitation effect using the light guide plate 3102, only the illuminated decoration of the second pattern 3102b is used.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 196 (B), while the imitation performance is being performed, the display area of the performance display device 1600 displays the word "LUCKY!" in the center with an effect image displayed around it as imitation pattern 1600a. Note that although it is possible to display moving images in the display area of the performance display device 1600, while the imitation performance is being performed, a still image such as the imitation pattern 1600a described above is displayed.

Furthermore, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the letters "CHANCE!" illuminated as the second pattern 3102b, while the display area of the performance display device 1600 displays the letters "LUCKY!" as the imitation pattern 1600a, but the letters in the imitation pattern 1600a have the same line thickness, font type, and size as the letters in the second pattern 3102b. In this way, in the imitation performance, since the shapes of the letters are the same, it is difficult to tell whether the light guide plate 3102 or the performance display device 1600 is being used.

Furthermore, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with an illuminated effect pattern as the second pattern 3102b, while the display area of the performance display device 1600 displays an effect pattern as the imitation pattern 1600a, but the effect pattern that is part of the imitation pattern 1600a is the same as the effect pattern that is part of the second pattern 3102b. In this way, the imitation performance displays a common effect pattern as part of each pattern, making it difficult to tell whether the light guide plate 3102 or the performance display device 1600 is being used.

Furthermore, the second pattern 3102b is illuminated in a single color by multiple LEDs on the light guide plate 3102, while the imitation pattern 1600a is similarly displayed in a single color in the display area of the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, when the second pattern 3102b is illuminated on the light guide plate 3102, the illumination of the second pattern 3102b varies depending on the distance from the multiple LEDs, and the display area of the performance display device 1600 also displays the imitation pattern 1600a in a single color. Furthermore, when the second pattern 3102b is illuminated on the light guide plate 3102, a black image that does not display any information is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, but when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, a black image is displayed as the background image. In this way, in the imitation performance, the overall visual appearance of the images is the same, making it difficult to tell whether the light guide plate 3102 or the performance display device 1600 is being used.

In addition, the light guide plate 3102 is positioned in front of the display area of the performance display device 1600, and is configured to be larger than the display area of the performance display device 1600. However, the area on the light guide plate 3102 where the second pattern 3102b is illuminated and decorated is approximately the same as the area on the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed. In this way, in the imitation performance, since the areas where the patterns are displayed are approximately the same, it is difficult to tell whether the light guide plate 3102 or the performance display device 1600 is being used.

In addition, the imitation effect alternates between the second image 3102b, illuminated by the light guide plate 3102, and the imitation image 1600a, displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the display time for each is the same. During the imitation effect, a composite effect is executed by outputting a predetermined sound from the speaker and operating components around the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 in a predetermined manner (e.g., lighting up lamps on the main frame 4 or game board 5, or operating movable components) when the second image 3102b and the imitation image 1600a are displayed. Regardless of the timing at which either image is displayed, a common effect is executed as part of the composite effect. However, when the second image 3102b and the imitation image 1600a are displayed, the lamps on the main frame 4 or game board 5 are lit, but the illuminating colors may be different. In this way, in the imitation performance, there is no difference in performance between when the second pattern 3102b is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, making it difficult to tell whether the light guide plate 3102 or the performance display device 1600 is being used.

Next, a specific example of a performance using the light guide plate 3102 and the performance display device 1600 when performing an imitation performance will be described with reference to Figure 197. Figure 197 shows a specific example of a performance using the light guide plate 3102 and the performance display device 1600 when performing an imitation performance.

Figure 197 illustrates a case in which a variation pattern is determined to execute either a chance reach effect as the first reach effect or a lucky reach effect as the second reach effect, and an imitation effect is executed before executing either of these reach effects. First, as shown in Figure 197(A), the display area of the effect display device 1600 begins to display a varying decorative pattern. Then, as shown in Figure 197(B), when the imitation effect begins, the light guide plate 3102 displays the second image 3102b, with the word "CHANCE!" in the center and an effect image around it illuminated in red for a predetermined time (e.g., less than one second). Then, as shown in Figure 197(C), when the illumination decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the imitation image 1600a, with the word "LUCKY!" in the center and an effect image around it illuminated in blue for a predetermined time (e.g., less than one second). The display time for which the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 is the same as the display time for which the second pattern 3102b is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102.

As described above, the second pattern 3102b is illuminated in red on the light guide plate 3102, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the performance display device 1600. In this way, in the imitation performance, when the second pattern 3102b is illuminated on the light guide plate 3102 and when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, it is difficult to tell whether the light guide plate 3102 or the performance display device 1600 is being used, but it is possible to tell from the display color whether the second pattern 3102b or the imitation pattern 1600a is being displayed.

In addition, in the imitation performance, the second pattern 3102b illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 are alternately displayed multiple times (for example, five times). After multiple repetitions, as shown in Figure 197 (D), the display area of the performance display device 1600 is blacked out and a black image displaying no information is displayed. This allows the viewer to focus on which of the second pattern 3102b illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 or the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 will stop as a result of the imitation performance.

As shown in Figure 197(E), if the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out and then the second pattern 3102b is illuminated in red on the light guide plate 3102, a reach will be formed by the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then the reach effect corresponding to the second pattern 3102b will progress to a chance reach effect (first reach effect).On the other hand, as shown in Figure 197(F), if the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out and then the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue on the display area of the effect display device 1600, then a reach will be formed by the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then the reach effect corresponding to the imitation pattern 1600a will progress to a lucky reach effect (second reach effect). Furthermore, the display time for which the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 in Figure 197 (F) is the same as the display time (e.g., 3 seconds) for which the second pattern 3102b is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 in Figure 197 (E).

In this embodiment, the characters and effect images are displayed using the second image 3102b illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation image 1600a displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600. However, it is sufficient to display images with similar visual appearances so that specific elements match; for example, it is also possible to display images of characters with similar styles.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the display area of the performance display device 1600 is blacked out, either the second image 3102b illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 or the imitation image 1600a displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 is stopped. However, a pattern may be set in which neither the second image 3102b nor the imitation image 1600a is displayed after the display area of the performance display device 1600 is blacked out, and the game does not progress to either the first reach effect or the second reach effect. In such a case, it is possible to draw even more attention to the result that is notified after the display area of the performance display device 1600 is blacked out as a result of the imitation effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the imitation performance begins, the second pattern 3102b is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102, and the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600. However, a pattern may be set that starts with the display of the imitation pattern 1600a. In the imitation performance, the second pattern 3102b is illuminated and decorated in red on the light guide plate 3102, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the performance display device 1600. However, a pattern may be set that uses a different color when some or all of the patterns are illuminated. In this way, when an imitation effect is performed using a display or color that is different from the normal display, by setting the expectation of a jackpot for the varying display of the decorative pattern to be higher, it is possible to draw attention not only to which of the second pattern 3102b illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 stops, but also to the content of the effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when an imitation effect is performed, the second pattern 3102b illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are displayed alternately. However, effects using the light guide plate 3102 can also be performed in addition to imitation effects. For example, as an effect other than an imitation effect using the light guide plate 3102, it is possible to perform an effect in which the second pattern 3102b is suddenly illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 without displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the imitation effect, the second image 3102b is illuminated in red on the light guide plate 3102, while the imitation image 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, in addition to such patterns, a pattern is also set in which the colors are reversed, such that the second image 3102b is illuminated in blue on the light guide plate 3102, while the imitation image 1600a is displayed in red in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In these patterns, red indicates a higher likelihood of a jackpot than blue. For example, when the second image 3102b is illuminated in red on the light guide plate 3102, it indicates a higher likelihood of a jackpot than when it is illuminated in blue. Similarly, when the imitation image 1600a is displayed in red in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it indicates a higher likelihood of a jackpot than when it is displayed in blue. In this way, in the imitation performance, it is possible to display both the second image 3102b and the imitation image 1600a in blue and red, making it difficult to tell whether the light guide plate 3102 or the performance display device 1600 is being used.

In addition, in this embodiment, the imitation effect alternates between the second image 3102b illuminated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation image 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the final display of either image suggests the subsequent reach effect. However, the setting suggestion effect described above may be configured to suggest the setting value by executing the imitation effect and finally displaying either image. In such a configuration, for example, as a high setting suggestion effect among the setting suggestion effects, an imitation effect may be executed in which the second image 3102b is finally illuminated in red on the light guide plate 3102, and as a low setting suggestion effect, an imitation effect may be executed in which the imitation image 1600a is finally displayed in blue on the display area of the effect display device 1600. In this way, if the second image 3102b is finally illuminated in red on the light guide plate 3102 during the execution of the imitation effect, the player's expectations for a high setting value (setting value 6) can be increased.

In addition, in this embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 can illuminate the first pattern 3102a by illuminating multiple LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 3103 located above it, while the second pattern substrate 3104 located on the left side of it when viewed from the front can illuminate the second pattern 3102b by illuminating multiple LEDs mounted on it. However, the player can change the brightness of these multiple LEDs by operating the pressing operation unit 303. In other words, if the brightness of the multiple LEDs is set to be weak, the second pattern 3102b illuminated and decorated by the light guide plate 3102 will be displayed in a dark state, whereas if the brightness of the multiple LEDs is set to be strong, the second pattern 3102b illuminated and decorated by the light guide plate 3102 will be displayed in a bright state. In the imitation effect, when the second image 3102b illuminated by the light guide plate 3102 is in a dark display mode, the imitation image 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is in a dark display mode, whereas when the second image 3102b illuminated by the light guide plate 3102 is in a bright display mode, the imitation image 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is in a bright display mode. In this way, the imitation effect is executed so that the brightness corresponds to both the second image 3102b and the imitation image 1600a, making it difficult to determine whether the light guide plate 3102 or the effect display device 1600 is being used. Note that when adjusting the brightness, the player may operate the pressing operation unit 303 to change the brightness settings of both the multiple LEDs on the light guide plate 3102 and the backlight brightness of the effect display device 1600.

[21. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, some of the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to Figures 198 to 200. Figure 198 is a table showing an example of the various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and Figures 199 and 200 are tables showing the continuation of the various commands transmitted from the main control board in Figure 198 to the peripheral control board.

[21-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands have a memory capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in Figures 198 to 200, are composed of a status indicating the type of command having a memory capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a mode indicating the variation of the effect having a memory capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

In addition, as shown in Figures 198 to 200, the various commands are categorized into special chart 1 synchronization related, special chart 2 synchronization related, jackpot related, power-on, regular chart synchronization related, regular electric role related, notification display, status display, and others.

[21-1-1. Special Chart 1 Synchronous Performance Related]
The special symbol 1 synchronization performance related commands are based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, and as shown in FIG. 198, the classification is made up of commands named "Start special symbol 1 synchronization performance,""Specify special symbol 1,""End special symbol 1 synchronization performance," and "Specify state at time of change," which are related to the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. These various commands are assigned "A*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special symbol 1 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) instructs the start of a special symbol synchronization effect with the effect pattern (variation pattern) specified in the mode, the special symbol 1 designation command designates a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the special symbol 1 synchronization effect, and the variable state designation command instructs the game state. The game state consists of a time-saving state that indicates the time-saving state, a probability variable state that indicates the probability variable state, and a normal state that indicates neither the time-saving state nor the probability variable state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a special chart 1 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) and a special chart 1 synchronization effect end command are provided for each setting value of the pachinko machine 1. When transmitting the special chart 1 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) and the special chart 1 synchronization effect end command, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects and transmits a command corresponding to the setting value stored in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by varying the modes of the special chart 1 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) and the special chart 1 synchronization effect end command that have traditionally been used, it is possible to send setting value information for the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting value information is periodically sent to the peripheral control board 1510, allowing the peripheral control board 1510 to grasp the setting value of the pachinko machine 1.

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the special symbol 1 synchronization effect start command is sent when special symbol 1 begins to change, the special symbol 1 designation command is sent immediately after the special symbol 1 synchronization effect starts, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect end command is sent when the special symbol 1 change time has elapsed (when special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the change state designation command is sent immediately after the special symbol win/loss information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually sent during the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

[21-1-2. Special Chart 2 Synchronization Performance Related]
The special symbol 2 synchronization performance related commands are based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402, and as shown in FIG. 198, the classification is made up of commands named "Start special symbol 2 synchronization performance,""Specify special symbol 2," and "End special symbol 2 synchronization performance," which are related to the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. These various commands are assigned "B*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special symbol 2 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) instructs the start of the special symbol synchronization effect using the effect pattern (variation pattern) specified in the mode, the special symbol 2 designation command specifies a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, and the special symbol 2 synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the special symbol 2 synchronization effect.

Furthermore, similar to the above-mentioned special symbol 1 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) and special symbol 1 synchronization effect end command, a special symbol 2 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) and special symbol 2 synchronization effect end command are provided for each setting value of the pachinko machine 1, and when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sends the special symbol 2 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) and special symbol 2 synchronization effect end command, it selects and sends a command corresponding to the setting value stored in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that the special symbol 2 synchronization effect (a variation effect of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting hole 2004) is mainly executed in the probability variable state and the time-saving state. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by differentiating the modes of the special chart 2 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) and the special chart 2 synchronization effect end command that have been used conventionally, it is possible to send setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510, and setting value information is periodically sent to the peripheral control board 1510 even in the probability variable state and the time-saving state, so that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 can be known on the peripheral control board 1510 side.

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the special symbol 2 synchronization effect start command is sent when the special symbol 2 begins to change, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the special symbol 2 synchronization effect starts, and the special symbol 2 synchronization effect end command is sent when the special symbol 2 change time has elapsed (when special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually sent during the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process.

[21-1-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in Figure 198, the jackpot-related category consists of commands named jackpot opening, large prize slot 1 opening Nth time display, large prize slot 1 closing display, large prize slot 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot pattern display, small prize opening, small prize opening display, small prize count display, and small prize ending. These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, the display large prize opening 1 Nth command instructs the start of large prize opening 1 being open for rounds 1 to 15 (the first large prize opening 2005 is opening or has started to open for the Nth round), the display large prize opening 1 closing command instructs the start of large prize opening 1 being closed between rounds (the first large prize opening 2005 is closing or has started to close between rounds), the display large prize opening 1 count command notifies that the number of game balls counted, from 0 to 10 (the number of game balls that have entered the first large prize opening 2005 as detected by the large prize opening sensor 2403), the jackpot ending command instructs the start of the jackpot ending, and the display jackpot symbol command instructs the display of jackpot symbol information.

In addition, the small hit opening command instructs the start of a small hit opening, the small hit opening display command instructs the start of a small hit opening (when the device winning port 2006 is opening or has started to open during a small hit), the small hit count display command instructs the large winning port entry presentation during a small hit (a presentation that occurs when a game ball that has entered the device winning port 2006 during a small hit is detected by the device winning port sensor 2513), the V passing command instructs the V winning port entry presentation (a presentation that occurs when a game ball that has entered the device winning port 2006 during a small hit is detected by the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port 2008), and the small hit ending command instructs the start of a small hit ending. It is also possible to provide a V passage command corresponding to each of the first V winning port 2007 and the second V winning port 2008 (a first V winning port command when a gaming ball is detected by the first V winning port 2007, and a second V winning port command when a gaming ball is detected by the second V winning port 2008).

These various commands are sent with the following timing: the jackpot opening command is sent when the jackpot opening begins; the command to display large prize opening 1 Nth time is sent when large prize opening 1 opens in rounds 1 to 15 (when first large prize opening 2005 opens in the Nth round); the command to display large prize opening 1 closure is sent when large prize opening 1 closes (when first large prize opening 2005 begins to close); the command to display large prize opening 1 count is sent when large prize opening 1 opens and when the count changes to large prize opening 1 (when first large prize opening 2005 opens and when a game ball that has entered first large prize opening 2005 is detected by large prize opening sensor 2403); the jackpot ending command is sent when the jackpot ending begins; and the command to display jackpot symbols is sent when the large prize opening opens (when first large prize opening 2005 opens).

In addition, the small win opening command is sent when the small win opening begins, the small win opening display command is sent when the small win opens (when the special device winning port 2006 opens during a small win), the small win count display command is sent when the small win enters the large winning port (when the game ball that entered the special device winning port 2006 during a small win is detected by the special device winning port sensor 2513), and the small win ending command is sent when the small win ending begins. Note that these various commands are actually sent during the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process.

[21-1-4. Power on]
As shown in Fig. 199, the power-on category is made up of commands named "power-on state,""main control return destination when power is turned on,""setting key ON command,""setting key OFF command,""setting change command," and "error display command." These various commands are assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command consists of information instructing that the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633 be operated (when the RWM clear button 633z is operating as the RAM clear switch and the RWM clear button press is operated) to clear the RAM when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), information instructing which of the above-mentioned normal, time-saving, or special state the game will return to when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), and information indicating the pachinko machine model code.

In addition, when creating so-called max type, mid type, and sweet type pachinko machines, the model code specifies which copyright of which work the machine is based, what kind of game specifications it has (for example, in addition to a game specification where, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, there is also a game specification where the number of times a special pattern can fluctuate (for example, 30 or 70 times) and then a probability fluctuation occurs (so-called ST machine)), and further, whether the pachinko machine has multiple setting values or only one setting value. In other words, the model code information for a pachinko machine is primarily made up of a series code that identifies the model type (max type, mid type, or sweet type); a copyright code that identifies the copyright of the work; a game specification code that identifies the game specifications (for example, a game specification in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, and a game specification in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times for special symbols to fluctuate (ST machine)); and a setting value code that indicates whether the pachinko machine 1 has one or multiple setting values.

The main control return destination command when power is turned on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command when power is turned on is primarily composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2414 and the bonus winning port solenoid 2512.

The setting key ON command instructs the system to check the setting values stored in a dedicated area in a specific area of the control's built-in RAM, and the setting key OFF command instructs the system to complete checking the setting values stored in a dedicated area in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM.

The setting change command indicates the changed setting value and that the setting value has been changed. In this example, by changing the mode of the setting change command, it is possible to send setting value information for the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 can determine the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 from the received setting change command. The setting change command may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on regardless of whether the setting value has been changed, or a setting notification command indicating the current setting value may be sent if the setting value has not been changed when the power is turned on. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 to determine the latest setting value each time the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

The error display command indicates that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control's built-in RAM.

These commands are sent when the main control board is powered on (this includes not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or recovers from a power outage or momentary power outage, the commands to be sent when power is turned on are reserved in step S50 of the main control side game control main processing and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM, and the power-on status command and power-on main control return destination command are sent in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[21-1-5. General Illustrated Synchronous Performance Related]
The normal symbol synchronization effects are based on the detection signal from the normal winning slot sensor 2401, and as shown in FIG. 199, this classification is made up of commands named "normal symbol synchronization effect start,""normal symbol designation,""normal symbol synchronization effect end," and "variable state designation," which relate to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. These various commands are assigned "E*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal symbol synchronization effect start command (normal symbol variation pattern command) instructs the start of a normal symbol synchronization effect using the effect pattern (normal symbol variation pattern) specified in the mode, the normal symbol designation command designates a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, the normal symbol synchronization effect end command instructs the normal symbol synchronization effect to end, and the variable state designation command instructs the game state. Note that the game state consists of a time-saving state, which indicates that the game is in the time-saving state, and a normal state, which indicates that the game is not in the time-saving state, as described above.

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the normal symbol synchronization start command is sent when the normal symbol change begins, the normal symbol designation command is sent immediately after the normal symbol synchronization start command, the normal symbol synchronization end command is sent when the normal symbol change time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is confirmed), and the change state designation command is sent immediately after the normal symbol win/loss information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually sent during the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process.

[21-1-6. Regular Electric Role Performance Related]
The normal electric role performance-related commands relate to the second start gate 2411, which is advanced and retreated by the drive of the start gate solenoid 2412, and as shown in Fig. 199, this section is made up of commands named "normal winning opening,""normal electric opening display," and "normal winning ending." These various commands are assigned a status of "F*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal map opening command instructs the start of normal map opening, the normal power opening display command instructs the start of normal power opening (when the second starting port door 2411 is in a state where it protrudes forward due to the drive of the starting port solenoid 2412, or when it protrudes), and the normal map ending command instructs the start of normal map ending.

The timing for sending these various commands is as follows: the normal map opening command is sent when normal map opening begins, the normal power open display command is sent when normal power is opened (when the second start port door 2411 protrudes forward due to the drive of the start port solenoid 2412), and the normal map ending command is sent when normal map ending begins. Note that these various commands are actually sent during the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt process.

[21-1-10. Other]
As shown in Figure 200, the other categories are made up of commands named "Starting port winning,""Specify end of variable shortening operation,""Special symbol 1 memory,""Special symbol 2 memory,""Special symbol type read ahead,""Variation pattern read ahead 1,""Variation pattern read ahead 2,""Variation pattern read ahead 3,""Variation pattern read ahead 4,""Variation pattern read ahead 5,""Variation pattern read ahead 6,""Normal winning port winning," and "Normal symbol memory." These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H" (where "H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start port entry command instructs the start of the start port entry effect, and instructs the start of the effect when a gaming ball enters the first start port 2002 based on a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, and the start of the effect when a gaming ball enters the second start port 2004 based on a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402. The variable shortening operation end designation command instructs the state transition from the variable shortening operation state to the variable shortening inactivity state. The special pattern 1 memory command conveys 0 to 4 special pattern 1 reserved (the number of balls (reserved number) that have entered the first start port 2002 and have not yet been used to display the special pattern variation on the first special pattern display of the function display unit 1400). The special pattern 2 memory command The command conveys 0 to 4 reserved special symbols 2 (the number of balls (reserved number) that have entered the second starting port 2004 and have not yet been used to display the changing special symbols on the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400). The special symbol type look-ahead command specifies the display result (missing symbol, big win symbol) by the first special symbol display device based on the reserved special symbol 1, which is read in advance before the reserved special symbol 1 is used to display the changing special symbol on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the display result (small win symbol, big win symbol) by the second special symbol display device based on the reserved special symbol 2, which is read in advance before the reserved special symbol 2 is used to display the changing special symbol on the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400.

Furthermore, fluctuation pattern read ahead commands 1 to 6 specify a fluctuation pattern to be read ahead and used to display the fluctuation of a special symbol based on reserved special symbol 1 before reserved special symbol 1 is used to display the fluctuation of a special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and a fluctuation pattern to be read ahead and used to display the fluctuation of a special symbol based on reserved special symbol 2 before reserved special symbol 2 is used to display the fluctuation of a special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Fluctuation pattern read ahead command 1 is a command corresponding to setting value 1 of the pachinko machine 1, fluctuation pattern read ahead command 2 is a command corresponding to setting value 2 of the pachinko machine 1, fluctuation pattern read ahead command 3 is a command corresponding to setting value 3 of the pachinko machine 1, fluctuation pattern read ahead command 4 is a command corresponding to setting value 4 of the pachinko machine 1, fluctuation pattern read ahead command 5 is a command corresponding to setting value 5 of the pachinko machine 1, and fluctuation pattern read ahead command 6 is a command corresponding to setting value 6 of the pachinko machine 1.

Note that the commands containing the setting value information for the pachinko machine 1 described above (special chart 1 synchronization effect start command, special chart 1 synchronization effect end command, special chart 2 synchronization effect start command, special chart 2 synchronization effect end command, setting change command) are examples, and other commands may also be provided for each setting value.

The normal entry slot entry command instructs the game ball to pass through the gate unit 2003, and the normal symbol memory command notifies the user of 0 to 4 reserved normal symbols (the number of balls (reserved number) that have passed through the gate unit 2003 and have not yet been used to display the changing normal symbols on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400).

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the start gate entry command is sent from speakers 462, 464, 622 mainly by voice when the game ball enters the start gate (when the game ball enters the first start gate 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start gate sensor 3002, or when the game ball enters the second start gate 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start gate sensor 2402), to notify the fact; the fluctuation reduction operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been used up (after the miss stop period has elapsed); and the special pattern 1 memory command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special pattern 1 activation changes (when a game ball enters the first start gate 2002 and the number of reserved balls changes). The special symbol 1 memory command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 activation changes (when a game ball lands in the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserved balls increases, or when that number of reserved balls is used to display a special symbol change on the first special symbol display and the number of reserved balls decreases), the special symbol type read ahead command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 or 2 activation increases (when a game ball lands in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserved balls increases), and the variation pattern read ahead command is sent immediately after the special symbol type read ahead command is sent. Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

In addition, the normal entry slot winning command is sent when a gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003, and the normal symbol memory command is sent when the number of reserved balls for normal symbol activation changes (when a gaming ball passes through gate unit 2003 and the reserved number increases, or when that reserved number is used to display a changing normal symbol on the normal symbol display and the reserved number decreases). Note that these various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

As mentioned above, the start port entry command is transmitted from speakers 462, 464, and 622 primarily to provide an audio notification when a game ball enters a start port (when a game ball enters first start port 2002 based on a detection signal from first start port sensor 3002, or when a game ball enters second start port 2004 based on a detection signal from second start port sensor 2402). However, how the peripheral control board 1510 uses the start port entry command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in addition to providing audio notifications from speakers 462, 464, and 622, the command is also used to monitor for fraudulent activity. In contrast, some other pachinko machines are designed so that the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start port entry command without providing an audio notification from speakers 462, 464, and 622.

[22. Setting Information Abnormality Notification]
Next, a description will be given of a process for reporting an abnormality in the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 based on a command including setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 among the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Fig. 201 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the setting information determination process that is executed when a command including setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310 in the received command analysis process (step S1022).

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the setting information determination process, it determines whether the setting abnormality notification flag, described below, is set (step S1500). The setting abnormality notification flag is set when an abnormal setting value is being notified. If the setting abnormality notification flag is set in step S1500, it is determined that an abnormal setting value has been notified, and the process proceeds to step S1507. If the setting abnormality notification flag is not set in step S1500, it is determined that an abnormal setting value has not been notified, and the process proceeds to step S1501.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then determines whether the received command is the setting change command (step S1501), and if a setting change command has been received, stores the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 in the setting information storage area based on the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the setting change command (step S1502), and terminates processing. As a result, the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 that were set when the power was turned on are stored in the setting information storage area, allowing the peripheral control board 1510 to grasp the setting values of the pachinko machine 1.

Also, if the received command is not one of the above setting change commands (in this example, if the special chart 1 synchronization effect start command, special chart 1 synchronization effect end command, special chart 2 synchronization effect start command, special chart 2 synchronization effect end command, or fluctuation pattern pre-read command 1 to fluctuation pattern pre-read command 6 is received), it is determined whether the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command matches the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area in step S1502 (step S1504). If they do not match, it is notified that an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information (step S1504), and a setting abnormality notification flag is set to indicate that an abnormality in the setting value information is being notified, and processing ends (step S1505).

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S1500 that the setting abnormality notification flag is set, i.e., if an abnormality in the setting value information is being notified, it is determined whether the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command matches the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area in step S1502 (step S1507), and if they do not match, the abnormality notification in the setting value information continues.

On the other hand, if the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command matches the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area in step S1502, the notification of an abnormality in the setting value information is terminated (step S1508), the setting abnormality notification flag is reset, and processing is terminated (step S1509).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by sending a command containing the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is able to grasp the setting values of the pachinko machine 1, and if there is an abnormality in the setting value information indicated by the command containing the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 sent from the main control board 1310, specifically if the setting value has been changed despite not having undergone normal processing (setting value change processing), a process is executed to determine that an error or fraud has occurred and to notify this fact. Note that game play continues even while an abnormality in the setting value information is being notified, and variable effects, etc. are executed by the effect display device 1600. For this reason, the abnormality in the setting value information is not interrupted by the execution of variable effects executed by the effect display device 1600. Specifically, one or a combination of the following controls is executed: control to display "Setting abnormality!" or the like in an area that does not overlap with the variable performance being executed on the performance display device 1600; control to semi-transparently display "Setting abnormality!" or the like in an area that overlaps with the variable performance being executed on the performance display device 1600 so that the variable performance being executed on the performance display device 1600 can be seen; control to output a voice message saying "A setting abnormality has occurred" from speakers 462, 464, 622; control to light up lamps, LEDs, etc. provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3 in a predetermined manner (for example, flashing red), etc.

In addition, if there is an abnormality in the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by a command sent from the main control board 1310, the above-mentioned setting value information abnormality notification may not be executed, or in addition to executing the setting value information abnormality notification, the effect suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, described below, may not be executed, and if an effect suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is being executed, the execution of this effect may be stopped. In other words, if a command containing the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 sent from the main control board 1310 is affected by noise, etc., causing the setting value information indicated by this command to become an abnormal value, or if the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise, etc., and becomes an abnormal value, and there is an abnormality in the consistency between the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by a command sent from the main control board 1310 and the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510, executing an effect suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 will reduce the reliability of this effect. Therefore, in such cases, it may be possible to prevent a decrease in reliability by not executing the effect suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, and by canceling this effect if it is currently being executed.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may also be configured to determine whether an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information, in which case game play may be stopped if an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information. For example, when a setting value is changed using the setting value change process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may store the changed setting value in a reference area separate from the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM, and at any time (for example, when sending the special chart 1 synchronization effect start command or the special chart 2 synchronization effect start command), determine whether the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area matches the setting value stored in the reference area, and if it determines that they do not match, game play may be stopped and an abnormality in the setting value information may be notified.

In addition, in this example, after the pachinko machine 1 starts reporting an abnormality in the setting value information, once the abnormality is resolved, the reporting of the abnormality in the setting value information automatically ends without any action by the gaming parlor staff. Therefore, if a command containing the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 sent from the main control board 1310 is affected by noise or the like and the setting value information is changed to an abnormal value, the reporting of the abnormality in the setting value information will be started because it does not match the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area, and then if a command containing the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 sent from the main control board 1310 is received in a normal state, the reporting of the abnormality in the setting value information can be immediately ended.

In the above example, when a setting value is changed in the setting change process, a setting change command indicating the changed setting value is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, the setting value indicated by the command is stored on the peripheral control board 1510, and whether an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information is determined based on whether the setting value matches the stored setting value. However, the method of determining whether an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information is not limited to this. For example, when a command including setting value information for a pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310, it may be determined whether the setting value information indicated by the command matches the setting value indicated by a previously received command including setting value information for the pachinko machine 1, and if they do not match, an abnormality in the setting value information may be reported. In this case, an abnormality in the setting value information may not be reported when a setting change command sent from the main control board 1310 based on a change in the setting value is received.

Furthermore, in relation to the variable performance, commands including setting value information for the pachinko machine 1 may be sent multiple times from the main control board 1310, and if at least some of the commands do not match, an abnormality in the setting value information may be reported. Specifically, a determination may be made as to whether the setting value information for the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the special chart 1 synchronization performance start command and special chart 2 synchronization performance start command matches the setting value information for the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the special chart 1 synchronization performance end command and special chart 2 synchronization performance end command, and if they do not match, an abnormality in the setting value information may be reported.

In addition, in the above example, the special chart 1 synchronization performance start command, special chart 1 synchronization performance end command, special chart 2 synchronization performance start command, special chart 2 synchronization performance end command, and variation pattern predictive command are provided for each setting value of the pachinko machine 1, but if the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is notified from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, commands notifying the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 may be provided separately from the special chart 1 synchronization performance start command, special chart 1 synchronization performance end command, special chart 2 synchronization performance start command, special chart 2 synchronization performance end command, and variation pattern predictive command, so that whenever any command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, or when a specific command is sent, a command notifying the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is also sent. For example, setting notification commands 1 to 6 may be provided to notify setting value information of the pachinko machine 1, and the main control board 1310 may send a setting notification command according to the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 at any timing to the peripheral control board 1510 (setting notification command 1 for setting value 1, setting notification command 2 for setting value 2, and so on, for setting value 6). This configuration eliminates the need to change the command design for each model (those with multiple setting values and those with only one setting value), reducing the amount of design work required.

In this case, commands related to the effects executed by the effect display device 1600 (such as the special symbol synchronization effect, the hold notice effect described below, etc.) (e.g., the special symbol 1 synchronization effect start command, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect end command, the special symbol 2 synchronization effect start command, the special symbol 2 synchronization effect end command, and the fluctuation pattern prediction command, etc.) may also be sent when sending commands not related to the effects executed by the effect display device 1600 (such as the regular prize entry command, etc.), and a command notifying the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 may be sent to determine whether there is an abnormality in the consistency between the setting value information indicated by the command and the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to frequently determine whether the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal, further improving the accuracy of avoiding malfunctions caused by noise, etc.

[23. Hold Notice Performance]
Next, the hold notice performance will be explained. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the first hold memory number changes based on the game ball entering the first start port 2002, a command indicating the first hold memory number (first hold memory number designation command 0 to 4) is set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the first hold memory number is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and when the second hold memory number changes based on the game ball entering the second start port 2004, a command indicating the second hold memory number (second hold memory number designation command 0 to 1 (special pattern 2 memory command 0 to 1)) is set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the second hold memory number is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In addition, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 receives the above-mentioned special symbol type look-ahead command and variation pattern look-ahead command from the main control board 1310 based on the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 3002 that a gaming ball has entered the first start hole 2002, or based on the detection signal from the second start hole sensor 2402 that a gaming ball has entered the second start hole 2004, the display mode of the first pending memories 1700a-1700d and the second pending memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is changed in accordance with the special lottery result for which the start of the suggestion is pending based on the special symbol type look-ahead command and the variation pattern look-ahead command, and a pending preview effect can be executed that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot when the suggestion of the special lottery result is executed.

In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a hold notification judgment table that determines whether or not to issue a hold notification and the type of hold notification pattern when the hold notification is executed, based on the first hold memory number specified by the first hold memory number specification command or the second hold memory number specified by the second hold memory number command, sent from the main control board 1310, and the advance judgment information (miss, small hit, big hit, etc., and may also be able to notify the type of jackpot, such as a special jackpot or a normal jackpot) specified by the variable pattern pre-read command and the special pattern type pre-read command.

Then, when a decision is made to execute the hold notification and the type of hold notification pattern to be executed is determined, the first hold memories 1700a-1700d and second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are displayed in a different display mode (in this example, a different display color than normal). In this example, the first hold memories 1700a-1700d and second hold memory 1701a are normally displayed in the basic color white, and when the hold notification is executed, they are displayed in blue, green, red, or a ladybug pattern. In addition, the display modes of the first hold memories 1700a-1700d and second hold memory 1701a are set so that the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the order of white → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern.

In addition, when the pre-determination information indicates that the lottery result is a jackpot, the final hold display pattern is determined with a high probability to be a hold notification pattern with a high probability of a jackpot (for example, red or a ladybug pattern), and when the pre-determination information indicates that the lottery result is a loss, the final hold display pattern is determined with a high probability to be a hold notification pattern with a low probability of a jackpot (for example, blue).This increases the player's expectations for a jackpot gaming state when the final hold display pattern indicates a high probability of a jackpot.

The hold preview pattern is set to change the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a-1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 each time a suggestion of the special lottery result (display of a changing decorative pattern (display of a changing special pattern)) is made during the execution of the hold preview performance (each time a hold is consumed). The hold preview pattern is set so that the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a-1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 does not change in the reverse order of white → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern (i.e., the likelihood of a jackpot does not decrease), and is set so that the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a-1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change) or is set to a mode with a high likelihood of a jackpot each time a suggestion of the special lottery result (display of a changing decorative pattern (display of a changing special pattern)) is made (each time a hold is consumed). For this reason, even if the first reserved memory 1700a-1700d or the second reserved memory 1701a is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode with a low probability of a jackpot, there is still a possibility that the reserved display mode will change to a mode with a high probability of a jackpot until the indication of the special lottery result that is the subject of the reserved notice begins, and the player can be kept paying attention to the reserved display mode with anticipation until the very end.

In addition, the hold notification pattern does not necessarily have to display the first hold memories 1700a-1700d and the second hold memory 1701a in white (basic color) and then change in the order of blue → green → red → ladybug pattern, but may start from an intermediate display mode (for example, displaying first hold memory 1700c in red based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first start hole 2002 based on a detection signal from the first start hole sensor 3002), or change to the next display mode without passing through an intermediate display mode (for example, if first hold memory 1700d is displayed in white, the display changes from white to a ladybug pattern when the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and first hold memory 1700d is moved to first hold memory 1700c in response to the start of the next special lottery result). For this reason, even if there are few opportunities (number of reserved items) for the display mode of first reserved memories 1700a-1700d and second reserved memory 1701a to change, it is possible for first reserved memories 1700a-1700d and second reserved memory 1701a to be displayed in a display mode with a high probability of winning. Also, even if first reserved memories 1700a-1700d and second reserved memory 1701a are displayed in a display mode with a low probability of winning, it is impossible to predict which display mode they will change to next, and it is possible to keep the player's attention on the display mode of first reserved memories 1700a-1700d and second reserved memory 1701a with anticipation until the very end.

In addition, in this example, the pachinko machine 1 can execute a setting value hold suggestion effect that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 by changing the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a-1700d and the second hold memory 1701a to a display mode different from the above-mentioned hold notice, either in conjunction with the hold notice effect that suggests the expected probability of a jackpot, or alone.

In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a setting value hold suggestion determination table for determining whether or not to display a setting value hold suggestion effect and the type of setting value hold suggestion pattern if a setting value hold suggestion effect is to be displayed, in accordance with the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 instructed by the fluctuation pattern pre-read command sent from the main control board 1310. Then, when a decision is made to display a setting value hold suggestion effect and the type of setting value hold suggestion pattern to be executed is determined, the first hold memories 1700a-1700d and second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are displayed in a different display format (in this example, a different shape from the normal display format).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 202(A), first reserved memories 1700a-1700d and second reserved memory 1701a are normally displayed in the basic shape of a circle, but when a setting value reserved indication effect is executed, they are displayed as either a square as shown in first reserved memory 1700c in Figure 202(B), a triangle as shown in 1700c in Figure 202(C), or a star as shown in 1701a in Figure 202(D). Furthermore, the display style of first reserved memories 1700a-1700d and second reserved memory 1701a is set so that the expectation for the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 (expectation for a high setting value) increases in the order of circle → square → triangle → star.

In addition, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is identified as 5 or 6 based on the fluctuation pattern predictive command, a setting value reserve suggestion pattern with a high expectation for a high setting value (e.g., a star) is determined with a high probability as the final hold display pattern; when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is identified as 3 or 4, a setting value reserve suggestion pattern with a medium expectation for a high setting value (e.g., a triangle) is determined with a high probability as the final hold display pattern; and when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is identified as 1 or 2, a setting value reserve suggestion pattern with the lowest expectation for a high setting value (e.g., a square) is determined with a high probability as the final hold display pattern. This increases the player's expectations for a high setting value when a pattern with a high expectation for a high setting value is displayed as the final hold display pattern.

In addition, the setting value hold suggestion pattern is set to change the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a-1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 each time a special lottery result is suggested (display of changing decorative patterns (display of changing special patterns)) during the execution of the setting value hold suggestion performance (each time the hold is consumed). In addition, the setting value hold suggestion pattern is set so that the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 does not change in the reverse order of circle → square → triangle → star (i.e., the expectation for a high setting value does not decrease), and is set so that each time a suggestion of a special lottery result (display of a changing decorative pattern (display of a changing special pattern)) is made (each time the hold is consumed), the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or becomes a mode with a high expectation for a high setting value. For this reason, even if the first pending memory 1700a-1700d or the second pending memory 1701a is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode with low expectations for a high setting value, there is still a possibility that the pending display mode will change to a mode with high expectations for a high setting value until the suggestion of the special lottery result that is the target of the setting value pending suggestion effect begins, and the user can be expected to pay attention to the pending display mode until the very end.

In addition, the setting value hold suggestion pattern does not necessarily have to display the first hold memories 1700a-1700d and the second hold memory 1701a as a circle (basic shape) and then change in the order of square → triangle → star, but can start from an intermediate display mode (for example, displaying first hold memory 1700d as a square based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first start hole 2002 based on a detection signal from the first start hole sensor 3002), or change to the next display mode without passing through an intermediate display mode (for example, if first hold memory 1700d is displayed as a square, the square changes to a star when the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and first hold memory 1700d is moved to first hold memory 1700c in accordance with the start of the next special lottery result). For this reason, even if there are few opportunities (number of pending events) for the display mode of first pending memories 1700a-1700d and second pending memory 1701a to change, it is possible for first pending memories 1700a-1700d and second pending memory 1701a to be displayed in a display mode with high expectations for a high setting value. Also, even if first pending memories 1700a-1700d and second pending memory 1701a are displayed in a display mode with low expectations for a high setting value, it is impossible to predict which display mode they will change to next, and it is possible to keep the user's attention on the display mode of first pending memories 1700a-1700d and second pending memory 1701a with anticipation until the very end.

In addition, since the hold preview pattern of the hold preview effect and the setting value hold suggestion pattern of the setting value hold suggestion effect are determined separately, there are cases where the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is changed to a mode with a high expectation for a high setting value based on the hold preview pattern of the hold preview effect, and the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is changed to a mode with a high expectation for a high setting value based on the setting value hold suggestion pattern of the setting value hold suggestion effect, and there are cases where the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a to 1700d and the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is changed to a mode with a high expectation for a high setting value based on the hold preview pattern of the hold preview effect. There are cases where the display mode of the reserved memory 1701a is changed to one that indicates a high expectation for a high setting value, while maintaining the display mode of the first reserved memory 1700a-1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on the setting value hold suggestion pattern of the setting value hold suggestion effect; and there are cases where the display mode of the first reserved memory 1700a-1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 is maintained based on the hold preview pattern of the hold preview effect, while changing the display mode of the first reserved memory 1700a-1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 to one that indicates a high expectation for a high setting value, based on the setting value hold suggestion pattern of the setting value hold suggestion effect.

For example, when the display mode of the hold notice effect is "white" and the display mode of the setting value hold suggestion effect is "circle", the hold is consumed and the first hold memory 1700a-1700d or the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is moved, the display mode of the hold notice effect is changed from "white" to "red" and the display mode of the setting value hold suggestion effect is changed from "circle" to "square" (changing both the color and the shape), or when the display mode of the hold notice effect is "red" and the display mode of the setting value hold suggestion effect is "circle", the hold is consumed and the first hold memory 1700a-1700d or the second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is moved. When the hold is consumed, the display mode of the hold notice effect may remain "red" without changing, while the display mode of the set value hold indication effect may change from "circle" to "square" (same color but different shape); or when the display mode of the hold notice effect is "white" and the display mode of the set value hold indication effect is "triangle", when the hold is consumed and the first hold memory 1700a-1700d or second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is moved, the display mode of the hold notice effect may change from "white" to "blue", while the display mode of the set value hold indication effect may remain "triangle" without changing (change color but different shape).

In other words, in this example, the process of determining the hold notification pattern for the hold notification effect and the process of determining the setting value hold suggestion pattern for the setting value hold suggestion effect are carried out separately, and each time a special lottery result is suggested (display of a changing decorative pattern (display of a changing special pattern)) based on each change pattern (each time a hold is consumed), the display mode of the first hold memories 1700a-1700d and second hold memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is either maintained (the display mode is not changed), or changed to a mode with a higher expectation of a high setting value.

In addition, the final display mode of the hold notice effect and the setting value hold suggestion effect may be determined separately, and one of several change patterns representing change scenarios for the display mode of the first hold memory 1700a-1700d and the second hold memory 1701a may be executed according to the result of this determination.

In addition, the timing at which the setting value hold suggestion effect starts (the timing at which the display mode is displayed in a different manner from normal) is not limited to the timing at which first hold memories 1700a-1700d and second hold memory 1701a are displayed based on game ball B being received by first start port 2002 or second start port 2004, but can also start at a later timing (after display in the basic shape, for example, when the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and first hold memories 1700b-d are moved to first hold memories 1700a-c in response to the start of the next special lottery result). This allows players to look forward to first hold memories 1700a-1700d and second hold memory 1701a until the very end, even if the setting value hold suggestion effect is not executed.

The execution frequency of the setting value hold suggestion effect is set lower than that of the above-mentioned hold notice effect. In other words, the hold notice effect is executed based on advance judgment information, and when a special lottery result is suggested based on the special lottery result based on the hold memory that is executing the hold notice effect, the content of the hold notice effect is reset, whereas the content of the setting value hold suggestion effect continues without being reset until the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed. Therefore, by setting the execution frequency of the setting value hold suggestion effect lower than that of the hold notice effect, the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from being identified.

Furthermore, as shown in the first hold memory 1700c in Figures 202(A) and 202(B) and the second hold memory 1701a in Figure 202(D), the setting value hold suggestion effect may be executed simultaneously with the above-mentioned hold notice effect, and as shown in the first hold memory 1700c in Figure 202(C), the setting value hold suggestion effect may be executed alone. Note that the hold notice pattern may also include a change pattern for the display mode of the setting value hold suggestion effect, in which case a hold notice judgment table may be further provided for each setting value of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in Figure 203, the pachinko machine 1 in this example is equipped with multiple types of image data that combine the display modes of the above-mentioned hold notice effects and the display modes of the set value hold suggestion effects, and displays the target hold memory based on image data that corresponds to both the hold notice pattern of the above-mentioned hold notice effects and the set value hold suggestion pattern of the set value hold suggestion effects. In other words, after determining the color as the display mode of the hold notice effect of the target hold memory and the shape as the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect, a display mode that combines these is generated, and this combined display mode is displayed as the hold memory.

Specifically, in the example of Figure 203(A), which displays a reserved memory in which only the hold notice effect is executed and the setting value hold suggestion effect is not executed, first reserved memories 1700a and 1700b are displayed based on the image data of "Composite Pattern White 1," and first reserved memory 1700c is displayed based on the image data of "Composite Pattern Blue 1." Furthermore, in the example of Figure 203(B), which displays a reserved memory in which both the hold notice effect and the setting value hold suggestion effect are executed, first reserved memories 1700a and 1700b are displayed based on the image data of "Composite Pattern White 1," and first reserved memory 1700c is displayed based on the image data of "Composite Pattern Blue 2." In addition, in the example of Figure 203 (C), in which a reserved memory in which only the reserved notice effect is executed and a reserved memory in which only the set value reserved suggestion effect is executed are respectively displayed, the first reserved memory 1700a is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern blue 1", the first reserved memory 1700b is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern white 1", and the first reserved memory 1700c is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern white 3".

In addition, the second hold memory 1701a also executes the hold notification effect and the set value hold suggestion effect, and in the example of Figure 203 (D) where a hold memory in which both the hold notification effect and the set value hold suggestion effect are executed is displayed, the second hold memory 1701a is displayed based on the image data of "Composite Pattern Red 4".

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is able to execute a hold preview effect that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot and a setting value hold suggestion effect that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 by controlling the display of the first hold memories 1700a-1700d and the second hold memory 1701a in a manner different from normal. Note that while the hold preview effect is executed based on advance determination information, the setting value hold suggestion effect is not based on advance determination information. In other words, the hold preview effect can be executed by obtaining the reserved special lottery results in advance, while the setting value hold suggestion effect can be executed without obtaining the reserved special lottery results in advance.

In addition, special lottery results for which the start of a suggestion is pending may not only be displayed on the effect display device 1600 as first pending memories 1700a-1700d or second pending memory 1701a, but also pending memories corresponding to special lottery results for which a suggestion is currently being executed may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 as pending memories in progress. In this case, the final display mode of the above-mentioned pending notice effect or setting value pending suggestion effect may be displayed in the pending memory in progress. By configuring in this way, it is possible to draw attention to the pending notice effect or setting value pending suggestion effect until the suggestion of the special lottery result is executed, thereby building expectations for a jackpot or a high setting value, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in the above example, the display mode of the hold notification effect was changed by changing the display color of the hold memory, and the display mode of the setting value hold suggestion effect was changed by changing the shape of the hold memory, but this is not limited to the above as long as it is possible to determine that the setting value hold suggestion effect is being executed. For example, the display mode of the hold notification effect could be changed by changing the display color of the hold notification effect, and the display mode of the setting value hold suggestion effect could be changed without changing the shape of the target hold memory, and additional information such as a numerical value corresponding to the suggested setting value or an effect mode around the hold memory (sparkling effect or flame effect) could be displayed in association with the hold memory.

In addition, when the first reserved memory 1700a to 1700d is displayed based on a game ball entering the first starting port 2002, when the second reserved memory 1701a is displayed based on a game ball entering the second starting port 2004, or when the first reserved memory 1700a to 1700d or the second reserved memory 1701a is updated and displayed based on the reserved being consumed (when the first reserved memory 1700b to 1700d is moved to the first reserved memory 1700a to 1700c, or when the first reserved memory 1700a or the second reserved memory 1701a is moved to the running reserved memory), a sound effect may be output to indicate the setting value of the pachinko machine 1. For example, to indicate that the set value is "1", one of the multiple sound effects corresponding to the set value "1" (e.g., "beep") may be output; to indicate that the set value is "2", one of the multiple sound effects corresponding to the set value "2" (e.g., "beep beep") may be output; to indicate that the set value is "5", one of the multiple sound effects corresponding to the set value "5" (e.g., "beep beep beep") may be output; and to indicate that the set value is "6", one of the multiple sound effects corresponding to the set value "6" (e.g., "pumpakapaaan") may be output.

In addition, when a hold notice effect or a setting value hold suggestion effect is executed, the expected probability of a jackpot or the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested depending on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300.In this case, an operation instruction image instructing the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300 may be displayed on the performance display device 1600, and then the expected probability of a jackpot or the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested depending on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300. Furthermore, the same operation instruction image can be used for both maintaining the jackpot expectation rate or the suggested setting value and further increasing the jackpot expectation rate or the suggested setting value. This makes it impossible to determine whether the jackpot expectation rate or the suggested setting value will be increased by the effect (the effect that displays the operation instruction image) that signals the execution of the hold notice effect or the setting value hold suggestion effect, and encourages active operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation section 301 in the effect operation unit 300.

In addition, during a demonstration (a demonstration performed while the player is waiting), it may be possible to select whether or not to display a hold notice effect or a setting value hold suggestion effect. This allows for effects to be executed that suit the player's preferences, and even for players who do not want suggestions about the jackpot probability or the setting values of the pachinko machine 1, the hold notice effect or setting value hold suggestion effect can be executed, preventing suggestions about the jackpot probability or the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 from being displayed.

In addition, an explanation of the mode suggested by the setting value hold suggestion effect (such as that it is a mode suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, not a mode suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot) may be given during a demonstration (a demonstration effect performed while the player is waiting) or when a suggestion of the special lottery result is made (while the decorative pattern is changing and being displayed). This prevents the setting value hold suggestion effect from being mistaken for the likelihood of a jackpot, which increases expectations for a jackpot.

Furthermore, during the time-saving state or the probability variable state, it is possible to execute only the hold notification effect based on the advance judgment information instructed by the fluctuation pattern pre-read command and the special symbol type pre-read command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the gaming ball enters the second starting port 2004, without executing the hold notification effect based on the advance judgment information instructed by the fluctuation pattern pre-read command and the special symbol type pre-read command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the gaming ball enters the first starting port 2002. Furthermore, even during the time-saving state or the probability variable state, it is possible to execute the setting value hold suggestion effect in relation to the first hold memories 1700a-1700d displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the gaming ball entering the first starting port 2002. This makes it possible to build anticipation for the setting value hold suggestion effect even when the gaming ball enters the first starting port 2002 during the time-saving state or the probability variable state.

[24. Continuous Setting Value Suggestion]
Next, the setting value continuous suggestion effect will be explained. In this example, it is possible to execute a setting value continuous suggestion effect that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 over multiple display of decorative symbols. Note that the display of decorative symbols is not limited to one that is executed once for one display of special symbols, but also includes one that is executed multiple times for one display of special symbols (so-called pseudo continuous change).

In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a setting value continuous suggestion effect table for determining whether or not to perform a setting value continuous suggestion effect and the type of setting value continuous suggestion effect pattern when a setting value continuous suggestion effect is performed, in accordance with the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 instructed by the special chart 1 synchronization effect start command and the special chart 2 synchronization effect start command sent from the main control board 1310. Then, once a decision is made to perform a setting value continuous suggestion effect and the type of setting value continuous suggestion effect pattern to be performed is determined, one of multiple setting suggestion characters 1702, which have different display modes depending on the setting value, is made to appear each time the effect display device 1600 starts displaying the changing decorative patterns.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 204(A), when the display of decorative patterns begins on the effect display device 1600, a setting suggestion character 1702 with a "1" drawn on its head is displayed as a setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to setting value 1. Also, as shown in Figure 204(C), when the display of the next decorative pattern begins on the effect display device 1600, a setting suggestion character 1702 with a "3" drawn on its head is displayed as a setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to setting value 3, and as shown in Figure 204(E), when the display of the next decorative pattern begins on the effect display device 1600, a setting suggestion character 1702 with a "4" drawn on its head is displayed as a setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to setting value 4.

In addition, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is identified as "6" based on the special chart 1 synchronization effect start command and the special chart 2 synchronization effect start command, a setting value continuous suggestion effect pattern in which the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponds to the setting value "6" as the final form is determined with a high probability, and when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is identified as 1, a setting value continuous suggestion effect pattern in which the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponds to the setting value "1" as the final form is determined with a high probability.This increases the player's expectations for a high setting value when the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to a high setting value is displayed as the final form of the setting suggestion character 1702.

The continuous setting value suggestion effect pattern is set to change the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 each time the display of the changing decorative symbols begins during the execution of the continuous setting value suggestion effect. The continuous setting value suggestion effect pattern is set so that the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 does not change in the reverse order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 (i.e., the expectation for a high setting value does not decrease), and is set so that the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change) or changes to a mode corresponding to a high setting value each time the display of the changing decorative symbols begins. Therefore, even if the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode corresponding to a low setting value, there is still a possibility that the mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 will change to a mode corresponding to a high setting value until the continuous setting value suggestion effect ends, allowing the player to pay attention to the mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 with anticipation until the end.

Furthermore, the continuous setting value suggestion display pattern does not necessarily have to display the setting suggestion character 1702 in a mode corresponding to the setting value "1" and then change in the order of 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6. It can also be set to start from an intermediate display mode (for example, the continuous setting value suggestion display can start and the setting suggestion character 1702 can first be displayed with the setting value "2"), or to change to the next display mode without passing through an intermediate display mode (for example, when the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the setting value "2" is displayed, the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to "4" is revealed in response to the start of the next changing display of the decorative pattern). For this reason, even if the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to a low setting value, it is impossible to predict which display mode it will change to next, and the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 can be kept in focus with anticipation until the very end.

The execution frequency of the setting value continuous suggestion effect is set lower than that of the hold notice effect, just like the setting value hold suggestion effect described above. In other words, the hold notice effect is executed based on advance judgment information, and when a special lottery result is suggested based on the special lottery result based on the hold memory that is executing the hold notice effect, the content of the hold notice effect is reset, whereas the content of the setting value continuous suggestion effect continues without being reset until the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed. Therefore, by setting the execution frequency of the setting value continuous suggestion effect lower than that of the hold notice effect, the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from being identified.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is able to execute a continuous setting value suggestion effect that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying the setting suggestion character 1702 over multiple display changes of the decorative pattern. Note that, like the above-mentioned setting value pending suggestion effect, the continuous setting value suggestion effect is not based on advance judgment information, and therefore can be executed without obtaining the special lottery results in advance.

The continuous setting value suggestion effect that displays the setting suggestion character 1702 may be executed beyond the upper limit on the number of reserved memories (the upper limit for the first reserved memory is 4, and the upper limit for the second reserved memory is 1) (for example, for five or more decorative pattern variations). If the number of reserved memories reaches 0 while the continuous setting value suggestion effect is being executed, the continuous setting value suggestion effect can be resumed and the setting suggestion character 1702 can be displayed when the decorative pattern variation display begins based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004. In this case, the setting suggestion character 1702 may continue to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the continuous setting value suggestion effect is resumed. This allows the player to recognize that the continuous setting value suggestion effect is continuing, allowing them to continue playing. Even if a player has stopped playing, the ongoing continuous setting value suggestion effect can arouse a new player's interest and encourage them to play on the gaming machine.

The continuous setting value suggestion effect may also be executed in parallel with the above-mentioned setting value hold suggestion effect. This provides a new gameplay in which the player can infer the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 from both the presentation style of the setting value hold suggestion effect and the presentation style of the continuous setting value suggestion effect. Furthermore, multiple types of setting suggestion characters 1702 may be provided, and one of the setting suggestion characters 1702 may be displayed depending on the likelihood of a jackpot.

[25. Use of Surplus Settings Other Than for Big Hit Probability and Small Hit Probability]
In this embodiment, when the setting value can be changed, by pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button, the setting value (setting values 1 to 6) can be changed, and the tables used in special lotteries, etc. (hit determination table, jackpot symbol determination table, small hit symbol determination table, etc.) corresponding to the confirmed setting value are used. In the above embodiment, the tables corresponding to each setting value are set so that the combinations of "jackpot probability,""small hit probability,""small hit type,""normal symbol hit probability," and "opening and closing pattern of the second starting port according to the normal hit type" are different. As another example, even if the "jackpot probability" and "small hit probability" have the same setting value, the monitoring system for fraudulent activity may be set differently as information other than the "jackpot probability" and "small hit probability."

As described above, various types of fraudulent activity are monitored during the fraud detection process of step S112. Specifically, a magnetic sensor 2010 is provided to detect fraudulent activity, such as bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 to change the path of a game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 and causing the ball to enter various winning holes or gates (gates) on the game board 5. The main control MPU determines whether or not there is fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 and monitors for fraudulent activity involving magnets. In addition, a vibration sensor is provided to detect fraudulent activity, such as shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 to vibrate the pachinko machine 1 and change the path of a game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 and causing the ball to enter various winning holes or gates (gates). The main control MPU determines whether or not there is fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor and monitors for fraudulent activity caused by vibration. In this example, the fraudulent activity monitoring system makes it possible to change the detection sensitivity of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detect fraudulent activity, change the area (target area) at which the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detect fraudulent activity determine as fraudulent activity, and change the conditions for canceling the error state when fraud is determined to have occurred and the system transitions to an error state.

As shown in Figure 205, in this example, the "jackpot probability," "small hit probability," and "monitoring system for fraudulent activity" are set corresponding to the setting values 1 to 3 and 1' to 3', respectively.

Specifically, the jackpot probability (the proportion of jackpot determination values in the hit determination table that indicate a jackpot) is set to "1 in 319" for setting value 1 and setting value 1', "1 in 309" for setting value 2 and setting value 2', and "1 in 299" for setting value 3 and setting value 3'. In this example, the jackpot probability is set higher for setting values 1 to 3 and setting values 1' to 3' as the setting value increases.

In addition, the table used for the special lottery for the first special symbol has a small win probability (the proportion of small win judgment values in the hit judgment table that indicate a small win) set to "1 in 100" for each of setting values 1 to 3 and setting values 1' to 3', while the table used for the special lottery for the second special symbol has a small win probability set to "50 in 100" for each of setting values 1 to 3 and setting values 1' to 3'. Note that setting values 1 to 3 and setting values 1' to 3' may be set so that the higher the setting value, the higher the small win probability.

Fraud monitoring systems for fraudulent activity are set as "Fraud Monitoring A" for setting values 1 to 3, and "Fraud Monitoring B" for setting values 1' to 3'. In this example, "Fraud Monitoring A" is set to have a stronger monitoring system than "Fraud Monitoring B."

In this example, even though the "jackpot probability" and "minor jackpot probability" are set to the same values for setting values 1 and 1', setting values 2 and 2', and setting values 3 and 3', the fraud monitoring system is set to either "Fraud Monitoring A" or "Fraud Monitoring B." For example, if a setting change board 1311 equipped with setting key switches 1311a and the like is capable of setting six setting values and only three "jackpot probabilities" need to be set, three excess setting values will be generated in addition to the three setting values corresponding to the three "jackpot probabilities." In this way, if a setting change board 1311 capable of setting six setting values is used on another gaming machine, excess setting values may be generated. However, by using the excess setting values to change the fraud monitoring system, as in this example, the excess setting values can be effectively utilized and the number of program changes can be minimized.

When changing settings, the display mode for the selected setting value is as follows: For settings 1-3, the setting display 1310g, which is composed of a single 7-segment LED, displays "1," "2," and "3," with the 7-segment LED flashing normally; for settings 1'-3', the setting display 1310g displays "1," "2," and "3," with the 7-segment LED flashing rapidly (faster than settings 1-3). This allows the operator to clearly distinguish whether the setting being changed is a setting 1-3 or a setting 1'-3' when changing the setting value. However, when the setting value is confirmed after changing it, the display mode for the setting value is such that the 7-segment LED stops flashing normally or rapidly and remains lit normally for both settings 1-3 and 1'-3'. Therefore, when the operator confirms the setting value after changing it, it is unclear whether the setting is a setting 1-3 or a setting 1'-3'.

As another example of the above, with regard to the display mode of the selected setting value during an operation related to a setting change, for settings 1 to 3, "1," "2," and "3" are displayed on the setting display 1310g, which is composed of a single 7-segment LED display. However, for settings 1' to 3', dots may be added to the display 1310g to display "1.", "2.", and "3." compared to settings 1 to 3. In this alternative example, even if the 7-segment LED flashes normally during the change, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether the setting being changed is a setting 1 to 3 or a setting 1' to 3'. Furthermore, when a setting value is confirmed after a change, even if the 7-segment LED stops flashing normally and displays a normal light as the display mode of the setting value, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether the confirmed setting is a setting 1 to 3 or a setting 1' to 3'.

Next, specific monitoring systems for "Fraud Monitoring A" and "Fraud Monitoring B" include the first to fifth specific examples. In this example, "Fraud Monitoring A" and "Fraud Monitoring B" may implement any one or more of the first to fifth specific examples. First, as a first specific example, the following describes a case where the detection sensitivity of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detect fraudulent activity is varied.

As a first specific example, in "Fraud Monitoring A," the detection sensitivity of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detect fraudulent activity is increased, whereas in "Fraud Monitoring B," the detection sensitivity of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detect fraudulent activity is decreased. If the detection sensors that detect fraudulent activity are over-detecting due to individual differences in pachinko machines 1 or their installation location within the hall, selecting "Fraud Monitoring B" can prevent this over-detection. On the other hand, if the detection sensors that detect fraudulent activity are not detecting as well, selecting "Fraud Monitoring A" can prevent this under-detection. Furthermore, if you want to strengthen measures against magnetic and vibration knockouts, selecting "Fraud A" can strengthen monitoring of fraudulent activity caused by magnetic and vibration knockouts.

In "Fraud Monitoring A," when a detection signal is input from a detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detects fraud, fraud is determined to have occurred even if the detection signal is input for a short period of time or the number of times it is input is small, whereas "Fraud Monitoring B" may be configured to determine that fraud has occurred if the detection signal is input for a long period of time or the number of times it is input is large. Even in such cases, the same effect as described above can be achieved when the detection sensitivity of the detection sensor that detects fraud is changed.

Next, as a second specific example, the following describes a case where the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detect fraudulent activity use different areas (target regions) to determine whether fraudulent activity has occurred.

In this example, the magnetic sensors 2010 used to detect magnetic fraud include a setting operation magnetic sensor 2010a capable of detecting magnetic fields generated around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located at the rear of the gaming board 5, and a play area magnetic sensor 2010b capable of detecting magnetic fields generated in front of the play area 5a located at the front of the gaming board 5. The setting operation magnetic sensor 2010a monitors whether a magnet has approached the area where the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a are located, and monitors for fraudulent behavior such as attempts by someone other than the person who is changing the setting value or displaying a confirmation. Meanwhile, the play area magnetic sensor 2010b monitors whether a magnet has approached the area in front of the play area 5a, and monitors for fraudulent behavior such as changing the path of a game ball B flowing down the play area 5a to cause the ball to enter various winning holes or gates (gates) located on the gaming board 5.

Similarly, vibration sensors for detecting fraudulent activity due to vibration include a setting operation unit vibration sensor capable of detecting vibrations occurring around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located at the rear of the gaming board 5, and a game area vibration sensor capable of detecting vibrations occurring around the third distribution device 2550 of the center device 2500 provided on the gaming board 5. The setting operation unit vibration sensor monitors whether vibrations have been applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a are located, and monitors for fraudulent activity such as attempts to change settings or display confirmations by someone other than the person who actually performed the setting changes or confirmation displays. Meanwhile, the game area vibration sensor monitors whether vibrations have been applied to the third distribution device 2550, and monitors for fraudulent activity such as changing the path of game ball B in the third distribution device 2550 to cause game ball B to enter the second V winning slot 2008.

As a second specific example, "Fraud Monitoring A" uses all of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detect fraudulent activity, thereby increasing the number of locations where fraudulent activity is detected, whereas "Fraud Monitoring B" uses only the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a and setting operation unit vibration sensor, which are part of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detect fraudulent activity, thereby reducing the number of locations where fraudulent activity is detected. In other words, "Fraud Monitoring A" is not only able to detect the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located at the rear of the gaming board 5, but is also able to detect the generation of magnetism and vibration in front of the playing area 5a located at the front of the gaming board 5, whereas "Fraud Monitoring B" is only able to detect the generation of magnetism and vibration in the vicinity of the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located at the rear of the gaming board 5. For example, if a malfunction occurs in the play area magnetic sensor 2010b or the play area vibration sensor, causing these sensors to frequently detect fraud even when no fraud is occurring, selecting "Fraud Monitoring B" can prevent such frequent detections. Furthermore, if you want to strengthen measures against magnetic and vibration interference, selecting "Fraud Monitoring A" will monitor for fraud in front of the play area 5a, strengthening monitoring of fraud caused by magnetic and vibration interference.

In this example, two magnetic sensors 2010 are provided to detect fraudulent behavior using magnets: a setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a and a play area magnetic sensor 2010b. However, a single magnetic sensor capable of identifying the location where the magnetism is generated (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a located at the rear of the play board 5, or in front of the play area 5a located at the front of the play board 5) may be provided. Similarly, two vibration sensors are provided to detect fraudulent behavior using vibration: a setting operation unit vibration sensor and a play area vibration sensor. However, a single vibration sensor capable of identifying the location where the vibration is generated (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a located at the rear of the play board 5, or around the third distribution device 2550 of the center role 2500 provided on the play board 5) may be provided. Even in such cases, "Fraud Monitoring B" can achieve the same effect as above by determining that fraud has occurred only if it is determined that magnetism or vibration has occurred in the vicinity of the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a located at the rear of the gaming board 5.

Next, as a third specific example, we will explain below how to change the conditions for canceling an error state when it is determined to be fraudulent activity and transitions to an error state.

As a third specific example, in "Fraud Monitoring A," if a fraudulent activity is detected and the system transitions to an error state, the error state can be cleared by simply turning the power back on. In contrast, in "Fraud Monitoring B," if a fraudulent activity is detected and the system transitions to an error state, the error state can be automatically cleared after a predetermined period of time (e.g., three minutes) has elapsed. In other words, in "Fraud Monitoring A," if a fraudulent activity is detected and the system transitions to an error state, the error state cannot be cleared unless a hall attendant opens the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2 and operates the power switch 630a to turn the power to the pachinko machine 1 back on. Furthermore, if the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor) that detect fraudulent activity detect the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the system transitions to an error state, and an abnormality occurrence effect is executed to notify the user of the abnormal state caused by the occurrence of magnetism or vibration through images, lamps, and speaker output from the effect display device 1600, making it difficult to properly understand the progress of the game. Therefore, if "Fraud Monitoring A" is selected, when fraud is detected and the system transitions to an error state, action will be required by a hall staff member, and the hall staff member will become aware of the fraud, thereby providing a strong deterrent against fraud. Also, if you want to strengthen measures against magnetic and vibration interference, selecting "Fraud Monitoring A" will allow for stronger monitoring of fraudulent activity caused by magnetic and vibration interference.

Next, as a fourth specific example, we will explain below the case where, when fraudulent activity is determined and an error state is entered, information regarding the error state is output to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1.

As a fourth specific example, in "Fraud Monitoring A," if a fraudulent activity is determined and an error state is entered, information regarding the error state is output to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, whereas in "Fraud Monitoring B," even if a fraudulent activity is determined and an error state is entered, information regarding the error state is not output to the hall computer. In other words, with "Fraud Monitoring A," when a fraudulent activity is determined and an error state is entered, hall staff can immediately become aware of the fraudulent activity even if they are not present, thereby increasing the deterrent effect against fraudulent activity. Furthermore, if you want to strengthen measures against magnetic and vibration interference, you can select "Fraud Monitoring A" to strengthen monitoring of fraudulent activity caused by magnetic and vibration interference.

Next, as a fifth specific example, the following explains a case where, when fraudulent activity is determined and an error state is entered, information about the error state is either or not externally notified by output from an image, lamp, or speaker on the performance display device 1600.

As a fifth specific example, in "Fraud Monitoring A," when fraud is determined to be occurring and the system transitions to an error state, information about the error state is externally reported, such as by displaying an image, lamp, or speaker output from the display device 1600 to indicate that an abnormal condition has occurred due to the generation of magnetism or vibration. In contrast, in "Fraud Monitoring B," even when fraud is determined to be occurring and the system transitions to an error state, information about the error state is not externally reported. In other words, in "Fraud Monitoring A," when fraud is determined to be occurring and the system transitions to an error state, the fraudster is warned by an external notification of information about the error state, thereby increasing the deterrent effect against fraud. Furthermore, if you want to strengthen measures against magnetic and vibration interference, you can select "Fraud Monitoring A" to strengthen monitoring of fraudulent behavior caused by magnetic and vibration interference.

In this example, "Fraud Monitoring A" is set for setting values 1 to 3, and "Fraud Monitoring B" is set for setting values 1' to 3'. The main control MPU sends information about the setting values as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, allowing the peripheral control board 1510 to determine whether to wait for "Fraud Monitoring A" or "Fraud Monitoring B." Therefore, if fraud is determined to be occurring and a transition to an error state occurs, when the main control MPU sends information about the error state as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine whether or not to externally report information about the error state.

In addition, in "Fraud Monitoring B," if a fraudulent activity is determined and an error state is entered, information about the error state is externally reported, and at that time, the output from the images, lamps, and speakers of the performance display device 1600 may be suppressed (less noticeable) than in "Fraud Monitoring A." For example, in "Fraud Monitoring B," when information about the error state is externally reported, output from the lamps and speakers may be stopped and only the image of the performance display device 1600 may be displayed. In such cases, the same effect as described above can be achieved when the decision on whether or not to externally report information about the error state is made different.

The above describes a case where a setting change board 1311 capable of setting six settings is used, only three "jackpot probabilities" are required, and three excess settings occur. In other words, for settings 1'-3', even though the "jackpot probabilities" and "small jackpot probabilities" are the same as for settings 1-3, the fraud monitoring system is set to "Fraud Monitoring A" for settings 1-3, and "Fraud Monitoring B" is set for settings 1-3. However, this is not limited to this. For example, five settings 1-5 corresponding to "jackpot probabilities" can be set, and if one excess setting occurs, a different fraud monitoring system can be set for that excess setting. For example, for setting 1', which is one excess setting, even though the "jackpot probabilities" and "small jackpot probabilities" are the same as for setting 1 of settings 1-5, the fraud monitoring system is set to "Fraud Monitoring A," and "Fraud Monitoring B" can be set for settings 1-5. Even in such cases, excess setting values can be effectively utilized.

In the above example, either "Fraud Monitoring A" or "Fraud Monitoring B" is set as the fraud monitoring system. However, any one of "Fraud Monitoring A," "Fraud Monitoring B," or "Fraud Monitoring C," which are different fraud monitoring systems, may also be set. The order of fraud monitoring is strengthened in "Fraud Monitoring C," "Fraud Monitoring B," and "Fraud Monitoring A." For example, suppose two settings, 1 and 2, are set corresponding to two types of "jackpot probability," and four surplus settings are generated. For example, setting values 1 and 2 are set for the fraud monitoring system "Fraud Monitoring A," and setting values 1' and 2' are set for "Fraud Monitoring B" even though the "jackpot probability" and "small jackpot probability" are the same. Alternatively, setting values 1" and 2'" are set for "Fraud Monitoring C" even though the "jackpot probability" and "small jackpot probability" are the same. In such cases, the surplus settings can be effectively utilized.

The above describes a case where the "jackpot probability" and "small hit probability" are set to the same value, but the fraud monitoring system is set to be different. However, information other than the "jackpot probability" and "small hit probability" may also be used, such as setting the operation system of all or some of the multiple role devices (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 or door frame 3 to be different. A sixth specific example of a case where the operation system of some of the multiple role devices (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 or door frame 3 is set to be different is described below.

As shown in FIG. 206, the sixth specific example differs from the first to fifth specific examples in which a "monitoring system for fraudulent activity" is set in that the operating system of a specific role (specific movable object) among the multiple roles (movable objects) provided on the gaming board 5 or door frame 3 is set to "specific role operation" for setting values 1 to 3, and "specific role operation not performed" for setting values 1' to 3'. In other words, in the sixth specific example, even though the "jackpot probability" and "small win probability" are set to the same values for setting values 1 and 1', setting values 2 and 2', and setting values 3 and 3', the operating system of the specific role (specific movable object) is set to either "specific role operation" or "specific role operation not performed." The multiple reels (movable objects) mounted on the game board 5 and door frame 3 can each be operated using a drive source such as a drive motor or solenoid. For example, the specific reel in this embodiment is comprised of the reel operation button unit 360 in the aforementioned reel operation unit 300, which is capable of raising and lowering using the aforementioned operating mechanism. Because the reel operation unit 300 is operated by direct contact with the player, it is more susceptible to malfunctions and failures than other reels. Furthermore, in the "with specific reel operation" mode, the specific reel is controlled to operate at a predetermined timing during the execution of a movable object effect involving the reel operation (the reel operation unit 300 raises and lowers), whereas in the "without specific reel operation" mode, the specific reel is controlled not to operate without executing a movable object effect involving the reel operation. For example, if a malfunction occurs in the operating mechanism of a specific reel and the specific reel no longer operates normally, selecting "without specific reel operation" can prevent the specific reel operation from ceasing midway, making it difficult to continue playing.

In this example, when a variation pattern is determined from among multiple variation patterns in which a movable object effect accompanied by the operation of a specific role is set, "with specific role operation" controls the specific role to operate at a predetermined timing during the execution of the movable object effect accompanied by the operation of the specific role, whereas "without specific role operation" controls the specific role not to operate without executing the movable object effect accompanied by the operation of the specific role. In contrast, the variation pattern table used to determine the variation pattern may be changed between "with specific role operation" and "without specific role operation." For example, "with specific role operation" may determine a variation pattern from among multiple variation patterns in which a movable object effect accompanied by the operation of a specific role is set, whereas "without specific role operation" may control the variation pattern not to determine a variation pattern in which a movable object effect accompanied by the operation of a specific role is set. Even in such cases, the same effect as above can be achieved by controlling the specific role not to operate without executing the movable object effect accompanied by the operation of the specific role in "without specific role operation."

In addition, in this example, if the operation configuration of the specific reel (specific movable object) is set to setting values 1 to 3, which indicate "specific reel operation," the initial operation of the specific reel will be performed when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed), whereas if it is set to setting values 1' to 3', which indicate "specific reel operation not occurring," the initial operation of the specific reel will not be performed when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed). This allows the user to recognize once again that a specific reel (specific movable object) among multiple reels (movable objects) has been removed from the operation targets. Furthermore, the operator can confirm whether the setting value for the operation of the specific reel (specific movable object) is what they intended, preventing situations where the operator mistakenly sets a value they did not intend.

In contrast to the above, if priority is given to checking for malfunctions related to the operation of specific reels (specific movable objects), in order to accurately notify this, the initial operation of the specific reels may be performed when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed) regardless of whether the setting is "specific reels operating" or "specific reels not operating."

Whether "specific feature operation" or "specific feature operation not performed" is set can be confirmed by the setting value displayed on the setting display 1310g, but notification may also be provided by means other than the setting display 1310g. For example, when the setting change of the setting value is complete, a notification of "specific feature operation performed/specific feature operation not performed" may be provided by an image, lamp, or speaker output from the effect display device 1600, or a notification to that effect may be provided on a standby screen during periods when play is not being performed, allowing the player to recognize whether a specific feature (specific movable object) among multiple features (movable objects) is the target of operation.

In addition, in this example, the operator can change the setting value to either "specific feature operation" or "specific feature operation not performed." However, after such an initial setting is made, the player may be able to change the initial setting to either "specific feature operation" or "specific feature operation not performed." For example, the player may be able to change the setting to either "specific feature operation" or "specific feature operation not performed" while the standby screen is displayed during a period when no game is being played. In other words, setting values 1 to 3 are set to "specific feature operation," and setting values 1' to 3' are set to "specific feature operation not performed." The main control MPU sends information about the setting values as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, causing the peripheral control board 1510 to execute one of the settings as the initial setting. However, if the player changes the setting after the initial setting, the setting changed by the player takes priority over the initial setting on the peripheral control board 1510.

Furthermore, the specific reel (specific movable object) among the multiple reels (movable objects) is not limited to the reel operation button unit 360 in the reel operation unit 300, but may be one provided on the game board 5 or door frame 3, or one that operates from outside the front of the screen of the reel display device 1600 toward the front of the screen. In this example, the operating mode of a specific reel (specific movable object) among the multiple reels (movable objects) can be changed by changing the setting value. However, it is not limited to specific reels, and it is also possible to change the operating mode of multiple reels (movable objects) or all reels, with the target reel set to either "reel operation" or "reel operation not occurring." Furthermore, reels (movable objects) may be provided not only on the game board 5 or door frame 3, but also on the outer frame 2 or main frame 4, and such reels may also be subject to changes in operating mode.

26. Fraud Monitoring
In this embodiment, various types of fraudulent activity are monitored in the fraudulent activity detection process of step S112 described above. Specifically, a magnetic sensor 2010 is provided to detect fraudulent activity, such as bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of a game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 and causing the ball to enter various winning holes or gates (gates) provided on the game board 5. The main control MPU determines whether or not there is fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 and monitors fraudulent activity caused by the magnet. In addition, a vibration sensor is provided to detect fraudulent activity, such as shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 to apply vibration to the pachinko machine 1 and thereby changing the course of a game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 and causing the ball to enter various winning holes or gates (gates) provided on the game board 5. The main control MPU determines whether or not there is fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor and monitors fraudulent activity caused by vibration. The monitoring of these fraudulent acts is performed in different ways depending on whether the operation is normal or when a setting value is being changed or a confirmation display of the setting value is being performed.

[26-1. Regarding fraud monitoring during normal times]
First, the monitoring of fraudulent activities during normal times will be explained below. Here, normal times refers to a state in which the main frame 4 is closed, and no setting changes or confirmation displays for setting values are being made, and games such as symbol fluctuations, big win games, and small win games can be played.

In this example, the magnetic sensors 2010 used to detect magnetic fraud include a setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a capable of detecting magnetic fields generated around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switches 1311a located on the rear side of the gaming board 5, and a play area unit magnetic sensor 2010b capable of detecting magnetic fields generated in front of the play area 5a located on the front side of the gaming board 5. Under normal circumstances, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a is used to monitor fraudulent activities in a specified area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, under normal circumstances, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a monitors whether magnetic fields that should not be generated (magnetic fields due to unauthorized access) are generated (whether a magnet is approaching) in the area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 where the setting change board 1311 and setting key switches 1311a are located, and monitors for fraudulent activities such as attempts by someone other than the person who is changing the setting values or displaying confirmation information to change the settings or displaying confirmation information. One example of fraudulent activity using a magnet on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is to install a metal fraudulent device and a magnet that indirectly operates the metal fraudulent device inside the island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (in a space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed), and then operate the magnet and metal fraudulent device through a small gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment or through an opening made by destroying part of the pachinko machine 1, to fraudulently access the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Note that when a detection signal is input from the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a during the fraud detection process in step S112, it is determined that fraudulent activity using a magnet has been committed in the area where the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a are located.

Similarly, during normal operation, the play area magnetic sensor 2010b is used to monitor for fraudulent activity in a specified area on the surface of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, during normal operation, the play area magnetic sensor 2010b monitors whether magnetic fields that should not normally occur (magnetic fields due to fraudulent access) have been generated (whether a magnet has approached) in the area in front of the play area 5a, and monitors for fraudulent activity such as changing the path of the game ball B flowing down the play area 5a to cause it to enter various winning holes or gates (gates) provided on the game board 5. Note that when a detection signal is input from the play area magnetic sensor 2010b during the fraud detection process in step S112, it is determined that fraudulent activity using a magnet is being performed in the area in front of the play area 5a.

In this example, two magnetic sensors 2010 are provided to detect magnetic fraud: a setting operation section magnetic sensor 2010a and a play area magnetic sensor 2010b. However, these two magnetic sensors 2010a and 2010b may have the same performance. That is, although not shown, these two magnetic sensors 2010a and 2010b are configured as rectangular box-shaped sensor bodies, and are capable of magnetic detection within a first magnetic detection area with strong vertical sensitivity to one side, and a second magnetic detection area with strong vertical sensitivity to the other opposite side. Note that "strong vertical sensitivity" means that sensitivity is stronger in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction to each side, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity at all in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection areas emitted from each side are large areas surrounded by a sphere. The game area magnetic sensor 2010b is positioned so that the first and second magnetic detection areas emanating from the sides of the sensor body extend left-right or up-down when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1, allowing it to monitor a wide area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, multiple locations among the prize slots such as the first start slot 2002, the second start slot 2004, the regular prize slot 2003, and the special prize slot 2005, as well as other major areas of the ball flow path). Meanwhile, the setting operation magnetic sensor 2010a is positioned so that the first and second magnetic detection areas emanating from the sides of the sensor body extend forward-backward when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1, and one of the magnetic detection areas encompasses the back side of the pachinko machine 1, allowing it to monitor the area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 where the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a are located.

It is also possible to have an embodiment in which the two magnetic sensors 2010a, 2010b do not have the same performance. For example, instead of magnetic sensors 2010a, 2010b, a single magnetic sensor can be provided that can identify the location where the magnetism is generated (whether it is around the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a located at the rear of the gaming board 5, or in front of the playing area 5a located at the front of the gaming board 5). Even with this configuration, it is possible to monitor whether a magnet is approaching the area where the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a is located, or the area in front of the playing area 5a.

In addition, in this example, vibration sensors for detecting fraudulent activity due to vibration are provided: a setting operation unit vibration sensor capable of detecting vibrations occurring around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located on the rear of the gaming board 5; and a game area vibration sensor capable of detecting vibrations occurring around the third distribution device 2550 of the center role 2500 provided on the gaming board 5. Under normal circumstances, fraudulent activity is monitored using the setting operation unit vibration sensor. In other words, under normal circumstances, the setting operation unit vibration sensor monitors whether vibrations that should not occur (vibrations due to fraudulent access) have been applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a are provided, and monitors for fraudulent activity such as attempts by someone other than the person changing the setting value or displaying a confirmation. In addition, during the fraud detection process in step S112, when a detection signal is input from the setting operation unit vibration sensor, it is determined that fraudulent activity is being committed by vibration in the area where the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a is located.

On the other hand, during normal play, the game area vibration sensor is used to monitor for fraudulent activity only during small win play; it is not used to monitor for fraudulent activity during play other than small win play. This is because, during small win play, the third distribution device 2550 distributes game ball B, which is distributed to the second V winning port by the second distribution device 2540, to either the second V winning port 2008 or the losing side. However, if vibration is applied to the third distribution device 2550, it becomes possible to change the course of game ball B in the third distribution device 2550, causing game ball B to enter the second V winning port 2008, and this is to prevent such fraudulent activity. In other words, during normal play when a small win occurs, the game area vibration sensor monitors whether vibrations that should not occur (vibrations due to unauthorized access) have been applied to the third distribution device 2550, and monitors for fraudulent activity such as changing the path of game ball B in the third distribution device 2550 to cause game ball B to enter the second V winning slot 2008. Note that when a detection signal is input from the game area vibration sensor in the fraud detection process of step S112, it is determined that fraudulent activity using vibrations is being committed against the third distribution device 2550.

In this example, two vibration sensors are provided to detect fraudulent activity caused by vibration: a setting operation section vibration sensor and a game area vibration sensor. However, it is also possible to provide a single vibration sensor that can identify the location where the vibration occurred (whether it was around the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a located at the rear of the game board 5, or around the third distribution device 2550 of the center device 2500 provided on the game board 5). Even with this configuration, it is possible to monitor whether vibration has been applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a is provided, or whether vibration has been applied to the third distribution device 2550.

In addition, under normal circumstances, in the launch permission signal setting process of step S113, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to inform the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of game ball B is permitted, making it possible to launch game ball B when the player operates the handle 182.

In addition, under normal circumstances, when game ball B enters a winning slot such as first start slot 2002, second start slot 2004, normal winning slot 2003, or large winning slot 2005, the main control MPU inputs a detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor and treats the detection of game ball B as valid. Specifically, if the detection of game ball B is disabled, for example, even if game ball B enters first start slot 2002 or second start slot 2004, no pattern change occurs and game ball B is not paid out. However, if the detection of game ball B is enabled, when game ball B enters first start slot 2002 or second start slot 2004, the pattern change occurs and game ball B can be paid out.

In addition, under normal circumstances, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light-emitting elements such as lamps and the screen of the effect display device 1600, except for the period when an effect is being executed using the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 while the pattern is changing. Specifically, by operating the press operation unit 303, an image for adjustment is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the volume and light amount can be adjusted by rotating the rotation operation unit 302. Note that during the period when an effect is being executed using the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 while the pattern is changing, the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 is in a standby state waiting to be operated for that effect, so this is a prohibited period during which the volume and light amount cannot be adjusted even if the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 is operated.

[26-2. Monitoring for fraudulent changes to setting values]
Next, monitoring of fraudulent activity while changing the setting value will be described with reference to Fig. 207. Fig. 207 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraudulent activity while changing the setting value.

When changing the setting value, first, with the pachinko machine 1 not powered on (the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 cut off), the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 (timing t1), then the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a into setting key ON (timing t2). Next, the power switch 630a is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1 (timing t3), entering a state in which the setting value can be changed (change permitted state). In this change-permitted state, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button, the setting value (setting values 1 to 6) can be changed each time the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed, and then the setting key cylinder is rotated counterclockwise 120 degrees to perform a second ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a into the determination key ON state, and then the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise 60 degrees from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the determination key ON back to its original position to turn the setting key switch 1311a into the OFF state (timing t4). In other words, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value can be changed (change-permitted state), but after timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting value cannot be changed (change-disabled state). Then, by removing the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2 (timing t5), the machine becomes ready to play.

In this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at time t3, the main control MPU initiates the main control power-on processing (see Figures 142 and 143). However, the setting change processing of step S37 is not terminated until the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at time t4 (step S222 of the setting change processing does not determine that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned OFF). During the period from time t3 to time t4, the interrupt permission setting of the subsequent step S52 is prohibited, delaying the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting of step S52 compared to normal power-on. Furthermore, the main control timer interrupt processing (see Figure 144) is not initiated until the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is performed. Therefore, the switch input processing of step S104, the fraud detection processing of step S112, and the launch permission signal setting processing of step S113 in the main control timer interrupt processing are not executed and remain in a standby state. In other words, the period from timing t3 to timing t4 is a special period in which it is possible to change the setting values (change permitted state), but fraudulent activity monitoring is not performed, game ball B is not permitted to be released, and the input of a detection signal when game ball B enters a winning slot is not validated. During the change permitted state from timing t3 to timing t4, information regarding the setting value being changed is output to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via external terminal board 558 of pachinko machine 1, allowing hall staff to know that the setting is being changed.

Specifically, during the change-permitted state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, neither fraudulent activity monitoring using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a nor fraudulent activity monitoring using the play area magnetic sensor 2010b is performed. This is because, during the change-permitted state, the authorized operator changing the setting values operates the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z is in a state where it functions as a setting switch button), leaving no room for anyone other than the authorized operator changing the setting values to engage in fraudulent activity using magnets. Furthermore, even if the authorized operator changing the setting values is holding something that can generate magnetism when changing the setting values, this prevents the unauthorized operator from detecting the use of a magnet as fraudulent activity and suppresses interference with authorized setting change operations.

Similarly, during the change-permitted state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring for fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor and monitoring for fraudulent activity using the play area vibration sensor are not performed at all. This is because, during the change-permitted state, the authorized operator changing the setting values operates the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z is in a state where it functions as a setting switch button), leaving no room for anyone other than the authorized operator changing the settings to engage in fraudulent activity using vibration. Furthermore, even if the authorized operator changing the settings applies vibration when changing the setting values, this prevents it from being detected as fraudulent activity using vibration, and prevents interference with authorized setting change operations.

In addition, during the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the logic of the launch permission signal that informs the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of game ball B is permitted is not set, and the launch of game ball B is prohibited. This prevents game ball B from being launched even if an authorized operator who changes the setting values touches the handle 182, thereby preventing interference with authorized setting change work. Furthermore, even if a player operates the handle 182 during the change permission state, game ball B cannot be launched.

Furthermore, during the change-permitted state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, when game ball B enters a prize entry port or various gate sections (gates) such as first start port 2002, second start port 2004, normal prize entry port 2003, or large prize entry port 2005, the main control MPU does not input a detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor, and the detection of game ball B is treated as invalid. It is also possible to prevent game ball B from being detected by the detection sensor at all, or to input a detection signal from the detection sensor but treat it as invalid. In this way, when the detection of game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if game ball B enters first start port 2002 or second start port 2004, no lottery drawing, no symbol change, and no payout of game ball B will be performed. This means that even if game ball B enters first start port 2002 or second start port 2004 for some reason during the normal operation of changing the setting value, game progress can be suppressed.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, during the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to the winning slots, gates, etc., and at the same time, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from the detection sensor corresponding to the outlet 1008, so that detection of game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when detection of game ball B discharged from the outlet 1008 is invalidated, for example, game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the change permission state can be excluded from being measured (subject to addition to the number of outs counter) by the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h, thereby preventing a situation in which game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to a sling (ball jam) or the like is detected in the change permission state and measured (added to the number of outs counter) by the base monitor 1310h.

In addition, during the change-permitted state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the volume output from the speaker or the amount of light output from light-emitting elements such as lamps and the screen of the performance display device 1600 cannot be adjusted.

In addition, during the change-permitted state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and a setting change notification (setting change-related notification) is issued to notify the user that a setting change is in progress via images, lamps, and speaker output from the effect display device 1600. The setting change notification is issued by repeating the audio message "Settings are being changed," displaying the message "Settings are being changed!", and illuminating lamps in colors corresponding to the setting values 1 through 6 during the selection operation process. This setting change notification is an announcement (effect) that is only issued in the change-permitted state, and is executed with priority over the main frame open notification that is issued when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2. In other words, when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, a main frame open notification (such as a display or audio message saying "Frame is open") is normally issued, but in the change-permitted state, the setting change notification is executed with top priority without issuing the main frame open notification. Additionally, one example is where the main body frame open notification and the setting change notification are executed in parallel, with the setting change notification taking priority over the main body frame open notification, and the main body frame open notification is executed after the setting change notification has finished.

Furthermore, during the change-permitted state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting change notification described above is notified by the function display unit 1400 in addition to the images, lamps, and speaker output from the effect display device 1600. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 is equipped with a status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal hold indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special hold number indicator, and round indicator, as well as a setting change indicator consisting of a single LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change-permitted state), and a confirmation display indicator consisting of a single LED that indicates that the setting value is being confirmed (confirmation display state). Furthermore, during the change-permitted state, only the LED of the setting change indicator on the function display unit 1400 is lit, and all other indicator LEDs are turned off. As a result, during the change-permitted state, the notification from the function display unit 1400 allows the player to know that gameplay will not proceed.

Furthermore, at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting change process of step S37 in the main control power-on process (see Figures 142 and 143) is terminated (step S222 of the setting change process determines that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned OFF), and the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is performed. Then, the main control timer interrupt process (see Figure 144) can be started, and the switch input process of step S104, the fraud detection process of step S112, and the launch permission signal setting process of step S113 in the main control timer interrupt process are performed. However, in this embodiment, until the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), the launch of game ball B is not permitted, and a detection signal is not input when game ball B enters the winning slot, so a state in which game play cannot be started is maintained. In other words, during the period from timing t4 to timing t5, even if game ball B is entered into the winning slot through fraudulent activity, no detection signal will be input, and no fraudulent advantage can be obtained during this period. Also, because there is a possibility of the main frame 4 being subjected to an impact that closes against the outer frame 2, monitoring for fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, the play area unit magnetic sensor 2010b, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the play area unit vibration sensor are all in a standby state and have not yet been performed.

Furthermore, from the time t5 when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, it becomes possible to launch the game ball B, and games such as symbol changes, big win games, and small win games can be played, and monitoring for various types of fraudulent activity begins as explained above in [Fraud monitoring during normal operation].

Furthermore, during the period from timing t4 to timing t5, the main frame 4 is not closed relative to the outer frame 2, and an image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600 notifying that the device is waiting for play to begin (game standby notification). Then, during the predetermined period from timing t5, the main frame 4 has been closed relative to the outer frame 2, and an image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600 notifying that it is now possible to begin play, such as pattern variation, jackpot play, and small jackpot play (game start notification).

In this example, during the period that includes the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (which may be the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4), the logic of the launch permission signal that informs the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of game ball B is permitted is not set. However, in consideration of the possibility of inspecting the launch operation using the handle 182 in the change permission state, the logic of the launch permission signal may be set during that period so that game ball B can be launched when the operator operates the handle 182. However, during the period that includes the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (which may be the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4), it is desirable to only permit the launch of game ball B and to prevent a detection signal from being input even if game ball B enters the various winning openings or gate sections (gates) so that the game does not proceed improperly.

In addition, in this example, during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (which may be the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4), the logic of the launch permission signal that signals permission to launch game ball B to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set, and game ball B is enabled to be launched from timing t5 (which may be timing t4). However, when the change permission state ends and handle 182 is operated (touched) for the first time after the launch of game ball B is permitted, a post-setting change notification is issued to notify that the setting value has been changed in the change permission state. The post-setting change notification is implemented by an audio message stating "Settings have been changed," a message displaying "Settings have been changed," and a lamp illumination. Furthermore, this post-setting change notification is implemented when handle 182 is operated (touched) for the first time after the setting value has been changed by fraudulent means other than the authorized operator who changes the setting value. As a result, if a notification is issued after a setting change even though the authorized operator who made the setting change did not actually make the change, it will become known to the outside world that the setting change was made through fraudulent activity, providing a strong deterrent against fraudulent activity.

In addition, in this example, during the period that includes the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (which may be the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4), the logic of the launch permission signal that informs the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of game ball B is permitted is not set, and game ball B is enabled to be launched from timing t5 (which may be timing t4). However, if the handle 182 has been operated (contact with the handle 182) before the launch permission of game ball B, game ball B will not be launched unless the contact with the handle 182 is released (contact detection is turned OFF) and the handle 182 is contacted (operated) again after the launch permission of game ball B. In other words, even if the contact with the handle 182 was ON before timing t5, unless an edge where the contact detection for the handle 182 changes from OFF to ON is detected after timing t5, the continued contact with the handle 182 is invalidated and game ball B is not launched. This ensures that even if an authorized operator changing the setting value comes into contact with the handle 182 when opening the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, the game ball B will not be inadvertently released when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, thereby reliably preventing losses to the player.

Also, different from the above, in consideration of speeding up the start of game play upon the end of the change permission state, if the handle 182 is being operated before game ball B is permitted to be launched, contact with the handle 182 may be continued, enabling that continued contact with the handle 182 to be valid so that game ball B can be launched from the point at which game ball B is permitted to be launched. In such a case, the handle 182 can be operated before the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 to prepare for the launch of game ball B, and game play can begin immediately after the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2.

In addition, in this example, from time t5, when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the game ball B can be released and games such as symbol change, jackpot play, and small jackpot play can be played. However, the game may be played immediately from time t4, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. In other words, from time t4, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the game ball B can be released and games such as symbol change, jackpot play, and small jackpot play can be played. Monitoring for fraudulent activity may be performed as described above in the "Monitoring for fraudulent activity during normal operation" section. In this configuration, during the period from time t4 to time t5, the main frame 4 is not closed against the outer frame 2, but an image (game start notification) may be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600 to notify players that it is now possible to start games such as symbol change, jackpot play, and small jackpot play.

As another example, after power is turned on, before the setting change process of step S37 is started, at least the processes equivalent to the switch input process of step S104, the fraud detection process of step S112, and the launch permission signal setting process of step S113 may be performed in advance. With this configuration, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value is being changed (change permission state), but fraudulent activity is not monitored, game ball B is not allowed to be launched, and the input of the detection signal when game ball B enters the winning slot may not be validated.

In the above-mentioned alternative example, during the change-permitted state from timing t3 to timing t4 (which may include the change-permitted state from timing t3 to timing t5), the magnetic sensor 2010 or vibration sensor may be used to monitor for fraudulent activity, but when an abnormality such as magnetic interference or vibration is detected, notification of the abnormal state may not be provided. Normally, when it is determined that fraudulent activity involving magnets or vibrations is occurring, the values of the magnet counter or vibration counter are incremented by 1. However, during the change-permitted state from timing t3 to timing t4 (which may include the change-permitted state from timing t3 to timing t5), the values of the magnet counter or vibration counter may not be incremented even if it is determined that fraudulent activity involving magnets or vibrations is occurring. Even with this configuration, even if the authorized operator who is changing the setting value brings a magnet close or applies vibrations when changing the setting value, no notification or increment is provided as fraudulent activity involving magnets or vibrations, preventing fraudulent activity monitoring from interfering with setting value changes.

Note that the various processes related to the change-permitted state described above may be selectable and configurable for each amusement parlor, as various needs may exist depending on the environment of the amusement parlor. For example, when the power is turned on with the normal RAM clear switch operation, rather than in the change-permitted state (since the RWM clear button 633z is set to function as a RAM clear switch, when the power is turned on while operating the pressing operation section of the RWM clear button 633z), a state is created in which the amusement parlor's staff can select which settings to use for the various processes related to the change-permitted state. When the change-permitted state is subsequently established, the various processes related to the change-permitted state are executed with the selected settings. This allows amusement parlor A to disable fraud monitoring in the change-permitted state while enabling contact with the handle 182, while amusement parlor B can disable fraud monitoring in the change-permitted state and disable contact with the handle 182. This allows the amusement parlor to meet its needs, such as whether or not to inspect the firing operation using the handle 182 in the change-permitted state.

[26-3. Regarding fraud monitoring during confirmation display of setting values]
In the above, it has been explained that fraudulent activity monitoring is not performed while changing the setting value, but fraudulent activity monitoring while the setting value is being displayed for confirmation may be configured to either not monitor fraudulent activity while the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, or to monitor fraudulent activity to a certain extent. First, a case where fraudulent activity is not monitored while the setting value is being displayed for confirmation will be described with reference to FIG. 208. FIG. 208 is a time chart showing the fraudulent activity monitoring state when fraudulent activity is not monitored while the setting value is being displayed for confirmation.

To display and confirm the currently set value, first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and that no symbol changes are occurring (no reserved balls are on hold), then release the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2 (timing t5). Next, insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder slot of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, just as when changing the setting, to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON (timing t6). At this time, the setting display 1310g displays the current setting value (the value among setting values 1 through 6 set at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a was turned ON (first ON operation)). Then, rotate the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original position to turn it OFF (timing t7), switching the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting value to not displaying it. In other words, from time t6 to time t7, the setting value confirmation display is on (confirmation display state), but after time t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting value confirmation display is no longer on (unconfirmable state). Then, by removing the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2 (time t8), the machine is ready to play.

At timing t6 when the setting key switch 1311a is set to setting key ON, the setting display 1310g is configured not to display the current setting value unless prize balls or other game balls B have been paid out. Even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, if prize balls or other game balls B have been paid out, the setting key switch 1311a may not be set to setting key ON (the setting key may remain OFF), or after the payout of prize balls or other game balls B has been completed, the setting key switch 1311a may be set to setting key ON and the setting display 1310g may display the current setting value.

As another example, when displaying a confirmation of the currently set setting value, as in the case of changing the setting value, the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and the setting key is inserted into the socket of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a into setting key ON, and the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1, thereby entering a state (confirmation display state) in which the setting value can be displayed for confirmation. Furthermore, when the power switch 630a is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1, if the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch (since the RWM clear button 633z is set to function as the RAM clear switch, turning on the power while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z) will transition to a state in which the setting value can be changed (change permitted state), while turning on the power without operating the RAM clear switch will transition to a state in which a confirmation display of the setting value can be displayed (confirmation display state). In this configuration, turning on the power without operating the setting key switch 1311a and operating the RAM clear switch will transition to a state in which a confirmation display of the setting value is displayed (confirmation display state), and this state in which a confirmation display of the setting value is displayed (confirmation display state) corresponds to the period from timing t6 to timing t7.

In this example, the period from timing t6 to timing t7 is a state in which the setting value confirmation display is being performed (confirmation display state), but this is a special period in which monitoring for fraudulent activity is not performed, game ball B is not permitted to be released, and the input of a detection signal when game ball B enters the winning slot is not validated. During the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7, information regarding the setting value confirmation display is being performed is output to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, allowing hall staff to know that the confirmation display is being performed.

Specifically, during the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, neither fraudulent activity monitoring using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a nor fraudulent activity monitoring using the play area magnetic sensor 2010b is performed. This is because, during the confirmation display state, the authorized operator performing the setting value confirmation display is operating the setting key switch 1311a, leaving no room for anyone other than the authorized operator performing the setting value confirmation display to perform fraudulent activity using a magnet. Furthermore, even if the authorized operator performing the setting value confirmation display is holding something that can generate magnetism when performing the setting value confirmation display, this prevents detection of fraudulent activity using a magnet and suppresses interference with authorized confirmation display work.

Similarly, during the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, monitoring for fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor and monitoring for fraudulent activity using the play area vibration sensor are not performed. This is because, during the confirmation display state, the authorized operator performing the setting value confirmation display is operating the setting key switch 1311a, leaving no room for anyone other than the authorized operator performing the confirmation display to perform fraudulent activity using vibration. Furthermore, even if the authorized operator performing the confirmation display applies vibration when performing the setting value confirmation display, this prevents this from being detected as fraudulent activity using vibration, and prevents interference with authorized confirmation display work.

In addition, during the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the logic of the launch permission signal that informs the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of game ball B is permitted is not set, and the launch of game ball B is prohibited. This prevents game ball B from being launched even if an authorized operator who is performing the setting value confirmation display touches the handle 182, thereby preventing interference with authorized confirmation display work. Furthermore, even if a player were to operate the handle 182 during the confirmation display state, game ball B would not be able to be launched.

In addition, during the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7, when game ball B enters a prize entry port or various gate sections (gates) such as first start port 2002, second start port 2004, normal prize entry port 2003, or large prize entry port 2005, even if the main control MPU inputs a detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor, the detection of game ball B is treated as invalid. It is also possible to prevent game ball B from being detected by the detection sensor at all, or to prevent the input of a detection signal from the detection sensor. In this way, when game ball B detection is invalid, for example, even if game ball B enters first start port 2002 or second start port 2004, no lottery drawing, pattern change, or payout of game ball B will be performed. This means that even if game ball B enters first start port 2002 or second start port 2004 for some reason during the normal operation of displaying the confirmation of the setting value, game progress can be suppressed.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, during the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to the winning slots, gate sections (gates), etc., and at the same time, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from the detection sensor corresponding to the outlet 1008, so that detection of game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when detection of game ball B discharged from the outlet 1008 is invalidated, for example, game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the confirmation display state can be excluded from being measured (subject to addition to the out counter) by the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h, thereby preventing a situation in which game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to a sling (ball jam) or the like is detected in the confirmation display state and measured (added to the out counter) by the base monitor 1310h.

In addition, during the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, even if the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the volume output from the speaker or the amount of light output from light-emitting elements such as lamps and the screen of the performance display device 1600 cannot be adjusted.

During the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and a confirmation display notification (confirmation display-related notification) is issued via output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600, notifying the user that the setting value confirmation display is in progress. The confirmation display notification is implemented by repeating the audio message "Confirmation display in progress," displaying the message "Confirmation display in progress!", and illuminating the lamp in a color corresponding to the setting value 1 through 6 during the confirmation process. This confirmation display notification is an notification (effect) that is only issued in the confirmation display state, and is executed with priority over the main frame open notification that is issued when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2. In other words, when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, a main frame open notification (such as a display or audio message that reads "Frame is open") is normally issued, but in the confirmation display state, the confirmation display notification is executed with top priority without issuing the main frame open notification. Additionally, one example is where the main body frame open notification and the confirmation display in progress notification are executed in parallel, with the confirmation display in progress notification taking priority over the main body frame open notification, and the main body frame open notification is executed after the confirmation display in progress notification has ended.

Furthermore, during the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the above-mentioned confirmation display notification is notified by the function display unit 1400 in addition to the images, lamps, and speaker output from the effect display device 1600. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 is equipped with a status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal hold indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special hold number indicator, and round indicator, as well as a setting change indicator consisting of a single LED that indicates that a setting value is being changed (change permitted state), and a confirmation display indicator consisting of a single LED that indicates that a confirmation display of the setting value is being displayed (confirmation display state). Furthermore, during the confirmation display state, only the LED of the confirmation display indicator on the function display unit 1400 is lit, and all other indicator LEDs are turned off. As a result, during the confirmation display state, the notification from the function display unit 1400 allows the player to know that play will not proceed.

In addition, during the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7 (which may include the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8), when game ball B enters a prize slot such as first start slot 2002, second start slot 2004, normal prize slot 2003, or large prize slot 2005, even if the main control MPU receives a detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor, the detection of game ball B is treated as invalid. However, if such a detection signal is received, a warning effect C is executed, using images, lamps, and output from the effect display device 1600, to notify the player that game ball B has illegally entered a prize slot, even though the launch of game ball B is not permitted and game ball B would not enter a prize slot during this period. This warning effect C is executed with priority over the confirmation display in progress notification and main frame open notification. In other words, when warning effect C is executed, warning effect C is executed with top priority, without issuing a confirmation display in progress notification or main frame open notification.

Furthermore, during the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7, the launch of game ball B is not permitted, and a detection signal is not input when game ball B enters the winning slot, and game play cannot begin. However, this state is maintained until the main frame 4 is subsequently closed against the outer frame 2 (timing t8). In other words, during the period from timing t7 to timing t8, even if game ball B is fraudulently entered into the winning slot, no detection signal is input, and no fraudulent gains can be obtained. Also, because there is a possibility of impact from closing the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2, the system is in a standby state where monitoring for fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, the play area magnetic sensor 2010b, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, and the play area vibration sensor have not yet been performed.

Furthermore, from the time t8 when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, it becomes possible to fire game ball B, allowing for games such as symbol changes, jackpot games, and small jackpot games, and monitoring for various types of fraudulent activity begins as described in the above-mentioned [Regarding fraudulent activity monitoring during normal operation]. Furthermore, even before the time t6 when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is set to setting key ON, it becomes possible to fire game ball B, allowing for games such as symbol changes, jackpot games, and small jackpot games, and monitoring for various types of fraudulent activity begins as described in the above-mentioned [Regarding fraudulent activity monitoring during normal operation].

Furthermore, during the period from timing t7 to timing t8, the main frame 4 is not closed relative to the outer frame 2, and an image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600 notifying the player that the device is waiting for play to begin (game standby notification). Then, during the predetermined period from timing t8, the main frame 4 has been closed relative to the outer frame 2, and an image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600 notifying the player that it is now possible to begin play, such as pattern fluctuations, big win play, and small win play (game start notification).

Furthermore, under normal circumstances when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a should not be in a state where the setting key is turned ON. However, if such a state occurs, warning effects A and B are executed through images, lamps, and speaker output from the effect display device 1600 to notify the player that the setting key has been improperly turned ON. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is in a state where the setting key is turned ON while symbols are changing normally (timing t1), warning effect A is executed until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF state (timing t2). Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is in a state where the setting key is turned ON while symbols are not changing normally (timing t3), warning effect B is executed until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF state (timing t4). Furthermore, warning effects A and B are executed with priority over any currently running effects. In other words, when warning effects A and B are executed, the currently executing effect is stopped and warning effects A and B are executed as the highest priority, regardless of whether or not a pattern change is occurring. Note that warning effects A and B are executed in the same manner, but they may also be executed in different manners so that it is possible to determine whether or not a pattern change is occurring.

Furthermore, if magnetic or vibration generation is detected during the period when fraudulent activity using magnets or vibrations is monitored, an abnormality occurrence effect is executed for a predetermined period of time via images, lamps, and speaker output from the effect display device 1600 to notify the player that an abnormal condition caused by magnetic or vibration generation has occurred. Furthermore, the abnormality occurrence effect notifies the player of the nature of the abnormality (whether magnetic or vibration generation was detected) and the location where the abnormality was detected (whether the area where the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a is located, the area in front of the play area 5a, or the area surrounding the third sorting device 2550) depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, the play area magnetic sensor 2010b, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, or the play area vibration sensor detected the abnormality. Furthermore, the abnormality occurrence effect is executed with priority over any currently running effects. In other words, when the abnormality occurrence effect is executed, the currently running effect is stopped and the abnormality occurrence effect is executed with top priority, regardless of whether a pattern change is occurring or not.

In this example, during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (which may be the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7), the logic of the launch permission signal that informs the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of game ball B is permitted is not set. However, in consideration of the possibility of inspecting the launch operation using the handle 182 in the confirmation display state, the logic of the launch permission signal may be set during that period so that game ball B can be launched when the operator operates the handle 182. However, during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (which may be the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7), it is desirable to only permit the launch of game ball B and not input a detection signal even if game ball B enters various winning openings or gate sections (gates) so that the game does not proceed improperly.

In addition, in this example, during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (which may be the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7), the logic of the launch permission signal that signals permission to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to launch game ball B is not set, and game ball B is enabled to be launched from timing t8 (which may be timing t7). However, if the handle 182 is being operated (contact with the handle 182) before the launch permission of game ball B, game ball B will not be launched unless the user releases contact with the handle 182 (turns contact detection OFF) and then contacts (operates) the handle 182 again after the launch permission of game ball B. In other words, even if the contact with the handle 182 was ON before timing t8, unless an edge is detected after timing t8 where the contact detection for the handle 182 changes from OFF to ON, the continued contact with the handle 182 is invalidated and game ball B is not launched. This ensures that even if an authorized operator checking the setting value comes into contact with the handle 182 when opening the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, the game ball B will not be inadvertently released when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, reliably preventing losses to the player.

Also, different from the above, in consideration of speeding up the start of game play upon the end of the confirmation display state, if the handle 182 is operated before game ball B is permitted to be launched, contact with the handle 182 may be continued, and this continued contact with the handle 182 may be enabled so that game ball B can be launched from the point at which it is permitted to be launched. In such a case, the handle 182 can be operated before the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 to prepare for the launch of game ball B, and game play can begin immediately after the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2.

In addition, in this example, from time t8, when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the game ball B can be released and games such as symbol change, jackpot play, and small jackpot play can be played. However, the game may also be played immediately at time t7, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. In other words, from time t7, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the game ball B can be released and games such as symbol change, jackpot play, and small jackpot play can be played. Monitoring for fraudulent activity may be performed as described above in the "Monitoring for fraudulent activity during normal operation" section. In this configuration, during the period from time t7 to time t8, the main frame 4 is not closed against the outer frame 2, but an image (game start notification) may be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600 to notify players that it is now possible to start games such as symbol change, jackpot play, and small jackpot play.

As another example, during the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7 (which may include the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8), the magnetic sensor 2010 or vibration sensor may be used to monitor for fraudulent activity, but if an abnormality such as magnetic interference or vibration is detected, the device may be configured not to notify the user of the abnormality. Normally, when it is determined that fraudulent activity involving a magnet or vibration is occurring, the values of the magnet strike counter and vibration strike counter are incremented by 1. However, during the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7 (which may include the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8), the magnet strike counter and vibration strike counter may not be incremented even if it is determined that fraudulent activity involving a magnet or vibration is occurring. Even with this configuration, even if the authorized operator who is performing the confirmation display brings a magnet close or applies vibration when performing the setting value confirmation display, no notification or increment is made as a fraudulent activity involving a magnet or vibration, preventing fraud monitoring from interfering with the setting value confirmation display.

Note that the various processes related to the confirmation display state described above may be selectable and configurable for each amusement parlor, as various needs may exist depending on the environment of the amusement parlor. For example, when powering on the facility with the normal RAM clear switch operation, rather than the confirmation display state (since the RWM clear button 633z is set to function as a RAM clear switch, powering on the facility while operating the RWM clear button 633z's pressing operation section), a state is created in which the amusement parlor's staff can select which settings to use for the various processes related to the confirmation display state. When the confirmation display state is subsequently generated, the various processes related to the confirmation display state are executed with the selected settings. This allows amusement parlor A to disable fraud monitoring in the confirmation display state while enabling touching the handle 182, while amusement parlor B can disable fraud monitoring in the confirmation display state and disable touching the handle 182. This allows the facility to meet its needs, such as whether or not to inspect the firing operation using the handle 182 in the confirmation display state.

Next, the case where fraudulent activity is partially monitored while the setting values are being displayed for confirmation will be described with reference to Figure 209. Figure 209 is a time chart showing the fraudulent activity monitoring status when fraudulent activity is partially monitored while the setting values are being displayed for confirmation. Here, the differences from the case where fraudulent activity is not being monitored while the setting values are being displayed for confirmation will be described below.

In this example, the period from timing t6 to timing t7 is a state in which the setting value confirmation display is being displayed (confirmation display state), but this is a special period in which game ball B is not permitted to be released and the input of a detection signal is not validated when game ball B enters the winning slot. Furthermore, of the fraudulent acts, only fraudulent acts against the area where the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a are located are monitored.

Specifically, during the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, fraudulent activity is not monitored using the play area magnetic sensor 2010b, but fraudulent activity is monitored using the setting operation magnetic sensor 2010a. This is because, during the confirmation display state, the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, and an authorized operator who performs the setting value confirmation display operates the setting key switch 1311a. However, this is to eliminate the possibility of a malfunction, such as an unauthorized change of the setting value, caused by an unauthorized act by someone other than the authorized operator who performs the setting value confirmation display bringing a magnet close to the area where the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a is located.

On the other hand, during the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, no detection signal is input even if game ball B is fraudulently placed in the winning slot, and since this is a period during which no fraudulent benefits can be obtained, there is no need to monitor for fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor 2010b.

Fraudulent activity is monitored using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a not only during the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7, but also during the period up to timing t8 when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2. In other words, when monitoring for fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, monitoring is always performed on the area where the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a are located, regardless of whether the operation is normal, whether the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, or whether the setting key switch 1311a is in the confirmation display state with the setting key ON.

Similarly, during the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, fraudulent activity is not monitored using the play area vibration sensor, but is monitored using the setting operation vibration sensor. This is because, during the confirmation display state, the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, and the authorized operator who performs the setting value confirmation display operates the setting key switch 1311a. However, this is to eliminate the possibility of a malfunction, such as an unauthorized change of the setting value, caused by an unauthorized act by someone other than the authorized operator who performs the setting value confirmation display applying vibration to the setting change board 1311 or the area where the setting key switch 1311a is located.

On the other hand, during the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, no detection signal is input even if game ball B is fraudulently placed in the winning slot, and since this is a period during which no fraudulent benefits can be obtained, there is no need to monitor for fraudulent activity using the game area vibration sensor.

Fraudulent activity is monitored using the setting operation unit vibration sensor not only during the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7, but also during the period up until timing t8 when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2. In other words, when monitoring for fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor, monitoring is always performed on the area where the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a are located, regardless of whether the operation is normal, whether the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, or whether the confirmation display state is displayed with the setting key switch 1311a set to ON.

Furthermore, during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (which may be the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t7), fraudulent activity is monitored using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a and the setting operation unit vibration sensor. If these sensors detect the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, an abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, notifying the user of an abnormal condition caused by the occurrence of magnetism or vibration through an image on the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, depending on whether the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a or the setting operation unit vibration sensor detected the abnormality, the abnormality occurrence effect A notifies the user of the nature of the abnormality (whether magnetism or vibration was detected) and the location where the abnormality was detected (the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is located). When the abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, the abnormality occurrence effect A is forcibly terminated at timing t7 (or may be at timing t8), which is the end of the confirmation display state when the setting key switch 1311a is set to setting key OFF. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the authorized operator who is performing the setting value confirmation display is operating the setting key switch 1311a, and it is not possible to rule out the possibility that the authorized operator performing the confirmation display unintentionally brought a magnet close or applied vibration when performing the setting value confirmation display. For this reason, even if it is determined that fraudulent activity using a magnet or vibration is occurring, there is little need to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and abnormality occurrence presentation A that is currently running is forcibly terminated.

As described above, during the period from timing t6 to timing t8, which includes the confirmation display state, fraudulent activity is monitored using setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a and setting operation unit vibration sensor. However, during normal operation outside of this period, fraudulent activity is also monitored using setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, play area magnetic sensor 2010b, setting operation unit vibration sensor, and play area vibration sensor. Furthermore, if magnetic activity or vibration is detected during normal operation, an abnormality occurrence effect B is executed for a predetermined period of time, notifying the player of an abnormal condition caused by the occurrence of magnetic activity or vibration through output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600. While abnormality occurrence effect B uses output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600, abnormality occurrence effect A uses only the image of the effect display device 1600, resulting in an effect that is less noticeable than abnormality occurrence effect B. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the person performing the setting value confirmation display is operating the setting key switch 1311a, and the possibility cannot be ruled out that the authorized operator performing the confirmation display unintentionally brought a magnet close or applied vibration when performing the setting value confirmation display. In addition, in abnormality occurrence presentation B, depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, the play area unit magnetic sensor 2010b, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, or the play area vibration sensor detected the abnormality, the content of the abnormality (whether magnetism or vibration was detected) and the location where the abnormality was detected (whether it was the area where the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a is located, the area in front of the play area 5a, or the area around the third distribution device 2550) are notified.

As described above, when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, which is the period from timing t5 to timing t8, a main frame open notification is issued by outputting images, lamps, and speakers from the performance display device 1600 to notify that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2. Furthermore, during the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the pattern display on the screen of the performance display device 1600 is erased, and a confirmation display in progress notification (confirmation display related notification) is issued by outputting images, lamps, and speakers from the performance display device 1600 to notify that a confirmation display of the setting value is in progress. After the main frame 4 has been opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to transition to the confirmation display state. In this confirmation display state, the confirmation display in progress notification is executed in priority over the main frame open notification. Furthermore, if the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a or the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration in the confirmation display state, abnormality occurrence presentation A is executed in priority over the main frame open notification or the confirmation display in progress notification.

[26-4. Modification of fraud monitoring during setting value change]
In the above, it has been explained that fraudulent activity monitoring during a setting value change does not involve monitoring fraudulent activity during a setting value change, but it is also possible to configure the system to monitor fraudulent activity partially. Such a case where fraudulent activity is partially monitored during a setting value change will be described with reference to FIG. 210. FIG. 210 is a time chart showing the fraudulent activity monitoring state when fraudulent activity is partially monitored during a setting value change. Below, the differences from the above-described case where fraudulent activity is not monitored during a setting value change will be described.

In the above example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at time t3, the main control MPU initiates the main control power-on processing (see Figures 142 and 143). However, the setting change processing of step S37 is not terminated until the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at time t4 (step S222 of the setting change processing does not determine that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned OFF). Therefore, the interrupt permission setting of the subsequent step S52 is prohibited from being performed between times t3 and t4, delaying the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting of step S52 compared to a normal power-on. In other words, the main control timer interrupt processing (see Figure 144) does not begin until the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is performed. Therefore, the switch input processing of step S104, the fraud detection processing of step S112, and the launch permission signal setting processing of step S113 in the main control timer interrupt processing are not executed and remain in a standby state. Alternatively, after power is turned on, before the setting change process of step S37 is started, at least the processes equivalent to (the same processes as) the switch input process of step S104, the fraud detection process of step S112, and the launch permission signal setting process of step S113 may be performed in advance. With this configuration, in this example, the period from timing t3 to timing t4 is a state in which the setting value is being changed (change permission state), but this is a special period in which the launch of game ball B is not permitted and the input of a detection signal is not validated when game ball B enters the winning slot. Furthermore, only fraudulent acts against the area where the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a are provided are monitored.

Note that before starting the setting change process in step S37, a process equivalent to (the same process as) the fraud detection process in step S112 is performed in advance, and if only fraudulent activity in the area where the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a is installed is monitored, then, as with the fraud detection process in step S112, when a detection signal is input from the magnetic sensor 2010 or vibration sensor, it is determined that fraudulent activity using a magnet or vibration is occurring, and the values of the magnet counter and vibration counter are incremented by 1. However, during the main control power-on process, after the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4 and the setting change process in step S37 is completed (after it is determined in step S222 of the setting change process that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned OFF), all areas of the main control internal RAM are cleared in step S38 except for specific areas. Therefore, even if the system determines that a magnet or vibration-related fraud is occurring during the change-permitted state from timing t3 to timing t4 and increments the magnet or vibration counter values, the RAM is cleared when the change-permitted state ends, resetting the magnet or vibration counter values to 0 (zero). While the magnet or vibration counter values are initialized when the change-permitted state ends, the person changing the setting value during the change-permitted state operates the setting key switch 1311a or the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z is activated as a setting switch button), and it is impossible to rule out the possibility that the person changing the setting value unintentionally brought a magnet close or applied vibration. Therefore, even if the system determines that a magnet or vibration-related fraud is occurring, there is little need to conclude that a serious malfunction has occurred, and the magnet or vibration counter values are initialized.

Specifically, during the change-permitted state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, fraudulent activity is not monitored using the play area magnetic sensor 2010b, but fraudulent activity is monitored using the setting operation magnetic sensor 2010a. This is to eliminate the possibility of a malfunction, such as a fraudulent change of a setting value, occurring when an unauthorized person other than the authorized person changing the setting value engages in fraudulent activity by bringing a magnet close to the area where the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a is located during the change-permitted state, while the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 and an authorized operator changing the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z is in a state where it functions as a setting switch button).

On the other hand, during the change-permitted state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, no detection signal is input even if game ball B is fraudulently placed in the winning slot, and since this is a period during which no fraudulent benefits can be obtained, there is no need to monitor for fraudulent activity using the game area magnetic sensor 2010b.

Fraudulent activity is monitored using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a not only during the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, but also during the period up to timing t5, when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2. In other words, when monitoring for fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, monitoring is always performed on the area where the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a are located, regardless of whether the operation is normal, whether the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, or whether the setting key switch 1311a is set to setting key ON and the change is permitted.

Similarly, during the change-permitted state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, fraudulent activity is not monitored using the play area vibration sensor, but is monitored using the setting operation vibration sensor. This is to eliminate the possibility of a malfunction, such as a fraudulent change to a setting value, occurring when the main body frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 and an authorized operator changing the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switch button).

On the other hand, during the change-permitted state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, no detection signal is input even if game ball B is fraudulently placed in the winning slot, and since this is a period during which no fraudulent benefits can be obtained, there is no need to monitor for fraudulent activity using the game area vibration sensor.

Fraudulent activity is monitored using the setting operation unit vibration sensor not only during the change-permitted state from timing t3 to timing t4, but also during the period up until timing t5, when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2. In other words, when monitoring for fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit vibration sensor, monitoring is always performed on the area where the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a are located, regardless of whether the state is normal, whether the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, or whether the change-permitted state is set with the setting key switch 1311a turned on.

In addition, during the change-allowed state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the pattern display on the screen of the performance display device 1600 is erased, and a setting change in progress performance is executed, notifying the user that the setting value is being changed, using images, lamps, and output from the speaker of the performance display device 1600. During the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4 (which may include the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5), when game ball B enters a prize slot such as first start slot 2002, second start slot 2004, normal prize slot 2003, or large prize slot 2005, even if the main control MPU receives a detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor, the detection of game ball B is treated as invalid. However, when such a detection signal is received, a warning effect C is executed, using images, lamps, and speaker output from effect display device 1600 to notify the player that game ball B has improperly entered a prize slot, even though the launch of game ball B is not permitted and game ball B would not enter a prize slot during this period. This warning effect C is executed with priority over the setting change in progress notification and main frame open notification. In other words, when warning effect C is executed, warning effect C is executed with top priority, without issuing the setting change in progress notification or main frame open notification.

Furthermore, during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (which may be the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t4), fraudulent activity is monitored using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a and the setting operation unit vibration sensor. If these sensors detect the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, an abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, notifying the user of an abnormal condition caused by the occurrence of magnetism or vibration through an image on the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, depending on whether the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a or the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the abnormality, the abnormality occurrence effect A notifies the user of the nature of the abnormality (whether magnetism or vibration was detected) and the location where the abnormality was detected (the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is located). Then, when the abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, it is forcibly terminated at timing t4 (or may be at timing t5), which is the end of the change permission state when the setting key switch 1311a is set to setting key OFF. This is because, in the change-permitted state, the authorized operator changing the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z is in a state where it functions as a setting switch button), and it cannot be ruled out that the authorized operator changing the setting may have unintentionally brought a magnet close or applied vibration when changing the setting value. For this reason, even if it is determined that fraudulent activity using a magnet or vibration is occurring, there is little need to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and abnormality occurrence presentation A that is currently running is forcibly terminated.

As described above, during the period from timing t3 to timing t5, which includes the change permission state, fraudulent activity is monitored using setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a and setting operation unit vibration sensor. However, during normal operation outside of this period, fraudulent activity is also monitored using setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, play area magnetic sensor 2010b, setting operation unit vibration sensor, and play area vibration sensor. Furthermore, if magnetic activity or vibration is detected during normal operation, an abnormality occurrence effect B is executed for a predetermined period of time, notifying the player of an abnormal condition caused by the occurrence of magnetic activity or vibration through output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600. While abnormality occurrence effect B uses output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600, abnormality occurrence effect A uses only the image of the effect display device 1600, resulting in an effect that is less noticeable than abnormality occurrence effect B. This is because, in the change-permitted state, the authorized operator changing the setting values operates the setting key switch 1311a or the RWM clear button 633z (the RWM clear button 633z is in a state where it functions as a setting switch button), and the possibility cannot be ruled out that the authorized operator unintentionally brought a magnet close or applied vibration when changing the setting values. In addition, in abnormality occurrence presentation B, depending on which of the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a, the play area magnetic sensor 2010b, the setting operation unit vibration sensor, or the play area vibration sensor detected the abnormality, the nature of the abnormality (whether magnetism or vibration was detected) and the location where the abnormality was detected (whether it was in the area where the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a is located, the area in front of the play area 5a, or the area around the third sorting device 2550) are notified.

Furthermore, as described above, after power is turned on, during the period from timing t3 to timing t5 when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, a main frame open notification is issued by output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the performance display device 1600 to notify that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2. Furthermore, during the change-allowed state from timing t3 to timing t4 after power is turned on, the pattern display on the screen of the performance display device 1600 is erased, and a setting change in progress notification (setting change related notification) is issued by output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the performance display device 1600 to notify that a setting change is being made to the setting value. After the main frame 4 has been opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON to turn on the power, transitioning to a change-permitted state. In this change-permitted state, the setting change notification is executed in priority over the main frame open notification. Furthermore, if the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2010a or the setting operation unit vibration sensor detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration in the change-permitted state, abnormality occurrence presentation A is executed in priority over the main frame open notification or setting change notification.

[27. Modifications of settings change such as winning probability]
In the above example, the game state is controlled to a big hit game state or a small hit game state based on the result of a special lottery, and if a game ball is received in the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port 2008 during the small hit game state, settings such as the winning probability are changed for the game state that is controlled to transition to the big hit game state, but as shown in Fig. 211, settings such as the winning probability may be changed for a pachinko machine that does not have the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port 2008, or that does not control to transition to the big hit game state even if a game ball is received in the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port 2008 during the small hit game state. Below, a modified example of changing settings such as the winning probability in a pachinko machine that does not have the first V winning port 2007 or the second V winning port 2008 will be described as a second embodiment. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment has a second large prize opening 2006 (which does not have the first V prize opening 2007 or the second V prize opening 2008 arranged inside) instead of the special prize opening 2006 of the pachinko machine 1 of the above example (which has the first V prize opening 2007 or the second V prize opening 2008 arranged inside), but the other configurations are the same.

[27-1. Game Contents of the Second Example]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, when a game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 draws a special lottery result that will generate a favorable game state (for example, a "big hit," a "small hit," a "time-shortened (time-shortened) hit," or a "probability-varying (probability-changing) hit") that is advantageous to the player. The drawn special lottery result is then suggested (introduced) to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as the special variation time). In this embodiment, when a game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the second special lottery result corresponding to the reception in the second start port 2004 is preferentially suggested (introduced). In addition, instead of preferentially suggesting (deriving) the special lottery result in response to acceptance into the second starting port 2004 (priority variation), the special lottery result may be suggested (derive) in the order in which the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 (sequential variation), or the first special lottery result in response to acceptance into the first starting port 2002 and the second special lottery result in response to acceptance into the second starting port 2004 may be suggested (derive) in parallel at the same time (simultaneous variation).

In addition, the special lottery results that are drawn when game ball B is received in first starting port 2002 and second starting port 2004 include "miss," "small hit," "2R special jackpot," "15R special jackpot," "15R normal jackpot," etc. In this embodiment, the second special lottery result includes a "small hit," while the first special lottery result does not include a "small hit." Note that while both the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result may include a "small hit," the probability of winning a "small hit" may be set higher in the second special lottery result than in the first special lottery result.

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by the acceptance of game ball B into first starting opening 2002 and second starting opening 2004 is a "small win," then after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.88 seconds) has passed since second large winning opening 2006 became open and capable of accepting game ball B, a "small win" game is executed in which second large winning opening 2006 becomes closed and unable to accept game ball B. Since second large winning opening 2006 is located midway through first guide passage 2521 on the right side of center device 2500, if a "small win" is selected, game ball B is shot into first guide passage 2521 by "hitting to the right." Furthermore, in the small win game of the second embodiment, the period during which the second large winning opening 2006 is open is shorter than in the large win game, but if the game balls are continuously hit so that they flow down the first guide passage 2521, at least one game ball B can enter the second large winning opening 2006 in one small win game. During the small win game, the game state before the start of the small win game state (such as the probability variable state or time-saving state described below) is maintained, and after the small win game, the game state before the start of the small win game state continues.

If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are a "15R guaranteed jackpot" or a "15R normal jackpot," then when either of the following conditions is met: a predetermined time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed after the first large winning port 2005 has become open and capable of accepting game ball B, or a predetermined limit number of game balls B (e.g., 10) have been accepted into the first large winning port 2005, a "jackpot" game is executed in which an opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is referred to as one round) that brings the port into a closed state in which game ball B cannot be accepted is repeated 15 times. Then, if the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are "15R normal jackpot", after the jackpot game ends, the time for which the special symbols change to suggest to the player the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is made shorter than usual until a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 suggestion times, which is the total number of suggestions for the first special lottery and the second special lottery) is reached, and the state is controlled to transition to a "time-shortened state" which shortens the time until the next "win" is drawn. Furthermore, if the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are a "15R probability jackpot," after the "jackpot" game ends, the time for the special symbols to fluctuate is made shorter than usual until the next "jackpot" occurs, indicating to the player the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of game ball B into first starting port 2002 and second starting port 2004, and transition to a "probability jackpot state (high probability state)" is controlled, which increases the probability that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result will be a "win."

If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving game ball B into first starting opening 2002 and second starting opening 2004 are a "2R guaranteed jackpot," after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.2 seconds) has passed since second large winning opening 2006 opened to receive game ball B, a "jackpot" game is executed in which an opening/closing pattern (each opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that closes to prevent game ball B from being received is repeated twice. Furthermore, after the "jackpot" game ends, the time for the special symbols to fluctuate is shorter than usual until the next "jackpot" occurs, indicating to the player the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving game ball B into first starting opening 2002 and second starting opening 2004. The game is also controlled to transition to a "guaranteed jackpot state (high probability state)" which increases the probability that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result will be a "win."

The second large prize opening 2006 and the first large prize opening 2005 are located on the flow path of game ball B, which mainly flows down the right side of the center device 2500, and therefore allow the player to perform an operation to shoot game ball B aimed at the right side of the center device 2500. When the second large prize opening 2006 and the first large prize opening 2005 are in the open state, if a game ball B is received in the second large prize opening 2006 or the first large prize opening 2005, a predetermined number (e.g., 15 balls) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Therefore, when the second major winning opening 2006 and the first major winning opening 2005 are able to accept game balls B, by having the second major winning opening 2006 and the first major winning opening 2005 accept game balls B, many game balls B can be paid out, providing enjoyment to the player.

In addition, the guide passage group 2520 located on the right side of the center device 2500 makes it easier to perform a shooting operation on the first guide passage 2521 side than on the second guide passage 2522 side, but it is less likely that a ball will be accepted by the first large winning slot 2005 than on the second guide passage 2522 side.This allows the player to choose which passage to aim for when performing the shooting operation, and the variety of games makes it less likely that the player will get bored and prevents a decline in interest.In addition, only game balls shot onto the first guide passage 2521 side can be accepted by the second large winning slot 2006.

In this embodiment, if a game ball B is received into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 between the start of the special lottery and the suggestion of the special lottery result due to the reception of a game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot begin, and therefore the start of suggesting the special lottery result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for any more than this, the special lottery result is not reserved but discarded even if a game ball B is received into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. This prevents the burden on the amusement hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

The special lottery result drawn by the reception of game ball B into first starting port 2002 and second starting port 2004 is indicated by function display unit 1400 and performance display device 1600. In function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is indicated by being directly controlled by main control board 1310. The special lottery result is indicated by function display unit 1400 by repeatedly flashing multiple LEDs on and off for a predetermined period of time, after which the combination of lit LEDs indicates the special lottery result. In the following, the flashing of the LED for a predetermined period of time to indicate the result of the first special lottery to the player may be referred to as the "variable display of the first special symbol," and the flashing of the LED for a predetermined period of time to indicate the result of the second special lottery to the player may be referred to as the "variable display of the second special symbol." Furthermore, the lighting combination pattern of the LED that indicates the result of the first special lottery to the player may be referred to as the "stopping pattern of the first special symbol," and the lighting combination pattern of the LED that indicates the result of the second special lottery to the player may be referred to as the "stopping pattern of the second special symbol."

Meanwhile, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and suggests the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 displays three picture rows consisting of multiple pictures lined up horizontally, and changes each picture row, sequentially stopping and displaying the changing picture rows. The three stopped and displayed picture rows are displayed so that the pictures in the three stopped and displayed picture rows form a combination that corresponds to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than a "lose," after the three picture rows have stopped and each picture has been stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an advantageous game state (for example, a "small win" game, a "big win" game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

The time for which the special lottery result is indicated on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) is different from the time for which the special lottery result is indicated on the performance display device 1600 (the time from when the pattern row changes until the final image is displayed), with the time for which it is indicated on the function display unit 1400 being set to be longer.

In addition to displaying effect images suggesting the results of the special lottery using the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 can also perform player participation effects in which the rotation operation unit 302 and pressure operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 on the door frame 3 are operated according to the results of the special lottery. In player participation effects, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate, vibrate, assist rotation operation, or inhibit rotation operation, and the operation button lift drive motor 367 can raise the pressure operation unit 303 to make it more noticeable, allowing players to enjoy the player participation effects by operating the effect operation unit 301.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 can appropriately use the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, the performance display device 1600, and the light guide plate performance unit 3100 and rear performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 to perform light-emitting effects, display effects, etc., allowing players to be entertained by various effects and preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in a player-participation presentation in which the player operates the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressure operation unit 303, if the player makes a mistake or fails to perform the required operation, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player so that the correct operation can be performed. Specifically, for example, if the player presses the outer pressure operation unit 303b or rotates the rotation operation unit 302 when a pressure operation on the central pressure operation unit 303a is required, the vibration speaker 354 will vibrate and the presentation display device 1600 will display a message to that effect.

Furthermore, when game ball B is received into normal winning port 2003, the main control board 1310 draws a normal lottery result to determine whether or not second starting gate 2411 will be opened in a predetermined pattern. The normal lottery result thus drawn is then indicated to the player on the normal symbol display of function display unit 1400 over a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.1 s to 6000 s, also referred to as the normal fluctuation time). In this embodiment, the normal symbol fluctuation time for indicating to the player the normal lottery result drawn upon reception of game ball B into normal winning port 2003 is "6000 s" in the normal state, and "0.1 s" in the special state and the time-saving state.

The probability of a normal win (the probability that the normal lottery result will be a "normal win") is set to "10 in 11," and when game ball B is accepted into normal winning slot 2003, it almost always results in a "normal win," causing second starting slot door 2411 to open. Furthermore, when the normal lottery result is a "normal win," the period during which second starting slot door 2411 remains open is set to "0.1 seconds" in normal mode, but "2.0 seconds" in special mode and time-saving mode. Therefore, in normal mode, second starting slot door 2411 remains open only at intervals of at least 6,000 seconds, and the extremely short period during which it remains open makes it extremely difficult to accept game balls into second starting slot 2004. This can prevent fraudulent activity aimed at accepting game balls into second starting slot 2004 in normal mode. On the other hand, in the probability variable state, not only is the second start port door 2411 frequently opened, but it is also open for a long period of time, making it easier to accept game balls into the second start port 2004. The probability of a normal win may be set to be different in the normal state (low-probability non-time-shortening state) than in the time-shortening state (low-probability time-shortening state) or the probability variable state (high-probability time-shortening state). For example, the probability of a normal win may be set to "1 in 11" in the normal state, and the probability of a normal win may be set to "10 in 11" in the time-shortening state or the probability variable state, making it very difficult to accept game balls into the second start port 2004 in the normal state, but making it easier to accept game balls into the second start port 2004 in the time-shortening state or the probability variable state. This may allow game balls to be frequently accepted into the second start port 2004 in the time-shortening state or the probability variable state, while suppressing fraudulent behavior aimed at accepting game balls into the second start port 2004 in the normal state. Additionally, the probability of winning a normal ball can be set to zero (0 in 11) in the normal state (low probability non-time-saving state) to prevent a win, while the probability of winning a normal ball can be set to "10 in 11" or "11 in 11" in the time-saving state or the special state, further suppressing fraudulent behavior aimed at receiving game balls into the second starting port 2004 in the normal state.

In this way, in the normal state, game balls are rarely received into the second starting hole 2004, and the first special lottery result is suggested (the first special symbol is displayed as a variable) based mainly on the reception of game balls into the first starting hole 2002. On the other hand, in the probability variation state and the time-saving state, game ball B is shot aiming at the right side of the center device 2500, so game balls are frequently received into the second starting hole 2004, and the second special lottery result is suggested (the second special symbol is displayed as a variable) based mainly on the reception of game balls into the second starting hole 2004.

Furthermore, if a game ball B is received into the normal winning port 2003 between the start of the normal lottery and the indication of the normal lottery result due to the acceptance of a game ball B into the normal winning port 2003, the indication of the normal lottery result cannot begin, and therefore the start of the indication of the normal lottery result is suspended until the indication of the normal lottery result drawn earlier is completed. The number of suspended normal lottery results is limited to a maximum of four per normal winning port 2003, and for any more than this, the normal lottery result is discarded rather than suspended even if a game ball B is accepted into the normal winning port 2003. Note that, instead of this example, if a game ball B is accepted into the normal winning port 2003 between the start of the normal lottery and the indication of the normal lottery result due to the acceptance of a game ball B into the normal winning port 2003, the normal lottery result may be discarded rather than suspended. This further prevents the operation of shooting game ball B into the regular winning slot 2003 and second starting slot 2004 during normal operation, prevents the second special lottery from being held during normal operation and results in a small win, and further suppresses fraudulent activity aimed at receiving game balls into the second starting slot 2004 during normal operation.

In addition, the normal lottery result drawn when game ball B is received by normal winning port 2003 is indicated by function display unit 1400 and performance display device 1600, in the same way as the special lottery result. In function display unit 1400, the normal lottery result is indicated by being directly controlled by main control board 1310. To indicate the normal lottery result on function display unit 1400, an LED different from the LED indicating the special lottery result is repeatedly turned on and off and flashed for a predetermined period of time, after which the normal lottery result is indicated by the combination of lit LEDs.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in normal mode, game ball B is shot at the left side of the center device 2500, and the first special lottery result is suggested (the first special symbol is displayed as it changes) based on the game ball being accepted into the first starting hole 2002. Also, if the first special lottery result is a "15R normal jackpot" in normal mode, the machine is controlled to transition to a time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends, and game ball B is shot at the right side of the center device 2500, and the second special lottery result is suggested (the second special symbol is displayed as it changes) based on the game ball being accepted into the second starting hole 2004. If a predetermined number of variations (100 suggestions, which is the total number of suggestions for the first special lottery and the second special lottery) is reached without a jackpot occurring during the time-saving state, the time-saving state ends and the game transitions to the normal state. Game ball B is again shot at the left side of the center device 2500, and the first special lottery result is suggested (the first special symbol is displayed as it varies) based on the game ball's acceptance into the first starting hole 2002.

Furthermore, if the first special lottery result is a "15R special jackpot" or a "2R special jackpot" during normal or time-saving mode, a transition to the special jackpot state (high probability state) is controlled after the jackpot game ends, and game ball B is shot aimed at the right side of center device 2500, and the second special lottery result is suggested (a change in the second special symbol is displayed) based on the game ball's acceptance into second starting hole 2004. The special jackpot state continues until the next jackpot, and if the second special lottery result is a "15R normal jackpot" during the special jackpot state, a transition to the time-saving state is controlled after the jackpot game ends, and if a predetermined number of changes (100 suggestions, combining the suggestions from the first special lottery and the second special lottery) is reached without a jackpot occurring during the time-saving state, the time-saving state ends and a transition to the normal state is controlled.

In addition, if the second special lottery result in a "15R special jackpot" or a "2R special jackpot" during the special jackpot state, the game will transition back to the special jackpot state (high probability state) after the jackpot play ends. In this way, the special jackpot state will continue until a "15R normal jackpot" is reached, and if a "15R normal jackpot" is reached, the game will transition to the time-saving state after the jackpot play ends.

In addition, if there are no reserved second special lottery results and only the first special lottery result is reserved, or if a gaming ball is received by the first starting port 2002 when there are no reserved second special lottery results, the first special lottery result will be indicated (the first special symbol will change and be displayed) even during the time-saving mode or the probability variable mode. If the first special lottery result is a "15R normal jackpot" during the time-saving mode or the probability variable mode, a transition to the time-saving mode will be controlled after the jackpot game ends, and if the first special lottery result is a "15R probability variable jackpot" or a "2R probability variable jackpot" during the time-saving mode or the probability variable mode, a transition to the probability variable mode will be controlled after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in this example of the pachinko machine 1, the probability of a "small win" as a result of the second special lottery (small win probability) is set much higher than the probability of a big win (for example, about 10 times the probability of a big win during the special probability state). Furthermore, during the time-saving state or the special probability state, game balls are frequently received by the second starting port 2004, and the second special lottery is performed, so small wins occur frequently and the second large winning port 2006 remains open for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.88 seconds).

In other words, in this example of pachinko machine 1, small hits occur frequently in the second special lottery during the time-saving mode or the special probability mode, and even if a jackpot does not result, it is possible to win prize balls that exceed the number of balls fired, albeit gradually. The longer the time-saving mode or special probability mode continues, the more prize balls can be won. Therefore, not only do game balls not decrease during the time-saving mode or special probability mode, but the prize balls won from small hits that occur can increase the player's ball inventory. In this way, this example of pachinko machine 1 can be controlled to operate in completely different states: normal mode, in which game balls are consumed largely, and time-saving mode and special probability mode, in which not only are game balls consumed less, but also the player's ball inventory increases due to the occurrence of small hits, even without a jackpot.

[27-2. Changing the settings of winning probability, etc. in the second embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, the probability of a big win, a small win, etc., which changes depending on the setting value, will be explained.

In the second embodiment, as in the previous example, a table corresponding to a set value is selected as the table to be used in special lotteries, etc. (a win determination table, a big win symbol determination table, a small win symbol determination table, etc.). Note that a table to be used in special lotteries, etc. is provided for each set value, and each table is set so that at least some of the values are different.

As shown in Figure 212 (A), in this embodiment, the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" are set corresponding to each of setting values 1 to 6.

The jackpot probability (the proportion of jackpot determination values in the hit determination table that indicate a jackpot) common to both the first and second special draws is set to a different value for each setting value, with the jackpot probability for the first and second special draws in normal and time-saving modes (low probability modes) being 1 in 319 for setting value 1, 1 in 309 for setting value 2, 1 in 299 for setting value 3, 1 in 289 for setting value 4, 1 in 279 for setting value 5, and 1 in 269 for setting value 6. The jackpot probability for the first and second special draws in the special mode (high probability mode) is 1 in 30 for setting value 1, 1 in 40 for setting value 2, 1 in 50 for setting value 3, 1 in 60 for setting value 4, 1 in 70 for setting value 5, and 1 in 80 for setting value 6.

In this way, in the normal and time-saving modes (low probability modes), the higher the setting value, the higher the jackpot probability; however, in the special mode, the opposite is true: the higher the setting value, the lower the jackpot probability. That is, in the normal and time-saving modes, the jackpot probability is highest for a setting value of 6, while in the special mode, the jackpot probability is lowest for a setting value of 1. Note that the jackpot probability is not limited to being proportional or inversely proportional to the setting value; in some cases, the jackpot probability set for a setting value lower than an arbitrary setting value may be set higher than the jackpot probability set for that setting value.

As shown in Figure 212 (A), the probability of a small hit in the first special lottery (the proportion of small hit determination values in the hit determination table that indicate a small hit has been won) is set to "0" for all setting values (a small hit will not be won), making it difficult to win prize balls through a small hit in normal and time-limited modes. On the other hand, the probability of a small hit in the second special lottery (the proportion of small hit determination values in the hit determination table that indicate a small hit has been won) is set to the same "1/3" for all setting values, which is a much higher probability than the probability of a big hit. Therefore, small hits occur frequently in special mode and time-limited mode, making it easier to win prize balls.

In the special mode, the probability of a jackpot is lowest at a setting of 6, making it less likely (delayed) for a jackpot to occur than at lower settings. This causes the special mode to continue for a longer period of time, and the higher the setting, the more small jackpots that occur before a jackpot occurs. In other words, the higher the setting, the more prize balls can be won from small jackpots, and the next jackpot is also guaranteed, so the higher the setting, the greater the advantage. In other words, in the special mode, the next jackpot is guaranteed regardless of the setting, but the expected number of prize balls that can be won other than through a jackpot differs for each setting, and the higher the setting, the higher the expected number of prize balls that can be won other than through a jackpot.

In addition, the duration of the probability variable state does not have to be until the next jackpot, but rather ends when a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 hints combining the first special lottery hints and the second special lottery hints) is reached, just like the normal state and the time-saving state, and by setting the probability of a jackpot higher the higher the set value, the higher the set value, the greater the frequency of jackpots, thereby increasing the degree of advantage (so-called limit-number probability variable). In this case, although the next jackpot is not guaranteed, the expected number of prize balls that can be obtained other than through a jackpot differs for each set value, and although the expected number of prize balls that can be obtained other than through a jackpot increases as the set value increases, it is possible to achieve gameplay that encourages players to expect a jackpot to occur before the conditions for ending the probability variable state are met, thereby increasing excitement. Furthermore, to achieve this type of gameplay, the probability of winning in the first special lottery and second special lottery in normal mode and time-saving mode may not have any setting differences (uniform at 1 in 319), and only the probability of winning in the first special lottery and second special lottery in the probability variable mode may have setting differences as described above.

Furthermore, in realizing the gameplay characteristics of the second embodiment, when the setting value is lower than a specific setting value, the probability of a jackpot in the special probability state may be made higher than the probability of a small jackpot in the second special lottery, while when the setting value is higher than a specific setting value, the probability of a jackpot in the special probability state may be made lower than the probability of a small jackpot in the second special lottery. Specifically, for example, the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time-saving state (low probability state) may be set to "1 in 250" for setting value 1, "1 in 240" for setting value 2, "1 in 230" for setting value 3, "1 in 180" for setting value 4, "1 in 170" for setting value 5, and "1 in 160" for setting value 6, and the probability of a jackpot in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the special probability state (high probability state) may be set to "1 in 250" for setting value 1, "1 in 240" for setting value 2, "1 in 230" for setting value 3, "1 in 180" for setting value 4, "1 in 170" for setting value 5, and "1 in 160" for setting value 6. For example, the probability of winning is set to "1 in 25" for setting value 1, "1 in 24" for setting value 2, "1 in 23" for setting value 3, "1 in 18" for setting value 4, "1 in 17" for setting value 5, and "1 in 16" for setting value 6, while the probability of winning a small prize in the second special lottery (the proportion of small prize determination values in the prize determination table that indicate a small prize has been won) can be set to the same "1 in 20" for all setting values.

With this configuration, with setting values 1 to 3, the probability of a small win in the second special lottery is lower than the probability of a big win in the special state, so the number of prize balls that can be won through a small win in the special state is relatively small, while with setting values 4 to 6, the probability of a small win in the second special lottery is higher than the probability of a big win in the special state, so the number of prize balls that can be won through a small win in the special state is relatively large. In particular, with setting values of 4 and above, the probability of a big win is lower than the probability of a small win in the special state, making it more difficult for a big win to occur, creating a gameplay experience that gives players the expectation that the special state will continue for a long time and that many prize balls can be won through small wins. Furthermore, by storing historical information on the probability of a big win and the probability of a small win occurring in the probability variable state since power-on in a predetermined storage area (such as RAM) of the peripheral control unit 1511 and displaying various types of hit probability information based on that historical information on the performance display device 1600, it is possible to make the player aware that the probability of a small win is higher than the probability of a big win in the probability variable state, giving the player a sense of expectation that "it might be set to 4 or more," and providing new and exciting fun and excitement that was not previously available while playing in the probability variable state. Furthermore, by experiencing that the probability variable state continues for a long period of time and that many prize balls can be acquired through small wins in the probability variable state, the player can be made to recognize that "it might be set to 4 or more," and in this respect, new and exciting fun and excitement that was not previously available can be provided. As described above, at a certain setting value (setting value 4 in this embodiment), any setting value above that changes the gameplay to one where more prize balls can be won through small wins, further increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In another embodiment, the probability of a jackpot in the first special lottery and the second special lottery may be increased as the setting value increases in the probability variable state, and the probability of a small jackpot in the second special lottery may be increased as the setting value increases. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212(B), the probability of a jackpot in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and the time-saving state (low probability state) is 1 in 319 for setting value 1, 1 in 309 for setting value 2, 1 in 299 for setting value 3, 1 in 289 for setting value 4, 1 in 279 for setting value 5, and 1 in 269 for setting value 6. Additionally, the probability of a small win in the probability variable state (high probability state) is 1 in 31.9 for setting value 1, 1 in 30.9 for setting value 2, 1 in 29.9 for setting value 3, 1 in 28.9 for setting value 4, 1 in 27.9 for setting value 5, and 1 in 26.9 for setting value 6. In this way, the probability of a big win for all setting values in the probability variable state is increased by 10 times compared to the normal state and the time-saving state.

In addition, the probability of a small win in the second special draw is set to 1 in 7 at setting value 1, 1 in 6 at setting value 2, 1 in 5 at setting value 3, 1 in 4 at setting value 4, 1 in 3 at setting value 5, and 1 in 2 at setting value 6. Therefore, at setting value 1, a small win occurs about once for every 7 second special draws, whereas at setting value 6, a small win occurs about once for every 2 second special draws, increasing the frequency of small wins. In other words, at setting value 6, small wins occur more frequently than at setting value 1, making it easier to win prize balls through small wins, and the higher the setting value, the higher the expected number of prize balls that can be won in the special mode or time-saving mode.

Furthermore, in addition to changing the settings of the jackpot probability and small jackpot probability described above, or without changing the settings of the jackpot probability and small jackpot probability, the degree of advantage can be changed by varying the determination ratio for each jackpot type for each setting value. As described above, in the special probability state and the time-saving state, the second special lottery is mainly executed and a small jackpot can occur, while in the normal state, the first special lottery is mainly executed and a small jackpot cannot occur. Therefore, the degree of advantage changes depending on the duration of the special probability state or the time-saving state.

In addition, in the special state, just as in the normal state and the time-saving state, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a big win. Also, if the set value is set so that the higher the set value, the higher the probability of a small win, a so-called "fall-out lottery" can be held, in which a lottery is held to determine whether or not to end the special state if the result of the special lottery is a "miss" during the special state. In this case, the fall-out probability (probability of ending the special state) can be the same for each set value, or the fall-out probability can be set to be different for each set value.

For example, as shown in Figure 212 (C), the probability of falling into the high probability state may be set to "1 in 100" which is common to all setting values. In this case, the probability that the result of the falling lottery will end the special state does not differ for each setting value, but as shown in Figure 212 (B), the probability of a jackpot increases the higher the setting value, so the frequency and number of jackpots that occur are made different for each setting value to change the degree of advantage, so that the higher the setting value, the greater the degree of advantage.

The probability of falling in the high probability state may also be changed for each setting value. For example, as shown in Figure 212 (D), the probability of falling may be "1 in 80" for setting values 1 and 2, "1 in 90" for setting values 3 and 4, and "1 in 100" for setting values 5 and 6.

In this case, with setting value 1, the jackpot probability is 1 in 31.9, but the dropout probability is 1 in 80, making the jackpot probability approximately 2.5 times higher than the dropout probability, while with setting value 6, the jackpot probability is 1 in 26.9, but the dropout probability is 1 in 100, making the jackpot probability approximately 3.7 times higher than the dropout probability. In other words, the higher the setting value, the higher the jackpot probability improves, increasing the rate of winning a jackpot before the dropout lottery result that ends the special state is obtained, making the higher the setting value, the greater the advantage.

In addition, if a drop-out lottery result that ends the probability variable state is obtained during the probability variable state, the jackpot probability may be returned from the probability variable state probability (high probability) to the normal state probability (low probability), while the control to shorten the special symbol fluctuation time to suggest the second special lottery result to the player may be continued. In this case, this control may be terminated and a transition to the normal state may be controlled when the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 suggestions, which is the total number of suggestions for the first special lottery and the second special lottery). In other words, if a drop-out lottery result that ends the probability variable state is obtained during the probability variable state, the probability variable state may be terminated and a transition to the time-saving state may be controlled. Also, if a drop-out lottery result that ends the probability variable state is obtained and the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game has already reached a predetermined number (for example, 100 suggestions, which is the total number of suggestions for the first special lottery and the second special lottery), a transition to the normal state may be controlled without a transition to the time-saving state after the probability variable state is ended.

In addition, if a drop lottery result that ends the probability variable state is obtained during the probability variable state, the jackpot probability may be returned from the probability variable state probability (high probability) to the normal state probability (low probability), and the fluctuation time of the special symbol that indicates the second special lottery result to the player may be returned to the normal fluctuation time. In other words, if a drop lottery result that ends the probability variable state is obtained during the probability variable state, the probability variable state may be ended and a transition to the normal state may be controlled. In this case, a drop lottery may also be held during the time-saving state, and if a drop lottery result that ends the time-saving state is obtained during the time-saving state, the time-saving state may be ended and a transition to the normal state may be controlled.

In the example shown in Figure 212 (E), after the end of a jackpot game, the transition to a special jackpot state is controlled, and the degree of advantage is changed by changing the occurrence rate of the jackpot type, which will end the special jackpot state if the special lottery result is a "jackpot." Specifically, when the result of the first special lottery, which is mainly executed in the normal state (low probability non-time-saving state), is a "jackpot," the occurrence rate of each jackpot type is the same for all setting values, and the occurrence rate of a "15R certain jackpot," which is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and a "2R certain jackpot," which is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the jackpot game ends but has fewer prize balls won than a "15R certain jackpot," is each set to "40/100," and the occurrence rate of a "15R normal jackpot," which is controlled to transition to a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends until a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 suggestions combining the suggestions of the first special lottery and the second special lottery) is reached, is set to "20/100."

On the other hand, when the result of the second special lottery, which is mainly executed in the probability variable state and time-saving state, is a "jackpot," the occurrence rate of each type of jackpot differs for each setting value. At setting value 1, the occurrence rate of a "15R probability variable jackpot," which is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the jackpot play ends, is "45 in 100," the occurrence rate of a "2R probability variable jackpot," which is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the jackpot play ends but has fewer prize balls than a "15R probability variable jackpot," is "15 in 100," and the occurrence rate of a "15R normal jackpot," which is controlled to transition to a time-saving state after the jackpot play ends until a predetermined number of fluctuations (e.g., 100 times) is reached, is "40 in 100."

At setting value 2, the occurrence rate of a "15R probability jackpot", which is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game, is set to "46 in 100", the occurrence rate of a "2R probability jackpot", which is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game but has fewer prize balls won than a "15R probability jackpot", is set to "19 in 100", and the occurrence rate of a "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to transition to a time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game until a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 suggestions combining the first special lottery suggestion and the second special lottery suggestion) is reached, is set to "35 in 100".

At setting value 3, the occurrence rate of a "15R probability jackpot", which is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game, is set to "47 in 100", the occurrence rate of a "2R probability jackpot", which is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game but has fewer prize balls won than a "15R probability jackpot", is set to "23 in 100", and the occurrence rate of a "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to transition to a time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game until a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 suggestions combining the first special lottery suggestion and the second special lottery suggestion) is reached, is set to "30 in 100".

At setting value 4, the occurrence rate of a "15R probability jackpot", which is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game, is "48 in 100", the occurrence rate of a "2R probability jackpot", which is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game but has fewer prize balls won than a "15R probability jackpot", is "27 in 100", and the occurrence rate of a "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to transition to a time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game until a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 suggestions combining the first special lottery suggestion and the second special lottery suggestion) is reached, is "25 in 100".

At setting value 5, the occurrence rate of a "15R probability jackpot", which is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game, is "49 in 100", the occurrence rate of a "2R probability jackpot", which is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game but has fewer prize balls won than a "15R probability jackpot", is "31 in 100", and the occurrence rate of a "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to transition to a time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game until a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 suggestions combining the first special lottery suggestion and the second special lottery suggestion) is reached, is "20 in 100".

At setting value 6, the occurrence rate of a "15R probability jackpot", which is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game, is "50 in 100", the occurrence rate of a "2R probability jackpot", which is controlled to transition to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game but has fewer prize balls won than a "15R probability jackpot", is "35 in 100", and the occurrence rate of a "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to transition to a time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game until a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 suggestions combining the first special lottery suggestion and the second special lottery suggestion) is reached, is "15 in 100".

In this way, if the result of the second special lottery, which is mainly executed in the special probability state and the time-saving state, is a "jackpot," the occurrence rate of a "15R normal jackpot," which is controlled to transition to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game until a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 suggestions, combining the suggestions of the first special lottery and the second special lottery), is changed for each setting value. The higher the setting value, the lower the occurrence rate of a "15R normal jackpot," making it more difficult to end the special probability state. As a result, the higher the setting value, the more difficult it is for the special probability state to end once it has been controlled to transition to the special probability state, increasing the number of jackpots and making it possible to win prize balls based on small wins that occur during the special probability state. In other words, the higher the setting value, the higher the expected number of prize balls that can be won in the special probability state.

In addition, the higher the setting value, the lower the occurrence rate of "15R normal jackpots," while the higher the occurrence rate of "2R special jackpots" compared to "15R special jackpots," thereby limiting the number of winning balls, thereby preventing players from gaining an excessive advantage.

[27-3. Setting value suggestion effect in the second embodiment]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is configured so that the expected number of prize balls obtainable in the high probability mode and the expected number of small wins that can be won vary depending on the setting value. Specifically, in FIG. 212(A), the probability of a jackpot in the high probability mode at setting value 1 is set to "1 in 30," and the probability of a small win is set to "1 in 3." Therefore, the expected number of small wins that can be won after the high probability mode is switched to high probability mode after the end of a jackpot game and before the next jackpot is reached is "9 times." Furthermore, since approximately one game ball B can enter the second large prize slot 2006 in one small win game, the expected number of prize balls obtainable in one small win game is "15 balls." In other words, the expected number of prize balls obtainable through a small win in the high probability mode at setting value 1 is "9 times x 15 balls" = "135 balls." Similarly, when the setting value is 2, the expected number of prize balls that can be won by a small win in the special state is "13 tries x 15 balls" (195 balls), when the setting value is 3, the expected number of prize balls that can be won by a small win in the special state is "16 tries x 15 balls" (240 balls), when the setting value is 4, the expected number of prize balls that can be won by a small win in the special state is "19 tries x 15 balls" (285 balls), when the setting value is 5, the expected number of prize balls that can be won by a small win in the special state is "23 tries x 15 balls" (345 balls), and when the setting value is 6, the expected number of prize balls that can be won by a small win in the special state is "26 tries x 15 balls" (390 balls).

In addition, in Figure 212 (B), when the setting value is 1, the expected number of prize balls that can be won from a small win in the special mode is "4 tries x 15 balls" (60 balls), when the setting value is 2, the expected number of prize balls that can be won from a small win in the special mode is "5 tries x 15 balls" (75 balls), when the setting value is 3, the expected number of prize balls that can be won from a small win in the special mode is "5 tries x 15 balls" (75 balls), when the setting value is 4, the expected number of prize balls that can be won from a small win in the special mode is "7 tries x 15 balls" (105 balls), when the setting value is 5, the expected number of prize balls that can be won from a small win in the special mode is "9 tries x 15 balls" (135 balls), and when the setting value is 6, the expected number of prize balls that can be won from a small win in the special mode is "13 tries x 15 balls" (195 balls).

In this way, the expected number of prize balls that can be won through a small win in the special probability state and the expected number of small wins that can be won differ depending on the setting value (in Figure 212 (B) they are partially the same), so when controlling to a high probability state after the end of a big win game, the setting value can be inferred based on the number of prize balls won in small win games and the number of small wins won before the next big win. In addition, a presentation that suggests the setting value (setting value suggestion presentation) may be executed based on the number of prize balls won in small win games and the number of small wins won.

For example, as shown in FIG. 213, the peripheral control unit 1510 may display a gauge section with six scales 1600a, numbered 1 through 6, corresponding to the six levels of setting value on the display device 1600 as a setting value suggestion effect, and color the spaces between the scales on the gauge section according to the number of prize balls won (number of payouts) due to winning through the second large prize slot 2006. As the number of prize balls won in small wins increases, the gauge section may be gradually colored from its initial display state (the color display between the scales may increase), suggesting a high setting value when all the spaces between the scales on the gauge section are colored. Specifically, when controlling to a high probability state after the end of a big win game, the display device 1600 displays the initial display state of scale 1600a, a character 1600b, and a speech bubble 1600c displaying the character's lines, as shown in FIG. 213(A). In this initial display mode, assuming that the number of prize balls acquired is "0," only the leftmost of the six scales is displayed in color as the corresponding setting value, suggesting that it is "a setting value of 1 or greater," and the speech bubble 1600c displays "What is the setting value...?" to indicate to the player through the character 1600b that the gauge section is suggesting the setting value.

Then, when the peripheral control unit 1510 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in a small jackpot game after a big jackpot game has exceeded the expected value for set value 1 and is within the range of the expected value for set value 2, the first two of the six scales on the gauge from the left are further colored (the first and second scales from the left are colored), suggesting that the value is "set value 2 or higher," and the character 1600b says "Maybe it's 2 or higher?" in speech bubble 1600c, more clearly indicating that the value is set value 2 or higher (Fig. 213 (B)).

Furthermore, when the peripheral control unit 1510 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in a small jackpot game after a big jackpot game has exceeded the expected value for setting value 2 and is within the range of the expected value for setting value 3, the first three of the six scales on the gauge from the left are further colored (the first to third scales from the left are colored), indicating that the setting value is 3 or higher, and the character 1600b says "Is it 3 or higher?" in speech bubble 1600c, more clearly indicating that the setting value is 3 or higher (Fig. 213 (C)).

Furthermore, when the peripheral control unit 1510 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in a small jackpot game after a big jackpot game has exceeded the expected value for setting value 3 and is within the range of the expected value for setting value 4, the first four of the six scales on the gauge from the left are further colored (the first through fourth scales from the left are colored), indicating that the setting value is 4 or greater, and the character 1600b says "4 or greater!?" in speech bubble 1600c, more clearly indicating that the setting value is 4 or greater (Fig. 213 (D)).

Furthermore, when the peripheral control unit 1510 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in a small jackpot game after a big jackpot game has exceeded the expected value for set value 4 and is within the range of the expected value for set value 5, the first five of the six scales on the gauge from the left are further colored (the first through fifth scales from the left are colored), indicating that the value is "set value 5 or greater," and the character 1600b's line "More than 5??" is displayed in speech bubble 1600c, more clearly indicating that the value is set value 5 or greater (Fig. 213 (E)).

Furthermore, when the peripheral control unit 1510 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in a small jackpot game after a big jackpot game has exceeded the expected value for set value 5 and is within the range of the expected value for set value 6, the first six of the six scales on the gauge are further colored from the left (all scales are displayed in color), indicating that the setting value is 6, and the character 1600b says "Yay! It might be 6!!!" in speech bubble 1600c, further clearly indicating that the setting value is 6 (Fig. 213 (F)).

Once the sixth of the six scales on the gauge from the left is displayed in color (all scales are displayed in color), the final stage has already been reached, and the display on the gauge does not change depending on the number of prize balls paid out in the small wins following the big win. Instead, all scales remain displayed in color until the next big win begins, or, if there is a condition to end the special state, that condition is met.

In addition, when all six scales on the gauge are displayed in color, additional setting suggestions may be provided. For example, when all six scales on the gauge are displayed in color, a special lottery may be held to execute a maximum setting confirmation effect that definitively informs the player that the machine is set to the maximum setting (setting value 6) based on the detection of a ball entering the second large prize opening 2006 when prize balls are paid out during a small prize game after a big prize game. Specifically, when all six scales on the gauge are displayed in color, a special lottery with a 1 in 1000 chance of winning is held each time a ball is detected in the second large prize opening 2006, and if the lottery is won, a maximum setting confirmation effect consisting of a special audio output (a voice message saying "Congratulations on setting 6!"), special lamp illumination on the door frame 3 (lamp illumination in a rainbow of seven colors), and a special display on the effect display device 1600 (a message display saying "Congratulations on setting 6!") is simultaneously executed. By executing the maximum setting confirmation effect with all scales displayed in color in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of satisfaction from the effect related to the setting suggestion that was performed earlier, and then provide the player with an even greater sense of satisfaction without boring them, further increasing their interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a jackpot occurs before all the scales are colored, the display mode of the gauge section is cleared after the jackpot. As a result, each time a jackpot occurs and the game is controlled to transition to a special mode after the jackpot, a setting value suggestion effect is executed to suggest the setting value of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, by calculating the setting values suggested by the setting value suggestion effect, the actual setting value can be estimated. In other words, if the special mode is executed only once, it is difficult to determine the setting value because the number of prize balls acquired through small wins during this special mode may differ from the expected number of prize balls that can be acquired based on the setting value. However, by counting the number of prize balls acquired through small wins during each special mode between jackpots, the percentage of prize balls acquired near a specific number of prize balls increases. Therefore, by comparing the specific number of prize balls with the expected value, the setting value can be estimated. In this example, the setting value that was most frequently suggested in the setting value suggestion effect executed multiple times can be estimated to be the actual setting value.

In the event of a jackpot, the gauge display may be left unchanged until the special state ends, rather than being cleared. In this case, the six scales on the gauge may be set to equal or exceed the expected number of prize balls that can be acquired in one special state or the number of small jackpots that can occur in one special state, depending on the setting value, and none of the scales may be colored during one special state. This allows the setting value to be suggested based on the number of prize balls acquired and the number of small jackpots over a long period of time, thereby improving the reliability of the suggested setting value.

The various setting value suggestion effects described above are executed by the peripheral control unit 1511 and are based on the number of prize balls won in small jackpot games played in the special mode during the period from the end of a jackpot game until the start of the next jackpot game, and are not based on the actual setting value, so the suggested setting value may differ from the actual setting value. Information regarding the setting value (setting value information) may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, in which case the setting value suggestion effect may suggest a setting value based on the setting value information in addition to the number of prize balls won in small jackpot games after a jackpot game. Specifically, if the number of prize balls acquired in a small jackpot game after a jackpot game exceeds the expected value of the setting value indicated by the setting value information, the suggestion mode of the setting value suggestion effect may not change, or if the number of prize balls acquired in a small jackpot game after a jackpot game is less than the expected value of the setting value indicated by the setting value information, the suggestion mode of the setting value suggestion effect may be changed by lottery or other means to the setting value indicated by the setting value information or a setting value equal to or less than the setting value indicated by the setting value information. This configuration can increase the reliability of the setting value suggestion effect and draw attention to the setting value suggested by the setting value suggestion effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1510 grasps the number of prize balls paid out in small jackpot games after a big jackpot game, and if the peripheral control unit 1510 determines that the total number of prize balls exceeds the expected value for each setting value, it changes the display of the gauge unit to suggest a setting in the special jackpot state. However, setting suggestions in the special jackpot state are not limited to this form and may be as follows.

For example, in the case of a six-stage gauge section as described above, each time the peripheral control unit 1510 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in response to a small win has reached a certain value, one mark on the scale 1600 may be colored, and reaching the final mark on the scale 1600 may indicate to the player that the setting is high. In this case, it is preferable to use the expected number of prize balls paid out in a small win game after a win game at setting value 6 as a guide to reaching the final mark on the scale 1600. For example, if the expected number of prize balls paid out in a small win game after a win game at setting value 6 is "195 balls," the timing for reaching the final mark on the scale 1600 may be the payout of "195 balls + α balls (α < 195)."

In addition, rather than based on the prize balls paid out for small wins, one mark on the scale 1600 may be colored based on the peripheral control unit 1510's determination that the number of times the second special lottery has resulted in a small win has reached a certain value, and the player may be informed that the setting is high when the final mark on the scale 1600 is reached (for example, when the number of times the second special lottery has resulted in a small win reaches 80). In this case, the difficulty of achieving this will vary depending on the relationship between the probability of a big win and the probability of a small win in the special state at the actual setting value. Depending on the display status of the gauge section (for example, when the final stage is reached with one mark left), a new gameplay element can be provided, in which the player hopes for a setting value suggestion and focuses on the second special lottery resulting in a small win rather than a big win.

In this way, when the pachinko machine 1 of this example is controlled to a probability variable state, it is possible to provide new gameplay features that allow players to guess the setting value based on the number of prize balls won in small jackpot games after a big jackpot game and the number of times they have won in small jackpot games.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above is equipped with the main control board 1310 of FIG. 137 as a game control board having the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 137 as a game control central processing unit capable of controlling the progress of the game. This main control board 1310 can be equipped with the test connector 1310k of FIG. 141 that can be electrically connected to a test harness as wiring for extracting output signals from the main control MPU 1310a and transmitting them to testing equipment that tests the pachinko machine 1.

When the pachinko machine 1 is tested using testing equipment, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is mounted on the front side (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, while the test connector 1310k is mounted on the back side (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

In this way, because the test connector 1310k is mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310, even when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific testing institution, or when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass-produced machine to be shipped to an amusement hall, the area on the front side of the main control board 1310 where the test connector 1310k is mounted will not be left as empty space. This allows for greater freedom in the placement of various electronic components on the surface of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, multiple electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310' in Figure 139(a) as a game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game. These multiple electronic components are composed of a ZIP-type main control MPU (denoted by component number "MIC1" in the figure) included in the lead type of Figure 139(a) as a lead-type electronic component, and an SMD-type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 in Figure 139(a) as a surface-mount type electronic component, and are each mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'.

The main control board 1310' has a parts list area 1310xb' (see Figure 139(a)) as an information area. This parts list area 1310xb' can display information corresponding to the identifiers of surface-mount electronic components. Information displayed in the parts list area 1310xb' can include the name of the manufacturer of the surface-mount electronic component (including abbreviations and symbols), the product number of the surface-mount electronic component, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 139(a), a parts list of electronic components, consisting of aligned part numbers and product numbers (catalog numbers), is silk-screened in white (or black) in parts list area 1310xb'. The part numbers and product numbers are silk-screened in white (or black) and are larger (e.g., three to five times larger) than the part numbers silk-screened in white (or black) in component placement area 1310xa'. A separator ":" is placed between the part number and product number (catalog number) to prevent them from being identified as consecutive. This separator allows the part number and product number (catalog number) to be distinguished from each other. The manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may also be silk-screened in white (or black) along with the product number (catalog number).

In this way, even if the display mode of the identifier attached to a surface-mount type electronic component mounted on the main control board 1310' is difficult to see, information corresponding to this identifier (manufacturer name, product number, etc.) is displayed in the component list area 1310xb' provided on the main control board 1310'. Therefore, the identifier of the surface-mount type electronic component can be reliably seen.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, multiple electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310 of Figure 137 as a game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game, and this main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of Figure 141 as a sealed board box having sealing means.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with multiple ventilation holes 1301z formed in the transparent cover body 1301 shown in Figure 141, which are holes with a shape smaller than the shape of the surface-mounted electronic components among the multiple electronic components.

In this way, the main control board box 1320 is provided with multiple ventilation holes 1301z, which are holes that are smaller than the shape of surface-mounted electronic components. Therefore, even if someone attempts to remove a surface-mounted electronic component from the main control board 1310 by some fraudulent means and replace it with an unauthorized electronic component, the surface-mounted electronic component cannot be removed through the multiple ventilation holes 1301z provided in the main control board box 1320. This makes it possible to prevent surface-mounted electronic components from being replaced with unauthorized electronic components.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above is capable of playing games and is equipped with a setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 111 as a first operation unit capable of accepting predetermined operations, an RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 in FIG. 77 as a second operation unit, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 in FIG. 111 as setting change means that can change the setting value that sets the probability to be advantageous to the player by operating the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and then operating the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. The RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is provided separately from the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311. This pachinko machine 1 is further equipped with a guide means for providing information regarding the operation of the RWM clear button 633z on the payout control board 633, such as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z.

In this way, information regarding the operation of the RWM clear button 633z on the dispensing control board 633 is provided, so even if the setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z on the dispensing control board 633 are provided separately, the person operating the setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z on the dispensing control board 633 will not be confused about the operating procedures. By providing the setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z on the dispensing control board 633 separately, security can be improved. Therefore, security can be improved.

The present invention has been described above using preferred embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design modifications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention, as described below.

In other words, in the above embodiment, the guide passage group 2520 is shown as being composed of two guide passages, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, but this is not limited to this and may be composed of three or more guide passages.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the guide passage group 2520 is shown as being twisted 90 degrees and then twisted 90 degrees in the opposite direction so that the arrangement of the inlets and the arrangement of the outlets are the same, but this is not limited to this, and the inlets and the outlets may be twisted so that they are arranged differently. Alternatively, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 may be twisted multiple times so that they form a spiral.

Of course, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments. For example, while a pachinko machine is used as an example of a gaming machine in the embodiments, it can also be applied to other gaming machines such as mahjong machines and arrange ball machines, and it can also be applied to slot machines that use gaming medals to spin multiple drums (cylinders or reels). Here, a slot machine will be described with reference to Figure 214. Figure 214 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

As shown in Figure 214, the slot machine 6000 is composed of a front door 6002 and a main body 6004. The front door 6002 and the main body 6004 are interconnected via a hinge (not shown). The front door 6002 can be opened from the main body 6004 by inserting a key into the keyhole 6005 on the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise, using this hinge as the center of rotation.

The upper half of the front door 6002 is provided with a game panel 6006, and the lower half of the front door 6002 has a protrusion that protrudes forward from the game panel 6006. This protrusion has a medal insertion slot 6008, bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, center stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, etc., arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006. In addition, the lower half of the front door 6002 is provided with a savings settlement button 6022 and a decorative panel 6024, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative panel 6024. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, center stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, savings settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310, which controls the progress of the game. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed in approximately the center of the gaming panel 6006, and through this display window it is possible to see three variable rotors (not shown) and a performance device (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000. The three variable rotors (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body-side mounting member (not shown) located inside the main body portion 6004. In contrast, the performance device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side mounting member (not shown) located on the back side of the front door 6002.

These variable rotors have translucent pattern bands affixed to their cylindrical frames, on which multiple types of symbols (e.g., bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as symbol information. These cylindrical variable rotors are called reels or drums in gaming machines such as slot machines, and each variable rotor is connected to the output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown). These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and as the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, multiple types of symbols appear to change continuously from top to bottom through the display window mentioned above.

The performance device comprises multiple movable performance bodies (not shown), the performance display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards (not shown) on which multiple LEDs are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. Based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1500 controls the progress of the performance by performing various controls such as operating the multiple movable performance bodies, drawing control of the performance display device 1600, and lighting control of the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards. The peripheral control unit 1500 comprises the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

When a predetermined number of medals are inserted as gaming media into the medal slot 6008, the main control board 1310 begins the display of varying symbol information based on the operation of the start lever 6014, and stops the display of varying symbol information based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, center stop button 6018, or right stop button 6020, or the passage of a predetermined amount of time. Then, when the symbol information assumes a predetermined specific display mode, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-awarding state (jackpot gaming state) and pays out a large amount of medals as gaming media into the tray 6026.

In the hybrid gaming machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes the ball slot 6008', and the main control board 1310 starts the display of varying symbol information based on the operation of the start lever 6014 after a predetermined number of symbol balls are inserted into the ball slot 6008' as gaming media, and stops the display of varying symbol information based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, center stop button 6018, or right stop button 6020 or the passage of a predetermined period of time. Then, when the symbol information reaches a predetermined specific display mode, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-awarding state (jackpot gaming state) and pays out a large amount of symbol balls as gaming media into the tray 6026.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 2000 Front unit 2003 Regular winning port (benefit awarding section)
2004 Second starting point (benefit section)
2005 Large winning slot 2400 Attack unit 2500 Center role 2505 Upstream space 2510 Upper right peripheral wall 2510
2520 Guide passage group 2520a Overlapping portion 2521 First guide passage (guide passage)
2522 Second guide passage (guide passage)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine in which a game is played by a lottery that can be executed by hitting a gaming ball,
a first game area into which game balls are shot; and a second game area into which game balls are shot, the second game area being provided on the opposite side of the first game area in the left-right direction when the game panel is viewed from the front;
a front component attached from the front to the front surface of the gaming panel on which the first gaming area and the second gaming area are formed; and a display device capable of displaying a display effect according to the result of the lottery;
Equipped with
The front component has a partition wall portion that prevents the entry of game balls and a warp inlet that can receive game balls that flow down on the left side when viewed from the front, and a distribution portion that can roll game balls in front of the display device and at a position behind the front surface of the game panel on the lower side when viewed from the front,
The distribution section can only receive game balls that have been shot into the second game area, and a fall prevention wall that prevents game balls from falling and a fall-allowing section that does not have the fall prevention wall and allows game balls to fall are provided on the front side of the distribution section so that the game balls received by the distribution section can be received in either a specific receiving port or a losing port provided on the player side,
When a game ball shot into the second game area is received by the distribution unit, the received game ball is made to pass through a special cylindrical passage provided upstream of the distribution unit, and the game ball passing through the special cylindrical passage is made visible from the front,
The reception of the game ball into the specific receiving port can give the player an advantageous state.
A gaming machine characterized by: